YDS0081J1 CAMIO 7 Reference Manual PDF

CAMIO 7 Reference Manual
User Guide
YDS0081_J1
Contents
Table of Contents
1 Welcome to CAMIO
28
1 Welcome
...................................................................................................................................
to CAMIO
28
2 Acknowledgements
...................................................................................................................................
28
3 New Features
...................................................................................................................................
Overview
29
2 Important Information
32
1 Important
...................................................................................................................................
Information
32
2 Leaving
...................................................................................................................................
the CMM Idle
32
3 The CAMIO
...................................................................................................................................
Software Suite
32
4 Setting
...................................................................................................................................
Up CAMIO
32
5 Selecting
...................................................................................................................................
the Language for CAMIO
33
6 Contacting
...................................................................................................................................
Nikon Metrology
34
3 Useful Background Information
35
1 Useful...................................................................................................................................
Background Information
35
2 Using...................................................................................................................................
the Help
35
3 File Types
...................................................................................................................................
36
4 Co-ordinate
...................................................................................................................................
Systems
38
5 Manual,
...................................................................................................................................
Program and Automatic Modes
40
6 Teach,
...................................................................................................................................
Command and Insert Modes
41
7 Information
...................................................................................................................................
and Error Messages
41
8 Machine,
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection and Reporting Databases
42
4 CAMIO Structure
43
1 CAMIO
...................................................................................................................................
Structure
43
2 Customising
...................................................................................................................................
CAMIO
44
Customising ..........................................................................................................................................................
CAMIO
44
Setting Up the..........................................................................................................................................................
CAMIO Layout
44
Customising the
..........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbars
45
5 Part Program Window
45
6 CAMIO Windows
46
1 CAMIO
...................................................................................................................................
Windows
46
2 Model...................................................................................................................................
Window
49
Model Window
.......................................................................................................................................................... 49
Graphical Reporting
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the Model Window
50
Profile Report..........................................................................................................................................................
from the Model Window
52
Printing Graphical
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reports
53
Model Window..........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbar Buttons
54
Moving the Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the Model Window
55
Using the Axis..........................................................................................................................................................
Types in the Model Window
56

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited
CAMIO7 Reference Manual

.......................................................................................................................................................... 56
Machine Simulation
Picking - Display
..........................................................................................................................................................
Settings Dialog Box
58
Measure Display
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Display Settings Dialog Box
60
Simulation - Display
..........................................................................................................................................................
Settings Dialog Box
63
Simulation Grid
..........................................................................................................................................................
65
Feature Display
..........................................................................................................................................................
66
View - Display..........................................................................................................................................................
Settings Dialog Box
68
Feature Deviations
..........................................................................................................................................................
69
Manual Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
72
CAD Colours Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
73
Model Explorer
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
73
3 Explorer
...................................................................................................................................
Window
75
4 Sensors
...................................................................................................................................
Window
75
5 Grid Window
...................................................................................................................................
76
Grid Window .......................................................................................................................................................... 76

Customise Grid
..........................................................................................................................................................
View Dialog Box
77
Using the Grid..........................................................................................................................................................
Window
78
Direction Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
81
Direction Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box for Line, Edge Point and Slot Features
81
6 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Window
82
7 Context
...................................................................................................................................
Window
83
8 Constant
...................................................................................................................................
Reporting Window
83
9 Collisions
...................................................................................................................................
Window
85
Collisions Window
.......................................................................................................................................................... 85
Program Call Route
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
86
10 DRO ...................................................................................................................................
Window
86
11 Planning
...................................................................................................................................
Window
88
Planning Window
.......................................................................................................................................................... 88
Plan Filter Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
89
Properties Window
.......................................................................................................................................................... 90
Properties .........................................................................................................................................................
Window
90
Using the Properties
.........................................................................................................................................................
Window
91
12 Teach...................................................................................................................................
Path View
94
Teach Path View

.......................................................................................................................................................... 94
Teach Path View
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Pop-up Menu
95
Normalise to Feature
.......................................................................................................................................................... 97
Group Dialog Box
.......................................................................................................................................................... 98
13 Status...................................................................................................................................
Bar
99
Status Bar
.......................................................................................................................................................... 99
Settings Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
99
System Settings
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
101
Power User Settings
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
103
14 Menus
...................................................................................................................................
and Toolbars
104
Menus and Toolbars

.......................................................................................................................................................... 104
File Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 105
File Menu......................................................................................................................................................... 105
Close Inspection
......................................................................................................................................................... 106
Restore Autosaved
.........................................................................................................................................................
Program Dialog Box
108
Save Template
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
108
15 Quick
...................................................................................................................................
Access Toolbar
110
16 Quick
...................................................................................................................................
Access Menu
110
Quick Access
..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu
110
Quick Access
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Toolbars
111
Contents
Quick
Quick
Quick
Quick
Quick
..........................................................................................................................................................
112
Access
- Commands
Access
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Quick Access
112
Access..........................................................................................................................................................
- Keyboard
113
Access
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Menus
114
Access
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Options
115
17 View...................................................................................................................................
Menu
116
18 CAMIO
...................................................................................................................................
Options Menu
117
CAMIO Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu
117
Configuration..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
118
Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
118
Calibration
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Configuration Dialog Box
119
Miscellaneous
.........................................................................................................................................................
120
Reporting.........................................................................................................................................................
Key Questions - Configuration Dialog Box
125
Reporting Key Questions
.........................................................................................................................................
125
Add/Edit Key Question
.........................................................................................................................................
Set Dialog Box
126
Add/Edit Key Question
.........................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
127
Conformance
.........................................................................................................................................................
128
Locate - Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
130
Editor - Configuration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
131
Production
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mode - Configuration Dialog Box
132
Teach Properties
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
134
19 Help...................................................................................................................................
Menu
135
20 Main...................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
135
Main Toolbar.......................................................................................................................................................... 135

Machine Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 136
Machine Menu
......................................................................................................................................................... 136
Probe Calibration
......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Tool Changer
......................................................................................................................................................... 137
Tool Changer ......................................................................................................................................... 137
Tool Change Dialog
.........................................................................................................................................
Box
138
Tool Change Dialog
...................................................................................................................................
Box
138
Set Tool in Use...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
138
Thermal Compensation
......................................................................................................................................................... 139
CMM Menu
......................................................................................................................................................... 139
21 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Toolbar
140
22 Simulation
...................................................................................................................................
Rate Menu
141
7 CAMIO Event Viewer
142
1 CAMIO
...................................................................................................................................
Event Viewer
142
2 Filtering
...................................................................................................................................
Events by Priority
144
Filtering Events
..........................................................................................................................................................
by Priority
144
Event Priorities
.......................................................................................................................................................... 144
8 Filtering Events by Date
146
9 Filtering Events by Source
147
10 Filtering Events by Message
147
11 Sorting Events by Date
148
12 Clearing Out (Deleting) the Events Log
149
5
13 Exporting the Events Log
149
14 The CMM Handbox
149
1 The ...................................................................................................................................
CMM Handbox
149
2 Compatibility
...................................................................................................................................
150
3 Handbox
...................................................................................................................................
Operation
152
Handbox Operation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 152
The CMM Handbox
..........................................................................................................................................................
Buttons
153
The CMM Handbox
..........................................................................................................................................................
Keypad Functions
154
Operator Position
..........................................................................................................................................................
for the CMM Handbox
158
The Joystick..........................................................................................................................................................
Rotary Mode
160
15 Quick Reference - with CAMIO
161
16 Part Programming
163
1 Part ...................................................................................................................................
Programming
163
2 Non-programmed
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection
163
3 Touch
...................................................................................................................................
and Go
163
4 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
a Part Program
164
Creating a Part
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
164
New Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Basic) Dialog Box
164
New Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Advanced) Dialog Box
165
5 Selecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Part Program
166
Selecting a Part
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
166
Open Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Basic) Dialog Box
166
Open Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Advanced) Dialog Box
168
Program Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Program Options
168
Program Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Model Options
171
Program Inspection
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Model Options
171
CAD Model
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
172
Program Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Reporting Options
174
Program Inspection
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Reporting Options
174
Report Dialog
.........................................................................................................................................................
Box
175
Report Dialog Box
......................................................................................................................................... 175
Edit Key Value Dialog
.........................................................................................................................................
Box
176
6 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Reporting Keys
176
7 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - External Paths
177
8 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Repeat Options
178
Program Inspection
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Repeat Options
178
Repeat Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
179
9 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Scan Options
180
10 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Scripting Options
181
11 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Offline Options
183
12 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Inspection - Results Files
183
17 Off-line Programming
185
18 Collision Detection
186
1 Collision
...................................................................................................................................
Detection
186
Contents
...................................................................................................................................
2 Handbox
(Virtual Handbox, Joystick Box)
7
189
19 Axis Violation
190
20 Editing a Part Program
191
1 Editing
...................................................................................................................................
a Part Program
191
2 The ...................................................................................................................................
Part Program Window Pop-up Menus
192
3 Part ...................................................................................................................................
Program Window Pop-up Menu Options
193
4 Recall
...................................................................................................................................
Measuring Parameters Dialog Box
195
5 The ...................................................................................................................................
DMIS Program Editor
197
The DMIS Program

..........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
197
Program Lines,
..........................................................................................................................................................
Edit Lines and Breakpoints in the DMIS Program
198
Editing a DMIS
..........................................................................................................................................................
Program
198
Selecting within
..........................................................................................................................................................
the Part Program Window
199
Navigate Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
199
Insert Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
201
Edit Command
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
201
Keyboard Operations
..........................................................................................................................................................
in the Part Program Window
202
6 The ...................................................................................................................................
Block View Editor
203
7 Insert
...................................................................................................................................
Snippet
205
8 Surround
...................................................................................................................................
with Snippet
209
21 Using Buffer Points
211
22 Adding a Prompt to a Part Program
212
23 Creating and Calling Macros
212
24 Mirroring a Part Program
213
1 Mirroring
...................................................................................................................................
a Part Program
213
2 Defining
...................................................................................................................................
the Mirror Process - the Mirror Wizard
214
Defining the ..........................................................................................................................................................

Mirror Process - the Mirror Wizard
214
Mirror Wizard..........................................................................................................................................................
Page 1 - Input File
214
Mirror Wizard..........................................................................................................................................................
Page 2 - Output File
215
Mirror Wizard..........................................................................................................................................................
Page 3 - Plane
215
Mirror Wizard..........................................................................................................................................................
Page 4 - Labels
216
Mirror Wizard..........................................................................................................................................................
Page 5 - Machine
217
Running the ..........................................................................................................................................................
Mirror Process
218
Running the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Mirror Process
218
Mirror Progress
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
218
25 Override Log On Dialog Box
220
26 Override Log Off Dialog Box
221
27 User Privileges
222
28 Opening and Saving CAD Files
224
1 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
and Saving CAD Files
224
2 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a CAD Model File as a Device
225

...................................................................................................................................
3 InterOp
Warning and Error Messages
226
4 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a CATIA v4 File
227
Opening a CATIA
..........................................................................................................................................................
v4 File
227
CATIA v4 - CAD
..........................................................................................................................................................
Model Options Dialog Box
228
CATIA v4 Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options - Geometry
230
5 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a CATIA v5 File
231
Opening a CATIA
..........................................................................................................................................................
v5 File
231
CATIA v5 - CAD
..........................................................................................................................................................
Model Options Dialog Box
231
6 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
an IGES File
234
Opening an IGES
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
234
IGES - CAD Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
234
IGES Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- IGES Header Info
236
IGES Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Curve Trimming
238
IGES Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Masking - Curves
239
IGES Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Masking - Surfaces
240
7 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a Parasolid File
241
Opening a Parasolid
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
241
PARASOLID -..........................................................................................................................................................
CAD Model Options Dialog Box
242
8 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a Pro/E File
244
Opening a Pro/E
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
244
Pro/E - CAD Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
244
9 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a VDA File
246
Opening a VDA
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
246
VDA - CAD Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
246
VDA Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- VDA Header Info
248
10 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a STEP File
249
Opening a STEP
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
249
STEP - CAD Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
249
STEP Model Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- STEP Header Info
252
11 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a UG File
253
Opening a UG..........................................................................................................................................................
File
253
UG - CAD Model
..........................................................................................................................................................
Options Dialog Box
254
12 Opening
...................................................................................................................................
a SolidWorks File
256
Opening a SolidWorks
..........................................................................................................................................................
File
256
SolidWorks -..........................................................................................................................................................
256
29 Saving CAD Files - Common Options
257
30 Saving a HOOPS Stream File
258
31 Saving an ACIS File
259
32 Saving a CATIA v4 File
260
33 Saving a CATIA v5 File
262
34 Saving an IGES File
263
1 Saving
...................................................................................................................................
an IGES File
263
2 IGES...................................................................................................................................
Model Options - Geometry (Saving an IGES File)
265
3 IGES...................................................................................................................................
Model Options - IGES Header Info (Saving an IGES File)
266
Contents
35 Saving a Parasolid File
266
36 Saving a VDA File
268
37 Saving a STEP File
270
1 Saving
...................................................................................................................................
a STEP File
270
2 STEP
...................................................................................................................................
Model Options - STEP Header Info (Saving a STEP File)
271
38 Inspecting Features
272
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
Features
272
2 Using
...................................................................................................................................
Canned Cycles when Measuring Features
275
3 Setting
...................................................................................................................................
Up the Inspection Path
275
4 Using
...................................................................................................................................
the Feature Wizard to Inspect Datum Features
277
5 Inspect
...................................................................................................................................
Menu
279
Inspect Menu
.......................................................................................................................................................... 279
Inspect
.......................................................................................................................................................... 279
Features
.......................................................................................................................................................... 280
Touch Tools.......................................................................................................................................................... 280
39 Inspecting Features - Probe Check
281
40 Hole Search (Search for Feature)
281
41 Inspecting a Point
282
42 Points in Box Dialog Box
283
43 Inspecting a 3D Curve
284
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a 3D Curve
284
2 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
an Impeller
285
3 3D Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Spacing Dialog Box
288
4 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Circle
290
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Circle
290
Picking a Circle
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using a Centre Point and Direction
291
Add Touches..........................................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs
292
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting Circles and Arcs
294
Touch Option..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting Circles and Arcs
294
Circles on Plane
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
295
44 Inspecting an Arc
296
45 Inspecting a Cylinder
298
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Cylinder
298
2 Hints...................................................................................................................................
for Measuring a Cylinder
300
3 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Touches Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
300
4 Scan...................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
302
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................

- Inspecting a Cylinder
302
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
303

10

305
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
(Helix) - Inspecting a Cylinder
308
Touch Option..........................................................................................................................................................
310
Touch Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
310
Touch Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
311
Touch Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
313
5 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Plane
314
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Plane
314
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting a Plane
316
Scan Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting a Plane
316
Multi Pick.........................................................................................................................................................
Line Dialog Box
317
Scan Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Centre Radius Circle) - Inspecting a Plane
319
Scan Option
.........................................................................................................................................................
(Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane
321
6 Touch
...................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Plane
322
46 Inspecting a Line
324
47 Inspecting a Cone
326
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Cone
326
2 Scan...................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Cone
328
3 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
an Edge
330
Inspecting an..........................................................................................................................................................
Edge
330
Inspecting an..........................................................................................................................................................
Edge - Worked Example
332
4 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Round Slot
334
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Round Slot
334
Round Slot Multi-point
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pick
336
Add Touches..........................................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Round Slot
336
Touch Option..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting a Round Slot
338
5 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Square Slot
338
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Square Slot
338
Square Slot Multi-point
..........................................................................................................................................................
Pick
340
Add Touches..........................................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Square Slot
341
Touch Option..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting a Square Slot
342
6 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Curve
343
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Curve
343
Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................
- Inspecting a Curve
344
48 Inspecting a Surface
345
49 Inspecting a Sphere
346
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Sphere
346
2 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Touches Option - Inspecting a Sphere
348
3 Touch
...................................................................................................................................
Option - Inspecting a Sphere
349
50 Measuring a Point Feature with Zero Points
350
51 Inspecting a Surface with a Laser Scanner
350
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Surface with a Laser Scanner
350
2 Multi...................................................................................................................................
Pick Area Dialog Box
352
3 Multi...................................................................................................................................
Pick Curve Dialog Box
354
Contents
11
52 Inspecting a Gap and Flush Feature
356
53 Inspecting a Hexagonal Slot
357
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Hexagonal Slot
357
2 Hexagonal
...................................................................................................................................
Slot Multi-point Pick
359
54 Inspecting a Key Slot
359
55 Inspecting a Stud
361
1 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Stud
361
2 Picking
...................................................................................................................................
a Stud
362
3 Inspecting
...................................................................................................................................
a Christmas Tree
363
Inspecting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Christmas Tree
363
Picking a Christmas
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tree
364
56 Inspecting a Welded Nut
365
57 Select Geometry Dialog Box
366
58 Sensor Options - Inspecting a Feature
367
1 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Options - Inspecting a Feature
367
2 Automatic
...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Selection Dialog Box
368
59 Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature
370
60 Add Scans Option - Inspecting Features
371
61 Touch Options - Inspecting a Feature
372
62 Circles Measurement Dialog Box
373
63 Lines Measurement Dialog Box
376
64 Touch Measurement Dialog Box
377
65 Offset Plane Edge Dialog Box
377
66 Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces
378
67 Measure Feature (MEAS/feature,F( )

Command) Dialog Box
379
1 Measure
...................................................................................................................................
Feature (MEAS/feature,F( ) Command) Dialog Box
379
2 Measure
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
380
Measure Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
380
Taking Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Circle
382
Taking Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Cylinder
382
Taking Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Cone
382
Taking Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure an Arc
382
Taking Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Sphere
383
12

Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
Taking
..........................................................................................................................................................
383
Points
to Measure a Plane
Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Line
383
Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Point
384
Points..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Round Slot
384
Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Square Slot
384
Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure an Open Slot
384
Points
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure Parallel Planes
385
Points..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure a Surface (GSURF)
385
Points..........................................................................................................................................................
to Measure an Edge Point
385
3 Surface
...................................................................................................................................
Measurement
386
Surface Measurement
.......................................................................................................................................................... 386
Surface Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Adding Points to the Model
387
Surface Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Grid Options
388
Surface Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Curve Options
390
4 Relative
...................................................................................................................................
Measurement Dialog Box
393
Relative Measurement
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
393
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Point)
393
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Circle, Slot, Cylinder)
394
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Plane, Line)
396
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Arc, Cone, Sphere, Surface, Cylinder)
397
..........................................................................................................................................................
(Edge)
398
Search for feature
.......................................................................................................................................................... 399
5 Set Nominal
...................................................................................................................................
Feature
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
402
Nominal ..........................................................................................................................................................
Feature
402
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Point
402
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Circle
403
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Arc
404
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Line
404
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Edge
405
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Round Slot
405
Nominal Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Square Slot
406
Nominal ..........................................................................................................................................................
Feature - Curve
407
68 Save Feature Dialog Box
407
69 Recall Feature Dialog Box
409
70 Delete Feature Dialog Box
410
71 End of Measurement Dialog Box
411
72 Feature Tolerancing
411
1 Feature
...................................................................................................................................
Tolerancing
411
2 Tolerance
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
412
Tolerance Commands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 412
Select Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Tolerance Wizard
413
Select Program
..........................................................................................................................................................
Mode - Tolerance Wizard
414
Program List..........................................................................................................................................................
- Tolerance Wizard
415
Angle Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
416
Angle Between
..........................................................................................................................................................
Tolerance Dialog Box
416
Angle with Respect
..........................................................................................................................................................
to Tolerance Dialog Box
418
Distance Between
..........................................................................................................................................................
419
Distance with..........................................................................................................................................................
Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box
421
Width Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
422
Bilateral Position
..........................................................................................................................................................
424
Contents
13
..........................................................................................................................................................
424
Angularity Tolerance
Dialog Box
Parallelism Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
426
Perpendicularity
..........................................................................................................................................................
427
Circle Runout..........................................................................................................................................................
429
Total Runout..........................................................................................................................................................
430
Straightness ..........................................................................................................................................................
432
Flatness Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
433
Circularity Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
434
Cylindricity Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
435
Diameter Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
435
Radius Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
436
True Position..........................................................................................................................................................
437
Composite Position
..........................................................................................................................................................
439
Concentricity..........................................................................................................................................................
440
Concentricity..........................................................................................................................................................
Tolerance for ISO Dialog Box
441
Symmetry Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
443
Surface Profile
..........................................................................................................................................................
444
Profile Line Tolerance
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
445
Point Profile ..........................................................................................................................................................
446
Composite Surface
..........................................................................................................................................................
Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
447
Composite Line
..........................................................................................................................................................
Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
448
73 Outputting Data
449
1 Outputting
...................................................................................................................................
Data
449
2 Outputting
...................................................................................................................................
DMIS Data
450
3 Outputting
...................................................................................................................................
Vendor Format (VFORM) Data
451
4 Outputting
...................................................................................................................................
Data for Import into Another Application
452
Outputting Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
for Import into Another Application
452
Outputting a ..........................................................................................................................................................
Datum for Importing into Focus Inspection
452
Writing Formatted
..........................................................................................................................................................
ASCII Text to a File
455
74 Outputting CSV Format Data
459
75 Outputting XML Data
459
76 Outputting a .dta File
461
77 Outputting Q-DAS Data
461
78 Outputting QIS Data
462
79 Outputting Buffer Points
462
80 Printing Formatted Output as the Program

Runs
462
81 Evaluating Features That Have a

Simultaneous Requirement
463
82 Output Commands
464
1 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
464
2 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Nominal/Actual Feature Dialog Box
465
14

...................................................................................................................................
3 Output
Distance between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
468
4 Output Distance with Respect to Nominal/Actual Features Dialog

Box ...................................................................................................................................
469
5 Distance
...................................................................................................................................
Between Dialog Box
471
6 Angle
...................................................................................................................................
Between Dialog Box
472
7 Evaluate
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
473
8 Evaluate
...................................................................................................................................
Distance between Features Dialog Box
475
9 Evaluate
...................................................................................................................................
Angle between Features Dialog Box
476
10 Format
...................................................................................................................................
Output Dialog Box
478
Format Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
478
Vendor Output
..........................................................................................................................................................
Format Dialog Box
480
11 Output
...................................................................................................................................
QIS Data Dialog Box
481
12 Quality
...................................................................................................................................
Information Dialog Box
482
Quality Information
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
482
QIS Statement
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
482
DME Software
..........................................................................................................................................................
Version Dialog Box
483
13 QIS ...................................................................................................................................
Information Dialog Box
484
14 File ...................................................................................................................................
Label Dialog Box
485
15 Simultaneous
...................................................................................................................................
Requirement Dialog Box
486
16 End ...................................................................................................................................
of Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box
486
17 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Angle Between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
487
18 Bound
...................................................................................................................................
Feature/Tolerance Dialog Box
489
490
83 Reporting
1 Reporting
...................................................................................................................................
490
2 Saving
...................................................................................................................................
Your Inspection Data for Reporting
491
3 Report
...................................................................................................................................
Types
491
4 View...................................................................................................................................
Options - Constant Reporting Window
492
5 Report
...................................................................................................................................
Options - Constant Reporting Window
492
Report Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Constant Reporting Window
492
Constant Report
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
493
Report Labels
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
495
Report Labels
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
495
Default Labels
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
497
Single Piece
.........................................................................................................................................................
Label - Create Label Dialog Box
498
Single Piece
.........................................................................................................................................................
Style Label - Create Label Dialog Box
499
6 Tolerance
...................................................................................................................................
Colours - Report Options Dialog Box
501
7 Car Body
...................................................................................................................................
Options - Report Options Dialog Box
503
8 Header
...................................................................................................................................
Layout - Header Information Dialog Box
504
Header Layout
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Header Information Dialog Box
504
Enter User Defined
..........................................................................................................................................................
Header Dialog Box
506
QIS Header - ..........................................................................................................................................................
Header Information Dialog Box
507
QIS Header
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Header Information Dialog Box
507
Edit Selected
.........................................................................................................................................................
Label Dialog Box
508
Adding QIS
.........................................................................................................................................................
Information to a Report Header
509
84 Print and Page Options - Constant Reporting

Window
509
Contents
15
85 Constant Reporting - Troubleshooting
510
86 Introduction to Temperature Compensation
511
1 Introduction
...................................................................................................................................
to Temperature Compensation
511
2 Configuring
...................................................................................................................................
CAMIO for Temperature Compensation
514
Configuring ..........................................................................................................................................................
CAMIO for Temperature Compensation
514
Step 1 - Definition
..........................................................................................................................................................
Files for Temperature Compensation
514
Step 2 - Configuring
..........................................................................................................................................................
the CMM Driver for Temperature Compensation
517
Step 3 - Enabling
..........................................................................................................................................................
Temperature Compensation in CAMIO
519
Step 4 - Setting
..........................................................................................................................................................
the Probe Assembly Expansion Value
521
Step 5 - Creating
..........................................................................................................................................................
a Local Thermal Datum
521
87 Calculating Temperature Compensation
522
88 Feature (Declare) Commands
523
1 Feature
...................................................................................................................................
(Declare) Commands
523
2 Point...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
523
3 Circle
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
525
4 Arc Feature
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
526
5 Cylinder
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
527
6 Plane
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
529
7 Line...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
530
8 Cone...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
531
9 Edge...................................................................................................................................
Point Feature Dialog Box
533
10 Slot ...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
534
11 Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
535
12 Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)
537
13 Surface
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
538
14 Surface
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)
539
15 Sphere
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
541
16 Pattern
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
542
17 Parallel
...................................................................................................................................
Planes Feature Dialog Box
543
18 Compound
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
545
19 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
546
20 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Surface Feature Dialog Box
547
21 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Feature Dialog Box
548
22 Gap ...................................................................................................................................
& Flush Feature Dialog Box
548
23 Hexagonal
...................................................................................................................................
Slot Dialog Box
550
24 Key ...................................................................................................................................
Slot Dialog Box
551
25 Stud...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
552
26 Christmas
...................................................................................................................................
Tree Dialog Box
554
27 Welded
...................................................................................................................................
Nut Dialog Box
555
89 Constructing Features
1 Constructing
...................................................................................................................................
Features
556
556
16

...................................................................................................................................
2 Constructing
Features from Buffer Points
557
3 Construction
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
558
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Commands
558
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
559
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Circle
561
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
an Arc
563
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Cylinder
564
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Plane
564
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Line
566
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Cone
567
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
an Edge
568
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Pattern
569
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Compound Feature
569
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
Parallel Planes
570
Construct Parallel
..........................................................................................................................................................
Plane for Point-reducible Feature
571
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Round Slot
572
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Square Slot
573
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Curve
574
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Point
575
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Sphere
576
Constructing..........................................................................................................................................................
a Surface
577
4 Construction
...................................................................................................................................
Types
578
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Types
578
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Best Fit, Offset, Centre of Gravity
578
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Projections, Intersections, Etc.
580
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Cone
580
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Sphere
581
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Extract Feature
582
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Move Point
584
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Vertex
585
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Hi-Lo Point (Extreme)
586
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Copy
587
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Retrieve
588
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)
589
Construction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)
589
Example Constructed
.........................................................................................................................................................
GCURVE Using Nearest Points on Geometry
590
Construction..........................................................................................................................................................
Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF)
591
Construction
.........................................................................................................................................................
Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF)
591
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device
Manually ......................................................................................................................................................... 591
Automatically
......................................................................................................................................................... 592
5 Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF and

a Plane
...................................................................................................................................
593
6 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Boxes
595
7 Point...................................................................................................................................
Buffer Dialog Box
597
8 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Best Fit Dialog Box
597
9 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
599
10 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Circle from Cone Dialog Box
600
11 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Build Compound Dialog Box
601
12 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Circle from Sphere Dialog Box
602
13 Extract
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
603
14 Move...................................................................................................................................
Point Dialog Box
603
Contents
17
...................................................................................................................................
15 Construct
Vertex Point Dialog Box
605
16 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Hi-Lo Point Dialog Box
605
17 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Point with COG Dialog Box
607
18 Retrieve
...................................................................................................................................
Feature Type Dialog Boxes
608
19 Compare
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Feature to CAD Dialog Box
610
20 Compare
...................................................................................................................................
Surface Feature to CAD Dialog Box
611
21 Compare
...................................................................................................................................
Point Feature to CAD Dialog Box
612
22 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Nearest Points Dialog Box
613
23 Construct
...................................................................................................................................
Nearest Point Dialog Box
614
90 Output
615
91 Datums and Alignments
615
1 Datums
...................................................................................................................................
and Alignments
615
2 Alignment
...................................................................................................................................
616
3 Datum
...................................................................................................................................
Features
616
Datum Features
.......................................................................................................................................................... 616
Datum Features
..........................................................................................................................................................
Teach Path View
616
92 Alignment Menu - Best Fit
618
93 Rotate
618
94 Translate
619
95 Model
619
96 Datum
619
97 Aligning the Part
620
1 Aligning
...................................................................................................................................
the Part
620
2 Complex
...................................................................................................................................
Alignments Using LOCATE, MATDEF and GEOM
621
Complex Alignments
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using LOCATE, MATDEF and GEOM
621
6 Point Alignment
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using LOCATE
621
7+ Point Alignment
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using LOCATE
623
Selection of Features
..........................................................................................................................................................
and Constraints for RPS and Best-Fit Alignments
625
Best Fitting Using
..........................................................................................................................................................
FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM
627
Planar Best Fitting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 627
Holding Fixture
..........................................................................................................................................................
Emulation and Functional Matings
628
Holding Fixture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Emulation and Functional Matings
628
Best Fitting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Using Point Features Mating to Geometry
629
RPS
......................................................................................................................................................... 629
Running an
.........................................................................................................................................................
Iterated Alignment
630
Holding Fixture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders
631
Aligning a.........................................................................................................................................................
Fixture with Three Spheres
632
Aligning the
.........................................................................................................................................................
Part - Automatic Alignment Sample Code
632
Six Point Locate
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Sample Code
633
Best Fitting
.........................................................................................................................................................
Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM - Sample Code
634
Planar Best
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fitting - Sample Code
636
RPS Sheet
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Sample
638
Holding Fixture
.........................................................................................................................................................
Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders - Sample Code
638
18

639
Aligning a.........................................................................................................................................................
Fixture with Three Spheres - Sample Code
98 Saving Datums to a File
640
99 Datum Wizard Dialog Box
641
1 Datum
...................................................................................................................................
Wizard Dialog Box
641
2 Select
...................................................................................................................................
Feature for Alignment Dialog Box
642
100 Delete Datum Dialog Box
643
101 Save Datum Dialog Box
645
102 Recall Datum Dialog Box
646
103 Define Functional Mating Dialog Box
647
104 Iterate Dialog Box
649
105 Datum and Constraints - Reference Point

Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
652
106 Iterate - Reference Point Alignment (RPS)

Dialog Box
653
107 Create New Label - Reference Point

Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
655
108 RPS - Datum and Constraints - Sample Code
657
109 RPS - Iterate - Sample Code
657
110 Create Datum Dialog Box
658
111 Assign Datum Dialog Box
659
112 Locate Datum Dialog Box
659
113 Locate Datum Dialog Box (with Location

Method)
661
114 Machine Co-ordinates Dialog Box
662
115 Rotate by Angle Dialog Box
663
116 Rotate to Feature Dialog Box
664
117 Translate to Datum Feature Dialog Box
665
118 Translate to Feature Dialog Box
665
Contents
19
119 Translate by Probe Radius Dialog Box
666
120 Translate by Value Dialog Box
667
121 Translate Datum Dialog Box
668
122 Associate Datum with CAD WCS Dialog Box
669
123 Set CAD Transform Dialog Box
670
124 Equate Datums Dialog Box
671
125 Six Point Locate Dialog Box
672
126 Sensors
675
1 Sensors
...................................................................................................................................
675
2 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Management
675
Sensor Management
.......................................................................................................................................................... 675
Using the Sensors
..........................................................................................................................................................
Window
676
Using the.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensors Window
676
Menu Options
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Sensor Collections in the Sensors Window
679
Calibrated.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensors Dialog Box
681
Define Sensors
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box - Sensors Window
682
Menu Options
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Probes in the Sensors Window
683
Create Probe
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Geometry Dialog Box
685
Create Probe
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Probe Wizard Dialog Box
686
Create Probe
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Laser Dialog Box
687
Probe Edit.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
687
Menu Options
.........................................................................................................................................................
for Calibration Spheres in the Sensors Window
688
New Sphere
.........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
689
The Component
.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
691
The Component.........................................................................................................................................
Editor
691
Creating a New Component
......................................................................................................................................... 692
Editing Existing Components
......................................................................................................................................... 693
3 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres
694
4 Sphere
...................................................................................................................................
Setup Dialog Box
696
5 Creating
...................................................................................................................................
a Program to Calibrate Sensors
697
6 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Selection Dialog Box
698
7 List ...................................................................................................................................
of Sensors to be Calibrated Dialog Box
699
8 The ...................................................................................................................................
Probe Wizard
701
The Probe Wizard

.......................................................................................................................................................... 701
Creating a New
..........................................................................................................................................................
Probe
702
Creating a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Probe
702
Creating a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Probe - Probe Extensions
703
Creating a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Probe - Probe Type
704
Creating a.........................................................................................................................................................
New Probe - Stylus
705
Specifying
.........................................................................................................................................................
the Stylus Type and Extension for Multiple Styli
706
9 Loading
...................................................................................................................................
a Probe Model
127 Calibrating Sensors
707
708
20
128 Calibrate the Probe Head
709
129 Selecting a Calibrated Sensor
709
130 Using an Analogue Probe
710
1 Using
...................................................................................................................................
an Analogue Probe
710
2 Analogue
...................................................................................................................................
Probe Configuration Variables
711
3 Calibrating
...................................................................................................................................
an Analogue Probe
712
4 SP25...................................................................................................................................
Calibration
712
131 Saving Calibrations to a File
712
132 Probe Commands (Machine Menu)
713
1 Probe
...................................................................................................................................
Commands (Machine Menu)
713
2 Select
...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
714
Select Sensor
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
714
Calibration Options
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
715
3 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
716
4 Save...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
717
5 Recall
...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
718
6 Calibrate
...................................................................................................................................
Head Dialog Box
720
7 New...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
722
New Sensor Dialog

..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
722
View All Sensors
..........................................................................................................................................................
(from New Sensor Dialog Box)
724
Calibrated Sensor
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Dialog Box
725
New Star Sensor
..........................................................................................................................................................
Definition Dialog Box
726
New Star .........................................................................................................................................................
Sensor Definition Dialog Box
726
New Star.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
727
Calibrate Sensor
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
728
Calibrate .........................................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
728
Using Calibrate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sensor - Hints and Tips
730
Set Sphere
.........................................................................................................................................................
Position Dialog Box
731
Calibrate All ..........................................................................................................................................................
Sensors Dialog Box
732
Calibrate .........................................................................................................................................................
All Sensors Dialog Box
732
Calibration
.........................................................................................................................................................
Sphere Options Dialog Box
733
8 View...................................................................................................................................
All Sensors (from Probe Commands)
734
9 Rack...................................................................................................................................
Set-up Dialog Box
735
10 New...................................................................................................................................
Laser Sensor Dialog Box
736
11 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Sensor Dialog Box
737
12 Probe
...................................................................................................................................
Model Manager
738
Probe Model..........................................................................................................................................................
Manager
738
Probe Properties
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
740
741
133 Properties Commands

1 Properties
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
741
2 Measurement
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
742
3 Modal
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
742
4 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Approach Dialog Box
742
Contents
21
...................................................................................................................................
5 Sensor
Retract Dialog Box
743
6 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Depth Dialog Box
744
7 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Clearance Dialog Box
745
8 Sensor
...................................................................................................................................
Search Dialog Box
746
9 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Mode Dialog Box
747
10 Units...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
748
11 Working
...................................................................................................................................
Plane Dialog Box
748
12 Measurement
...................................................................................................................................
Acceleration Dialog Box
749
13 Measurement
...................................................................................................................................
Velocity Dialog Box
750
14 Positional
...................................................................................................................................
752
15 Positional
...................................................................................................................................
Velocity Dialog Box
753
16 Temperature
...................................................................................................................................
Compensation Dialog Box
754
17 Probe
...................................................................................................................................
Compensation Dialog Box
755
18 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Algorithm Dialog Box
756
19 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Algorithm - Curve
760
20 Fine...................................................................................................................................
Positioning Dialog Box
762
21 Output
...................................................................................................................................
Text Dialog Box
763
22 Decimal
...................................................................................................................................
Places Dialog Box
764
134 Move Commands
765
1 Move...................................................................................................................................
Commands
765
2 Fly Dialog
...................................................................................................................................
Box
765
3 Absolute
...................................................................................................................................
Move Dialog Box
766
4 Home
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
767
5 Increment
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
768
6 Point...................................................................................................................................
Measurement Dialog Box
769
7 From...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
771
8 Surface
...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
772
9 Axis...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
773
10 Feature
...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
775
11 Probe
...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
776
12 Free...................................................................................................................................
Position Dialog Box
778
13 Move...................................................................................................................................
Offset Dialog Box
779
135 Scanning
780
1 Scanning
...................................................................................................................................
780
2 Scan...................................................................................................................................
Menu
781
Scan Menu .......................................................................................................................................................... 781

Scan Tools .......................................................................................................................................................... 782
Output
.......................................................................................................................................................... 783
136 Filtering Scan Data
783
137 Unknown Scanning
784
22

...................................................................................................................................
1 Unknown
Scanning
784
2 Unknown
...................................................................................................................................
Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS
784
3 Unknown
...................................................................................................................................
Scanning Using PATH/UNKNOWN and PAMEAS
785
4 Known
...................................................................................................................................
Path Scanning
786
Known Path Scanning

.......................................................................................................................................................... 786
Known Path Scanning
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS
786
Known Path Scanning
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS - Sample Code
787
Known Path Scanning
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using PATH and PAMEAS
789
Known Path Scanning
..........................................................................................................................................................
Using PATH and PAMEAS - Sample Code
789
5 Scan...................................................................................................................................
Commands
791
Scan Commands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 791
Scan On/Off Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
791
Scan Settings..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
792
Scan Velocity..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
793
Scan Pause/Continue
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
795
Scan Plane Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
795
Known Path Scan
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
796
Scan Deflection
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
798
Scan Acceleration
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
798
Arc Path Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
800
Line Path Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
801
Helical Path Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
802
Curve Path (Point
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data) Dialog Box
804
Curve Path (Feature
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reference) Dialog Box
805
Curve Path (Geometry
..........................................................................................................................................................
Reference) Dialog Box
806
Unknown Path
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
806
Measure Path..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
807
6 Scan...................................................................................................................................
Teach Commands
809
Scan Teach Commands

.......................................................................................................................................................... 809
Scan Data File
..........................................................................................................................................................
Name Dialog Box
810
Scan Filter Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
810
811
138 Laser Scanning

1 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Scanning
811
2 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Scanner Safety
814
3 Preparing
...................................................................................................................................
the Laser Scanner for Use
814
4 Calibrating
...................................................................................................................................
the Laser Scanner
816
5 Updating
...................................................................................................................................
the Laser Scanner Calibration Map
817
6 Extracting
...................................................................................................................................
Features from a Laser Scan
818
7 Teaching
...................................................................................................................................
a Laser Scan
819
8 Object
...................................................................................................................................
Features - Teaching a Laser Scan
821
9 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
- Multiple Feature Extraction using Retrieve
822
10 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
- Profile Reporting
823
11 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature
826
12 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
2D Preview View
826
13 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Teach Dialog Box
829
14 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Tab
831
Laser Tab
Surface
Output
.......................................................................................................................................................... 831
.......................................................................................................................................................... 831
.......................................................................................................................................................... 832
Contents
...................................................................................................................................
15 Laser
Commands
23
832
Laser Commands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 832
Laser Initialisation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Commands
833
.........................................................................................................................................................
Commands
833
Laser Scanner
.........................................................................................................................................................
Profile Dialog Box
834
Laser Profile
.........................................................................................................................................................
Name Dialog Box
836
Tool Offset
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
837
Tool Offset Wizard
......................................................................................................................................... 837
Safe Position - Tool
.........................................................................................................................................
Offset Wizard
838
Velocity Compensation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
839
Activate Profile
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
841
Adjust to Light
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
842
Calibration Update
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
843
Power and Intensity
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
845
Laser Scanner
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Settings Dialog Box
846
Laser Scanner
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Settings Dialog Box
846
Qualification
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Scanner Settings Dialog Box
846
Default Orientation
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Scanner Settings Dialog Box
848
Feature Measurement
.........................................................................................................................................................
Overruns - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
849
16 Select
...................................................................................................................................
Qualification File Dialog Box
851
17 Laser
...................................................................................................................................
Operations Menu
852
Laser Operations
..........................................................................................................................................................
Menu
852
Laser Intensity
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
853
Adjust to Material
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box (Analogue Laser Scanner)
854
Adjust to Material
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box (Digital Laser Scanner)
856
Laser Power ..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
857
Tolerance for..........................................................................................................................................................
Feature Extraction Dialog Box
858
Distance Between
..........................................................................................................................................................
Stripes Dialog Box
858
Quality Filter ..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
859
Activate Calibration
..........................................................................................................................................................
Map Dialog Box
860
Minimum Signal
..........................................................................................................................................................
Strength Dialog Box
861
Laser Rack Power
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
861
Split Quality Point
..........................................................................................................................................................
Clouds Dialog Box
862
Grid Filter Dialog
..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
863
Curvature Dependent
..........................................................................................................................................................
Filter Dialog Box
864
Scatter Filter ..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
865
Smoothing Filter
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
866
Purge Filtered
..........................................................................................................................................................
Points Dialog Box
867
139 Point Cloud Menu
867
1 Point...................................................................................................................................
Cloud Menu
867
2 Display
...................................................................................................................................
868
3 Import
...................................................................................................................................
Export
868
4 Point...................................................................................................................................
Cloud Operations
869
5 Filters
...................................................................................................................................
869
6 Deleting
...................................................................................................................................
a Point Cloud from the Model Window
869
7 Load...................................................................................................................................
Point Clouds Dialog Box
871
8 Save...................................................................................................................................
Point Cloud Dialog Box
872
9 Filter...................................................................................................................................
Grid Dialog Box
873
10 Filter...................................................................................................................................
Curvature Dependent Dialog Box
874
11 Filter...................................................................................................................................
Scatter Dialog Box
875
12 Cut Point
...................................................................................................................................
Cloud Dialog Box
877
24

13 Mesh...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
878
14 Offset
...................................................................................................................................
Mesh Dialog Box
879
15 Filter...................................................................................................................................
Smooth Dialog Box
880
16 Assembly
...................................................................................................................................
Match Dialog Box
882
17 Merge
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
883
18 Subtract
...................................................................................................................................
and Blend Dialog Box
885
19 Pointcloud
...................................................................................................................................
Display Dialog Box
886
20 Display
...................................................................................................................................
Pointclouds Dialog Box
887
21 Purge
...................................................................................................................................
Points Dialog Box
888
889
140 Advanced Programming

1 Advanced
...................................................................................................................................
Programming
889
2 Advanced
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
890
Advanced Commands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 890
Advanced - Variables
.......................................................................................................................................................... 891
Loop
.......................................................................................................................................................... 892
Input / Output.......................................................................................................................................................... 892
External
.......................................................................................................................................................... 893
Macro
.......................................................................................................................................................... 893
Call Routine .......................................................................................................................................................... 893
Program
.......................................................................................................................................................... 893
Advanced - Reporting
.......................................................................................................................................................... 894
Error Recovery
.......................................................................................................................................................... 894
Declare Variable
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
894
Declare Multiple
..........................................................................................................................................................
Variables Dialog Box
896
Declare Variable
..........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
897
Assignment ..........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
899
Assignment
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard
899
Assignment
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard - Assigning a Function to a Variable
901
Assignment
.........................................................................................................................................................
Wizard - Assigning an Obtained Value to a Variable
902
3 Assign
...................................................................................................................................
Variable Dialog Box
903
4 Obtain
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
904
5 Obtain
...................................................................................................................................
Value Wizard
905
6 If Dialog
...................................................................................................................................
Box (IF Command)
906
7 If Wizard
...................................................................................................................................
907
8 System
...................................................................................................................................
Information - Watch Dialog Box
908
9 Variables
...................................................................................................................................
- Watch Dialog Box
909
10 Jump
...................................................................................................................................
to Wizard
910
11 Jump
...................................................................................................................................
to Label Dialog Box (JUMPTO Command)
911
12 Do Wizard
...................................................................................................................................
911
13 Start...................................................................................................................................
Loop Dialog Box
913
14 End ...................................................................................................................................
Loop Dialog Box
914
15 Call ...................................................................................................................................
Routine Dialog Box
915
Call Routine Dialog

..........................................................................................................................................................
Box
915
Auto Mode Warning
..........................................................................................................................................................
Disable/Enable Dialog Box
916
DME Commands
.......................................................................................................................................................... 916
Calibration Data
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
920
Set Calibration
..........................................................................................................................................................
Data Dialog Box
921
Point Compensation
..........................................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
921
Contents
25
..........................................................................................................................................................
922
Datum on Reset
Sphere
Datum Transformation
.......................................................................................................................................................... 923
Point Display..........................................................................................................................................................
Time
924
CAMIO Prompt
..........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
924
CAMIO Prompt
.........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
924
Creating a.........................................................................................................................................................
Prompt Dialog Box
926
File Menu.........................................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
926
Edit Menu.........................................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
927
View Menu
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
928
View Menu - Prompt
.........................................................................................................................................
Editor
928
Settings Dialog Box
.........................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
928
Help Menu - Prompt
..........................................................................................................................................................
Editor
929
File Toolbar -..........................................................................................................................................................
Prompt Editor
929
Tools Toolbar
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
929
Properties Tab
..........................................................................................................................................................
Page - Prompt Editor
931
Properties.........................................................................................................................................................
Tab Page - Prompt Editor
931
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Dialog Properties
932
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Edit Box Properties
932
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Button Properties
933
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Check Box Properties
933
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Drop-down List Box Properties
933
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Radio Buttons Properties
934
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Text Label Properties
934
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Picture Properties
935
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Picture Button Properties
935
Prompt Editor
.........................................................................................................................................................
- Sound Properties
935
Templates Tab
..........................................................................................................................................................
Page - Prompt Editor
936
Output Window
..........................................................................................................................................................
- Prompt Editor
936
16 Create
...................................................................................................................................
New Label Dialog Box
937
17 Value
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
939
18 Input/Output
...................................................................................................................................
Device Dialog Box
940
19 Open...................................................................................................................................
Device Dialog Box
941
20 Close
...................................................................................................................................
Device Dialog Box
942
21 Read...................................................................................................................................
from Input Device Dialog Box
943
22 Write...................................................................................................................................
to Output Device Dialog Box
944
23 Macro
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
946
24 End ...................................................................................................................................
Macro Dialog Box
947
25 Call ...................................................................................................................................
Macro Dialog Box
948
26 Error...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
949
27 Resume
...................................................................................................................................
Dialog Box
950
28 Start...................................................................................................................................
of External File Declaration Dialog Box
951
29 External
...................................................................................................................................
File Declaration Dialog Box
952
30 End ...................................................................................................................................
of External File Declaration Dialog Box
952
31 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Header Dialog Box
953
32 Subroutine
...................................................................................................................................
Header Dialog Box
953
33 End ...................................................................................................................................
of File Dialog Box
955
141 Variables
955
142 Variables and Arrays
956
26
143 Advanced Programming Operators
958
144 Ordinals in Advanced Programming
958
145 Intrinsic Functions
961
146 Model Commands
962
1 Model
...................................................................................................................................
Commands
962
2 Model
...................................................................................................................................
963
3 Work...................................................................................................................................
Cell
963
4 Record
...................................................................................................................................
964
5 CAD...................................................................................................................................
Tools
964
6 CAD...................................................................................................................................
Geometry
964
7 File ...................................................................................................................................
Units Dialog Box
965
8 Open...................................................................................................................................
Work Cell Dialog Box
966
9 Model
...................................................................................................................................
Locate - Orientate Part Dialog Box
967
10 Pick...................................................................................................................................
Action Dialog Box
968
11 Model
...................................................................................................................................
Locate - Rotate Part Dialog Box
969
12 Model
...................................................................................................................................
Locate - Position Part Dialog Box
970
13 Locate
...................................................................................................................................
Cartesian
972
14 Model
...................................................................................................................................
Locate - Save Work Cell Dialog Box
974
15 Rotate
...................................................................................................................................
Model Dialog Box
975
16 Translate
...................................................................................................................................
Model Dialog Box
976
17 Mirror
...................................................................................................................................
Model Dialog Box
977
18 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Plane Dialog Box
978
19 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Point Dialog Box
979
20 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Cylinder Dialog Box
980
21 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Torus Dialog Box
981
22 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Slice Dialog Box
983
23 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Curve Dialog Box
985
24 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Circular Slice Dialog Box
986
25 Add ...................................................................................................................................
Labels Dialog Box
988
26 Query
...................................................................................................................................
Geometry Dialog Box
989
27 Offset
...................................................................................................................................
Surface Dialog Box
990
28 Organise
...................................................................................................................................
Geometry Dialog Box
991
29 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Device Dialog Box
992
30 Geometry
...................................................................................................................................
Entities Dialog Box
992
31 PMI ...................................................................................................................................
Data Extraction
994
32 Extracting
...................................................................................................................................
PMI Data
995
33 Display
...................................................................................................................................
Settings Dialog Box
998
999
147 Rotary Tables

1 Rotary
...................................................................................................................................
Tables
999
Contents
27
...................................................................................................................................
2 Calibrating
a Continuous Rotary Table
1000
3 Calibrating
...................................................................................................................................
an Indexing Rotary Table
1001
4 Rotary
...................................................................................................................................
1001
5 Calibrate
...................................................................................................................................
Rotary Table Dialog Box
1002
6 Delete
...................................................................................................................................
1003
7 Rotary
...................................................................................................................................
Table Dialog Box
1005
8 Recall
...................................................................................................................................
1005
9 Rotary
...................................................................................................................................
Table Locate
1007
10 Move
...................................................................................................................................
1008
Move Rotary..........................................................................................................................................................
Table Dialog Box
1008
Calibrated Tables
..........................................................................................................................................................
Angles Dialog Box
1009
148 Rotary Offset Dialog Box
1009
149 Save Rotary Table Dialog Box
1010
150 Rotary Velocity Dialog Box
1011
151 Twin Columns
1012
1 Twin
...................................................................................................................................
Columns
1012
2 Get...................................................................................................................................
Datum Dialog Box
1013
3 Put...................................................................................................................................
Datum Dialog Box
1014
4 Get...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
1015
5 Put...................................................................................................................................
Feature Dialog Box
1015
6 Define
...................................................................................................................................
Column Dialog Box
1016
7 Synchronise
...................................................................................................................................
Columns Dialog Box
1017
152 Using Manual Machines
1018
153 Machine Launch
1019
Index

28
Welcome to CAMIO
1.1
Welcome to CAMIO
Welcome to CAMIO
Metris CAMIO is the combined inspection and programming environment for CMMs. It is available as a
suite of metrology software solutions. CAMIO can allow you to create inspection programs off-line from
the 3D CAD model design, or by manually programming on-line, or by a combination of these methods.
It can provide full 3D geometric modelling capabilities, and supports SAT, IGES, VDA, CATIA and
other file formats. Programs can be executed in manual or CNC (program or automatic) mode, and the
results reported in text or graphical format against the 3D CAD model.
Features include:
Context-sensitive on-line help via F1 key
Customisable interface
35
45
3D geometric model construction
49
Explorer view for 'drag-and-drop' editing
75
View of DMIS program with descriptive labels
45
Constant reporting as the inspection program runs
83
Verification of programs off-line using Collision Detection facility
186
CAMIO conforms to the specifications of the Dimensional Measuring Interface Specification (DMIS). It is
assumed that users are familiar with this specification and with the basics of inspection using CMMs.
1.2
Acknowledgements
Acknowledgements
Metris and the Metris logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nikon Metrology N.V. in the
United States and other countries.
Microsoft is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
Welcome to CAMIO
29
Microsoft Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
WinZip is a registered trademark of WinZip Computing, Inc.
SAT is a registered trademark of Spatial Corp.
ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Corp.
PTC, Pro/ENGINEER and Pro/E are trademarks or registered trademarks of Parametric Technology
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the U.S. and other countries.
CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.
Unigraphics and Parasolid are registered marks or trademarks of Siemens Product Lifecycle
Management Software Inc.
SolidWorks is a registered trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
Portions of this software, known as the Collision Detection Manager, are copyrighted by and are the
property of D-Cubed Limited , a wholly owned subsidiary of Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software Inc.
HOOPS is a registered trademark of Tech Soft 3D in the United States.
Q-DAS is a registered trademark of Q-DAS GmbH.
AIMS is jointly developed by The Boeing Corporation and Metronor Group.
Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
RENISHAW and the probe symbol are registered trade marks of Renishaw plc in the United Kingdom
and other countries. Other names and designations of Renishaw products are trade marks of Renishaw
plc.
1.3
New Features Overview

New Features Overview
CAMIO7 includes many changes and new features to improve on the existing methods of creating
inspection programs. Some of the main features are briefly described below:
CAMIO User Interface
File Menu
This now combines program and model file management. You can pin important files to the Recent File
list to ensure they are always easily available.
Ribbon Interface
The whole CAMIO interface and menu system has been upgraded. The ribbon toolbar replaces the main
toolbar and consists of separate tabs containing all the commands you need to program quickly and
easily. The following tabs are available (depending on your licencing options):
Machine commands to set up your inspection environment including probe definition and
calibration, management of rotary tables and twin columns and commands used to perform
temperature compensation.
Alignment commands to set up and measure part co-ordinate systems and allow you to create
complex datums if required.
Inspect commands to perform tactile measurement including adding touches, moving the probe
and rotary table, selecting probes, changing measurement settings, creating tolerances and
outputting feature data.
30
Scan commands to perform tactile scanning including adding scan paths, moving the probe and
rotary table, selecting probes, changing measurement and scan settings, creating tolerances and
outputting feature data.
Laser commands to perform laser scanning including improved surface measurement options,
moving the probe and rotary table, selecting probes, changing laser properties, creating tolerances
and outputting feature data.
Construct commands for constructing and outputting features including constructing nominal
features (declaring features).
Model provides the ability to easily work with and manipulate CAD model files including
management of model files and work cells, locating the CAD model in the machine volume and
commands to add entities to the CAD model.
Point Cloud commands to manipulate point clouds including loading and saving point clouds to
file, filtering and retrieving features.
Advanced contains high level and advanced user commands to create complex programs.
User Interface Configuration
The User Interface can be fully configured to meet the requirements of an individual user. From theQuick
Access menu 110 , user defined toolbars can be created allowing you to put your most frequently used
commands within easy reach. Commands can be added to or removed from all toolbars, including the
main ribbon toolbar, and keyboard shortcuts can be created to further speed up your programming
experience. The Quick Access menu also provides access to commands that are not available on the
default layout such as the float and tapped hole add-ins, the probe model manager, and the mirror utility.
The View menu 116 allows you to choose which views are visible, and each view can be moved around
your screen. View and toolbar layouts can be saved and loaded, allowing different users to quickly and
easily switch to their own preferred configuration.
CAMIO commands are now colour-coded. Measure commands are blue; Construct commands are
green; CAD based commands are gold. This allows icons in the Quick Access toolbar (and any userdefined toolbar) to be easily distinguished.
CAMIO Functionality
Opening Programs
The dialogs to open new and existing programs have been simplified. You can select a program name,
model file and choose to run online or offline from the basic dialog. More advanced options are still
available using the Advanced button.
Sensor Management
Sensors Window - the function of the sensors window has been greatly improved. Using the sensors
window 676 menu bar options, pop-up menus and simplified drag-and-drop functionality, calibration
spheres and sensors can be created and managed with no knowledge of DMIS.
Probe and sensor definition - this is now handled entirely by the Sensors window. Improved
interaction with the sensor angle definition grid allows multiple sensor angles to be easily and
quickly created. All probe configurations are stored directly in the database and there is no longer a
requirement to use sensor definition (SNSDEF) commands.
Setup of Calibration Spheres the setup routine is now created using a simple two-step process:
create your calibration spheres in the sensors window, then use the Locate Spheres option on the
Machine tab to create a sphere setup routine. Creating the routine involves a single dialog where you
can select the required spheres, the sensor to use, configure measurement parameters and specify
where to save your sphere setup program.
Probe Calibration the calibration program is a much simplified process and can be carried out with
no knowledge of DMIS. The required probe and sensor angles can be selected and CAMIO
intelligently chooses the best sphere to use for the calibration. All probe types are supported,
Welcome to CAMIO
31
allowing for quick and easy calibration of multiple sensors.

Probe Selection the sensors window displays all defined sensors, and is updated automatically to
reflect which sensors have been calibrated, and the currently selected sensor. Sensors can be
recalled and selected directly from the sensors window.
Multiple Feature Inspection
Teach Path View this can now be used for inspecting multiple features of multiple types. Using the
options on the Inspect, Scan or Laser tabs, touches and scan paths can be added for each feature,
and moves added to safely navigate between features.
Properties window this is a new view to aid the creation of inspection programs, working towards
an object based programming system. Selecting a feature in the Teach Path view displays its
characteristics in the Properties window 91 , including its name, geometric elements, measurement
mode, tolerance application, and, where appropriate, filtering algorithms and laser parameters.
Select single or multiple features in the Teach Path view to modify relevant items for all selected
features.
Probe Check allows the quick and correct insertion of offset move functions between features in
the Teach Path view.
Annotation Editing using the block view, all of the teach path functionality can be re-edited.
Laser Inspection
Properties view Laser settings are predictive settings which are based on feature size and type.
Multiple Feature Extraction in the Teach Path view, an area can be set for the Laser to scan and
the features to be extracted can be picked from the CAD model. On applying the teach path, CAMIO
will scan the area and automatically extract all the selected features.
Profile Reporting a set of points can be defined within a laser area to be measured. A tolerance
can be applied to all of the points. A profile of the surface can be quickly generated with a constant
report.
CAD Compare the option to Compare to CAD can be set in the Properties window while
programming an inspection. Basic CAD compare and DMIS code will be produced.
Database
All inspections are now automatically saved in the Inspections database. The inspection records are
date and time stamped, ensuring all previous inspections are always available and removing the need for
a separate Reporting database.
See Also:
File Menu
105
CAMIO Structure
43
Customising the Toolbars

Quick Access Toolbar
View Menu
45
110
116
New Inspection Dialog Box
164
Open Inspection Dialog Box

Using the Sensors window
Locate Spheres
166
676
694
Calibration Wizard
Teach Path View
697
94
Using the Properties window

91
32
Probe Check
281
The Block View Editor
203
Laser - Multiple Feature Extraction
822
Laser - Profile Reporting 823

Machine, Inspection and Reporting Databases
42
(this link opens the CAMIO Database Admin Tool Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the CAMIO
Database Admin Tool Help.)
Important Information
2.1
Leaving the CMM Idle
32
The CAMIO Software Suite
32
Selecting the Server Type for CAMIO

Selecting the Language for CAMIO
32
33
Contacting Nikon Metrology
2.2

Nikon Metrology does not recommend leaving the CMM in pause or touch (slow) speed mode (using the
Pause or Touch (Slow) Speed buttons on the handbox) for long periods when the machine is idle.
Either:
Press the Emergency Stop button on the handbox
Or:
Ensure that no buttons are pressed on the handbox (so that the CMM is in idle)
2.3

The CAMIO software suite offers a range of functions the availability of which depends on various factors.
Certain functions of CAMIO may be greyed out for some CAMIO products, or issue warnings when
accessed that they cannot be used with that CAMIO product. Some options may be unavailable or
modified depending on the CAMIO licence or the CAMIO configuration, for example, depending on the
server type in use.
2.4
Setting Up CAMIO
Setting Up CAMIO
33
There are many options for running CAMIO with different equipment and on other machines than LK
CMMs. The following topics provide information on configuring CAMIO:
Machine Launch
Machine Launch 1019 is a utility that allows you to change CMM configurations with a single click. With it,
you can program multiple CMM environments from a single seat of CAMIO. Whether offline or online each configuration has a unique directory structure allowing full management of individual CMM
environments
Axis Rotation
Metris CMMs with MCC200 controllers can now have the base axis configuration defined. If CAMIO is
being used in an environment with non-LK machines that have rotated default axes, or if an LK CMM has
to be installed back-to-front, the CMM Driver can be configured to rotate the machine co-ordinate
system. More information can be found in the CMM Driver 'Axis Rotation' topic (See Also section below).
Server Types
CAMIO can be run on machines other than Metris LK machines. This requires the machine vendor to
provide software that can link the CMM controller with CAMIO (or with any other inspection software).
Most vendors provide an I++/DME server for this purpose, such as the UCCserver from Renishaw. This
server is responsible for machine hardware, i.e. for manipulating probes, racks, rotary tables, etc. It is
also responsible for machine accuracy, including temperature compensation and error correction.
When CAMIO is configured to use an I++/DME server, many options relating to machine set-up and/or
calibration are unavailable or are modified to reflect the fact that these options are handled by the server.
Usually the server has its own interface which allows you to use these options.
Selecting the server
When CAMIO is NOT running, select the server type in the lkinspect.cfg file, normally located in
C:\LK\Appdata\CAMIO. In this file, set 'servertype' to the value for the server in use. The available
server
types are listed adjacent to the 'servertype' command in the lkinspect.cfg file.
The server type you have selected is displayed in CAMIO in the Server type field on the
Miscellaneous tab page 120 of the Configuration dialog box.
Configuring the server
Depending on the server type you have selected, and on your user privileges in CAMIO, it may
be possible to change some of the server options using CAMIO. From the CAMIO Options menu on
the CAMIO menu bar, select CMM Configure. A configuration dialog box may be displayed, where
you can change the settings.
See Also:
User Privileges
222
(this link opens the CMM Driver Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the CMM Driver Help.)
2.5

To select the language for CAMIO, use the Language Utility from the Start menu, Programs, CAMIO
option:
34
Select the language to use from the drop-down list and click
CAMIO for the change to take effect.
2.6
. You must close down and restart

Nikon Metrology Service
Nikon Metrology UK Service
Nikon Metrology Germany
Headquarters
+44 (0)1332 811349
Service
+32 16 74 01 01 or
uk-service@nikonmetrology.
+49 (0)6023 917 33 0
+32 16 74 01 09
com
germanysupport@nikonmetrology.com
service@nikonmetrology.com
Nikon Metrology USA Service Nikon Metrology Asia Service Or visit www.nikonmetrology.
+01 (810) 220-4380
+86 21 6448 1061
com
us-service@nikonmetrology.
asiafor details of other Nikon
com
service@nikonmetrology.com Metrology Service Centers
Before contacting Nikon Metrology, please gather as much relevant information as possible. This will
increase the speed and quality of the support which can be given. The information required might
include:
The machine model and serial or contract number.
A full description of the problem.
A record of the sequence of events leading up to the problem.
Transcripts of any error messages - exact wording please!
Version information for software. Click on the Help/About menu, or right-click on any component file
of the installation, click Properties and select the Version tab.
It is often useful to save a screenshot displaying any messages. You can do this by pressing the
Print Screen key on your keyboard and pasting into Microsoft Paint or Microsoft Word. Microsoft
Paint can save the screenshot as a bitmap, which will need compressing with a utility like WinZip
before attaching to an email. A Microsoft Word document is useful for saving additional notes, and
should also be compressed before attaching to an email.
Other services
Extended support contracts are available throughout the world. Contact Nikon Metrology for more
details of maintenance contracts and other services:
Verification and calibration specification options
Preventative maintenance options
Machine refurbishment
Machine relocation
Operator/user training
35
Applications support
HelpDesk contracts
Software maintenance contracts
Part programming
Sub-contract inspection
Reverse engineering
Useful Background Information
3.1

How to Use the Help
File Types
35
36
Co-ordinate Systems
38
Manual, Program and Automatic Modes

Teach, Command and Insert Modes
Information and Error Messages
40
41
41
3.2
Using the Help

Using the Help
Launching Help
Use F1 to launch the Help system.
Navigating the Help System
The Contents window to the left of the main Help window includes tabs that allow you to easily navigate
or search the Help system.
Contents Tab
The Contents tab displays a hierarchical list of topics in the Help system. To display a topic in the main
window, click the topic title.
Index Tab
The Index tab displays an alphabetical list of the topics in the Help system.
Search Tab
Type in a word or phrase and click List Topics. A list of topic titles containing the word or phrase is
displayed. Click a topic title to display the topic in the main window. To search for hyphenated words,
enclose the words in double quotes. For example, to search for sub-menu type in "sub-menu" and click
List Topics. You can refine your search using the options at the bottom of the Search tab.
Favorites Tab
Add the topics you like to keep to hand to the Favorites tab.
Printing Help Topics
36
To print out a Help topic, use the Print button at the top of the Help window.
3.3
File Types
File Types
AIMS - a file format for AIMS data, saved as a tdf file, which includes measurement, feature and coordinate system data.
asm - a Pro/ENGINEER format file. Pro/E files (3D CAD modelling software from PTC) are in ASCII
format.
bin - a file that contains the velocity compensation value used when laser scanning. During a
continuous scan, for example when scanning a surface (GSURF) feature, the laser scan line is not
normal to the axis of motion but is skewed. Velocity compensation applies a correction for this error.
bpf - a 'base probe file' that holds a unique number, which is entered as the diameter for the base probe
when CAMIO generates the DMIS commands for a star stylus, when creating a calibration program
using the Create Calibration Program dialog box. This allows CAMIO to distinguish between different
star styli of identical length. Once used, the number in the .bpf file is incremented by 1 ready for the
next definition.
btc - a text file that holds all the information and settings entered using the Open Inspection dialog box
166 . When opening a part program, you can open the .dmi file (which will open the program with no
settings), or the .btc file (which will open the program using the settings entered on the previous run, e.g.
enable the header dialog and print the report at the end).
CATPart, CATProduct - CATIA v5 files for CAD/CAM/CAE modelling software from Dassault
Systemes.
cfg - a configuration file.
chk - an ACIS entity check file.
cmm - a file created if you save your CMM settings for items such as velocity, depth and clearance from
the System Settings dialog box 101 .
csv - a comma-delimited file. You can create a .csv file of the part program output by selecting Create
CSV file on the Open Inspection dialog box, Reporting tab page 174 .
dat - a text file (e.g. BlockRules.dat which contains the text from the Part Program window
45
).
dbg - debug file created when checking entities selected from the CAD model. The .dbg file lists any
problems that may exist in the selected entity.
Delimited ASCII - any ASCII File where the X, Y and Z values are separated by a delimiting character.
dfd/dfx - files compatible with the Q-DAS ASCII file transfer format. A .dfd/dfx pair of files is created
when the End of program (ENDFIL) command is executed when running programs using production runs
or special runs from the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS software
dfq - a file compatible with the Q-DAS ASCII file transfer format. A .dfq file is created when the End of
program (ENDFIL) command is executed when running programs using study runs from the
LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS software.
dmi - the DMIS part program.
dmt - a template DMIS part program.
dta - a file used to transfer data to legacy systems and to some data analysis packages. This is
created when your program runs the End of program (ENDFIL) command, if you have selected DTA
output on the New/Open Inspection dialog box, Program tab page 168 .
exp, model, session - CATIA v4 files for CAD/CAM/CAE modelling software from Dassault Systemes.
A session file is a collection of CATIA v4 model files. The session file contains reference to the model
files in the session. For more details see CATIA v4 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
228
37
hsf - a HOOPS stream file of CAD data. Hsf files are compressed and therefore load quickly into the
model window. They can include custom data. The original ACIS model can be included in the
corresponding .hsf file in .sab file format.
htm, html - a hypertext markup language file, which allows the display of information in a browser.
Hyscan - a Hyscan measurement file.
igs - an IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) file of CAD data.
iso - a file containing ISO codes (such as G00, G01).
machine - a machine configuration file containing the machine model, quill model, and models of other
items that can be added to the machine, for example racks.
msc - a file of scan data generated from a Metris laser scanner, used for diagnostic purposes.
out - the DMIS output file, created if the DISPLY command contains the STOR,DMIS minor words, e.g.
DISPLY/STOR,DMIS. If so, any data present in the file is deleted each time the DMIS program is run,
and replaced with current data when the DMIS program is closed. If the DISPLY command does not
contain the STOR,DMIS minor words, the .out file is not created (if there are any existing .out files,
these are left unchanged). If probe compensation 755 is off, the point data in this file is raw data
(RAWDATA), i.e. the touches, and if probe compensation is on, the point data is actual data (PTDATA),
i.e. the same number of points as the nominal points. Both are in current datum co-ordinates.
planning - a file of planning information saved when closing CAMIO after working with a plan (for details
see Planning Window 88 ). The planning file is selected on the Offline tab page of the New/Open
Inspection dialog box. If you select a planning file, it allows you to continue working with your plan,
model and machine. A planning file contains feature, tolerance and co-ordinate system information, but
not moves, sensors or any machine-specific information.
prt - UG and Pro/ENGINEER format files. UG files (3D CAD modelling software from EDS) are in
binary format, and Pro/E files (3D CAD modelling software from PTC) are in ASCII format. CAMIO
checks the first line of a .prt file to determine which format is used.
ptf - a prompt dialog box file created using the CAMIO Prompt Editor
924
application.
pts - an ASCII file listing the co-ordinates, or the co-ordinates and vector, of points. This file can include
the feature name. The name can optionally be added to the end of the line containing the co-ordinates
(or the co-ordinates and vector). If the name includes spaces, it is truncated to the first space.
Example:
2.0 (the software version number)
0 23.4 67.8 98.1 (the 0 at the start of this line indicates that only x, y, z co-ordinates follow)
1 23 657 922.52 0 0 1 (the 1 at the start of this line indicates that co-ordinates and vector follow)
0 23.4 8.90 98.1 POINT1 (this line shows co-ordinates and point name)
1 23.56 657 922.52 0 1 0 VECTORPOINT1 (this line shows co-ordinates, vector and point name)
res - the Metris vendor report file, created if the DISPLY command contains the STOR,V(label) minor
words, e.g. DISPLY/STOR,V(0). If so, any data present in the file is deleted each time the DMIS
program is run, and replaced with current data when the DMIS program is closed. If the DISPLY
command does not contain the STOR,V(label) minor words, the .res file is not created (if there are any
existing .res files, these are left unchanged). Point data is only output in this file if tolerances have been
applied, so the result will be actual points, in current datum co-ordinates. The layout of the .res file can
be determined by commands in the part program, e.g. the header from the Configuration dialog box,
Reporting Key Questions tab page 125 , and the content from the Format Output dialog box 478 (for details
of the source of the data, see Outputting Vendor Format (VFORM) Data 451 ). The .res file also contains
the date and time the program was run, and dashed lines between feature data and to indicate page
breaks (as determined by the Printer lines box on the Miscellaneous tab page 120 , Configuration dialog
box). If the ENDFIL (End of part program) command is executed when the program is run, the program
duration and the number of features in and out of tolerance are also shown. The .res file can be printed
automatically at the end of the program by checking Auto print at end on the Reporting tab page of the
38
New/Open Inspection dialog box.

ris - a Range Image Standard file.
rpx - a constant report file, saved from the constant report generated as the inspection is run. This can
be opened in Studio Reporting.
rtf - a file in rich text format. CAMIO creates a .rtf file when it creates the .res file. The .rtf file is a file of
the vendor format output in RTF format. This shows the lines of information in colour, as they are
presented in the Output window in CAMIO.
run - no longer created by CAMIO but effectively the same as the .btc file.
sab - the ACIS binary file, containing CAD information such as geometry and entity hierarchy.
sat - the ACIS ASCII text file, containing CAD information such as geometry and entity hierarchy.
scm - a calibration map file for a laser scanner. The calibration map is used to map the image obtained
by the laser scanner cameras to a 3D image.
sgd - a file of sensor configuration data, specifying a set of probe angles that can be used when defining
multiple sensors in CAMIO.
sldprt, sldasm - part (sldprt) and assembly (sldasm) SolidWorks format files for CAD modelling software
from SolidWorks Corporation.
step, stp - a STEP (Standard for the Exchange of Product Model Data) file of CAD/CAM data.
stl, stlt - a file format for point cloud data. stl is binary STL (stereo lithography) and stlt is ASCII STLT.
tdf - a file format for AIMS data, which includes measurement, feature and co-ordinate system data.
tof - a file of tool offset data, used when qualifying (calibrating) the laser scanner angles. The tool offset
is the distance from the focal point of the scanner to the attachment of the scanner at the autojoint.
txt - when leader line co-ordinates are defined for a bitmap report in Studio Reporting, a text file
(filename_feat.txt) is created and saved with the picture file. This file lists the co-ordinates of the points
picked on the picture. Scan data from a laser scan can also be saved as a .txt file which lists the coordinates of the points that make up the point cloud.
vbs - a Microsoft VBScript program.
vda - a VDA-FS (VDA surface data interface) file of CAD data.
wcl - work cell file, holding information about the location of a model in the machine volume.
xmt_txt, x_t - Parasolid files for 3D geometric solid modelling software from EDS.
xml - an output file of inspection data in XML format. This is created when the End of program (ENDFIL)
command is executed, if you have selected XML output on the New/Open Inspection dialog box,
Program tab page. You can view the .xml file either in a text editor, or in Microsoft Internet Explorer. To
view the file in Internet Explorer, you must have copied all the .dtd files present in C:\LK\LKCamio\DTD
\n.n (where n.n is the DML (Dimensional Markup Language) version supported) to the folder containing
the .xml file.
See Also:
(this link opens the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the
LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS Help.)
(this link opens the Studio Reporting Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the Studio Reporting
Help.)
3.4
Co-ordinate Systems
Co-ordinate Systems
39
When CAMIO begins execution, and before any sensors are calibrated, the system operates in 'scale'
co-ordinates. If the CMM is moved to location (0,0,0), the centre of rotation of the probe head defines
the origin of this co-ordinate frame. At any point, the current machine position is defined by the location
of the centre of rotation of the probe head within this co-ordinate frame.
Once the sensor has been calibrated, the current machine position is defined by the location of the
centre of the sensor tip within the scale co-ordinate frame.
Placing the centre of a calibrated sensor tip directly over the centre of the master reset sphere will NOT
place the CMM at the origin of the current co-ordinate system. Moving the CMM to location (0,0,0)
places the centre of the tip of a calibrated sensor directly over the scale origin.
When a datum has been created
When a datum has been created, moving the CMM to location (0,0,0) places the centre of the tip of the
currently selected sensor at the datum origin.
Rotary table
If a rotary table is present, moving the CMM to location (0,0,0) places the centre of the tip at the datum
origin. If the last ROTAB statement was ROTNUL, the datum remains in the same orientation as it was
before the rotation. If the last ROTAB statement was ROTTOT, the datum origin is rotated about the
centre of the rotary table.
Datums in the model window
The CAMIO model window displays an automatically generated on-screen representation of the
inspection program. The window displays three datums:
Red - the machine co-ordinate system (mcs).
Green - the model datum (CAD co-ordinate system or wcs), representing the origin and axes of the
model as read from the CAD file. This datum does not move relative to the model as the result of
any datum operation or command.
Red/green/cyan - the current inspection datum (part co-ordinate system, or pcs). When you pick
features from the CAD model in CAMIO, the co-ordinates and vectors returned are always relative to
this datum.
At the start of inspection, all three
datums are coincident at the
model origin.
See Also:
Model Window
49
When a datum is created on the machine,

the machine (red) and inspection (red/
green/cyan) datums may move away from
the model, depending on the datum you
create. The machine datum shows where
the part is positioned within the machine
volume. The inspection datum is the
current location of the datum on the part.
40
3.5

CAMIO selects a default operation mode for you, but you can select the operation mode for the
inspection yourself using the Program Mode dialog box, the Power User Settings dialog box, or the
Mode selection in the Properties window. You can change modes as often as needed. You can modify
a program that was created in one mode so that it now runs in another mode.
The following modes are available:
MAN - manual mode
Requires you to use the handbox to take points when creating and while running a part program.
Any commands between a MEAS, RMEAS or CALIB command and its corresponding ENDMES
command are ignored. GOTO commands that are outside a MEAS command block are not
executed.
When the CMM is in on-line mode, the DRO displays the distance from the probe tip to the target on
the part. Note that if you have chosen to rotate the machine axes (by selecting a rotation on the
Axis Rotation tab page of the CMM Configuration dialog box), the mcs values displayed in the DRO
are actually the rotated mcs values (or mcsr values). The target is either the centre of the feature
being inspected, or the next touch point (PTMEAS point) in the MEAS command block. If you have
a model loaded in the model window, a line or arrow (depending on the selection on the Manual
Inspection tab page of the Display Settings dialog box) indicates the target on the CAD model.
When inspecting a feature, it is highlighted in the model window using a thick line. When
constructing features, the features to be used in the construction are highlighted with a thick line,
and the solution to the construction is also highlighted in this way.
PROG - program mode (CNC)
Used where you want to teach points and moves by using the handbox.
The moves and points are inserted into the program.
When a program is run in PROG mode, the probe moves and takes points exactly as taught using
the handbox. Any PTMEAS points are used. If there are no PTMEAS points, manual measurement
using the handbox is required.
Some feature types have a canned cycle (i.e. internal measuring routine) for inspection, and this
uses AUTO mode. But if you add moves and touch points to the inspection path for these feature
types, PROG mode is used.
AUTO - automatic mode (CNC)
Used when you require CAMIO to determine where to move the probe and where to take points. The
feature nominal is used as the target for inspection.
The CMM automatically performs sensor clearance moves (defined in the Sensor Clearance dialog
box) when moving the probe to measure another feature.
When a program is run in AUTO mode, some feature types (e.g. circles) are automatically
measured using canned cycles (i.e. internal measuring routines).
If a feature has no canned cycle, the program temporarily applies PROG mode to the feature
measurement. This means that if the feature is not supported in automatic measurement, any
PTMEAS points are used. If there are none, measurement must be done manually using the
handbox.
For line and plane features, the sensor clearance move is applied before PROG mode is applied (if
you have checked the Automatic clearance for line and plane features box on the Conformance tab
page, Configuration dialog box). This avoids the need to create GOTO sensor moves for these
features.
41
See Also:
Point Measurement Dialog Box
3.6
769

The appropriate programming mode is selected by CAMIO and displayed in the status bar. CAMIO will
change the programming mode if you open or close a program, or if you try to execute commands in the
'wrong' mode. For example, most advanced commands are meaningless in Command mode.
You can select another mode from the status bar, if it is appropriate to the part program. Depending on
the mode, the commands you create in the dialog boxes may be executed when you click OK, and may
be inserted in your program if successfully executed.
The following modes are available:
3.7
Mode
Command
executed?
Command
inserted?
Command
Yes
No
Teach
Yes
Yes
Insert
No
Yes
Notes
For inserting single

commands. Not intended for
inserting blocks of commands
or for building a program.

There are several different types of dialog box used to display information messages and error
messages.
This type of message provides the option

to continue, and may provide some
information.
You can only click OK. No other action is
possible.
42
This type of message is displayed during

an action, and allows you to pause the
action by clicking the red triangle.
3.8
Normally this type of message gives you the

option to cancel the action. However, in this
case, an action also occurs if you cancel the
message.

Machine database
The machine database holds sensor and rotary table calibrations and corresponding nominal data.
These are saved to a separate database to the Inspections database, so the machine data can be
backed up independently or even copied to another installation of CAMIO. Databases can be backed up
and restored using the CAMIO Database Admin Tool.
Inspection database
When you run a part program in CAMIO, an inspection database is created for that part program on the
local computer, i.e. on the computer used when carrying out the inspection. A new database is created
each time the program is run through to the ENDFIL command. Inspections are not overwritten because
each run is automatically date and time stamped. Individual inspections can be exported to a file,
imported or deleted using the CAMIO Database Admin Tool.
Reporting database
With CAMIO7 onwards, there is no need for reporting databases because all inspections are
automatically saved in the Inspections database. The inspection records are date and time stamped, so
you can report on all previous inspections using Studio Reporting. Running the same program again
does not overwrite previous runs, so unless deleted using the CAMIO Database Admin Tool, all previous
inspections are always available. Studio Reporting will open the local CAMIO database by default, but
other databases can be chosen from the local network.
Housekeeping and back-ups
The CAMIO Database Admin Tool Help file contains instructions for backing up and restoring databases.
Do not delete databases through Microsoft Windows Explorer.
Warning:
The LK databases store data about CAMIO and must not be deleted unless instructed by Nikon
Metrology.
See Also:
Save Sensor Dialog Box
717
Save Rotary Table Dialog Box 1010

Program Inspection - Program Options

Reporting
43
168
490
Saving Your Inspection Data for Reporting 491

Program Inspection - Reporting Options
174
(this link opens the Studio Reporting Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the Studio Reporting
Help.)
CAMIO Structure
4.1
CAMIO Structure
CAMIO Structure
The CAMIO screen is divided into the areas shown in this diagram.
1 Menus
104
2 Main toolbar
135
3 Part program window

4 Model window
49
5 CAMIO windows
6 Status bar
45
46
99
44
See Also:
Customising CAMIO
44
4.2
Customising CAMIO
4.2.1
Customising CAMIO
Customising CAMIO
You can adjust the layout of your CAMIO screen and the options available in it. For details, see:
Setting Up the CAMIO Layout
There are also various other options available from theView menu 116 , the Model window
window 76 that allow you to further customise your installation of CAMIO.
4.2.2
49
and the Grid

When you first install and run CAMIO, your CAMIO screen has a default layout. You can change this
layout and save it as a 'docking pane layout' in the registry, so that your CAMIO screen is always set
out as you prefer it. When CAMIO closes, it saves the current layout in the registry. When you start
CAMIO, it loads this same layout from the registry.
Resize the CAMIO screen and the areas within it, by dragging with the mouse (see CAMIO
Windows)
To edit the toolbars, use the More Commands option from the Quick Access menu drop-down list
(see Customising the Toolbars).
If you want to permanently save a different layout, save it with a unique name using the Save command
from the View menu.
You can create and save any number of layouts, and recall them using the Load command from the
View menu.
If you want to return to the default layout at any time, use Load to open the layout CAMIO Default
Layout. This layout is installed with CAMIO and cannot be overwritten. If you accidentally attempt to
overwrite it, the following message will appear:
See Also:
View Menu
116
CAMIO Structure
4.2.3
45

You can set up the existing CAMIO toolbars to suit your own requirements. The default CAMIO layout
and toolbars contains the commands most frequently used when programming an inspection. Less
often used, or more advanced commands are only available after the toolbars have been customised
(including the plug-ins for Float and Threaded Holes).
The Quick Access menu allows you to customise your own personal toolbars (created using the
Toolbars tab and customised using the Commands tab), the Quick Access toolbar (using the the Quick
Access tab) and each tab on the main toolbar (using the Commands tab).
If you right-click on an item in a toolbar there is a pop-up menu where you can choose to add the
command to the quick access toolbar. It also has options to customise the quick access toolbar, show
the quick access toolbar below the ribbon and minimise the ribbon.
Save your toolbar changes by saving the workspace (see Setting Up the CAMIO Layout).
See Also:
Quick Access Menu
Part Program Window

Part Program Window
The part program window displays the current DMIS program. You can use the program view icon from
the toolbar to toggle the display of the text in the part program between descriptive text (also known as
the 'block view') and DMIS commands:
The program toolbar also provides other options for editing and running your program (for details of the
options, see Program Toolbar 140 ).
Right-clicking displays a pop-up menu that allows you to carry out some program edits. The pop-up
menu displayed depends on whether you have selected Program Text or Block View.
Descriptive text (block view)
DMIS commands
You can select multiple lines and drag-and-drop using the

mouse.
Double-clicking the program commands in the windo

displays the associated dialog boxes for the comman
Use the DMIS program editor 197 to edit the program
view.
If you double-click a command in this view, the resulting

action depends on the command, the way it has been
formatted and whether the annotation editor option is
enabled. For details see The Block View Editor 203 .
46
See Also:
View Menu
116
The Part Program Window Pop-up Menus
CAMIO Windows
6.1
CAMIO Windows
CAMIO Windows
All windows can be switched on and off from the View menu 116 . The default layout positions the
windows as shown in CAMIO Structure 43 , and if you need to restore the layout at any time, the Load
Layout 44 option can be used.
You can resize the windows by dragging the window borders using the mouse. Reposition the windows
by dragging the window caption with the mouse.
The following options are just some of the ways that windows can be arranged:
Tab windows to other windows.
Dock windows to the edge of a frame in the main CAMIO window.
Float windows over or outside the main CAMIO window.
CAMIO Windows
47
Minimize windows along the edge of the main CAMIO window (auto hide).
Display windows on different monitors (if you have multiple monitors connected).
Reset window positions by loading the default layout.
The windows can be displayed as 'floating' windows, i.e. displayed on your screen over other CAMIO
windows. Double-click the caption of a window to make it float, and double-click it again to make it dock
to the side of the screen to fit with the other CAMIO windows. Grab the floating window by its caption
and drag it to a new location. Hold down the left mouse button while you drag the window. When the
window reaches a docking position, a rectangular outline will appear. Dragging the window further
towards the status bar will determine whether the window docks across the bottom of just one, or all the
windows. If a window is dragged onto the caption bar of another window, it will tab. Dragging a tab will
float the window to a new position. If a window is only dragged near to the edge of another window, it will
tile.
The 'pin' icon
on the caption bar allows you to 'auto hide' the window(s) along the edge of the main
window. The tabs remain visible, and hovering the mouse over a tab for a second will unhide the window
until the mouse cursor is moved outside of the window, when it will auto hide again. Clicking the (rotated)
pin icon while the window is open will unpin the window again.You can use the
window. Open it again using the corresponding option on the View menu.
The following windows are available:
Model
Explorer
Output
Part Program
49
Grid
75
Context
82
Constant Reporting
76
83
83
Collisions
186
45
button to close a
48
Sensors
75
DRO
Planning
88
Laser 2D Preview
Graphical Reporting
50
86
Properties
826
90
CAMIO Windows
6.2
Model Window
6.2.1
Model Window
49
Model Window
The model window displays a view of the CAD model, and nominal, measured, constructed features, etc.
You can open a model file in the model window using the Open option from the Model menu, or you can
drag a model into the model window from Microsoft Windows Explorer.
For the options available from the model window toolbar for manipulating the view of the model, see
Model Window Toolbar Buttons 54 . You can also manipulate the view of the model using mouse and
key combinations. For details see Moving the Model in the Model Window 55 .
You can click on features on the model to start the measurement process. The feature is highlighted,
and the normal and direction vectors are shown. You can pick some features directly from the model.
Other features require you to select the feature type from the Inspect toolbar before picking the feature
(see Pick Settings - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 ).
50
The following additional options are available from the right-click pop-up menu in the model window:
Display Settings - displays the Display Settings dialog box
display settings.
Colours - displays the CAD Colours dialog box
in the model window.
73
998
, where you can choose additional
, where you can select the colours of displayed items
Model Explorer - displays the Model Explorer dialog box

information to display on the model.
73
, where you can select which layers of
Model Colours - displays a sub-menu where you can select the colours of all faces, edges and CAD
points.
Graphic Report Colours - displays a sub-menu where you can select the colours of the graphical
reporting 50 items drawn in the model window, including markers and tolerance zone indicators.
Datums in the model window

For details of the different datums displayed in the model window, see Co-ordinate Systems
38
Sensor image (probe model)

When you select a sensor, the sensor image is displayed in the model window using a .sat file. It is
important for collision detection 186 that the sensor image is correct, even if it is not displayed. CAMIO
uses the .sat file associated with the sensor to display the sensor image.
If you select a different sensor part way through a program, an appropriate .sat file is selected or created
and the sensor image in the model window is redrawn to reflect the change.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
Inspecting Features
File Types
272
36
CAMIO Windows
6.2.2
Graphical Reporting in the Model Window

The graphical reporting function displays a graphical representation of certain feature types in the model
window, including nominals, actuals and tolerance zone, for profile reporting. You can zoom in or out on
a feature, position it in the model window using the orbit and pan functions, change the colour of the
graphical reporting items, switch their display on and off, and print the data from the profile report.
The feature types for which graphical reporting is available include:
Circles
Arcs
Cylinders
Planes
Lines
CAMIO Windows
51
Cones
Surfaces
Curves
Spheres
To enable graphical reporting, from the View menu select Graphic Report. As the program runs, the
content of the model window changes to show the graphical reporting items for each feature when its
associated ENDMES command is executed. You can also click on a measured feature in the Explorer
window to view it in a graphical representation in the model window.
Model window options for graphical reporting

The following options are available for graphical reporting, from the toolbar in the model window:
Print Feature (Graphic Report) - with graphical reporting
enabled, prints a profile report for the displayed feature to the
printer specified using the Print Set-Up option from the File
menu, and to an html file saved by default in C:\LK\Appdata
\Reporting\Templates. For details see Printing Graphical
Reports 53 .
Increase Graphic Report Magnification - with graphical
reporting enabled, click to increase the magnification of the
feature deviations. The magnification value is shown in the
model window.
Decrease Graphic Report Magnification - with graphical
reporting enabled, click to reduce the magnification of the
model window.
Graphic Report Options - displays a sub-menu where you
can switch on and off the display of the graphical reporting
items drawn in the model window.
52
The following options are available from the

(Graphic Report Options) button in the model
window and allow you to switch on or off the display of the item. You can change the colours of the
items from the options available on the right-click pop-up menu in the model window.
Display Polyline - toggles the display of the polyline, i.e. the series of straight lines connecting the
touch points.
Display Whiskers - toggles the display of the whiskers indicating the deviation between the actual touch
point and the nearest co-ordinate on the actual feature. By default, whiskers within tolerance are shown
in green and whiskers outside tolerance are shown in red.
Display Markers - toggles the display of the markers indicating the touch points. By default these are
indicated by blue points.
Display Max/Min Deviations - toggles the display of the markers indicating the maximum and
minimum deviations. By default these are indicated by green points.
Display Nominal Form - toggles the display of the upper and lower tolerance zones around the feature.
These are indicated by dotted lines.
Display Actual Form - toggles the display of the actual maximum and minimum feature bounds
(circularity, flatness, cylindricity) centred about the actual feature.
Display Nominal Feature - toggles the display of the nominal feature.
Display Actual Feature - toggles the display of the actual feature.
Display CAD - toggles the display of the CAD model.
Display/Hide All - toggles the display of all of the graphic report options.
See Also:
Profile Reports from the Model Window
52
Model Window
6.2.3
Profile Report from the Model Window

The graphical reporting function in the model window allows you to create a profile report for a feature
and output it to a .html file. Use the Print Feature option in the model window or the Explorer window to
generate the profile report. This is saved by default in C:\LK\Appdata\Reporting\Templates.
Ensure that the graphical representation of the feature in the model window is as you require when you
generate the report, as this image is included in the report. Other data provided in the report includes:
Date and time of the report
Feature type
Feature name
Number of touches taken
Fitting algorithm used
Number and percentage of profile points out of tolerance
Magnification value
See Also:
Printing Graphical Reports
50
53
CAMIO Windows
53
Explorer Window
6.2.4

Ensure the Graphic Report option is checked on the View menu:
Manually printing a graphical report

Either:
Select the
(Print Feature) button in the Model window
Or:
Right-click on a feature in the Explorer window and select Print Feature
This prints a profile report for the displayed feature to the printer specified using the Print Set-Up option
from the File menu, and to an html file saved by default in C:\LK\Appdata\Reporting\Templates. The
filename has the feature name appended. For example, for a feature CIR003 inspected using the part
program test.dmi, the filename would be test_CIR003.html. If the 'append date and time' option was
selected on the Program tab page 168 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box when opening the part
program, the filename would be test_yyyymmdd_hhmmss_CIR003.html, where yyyymmdd and hhmmss
are yearmonthday and hourminutesecond.
Generating and printing a graphical report from the part program
The following sample code will generate a graphical report as a .html file after every subsequent OUTPUT
command:
V(0)=VFORM/ALL,PLOT
DISPLY/TERM,V(0),STOR,DMIS,V(0)
If you do not wish to generate a graphical report after every OUTPUT command, remove the PLOT
parameter:
V(0)=VFORM/ALL
If you wish to generate the report and print it, use the following commands:
V(0)=VFORM/ALL,PLOT
DISPLY/TERM,V(0),STOR,DMIS,V(0),PRINT,V(0)
You can add or edit the VFORM and DISPLY commands using the Vendor Output Format dialog box
and the Format Output dialog box 478 respectively.
Automatically printing graphical reports at the end of a part program
480
54
When opening the part program, ensure that the Auto print at end option is checked on the Results File
tab page 183 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box. Ensure that the program contains the appropriate
VFORM and DISPLY commands, for example:
V(0)=VFORM/ALL,PLOT
When the ENDFIL command is run, all graphical reports from the part program are sent to the printer.
See Also:
6.2.5
Model Window Toolbar Buttons

The following options are available from the model window toolbar for manipulating the view of the model.
Note that Orbit, Pan, Zoom and Zoom to Box remain selected until you deselect them, and you cannot
pick from the model until you have deselected them.
You can also manipulate the view of the model using mouse and key combinations. For details see
Moving the Model in the Model Window 55 .
Orbit - allows you to orbit the CAD model in the window using
the mouse. Click the Orbit button, then drag the CAD model.
The model will orbit around a point in the middle of the window.
Pan - allows you to reposition the CAD model in the window
using the mouse. Click the Pan button, then drag the CAD
model to reposition it. Or press and hold the CTRL key while
pressing and holding the middle mouse button, then dragging.
Zoom - using the Zoom command (in conjunction with the Pan
and Orbit commands) allows the view to be manipulated. This
is useful for picking in areas of the CAD model which may be
concealed in the current view, or in areas of fine detail.
Click the Zoom button and push the mouse forwards to zoom
in. Drag the mouse backwards to zoom out.
Zoom to Box - click the Zoom to Box button and drag the
mouse cursor to draw a box over the area of the model that
you wish to expand. Or press and hold the ALT key while
pressing and holding the middle mouse button, then dragging.
Zoom In/Out - click the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to
zoom in and out in steps in the window.
Zoom to Extents (Full View) - expands or reduces the model
to fit the window. Or double-click the middle mouse button.
View - displays the various surface views of the model. The
isometric option displays the model so that lines of equal
length along each of the three axes look the same length. The
z axis is vertical, the y axis is at 4 o'clock and the x axis is at
8 o'clock.
CAMIO Windows
55
Axis Type - allows you to select the axes to use when

displaying the various views and rotating the model. Selecting
a different axis type may not immediately change the model in
the model window. Instead, it defines the active axis system
for the next manipulation of the model. For details, see Using
the Axis Types in the Model Window 56 .
Wireframe - displays the model with transparent faces. This
allows features not visible on the real part to be seen through
obscuring faces.
Rendered - displays the model with opaque, coloured faces.
The faces are shaded with reference to a simple light source.
Hidden Line - displays the model with opaque but uncoloured
faces, so that you cannot view features through obscuring
faces.
Print Feature (Graphic Report) - with graphical reporting
enabled, prints the displayed feature to a .html file and to the
printer specified using the Print Set-Up option from the File
menu.
Increase Graphic Report Magnification - with graphical
reporting enabled, click to increase the magnification of the
model window.
Decrease Graphic Report Magnification - with graphical
reporting enabled, click to reduce the magnification of the
model window.
Graphic Report Options - displays a sub-menu where you
can switch on and off the display of the graphical reporting
items drawn in the model window.
See Also:
50
File Types
6.2.6
Moving the Model in the Model Window

Moving the Model in the Model Window
The following options are available for manipulating the view of the model in the model window, using the
middle mouse button of a three-button mouse and the keyboard.
To rotate the CAD model, move the cursor over the model then press and hold the middle mouse
button. This defines a centre of rotation, so that moving the mouse while still pressing the middle
mouse button rotates the model around the centre of rotation. A marker on the model shows the
centre of rotation when you do this.
Double-click the middle mouse button in the model window to expand or reduce the model to fit the
window. This is the same as the Zoom to Extents (Full View) option
on the model window
56
toolbar.
To pan the model, press and hold the CTRL key while pressing and holding the middle mouse
button, and dragging with the mouse. This is the same as the Pan option
window toolbar.
on the model
To draw a box over the area of the model that you wish to expand, press and hold the ALT key while
pressing and holding the middle mouse button and dragging with the mouse. This is the same as
the Zoom to Box option
on the model window toolbar.
See Also:
6.2.7
54
Using the Axis Types in the Model Window

Using the Axis Types in the Model Window
The Axis Type option is available from the toolbar in the model window. This allows you to select the
axes to use when displaying the various views and rotating the model. Selecting a different axis type
may not immediately change the model in the model window. Instead, it defines the active axis system
for the next manipulation of the model.
Model Axes - select this option to display the various views and to rotate the model with respect to the
model (part) axes. If you now click the View Full button, this expands or reduces the model to fit the
model window.
Machine Axes - select this option to display the various views and to rotate the model with respect to
the machine axes. If you now click the View Full button, this expands or reduces the image of the
machine and model to fit the model window.
Datum Axes - select this option to display the various views and to rotate the model with respect to the
datum axes. If you now click the View Full button, this expands or reduces the model to fit the model
window with respect to the datum axes.
See Also:
Model Window
6.2.8
49
Machine Simulation
Machine Simulation
CAMIO Windows
57
The complete machine, machine volume, axis types, laser probes and rotary tables can be displayed in
the model window. This is configurable for all parts of any CMM, including other makes, providing CAD
models are available. The display is enabled on the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings dialog
box.The controls at the top of the Program window (either program text or Block View) can be toggled to
show a Simulation Rate 141 menu, with slow, pause, rewind and other functions.
Once enabled, if collision detection 186 is also enabled, these items are then used in collision detection,
and in axis violation 190 , when the centre of rotation of the probe head moves outside the machine
volume. The options available on the Model Explorer dialog box determine what is displayed, so even
though, for example, the machine display may be enabled, the display must be selected on the Model
Explorer dialog box to display the machine. However, this does not affect collision detection, which only
requires the display to be enabled.
The machine model, the quill model, and models of other items that can be added to the machine, for
example racks, are contained in the machine configuration file. A default file called default.machine is
provided, in C:\LK\Appdata\CMMCFG. You can edit this using a text editor - see the Machine Launch
1019 topic for more information. Multiple machine configurations can also be enabled using Machine
Launch.
Both continuous and indexing rotary tables are supported, in 3-axis and 4-axis modes. The rotary table
must be calibrated before 4-axis simulation can be used.
See Also:
Simulation Rate Menu
141
Simulation - Display Settings Dialog Box
63
Simulation Grid - Display Settings Dialog Box

Machine Launch 1019
Model Window
49
65
58
Display Settings dialog box
998
Collision Detection
6.2.9
Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Picking tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define how features are picked from the
model. (You must not have any buttons selected in the model window when you pick features.)
When you pick a feature directly from the model (i.e. without selecting its feature type first from the
Inspect toolbar), the pick is tested in the following order: CPARLN, ARC, CIRCLE, PLANE, CYLNDR,
CONE, SPHERE, LINE, GCURVE, (CAD) POINT, GSURF. Therefore, if the pick matches a feature type
at the start of the list (e.g. a plane), but you are trying to pick a GSURF, the GSURF will not be picked.
You must first select the Surface feature type from the Inspect toolbar, and then you will be able to pick
a GSURF. You can use the Query Geometry dialog box to check the geometry of features you wish to
pick.
Multi-point pick for circles and slots
In CAD models for sheet metal components, features are often not defined with arcs and straight lines.
For example a hole may be defined as a polyline (a series of small lines). If you pick a feature and the
pick does not find an arc or straight line, multi-point pick is automatically used. This means any points
you pick can define a feature. Depending on the feature, CAMIO prompts you to pick other points. For
multi-point pick, the Pick circle from axis box must NOT be checked.
CAMIO Windows
59
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Picking in the left-hand list
The following options are available:

Fitting
When picking circular features (arc, circle, round slot) you can pick curves from the CAD model that are
not defined as circles. And when picking linear features (line, and the straight edges of slots) you can
pick edges from the CAD model that are not defined as straight lines. When you pick such a curve or
edge, CAMIO picks points along the curve or edge (according to the number in the Fitting points field) at
equal parametric spacing. CAMIO then fits a circle or line to the points using the standard least squares
fitting algorithm. If the standard deviation of the points from the fitted circle or line is less than the value
in the Fit tolerance field, the feature is picked. Otherwise, CAMIO displays the deviation and asks
whether you wish to pick the feature anyway. Planes and cylinders are treated similarly.
Circles/Planes/Lines/Cylinders - select a feature type to view and amend its fit parameters.
Fit tolerance - the tolerance width used when picking the feature type from the model, in the current
units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Fitting points - the number of points used when fitting a piece of CAD geometry to the feature type.
Pick radius
When picking a feature, CAMIO directs a cylindrical ray through the model and identifies geometric
entities which intersect the cylinder. You can specify the radius of the cylinder (in the current units) for
edges, faces and vertices. The default radius for picking edges and vertices is 1 mm. This allows you to
pick near the edge or vertex (you will never be exactly on it) and successfully pick it. For faces the
default is 0.001 mm as it is easy to pick within a face. However if, for example, a narrow trimmed
surface is less than 2 mm across, the edges will be picked first. In this case you could adjust the pick
radius to less than 1 mm for edges, to allow the surface to be picked.
Surfaces and curves
Snap points to surface - if checked, the position of the CAD point is obtained from the same surface
as the normal. Otherwise, when a CAD point is picked, the position is obtained from the CAD point and
the direction is obtained from the surface on which the point lies.
Search radius - the distance (in the current units) searched from a picked CAD point to find the surface
normal; and the search radius used when comparing a point feature to CAD. The default value for
comparing touch data to CAD surfaces to determine valid surfaces is the probe radius plus the value in
this field. The resulting value is used to calculate a box round the centre of the probe tip. The point on
the CAD surface must lie within this box to be found.
Points on curve - not currently used.
Points on surface - not currently used.
Pick rules
Pick CAD points only - if checked, ensures that when picking a point feature or multi points, only CAD
points are picked and not nearby points on the surface.
Also pick circles as points - if this box is checked, circles can be inspected as points, for example,
when measuring a point at the centre of a pin.
Pick feature nominal - if checked, you can pick points on the feature nominal in the model window,
rather than picking points on the CAD model. If there is a CAD model in the model window, the points
you pick snap to the model, but if there is no model, the points snap to the nearest point on the nominal
feature.
60
Pick circle from axis - if checked, when you pick a straight line, CAMIO uses the line to represent the
axis of a circle. CAMIO adds the direction of the circle into the Grid window. Type in the diameter of the
circle and its X, Y, Z axes into the Grid window.
Material thickness
Thickness - for point, edge, circle, plane and slot features. Type in a value (in the current linear units) if
the CAD model does not represent the surface to be measured, and you wish to offset the nominal
points to reflect the actual surface to be measured. For example, if the CAD model represents the
underside of the part, and the surface that you wish to inspect is the upper surface, then you would enter
a value to offset the nominal points to the upper surface. The value in this case would be the thickness
of the part. The value is applied when you click
(Apply) to measure the feature. It is applied to the
feature definition, to the touch (PTMEAS) points and to any GOTO commands in the measurement
block. Note that to create a new CAD surface offset from an existing one, you should use the Offset
Surface dialog box 990 .
Default - resets all the items to their default settings.
See Also:
Query Geometry Dialog Box
Inspecting Features
Model Window
Grid Window
989
272
49
76
System Settings Dialog Box
101
Display Settings Dialog Box
6.2.10 Measure Display - Display Settings Dialog Box

Measure Display - Display Settings Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
61
Purpose
Use the Measure Display tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define how touch points and
paths are displayed in the model window.
Warning:
When you have made changes in this dialog box and clicked OK, the display in the model window is
only updated if the model window refreshes. One way of ensuring this is to click on a feature name in
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Measure Display in the left-hand list

Touch
Tip diameter - the diameter of the sphere representing the touch point. This scales with the model as
you zoom in and out.
Marker size - the diameter of the sphere acting as a marker at the touch point. This does not scale
with the model, so that it is visible even when zooming out to a distance.
Marker length - the length of the marker line indicating the touch point. This does not scale with the
model, so that it is visible even when zooming out to a distance.
Approach/retract arrows
62
Use these options to adjust the display of the arrows that indicate the sensor approach and retract
paths. You can use these in conjunction with the values in the Sensor Approach and Sensor Retract
dialog boxes to display longer or shorter arrows. To do this, you must place any Sensor Approach or
Sensor Retract commands above the touch points in the Teach Path view.
Thickness - the thickness of the stem of the arrow used to indicate the sensor approach and retract
paths.
Arrow thickness - the thickness of the arrowhead used to indicate the sensor approach and retract
paths.
Arrow length - the length of the arrowhead indicating the sensor approach and retract paths.
Path
Thickness - the thickness of the line that indicates the inspection path.
Arrow thickness - the thickness of the arrows on the inspection path.
Segment length - the length of the segments that make up the inspection path. The shorter the
segments, the smoother the path. However, shorter segments can result in increased time to display
curved path types, hence increasing the time to refresh the display when dragging handles to move the
inspection path.
Arrow length - the length of the arrows on the inspection path.
Route arrows
Use these options to adjust the display of the arrows that indicate the path to be followed by the probe.
Route arrows are displayed while teaching an inspection.
Thickness - the thickness of the route arrow.
Length - the length of the route arrow.
Grid direction
Use these options to determine the display of the approach direction marker in the grid you can add to
the CAD model using the Surface Measurement options. The display updates if you then perform some
operation with the grid, such as clicking a corner.
Thickness - the thickness of the direction marker in the grid.
Length - the length of the direction marker in the grid.
Handle markers
Size - the size of the markers indicating the start and end of the inspection path and the touch points.
You can grab these markers with the mouse to move the ends of the inspection path and to move the
touch points.
See Also:
Model Window
49
Sensor Approach Dialog Box

Sensor Retract Dialog Box
Teach Path View
742
743
94
Surface Measurement
386
CAMIO Windows
63
6.2.11 Simulation - Display Settings Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to specify information for representing
the image in the model window and for using the collision detection 186 and axis violation 190 functions.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Simulation in the left-hand list

Use simplified probe - if checked, a simplified probe model is used until a real probe is selected. For
a laser sensor the probe body is hidden and only the active laser planes are shown. Selecting this
option disables collision detection, as the probe model used is not accurate enough for collision
detection.
Size of point cloud - for off-line programming only. Move the slider to the left to turn off the generation
of simulated point clouds when laser scanning. Move it to the right to ensure generation of point clouds.
As the slider is moved further to the right, more points are generated in the simulated point cloud.
Generating fewer points in the point cloud allows more rapid program validation.
Collision detection
Enable - if checked, collision information is recorded in the Collisions window when running the DMIS
64
program with the CMM off-line. A model must be present in the model window.
Stop program - if checked, the program is stopped whenever a collision is detected. Collisions are
listed in the Collisions window and the first collision in the group of collisions is highlighted. The DMIS
program line where the collision occurred is given. You can select the collision, and the model window
will display the probe and quill in their position when the collision occurred, a green image showing
where the probe and quill start position was before the collision, and a red image showing the end
position of the probe and quill after collision (the start and end positions are not shown if they are too
close to the collision, i.e. less than twice the probe diameter). The probe and quill are shown in their
normal colour in their position where they stopped on collision, and the area that collided with the part is
highlighted in purple. The face on the model that the probe or quill collided with is highlighted in yellow.
Collision clearance [mm] - enter a value in mm to set the safety margin when detecting collisions. A
higher value gives a higher safety margin. The clearance distance (in the current units) is the distance
between the probe and the part, within which a collision is assumed to have occurred. This value is
used when making free moves in space, e.g. GOTO moves. The probe and quill are 'inflated' internally
by CAMIO by the value in this field as the move takes place.
Rotary collision increment [deg] - enter a value in degrees to set the safety margin for collision
detection with rotary table moves. The number of degrees set is the amount by which collision detection
will 'look ahead' while the table is rotating.
Axis violation
An axis violation occurs when the centre of rotation of the probe head moves outside the machine
volume, when running the DMIS program with the CMM off-line.
Enable - if checked, and the CMM is off-line, the model window displays the quill in red if an axis
violation occurs. The quill is shown in red at the end of the move. For example, if the move ends at a
point outside the machine volume, the quill is shown in red at the end position, rather than at the
boundary of the machine volume.
Stop program - if checked, the program stops when an axis violation is detected. An error message is
displayed.
Display
Enable probe path - if checked, the display of the probe path is enabled. You can then switch the
display of the probe path on and off using the Model Explorer dialog box.
Clear probe path (program run) - if checked, the probe path is cleared from the model window for the
moves made so far, but is displayed for further moves (provided Enable probe path is checked and the
probe path display is switched on in the Model Explorer dialog box).
Clear probe path (program step) - if checked, the probe path is shown for automatic moves (provided
Enable probe path is checked and the probe path display is switched on in the Model Explorer dialog
box), but is cleared each time you step a command in the program. (For details of stepping commands,
see Program Toolbar 140 .)
Enable machine - if checked, the display of the machine base (machine simulation) and machine
volume is enabled. These are then detected by collision detection if this is enabled. You can switch the
display of the machine simulation and machine volume on and off using the Model Explorer dialog box
but this does not affect their use in collision detection. The machine model used is specified in the
machine configuration file. A default file called default.machine is provided, in C:\LK\Appdata\CMMCFG.
You can edit this using a text editor. If you uncheck this box so that the machine display is disabled,
the machine display is removed when the model window is refreshed.
See Also:
Machine Simulation
56
CAMIO Windows
141

Model Window
65
63
49
New Laser Sensor Dialog Box

Select Sensor Dialog Box
Collision Detection
736
714
186
Model Explorer Dialog Box

73
998
Miscellaneous - Configuration Dialog Box
120
(this link opens the Probe Wizard Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the Probe Wizard
Help.)
6.2.12 Simulation Grid - Display Settings Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Simulation Grid tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to specify the appearance of the
grid in the model window 49 .
Navigation
66
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Simulation Grid in the left-hand list

Display grid - if checked, a grid is displayed in the model window, to fit the machine table simulation.
Grid
X interval/Y interval - type in values to determine the spacing between the lines of the grid in the X and
Y directions.
Units - select the units for the spacing between the lines of the grid.
Text
Number of decimal places - type in the number of decimal places for the text on the grid intervals.
Font point size - type in the point size for the text on the grid intervals.
Colour - displays the Color dialog box where you can select any colour for the text from this palette or
prepare a custom colour.
Line
Type - select the type of line for the lines of the grid from the drop-down list.
Width - type in a value for the thickness of the lines. A value of 2 gives a line that is twice as thick as a
line with a value of 1, and a value of 0.5 gives a line that is half as thick as a line with a value of 1.
Colour - displays the Color dialog box where you can select any colour for the lines from this palette or
prepare a custom colour.
See Also:
Machine Simulation
56
141
63
6.2.13 Feature Display - Display Settings Dialog Box

Feature Display - Display Settings Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
67
Purpose
Use the Feature Display tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define the settings used when
creating unbounded features.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Feature Display in the left-hand list

Length of cylinders/plane edges/lines - the default length of these unbound features when defined,
measured or constructed on the CAD model, in the current linear units.
Arrows - if checked, arrows are displayed in the model window to indicate feature normals, etc.
Scaling - type in a value to set the size of the feature arrows. The larger the value, the bigger the
arrows in the model window.
Probing surface diameter - the diameter (in the current linear units) of a circle displayed in the model
window, that represents the surface on which the probe will take points.
Display pick markers - if checked, markers are displayed when you pick on the CAD model, at the
location of the pick.
See Also:
Model Window
49
68
6.2.14 View - Display Settings Dialog Box

View - Display Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the View tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define settings used when displaying
features in the model window.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click View in the left-hand list

Feature creation - if checked, the display of the corresponding features is created so that they can be
displayed in the model window, and can be saved with the model. If the display is not created, the
features cannot be displayed in the model window.
Create touch points - if you wish to create touch points in the model window, check this box. The
touch points are shown as red dots in the model window as the part program runs, and indicate the raw
points. You can save the touch points with the CAD model using the options on the CAD Model Options
dialog box (see Saving CAD Files - Common Options 257 ).
CAMIO Windows
69
Show lines in render mode - if checked, the model edges are shown when the model is rendered.
This ensures that the offset path is shown on the model when creating an inspection path on a plane
using the edge offset option.
Smooth transitions - if checked, any changes on the view are carried out as a graduated change. For
example, when the Zoom to Extents (Full View) toolbar button is used, the zoom level will change
smoothly rather than jumping from the current level to the zoomed view.
Graphics driver - configure graphics support for either Open GL or Direct X. The selection of this option
is dependent on the graphics card and the PC being used.
Update rate - used during program execution. When the part program is run, updates to the model
window are stored in a buffer and the window is redrawn after a pre-defined time. Moving the slider
towards Always updates the model window frequently (approximately every 0.5 seconds), but slows
down the program execution. Setting the slider to Always ensures the model is redrawn every time a
change occurs. Moving the slider towards Never updates the model window less frequently
(approximately every 20 seconds) but gives faster program execution. Setting the slider to Never
ensures the model window is never updated.
See Also:
Model Window
49
54
Scan Option (Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane

Touch Option - Inspecting a Plane
321
322
6.2.15 Feature Deviations - Display Settings Dialog Box

Feature Deviations - Display Settings Dialog Box
70
Purpose
Use the Feature Deviations tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define settings used when
displaying features in the model window. The settings are retained when CAMIO is closed.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Feature Deviations in the left-hand list

Exaggeration - the length of the feature deviation markers on the CAD model currently displayed.
Magnification of the markers allows the operator to view the difference between nominals and actuals
more easily. Select a magnification between 1 and 1000, or type in a suitable value. Markers are not
usually displayed for programs run off-line.
Show feature deviations - if checked, feature deviations are shown in the model window for points,
curve (GCURVE) and surface (GSURF) features that have had a profile tolerance applied (curve and
surface features are shown as a number of points). The normal direction and the deviation from the point
nominal are shown. If the feature deviations do not display when you check this box, re-run the part
program. You can also set this option on the Open Inspection (Advanced) dialog box, Model tab page,
when starting the part program.
Normal vector - the line in the model window showing the normal direction of the feature. Type in a
width for the line in the associated line width field. To show normal vectors through obscuring faces of
the model (for example if the model is displayed using render or hidden line from the model window
toolbar), ensure the Z-order display box is not checked. If you check this box, normal vectors will not be
shown through obscuring faces. Select Line to show the vector as a line and select Arrow to show the
CAMIO Windows
71
vector as an arrow.
Raw marker - for points created using the Compare to CAD (GEOM) function (for details of this function
see Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378 ). It shows the uncompensated touch value (i.e. the
centre of the probe tip), displayed as a cross (+) in the plane of the screen. To display the raw markers,
check the Display box. You can set the size and line width. You can also choose a colour, by clicking
Colour to display the Change Item Colour dialog box. You can select any colour from this palette or
prepare a custom colour. To show raw markers through obscuring faces of the model (for example if the
model is displayed using render or hidden line), ensure the Z-order display box is not checked. If you
check this box, raw markers will not be shown through obscuring faces.
Differences
The differences between the actual data recorded from the part on the CMM and the nominal profile of
the CAD model. The differences are represented by lines which project from the surface of the CAD
model. To display the differences, check the Display box. You can set the size and line width. To
show differences through obscuring faces of the model (for example if the model is displayed using
render or hidden line), ensure the Z-order display box is not checked. If you check this box, differences
will not be shown through obscuring faces. Use the adjacent options to determine the shape drawn for
the differences.
None - displays no differences on the surface of the CAD model.
Marks - displays differences in the plane of the screen. The marks vary according to the difference and
feature type. A point with a profile tolerance is normally displayed as a diamond shape. The colour of
the diamond reflects the tolerance bands defined using the Report Options dialog box. For curve
(GCURVE) features, one mark is displayed for each nominal touch (PTMEAS) point. But a point created
using the GEOM (Compare to CAD) command, and with a profile tolerance, is displayed as a symbol
depending on the difference. These symbols are:
- outside high tolerance
- between 50 and 100% of high tolerance
- within 50% of tolerance
- between 50 and 100% of low tolerance
- outside low tolerance

Patches - squares displayed perpendicular to the normal of the point (i.e. in the plane of the surface) in
a colour depending on the difference (reflecting the tolerance bands defined using the Report Options
dialog box).
XYZ line - three lines to represent the difference in the X, Y and Z axes. The lines are drawn in red.
See Also:
Tolerance Colours - Report Options Dialog Box 501
Program Inspection - Model Options
Model Window
49

54
171
72
6.2.16 Manual Inspection - Display Settings Dialog Box

Manual Inspection - Display Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Manual Inspection tab page of the Display Settings dialog box to define how the target for the
probe is indicated when carrying out manual inspections. The target can be indicated either by an arrow
or by a line. The colours used for the arrow or line are set in the CAD Colours dialog box. If no touch
(PTMEAS) points are defined, the arrow or line points to the feature in the model window. If PTMEAS
points are defined, the arrow or line points to the next PTMEAS point.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Display Settings, click Manual Inspection in the left-hand list

Create target arrow - if checked, an arrow is displayed in the model window to indicate the target for
the manual measurement. Otherwise a line is used.
Arrow length scale - move the slider to the left to display a short arrow and to the right to display a
long arrow in the model window.
Arrow radius scale - move the slider to the left to display a thin arrow and to the right to display a fat
arrow.
CAMIO Windows
73
See Also:
998
CAD Colours Dialog Box
6.2.17 CAD Colours Dialog Box

CAD Colours Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the CAD Colours dialog box to define the colours used to display items in the model window. When
you change a colour, its icon colour is changed and the colour of the item in the model window is
changed too.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Colours

Category - select a category from the drop-down list. The display items available in that category are
shown.
List of display items - the items in the selected category are displayed in their current colour. Doubleclick an item to display the Color dialog box where you can select any colour for the item from this
palette or prepare a custom colour.
Defaults - resets all the items to their default settings.
See Also:
Model Window
49
6.2.18 Model Explorer Dialog Box

74
Purpose
Use the Model Explorer dialog box to organise the layers of information in the model window. You can
switch layers on and off to give a clear view of an area or detail of the CAD model, and delete layers. All
the layers assigned to the current CAD model are listed. If the box associated with a layer is checked,
then that layer is visible on the CAD model. If it is not checked, then the layer is invisible. Note that
when adding slices to the CAD model using the Add Slice dialog box 983 or the Add Circular Slice dialog
box 986 , slices are only added to visible layers. If the model or any layers are not displayed in the model
window, slices are not added to them.
You can use the right-click menu on a highlighted layer to access the options available to that layer.
You can also right-click on the entities within a layer, for example to hide individual point clouds.
You can create new layers using the Organise Geometry dialog box.
Note that the probe path, machine simulation and machine volume are only displayed in the model
window if they are enabled on the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Model window, right-click, select Model Explorer

System layers - these layers are created by CAMIO and cannot be deleted, renamed or moved.
Features measured, constructed or defined in CAMIO are placed on their respective layers when the
program is run. When a probe .sat file is opened in the model window, it is added to the probe layer.
User layers - you can delete, rename and hide these layers. Layers which are defined in the current
CAD model are considered to be user layers. Slices added using the Add Slice dialog box are given a
suffix of .MTS. The .MTS suffix is retained even if you rename the slices.
Deleted items - the items deleted from the user or system layers. Right-click on an item (or selected
items) to restore it to the layer it was deleted from, or to delete it permanently.
See Also:
CAMIO Windows
Model Window
75
49
Organise Geometry Dialog Box
991
63
Add Slice Dialog Box
6.3
Explorer Window
Explorer Window
The Explorer window displays the tolerances and actual features present in the part program. Click a
feature to display its details in the Grid window 76 . You can drag-and-drop tolerances onto features,
and see the result in the Grid window.
Right-click on a feature to display a pop-up menu with the following options:
Output - displays the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box
465
so that you can output feature data.
Print Feature - with graphical reporting enabled, prints a profile report for the displayed feature to the
printer specified using the Print Set-Up option from the File menu, and to an html file saved by default in
C:\LK\Appdata\Repoprting\Templates. For details see Profile Report from the Model Window 52 .
See Also:
CAMIO Windows
6.4
Sensors Window
Sensors Window
50
76
The Sensors window option is available from the View menu 116 when sensor management is enabled on
the Miscellaneous tab page 120 of the Configuration dialog box. The Sensors window allows you to
manage and organise your sensor data, including:
Create new probe definitions (i.e. define the physical probe structure)
Create new sensors (i.e. define the probe at specified angles)
Add sensors to your part program
Define calibration spheres
For details of how to use the Sensors window, see Using the Sensors Window.
6.5
Grid Window
6.5.1
Grid Window
Grid Window
The Grid window contains a grid of data and a pop-up menu of options for managing the grid (seeUsing
the Grid Window 78 ). The contents of the grid reflect the feature being inspected. It acts as an instant
display for touch data and can also be used for entering data. It also displays data for measured or
constructed features if you click them in the Explorer window 75 .
Right-click in the Grid window to display the pop-up menu which lists the feature and tolerance
parameters available for the selected feature type. There is also an option to customise 77 the
appearance of the Grid window.
CAMIO Windows
See Also:
CAMIO Windows
6.5.2
46
Customise Grid View Dialog Box

Customise Grid View Dialog Box
Purpose
77
78
Use the Customise Grid View dialog box to specify the appearance of the Grid window, including font
and cell colours. Use the
(Browse) buttons to browse for the fonts and colours.
Navigation
Right-click in the Grid window, select Customise from the pop-up menu

Fixed width - if checked, the cells of the Grid are set to a fixed width. Otherwise, they are set to a
proportion of the Grid, so that they expand to fill the Grid.
Font - the font of the text in the Grid.
Title cell colour - the colour of the cells in the Grid containing the column and row headings, e.g.
Actual, Nominal.
Fixed cell colour - the colour of the cells in the Grid containing information generated by CAMIO, e.g.
Actual values, Deviations.
Editable cell colour - the colour of the cells in the Grid containing information that you can change, e.
g. Nominal values, Low tol values, High tol values.
See Also:
Grid Window
6.5.3
76
Using the Grid Window

The Grid window provides options for selecting and displaying feature data. As you measure a feature,
data is added to the Grid. You can also display the data from features you have already measured or
constructed, and type in nominal data. The name of the current feature is displayed at the top of the
window. You can change this by overtyping it. For multiple features, if displaying your program as
descriptive text (i.e. the block view), a Title field is available so you can type in a title that is displayed in
the part program as a title for a block of features that are inspected together.
When measuring a feature, when you have added the data you require to the Grid window, as described
below, you can click
(Apply) on the toolbar. Commands for the feature inspection are added to
your part program depending on your selections in the Grid window. For example, an OUTPUT
command is added for any tolerances you have specified, and if you selected a fitting algorithm, a
GEOALG command is added. If you have selected any filters for scan data collected by tactile probe
scanning, a CONST/feature,F( ),TR command is added to your part program to construct the feature
from the filtered data. In this case, two FEAT/ commands are added to your part program, one for the
feature constructed from the filtered data, and one for the unfiltered feature (the name of this feature is
the same as the name of the constructed feature, but prefixed with UF_).
Adding feature and tolerance parameters to the Grid
CAMIO Windows
79
You can add or remove rows of data for

a particular feature type using the popup menu. Your changes are saved in
the Microsoft Windows registry and
applied to all features of that type.
Click an option on the menu to check or
uncheck it, to add it to or remove it from
the Grid window.
Displaying data from existing features

You can use the Grid to display the feature data for a measured or constructed feature. Select a feature
from the Explorer window 75 . The data for the feature is displayed in the Grid. If using the Block View
Editor 203 , when you display a feature in the Teach Path view its data is displayed in the Grid, or, for
multiple features, you can highlight one of the features in the Teach Path view to display its data in the
Grid.
Adding nominal data to the Grid
When you select a feature type to inspect, you can type its nominal values into the Grid. Click in the
fields in the Nominal column, and use the keyboard to delete the existing nominal values and type in
new ones, then click
(Apply) in any field you have changed in the Grid.
Adding tolerances
For any particular feature or tolerance parameters, you may be able to set low and high tolerances to
evaluate the feature. Double-click or press the space bar in a field in the Hi tol or Low tol column to drop
down a list of existing tolerances for the parameter, and to access a New option for creating new
tolerances. You can select an existing tolerance from the list, or click New to display the appropriate
tolerance command 412 dialog box for creating a new tolerance. When you have taken enough points for
the feature and clicked Apply, the tolerances are output.
Removing tolerances
Double-click or press the space bar in a field in the Hi tol or Low tol column to drop down the list of
tolerances. Select the blank entry in the list. This only removes the tolerances from the feature. It does
not delete any tolerance definitions.
Deviation, Status, Error columns
The Deviation column shows the difference between the actual and nominal values. The Status column
shows you where the value lies within the tolerance zone. A < means that the value is below the low
tolerance value and a > means that the value is above the high tolerance value. Otherwise the position
of the | character shows where the value lies within the tolerance zone. The Error column shows the
amount by which the parameter is out of tolerance. If material condition bonuses apply, this may be
zero even though the deviation is greater than the nominal tolerance value. (When you specify a material
condition as part of a tolerance, a bonus may be applied to the feature increasing the size of its
tolerance zone.) Once you have taken the minimum number of points when measuring a feature, but
80
before you click Apply, you can change the tolerance limits and see the results reflected in the Status
and Error columns.
Changing the feature direction
Double-click in the nominal I, J or K fields in the Grid window when measuring a feature, to display the
Direction dialog box 81 or the Direction dialog box for line, edge point or slot features 81 , where you can
change the feature direction.
Setting the direction of a line
Use the Directions (
) button to change the nominal line direction. Click the button to
cycle through the available directions.
Bounding lines and cylinders
For line and cylinder features, use the Bound/Unbound (
) buttons to specify
whether the feature is bounded or unbounded. This changes the feature and tolerance parameters
available to line features accordingly. Bounded lines and cylinders are displayed from the start to the
end. Unbounded lines and cylinders are displayed at a length specified on theFeature Display tab page
66 , Display Settings dialog box.
Selecting the feature type for inner and outer features
For feature types that can be inner or outer features, for example circles, select inner or outer using the
appropriate button (
or
).
Applying rounding
To apply rounding, select the Rounding option from the pop-up menu. This is available when measuring
features, not when displaying data from features you have already measured. The Rounding option adds
a Rounding row to the grid. To enable rounding, ensure that the button at the end of the row is set to
Enabled, by clicking it to toggle between Enabled and Disabled. You can set rounding values for length,
angle and direction, by typing in the values then clicking
in any field you have changed in the Grid.
The ijk values are rounded such that the rotation angles around the axes are rounded to the nearest x
degrees. Rounding is only available on-line when taking touch points to teach the inspection of the
feature.
Viewing the number of sample points
To display the number of touch points taken, select the Number of sample points from the pop-up menu.
The number is displayed when displaying data from features you have already measured.
Selecting fitting algorithms and filters
To apply a fitting algorithm and filters when measuring features, select the Fitting algorithm, Elimination
filter and Filter options from the pop-up menu as required, and enable them by ensuring that the buttons
at the ends of these rows are set to Enabled, by clicking them to toggle between Enabled and Disabled.
Select the values for these options in the fields available in these rows. Some of the options display
scrolling lists to select from, and some require you to type in the values then click
in any fields you
have changed. For details of the available fitting algorithms and filters, see the Geometry Algorithm
dialog box 756 .
Adding a comment
To add a comment to be output with the feature, select the Comment option from the pop-up menu. This
is available when measuring features, not when displaying data from features you have already
measured. This adds a Comment row to the Grid. Type in the comment and click the adjacent button
to select where the comment is output to. There are three options: Operator outputs the comment to
the screen when the program is run; Output outputs the comment to the .res file (see File Types 36 );
Both outputs the comment to the screen and to the .res file.
See Also:
Outputting Data
449
CAMIO Windows
6.5.4
81
Direction Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Direction dialog box to change the direction of the feature in the Grid window and the Properties
window. Select one of the X, Y or Z buttons, or select Other then type in direction vectors for the feature
in the i,j,k fields. You can use the
to the feature.
(Reverse) button to reverse the direction of the normal relative
Navigation
Double-click in the nominal I, J or K fields in the Grid window when teaching a feature (note that a
different Direction dialog box is displayed for line, edge point and slot features)
Click the
button for Direction in the Properties window when teaching a feature (note that a
different Direction dialog box is displayed for line, edge point and slot features)
See Also:
Direction Dialog Box for Line, Edge Point and Slot Features
Grid Window
81
76
Properties Window
6.5.5
82
Purpose
Use the Direction dialog box to change the direction of the feature in the Grid window and the Properties
window. Select one of the X, Y or Z buttons, or select Other then type in direction vectors for the feature
in the i,j,k fields. Use the
(Reverse) button to reverse the directions.
For line features, use the options in the left-hand box to modify the line direction and use the options in
the right-hand box to modify the line normal.
For edge point features, use the options in the left-hand box to modify the edge normal direction, and
use the options in the right-hand box to modify the surface normal direction. Use the central
button to swap the edge and surface normals.
For slot features, use the options in the left-hand box to modify the surface normal and use the options
in the right-hand box to modify the orientation of the slot.
Navigation
Double-click in the nominal I, J or K fields, or the Normal i,j,k fields in the Grid window when
teaching a line, edge point or slot feature
Click the
button for Direction or Orientation in the Properties window when teaching a line, edge
point or slot feature
See Also:
Grid Window
81
76
Properties Window
6.6
Output Window
Output Window
The Output window displays the DMIS and vendor format (VFORM) output from the DMIS program. The
data displayed depends on what you have set up in the Format Output dialog box 478 and the Vendor
Output Format dialog box 480 .
CAMIO Windows
83
The columns of information are the same as those in the .res file (they have headings in the .res file:
see File Types 36 ). From left to right, the columns are Actual, Nominal, Lo-tol, High-tol, Deviation,
Graphic and Error. Not all columns may be present.
See Also:
Outputting Data
449
Printing Formatted Output as the Program Runs
6.7
Context Window
Context Window
The Context window displays the number of points and moves taken when inspecting a feature. You can
also see the minimum number of points required to define the feature.
The Context window option is available from the View menu
See Also:
CAMIO Windows
6.8
Constant Reporting Window

116
when inspecting features.
84
The Constant Reporting window displays a report on the current inspection that is generated as the
inspection is run. It allows you to output text and graphic reports on measured component features. For
details of report types click here 491 . Text reports output a view of the model window with labels
containing data on the measured features. The labels and their leader lines are arranged automatically
around the model. Label styles, report styles and data content can all be configured to your own
requirements.
The report includes all the features inspected and output so far. If feature deviations are shown in the
model window, these are included in the report. You can report different data as your inspection runs by
changing the report configuration in the Constant Report dialog box 493 (at a Pause command in the
program).
To expand the report to fit the Constant Reporting window, click on the report. This increases its size in
steps to its maximum size, then decreases it in steps to its minimum size. Note that to do this, the
Orbit, Pan, Zoom and Zoom to Box options must not be selected.
Use the options on the toolbar in the Constant Reporting window to define the content and appearance of
the constant report.
Report options 492
Used to manipulate the content of the report.
Print, save and page selection options 509

Used to print and save the report, and to select different pages of the report into the Constant Reporting
window.
View options
492
CAMIO Windows
85
Used to display, resize and position the CAD model on the report.
See Also:
Reporting
490
Constant Reporting - Troubleshooting

Model Window
510
49
CAMIO Windows
6.9
Collisions Window
6.9.1
Collisions Window
Collisions Window
The Collisions window displays information about any collisions detected when running the DMIS
program with the CMM off-line.
For collisions to be displayed:
Collision detection must be enabled in the Simulation tab page
box. The option to Use simplified probe must NOT be checked
A model must be present in the model window
63
of the Display Settings dialog
49
The CMM must be off-line

Fix - displays the virtual handbox (joystick box) 189 so that you can move the probe to avoid the
collision. When you click Manual Point (Teach Move) on the handbox, an appropriate GOTO statement
is inserted into your program. As you fix the collisions, they are removed from the display.
Show Code - highlights the corresponding DMIS program line on the part program window
for the collision highlighted in the Collisions window.
45
Show Route - displays the Program Call Route dialog box 86 , which shows any sub-program
you are running and the line number in that program where the collision occurred.
Clear Window - clears the Collisions window. The window is cleared automatically when the
86
program is restarted but not if you step commands or run the program after stopping it. This button
allows you to clear the window when stepping or running the program.
See Also:
Collision Detection
186
Program Inspection - Offline Options
183
CAMIO Windows
6.9.2
Program Call Route Dialog Box

Program Call Route Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Program Call Route dialog box to show the sub-program running when a collision occurred, and
the line number in that program where the collision occurred.
Navigation
Highlight a collision in the Collisions window, click
(Show Route)
See Also:
Collisions Window
6.10
186
DRO Window
DRO Window
CAMIO Windows
87
The DRO (digital read-out) shows the CMM position in relation to the co-ordinate system selected using
the buttons at the top of the DRO window. The DRO defaults to part co-ordinates. The buttons are (from
left to right) the current inspection datum (pcs), the machine datum (mcs), the rotary table datum and
scale co-ordinates. When measuring a feature in Manual mode using a CMM, the DRO shows the
distance to the touch point on the part.
Note that if you have chosen to rotate the machine axes (by selecting a rotation on the Axis Rotation tab
page of the CMM Configuration dialog box), the mcs values displayed in the DRO are actually the
rotated mcs values (or mcsr values).
DRO settings are stored in the Microsoft Windows registry. Right-click in the DRO to display a pop-up
menu from which you can access a Display Settings dialog box to change the background and text
colours and font. You can change the X, Y and Z fields individually, or you can change all three fields at
once using the Properties option. (If you have selected the rotary table datum button, a W field is also
displayed for the rotary axis.)
See Also:
Co-ordinate Systems
CAMIO Windows
38
46
88
6.11
Planning Window
6.11.1 Planning Window

Planning Window
Purpose
Use the Planning window to view and select features imported from a plan file of nominal inspection data
(for details of planning files, see File Types 36 ) or from PMI data extraction. You can filter the list of
features by selecting a filter from the drop-down list. Filters are created using the Plan Filter dialog box
89 . To remove a filter from the list of features, select the blank entry in the drop-down list.
You can drag-and-drop single or multiple features that you wish to inspect from the Planning window into
the Teach Path view. The inspection path is added between the features in the model window, and you
can drag the handle markers on the path to move it. CAMIO adds GOTO moves to the Teach Path as
you do this.
Warning:
If you wish to view all of the features you have imported, ensure you have NOT selected a filter in the
drop-down list at the top of the Planning window.
- any filters applied to the list of features are displayed
here. You can select another filter from the drop-down list.
Filter - click to display the Plan Filter dialog box, where you can filter the
features imported into the Planning window
Delete - deletes highlighted features from the Planning window. Select
the features you wish to delete so that they are highlighted, then click this
button.
Open - displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for a plan
file. The features from the plan file are loaded into the Planning window
and the model window when you open the file.
Save - saves the plan information to a .planning file. The planning file can
be selected on the Offline tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box
when starting a part program. If you select a planning file, it allows you to
continue working with your plan, model and machine.
CAMIO Windows
89
See Also:
PMI Data Extraction
Teach Path View
994
94
Model Window
6.11.2 Plan Filter Dialog Box

Plan Filter Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Plan Filter dialog box to filter the features imported into the Planning window 88 . This also
filters them in the display in the model window 49 . The filter you create here is applied to the features
when you click
(Apply) and is listed in the drop-down list at the top of the Planning window. You
can combine options when creating filters, for example you can filter by both type and name together.
Navigation
Click
in the Planning window
90
Source name - select a source file for the features in the Planning window. Only those features in the
selected source are then available in the Planning window and the model window when you click
(Apply). If you do not select a source file, all features in the Planning window are available.
Filter pending items - if checked, any item that requires further information before it can be executed is
filtered out of the Planning window and model window when you click
(Apply). For example, a
feature which has a tolerance that requires a tolerance definition would be filtered, as would a datum that
requires a feature.
Filter out defined features - if checked, any features executed in the part program, and therefore
present in the database (i.e. those features shown in the Explorer window 75 ), are filtered out of the
Planning window and model window when you click
(Apply).
Filter by name - if checked, you can apply a filter which selects features according to their names.
Starts - select this to select features in the Planning window according to the start of the name. Type in
the start of the name in the box below. For example, if you type in AA, only features that have a name
beginning with AA are displayed in the Planning window and model window when you click
(Apply).
Contains - select this to select features in the Planning window according to the characters that the
name contains. Type in the characters in the box below. For example, if you type in B3, only features
that have a name containing B3 are displayed in the Planning window and model window when you click
(Apply).
Filter by type - if checked, only the features checked in the box below are displayed in the Planning
window and model window when you click
(Apply).
6.11.3 Properties Window

6.11.3.1 Properties Window
Properties Window
The Properties window contains a table of data with options to control these items (see Using the
Properties Window 78 ). The contents of the table reflect the feature being inspected, the method of
inspection, and the measurement tab selected from the main toolbar (Inspect, Scan or Laser). It acts as
a display for measurement data whilst in the teach path and can also be used for entering data.
CAMIO Windows
91
See Also:
CAMIO Windows
46
6.11.3.2 Using the Properties Window
Using the Properties Window

The Properties window provides the ability to change and view feature and measurement properties when
you define a feature. The name of the current feature is displayed in the Identity section near the top of
the window. You can change this by overtyping it.
When measuring a feature, select the feature in the Teach Path view to display information in the
Properties window. When you have made the changes you require, for each of the features in the Teach
Path view, you can click
(Apply) on the toolbar. Commands for the feature inspections are added
to your part program depending on your selections in the Properties window. For example, an OUTPUT
command is added for any tolerances you have specified, laser commands are added if you are using a
laser scanner, and if you selected a fitting algorithm, a GEOALG command is added. If you have
92
selected any filters for scan data collected by tactile probe scanning, a CONST/feature,F( ),TR
command is added to your part program to construct the feature from the filtered data. In this case, two
FEAT/ commands are added to your part program, one for the feature constructed from the filtered data,
and one for the unfiltered feature (the name of this feature is the same as the name of the constructed
feature, but prefixed with UF_).
If you select multiple features in the Teach Path view, the Properties window displays the information
common to the selected features. Any changes you make will be applied to all the selected features.
Options available in the Properties window
The options available in the
Properties window depend on the
sensor and feature types selected
and the available tolerances.
Adding nominal data to the Properties Table

When you select a feature type to inspect, you can type its nominal values into the Properties table.
Click in the fields in the Geometric Items section, and use the keyboard to delete the existing nominal
values and type in new ones.
Changing the feature direction
In the Geometric Items section, click in the Direction field, then click
(more) when measuring a
feature, to display the Direction dialog box 81 or the Direction dialog box for line, edge point or slot
features 81 , where you can change the feature direction.
CAMIO Windows
93
Selecting the feature type for inner and outer features

For feature types that can be inner or outer features, for example circles, select inner or outer using the
drop-down list in the Geometric Items section.
Bounding lines and cylinders
For line and cylinder features, use the Bound/Unbound drop-down list in the Bound section to specify
whether the feature is bounded or unbounded. This changes the feature and tolerance parameters
available to line features accordingly. Bounded lines and cylinders are displayed from the start to the
end. Unbounded lines and cylinders are displayed at a length specified on the Feature Display tab page
66 , Display Settings dialog box.
Selecting Compare to CAD
For point features and laser surface measurements, select true using the drop-down list in the
Geometric Items section to compare the selected features to the CAD model in the Model window.
Changing the measurement method
Clicking the Method drop-down list in the Mode section allows you to change whether relative
measurement 393 will be used for the feature. The options available are:
Basic - select this if no relative measurement is required.
Relative to surface - select this to take a specified number of points at a specified distance outside a
target area. This will be used to define a nominal target surface.
Relative to feature - select this to adjust the position of the nominal measurement target, based on
the position and orientation of a chosen feature.
Changing the measurement method changes the options available in the Mode section to allow you to
set up additional parameters where relative measurement has been selected.
Changing the measurement mode
Use the Mode drop-down list in the Mode section to select the operation mode for CAMIO:
Manual - puts the machine into Manual mode and creates a manual part program. When you run
the program, you must manually take the points using the handbox. The number of points to take is
displayed in the Points field and you can change it there before you click
(Apply).
Program - puts the program into Program mode.

Auto (or CNC) - puts the program into Automatic mode. If the feature being inspected does not have
a 'canned cycle' (internal measuring routine), the mode is Program. If the feature has a canned
cycle, the mode is Automatic, unless you have moves and touch points in the Teach Path view. In
this case, the mode is Program.
In Auto mode, when you click
(Apply), CAMIO automatically measures the feature, unless
you have already measured the part by using the handbox and the feature does not have a canned
cycle, or you have added moves and touch points. When you run the program, CAMIO
automatically measures the feature (unless the feature does not have a canned cycle, or you have
added moves and touch points). If the CMM is off-line,collision detection 186 is enabled on the
Simulation tab page 63 in the Display Settings dialog box and a model is present in the model
window 49 , any collisions are shown in the Collisions window 186 .
Editing the number of points
The minimum number of points required to define the feature type is set on the Teach Properties dialog
box 134 . When available, you can specify the number of touch points to take in the Points field in the
Mode section. If so, this overrides the value in the Teach Properties dialog box.
Adding tolerances
The tolerances available for the selected feature are shown in the Tolerance Output section. For any
particular feature or tolerance parameters, you may be able to set low and high tolerances to evaluate
the feature. Use the drop-down list to select from the existing tolerances for the parameter. If there are
no items in the drop-down list for a tolerance, a new tolerance must first be defined using the Output
section of the main toolbar.
94
Removing tolerances
Click a field in the Tolerance Output section to drop down the list of tolerances. Select the blank entry
in the list. This only removes the tolerances from the feature. It does not delete any tolerance
definitions.
Selecting fitting algorithms and filters
To apply a fitting algorithm and filters when measuring features, change the options in the Filter section
as required. Some of the options display scrolling lists to select from, and some require you to type in
the values. For details of the available fitting algorithms and filters, see the Geometry Algorithm dialog
box 756 .
Modifying laser sensor parameters
When the feature measurement is created using the Laser tab, the Laser Items section is available in
the Properties window. This allows you to change whether the saturation filter is enabled, the minimum
quality for the filter, the minimum signal strength and the point and line spacing for the feature that is to
be measured. The Laser settings in the Properties window are predictive settings which are based on
feature size and type. For details of the purpose of the parameters, see the Laser 2D Preview view 826
and the Distance Between Stripes dialog box 858 .
See Also:
Outputting Data
449
120
6.12
Teach Path View
6.12.1 Teach Path View

Teach Path View
Purpose
As you create your part program, the Teach Path view shows the touches, moves and any changes to
settings in the order you made them. You can use the handbox to take points and add moves, or you
can use the options available from the toolbar for the feature type. For details see Setting Up the
CAMIO Windows
95
Inspection Path 275 . If you have selected Program Text from the View menu, the Teach Path view shows
DMIS commands. Otherwise, it shows descriptive commands.
The commands you add into the Teach Path view are inserted into your program when you click
(Apply). You can use the toolbar options for the feature to add commands to the Teach Path view, and
the pop-up menu options in the Teach Path view to manipulate those commands. Drag-and-drop the
commands in the Teach Path view to re-order them. Commands are inserted into the Teach Path view
immediately before the insertion point
, and you can drag-and-drop this into another position in the
list of commands.
You can select touches on the model by clicking them whilst holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key.
This highlights them in the Teach Path view.
See Also:
Teach Path View - Pop-up Menu
Part Program Window
95
45

Scanning
40
780
View Menu
6.12.2 Teach Path View - Pop-up Menu

Purpose
You can drag-and-drop the commands in the Teach Path view to rearrange the order. You can also use
the buttons on the CAMIO CMM handbox to delete items from the Teach Path view (for details see The
CAMIO CMM Handbox Buttons 153 ).
The right-click pop-up menu in the Teach Path view provides other options for manipulating the
inspection path.
The following options are available (not all options are available for all commands):
Copy - copies the highlighted commands. The name of copied path elements is suffixed with _n.
96
Paste - inserts the copied commands immediately before the highlighted commands.
Delete - deletes the highlighted commands.
Reverse Approach - reverses the approach path of the sensor to the highlighted touch point.
Normalise to Feature - make the vector of a taught touch point perpendicular to the measurement
surface - see Normalise to feature 97 ..
Insert Break - inserts a SCAN/PAUSE command immediately above the highlighted command.
Explode - when building curves and grids on the CAD model to define the inspection path (see Surface
Measurement - Adding Points to the Model 387 ), lists the individual points that make up the curve or grid.
This option can also be used with other features in the Teach Path view, e.g. arcs, CAD curves, to
remove the inspection path information whilst leaving the touch points on the CAD model.
CAD
Use the CAD options to adjust the location of touch points with respect to a selected surface. You do
not have to select a surface, but if you do not, CAMIO may not select your required surface and the
touch point may not move.
Snap to CAD - if the highlighted touch points are not exactly on the CAD model, moves the touch points
to the selected surface.
Orientate to CAD - orientates the highlighted touch points perpendicular to the selected surface on the
CAD model.
Type - select Path to convert the highlighted arc to a scan path. This deletes any individual touch
points for the arc.
Split - splits the highlighted scan path into two paths of equal length, inserting a SCAN/PAUSE
command between the two paths.
Join - joins the highlighted scan paths together. If there is a SCAN/PAUSE command between the
paths, you must delete this before you can join the paths. Paths are joined with an arc.
Smooth - smooths out any angles between multiple scan lines by replacing the angles with arcs to
speed up scanning.
Reverse - reverses the direction of the probe path for taking points.
Reverse Normal - reverses the normal direction of the highlighted feature.
Reverse Normal Direction - reverses the normal direction of the highlighted edge point.
Reverse Surface Direction - reverses the surface direction of the highlighted edge point.
Swap Normal and Surface - swaps the normal and surface vectors of the highlighted edge point.
Inner/Outer - defines the highlighted features as inner or outer.
Polar/Cartesian - toggles the co-ordinates of the highlighted features between polar and Cartesian coordinates.
Order - arranges the highlighted features in the order selected: alphanumerically; or by the X, Y or Z coordinate; or reverses the displayed order; or orders the features by the shortest route through the
highlighted features starting with the first highlighted feature.
Properties - displays the appropriate dialog box for the highlighted command.
Insert Before - moves the
(insertion point) before the currently-selected line.
Show/Hide - toggles the display of the group of features. Hidden features are greyed out in the Teach
Path view and are not displayed in the model window. Features must be grouped before the Show/Hide
options can be applied to them.
New Group - displays the Group dialog box 98 , where you can create a group to act as a container for
selected features. This can help you to order the features in the Teach Path view. The New Group
CAMIO Windows
option adds an empty group at the
97
(insertion point).
Group - displays the Group dialog box, where you can create a group to act as a container for selected
features. This can help you to order the features in the Teach Path view. The Group option adds a
group that contains the highlighted features from the Teach Path view.
Ungroup - removes the group. (This does not delete the features from the Teach Path view.)
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
6.12.3 Normalise to Feature

Normalise to Feature
Purpose
It is not possible to 'teach' touch points perpendicular to the measurement surface (in PROG mode). The
resultant part program is left with touch points which vector at an angle to the measured surface, when
the part program is played back in CNC mode. To improve program performance and minimise
measurement uncertainty errors, these points can be normalised with respect to the surface of the
feature.
Single or multiple points can be normalised in one operation - single click for single touch point
selection, Shift + click to allow a consecutive group of touch points to be selected, ALT + click to select
a non-consecutive group of touch points. Right-click on the selected point(s) to display a pop-up menu
and click the Normalise to Feature option.
The normalisation is based on the current feature nominal values displayed in the grid control. If these
values are manually updated, it is possible to re-edit the calculated touch point nominal values via the
'right click' menu.
Example
98
For a circle feature the touch point X,Y,Z position is maintained and the vector is aligned so that it
passes radially through the circle centre. Diameter adjustments will move along the newly calculated
vector.
6.12.4 Group Dialog Box

Group Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Group dialog box to create a group to act as a container for selected features. This can help
you to order the features in the Teach Path view.
Navigation
Highlight a feature or command in the Teach Path view, right-click and select Group from the pop-up
menu
Double-click on a group in the Teach Path view

Name - type in a name for the group.
Show - if checked, the features in the group are displayed in the model window. Otherwise, the features
are not displayed and are greyed in the Teach Path view.
Apply to sub groups - if checked, the selections in the Group dialog box are applied to any sub-groups.
Colour - displays the Color dialog box where you can select any colour for the inspection path from this
palette or prepare a custom colour.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Model Window
CAMIO Windows
6.13
99
Status Bar
6.13.1 Status Bar

Status Bar
The CAMIO status bar displays the following status information:

Production mode
Displays the current setting for production mode on the Production Mode tab page 132 of the
Configuration dialog box. Click to switch production mode on or off. Production mode increases the
speed of execution of part programs. You can set a part program to run in production mode by checking
the Production mode box on the Program tab page 168 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box.
Cartesian/Polar
Allows you to toggle between Cartesian or polar co-ordinates.
Settings
Displays the Settings dialog box 99 where you can define the system settings for CMM search,
approach and retract distances, etc.
Programming mode (Teach, Command, Insert)
Displays the current programming mode 41 . Click to display the other programming modes, with the
current mode checked. You can select a different mode from this list, if appropriate to your program.
Datum
Displays the name of the current datum. Click to display a list of datums in your program, with the
current datum checked. You can select a different datum from this list.
Probe
DispIays the name of the current sensor (if the name is long, the word 'Probe' is not displayed). Click to
display a list of sensors in your program, with the current sensor checked. You can select a different
sensor from this list. Note that the list shows both S and SA for all defined sensors even if they are not
calibrated. Therefore, the resulting SNSLCT command may perform a calibration.
Co-ordinates X, Y, Z
Displays the current co-ordinates, either from the DRO 86 , or from the cursor. This depends on whether
you have selected Echo DRO or Echo Cursor from the View menu 116 . If you have selected Echo DRO,
and are in Manual mode 40 with the CMM on-line, and are taking touch points on the part, the coordinates show the distance from the probe tip to the target on the part. Note that if you have chosen to
rotate the machine axes (by selecting a rotation on the Axis Rotation tab page of the CMM Configuration
dialog box), the mcs values displayed in the DRO are actually the rotated mcs values (or mcsr values).
Displays the Power User Settings dialog box 103 , where you can define further settings for the
program and the CMM. This is intended for advanced users of CAMIO.
See Also:
6.13.2 Settings Dialog Box

Settings Dialog Box
100
Purpose
Use the Settings dialog box to define the distances the CMM moves in relation to the part. A message
at the bottom of the dialog box tells you what values you can use for the distances. When you click
OK, any settings you have changed are inserted as lines in your part program.
Navigation
Status bar, Settings button

Depth - the distance into a feature (hole, slot, etc.) that the CMM will take the probe to take a point.
From the adjacent drop-down list, select an option which the depth is relative to, or select <none> to
apply the depth relative to the nominal of the feature being measured.
Clearance - the distance from the feature that the CMM uses as a clearance zone when moving the
probe to take another point. This controls the probe path taken when the measurements operate in
Automatic mode 40 . From the adjacent drop-down list, select a feature or datum label which the
clearance zone is relative to, or select <none> to apply the clearance relative to the nominal of the
feature being measured.
Approach (CMM variable STUT) - the distance from the touch point where the probe path becomes
normal to the touch point surface. This controls the probe path taken in automatic vector moves to
touch.
Retract (CMM variables SBAK and SSBAK) - the distance the probe backs off after a touch has been
detected. The distance is set for both scanning backoff (SSBAK) and standard backoff (SBAK). This
controls the probe path for manual and automatic touch.
Search (CMM variable STOT) - the distance the CMM travels after reaching the target touch. This
controls the probe path taken in automatic vector moves to touch. If the probe reaches the target + the
search distance without contacting anything, the CMM stops and issues a NO TOUCH DETECTED
message.
All settings - displays the System Settings dialog box
101
, where you can specify further CMM settings.
See Also:
Status Bar
CAMIO Windows
101
6.13.3 System Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the System Settings dialog box to define the distances the CMM moves in relation to the part, the
speed at which it moves, and the units of measurement (you can also set the units of measurement in
the Units dialog box 748 ). A message at the bottom of the dialog box tells you what values you can use
for the distances. When you click OK, any DMIS settings you have changed are inserted as lines in
your part program.
Navigation
Status bar, Settings, All Settings button

(Note that the Metris CMM driver variables are given for users of LK CMMs.)
102
Speed (Metris CMM driver variable VELV) - the CMM positioning velocity (POSVEL), i.e. the working
velocity of the CMM. This is defined as a percentage of the range set by the high and low values in the
CMM configuration file or I++ server.
Acceleration (Metris CMM driver variable ACCV) - the CMM accelerations for positioning moves
(POSACL), i.e. the working acceleration and deceleration rates of the CMM. This is defined as a
percentage of the range set by the high and low values in the CMM configuration file or I++ server.
Touch velocity (Metris CMM driver variable VELT) - the CMM touch velocity (MESVEL), i.e. the
speed at which the sensor approaches and touches the part.
Scan velocity (Metris CMM driver variable SCVEL) - the CMM velocity during a scan (SCNVEL). In
known path scanning 786 , the probe can slow down from this speed to turn sharp corners. If you enter a
value that is outside the high and low velocity (SCVEL) limits set in the CMM configuration file or I++
server, the CMM issues a warning message and sets the velocity to the appropriate limit.
Scan stop - sets a 3-D box of the dimension specified (measured in the current units) around the coordinate where you want the scan to stop. The dimensions of the box will depend on the scanning
velocity, which determines the distance between individual points taken. If the box is too small for the
set velocity, the probe could 'jump over' the box and continue taking points. If the box is too big, the
scan could stop before all points are taken.
Depth - the distance into a feature (hole, slot, etc.) that the CMM will take the probe to take a point.
From the adjacent drop-down list, select an option which the depth is relative to, or select <none> to
apply the depth relative to the nominal of the feature being measured.
probe to take another point. This controls the probe path taken when the measurements operate in
Automatic mode 40 . From the adjacent drop-down list, select a feature or datum label which the
clearance zone is relative to, or select <none> to apply the clearance relative to the nominal of the
feature being measured.
Approach (Metris CMM driver variable STUT) - the distance from the touch point where the probe
path becomes normal to the touch point surface. This controls the probe path taken in automatic vector
moves to touch.
Search (Metris CMM driver variable STOT) - the distance the CMM travels after reaching the target
touch. This controls the probe path taken in automatic vector moves to touch. If the probe reaches the
target + the search distance without contacting anything, the CMM stops and issues a NO TOUCH
DETECTED message.
Retract (Metris CMM driver variables SBAK and SSBAK) - the distance the probe backs off after a
touch has been detected. The distance is set for both scanning backoff (SSBAK) and standard backoff
(SBAK). This controls the probe path for manual and automatic touch.
Linear units - the units of linear measurement.
Angular units - the units of angular measurement.
Temp. units - the units of temperature.
Commit all - if checked, all the DMIS settings are inserted in your DMIS program before the current
program line when you click OK. Otherwise, only the DMIS settings you have changed are inserted in
your program.
Save - displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save your settings to a .cmm file.
Recall - displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing .cmm file containing
settings you have saved.
See Also:
CMM Menu
File Types
139
36
CAMIO Windows
Status Bar
6.13.4 Power User Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Power User Settings dialog box to view and change various advanced CAMIO settings.
Navigation
Status bar,
button

Current program - displays the current program name and location.
Program mode - the current program mode: Manual, Program or Automatic
40
103
104
Insert mode command for each measured feature - if checked, a Set mode (MODE/) command is
inserted in the part program before the Define feature (FEAT/) command for each measured feature.
Working plane - the current working plane. Required mainly for polar measurements.
Probe compensation - indicates whether probe compensation is on or off. For details of how probe
compensation is applied, see the Probe Compensation dialog box 755 .
Temperature compensation - the current status of the temperature compensation mode: on or off.
Error correction - the current status of the error correction mode: on or off.
CMM status - the current status of the CMM: on-line or off-line.
Fine positioning - the current status of the fine positioning mode: on or off. When fine positioning is
on, the sensor is positioned with high-resolution accuracy at a low velocity after the normal positioning
move.
Commit all - if checked, the settings are written into your current program when you click OK.
Save - displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save your settings to a .cmm file.
Recall - displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing .cmm file containing
settings you have saved.
See Also:
File Types
36
Status Bar
6.14
Menus and Toolbars
6.14.1 Menus and Toolbars

The menu bar contains the following items:

File Menu
105

Quick Access Menu
110
110
Online checkbox - toggle the machine status between on-line and off-line operation.
Run, Step and Emergency Stop Buttons - use these to Run, Step and Stop the current program.
Undo and Redo buttons - use these to undo or redo programming operations such as changing,
inserting or deleting program lines, and performing feature inspection operations.
Main toolbar:
Machine
136
Alignment
Inspect
615
279
Scan
781
Laser
831
CAMIO Windows
Construct
Model
556
962
Point Cloud
Advanced
View Menu
867
890
116
CAMIO Options Menu

Help Menu
105
117
135
There is also a pop-up menu displayed by right-clicking in the model window
49
The toolbar area displays the options for the selected tab on the main toolbar.
6.14.2 File Menu

6.14.2.1 File Menu
File Menu
The File menu (
) is accessed from the CAMIO menu bar, and contains the following options:
New Program
Displays the New Inspection dialog box 164 , where you can create a new program. When you create a
new program, a template of DMIS commands is inserted in your program. If CAMIO cannot find the
DMIS template file that contains these commands, it will create one for you. You can select a different
template from the Template Library on the New Inspection dialog box. If you already have a program
open when you select New Program, the Close Inspection 106 dialog will appear so you can confirm if
you want to save your current program.
Open Program
Displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing DMIS program for execution or
modification. Select the .dmi file or the .btc file, click Open to display the Open Inspection dialog box
166 , where you can define the program parameters.
Restore Program
Displays the Restore Autosaved Program dialog box 108 , where you can select autosaved part programs
and restore them to their original location so that they can be opened again. To switch on the Autosave
function, use the Autosave option on the Editor tab page 131 of the Configuration dialog box.
Close Program
Opens the Close Inspection 106 dialog, where you can control options for closing and saving the current
DMIS program but keeping a CAD model open. See the Close Inspection 106 topic for more information.
Save
Saves the current program and any open modules.
Save As
Displays the Save As dialog box where you can save a copy of the main DMIS program (or the module
currently opened using a CALL/EXTERN command 915 ) and specify the name and location of the copy.
Save Program As Template
Displays the Save Template dialog box 108 . This allows you to save the program as a template (.dmt)
file, so that you can use it to create other, similar programs.
Open Model
Displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing model file. If you select a .sat or .
sab file which has no units currently assigned, the File Units dialog box 965 is displayed. Select the
units. The data in the .sat or .sab file is scaled to the units and all measurement data is displayed in
106
those units. Saving changes to the file also saves the unit system selected.
Close Model
Closes the model currently open in the model window. If you have made changes to the model, you are
prompted to save them, or you can cancel the action and keep the model file open.
Save Model
Saves changes made to the current CAD model file. The file is saved to the default ACIS Binary File (.
sab file). Constructed, measured and nominal features are saved with the model so that they can no
longer be identified as constructed, measured or nominal features.
Save Model As
Displays the Model Save dialog box, where you can save the current model as a specific file type (rather
than the default .sab file), and specify its name and location.
Print Set-Up
Displays the Print Setup dialog box where you can select a printer and specify the paper size and
orientation.
Exit
Closes CAMIO via the Close Inspection 106 dialog. Even if you have not made changes to your part
program, CAD model or Inspection Plan 88 , you have various save options, or you can cancel the action
and return to CAMIO. See the Close Inspection 106 topic for more information.
Recent Files
Lists the four most recently used programs, with the most recent at the top of the list. You can select a
program from this list. You can pin (
) recent files to ensure they remain in the recent files list.
See Also:
File Types
36
Model Window
49
Explorer Window
75
42
Menus and Toolbars

6.14.2.2 Close Inspection
CAMIO Windows
107
Purpose
When you select New, Close, Open, Exit or select a previous program from the recent files list, the save
Session dialog will appear. This dialog has check boxes to control the actions desired when closing or
opening, eg to keep the same CAD model open when loading other programs.
These will be displayed under the following conditions:
A CAD model was open, but was unchanged
No Program was open
A plan was open and the plan had been modified
An unchanged CAD model was open and you clicked File > New. You can opt to keep the same
CAD model open.
In general, if a program, CAD model or plan is open, its corresponding buttons will be available, and if
that item has been modified, then it will default to Save. The "Close CAD Model" buttons are greyed out
and set to Close when you exit CAMIO, as the model should always close on exit.
Navigation
File menu: New Program, Open Program, Close Program, Exit.
See Also:
File Menu
105
108
6.14.2.3 Restore Autosaved Program Dialog Box
Restore Autosaved Program Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Restore Autosaved Program dialog box to retrieve autosaved part programs if CAMIO closes
without saving your current program. The autosaved main program and any sub-routines are restored to
the original location so that you can open them again.
The Autosave function is enabled using the Editor tab page 131 of the Configuration dialog box. If
enabled, the main DMIS program and any open sub-routines are saved at an interval that you specify, in
minutes. The current part program is not overwritten by the autosave because the autosaved files are
stored in C:\LK\Appdata\Camio\Autosave.
Navigation
File menu, Restore Program option

List of autosaved programs - the program and any sub-routines that have been autosaved are listed
and by default are all selected. Uncheck any that you do not wish to restore.
Restore - click to restore the selected autosaved programs. These are restored to the location they
were originally saved into. For each program selected, you are prompted to overwrite the original
program.
6.14.2.4 Save Template Dialog Box
Save Template Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
109
Purpose
Use the Save Template dialog box to save the current program as a template (.dmt) file, so that you can
use it to create other, similar programs. This allows you to group your program templates into
categories (folders). You can add your program templates to the existing categories, or create new
categories.
When you create a new program, you can select a template in the New Inspection dialog box 164 , and
use it as the basis for your new program. If you have grouped your program templates into categories,
this can help you select a template from a suitable category.
Navigation
File menu, Save Program as Template option

Template root folder - the location of the DMIS template files. You can use the adjacent browse
button to change the location.
List of templates - the list of templates in the template root folder. Double-click a folder to display its
contents. Highlight a folder to select it so that you can add your program to it as a template (.dmt) file.
Right-click a folder display a pop-up menu. The following options are available:
Rename - allows you to rename the highlighted folder.
Delete - deletes the highlighted folder.
New Folder - displays the New Folder dialog box, where you can create a new folder under the
highlighted folder.
New template name - type in a name for your new template (.dmt) file.
Template description - type in a description of your template.
See Also:
110
File Types
36
File Menu
6.15

The Quick Access toolbar gives you easy access to commonly used commands. Using the Quick
Access tab page 112 of the Quick Access menu, you can customise the commands available in the
toolbar to suit your inspection needs.
In the example picture, the toolbar contains the following CAMIO commands:
Inspect Point (blue icon)
Inspect Circle (blue icon)
Construct Circle (green icon)
Add Circular Slice (gold icon)
Output Feature
In CAMIO, icons in this toolbar (and the main toolbar and model window) are colour-coded according to
their purpose. All measure icons are blue, construction icons are green and CAD based icons are gold.
This allows similar icons to be easily distinguished.
See Also:
6.16
45
Quick Access Menu
6.16.1 Quick Access Menu

Quick Access Menu
The Quick Access menu is accessed from the menu bar and allows you to customize the layout of the
Ribbon toolbar (including minimizing it), add keyboard shortcuts and create your own toolbars.
Selecting or deselecting any user defined toolbars allows them to be shown or hidden, and you can
choose to display the Quick Access menu and toolbar above or below the Ribbon toolbar. Selecting
More Commands brings up a dialog box that contains the following tabs:
Toolbars
111
Commands
112
Quick Access
112
CAMIO Windows
Keyboard
Menus
111
113
114
Options
115
See Also:
45
6.16.2 Quick Access - Toolbars

Quick Access - Toolbars
Purpose
Use the Toolbars tab page to manage the toolbars at the top of the main window. To display a toolbar,
check the box next to that toolbar (you cannot uncheck the box next to The Ribbon toolbar, although
this can be minimized using the Quick Access menu 110 drop-down list).
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Toolbars tab page

New - allows you to create a new, user-defined toolbar. The toolbar can then be set up by selecting
items from the Commands tab page and dragging them onto the toolbar.
Rename - allows you to rename an existing user-defined toolbar (you cannot rename the Ribbon
Toolbar).
Delete - allows you to delete an existing user-defined toolbar (you cannot delete the Ribbon Toolbar).
Reset -
112
6.16.3 Quick Access - Commands

Quick Access - Commands
Purpose
Use the Commands tab page to add or remove any of the listed commands onto a currently displayed
toolbar (both user defined, and the Ribbon toolbar). To add a command, select the category from the left
pane, then select a command from the right pane and drag it onto the required toolbar. To remove a
command, click and drag the command from the toolbar onto the dialog box.
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Commands tab page
See Also:
45
Quick Access - Toolbars
6.16.4 Quick Access - Quick Access

Quick Access - Quick Access
CAMIO Windows
113
Purpose
Use the Quick Access tab page to manage the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the main window.
Select a category from the drop-down list. The available commands are displayed in the left-hand pane.
Select a command and click the Add button to add this command to the Quick Access toolbar 110 . To
remove a command, select it from the right-hand pane and click the Remove button. To restore the
Quick Access menu to the default state click the Reset button. Use the check box to determine
whether the Quick Access menu will be shown above or below the Ribbon toolbar.
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Quick Access tab page
6.16.5 Quick Access - Keyboard

Quick Access - Keyboard
114
Purpose
Use the Keyboard tab page to manage keyboard shortcuts for commands within CAMIO.
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Keyboard tab page

Category - use the drop-down list to select a category.
Commands - shows the available commands for the selected category.
Description - displays a comment describing the selected command.
Key assignments - displays any keys currently assigned to the command.
Press new shortcut key - use the keyboard to specify a new keyboard shortcut for the command.
Keyboard shortcuts can be up to two sequential keystrokes, for example (P, T), or up to four
simultaneous keystrokes, for example (Ctrl+Shift+Alt+P).
Assign - assigns the new keyboard shortcut to the command.
Remove - removes a keyboard shortcut from a command.
Reset All - resets all keyboard shortcut assignments.
6.16.6 Quick Access - Menus

Quick Access - Menus
CAMIO Windows
Purpose
This tab page is not currently used.
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Menus tab page

Application Menus Context Menus -
6.16.7 Quick Access - Options

Quick Access - Options
115
116
Purpose
Use the Options tab page to customize the appearance of the menus and toolbars.
Navigation
Quick Access menu, More Commands, select the Options tab page

Always show full menus Show full menus after a short delay Reset menu and toolbar usage data Large icons Show Screen Tips on toolbars - check the box to show screen tips for all menu items.
Show shortcut keys in Screen Tips box - check the box to display any assigned keyboard shortcuts
in the screen tips.
Menu animations - use the drop-down list to change how the menus appear.
6.17
View Menu
View Menu
The View menu is accessed from the CAMIO menu bar, and contains the following options:
Collisions - toggles the Collisions window
186
on and off.
DRO - toggles the DRO window 86 on and off. Note that if you have chosen to rotate the machine axes
(by selecting a rotation on the Axis Rotation tab page of the CMM Configuration dialog box), the mcs
CAMIO Windows
117
values displayed in the DRO are actually the rotated mcs values (or mcsr values).
Explorer - toggles the Explorer window
on and off.
75
Graphic Report - toggles graphical reporting in the model window on and off.
Laser 2D - toggles the Laser 2D Preview view
Model - toggles the model window
Output - toggles the Output window
49
82
826
on and off.
on and off.
on and off.
Properties - toggles the Properties window
90
Planning - toggles the Planning window
on and off.
88
Program - toggles the part program window

Report Grid - toggles the Grid window
76
45
on and off.
on and off.
on and off.
Constant Reporting - toggles the Constant Reporting window
83
on and off.
Sensors - available when sensor management is enabled. Toggles the Sensors window
Context - available when inspecting features. Toggles the Context window
83
75
on and off.
on and off.
Echo Cursor - displays the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the cursor position in the status bar.
Echo DRO - displays the X, Y, Z co-ordinates from the DRO (digital read-out window) in the status bar.
Load - displays the Load Layout dialog box, where you can browse for a previously saved layout of your
CAMIO screen.
Save - displays the Save Layout dialog box, where you can save the current layout of your CAMIO
screen. More information can be found in the Setting Up the CAMIO Layout 44 topic.
See Also:
File Types
36
Menus and Toolbars
104
6.18
CAMIO Options Menu
6.18.1 CAMIO Options Menu

CAMIO Options Menu
The CAMIO options menu is accessed from the CAMIO menu bar, and contains the following options:
CMM Configure
If you have appropriate user privileges, this option may display a configuration dialog box. The dialog
box displayed depends on your CMM and your server type. Please note that changing the data in the
CMM Configuration dialog box would have a direct bearing on how the CMM functions. It is highly
recommended that only trained Nikon Metrology personnel make changes to the machine configuration.
Please seek advice from experienced Nikon Metrology personnel. Note that all values displayed in the
CMM Configuration dialog box are the unrotated values, in MCS, whether or not a rotation is selected on
the Axis Rotation tab page.
If you do not have appropriate user privileges for this option, a message is displayed. For details of user
privileges, see User Privileges 222 .
Program Configure
Displays the Configuration dialog box 118 , where you can specify calibration tolerances, sphere size,
position and direction, the report header for the .res file, and miscellaneous options.
118
Teach Properties
Displays the Teach Properties dialog box
teaching features.
134
, where you can specify some default settings to use when
Override Log On/Off

Displays the Override Log On 220 or Override Log Off dialog box, where you can override the user that is
currently logged on to the local computer, with another user.
System Status
Displays the Watch dialog box
the use of variables.
908
, where you can view current system information for CAMIO, and track
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
32
The CAMIO CMM Handbox 152

Menus and Toolbars
42
104
Part Program Window
45
The Part Program Window Pop-up Menu 192

The DMIS Program Editor 197
File Types
36
6.18.2 Configuration Dialog Box

6.18.2.1 Configuration Dialog Box
Configuration Dialog Box

The Configuration dialog box has a number of tab pages where you can view and edit configuration data.
The data is saved in a configuration file.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure option
Select an option below for information on each tab page.

Calibration
119
Miscellaneous
120
Reporting Key Questions

Conformance
Locate
Editor
125
128
130
131
Production Mode
CAMIO Windows
119
6.18.2.2 Calibration - Configuration Dialog Box
Calibration - Configuration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibration tab page to specify configuration data including the sphere position and direction,
sensor distances and calibration tolerances.
When using sensor management, any changes you make to the master reset sphere details are
reflected in this dialog box. Similarly, any changes you make here update the master reset sphere
details shown in the Sensors window.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Calibration tab page

Sphere diameter - the precise master sphere diameter. This number is used to evaluate the effective
probe radius of calibrated sensors and must be correct.
Sphere position x, y, z - the position of the master reset sphere.
Sphere direction i, j, k - the direction cosines for the stem of the reset sphere.
Clearance distance - the distance from the current location to which the sensor will move before the
probe head manipulates the sensor to the next reset position.
Depth distance - the distance below the equator of the sphere at which the sensor will take points.
120
Approach distance - the distance from the touch point where the probe path becomes normal to the
touch point on the sphere. The CMM will approach the sphere from this distance at 'touch velocity'.
Roundness - the tolerance applied to the roundness of the calibration measurement of the master reset
sphere. The sensor calibration fails if the roundness exceeds this tolerance.
Tolerance - the tolerance applied to the difference between the nominal probe radius and effective probe
radius, evaluated in the calibration procedure. The sensor calibration fails if the difference exceeds this
tolerance.
Number of points - the number of points to be taken by the built-in calibration routine, e.g. when
selecting an uncalibrated sensor using the Select Sensor dialog box 714 . This is also the number of
points in the Calibrate sensor (CALIB/SENS) commands generated by CAMIO, for example by the
Create Calibration Program dialog box.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
Using the Sensors Window
676
CAMIO Options Menu

6.18.2.3 Miscellaneous - Configuration Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
121
Purpose
Use the Miscellaneous tab page to specify miscellaneous configuration details, including tolerance
calculations, rounding values and sorting of drop-down lists.
If you want to run the SCM (Sensor Changer Manager) utility, check the Use SCM utility box before
clicking OK. The CMM must be on-line for the SCM program to operate. If the CMM was already online, change it to off-line using the CMM menu 139 , and back to on-line to start the SCM. This will then
run in the background (minimised and available from the taskbar) and dialogs will appear when required.
Navigation
122
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Miscellaneous tab page
The following options are available (depending on the server type):

CMM operations
(The CMM operations cannot be set when the I++/DME server is in use because the CMM operation is
determined by the server.)
Synchronous - the program does not complete the current command until all CMM operations
associated have been completed.
Asynchronous - the program queues vectored moves without waiting for current moves to be
completed. This could mean that the program will be a few commands ahead of the command
associated with the current CMM operation. If you were to cancel CMM operations, then the
program may return to the command associated with the operation that was cancelled at the time.
Touch point approach
(The touch point approach option cannot be disabled when using the I++/DME server as this server
always uses an approach to touch points.)
Enabled - if this is selected the touch point centre will move to a distance along the touch point
surface normal. This is the position to which the sensor vectors before starting an automatic move
to touch operation.
Disabled - if this is selected the sensor will move directly to the touch point, with no intermediate
positioning being performed.
Bilateral position X/Y/Z - specify the type of calculation for rectangular co-ordinate tolerances in the X,
Y and Z axes.
Mathematical - calculates tolerances taking into account the + or - sign. The deviation is calculated
as actual minus nominal.
Nominal - calculates tolerances but interprets negative values so as to effectively ignore the + or sign. For negative values the deviation is calculated as nominal minus actual.
Example:
A car body is inspected in the Y axis, as follows:
-y direction nominal = -750
+y direction nominal = +750

Lotol = -3
Hitol = +1
If the actual is at position A (+754)

Mathematical: deviation = +4, error = +3
Nominal: deviation = +4, error = +3
If the actual is at position B (+746)

Mathematical: deviation = -4, error = -1
Nominal: deviation = -4, error = -1
If the actual is at position C (-746)

Mathematical: deviation = +4, error = +3
Nominal: deviation = -4, error = -1
If the actual is at position D (-754)

Mathematical: deviation = -4, error = -1
Nominal: deviation = +4, error = +3
If the deviation is negative, the negative tolerance is applied, and if the deviation is positive, the positive
tolerance is applied.
CAMIO Windows
123
Server type - displays the type of server used with the CAMIO software. The server type is selected in
the configuration file lkinspect.cfg (when CAMIO is NOT running). The following server types are
available:
LK CMM driver - a Metris CMM.
I++ DME server - a CMM and driver combination with an interface that conforms to the I++ DME
standard.
Zeiss CMM-OS server.
Krypton.
RCA.
Coord3.
For more information, see Selecting the Server Type for CAMIO
32
Rounding - a number of dialog boxes have an 'n.00' button that allows you to round off certain values on
those dialog boxes. These values are rounded to a multiple of this number.
Rounding direction cosines - when you select Rounding from the pop-up menu in the Grid window, the
ijk values are rounded such that the rotation angles around the axes are rounded to the nearest x
degrees, where x is the value specified in this field.
Form fitting tolerance - a tolerance used by the cone and cylinder form fitting algorithms to determine
if the fitted form represents the data.
Printer lines - the number of lines per page required for the DMIS results (.res) file and for printing as
the program runs. The default number of lines per page (for the system default printer) is given in square
brackets.
Output precision - the number of decimal places to which the results are expressed. This is the value
used on the Decimal Places dialog box if you check the Default boxes on that dialog box. Using the
Decimal Places dialog box, you can override the output precision value in your part program for specific
items such as distance and angle.
The output precision does not affect the number of decimal places used in labels in reports, or the
number of decimal places used in Grid window.
Dynamic datum - these options are used when evaluating composite position tolerances (TOL/
COMPOS), or true position tolerances (TOL/POS). If you select None, the datum references in the
tolerance (i.e. the datums specified for the tolerance in the Composite Position Tolerance dialog box or
in the True Position Tolerance dialog box) must match the current datum in name and order, because
the tolerance is evaluated in the current datum. If you select Implicit, the datum references in the
tolerances are checked against the current datum for name and order. If they match, the current datum
is used. Otherwise, CAMIO uses the datum references to create a local co-ordinate system to evaluate
the tolerances, using the associated evaluated features. If you select Optimal, CAMIO calculates all the
candidate datums then selects the datum that gives the least deviation.
Auto-generate measurement points - enables the automatic generation of PTMEAS points when
creating a DMIS program.
Sort feature dropdown lists - if checked, features in drop-down lists are listed alphabetically, so that,
for example, CR2 comes after CR19 and before CR20. If not checked, features in drop-down lists are
sorted in the order in which they were defined, so that usually CR2 would come after CR1 and before
CR3.
Auto-save SAT file - for CAMIO Inspect only. If checked, CAMIO automatically saves a .sat file when
you close your program.
Auto-zoom for current feature - if checked, the model window zooms to focus on a feature as it is
measured or defined.
Use SCM utility for tool change operations - if checked, the Sensor Changer Manager utility is used
124
for tool change operations. If you are using the Sensor Changer Manager, the autochanger:INSTALLED
and tipchanger:INSTALLED options in the CMM configuration file (Lkcmmdrv.cfg) must be set to NO.
You should have set up the Sensor Changer Manager with the same sensor configurations as are
present in your part program. You can do this by first running the Sensor Changer Manager stand-alone.
This option is only available with the LK CMM driver. When using the I++/DME server the sensor
change is provided by the server.
Disable collision clearance - if checked, the clearance distance specified on the Simulation tab page
of the Display Settings dialog box is set to 0. This means that the clearance distance is not used in
collision detection 186 . This can help to avoid the problem of false collisions, which may occur
depending on the probe orientation, e.g. when the probe is at a shallow angle to the surface.
Enable 'touch and go' - if checked, taking a touch with the handbox starts the Datum wizard (if no part
program is open or if there is no active datum) or the Feature wizard (if a part program is open with an
active datum).
Warn on restart - if checked, a warning message will appear if the restart button in the program window
is clicked. This warns you that the program will restart and all volatile data will be lost. You then have the
option to OK or Cancel the operation.
Show restart button - this is checked (enabled) by default. If it is required to completely remove the
restart button from the program window, uncheck this button and restart CAMIO. The button will stay
hidden unless this box is checked again.
Enable retract vectors - this should only be used for analogue scanning with an SP25 if there is an
issue with the probe backing off in an inappropriate direction.
Stop on failed feature search - if checked, this prevents the Search for feature
continuing if a touch is not detected within the set parameters.
399
routine from
Use sensor management - if checked, the sensor management function is enabled, which
consolidates the various operations associated with sensor definition, calibration and selection, and
provides them in a single window, the Sensors window.
Select sensors by label - if checked, any Select sensor (SNSLCT) command in your part program
selects a sensor by label from the shared calibrations in the machine database. Otherwise, sensors are
selected by their defined geometry from the shared calibrations. When using the I++/DME server or
sensor management, all selection of sensors must be by label.
See Also:
Decimal Places Dialog Box
764

40
78
462
Using the Feature Wizard to Inspect Datum Features

File Types
277
36
(this link opens the Sensor Changer Manager Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the Sensor
Changer Manager Help.)
714

Sensor Management
63
675
42
CAMIO Options Menu
CAMIO Windows
125
6.18.2.4 Reporting Key Questions - Configuration Dialog Box

6.18.2.4.1 Reporting Key Questions - Configuration Dialog Box
Reporting Key Questions - Configuration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Reporting Key Questions tab page to define the questions that will appear in the Report dialog
box. You can make the Report dialog box display when you start a part program by checking the Ask
reporting key questions box on the Reporting tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box. The
questions are saved in the .btc file for the part program, and the answers you enter are saved in the .res
file.
You can use the answers to filter data when creating reports in Studio Reporting.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Reporting Key Questions tab page

Question set - the set of questions to be displayed in the Report dialog box when you start the part
program.
Current? - if Yes, the question set is used for new part programs. Existing part programs retain the
question set used when they were created. You are warned if the question sets are different when you
126
run a part program, and can update them with the current set.
Add - displays the Add Key Question Set dialog box, where you can type in the name of a new set of
questions.
Remove - deletes the highlighted question set from the above list. This does not delete any questions
already saved with a part program.
Edit - displays the Edit Key Question Set dialog box, where you can change the name of the highlighted
question set.
Unmake current - click to remove the current setting from a question set.
Make current - click to define the highlighted question set as the current set.
Questions
Lists the individual questions that make up the question set.
Key - the question to be displayed in the Report dialog box.
Default value - a default answer to the adjacent question. If you add a default value, this is used if you
do not enter an answer on the Report dialog box.
Add - displays the Add Key Question dialog box, where you can type in a new question and a default
answer.
Remove - deletes the highlighted question from the above list. This does not delete any questions
already saved with a part program.
Edit - displays the Edit Key Question dialog box, where you can change the default answer for the
highlighted question.
See Also:
Report Dialog Box
175

File Types
174
36
Add/Edit Key Question Set Dialog Box

Add/Edit Key Question Dialog Box
CAMIO Options Menu
126
127
117
- Studio Reporting (this link opens the Studio Reporting Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help,
close the Studio Reporting Help.)
6.18.2.4.2 Add/Edit Key Question Set Dialog Box
Add/Edit Key Question Set Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Add Key Question Set dialog box to create a name for a new set of questions, or to edit the
name of an existing set of questions (in this case the dialog box is called Edit Key Question Set). The
questions appear in the Report dialog box. You can make the Report dialog box display when you start
CAMIO Windows
127
a part program by checking the Ask reporting key questions box on the Reporting tab page of the New/
Open Inspection dialog box. The questions are saved in the .btc file for the part program, and the
answers you enter are saved in the .res file.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Reporting Key Questions tab page, click Add
underneath the Question set list
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Reporting Key Questions tab page, select a
question set in the Question set list, click Edit
See Also:
Report Dialog Box
175

File Types
174
36
CAMIO Options Menu

6.18.2.4.3 Add/Edit Key Question Dialog Box
Add/Edit Key Question Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Add/Edit Key Question dialog box to create a new question and a default answer, or to edit the
default answer for an existing question (in this case the dialog box is called Edit Key Question). The
questions appear in the Report dialog box. You can make the Report dialog box display when you start
a part program by checking the Ask reporting key questions box on the Reporting tab page of the New/
Open Inspection dialog box. The questions are saved in the .btc file for the part program, and the
answers you enter are saved in the .res file.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Reporting Key Questions tab page, click Add
underneath the Questions list (a current question set must be present in the Question set list)
CAMIO Options menu menu, Program Configure, select the Reporting Key Questions tab page,
select a question in the Questions list, click Edit
See Also:
Report Dialog Box
175
128

File Types
174
36
CAMIO Options Menu

6.18.2.5 Conformance - Configuration Dialog Box
Conformance - Configuration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Conformance tab page to select the DMIS compliance and the tolerance evaluation method, to
enable command extensions and Metris-specific commands, to set the plane direction for point
projection, and to specify clearance moves. You can also generate a characterisation file.
Navigation
CAMIO Windows
129
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Conformance tab page

DMIS version - select the DMIS compliance. The version you select will allow or disallow various DMIS
commands. For example, a command or some options for a particular command that are only
supported in a later version of DMIS will generate an error if executed by an earlier version of DMIS.
However, you can circumvent this so that, with 3.0 selected, you can enable later DMIS commands. To
do this, check the Enable command extensions (for additional parameters) and Enable Metris-specific
commands (for new major words) check boxes. This allows you to run DMIS programs which are
essentially DMIS 3.0, but which contain some DMIS commands or command options from later versions
of DMIS.
GD&T evaluation
This option allows you to select the type of tolerance validation used.
Use advanced library - if checked, GD&T tolerancing is performed using advanced algorithms.
None/ASME/ISO - select None to validate none of the parameters used for each tolerance; select
ASME to validate tolerance parameters according to the ASME Y14.5M-1994 specification; select ISO
to validate tolerance parameters according to the ISO GPS standard.
Enable command extensions - if checked, allows the execution of DMIS commands that have
additional options which are not in the DMIS standard. For example, the SNSDEF command uses ijk to
specify a star stylus. If not checked, such commands will generate an error when executed.
Enable Metris-specific commands - if checked, Metris-specific commands (DMIS-like commands that
do not use a DMIS major word) can be used. If not checked, such commands will generate an error
when executed.
Check command against module version - the current DMIS standard requires a parameter for the
DMISMN, FILNAM and DMISMD commands, specifying the DMIS version supported in the file. If this
box is checked, this parameter is checked against the DMIS commands, and a warning message is
generated if the commands do not comply with the DMIS version. Programs without this parameter are
defined to be DMIS 3.0.
Plane direction for point projection - if checked, the direction of the plane is the direction of the new
point taken when using a CONST/POINT,PROJPT command.
Move to clearance surface after measurement - if checked, the probe moves to the clearance zone
immediately after each measurement (in Automatic mode). If not checked, the probe waits until it
begins the next measurement before it moves.
Automatic clearance for line and plane features - if checked, the probe automatically moves to the
clearance zone when measuring line and plane features (in Automatic mode). This ensures that
clearance moves are inserted when using the Datum wizard 641 .
Check labels for reserved words - if checked, labels (of features, datums, variables, etc.) are validated
to see if they contain DMIS major and minor words. If a DMIS word is found in a label, the program
stops on that line and an error message is displayed.
Substitute coordinate/vector variables - if checked, a vector variable can be used in place of an x,y,z
triplet in a DMIS command.
Action manual moves offline - if checked, when offline in manual mode, GOTO moves are replicated
"Chain" path measurement commands - if checked, any consecutive PAMEAS commands (which
are separate PAMEAS lines in the part program) are interpreted by CAMIO as a continuous scan path
so that scanning is uninterrupted. If the end of a path is not coincident with the start of the next path,
CAMIO joins the paths with a straight line if possible. Otherwise, an error occurs. Note that from DMIS
05.2 onwards, the new format of the PAMEAS command allows scan paths to be referenced in one
130
PAMEAS command. For example, the following two scan paths:

P(1)=PATH/
P(2)=PATH/
could be referenced prior to DMIS 05.2 using:
MEAS
PAMEAS/P(1)
PAMEAS/P(2)
ENDMES
or from DMIS 05.2 onwards, using:
MEAS
PAMEAS/P(1),P(2)
ENDMES
If this option is not checked, consecutive PAMEAS commands are treated as separate scan paths.
Generate characterisation file - available with DMIS version 3.0 selected. Click this button to
generate the file chfile.dmi in the location C:\LK\Appdata\LKDmis. This file contains information on the
supported DMIS commands.
See Also:
CAMIO Options Menu
117
Sensor Clearance Dialog Box
745
40
Model Window
6.18.2.6 Locate - Configuration Dialog Box
Locate - Configuration Dialog Box
Purpose
This is a licensed option and is greyed for users without the required licence.
Use the Locate tab to specify a reference point for positioning the model in the CAD model window. The
model is then snapped to the reference point when you locate the model using automatic snap.
Navigation
CAMIO Windows
131
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Locate tab page

Position x/y/z - the x,y,z position of the reference point, in the current units as shown in the System
Settings dialog box. The position is stored in the lkinspect.cfg file.
See Also:
Model Window
49
101
Locating the Model Using Automatic Snap

6.18.2.7 Editor - Configuration Dialog Box
Editor - Configuration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Editor tab to specify how comments are added and used in the part program window when the
program is displayed in the block view (i.e. as descriptive text). These comments allow you to access
the Teach Path view for an inspection command so that you can edit the teach path. For details see
The Block View Editor 203 .
You can also turn the autosave function on or off for automatically saving your DMIS program, and
specify the time interval between saves.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Editor tab page

Use annotation editor - if checked, double-clicking on a command for a teach path in the Part Program
window opens the Teach Path view so that the commands for inspecting the feature are available for
editing. The command you double-click must be of the correct 'XML-style' format, i.e. the block of
commands for the teach path must begin with a command of the format <MEAS_feature = name> as
displayed when viewing the program as DMIS commands. Double-clicking on other commands, or
commands of the format MEAS/feature, opens the dialog box for the command.
132
Add annotation - if checked, 'XML-style' comment lines are added into the part program when you add
commands for inspecting a feature. For example, the comment line for inspecting a circle would look
like this: <MEAS_CIRCLE = CIR001> when viewing the part program as DMIS commands in the part
program window. The comment lines group the commands together to help you identify them in the part
program window when viewing your program as descriptive text, i.e. in the block view. You can also add
descriptive titles into the Grid window which are added to the part program window when you click Apply
in the Teach Path view.
Autosave on - if checked, your part program is saved automatically at the time interval specified. The
main DMIS program and any open sub-routines are saved. The current part program is not overwritten
by the autosave because the autosaved files are stored in C:\LK\Appdata\Camio\Autosave and given
back-up names. If required, your autosaved part program can be recovered using the Restore Autosaved
Program option from the File menu. This restores the autosaved part program to its original location
under its original name so that you can open it again.
Time between autosaves (minutes) - the interval in minutes between each autosave.
See Also:
Part Program Window
Teach Path View
File Menu
45
94
105
Restore Autosaved Program Dialog Box

6.18.2.8 Production Mode - Configuration Dialog Box
Production Mode - Configuration Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
133
Purpose
Use the Production Mode tab page to enable the running of part programs in 'production mode' and to
specify the settings used for production mode.
Production mode increases the speed of execution of part programs. In production mode:
All the windows selected here are closed (they are opened again when production mode is turned
off)
CAMIO only updates the windows that are NOT closed here
If the CAD model window is closed, the update rate is set to Never (on the View tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box) and the feature creation options (on the Model tab page of the New/
Open Inspection dialog box) are turned off
Communications between CAMIO and the machine controller are rationalised and therefore reduced
If the part program is displayed as the block view (i.e. descriptive text), it is now displayed as DMIS
commands (it is displayed in block view again when production mode is turned off)
Warning:
Production mode should only be used when a part program has been tested and can run with minimal
operator intervention.
To set a part program to run in production mode, enable production mode on this tab page and check
the Production mode box on the Program tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box for the part
program.
The Production mode setting in the status bar shows whether production mode is on or off and you can
change the setting by clicking the Production mode button in the status bar
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Program Configure, select the Production Mode tab page

Enable production mode - if checked, part programs which have the Production mode box checked on
the Program tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box are run in production mode.
Offline (as well as online) - if checked, production mode is used when running part programs off-line
as well as on-line.
Turn EPOS messages off - if checked, EPOS messages (i.e. controller status messages) from the
controller to the CMM driver are turned off. These are unsolicited messages which usually refer to CMM
position information displayed in the DRO window.. Note that if you have chosen to rotate the machine
axes (by selecting a rotation on the Axis Rotation tab page of the CMM Configuration dialog box), the
mcs values displayed in the DRO are actually the rotated mcs values (or mcsr values). When using the
I++/DME server this option should be unchecked for optimum performance
Optimise program running - if checked, the usual messages between the LK CMM driver and the
controller are not sent. These messages check the set-up of the CMM, so if you check this box, you
must not make changes on the machine (for example, changing the probe head) once the part program
starts to run in production mode.
Display program text (DMIS view) - if checked, the part program is displayed as DMIS commands
when run in production mode. Otherwise the part program is displayed as descriptive text.
Close window - when a part program is run in production mode, the windows selected by checking
their adjacent boxes are closed. This means that CAMIO does not update the information in the
134
windows, so that speed of execution of the part program is enhanced. To increase the speed of
execution of the part program, close all the windows you do not need.
See Also:
Status Bar
168
68
171
99
DRO Window
86
6.18.3 Teach Properties Dialog Box

Teach Properties Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Teach Properties dialog box to specify the default names to be used for features added to your
part programs, and the minimum number of points required to define the feature. For example, you
could specify that point features are named PT001, PT002, PT003 and so on, and require at least two
points to be taken.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Teach Properties option

Touch points
CAMIO Windows
135
Minimum points - the minimum number of points considered as valid to define the feature type. When
taking points manually to teach a feature, you can click
of points for the feature.
when you have taken the minimum number
Default points - the default number of points used to define the feature type. This is the number of
points added to the feature using the Add Touches option when performing an inspection. If the
minimum number of points for the feature is less than the default number, you can delete points from the
Teach Path view, so that you only have the minimum number of points, and you will still be able to click
(Apply) for the feature.
Naming
Seed - by default, all feature names of the selected type are created with the text in this field as a
prefix. For example, if you type in CIR here for circle features, all circle feature names by default are
created beginning with CIR.
Index characters - the number of numeric places in the feature name. For example, if you type in 3
here for circle features, then by default circle feature names are of the format seed001, seed002 and so
on.
Starting index - the number at which numbering of the feature begins when doing a new inspection.
Feature plane
For point and circle features, these options cause CAMIO to prompt you to take the specified number of
feature plane points before taking points. The feature plane points define the plane that the point or
circle feature lies in.
Measure - if checked, you are prompted to measure the plane that the point or circle feature lies in
before taking the point.
Points - the number of points to take to measure the plane that the point or circle feature lies in.
See Also:
CAMIO Options Menu
6.19
117
Help Menu
Help Menu
The Help menu is accessed from the CAMIO menu bar, and contains the following options:
Help Topics
Help can be obtained from this menu item or by pressing F1.
Learning Centre
Displays the Learning Centre, which provides links to training notes in PDF file format, and to other Help
files.
About CAMIO
Displays CAMIO version information.
See Also:
Menus and Toolbars
6.20
104
Main Toolbar
6.20.1 Main Toolbar

Main Toolbar
136
Use the main toolbar to access the options used in creating an inspection program.
Machine 136
Displays options for defining, calibrating and selecting sensors, using rotary tables, operating twin
column machines, setting up laser scanners and other machine specific items.
Alignment 615
Displays options for setting up and manipulating datums.
Inspect 279
Displays options for inspecting a feature using touch points, including options for selecting and moving
the sensor, setting measurement parameters, evaluating features and outputting data.
Scan 781
Displays options for inspecting a feature using tactile scanning, including options for selecting and
moving the sensor, setting measurement parameters, evaluating features and outputting data.
Laser 831
Displays options for inspecting a feature using laser scanning, including options for selecting and moving
the sensor, setting measurement parameters, evaluating features and outputting data.
Construct 556
Displays options for defining feature nominals, constructing theoretical features and outputting data.
Model 962
Displays options for positioning the part in the machine volume.
Point Cloud 867
Allows you to load, filter and save point cloud data from laser scanning, and retrieve features from point
clouds.
Advanced 890
Displays advanced commands.
See Also:
Menus and Toolbars
104
6.20.2 Machine Menu

6.20.2.1 Machine Menu
Machine Menu
CAMIO Windows
137
Purpose
The Machine tab allows you to set up machine-related items such as rotary tables, twin columns, tool
changers, and temperature compensation and allows you to set up and calibrate sensors.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar
The following sections are available:

Probe Calibration
Rotary Table
137
999
Probes
Tool Changer
713
Twin Column 1012
137
CMM
833
139
139
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Introduction to Temperature Compensation
511
Sensor Management
6.20.2.2 Probe Calibration
Probe Calibration
The Probe Calibration section is accessed from the Machine tab on the main toolbar, and contains the
following options:
Locate Spheres - displays the Sphere Setup dialog box 696 , which allows you to select the calibration
spheres to locate, select which nominal or actual sensor to use when locating the calibration spheres
and to modify measurement settings. For details, see Creating a Program to Locate the Calibration
Spheres 694 .
Calibration Wizard - displays the Sensor Selection dialog box 698 , where you can select the sensors
to be calibrated. For details, see Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors 697 .
Calibrate Probe - displays the Calibrate Sensor dialog box, where you can calibrate an existing sensor
against a calibration (requalification) sphere.
6.20.2.3 Tool Changer
6.20.2.3.1 Tool Changer
Tool Changer
The Tool Changer section is accessed from the Machine tab on the main toolbar, and contains the
following options:
Rack Setup - displays the Rack Setup dialog box 735 , which allows you to define a sensor holder/
changer and specify the sensors associated with it.
Tool Change - displays the Tool Change dialog box 138 , which allows the management of a configured
138
tool changer and/or tip changer. Allows you to specify the stall for the current sensor, and allows the
CMM to change tools without a program present. This enables the set-up to be tested.
6.20.2.3.2 Tool Change Dialog Box
6.20.2.3.2.1 Tool Change Dialog Box
Tool Change Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Tool Change dialog box to manage tool changes using a configured tool changer and/or tip
changer.
You must not have selected the Sensor Changer Manager (i.e. the Use SCM utility option must not be
checked on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog box) in order to use this Tool Change
dialog box. Also the autochanger:INSTALLED and tipchanger:INSTALLED options in the CMM
configuration file (Lkcmmdrv.cfg) must be set to YES.
Navigation
With the CMM on-line, and the Use SCM utility option not selected on the Miscellaneous tab page
of the Configuration dialog box, select Machine from the main toolbar, click Tool Change in the Tool
Changer section

Stall - select a stall for the tool change operation from this drop-down list.
Get - click to select the tool from the stall shown in the Stall drop-down list.
Put - click to put the current tool in the stall shown in the Stall drop-down list.
Set - displays the Set Tool in Use dialog box
current tool.
138
, where you can specify the stall to be used for the
Reset - click to specify that the stall shown in the Stall drop-down list has no tool associated with it.
STOP - stops the tool change operation.
Close - closes the Tool Change dialog box.
See Also:
6.20.2.3.2.2 Set Tool in Use Dialog Box
Set Tool in Use Dialog Box
CAMIO Windows
139
Purpose
Use the Set Tool in Use dialog box to specify the stall to be used for the current tool when using the tool
change function.
Navigation
With the CMM on-line, and the Sensor Changer Manager not selected on the Miscellaneous tab
page of the Configuration dialog box, select Machine from the main toolbar, click Tool Change in the
Tool Changer section, click Set
See Also:
Tool Change Dialog Box 138
120
CMM Menu
6.20.2.4 Thermal Compensation
The Thermal Compensation section is accessed from the Machine tab on the main toolbar, and contains
the following options:
Temp Comp - displays the Temperature Compensation dialog box
temperature compensation is on or off.
754
, where you can specify whether
Thermal Datum - displays the Call Routine dialog box with the PARTDEFS routine 521 , where you can
select the feature to use as the thermal datum and set the coefficient of expansion for the part being
inspected (only available when temperature compensation is switched on).
Probe CofE - displays the Call Routine dialog box with the PROBECOFE routine 521 , where you can set
the coefficient of expansion for the probe assembly (only available when temperature compensation is
switched on).
6.20.2.5 CMM Menu
CMM Menu
The CMM section is accessed from the Machine tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
On-Line - toggles the CMM between on-line and off-line mode. In on-line mode the CMM performs
moves and inspections according to the commands you give it. In off-line mode the CMM does not carry
out any actions, but the image in the model window shows you how the probe would move if it were online, and collision detection information can be obtained (seeCollision Detection 186 ). If sensor
management is NOT enabled, when you switch to on-line mode, any defined sensors which are not
calibrated are listed in the Calibrate All Sensors dialog box 732 , so that you can calibrate them.
If you wish to use the CMM Simulator product to simulate on-line operation, you must select
140
SIMULATOR in the Communications port drop-down list on the Comms 1 tab page of the CMM
Configuration dialog box. If the Simulator is not registered correctly, error messages are displayed. To
register the Simulator, select CMM Simulator from the Start menu, Programs, CAMIO option, and click
Register.
Reset Scales - initialises the CMM and drives all axes to their designated scale reset positions. (Only
available on-line.)
Park - drives the CMM to the park position defined in the CMM configuration. (Only available on-line.)
Calibrate Head - displays the Calibrate Head dialog box
datum axis system length.
720
, where you can calibrate the probe head
See Also:
Sensor Management
Menus and Toolbars
32
675
104
(this link opens the CMM Simulator Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the CMM
Simulator Help.)
(this link opens the Sensor Changer Manager Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the
Sensor Changer Manager Help.)
6.21
Program Toolbar
Program Toolbar
Use the Program toolbar displayed in the part program window and in the Teach Path view to edit and
run your program. The Run, Step and Stop items are also available on the main toolbar. The following
options are available:
Run (Button 5 on the CAMIO CMM handbox)
Starts the program running from the current program line.
Step
Executes the current program line and then moves to the next line (but does not execute it). If the
program encounters a command that requires the operator to perform some function, then the
appropriate dialog will be displayed. The program will step to the next program command line when the
operator has fulfilled the demands of the command.
Stop (SHIFT+Button 4 on the CAMIO CMM handbox)
Stops the program.
Restart (SHIFT+Button 5 on the CAMIO CMM handbox)
Starts the program running from the beginning. The contents of the inspection database are deleted.
Calibrations in the machine database are not deleted by the restart, but other 'volatile' data is deleted
from memory, including the current list of sensor definitions (SNSDEF), functional mating (MATDEF)
definitions, local and global variables, macro definitions, etc. The restart button can be configured using
the Warn on restart and Show restart button check boxes on the Miscellaneous tab page 120 on the
Configuration dialog box.
Home/End
Move the current program line to the start or end of the program.
Find
CAMIO Windows
141
If you are viewing your program as DMIS commands, searches the program for the text you specify.
Replace
If you are viewing your program as DMIS commands, searches the program for your specified text and
replaces it with your preferred text.
Save
Saves the current program and any open modules.
Program text
Toggles the display of the part program between descriptive text (block view) and DMIS commands.
Simulation toolbar
Toggles the display of the toolbar between the program toolbar and the simulation rate menu.
See Also:
42

Main Toolbar
141
135
Part Program Window

Teach Path View
45
94

Program Lines, Edit Lines and Breakpoints in the DMIS Program
198
Menus and Toolbars
6.22

Purpose
Use the Simulation Rate menu to set the speed at which the probe or rotary table moves in the model
window when running a part program off-line. This menu can be switched or toggled from the normal
program menu using the probe tip symbol at the right of the menu.
Rewind the simulation
Pause the simulation
Slow forward the simulation
Play the simulation (normal speed)
142
Fast forward the simulation
Instantly forward the simulation
Toggle
This control is useful in collision detection 186 . It allows you to change the speed of simulation in the
vicinity of a collision so that you can locate the collision and add moves to your part program for collision
avoidance.
Navigation
With the CMM off-line, from the Program Window toolbar, click on the probe tip to toggle the
Simulation Rate controls on and off.
See Also:
Machine Simulation
56
Machine Launch 1019

63
65
Collision Detection
CAMIO Event Viewer
7.1
CAMIO Event Viewer

CAMIO Event Viewer
Purpose
Use the CAMIO Event Viewer to track user events in the CAMIO software. The events are saved into a
CAMIO Event Viewer
143
log file called events.log. By default this is stored in C:\LK\Appdata\Camio.

The CAMIO Event Viewer is available to users who are members of the CAMIO Administrator group. For
details of groups, see User Privileges 222 .
The Event Viewer allows you to apply filters to the events and to sort them. The filtering and sorting are
applied to the display of subsequent events. To apply the filtering and sorting to events that are already
displayed in the Viewer, click
(Refresh) on the toolbar. Filtering of the events only affects the
display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log file.
Navigation
From the Start>Programs menu, select the CAMIO menu then Event Viewer

Filter - displays a priority for each event, where Priority 0 is of highest importance and Priority 5 is of
lowest importance. You can filter the events by importance, allowing you to omit events of a given
importance from the display. For example, you can omit events of Priority 3 to Priority 5. See Filtering
Events by Priority 144 .
Timestamp - displays the date and time that the event occurred, in yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss:msmsms
format. You can filter the events to display only those events between certain dates and times. See
Filtering Events by Date 146 .
Source - displays the name of the application that the event occurred in. You can filter the events
according to their source so that, for example, you only include CAMIO events. See Filtering Events by
Source 147 .
Message - displays information about each event, including a unique reference number for each type of
event (for example, reference number 0002 indicates the closing of an application). You can filter the
events using the text in the messages. See Filtering Events by Message 147 .
Most/Least recent first - if Most recent first is selected, new events are added to the top of
the list in the Viewer. If Least recent first is selected, new events are added to the end of the list in the
Viewer. See Sorting Events by Date 148 .
Refresh - when you have applied filters or sorting to the events, click to update the display in the
Event Viewer.
Clear log source - deletes the log file. The display of events is also deleted. A new log file is
created when the next event occurs, if logging is still switched on. See Clearing Out (Deleting) the
Events Log 149 .
Export - allows you to export the logged events, applying any filters so that the exported data
excludes any filtered-out events. The exported file is formatted as ASCII text. See Exporting the Events
Log 149 .
On/Off - use the Logging button at the bottom of the Event Viewer to
switch logging on or off. The numbers show the number of events displayed and the total number of
events in the log. For example, 1----3 indicates one event is displayed out of the three events in the log
144
(the other two events having been filtered out of the display). The % fullness of the log file is also shown.
The log file can contain a maximum of 5,000 messages and has a maximum size of 10 MB. When the
maximum is reached, the oldest messages are deleted from the log as new messages are added.
7.2
Filtering Events by Priority
7.2.1

The CAMIO Event Viewer
142
allows you to apply filters to logged events and to sort them.
Each event has a priority rating (for a list see Event Priorities
in the Filter column in the Event Viewer:
144
). The priorities for the events are listed
.
Priority 0 is of highest importance and Priority 5 is of lowest importance. You can filter the events by
importance, allowing you to omit events of a given importance. For example, you can omit events of
Priority 3 to Priority 5 from the Event Viewer, so that only events of Priority 0 to 2 are listed. Filtering of
the events only affects the display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log file.
To filter the events by priority:
1.
Click the Filter button to drop down a list of priorities:
2.
To select a priority to show in the list in the Viewer, click the priority so that a check mark is
displayed next to it. You can select all the priorities, none of them, or you can select individual
priorities.
Note:
The filtering and sorting are applied to the display of subsequent events. To apply the filter to the events
displayed in the Viewer, click
7.2.2
Event Priorities
Event Priorities
CAMIO Event Viewer
142
145
Each event has a priority rating. The priorities for the events are listed in the Filter column in the Event
Viewer:
.
Priority 0 is of highest importance and Priority 5 is of lowest importance. For details of filtering
according to the event priorities, see Filtering Events by Priority 144 .
The following table lists the currently-defined priorities:
Importance
Number
Text
0001
Camio started
0002
Camio closed
0003
Camio login override
0101
Part program closed
0102
Part program changed
0103
Part program saved
0105
Part program started
0106
Part program stopped
0107
Part program copied to
0108
Batch file read
0110
Batch file saved
0111
Part program opened
0112
Part program stepped
0113
Part program created
0114
Part program restored
0200
Model opened
0202
Model saved
0203
Model closed
0300
Inspect configuration file read
0301
Inspect configuration file saved
0303
CMM configuration file saved
146
0400
DMIS Command Engine error message
0401
DMIS Command Engine warning message
Filtering Events by Date

Filtering Events by Date
142
Each event has a timestamp, showing the date and time at which the event occurred, in yyyy-mm-dd hh:
mm:ss.msmsms format. These are listed in the Timestamp column in the Event Viewer. You can filter
the events by date and time, allowing you to display only those events that occurred between certain
dates. Filtering of the events only affects the display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log
file.
To filter the events by date and time:
1.
Click the Timestamp button. The Date range button is displayed:
2.
Move the cursor over the Date range button. The range of dates in the log is shown:
.
3.
The upper date is the 'from' date and the lower date is the 'to' date. Click on one of the dates. A
drop-down list is displayed:
4.
Click on the down arrow to display a calendar. Select a from or a to date from the date range
shown. Set the other date if required, then ensure that the Date range button is checked:
.
5.
You can also set the from and to times by highlighting the time and overtyping it.
6.
To remove the date filter and display all of the events, ensure that the Date range button is NOT
checked, and click
Note:
To apply the filter to the events displayed in the Viewer, click
. Filtering of the events only affects
the display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log file.
Filtering Events by Source
147

The CAMIO Event Viewer allows you to apply filters to logged events and to sort them.
The application that each event occurred in is recorded and listed in the Source column in the Event
Viewer:
.
You can filter the events by source, allowing you to omit events from a given source. Filtering of the
events only affects the display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log file.
To filter the events by source:
1.
Click the Source button to display two fields:
.
2.
In these fields, type in text from the source name to use when filtering the events. For example, if
you wanted to omit events that occurred in the Event Viewer, type in text from the Event Viewer
source name (EventViewer) into the lower (Excluding text) field. You do not have to type in all of the
source name, but the part that you type in must be typed exactly as it is listed in the Event Viewer.
So in this example, you might type in EventV.
3.
Click away from the Source fields. The filter is applied to the display of subsequent events. To
apply the filter to the events displayed in the Viewer, click
4.
10
To remove the filter, delete any text in the Including text or Excluding text fields (and click
refresh the display of events).
to
Filtering Events by Message

Filtering Events by Message
The CAMIO Event Viewer allows you to apply filters to logged events and to sort them.
A message is displayed for each event, including a unique reference number for each type of event (for
example, reference number 0002 indicates the closing of an application). The messages are listed in
the Message column in the Event Viewer:
148
.
You can filter the events using the text in the messages, allowing you to omit events of a given type.
Filtering of the events only affects the display in the Viewer. The events are still saved to the log file.
To filter the events by message:
1.
Click the Message button to display two fields:
.
2.
In these fields, type in text from the messages to use when filtering the events. For example, if you
wanted to omit events with a reference number of 0400 (DMIS command error events), type in text
from the reference number or the associated message into the lower (Excluding text) field. You do
not have to type in all of the message, but the part that you type in must be typed exactly as it is
listed in the Event Viewer. For example, typing in 'off' in the Excluding text field ensures that any
messages that contain the text 'off', such as the 'logging: off' message, are omitted from the display
in the Event Viewer.
3.
Click away from the Message fields. The filter is applied to the display of subsequent events. To
apply the filter to the events displayed in the Viewer, click
4.
11
To remove the filter, delete any text in the Including text or Excluding text fields (and click
refresh the display of events).
to
Sorting Events by Date

Sorting Events by Date
142
Each event has a timestamp, showing the date and time at which the event occurred, in yyyy-mm-dd hh:
mm:ss.msmsms format. These are listed in the Timestamp column in the Event Viewer. You can sort
the events in date and time order.
To sort the events by date:
1.
Use the
(Most recent first/Least recent first) buttons in the CAMIO Event Viewer. To add
new events to the top of the list in the Viewer, click Most recent first. To add new events to the end
of the list in the Viewer, click Least recent first.
2.
The selection is applied to the display of subsequent events, so to apply the selected order to the
events already listed the Viewer, click
Clearing Out (Deleting) the Events Log
12
149

The CAMIO Event Viewer 142 allows you to save CAMIO events into a log file called events.log. By
default this is stored in C:\LK\Appdata\Camio. The log file can contain a maximum of 5,000 messages
and has a maximum size of 10 MB. When the maximum is reached, the oldest messages are deleted
from the log as new messages are added.
If you decide to clear out the log file (by deleting it), you may wish to save a copy of it first, by exporting
it to an ASCII format file. For details, see Exporting the Events Log 149 .
To delete the events log:
13
1.
In the CAMIO Event Viewer, click
(Delete). A confirmation message is displayed.
2.
Click Yes in the message box. The log file is deleted and the list of events in the Event Viewer is
also deleted.
Exporting the Events Log

Exporting the Events Log
The CAMIO Event Viewer 142 allows you to save CAMIO events into a log file called events.log. By
default this is stored in C:\LK\Appdata\Camio. The log file can contain a maximum of 5,000 messages
and has a maximum size of 10 MB. When the maximum is reached, the oldest messages are deleted
from the log as new messages are added.
If you decide to clear out the log file (by deleting it), you may wish to save a copy of it first, by exporting
it to an ASCII format file.
To export the events log:
1.
In the Event Viewer, double-click in the field next to the Export button:
.
The Microsoft Windows Save As dialog box is displayed.
2.
Browse for a location to save the exported file into, and type in a name for the file in the File name
field.
3.
Click Save. The filename and location are added to the field next to the Export button, and the
Export button is now ungreyed:
4.
Click the Export button. The log file is exported to the filename in the location you have specified.
See Also:
Clearing Out (Deleting) the Events Log 149
14
The CMM Handbox
14.1
The CMM Handbox

The CMM Handbox
The CMM Handbox is designed for use with the following Metris products:
150
Metrology Software: Metris CAMIO 6.0 and later

CMM: LK and C3 ranges
CMM Controllers: MCC200 and CC3-2
It will also operate with a limited set of functionality with Focus and other software (see Quick reference no CAMIO).
Ergonomic Ambidextrous Design - Comfortable and easy to use for left and right handed operators
1. Single Joystick - Touch sensitive 3-axis movement and rotary table control
2. Emergency Stop Button - Halts machine movement. The Emergency Stop (ESTOP) button must be
reset manually, turning it slightly anti-clockwise.
3. Speed Regulator - Variable control of CMM speed when running a program. NOTE: if set to zero
(fully anti-clockwise) the joystick is effectively disabled.
4. Multi-function Keypad - Remotely control software and hardware functions
The functions of the keypad buttons and the LEDs are explained fully in the following sections, but a
quick reference is provided in the form of diagrams that can be printed and laminated if required. This
could then be attached to a convenient point at the workstation.
14.2
Compatibility
Compatibility
Hardware /Software Requirements New Installations
The CMM Handbox
151
To obtain the full functionality which is available with the CMM handbox, the following are minimum
requirements:
MCC 200 Controller with version 200.05 (or higher) firmware installed.
CAMIO 6.0 (or higher).
Retrofit and use with other metrology software products
It is possible to retrofit the CMM handbox to existing CMM installations and also use it with other Metris
software products, providing an MCC 200 controller is used and it can be upgraded to firmware version
200.05 or higher.
The following Metris software products can be used with the CMM handbox:
Focus Software products
Pre-CAMIO 6.0 versions
Metris I++ server
With these products the multi function keys are not available and the handbox is limited to the following
functionality:
Joystick Control
Variable speed Control
Emergency Stop
Pause
Master Start
Teach move (equivalent to Manual Print or Manual Point on the PCIC handbox, also acts as an OK
or Enter button in Calibration Suite)
It is also possible to use the CMM handbox with the CMES option in the CAMIO suite. The hardware
requirement for this is:
MCC 200 with Firmware 200.11 or higher.
To use the CMM handbox with CMES, the controller must be placed in an exclusive 'CMES' mode. This
operation is carried out by a Nikon Metrology Engineer using Overseer (see Testing, section 4).
Handbox Variants
The CMM handbox is available with 4 cable lengths .
RHP 0141 = WMB0002 Handbox with 5M Cable + YAE 1111A1 CAN card
Note: for retrofit applications there is not a one-to-one correlation with the PCIC handbox with regards to
cable length. The CMM handbox plugs directly into the back of the controller unit, therefore the position
of the controller should be considered when deciding on the required cable length.
152
14.3
Handbox Operation
14.3.1 Handbox Operation

Handbox Operation
Use the CMM CMM handbox to operate various CMM and CAMIO functions. For details of the functions
operated by the handbox, see The CMM Handbox Buttons 153 .
Using the joystick
Use the XYZ joystick to move the CMM or rotary table. To activate the joystick, press either of the two
consent buttons below the speed dial. The joystick is activated for several seconds, but if unused, it will
'hibernate' and you must press a consent button again to reactivate it. If the CMM only moves very
slowly in response to the joystick, this is because either the 'Touch Speed' or 'Creep Speed' button is
activated.
The speed dial
The speed dial allows variable speed control of the CMM during GOTO operations. Note that
programmed (CNC) moves may appear not to work if the speed dial on the handbox has been set to zero
(by turning it fully anti-clockwise). To enable CNC moves, turn the speed dial to increase the speed.
Multi-tone warnings
Sound is used to provide audible feedback during use.
Action
Sound
Switch controller on
Series of beeps (handbox self-test)
Touch point
High-pitched short beep
End of feature
inspection
High-pitched long beep
Illegal touch
Low-pitched long beep
Status lights
Lights (LEDs) on the handbox indicate the status of the software, part program and CMM:
The CMM Handbox
For details of the status indicated by each light, see The CMM Handbox Buttons
153
153
Operator position
The default operator position is at the front of the CMM. For details of the operator position and the
corresponding joystick co-ordinate system, see Operator Position for the CMM Handbox.
14.3.2 The CMM Handbox Buttons

The CMM Handbox Buttons
154
14.3.3 The CMM Handbox Keypad Functions

The CMM Handbox Keypad Functions
Light 1 flashes when the joystick is deactivated (i.e. it is in 'hibernation' mode). Light 1 is on when the
CMM is in automatic (CNC) mode and is off when the CMM is in manual mode.
Button
Description
Action
Light (LED)
Note
Left- and righthand Consent

buttons
Press either Consent

button to activate the
joystick. The two
buttons allow for for
left- and right-handed
use. The joystick is
activated for several
seconds, but if too
much time has elapsed
since the last action,
the joystick 'hibernates'
and you must press a
Light 1 flashes
when the joystick
is deactivated (i.e.
it is in 'hibernation'
mode). Light 1 is
on when the CMM
is in automatic
(CNC) mode and
is off when the
CMM is in manual
mode.
The delay before the

joystick is deactivated is
set using CMM variable
CTOUT.
If the CMM only moves

very slowly in response
to the joystick, this is
because either the
'Touch Speed' or 'Creep
Speed' button is
activated.
The CMM Handbox
Button
Description
Action
Light (LED)
155
Note
Consent button again

to reactivate it.
3
'No' button
Operates the No or
Cancel functions in
certain CAMIO dialog
boxes.
SHIFT+3
Stop and close

program
Stops the part program Not applicable

if it is running, and
closes the part
program.
Pause
Pauses the machine

motion.
Light 4 is on for
Pause mode.
SHIFT+4
Stop program
Stops the part

program.
Not applicable
Run program
Starts the program

running from the
current program line.
Not applicable
SHIFT+5
Restart program Starts the program

running from the
beginning.
Joystick coSwitches the operation Light 5 is on for

ordinate system of the joystick on the
PCS, off for MCS.
handbox between the
machine co-ordinate
system (MCS) and any
active part co-ordinate
system (PCS).
Operator position Allows you to rotate

the joystick co-ordinate
system around the
CMM's Z axis to suit
the operating position.
Not applicable
Not applicable
Puts the CMM controller

into Pause mode.
The contents of the

inspection database are
deleted. Calibrations in
the machine database
are not deleted by the
restart, but other
'volatile' data is deleted
from memory, including
the current list of sensor
definitions (SNSDEF),
functional mating
(MATDEF) definitions,
local and global
variables, macro
definitions, etc.
If no active PCS is
available in CAMIO, the
MCS is used for the
joystick operation. This
is only for joystick
operation and does not
affect the co-ordinate
system used to take
points.
Lights 8 and 9 are Pressing this button

on for Position 1. rotates the joystick coordinate system 90
Lights 6 and 8 are
degrees clockwise
on for Position 2.
around the CMM's Z
Lights 6 and 7 are axis. See Operator
on for Position 3. Position for the CMM
156
Button
Description
Action
Light (LED)
Note
Lights 7 and 9 are Handbox.

on for Position 4.
8
Joystick touch
speed
Reduces the maximum Light 10 is on for

velocity of the machine touch speed.
to touch speed when
the joystick is used.
The maximum speed is

VELT.
SHIFT+8
Joystick creep
speed
Reduces the maximum Light 10 flashes

velocity of the machine for creep speed.
to a creep speed when
the joystick is used,
when operating the
machine in manual
mode. Automatic
(CNC) speed can only
be varied using the
variable speed dial.
The maximum speed is

VELC. Creep speed
should be slower than
touch speed and is for
use where accurate
probing is required in
confined spaces.
Teach move equivalent to

Manual Print or
Take Point on
previous
handboxes. (For
Manual Print
when not
Teaching, see
button 18).
For contact probes,

Not applicable
adds a GOTO (Set
sensor position)
command to the Teach
Path view in CAMIO.
Pressing this button

initiates a three-axis
move command at the
current position of the
sensor, in the active part
co-ordinate system.
This function is not
available for some
feature types.
SHIFT+9
For laser probes, adds

a PTMEAS command
to the Teach Path view.
Teach Arc move For contact probes,

Not applicable
allows you to specify
three arc points then
adds a GOTO/ARC
(arc move) command to
the Teach Path view in
CAMIO.
Pressing these buttons

records the first arc
point at the current
sensor position, then
allows you to move the
sensor to two further
positions, recording an
arc point at each
position by pressing
button 9. The points are
recorded in the active
part co-ordinate system.
This function is not
available for some
feature types.
10
Sensor enable/
disable
Enables or disables the Light 2 is on when When the CMM

sensor from taking
the sensor is
operates in automatic
points.
enabled.
mode, the sensor is
automatically enabled.
The disable function is
not available for some
sensor types.
The CMM Handbox
Button
Description
Action
Light (LED)
157
Note
SHIFT+10 Joystick rotary

mode
Allows you to operate a Light 11 is on for

rotary table using the XYR mode, off for
handbox. When
XYZ mode.
activated, the Z axis
control of the handbox
operates the rotary
table.
This function switches

the joystick between
XYR mode and XYZ
mode (see The Joystick
Rotary Mode).
11
If no part program is
open, loads the
program default.dmi
and then starts the
CAMIO Alignment
wizard.
The Feature wizard

determines the feature
type from the points
taken.
Enable Feature
wizard
Not applicable
If a part program is
open but there is no
datum (i.e machine coordinates are in use),
starts the Alignment
wizard.
If a part program is
open and a datum
exists, starts the
CAMIO Feature wizard
for inspecting features.
SHIFT+11 Enable
Starts the CAMIO
Alignment wizard Alignment wizard for
creating an alignment.
Not applicable
12
Light 3 is on when
Master Start is
enabled.
Master Start
For controller
initialisation, and for
resetting Emergency
Stop conditions.
Light 3 flashes for

a drive system
fault.
Light 3 is off when
any messages
have been cleared
and CAMIO is
ready for Master
Start to be
pressed.
SHIFT+12 Handwheel mode Disengages the drive

systems to allow
handwheel operation of
the CMM
Light 1 is on for
automatic drive
mode, off for
manual mode
(driven by the
handbox).
Light 1 flashes for
handwheel mode.
Only for layout CMMs

with handwheel
functionality
158
Button
Description
Action
Light (LED)
13
SHIFT key
Locks the SHIFT on.
Light 12 flashes
when SHIFT is
locked.
14
Delete Teach
Path (last
feature)
Deletes the last teach

action in the Teach
Path view.
Not applicable
SHIFT+14 Delete Teach

Path (all
features)
Deletes all the teach

actions in the Teach
Path view.
Not applicable
15
Increase laser
intensity
Increases the laser

intensity.
Not applicable
16
Decrease laser
intensity
Decreases the laser

intensity.
Not applicable
17
Adjust to
material
Selects the adjust to

material function and
automatically detects
the correct intensity,
black & white levels
and exposure time.
Not applicable
SHIFT+15 X axis lock
Locks the machine X

axis when using the
handbox.
Light 13 is on
when the X axis is
locked.
SHIFT+16 Y axis lock
Locks the machine Y

axis when using the
handbox.
Light 14 is on
when the Y axis
is locked.
SHIFT+17 Z axis lock
Locks the machine Z

axis in XYZ mode or
the rotary axis in XYR
mode when using the
handbox.
Light 15 is on
when the Z axis is
locked.
18
'Yes' or 'Accept' Operates the Yes or

Not applicable
button = Manual OK functions in certain
Print on older
CAMIO dialog boxes.
handboxes)
Note
For laser scanners.
Equivalent to Manual
Print (blue button) on
older handboxes when
an 'Accept' response
was required. For
Manual Print = Teach
Point see button 9.
14.3.4 Operator Position for the CMM Handbox

Operator Position for the CMM Handbox
Button 7 is the Operator position button on the handbox and allows you to rotate the joystick co-ordinate
system on 90-degree increments clockwise around the CMM Z axis to reflect the operating position.
The diagrams below show the joystick co-ordinate system in MCS for each operator position. The light
on button 7 on the handbox indicate which position is in use.
The CMM Handbox
Position 1 - Operator at the front of the CMM (the default position)
Position 2 - Operator on the left-hand side of the CMM
Position 3 - Operator at the rear of the CMM
159
160
Position 4 - Operator on the right-hand side of the CMM
See Also:
The CMM Handbox Buttons
153
14.3.5 The Joystick Rotary Mode

The Joystick Rotary Mode
The function SHIFT+Button 10 on the CMM handbox allows you to operate a rotary table using the
handbox. When activated, the Z axis control of the handbox operates the rotary table.
SHIFT+Button 10 switches the joystick between XYR mode and XYZ mode.
Joystick in XYZ mode
The CMM Handbox
Joystick in XYR mode

The joystick can rotate the rotary table clockwise and anticlockwise.
See Also:
The CMM Handbox
15
Quick Reference - with CAMIO

161
162
S - SPEED
OVERRIDE
CONTROL
LED1 ON - AUTO
OFF - MANUAL
FLASHING JOYSTICK
DISABLED
(MANUAL)
1 LEFT/RIGHT
CONSENT BUTTON
3 CAMIO - NO OR
CANCEL
SHIFT+3 STOP/
CLOSE PROGRAM
6 SWITCH FROM
MCS (LED5 OFF)TO
PCS
(LED5 ON)
7 ROTATE
OPERATOR 90
(PAIRS OF LEDs 69 SHOW POSITION)
9 TEACH MOVE
(GOTO) SHIFT+9
GOTO/ARC
12 MASTER START
(SEE LED 3)
SHIFT+12
HANDWHEEL
MODE (LED 1
FLASHES)
13 SHIFT LOCK (
LED 12 ON)
15 INCREASE
LASER INTENSITY
SHIFT+15 X AXIS
LOCK (LED 13 ON)
16 DECREASE
LASER INTENSITY
SHIFT+16 Y AXIS
LOCK (LED 14 ON)
LED 2 ON - SENSOR
ENABLED, OFF SENSOR DISABLED
LED 3 ON - MASTER
START ENABLED
OFF - DRIVE OFF OR
JOYSTICK
HIBERNATE
FLASHING MACHINE ERROR
2 LEFT/RIGHT
CONSENT BUTTON
4 PAUSE (LED 4 ON)
SHIFT+4 STOP
PROGRAM
5 RUN PROGRAM
SHIFT+5 RESTART
PROGRAM
8 JOYSTICK TOUCH
SPEED (LED 10 ON)
SHIFT+8 SLOW
SPEED (LED 10
FLASHES)
10 ENABLE/DISABLE
SENSOR (SEE LED 2
)
SHIFT+10 ROTARY
TABLE
(LED 11 ON)
11 FEATURE
WIZARD SHIFT+11
DATUM WIZARD
14 DELETE LAST
TEACH ACTION
SHIFT+14 DELETE
ALL TEACH ACTIONS
17 LASER ADJUST
TO MATERIAL
SHIFT+17 Z AXIS
LOCK
(LED 15 ON)
18 CAMIO YES/OK
SHIFT+18 PROBE
RESET
16
Part Programming
16.1
Part Programming
163
Part Programming
When you create or edit a part program to use in an inspection, CAMIO provides various tools and dialog
boxes to help you.
Part Program Window
45
Touch and Go 163

Non-programmed Inspection
Creating a Part Program
Selecting a Part Program
Editing a Program
163
164
166
197
Using Buffer Points
211
Adding a Prompt to a Part Program

Creating and Calling Macros
212
212
Mirroring a Part Program
16.2
In non-programming mode, i.e. before a part program is run, you can define and calibrate sensors,
define, measure and tolerance features, and perform general CMM operations. If a program is running,
you can access non-programmed inspection by selecting Close Program from the File menu 105 .
CAMIO requires a datum to be present when a feature is measured, so in non-programmed inspection
the _mcs 'dummy' datum is used.
Note:
This mode does not create a part program. Nothing is saved between sessions, so you have to define
all sensors again before you can use them (you will be able to use the calibration data).
16.3
Touch and Go
Touch and Go
The touch and go function provides a quick means of getting started in CAMIO by taking a touch point
using the handbox. You must be on-line, in Manual mode. The following actions occur:
Situation
Action
CAMIO is running but there is no

part program open
Taking a touch opens a new part program with a

default name and file location, and starts the Datum
wizard.
CAMIO is running and a part

program is open but there is no
Taking a touch starts the Datum wizard.
164
active datum selected (the _mcs

'dummy' datum is used)
CAMIO is running and a part
program is open with an active
datum selected
Taking a touch starts the Feature wizard
277
Touch and go is enabled by checking Enable touch and go on the Miscellaneous tab page of the
16.4
16.4.1 Creating a Part Program

When you create a new program, a template of DMIS commands is inserted in your program. If CAMIO
cannot find the DMIS template file that contains these commands, it will create one for you.
To create a new part program, select New Program from the File menu
105
Note:
You can set your DMIS part programs to be read-only using Microsoft Windows Explorer. The part
program cannot then be changed.
16.4.2 New Inspection (Basic) Dialog Box

New Inspection (Basic) Dialog Box
Purpose
The New Inspection dialog box allows you to select a different template from the default (basic) one, and
to specify various options for running the program. When you create a new program, a template of DMIS
commands is inserted in your program. If CAMIO cannot find the DMIS template file that contains these
Part Programming
165
commands, it will create one for you. The New Inspection dialog allows you to select the template
yourself, from the Template Library. You can select an existing template from the list. Folders in the
list are categories. To look for template files in a folder, double-click the folder to expand it, then
highlight the template in the list.
Navigation
File menu, New Program option

List of templates - the list of templates in the template root folder. Double-click a folder to display its
contents. Highlight a template to select it and display a description of it in the field below. The following
standard templates are always available:
Default - creates your new part program using a template of basic DMIS commands.
Custom - displays the Select Custom DMIS Template dialog box when you click OK, to allow you to
select an existing DMIS program as your template.
Empty Project - creates an empty program.
Folders of additional templates are saved in the template root folder. To add a new folder, right-click in
the list of templates to display the New Folder option:
New Folder - displays the New Folder dialog box, where you can create a new folder under the
highlighted folder.
Right-click on a template or folder to display additional options:
Rename - allows you to rename the highlighted template or folder.
Delete - deletes the highlighted template or folder.
New program name - type in a new program name, or click the adjacent browse button to browse for
an existing program if you want to overwrite it.
Model file name - check the Use model file, then use the drop-down list to select a recent model file or
click the adjacent browse button to browse for an existing model file.
Options
Online operation - starts CAMIO in on-line mode.
Offline operation - starts CAMIO in off-line mode. All programming operations will generate touch
data for the purpose of program simulation.
Auto-run program - if checked, the program is run when it is opened.
Template description - a description of the template highlighted in the list of templates.
See Also:
New Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box 165
File Types
36
File Menu
16.4.3 New Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box

New Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box
The New Inspection (Advanced) dialog box consists of a number of tabbed pages allowing you to specify
various options for running the program. These are the same options available through the Advanced
166
button on the Open Inspection dialog box
168
Navigation
File menu, New Program option, click the Advanced button.
See Also:
166

File Types
File Menu
16.5
36
105
16.5.1 Selecting a Part Program

To run a programmed inspection, you can either create a part program
program.
164
or select an existing part
To open an existing part program, select Open Program from the File menu, or select a file from the list
of Recent files. You can also drag a program into the part program window from Microsoft Windows
Explorer.
Note:
You can set your DMIS part programs to be read-only using Windows Explorer. The part program
cannot then be changed.
See Also:
New Inspection Dialog Box
164
166
Part Program Window
16.5.2 Open Inspection (Basic) Dialog Box

Open Inspection (Basic) Dialog Box
Part Programming
167
Purpose
The Open Inspection dialog box is displayed when an existing .dmi file is opened from the File menu 105
and allows you to specify various options for running the program. Click the Advanced button to display
more options.
Navigation
File menu, Open Program option

Program name - this cannot be edited and is for information only.
Model file name - check the Use model file, then use the drop-down list to select a recent model file or
click the adjacent browse button to browse for an existing model file.
Options
Online operation - starts CAMIO in on-line mode.
Offline operation - starts CAMIO in off-line mode. All programming operations will generate touch
data for the purpose of program simulation.
Auto-run program - if checked, the program is run when it is opened.
See Also:
Open Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box 166
File Types
36
File Menu
168
16.5.3 Open Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box

Open Inspection (Advanced) Dialog Box
The Open Inspection (Advanced) dialog box is displayed when an existing .dmi file is opened from the
File menu 105 and the Advanced button is pressed, or a new program is created in theNew Inspection
dialog box 164 and the Advanced button is pressed (if you are creating a new program, the Open
Inspection dialog box is called the New Inspection dialog box).
The dialog box has a number of tab pages:
Program Options
Model Options
168
171
Reporting Options
Reporting Keys
176
External Paths
177
Repeat Options
Scan Options
174
178
180
Scripting Options
Offline Options
181
183
Results Files Options
183
Note:
When you click OK, a .btc file is created that holds all the information and settings entered using this
dialog box. The file is given the same name as your DMIS part program, with the file extension .btc, and
is stored in the same folder as your .dmi file. When opening a part program, the operator can choose
whether to open the .dmi file (which will open the program with no settings), or the .btc file (which will
open the program using the settings entered on the previous run, e.g. enable the header dialog and print
the report at the end).
See Also:
File Types
36
16.5.4 Program Inspection - Program Options

Part Programming
169
Purpose
Use the Program tab page to set up DMIS file details and various operating modes. You can right-click
on the filenames to change the filename and path. To save your inspection data in XML format, check
the box next to the XML Output file.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Program tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a .dmi file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Program tab
page

File details
Input File (.dmi) - the name and path of the DMIS part program.
Output File (.out) - the name and path of the DMIS output file. This file is only created if the DISPLY
command contains the STOR,DMIS minor words, e.g. DISPLY/STOR,DMIS.
VFORM Report File (.res) - the name and path of the Metris vendor report file. This file is only created
if the DISPLY command contains the STOR,V(label) minor words, e.g. DISPLY/STOR,V(0).
Note:
The minor words can be combined, for example DISPLY/TERM,V(0),STOR,V(0),DMIS means display
Vendor output in the terminal window and create both Vendor and DMIS output files.
170
XML Output (.xml) - the name and path of the output file of inspection data in XML format. Check the
adjacent box to create this when your program reaches the End of program (ENDFIL) command. For
details of the XML output from your part programs, see Outputting XML Data 459 .
DTA Output - the name and path of the .dta file, output at the end of the inspection. .dta files can be
used to transfer data to legacy systems and to some data analysis packages.
AIMS Output - the name and path of the .tdf file, used to output feature data in AIMS format.
Note:
You can right-click on any of the filenames. From the options available, you can change the filename
and path.
Append to filenames
Use these options to append information to the output from the part program. The information is
appended to the .out, .res and .rtf filenames and to the inspection database generated from the part
program. If both text and date and time are selected, the text is appended before the date and time. If
the repeat number is also added (from the Repeat Options tab page), this is appended between the text
and the date and time.
Date and time - select this to append the machine date and time. The date and time are appended
in the format _yearmonthday_hourminutesecond. For example, if the program is executed on 29
December 2007 at 11:06 and 32 seconds, _20071229_110632 is appended to the filenames.
Text - select this to append text to the filenames. Type in the text in the adjacent field. The text
cannot include the characters \ / : * ? " < > | ; as these are not valid in a Microsoft Windows
filename.
Mode
The Mode box determines the run mode of CAMIO.
Inspect - causes CAMIO to run the DMIS program for the purposes of inspecting the part.
Report - select this option to run an existing but modified program so that the modifications can be
examined in the output file (.out or .res). When launched, the program will run. The CMM will not
measure but will run through the program using actual measured data from its previous execution, and
prepare a report based on the modification.
CMM operation (1)
Online - starts CAMIO in on-line mode.
Offline - starts CAMIO in off-line mode. All programming operations will generate touch data for the
purpose of program simulation.
Production mode - if checked, the program runs in production mode, if this has been enabled on the
Production Mode tab page of the Configuration dialog box. The Production mode setting in the status
bar shows whether production mode is on or off and you can change the setting by clicking the
Production mode button in the status bar. This increases the speed of execution of the program. For
details of how production mode is applied and the options available, see Production Mode - Configuration
Dialog Box 132 . Production mode should only be used when a part program has been tested and can
run with minimal operator intervention.
CMM operation (2)
Manual - causes CAMIO to start the CMM in Manual mode. The first Automatic command will cause
CAMIO to display a warning prompt to the operator before operations continue.
Automatic - causes CAMIO to start in Automatic mode immediately. No warnings will be displayed.
The CMM programmer is responsible for ensuring the probe is positioned correctly prior to the program
start. In addition, this option suppresses the display of the Pass/Fail message dialog when the ENDFIL
command is run.
Inspection
Part Programming
171
The Inspection box determines the start mode of the DMIS part program.
Start new - the program is started at line 1 and all inspection data in the inspection database is
deleted.
Continue previous - select this to restart the program at the point where it was paused. All existing
inspection data is retained.
See Also:
166

Program Inspection - Repeat Options
178

Outputting Data
Status Bar
99
File Types
36
42
40
449
File Menu
16.5.5 Program Inspection - Model Options

16.5.5.1 Program Inspection - Model Options
Purpose
Use the Model tab page to set up information for the CAMIO model window.
Navigation
172
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Model tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Model tab page

Model file
Use model file - if checked, specifies the use of a model file. If CAMIO is already using a different
model file, this will be closed and the model file specified here will be opened. Select an existing
model file from the drop-down list. If the file you need is not listed, use the button to browse for it, or
you can type in the path and filename of the model file.
Options - displays the CAD Model Options dialog box, where you can specify various options for the
model file to be loaded.
Use work cell - the checkbox is used to specify the use of a work cell (.wcl) file. A work cell file holds
information about the location of a model in the machine volume. Select an existing work cell file from
the drop-down list. If the file you need is not listed, use the button to browse for it, or you can type in
the path and filename of the work cell file. You create a work cell file using the Model commands.
Simulation options - select the required options to define how the CAD model will be displayed.
Create defined features - check this to show defined features on the model within CAMIO as they
are defined.
Create measured features - check this to show measured features on the model within CAMIO
immediately after they are measured.
Create constructed features - check this to show constructed features on the model within CAMIO.
Create point cloud - check this to enable the display of point clouds in the model window. This does
not affect the creation of the point clouds themselves.
Create feature deviation markers - check this to show feature deviations (i.e. differences between the
actuals and nominals) on the model within CAMIO. The feature deviation setting is then saved with
the part program. If you do not check this box, you can select this option later using the Feature
Deviations tab page of the Display Settings dialog box. You may then have to re-run the program to
display the feature deviations.
See Also:
Model Window
49

Model Commands
172
962
Pointcloud Display Dialog Box
886

File Menu
69
105
166
File Types
16.5.5.2 CAD Model Options Dialog Box
Part Programming
173
Purpose
Use the CAD Model Options dialog box to specify options for the CAD model to be loaded with the part
program.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Model tab page, click
Options
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Model tab page,
click Options
File menu, Model Open, select a file, click Options
Model menu, Open, select a file, click Options

Stream file - if checked, the CAD model is loaded by 'streaming' (i.e. loading asynchronously), so that
you can perform other operations in CAMIO whilst it is loading.
Display options
Rendered - select this option to automatically render the model while importing into CAMIO. This
displays the model with opaque, coloured faces. The faces are shaded with reference to a simple light
source.
Wireframe - select this option to display the model with transparent faces when loaded into CAMIO.
This allows features not visible on the real part to be seen through obscuring faces.
Hidden line - select this option to display the model with opaque but uncoloured faces, so that you
cannot view features through obscuring faces.
See Also:
Model Menu
171
963
Opening and Saving CAD Files 224

Saving CAD Files - Common Options
174
16.5.6 Program Inspection - Reporting Options

16.5.6.1 Program Inspection - Reporting Options
Purpose
Use the Reporting tab page to specify how DMIS and vendor format (VFORM) reports are output.
If you check Ask reporting key questions, a Reporting Keys tab page is added to this dialog box, where
you can view the key questions that will be asked when the part program is run.
Use the Auto reporting box to specify 'auto report at end', i.e. to select reports to run after the part
program has run. These can be reports created using Studio Reporting, or the constant reporting
function in CAMIO.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Reporting tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Reporting tab page

Auto reporting - runs the listed reports after the program has run. The report will begin when the
program reaches the ENDFIL command at the end of the program. If Studio Reporting is not already
open, it will be opened.
Add - displays the Add Report dialog box, where you can browse for a report file to run at the end of
the program.
Delete - removes the highlighted report from the list of reports below.
Path - the report location.
Part Programming
175
Report - the report filename.

Print or Preview - if Print, the report is printed after the program has run. If Preview, the report is
displayed in a preview window so that you can view it before deciding to print it. Double-click this
field to toggle the setting between Print and Preview.
Errors only - if Yes, the report is run only if an error occurs in the inspection. Double-click this field
to toggle the setting between No and Yes.
Ask reporting key questions - if checked, a Report dialog box is displayed before the program is
executed. The dialog box prompts for information from the operator. The information is set up in the
Reporting Key Questions tab page of the Configuration dialog box and saved with the part program in the
.btc file.
Save reporting key answers - if checked, the information entered in the Report dialog box when
executing the program is saved. The information is saved into the header of the .res file. If unchecked,
the information is not saved and the Report dialog box fields will be empty next time it is displayed.
See Also:
Reporting
490

File Types
125
168
166
36
(this link opens the Studio Reporting Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the Studio
Reporting Help.)
Report Dialog Box
175
42
File Menu
16.5.6.2 Report Dialog Box
16.5.6.2.1 Report Dialog Box
Report Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Report dialog box to enter answers to reporting key questions. The questions are created using
the Reporting Key Questions tab page of the Configuration dialog box, and attached to the part program
176
using the Reporting tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box. The questions are saved in the .
btc file for the part program, and the answers you enter are saved in the .res file. Double-click on an
item in the left-hand column to display the Edit Key Value dialog box, where you can type in an answer
to the question.
When you use Studio Reporting to report on your inspection data, the questions and answers are
displayed if you set up search criteria.
Navigation
Displayed when the part program begins to run, if the Ask reporting key questions box is checked
for the part program on the Reporting tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box
See Also:
Edit Key Value Dialog Box
125
174
176
- Studio Reporting (this link opens the Studio Reporting Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help,
close the Studio Reporting Help.)
16.5.6.2.2 Edit Key Value Dialog Box
Edit Key Value Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Edit Key Value dialog box to type in an answer to the prompt displayed on the Report dialog
box. The answers are saved in the .res file.
Navigation
Displayed if you click OK in the Report dialog box without answering the questions in it
Double-click in the left-hand column in the Report dialog box
See Also:
Report Dialog Box
175
File Types
16.6
Program Inspection - Reporting Keys

Program Inspection - Reporting Keys
Part Programming
177
Purpose
Use the Reporting Keys tab page to view the key questions that will be displayed in the Report dialog
box when the part program is run. Create the questions using the Reporting Key Questions tab page of
the Configuration dialog box, and attach them to the part program using the Reporting tab page of the
New/Open Inspection dialog box. The questions are saved in the .btc file for the part program, and the
answers you enter are saved in the .res and .rtf files.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Reporting tab page, check
Ask reporting key questions, select the Reporting Keys tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Reporting tab page,
check Ask reporting key questions, select the Reporting Keys tab page
See Also:
Report Dialog Box
175
125
16.7
Program Inspection - External Paths

Purpose
178
Use the External Paths tab page to set up the paths used to locate files when executing the Call
external program (CALL/EXTERN) command in a DMIS program.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the External Paths tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the External Paths tab
page

System - general external path for system files.
DMIS - DMIS external path for DMIS part programs.
See Also:
Call Routine Dialog Box
915
166
File Menu
16.8
16.8.1 Program Inspection - Repeat Options

Purpose
Use the Repeat Options tab page to re-run the selected program a specified number of times, so that a
Part Programming
179
number of items can be inspected without having to restart the program.

Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Repeat Options tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Repeat Options tab
page

Repeat on - check this to switch on the repeat option.
Auto increment filenames - check this to increment the name of the DMIS output files by including the
number of each repeat run as a suffix (e.g. test1.out, test2.out) so that existing files are not overwritten.
The information is appended to the .out, .res and .rtf filenames generated from the part program (but not
the inspection database). If text and date and time are also appended to the filenames (if selected on
the Program tab page), the repeat run number is appended between the text and the date and time.
Start number - type in a start number for the repeat run. If you type in e.g. 100, this is added to the
DMIS output filenames as the suffix, e.g. test100.out, test101.out.
Repeat type
Auto - the program is rerun without prompting.
Prompt user - the user is prompted to specify whether the program should be rerun after each
execution.
Prompt for settings - the user is prompted to select either Auto or Prompt user before running the
program.
Repetitions - the number of times the program is to be repeated.
See Also:
166
File Menu
16.8.2 Repeat Options Dialog Box

Repeat Options Dialog Box
168
180
Purpose
Use the Repeat Options dialog box to specify how many times the part program should be repeated, and
whether to prompt the operator before each repetition.
Navigation
Displayed when the program is run, if you have specified Repeat on and Prompt for settings in the
Program Inspection dialog box, Repeat Options tab page

Auto (no user prompt) - automatically executes the program the number of times specified in the
Repetitions field without prompting the operator.
Prompt user (after each execution) - prompts the operator to repeat the program after each
execution.
Repetitions - the number of executions of the program.
See Also:
16.9
178
Program Inspection - Scan Options

Program Inspection - Scan Options
Purpose
Use the Scan tab page to specify a file, and its content and format, for scan data output. Each row in
the file represents one scan point, and always contains the x, y and z co-ordinates (in machine coordinates) of the scan point. Using the options in the Content box, you can specify that the file also
includes the calculated direction cosines of the touch point (based on the scan direction, scan plane,
etc.), and the probe radius. You can use the options in the Format box to specify that the data items
are separated by commas, and that the rows are numbered. You cannot change the number of decimal
places used in the data items.
The format of each row is:
Part Programming
181
line_number x y z i j k probe_radius
where any of the items except x, y, and z may not be present and may be comma separated.
The scan data is raw data. The scan data file is opened before and closed after each scan in the DMIS
part program, and the data from each scan is appended to the existing data in the scan file. This is
automatic and you cannot change it. As long as you have chosen to create a scan file by checking the
Create scan file box and giving the file a name and location, you will get a .dat file of scan data, with
more scan data added to it after each scan. However, you may want to add headers and footers and
perhaps some text comments into the file. You can do this by using the DEVICE, OPEN, WRITE and
CLOSE commands. To add a header, create a device (using the same file specified for the scan data)
using the Input/Output Device dialog box 940 . Then open the device for output, using the Open Device
dialog box 941 . Using theWrite to Output Device dialog box 944 , write the header information to the
device. Close the device using the Close Device dialog box 942 , selecting the Keep option to save the
file. When the scan is completed, the file is opened, the scan data is written to it and the file is closed
again.
You can follow the same procedure to add a footer, and to add text comments before each scan. You
can also use the output options on the Open Device dialog box to overwrite the scan data in the .dat file
rather than appending to it.
Note:
If the Report option is selected in the Mode box on the Program tab page 168 , the .dat file of scan data is
not recreated when the program is run. The existing .dat file (if any) is unchanged. Scan data is also
written to the inspection database, whether or not you create a .dat file.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Scan tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Scan tab page

Create scan file - if checked, a scan file is created for scan data output, using the name and location in
the field below. Use the Browse button to select the location and scan filename.
Direction cosines - if checked, the scan file contains the calculated direction cosines of the touch
point.
Probe radius - if checked, the scan file contains the probe radius.
Comma separated - if checked, the data items in the scan file are separated by commas. If not, they
are separated by spaces.
Line numbers - if checked, the rows of data in the scan file are numbered.
See Also:
Scanning
780
166
42
File Menu
16.10 Program Inspection - Scripting Options

Program Inspection - Scripting Options
182
Purpose
Use the Scripting tab page to select .vbs script programs that perform functions before and after your
part program is run, i.e. to perform pre- and post-processing. You can select the programs and you can
also access them for editing (if your user licence permits this).
Script programs can also be run using a CALL/EXTERN command added by the Call Routine dialog box
915 .
Create and edit your script programs using Metris VBScript Editor.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Scripting tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Scripting tab page

Pre-inspection - check Enable to run a script program before your part program is run (but after its .btc
file has loaded). Click the Browse button to browse for the script program. Click Edit to open the script
program in a script editor so that you can modify it before it is run.
Post-inspection - check Enable to run a script program after your part program has run (i.e. after the
ENDFIL command has been run and the files used in the inspection, e.g. .out, .res, have been closed).
Click the Browse button to browse for the script program. Click Edit to open the script program in a
script editor so that you can modify it before it is run.
See Also:
File Types
36
(this link opens the VBScript Editor Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the VBScript
Editor Help.)
166
File Menu
Part Programming
183
16.11 Program Inspection - Offline Options

Program Inspection - Offline Options
Purpose
Use the Offline tab page to specify a planning file to be loaded when the part program is opened.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program name, click Advanced, select the Offline tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Offline tab page
The following option is available:

Planning - check Enable to select a planning file when the part program is loaded. Click the Browse
button to browse for the file. The planning file is created when you save it on closing CAMIO after
working with a plan (for details see Planning Window 88 ). If you select a file here, the plan path is
recovered when you open the program and is saved again when you close the program. If you select the
Continue previous option on the Program tab page 168 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box, the plan is
filtered as it was when you were using it before.
See Also:
File Types
36
166
File Menu
16.12 Program Inspection - Results Files

Program Inspection - Results Files
184
Purpose
Use the Results Files tab page to specify details about the results files produced from the part program.
Navigation
File menu, New Program, type in a program, click Advanced, select the Results Files tab page
File menu, Open Program, select a file, click Open, click Advanced, select the Results Files tab
page

Results file - the Metris vendor report file.
Auto print at end - causes CAMIO to automatically print the vendor format (VFORM) report file (i.e.
the .res file) created during an inspection run. This file will only exist if the Output options (DISPLY/
STOR) command references it, for example: DISPLY/STOR,DMIS,V(label). The printing will begin
when the program reaches the End of program (ENDFIL) command. You can select the printer to
use from the File menu, Print Set-Up option. The font used will always be a fixed (nonproportionally) spaced 8-point font.
Create CSV file - creates a comma-delimited file of the program output. This takes the name and
Part Programming
185
directory of the .res file (as shown on the Program tab of this dialog box) but with .csv as the file
extension. If you change the .res filename and directory, the .csv filename and directory are
changed accordingly.
Results RTF file - a file of the vendor format output in RTF format. This shows the lines of information in
colour, as they are presented in the Output window in CAMIO.
Header - select a header file to define the text colours, size and font. If you do not select a header
file, default settings are used.
Auto print at end - causes CAMIO to automatically print the .rtf file created during an inspection run.
The printing will begin when the program reaches the End of program (ENDFIL) command.
Use VBS script file - select a VBS script file to define printing parameters for the .rtf file, including
the application used to print the file. If you do not select a VBS script file, default settings are used.
Default serial port - the name of the PC Comm port used to output data from the DMIS program
(usually some form of external data storage device). This is enabled when the Output options (DISPLY)
command contains the COMM minor word, for example DISPLY/COMM,V(label).
Graphic reports HTML files - the HTML files containing graphical reports for features that are output in
the part program.
Auto print at end - causes CAMIO to automatically print all the .html files created during an
inspection run. The printing will begin when the program reaches the End of program (ENDFIL)
command. The program must contain the appropriate VFORM and DISPLY commands (see
Printing Graphical Reports 53 ).
See Also:
File Types
17
Off-line Programming
Off-line Programming
Off-line programming can be carried out for both tactile sensors and for laser scanning. The same tools
and methods are used as for on-line programming, to provide consistency of workflow.
The CAMIO Environment
To begin off-line programming, create a new program and start it in off-line mode, by selecting Offline
operation on the New/Open Inspection dialog box.
The complete CMM, including granite, bridge, quill, covers, legs and rotary tables can be displayed
in the model window. See Machine Simulation 56 for more details.
The selected sensor is simulated in the model window. CAMIO uses the .sat file associated with
the sensor to display the sensor image. For a laser sensor, when this is set up using the New
Laser Sensor dialog box, the suffix added to the sensor name is determined from the activated
calibration map for the laser sensor. CAMIO then uses this to display the correct laser sensor
image.
You can display your CAD model in the model window. You can open the model using the Open
option from the File menu or Model tab, or by selecting it on the Model tab page of the New/Open
Inspection dialog box.
Locating the model in the machine space
Use the Model commands to position the part in the machine volume. You can save and retrieve this
location when running the inspection program on-line. This is useful when several different programs are
used when measuring a part. You save the location as a work cell at the end of the model location
procedure, and you can retrieve the location using the Load Work Cell option from the Model commands.
186
You align the model with the machine axes using entities picked from the model. You can use an
existing work cell file which holds information about the location of a model in the machine volume,
selected on the Model tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box.
Creating the part program off-line
The tools and methods used for off-line programming are essentially the same as for on-line
programming.
The probe path is displayed in the model window
The tools available from the Teach Path view pop-up menu allow you to group features and to colourcode those groups of features in the model window. You can also add moves between the features
and see the effect in the model window, before adding the commands from the Teach Path view to
your part program. The ability to add the moves off-line is especially useful because you can use
the graphical elements (model, features, probe, etc.) as guidance.
For tactile probes, with the model located in the machine space, the options on the Probe Check
toolbar allow you to verify the probe angle without running the program.
The Auto Probe Search dialog allows you to select the most suitable probe for the current
measurement.
Running the program off-line
Collision detection
avoidance moves.
186
registers collisions with the part and the machine and allows the insertion of
The Simulation Rate menu 141 allows you to set the speed at which the probe or rotary table moves
in the model window when running a part program off-line. The display is useful in collision
detection. It allows you to change the speed of simulation in the vicinity of a collision so that you
can locate the collision.
Axis violation
190
indicates when the probe moves outside the machine volume.
Off-line point clouds

With laser sensors you can generate off-line point clouds. These show the expected coverage of the
part, and also allow you to see whether the data collected is suitable for feature extraction. The Size of
point cloud option on the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings dialog box allows you to set the
number of points in the point cloud.
Program mirroring
The Mirror process provides a facility to mirror a DMIS program about the X or Y plane. First, you define
the process using the Mirror wizard. Then you run the Mirror process from the Mirror Progress dialog
box using the parameters you set up in the wizard. The Mirror process checks each line of the source
DMIS program and writes it to the mirror file. Lines that require the user to check them, to ensure they
run safely and correctly in the mirrored program, are either excluded so that they are not written to the
mirror file, or are written to the mirror file but commented out.
See Also:
73
63
Model Window
18
Collision Detection
18.1
Collision Detection
Collision Detection
Collision Detection
187
During offline programming, it is important to be able to predict when the probe or quill will collide with
the part being measured, or any part of the CMM including tool changers and rotary tables. CAMIO can
detect collisions into the part or the machine structure and can halt the program and update the display
in the model window. Detailed information is available from the Collisions Window 186 .
You must run your program through Machine Launch 1019 so that the necessary models are loaded.
Collision detection must be enabled in the Simulation tab page
box. The option to Use simplified probe must NOT be checked
A model must be present in the model window
63
of the Display Settings dialog
49
The CMM must be off-line

Machine configuration file
The configuration file contains the machine model, the quill model, and models of other items that can
be added to the machine, for example racks. A default file called default.machine is provided, in C:\LK
\Appdata\CMMCFG. See the Machine Launch 1019 topic for more information. If the Enable machine
option is checked on the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings dialog box, collision detection uses
the models in the file so that it registers collisions with them. The models can be displayed in the model
window, according to the selections on the Model Explorer dialog box, but this does not affect collision
detection: they are detected as long as they are enabled.
Access violation
This function is integrated into collision detection and is also configured through the default.machine file.
volume, when running the DMIS program with the CMM off-line. It is enabled through a check box on the
Simulation tab page 63 of the Display Settings Dialog Box. The quill is shown in red at the end of the
move. For example, if the move ends at a point outside the machine volume, the quill is shown in red at
the end position, rather than at the boundary of the machine volume. See the Axis Violation 190 topic for
a typical illustration.
Probe and quill image
It is important for collision detection that the probe image used is correct, even if it is not displayed in
the model window. CAMIO uses the .sat file associated with the sensor to display the sensor image.
Similarly, for detecting collisions of the quill, the file specified in the machine configuration file must be
correct, even if the quill is not displayed in the model window. However, using a complex model for
collision detection would slow the simulation down considerably, so simplified models (especially for
laser probes) are available. These can be loaded using the Probe Properties Dialog Box 740 from the C:
\LK\Probes folder. The simplified models have '-collision' in the file name. The display of the quill must be
configured through the default.machine file loaded by Machine Launch.
Rotary tables
Collisions can also be detected during rotary table moves. The settings on the Simulation tab page 63
also define the angle of rotation through which collision detection will warn of conflicts. The rotary table
must be configured through the default.machine file loaded by Machine Launch.
Clearance distance
As the DMIS program is run (with the CMM off-line), any collisions are detected and recorded in the
Collisions window. A collision is detected once the probe (and quill if enabled) moves within a clearance
distance. You can set this distance for non-touch moves (e.g. GOTO moves) using the simulation
controls on the Simulation tab page, to determine how close to colliding the probe and quill or rotary
table must be before a collision is detected. For touch moves, the clearance distance is determined by
CAMIO, and can be disabled by checking the Disable collision clearance box on the Miscellaneous tab
page 120 of the Configuration dialog box. This can help to avoid the problem of false collisions.
Probe and quill colours for linear moves
Collisions are listed in the Collisions window. The DMIS program line where the collision occurred is
given. You can select the collision, and the model window will display the probe and quill in their
188
position when the collision occurred, a green image showing where the probe and quill start position was
before the collision, and a red image showing the end position of the probe and quill after collision. The
red and green images are rendered in a semi-transparent mode so that the images are easier to observe
when they they are close together. The probe and quill are shown in their normal colour in their position
where they stopped on collision. The face on the model that the probe or quill collided with is highlighted
in yellow. (You can change these colours using the CAD Colours dialog box 73 , Simulation category.)
This example picture shows the three images with more separation than would normally be seen, to
provide a clearer illustration:
Collision body for probe rotations

Where a probe rotation may result in a collision, CAMIO creates a 'collision body' to indicate the area
within which collision could occur. The collision body is displayed in the model window as a green
shaded area, and the face on the model that the probe or quill may collide with is highlighted in yellow.
For example:
Collision Detection
189
CAMIO calculates the collision body using a zone defined by the start and finish angles of the probe
head move. CAMIO creates a collision body which fully envelops the probe by enlarging this zone.
Example of a probe collision zone from A30B0 to A60B60:
where 1 is the start position at A30, B0 and 2 is the finish position at A60, B60, and the collision zone is
shown in green. For the actual collision body used, CAMIO enlarges this zone to envelop the probe.
Simulation rate
You can adjust the speed at which the probe or rotary table moves in the model window when running a
part program off-line, to help in collision detection. Use the Simulation Rate menu 141 from the model
window toolbar.
SNSLCT command
When a SNSLCT command is issued, CAMIO creates a sphere around the centre of rotation of the
probe, and then checks for any collisions within the sphere. The radius of the sphere is calculated from
the probe length plus the Touch clearance value from the Simulation tab page of the Display Settings
dialog box.
18.2
Handbox (Virtual Handbox, Joystick Box)

Handbox (Virtual Handbox, Joystick Box)
190
Purpose
Use the handbox to set the probe position when the CMM is off-line. When you click Manual Print, an
appropriate GOTO statement is inserted into your program. You can use this when fixing collisions in
the Collisions window.
Navigation
Collisions window, Fix button
See Also:
Collisions Window
19
186
Axis Violation
Axis Violation
Axis Violation
191
This function is integrated into collision detection and is also configured through the default.machine file.
Please refer to the Collision Detection 186 topic for setup information.
volume, when running the DMIS program with the CMM off-line. It is enabled through a check box on the
Simulation tab page 63 of the Display Settings Dialog Box. The quill is shown in red at the end of the
move. For example, if the move ends at a point outside the machine volume, the quill is shown in red at
the end position, rather than at the boundary of the machine volume.
20
Editing a Part Program
20.1

The options available for editing a part program depend on whether you are displaying the program as
DMIS commands or as descriptive text (block view).
For details of editing a program displaying the DMIS commands, see The DMIS Program Editor
197
For details of editing a program displayed as descriptive text, see The Block View Editor. Note that
the current line in the block view is indicated by a red triangle:
192
20.2

Menu for descriptive text
Menu for DMIS commands
You can select multiple lines and drag-and-drop using the

mouse
Use the DMIS program editor

view
197
to edit the program
Purpose
Use the pop-up menu in the part program window to edit the DMIS program and set up the part program
window to your own requirements. The pop-up menu displayed depends on whether you have selected
Program Text from the Program toolbar or not.
Navigation
Part program window, right-click
For details of the options available from the pop-up menus, click here
193
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
Insert Command Dialog Box
193
201
Edit Command Dialog Box
20.3
Part Program Window Pop-up Menu Options

Part Program Window Pop-up Menu Options
The following options are available from the pop-up menu for descriptive text:
Undo/Redo
Undo - undoes the last edit action performed in your part program.
Redo - reapplies the undone action.
Cut/Copy/Paste
Cut - removes the currently selected lines in the part program and places them on the Microsoft
Windows clipboard.
Copy - copies the currently selected lines to the clipboard.
Paste - inserts the contents of the clipboard into the program. This is inserted before the currently
selected line.
Comment/Uncomment
Comment - comments out the currently selected lines. If a line has other commands nested under
it, these are also commented out.
Uncomment - uncomments any currently selected commented out lines.
Edit/Delete/Insert
Edit - if the currently selected line is commented out (shown in bold, italics and inverted commas),
displays the Edit Command dialog box, where you can manually edit the contents of the line. If the
currently selected line is not commented out, displays the appropriate DMIS command dialog box
for the line, where you can modify the command parameters.
Delete - deletes the currently selected lines.
Insert - displays the Insert Command dialog box where you can create a DMIS program line. When
you click OK, the line is inserted in the program above the currently selected line.
Recall Measuring Parameters - displays the Recall Measuring Parameters dialog box where you can
choose to recall any of the listed parameters defined above the currently selected line in the program.
Insert Snippet - allows the user to insert a block of code ('snippet') at a user defined line within a part
program.
Surround With Snippet - allows the user to surround an existing block of code with a 'snippet'.
The following options are available from the pop-up menu for DMIS commands:
Cut/Copy/Paste/Delete - these edit actions apply to the current edit line (indicated by reverse text) or
selected lines (indicated in the part program window by the colour selected from the Colours option).
The lines must be selected before Cut and Copy are available.
Cut - removes the currently selected line (or lines) from the program and places it on the Windows
clipboard.
Copy - copies the currently selected line (or lines) to the clipboard.
Paste - inserts the contents of the clipboard into the program. This is inserted before the current
194
edit line (shown in reverse text). If a line (or lines) is actually selected (shown in coloured text in the
part program window), it is replaced by the contents of the clipboard.
Delete - deletes the current edit line or selected lines.
Set Program Line - moves the current program line (indicated by the arrow) to the current edit line
(indicated in reverse text).
Lock Program Line - prevents the current program line and current edit line from scrolling together in
the part program window when a program is running. This improves the speed of operation in large
programs.
Goto Line - displays the Navigate dialog box
the part program window.
199
where you can navigate to and select lines displayed in
Recall Measuring Parameters - displays the Recall Measuring Parameters dialog box where you can
choose to recall any of the listed parameters defined above the currently selected line in the program.
Find/Replace - display the Find and Replace dialog boxes.
Find - searches the program for the text you specify.
Replace - searches the program for your specified text and replaces it with your preferred text.
Colours - controls the appearance of the part program window.
Background - sets the background colour of the part program window.
Text - sets the colour of the DMIS command line and number.
Selection - sets the colour of currently selected edit lines.
Font - controls the font that the DMIS command lines and numbers are displayed in. All the fonts are
non-proportionally spaced.
Command - provides access to the following DMIS functions. Each option also moves the current
program line to the current edit line.
Insert - displays the Insert Command dialog box where you can create a DMIS program line. When
you click OK, the line is inserted in the program above the current program line.
Edit - displays the Edit Command dialog box, where you can manually edit the contents of the
current edit line.
Modify - if the current edit line is commented out, displays the Edit Command dialog box, where you
can manually edit the contents of the line. If the current edit line is not commented out, displays the
appropriate DMIS command dialog box for the line, where you can modify the command parameters.
Comment - comments out the currently selected lines.
Uncomment - uncomments any currently selected commented out lines.
Breakpoints - the DMIS program stops running when it encounters a breakpoint. You can then step
through your program to check for errors.
Add - adds a breakpoint to the current edit line. The breakpoint is indicated by a dot between the
line number and the DMIS command.
Remove - removes the breakpoint from the current edit line.
Remove All - removes all breakpoints from the current DMIS program.
Insert Snippet - allows the user to insert a block of code ('snippet') at a user defined line within a part
program.
Surround With Snippet - allows the user to surround an existing block of code with a 'snippet'.
20.4
195
Recall Measuring Parameters Dialog Box

Recall Measuring Parameters Dialog Box
Purpose
It is particularly useful to be able to recall a measuring parameter from positions further down in a large
program. You can click on the line of the program you want to start from and select Recall measuring
parameters. CAMIO will then search up the program from that line to find the most recent occurrence of
all the commands mentioned listed below. The settings found will be displayed in the dialog for you to
review with the option of applying the settings or not. If any errors were encountered during the search
then these will also be displayed in the dialog.
Any setting which relies on any variables will use the current values of those variables - they will not
be recalculated.
Advanced program structures such as loops, ifelse etc. will not be taken into account. The
program will simply be searched in a linear fashion and the last set values for each setting used.
Any datum definitions found during the search must have already been created and it must be
possible to recall them from the database. Datums will not be re-evaluated but simply recalled.
If a SNSLCT is found during the search it must already be defined and calibrated.
Rotary tables must already be defined and calibrated for any ROTAB commands to be taken into
account. Only absolute rotations will be used, incremental rotations will be ignored.
The search for settings will be limited to the current program only. Sub programs and parent
programs will not be searched.
The search utility will not support programs with mixed units.
Navigation
196
Right-click in the Program window, Recall Measuring Parameters...
The following parameters are supported:

Datum commands:
Datum Labels followed by a definition
D(2)=DATSET/DAT(A),ZDIR,ZORIG,DAT(B),XDIR,XORIG,DAT(C),YORIG
Datum Recall Statements
RECALL/DA(1)
Sensor Select Commands:
SNSLCT/SA(0)
Measuring Variables
SNSET/APPRCH,5
SNSET/RETRCT,1.5
SNSET/DEPTH,0
SNSET/CLRSRF,15
SNSET/SEARCH,20
MODE/PROG,MAN
Scan Variables
Scan Mode on/off
SCNMOD/ON
Scan Settings
SCNSET/PECK,DEFALT
SCNSET/NONCON,DEFALT
SCNSET/DRAG,DEFALT,DEFLECTION,0.1
SCNSET/DRAG,DIST,0.1
FEDRAT/SCNVEL,MPM,0.2
Measuring Velocities and Accelerations
ACLRAT/MESACL,HIGH
FEDRAT/MESVEL,MPM,0.25
ACLRAT/POSACL,LOW
FEDRAT/POSVEL,PCENT,1
Rotary Table settings
RT(1)=ROTDEF/0,0,0,0,0,1
RECALL/RT(1)
ROTAB/RT(1),ABSL,SHORT,ROTTOT,20
20.5
197
The DMIS Program Editor
20.5.1 The DMIS Program Editor

If you have selected the Program Text option from the Program toolbar, so that your part program is
displayed as DMIS commands within the part program window, you can edit your DMIS program directly
using the DMIS Program Editor.
(If you have not selected the Program Text option, and your program is displayed as descriptive text, you
can still select lines and drag-and-drop using the mouse, and perform various edit functions using a rightclick pop-up menu - see The Part Program Window Pop-up Menus 192 .)
1 - current program line

2 - breakpoint
3 - current edit line
Note:
The current edit line is displayed in reverse text and is affected by the next edit action, such as delete,
paste, etc. The line must be actually selected (indicated in coloured reverse text) before Cut and Copy
are available. To select a single line, drag the cursor over the line to the next line, and back again. If a
number of lines are selected, they are displayed in colour in the part program window, with the current
edit line displayed in coloured reverse text.
If you paste DMIS lines, they are inserted before the current edit line. But if you have a current edit
selection, so that lines are actually selected, the pasted lines replace them.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
Editing a DMIS Program
198
Selecting within the Part Program Window
198
198
20.5.2 Program Lines, Edit Lines and Breakpoints in the DMIS Program
Current program line
This is the DMIS command line that will be executed next, indicated in the part program window by the
arrow between the line number and the DMIS command. The line number is displayed in reverse text.
Current edit line
This is the DMIS command line that will be affected by the next edit action (paste, delete, etc.). The line
is displayed in reverse text. The line must be actually selected (indicated in coloured reverse text)
before Cut and Copy are available. To select a single line, drag the cursor over the line to the next line,
and back again. If a number of lines are selected, they are displayed in colour in the part program
window, with the current edit line displayed in coloured reverse text.
If you paste DMIS lines, they are inserted before the current edit line. But if you have a current edit
selection, so that lines are actually selected, the pasted lines replace them.
Current edit selection
This is the DMIS command lines that are currently selected, displayed in coloured text in the part
program window, and that will be affected by the next edit action (copy, paste, etc.).
Breakpoint
The DMIS program stops running when it encounters a breakpoint. You can then step through your
program to check for errors.
See Also:
198
20.5.3 Editing a DMIS Program

With Program Text selected from the Program toolbar, the DMIS Editor allows you to edit your DMIS
program directly within the part program window. If a program is running, or another operation is in
progress (e.g. a DMIS command dialog box), the part program window is disabled to prevent accidental
editing of the program until the operation is complete.
To edit a DMIS program:
1.
Select the part of the program you want to work with. For full details of selecting within your part
program, see Selecting within the Part Program Window. To select lines of text to cut:
Select a single line by dragging the cursor from the highlighted line down to the next line, then
back up again.
Select a number of consecutive lines by dragging the cursor over the lines.
Use the Navigate dialog box to select specified lines.
2.
Edit the program. You can use the pop-up menu options or the keyboard to cut, copy, paste and
delete commands. Also the Command option on the pop-up menu gives access to the Insert
Command and Edit Command dialog boxes (where you can manually create or edit a program line),
and the appropriate DMIS command dialog box for the current edit line. Or you can double-click or
199
press ENTER on the current edit line to display its DMIS command dialog box.
3.
Use the options on the Program toolbar to step through your edited program or run it again.
See Also:
Keyboard Operations in the Part Program Window
192
20.5.4 Selecting within the Part Program Window

When viewing Program Text, select the current program line by:
Clicking on the line number or in the column next to it.
Dragging the program line indicator (the arrow pointing to the command line).
Dragging the cursor up or down the line numbers until you reach the one you want.
Select the current edit line by:

Clicking on the text of a DMIS command line to highlight it.
Using the Navigate dialog box to go to and select a line.
Make a current edit selection for edit (cut, copy, paste) actions by:
Selecting a number of consecutive lines by dragging the cursor over the lines.
Selecting a single line by dragging the cursor from the highlighted line down to the next line, then
back up again.
Using the Navigate dialog box to select specified lines.
See Also:
20.5.5 Navigate Dialog Box

Navigate Dialog Box
198
200
Purpose
Use the Navigate dialog box to navigate and select lines in programs displayed in the part program
window. Changes made using this dialog box are reflected in the program as you make them.
Navigation
When viewing your program as program text, click in the part program window, press CTRL+G
When viewing your program as program text, right-click in the part program window, select Goto
Line

Mode
Move - select this to move the current edit line to the line number in the Line field.
Select - select this to select all lines from the current edit line up to and including the line number in
the Line field.
Line - if the mode is Move, this specifies the line number to move to. If the mode is Select, this
specifies the line up to and including which the selection extends.
Start - sets the line number to the first line of the program.
End - sets the line number to the last line of the program.
Program - sets the line number to the current program line (indicated by the arrow against the line).
See Also:
Part Program Window
201
20.5.6 Insert Command Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Insert Command dialog box to create a DMIS program line. Type the program line in the box,
using printable ASCII characters. When you click OK, the line is inserted in the program above the
current program line. If you type $$ at the start of the line, the line is inserted as a comment only, and
is not processed when the program runs.
Navigation
If viewing your program as descriptive text, right-click in the part program window, select Insert
If viewing your program as program text, right-click in the part program window, select Command,
select Insert
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
20.5.7 Edit Command Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Edit Command dialog box to manually edit the contents of the current edit line, using printable
ASCII characters. If you use the Comment button to insert $$ at the start of the line, the line is inserted
as a comment only, and is not processed when the program runs. You can use the Uncomment button
to remove the $$ so that the line is processed when the program runs.
Navigation
Ensure Program Text is checked, right-click in the part program window, select Command, select
Edit
In the part program window, right-click on a command that has been commented out
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Pause in the Program
202
section
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
20.5.8 Keyboard Operations in the Part Program Window

Keyboard Operations in the Part Program Window
With Program Text selected, you can use the keyboard to perform the following tasks in the part program
window 45 .
The following shortcut keys are available:
Cut/Copy/Paste/Delete - these edit actions apply to the current edit line (indicated by reverse text) or
selected lines (indicated in the part program window by the colour selected from the Colours option).
The lines must be selected before Cut and Copy are available.
Cut (CTRL+X or SHIFT+DELETE) - removes the currently selected line (or lines) from the program
and places it on the Windows clipboard.
Copy (CTRL+C or CTRL+INSERT) - copies the currently selected line (or lines) to the clipboard.
Paste (CTRL+V or SHIFT+INSERT) - inserts the contents of the clipboard into the program. This is
inserted before the current edit line (shown in reverse text). If a line (or lines) is actually selected
(shown in coloured text in the part program window), it is replaced by the contents of the clipboard.
Delete (DELETE) - deletes the current edit line or selected lines.
Goto Line - CTRL+G - displays the Navigate dialog box
displayed in the part program window.
199
where you can navigate to and select lines
Find - CTRL+F
Replace - CTRL+H
The following are editor actions, and are modified by using SHIFT or CTRL:
CURSOR+UP or DOWN - moves the current edit line up or down a line at a time.
SHIFT+CURSOR UP or DOWN - extends the current edit selection up or down a line at a time.
CTRL+CURSOR UP or DOWN - moves the current program line up or down a line at a time.
PAGE UP or DOWN - moves the current program line up or down by one page.
SHIFT+PAGE UP or DOWN - extends the current edit selection up or down by one page.
CTRL+PAGE UP or DOWN - moves the current program line up or down by one page.
HOME or END - moves the current program line to the start or end of the program.
SHIFT+HOME or END - extends the current edit selection to the start or end of the program.
CTRL+HOME or END - moves the current program line to the start or end of the program.
ENTER - displays the appropriate DMIS dialog box for the command.
SHIFT+ENTER - steps through the program a line at a time. This executes the currently selected line
and then moves to the next line (but does not execute it). If the program encounters a command that
requires the operator to perform some function, then the appropriate dialog is displayed.
CTRL+ENTER - runs the program.
See Also:
198
203
199

20.6

You can edit your program using the Block View Editor if you are using the block view, i.e. if your part
program is displayed in the part program window as descriptive text. You can also select lines and
drag-and-drop using the mouse, and perform various edit functions using a right-click pop-up menu - see
The Part Program Window Pop-up Menus 192 .
Enabling the Block View Editor
To enable the Block View Editor, check the Use annotation editor box on the Editor tab page of the
Configuration dialog box:
The purpose of the Block View Editor

The Block View Editor groups inspection commands together so that the structure of your part program
can easily be interpreted visually. It also provides access to the Teach Path view from the inspection
commands, so that you can edit the teach paths for inspecting features.
Using the Editor
If the Editor is enabled, you can double-click a multiple feature command like this one:
and the Teach Path view is displayed containing the inspection path for all items in the multiple
inspection block (these can be features, moves, sensor operations, measurement settings, tolerance
commands etc.). All items are available for editing or removing, and new commands can be added.
To edit a single feature, you can double-click a single inspection command like this one:
and the Teach Path view is displayed containing the inspection path for the feature, in this case CIR005,
so that you can edit it. Also details for CIR005 are displayed in the Grid window and the Properties
window. Note that the current line in the block view is indicated by a red triangle:
204
If you expand the group of commands for CIR005 by clicking on the + symbol, they are displayed like
this:
In this display, double-clicking the CIR005 command displays the Teach Path view. Double-clicking one
of the commands below it displays the dialog box for that command.
If the Editor is not enabled or the commands are not of the required format
If you have not enabled the Block View Editor, double-clicking a command in the part program window
displays the dialog box for that command, or, if the command is commented out, displays the Edit
Command dialog box.
Also, if the commands are not of the required format for the Block View Editor, double-clicking a
command displays the dialog box for that command, or, if the command is commented out, displays the
Edit Command dialog box.
For example, in the following section of a part program (viewed as DMIS text):
double-clicking the command <MEAS_CIRCLE name = "CIR005"> would display the Teach Path view
for editing the inspection of the circle CIR005, as this command is of the required 'XML-style' format for
the Block View Editor. It is enclosed in angled brackets and there is a closing <\MEAS_CIRCLE =
CIR005> command for it at the end of the measurement block. However, if there is no MEAS_CIRCLE
command of the 'XML-style' format, as in this example:
you cannot open the Teach Path view by clicking one of the other commands.
Creating commands of the required format
The 'XML-style' commands are added to your part program when you create it if you have checked Add
annotation on the Editor tab page of the Configuration dialog box. Or you can add the comments
manually using the Insert Command dialog box. The Group and New Group options in the Teach Path
view pop-up menu also group commands together using the 'XML-style' commands.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
78
Editor - Configuration Dialog Box
131
205
201
201
20.7
Insert Snippet
Insert Snippet
Snippets are lines of DMIS code that can be reused within a part program. The idea behind Snippets is
that if there is something that an application engineer does repeatedly, then the code can be
encapsulated in an easily reused format. Previously, if you wanted to introduce a Do Loop, you would
have had to declare a variable, used the Loop Wizard to define a loop then move the Endloop. This can
now be done in one operation via the surround with code snippet .
Two types of Snippet are available:
Direct Insert
Surround With
Insert Snippet allows the user to insert a block of code at a user defined line within a part program. The
following example describes how to insert a timing block. Select a point within a part program to insert
the code Snippet:
1. Snippet Insertion Point
Right click to show the following menu and select 'Insert Snippet' to launch the Snippet Editor dialog:
206
1. This area shows the pre-installed 'Code Snippets' selectable via a single mouse click.
2. This area shows the 'Code Snippet' which will be inserted into the program.
The code snippet contains items highlighted in blue, which are key words or functions that are repeated
throughout the snippet syntax and are required to be identical to maintain functionality. These key words
are editable and if one instance is edited, the corresponding instances of that word throughout the
snippet will automatically be identically edited. On acceptance of the code snippet function (via OK),
the code snippet is inserted directly into the part program:
207
A second method of using code snippets is to surround an existing block of code, which is particularly
useful for the creation of 'loops'.
1. Highlight code to surround with snippet

The following example describes how to surround a block of code with a 'Do Loop' - select a block of
code to 'surround'.
208
The following dialog will be displayed:
1. This area shows the pre-installed code snippets selectable via a single mouse click
2. This area shows the code snippet which will be inserted into the program
Again, the code snippet contains items highlighted in blue, which are key words or functions and are
simultaneously editable. On acceptance of the code snippet function (via 'OK'), the 'snippet code is
inserted (surrounding the highlighted code) directly into the part program.
20.8
209
Surround with Snippet

Surround with Snippet
Also see Insert Snippet
205
A second method of using code snippets is to surround an existing block of code, which is particularly
useful for the creation of 'loops'.
210
1. Highlight code to surround with snippet

The following example describes how to surround a block of code with a 'Do Loop' - select a block of
code to 'surround'.
The following dialog will be displayed:
1. This area shows the pre-installed code snippets selectable via a single mouse click
2. This area shows the code snippet which will be inserted into the program
Again, the code snippet contains items highlighted in blue, which are key words or functions and are
simultaneously editable. On acceptance of the code snippet function (via 'OK'), the 'snippet code is
211
inserted (surrounding the highlighted code) directly into the part program.
21
Using Buffer Points

Using Buffer Points
Whenever a feature is measured, the buffer (or background) points are stored. Buffer points are also
stored when features are constructed using the following construction types:
Constructing a point by intersection (INTOF)
Constructing a point by moving it (MOVEPT)
Constructing a point as a mid-point (MIDPT)
Constructing a point by projection (PROJCT or PROJPT)
Constructing a point by planar intersection (CURVE)
Constructing a point by transferring the centre (TR)
Constructing a point at an extreme point (EXTREM)
Constructing a feature using best fit (BF)
Constructing a line or plane using offset (OFFSET)
There are two types of buffer point: nominal and actual. The nominal buffer points are the PTMEAS (
point measurement 769 ) points and therefore do not exist if the feature was measured in Manual or
Automatic mode 40 . They are held within the software for the life of the part program. Actual buffer
points depend on whether a feature is being constructed or measured.
Construction
For point features, the actual buffer point created is at the same location as the constructed point. For
all best fit features, the actual buffer points created are at the centres of the constructing features.
Measurement
212
The actual buffer points are stored in the inspection database with the feature. They are the touch points
of the feature. If probe compensation 755 is switched on, they are compensated as follows:
Point, edge point (EDGEPT) - the actual buffer point is compensated along the feature nominal
direction. For point features, you can override this by calling the COMPTOUCHPT DME command
916 , in which case the actual buffer point is compensated along the touch direction, the nearest
datum axis or the probe head direction as specified. This is particularly useful on manual machines.
Circle, arc, sphere, cylinder - the actual buffer point is compensated along the radial direction of the
actual feature.
Line - the actual buffer point is compensated along the actual line normal.
Plane - the actual buffer point is compensated along the actual plane normal.
Cone - the actual buffer point is compensated along the normal to the actual cone surface.
Parallel planes (PARPLN) - the actual buffer point is compensated along the actual normal of the
plane the point is associated with.
Surface (GSURF) - the actual buffer point is compensated along the direction of the associated
nominal PTMEAS point.
Curve (GCURVE) - the actual buffer point is compensated along the normal to the curve within the
plane.
You can construct features using actual buffer points, and you can also output buffer points.
A buffer point, whether nominal or actual, has seven ordinals
following command:
958
, which you can identify from the
PTMEAS/CART,x,y,z,i,j,k
The first ordinal is the parameter after the / character, in this case CART.
See Also:
Constructing Features from Buffer Points
Outputting Buffer Points
Point Buffer Dialog Box
557
462
597
22

There are two methods of adding a prompt to display on the screen when running a part program.
Use the CAMIO Prompt Editor 924 application to create your own dialog boxes to display to users as
your inspection program is run.
Use the Output Text dialog box
inspection program is run.
763
to create text messages to display to the user as your
See Also:
Creating a Prompt Dialog Box
23

213
A macro is a block of DMIS commands, within a part program, that defines a sequence of DMIS
activities. The macro is first defined within the program, then actioned with a Call external program
(CALL) command.
1.
In the advanced commands
2.
In the Macro dialog box 946 , type in a label for the macro. You can then add any macro parameters.
The parameters are given values in the CALL command when the macro is called. They can be
used in the macro commands to add labels and variables such as feature co-ordinates, tolerance
values and text strings. To add macro parameters, type in a new name for each parameter, and
select a parameter type. Click Add to add the parameter to the list. If you need to edit a parameter
to change its type, highlight the parameter, then select the type and click Set. When you have
created all the parameters you need for the macro, click OK. An M(macro_name)=MACRO/
parameter, parameter,... (Define macro) command is inserted in your part program.
3.
Add the DMIS commands for the macro into your part program after the Define macro command.
When you have finished, in the advanced programming commands click End Macro. This inserts an
ENDMAC (End macro) command in your part program.
4.
To call the macro, add a CALL command to your program. To do this, select Macro in the Call
Routine dialog box 915 , and select the macro label from the drop-down list. If you have set up
parameters for the macro, double-click in the Arguments field. In the Call Macro dialog box 948 ,
highlight each parameter in turn, type in a value for it in the Value field and click Set. Click OK. The
parameters are listed in the Arguments field in the Call Routine dialog box, with label parameters in
parentheses.
5.
Click OK in the Call Routine dialog box.
890
, select Macro.
When the program is run, the Define macro command is run and any commands after that up to the End
macro command are ignored. When the Call external program command that calls the macro is run, the
program jumps to the Define macro command that it references, and executes all the commands after it
up to the End macro command. After executing the End macro command, the program returns to the
line after the Call external program command.
24
24.1

Use the Mirror utility to mirror a part program about the X or Y plane. For example, if a program has
been created to inspect the left-hand side of a car body, you could use the Mirror utility to generate a
corresponding program to measure the right-hand side.
To access the Mirror utility, you must first customise your toolbars 45 and put the Mirror utility in your
preferred location. The Mirror utility is listed under the High Level category on the Commands tab page
of the Quick Access menu. If a part program is open when you start the Mirror utility, it is closed. No
post-process operations are carried out, such as report generation or repeat processing.
The Mirror process has two parts - the definition part and the run part. The definition part specifies how
the Mirror process will run, and uses a wizard for set-up. The run part runs through the Mirror process
and creates a mirror program according to your definition.
Select an option for information:
Defining the Mirror Process - the Mirror Wizard
Running the Mirror Process
214
214
24.2
24.2.1 Defining the Mirror Process - the Mirror Wizard

The Mirror process provides a facility to mirror a part program about the X or Y plane. First, you define
the process using the Mirror wizard. To access the wizard, select the Mirror option on the Wizards
menu. If a part program is open when you start the Mirror utility, it is closed. No post-process
operations are carried out, such as report generation or repeat processing.
The wizard has five pages:
Input File
214
Output File
Plane
215
215
Labels
216
Machine Configuration
217
As you work your way through the wizard, the items you define are displayed in the Progress box on the
left-hand side of each wizard page.
See Also:
24.2.2 Mirror Wizard Page 1 - Input File

Mirror Wizard Page 1 - Input File
If a part program is open when you start the Mirror utility, it is closed. No post-process operations are
carried out, such as report generation or repeat processing.
If a part program was open when you started the Mirror utility, its filename is entered into the Input file
field. If you want to mirror a different program, select it using the Browse button.
215
To leave all the CALL commands in the mirror program as they are in the existing part program, check
the Ignore CALL commands box. Otherwise, CALL commands are commented out.
To continue the definition, click Next.
24.2.3 Mirror Wizard Page 2 - Output File

Mirror Wizard Page 2 - Output File
On the second page of the wizard, click Browse to select the output file to be created by the Mirror
process. By default, this uses the filename for your currently open DMIS file, prefixed with 'Mirror'. If
this already exists, completing the wizard will overwrite it.
24.2.4 Mirror Wizard Page 3 - Plane

Mirror Wizard Page 3 - Plane
216
Select the plane to be used for the mirror. The planes are defined in terms of the machine co-ordinates.
It is assumed that you will usually want to mirror around the Y plane, so this is the default. This is
essentially a left-right mirror. The X plane is a front-back mirror.
24.2.5 Mirror Wizard Page 4 - Labels

Mirror Wizard Page 4 - Labels
When the Mirror process encounters a label or variable name, it will take the name, apply the renaming
217
method you define here, and use the new label name in the mirror file.
Select a rename method of None to apply no changes to names, select Prefix to place your specified
text at the start of the label and select Suffix to place your text at the end of the label.
Renaming labels is important for some commands. For example, your part program may recall a sensor
with angles (-90, 90), but your mirrored program might need a sensor with angles (90, 90). If you do not
rename labels, your mirrored program will recall the sensor with angles (-90, 90). You could add a (90,
90) sensor with a new label to your calibration program, then use the rename method to change the
name of the (-90, 90) sensor in your mirrored program to match the (90, 90) sensor. This would ensure
that your mirrored program recalled the correct sensor.
24.2.6 Mirror Wizard Page 5 - Machine

Mirror Wizard Page 5 - Machine
The final page of the wizard is used to define the machine configuration. The type of machine on which
the Mirror process is running is displayed, and the Source probe field shows the direction of the probe on
this machine. The Mirror probe field displays the probe direction in which the mirror program will be run.
In this example page, since the CMM type is a bridge machine with the probe in the Z axis, the probe
direction cannot be mirrored. However, if the mirror plane were Y you could mirror the program for a
probe in the -Y axis. To do this, check the Reverse box.
To end the definition process and begin to run the Mirror process, click Finish.
Note:
If the mirror file already exists and you are re-defining it using the wizard, it will be overwritten with your
new definition when you click Finish. Any changes you had previously made to the mirror file when
running the Mirror process will be lost.
218
24.2.7 Running the Mirror Process

24.2.7.1 Running the Mirror Process

The Mirror process provides a facility to mirror a DMIS program about the X or Y plane. First, you define
the process using the Mirror wizard. Then you run the Mirror process from the Mirror Progress dialog
box using the parameters you set up in the wizard. The Mirror Progress dialog box is displayed when
you click Finish on the final page of the wizard.
See Also:
Mirror Progress Dialog Box
214
218

24.2.7.2 Mirror Progress Dialog Box
Mirror Progress Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Mirror Progress dialog box to run the process of mirroring an existing part program. First, in the
On Error box select the action to take if the Mirror process encounters an error in a line from the source
file. Then, to start the process, click Start (this button changes according to the current action. It can
be Start, Continue, Stop or Restart). The Mirror process checks each line of the source DMIS program
and writes it to the mirror file. To pause the Mirror process at any time click Stop (the Continue button
becomes a Stop button whilst the process is running). When the process has completed you can open
219
the mirror program immediately, or exit and open it another time.

Navigation
Complete the Mirror wizard and click Finish

On Error - controls what the Mirror process does when it encounters an error in a line from the source
DMIS program.
Commit - writes the source line to the mirror file.
Skip - writes the source line to the mirror file, but comments it out.
Pause - halts the Mirror process to allow editing of the line in the Mirror line field. Click Continue to
carry on the Mirror process.
Process - provides information about the Mirror process, and allows editing to correct any errors.
Overtype the line in the Mirror line field to correct it.
Source line - the line being mirrored.
Mirror line - the corresponding line being created in the mirror file.
Mirror status - a description of the error.
Commit/Skip/Start/Continue/Stop/Restart buttons
Commit - if the Mirror process has paused on encountering an error in the source program, click
Commit to write the line to the mirror program.
Skip - if the Mirror process has paused on encountering an error in the source program, to write the
line to the mirror program but comment it out, click Skip.
Start - click to start the Mirror process.
Continue - click to resume the Mirror process.
Stop - when the process is running the Continue button changes to a Stop button. To pause the
Mirror process at any point click Stop.
Restart - when the process has completed the Stop button changes to a Restart button. Use this to
rerun the Mirror process. This will overwrite the mirror file you have just created.
Status - indicates the current status of the Mirror process and the percentage completion.
Note:
The Mirror process reports any errors at the end. These errors include:
Lines commented out by skipping an error during the Mirror process, or by selecting Skip in the On
Error box.
Commented-out CALL statements, if the Ignore CALL commands box has NOT been checked in the
Mirror wizard. When the process has completed, the number of commented-out CALL statements
is displayed.
Variables that require the value changing (such as a direction vector). The line is written to the
mirror file, commented out.
GEOM (Compare to CAD) commands. These are commented out.
OPEN/DID(label),CAD commands, i.e. Open external file commands, where the external file is a
CAD file. These are commented out.
MODEL commands. These are Metris-specific commands used for performing actions with the
model, e.g. opening and closing. These are commented out.
220
SNSDEF commands defining star probes. These are commented out.

Whitespace, i.e. a sequence of characters that are not displayed, such as spaces or tabs, is not
preserved, including line breaks in multi-line commands. However, this is not reported as an error.
Warning:
If programs are run using the mathematical method of evaluating tolerances then, if the tolerance is
unequal (e.g. +.1, -.2) the mirrored program will evaluate tolerances incorrectly. The method of
evaluating tolerances is set on the Miscellaneous tab page on the Configuration dialog box.
See Also:
214
218
25
Override Log On Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Override Log On dialog box to override the user that is currently logged on to the local computer,
with another user. You may wish to do this so that you can override the user with one of higher user
privileges, so that you can access functions that otherwise you would not be able to use.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Override Log On/Off option

Currently logged on
221
This box shows the details of the user who is currently logged on to the local computer.
Domain and user name - the domain and user name of the user currently logged on to the local
computer.
Override user logged in? - indicates whether the user who is currently logged in has been overridden
by another user.
CAMIO local groups - displays the CAMIO group that the user is a member of. For details of CAMIO
groups, see User Privileges 222 .
To override the user who is currently logged in, type in the override details in the following fields:
User name - type in the user name of the override user (normally with greater user privileges) that is
going to override the user who is currently logged in.
Password - type in the password of the override user.
Log on to (domain) - type in the domain for the override user. This is not required if the user account is
on the local computer.
Log on - click to log on to CAMIO as the override user.
26
Override Log Off Dialog Box

Override Log Off Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Override Log Off dialog box to log off the user that is currently logged on and that is overriding
the user of the local computer. This returns the user privileges to those of the user of the local
computer.
Navigation
CAMIO Options menu, Override Log On/Off option
222

Currently logged on
This box shows the details of the user who is currently logged on to the local computer.
Domain and user name - the domain and user name of the user currently logged on to the local
computer.
Override user logged in? - indicates whether the user who is currently logged in overrides another
user.
CAMIO local groups - displays the CAMIO group that the user is a member of. For details of CAMIO
groups, see User Privileges 222 .
Log off - click to log off from CAMIO and return to the user privileges of the user logged on to the local
computer.
27
User Privileges
User Privileges
The user privileges function is also used within the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS application.
It may be desirable to limit access to certain functions in CAMIO, so that only specific groups of users
can access those functions. Within CAMIO, it is possible to define three groups of users:
CAMIO Administrator - a Microsoft Windows user who is a member of this group can access all
functions within CAMIO.
CAMIO Supervisor - a Windows user who is a member of this group can access all CAMIO
Supervisor functions and CAMIO Operator functions but not CAMIO Administrator functions.
CAMIO Operator - a Windows user who is a member of this group can access CAMIO Operator
functions but not CAMIO Supervisor functions or CAMIO Administrator functions. CMM operators
might be members of the CAMIO Operator local group. So, for example, if a function within CAMIO
is protected to Supervisor level, an CAMIO Operator member would be unable to access that
function, and an error would be displayed.
A Windows user who is not a member of any CAMIO group is treated as a member of the CAMIO
Operator group.
The CAMIO installation process places the user carrying out the installation into the CAMIO
Administrator group.
The local groups, i.e. those created on the local computer, are displayed in the Local Users and Groups
dialog box available from the Control Panel, User Accounts option in Windows:
User Privileges
223
You can allocate users to groups only if you are a Windows Administrator of the local computer, or you
have Windows Administrative privileges.
The privileges associated with the three groups of user determine whether certain functions in CAMIO
can be accessed. In CAMIO, the CMM Configuration dialog box (from the CMM menu, Configure option)
can only be accessed by user accounts that are members of the CAMIO Administrator or CAMIO
Supervisor groups. (If you delete all three groups, i.e. CAMIO Administrator, CAMIO Supervisor and
CAMIO Operator, from Local Users and Groups, this protective functionality is removed from CAMIO
applications, so that all CAMIO functions can be accessed by all Windows users, but in order to do this
deletion, you must be a Windows Administrator of the local computer, or you must have Windows
Administrative privileges.)
There are two methods of applying the user privileges:
1.
Using 'Run as'

This option is part of the Microsoft Windows operating system, not part of CAMIO. It allows a user
with one level of privileges to run CAMIO as a user with a different level of privileges. For example,
a user with operator privileges could run CAMIO as an administrator and hence have access to
areas of CAMIO denied to an operator. To use it, in Windows Explorer, right-click on the CAMIO
application you wish to use and select the Run as option from the pop-up menu.
2.
Using local groups within the CAMIO software

There are three levels of CAMIO users, as described above. If a function within CAMIO is protected
to Supervisor level, for example, a CAMIO Operator member would be unable to access that
function, and an error would be displayed. The CAMIO Operator then has several means of
accessing the function, which require using the log-on of a superior user, i.e. a user who is a
member of the CAMIO Supervisor or CAMIO Administrator group:
Close CAMIO, and use the 'Run as' function described above, using the superior user's details
Close CAMIO, log off Windows and log back on as the superior user, and then run CAMIO
Use the Override Log On dialog box 220 within CAMIO to log on as the superior user, then use
the Override Log Off dialog box 221 when the function has been used. There is no need to close
CAMIO.
224
Changes to the logged-in user may require closing and re-opening CAMIO, or logging off then logging
back on again, to take effect.
28
Opening and Saving CAD Files
28.1

Use the Model Open and Model Save As options from the Model tab or File menu. If, when opening or
saving a file, an operation is not successful, InterOp Warning and Error numbers may be displayed at
the top of the conversion log file. For details of the warnings and errors, see InterOp Warning and Error
Messages 226 .
Opening files
ACIS Binary File (.sab), HOOPS Stream File (.hsf), ACIS Text File (.sat) - these options display only
the Common options on the CAD Model Options dialog box 172 .
You can open a CAD model as a device, to be used in a Compare to CAD function. This option is
available for ACIS format files (i.e. .sat and .sab files). For details see Opening a CAD Model File as a
Device 225 .
Opening a CATIA v4 File 227
Opening an IGES File
234
Opening a Parasolid File

Opening a Pro/E File
Opening a VDA File
244
246
Opening a STEP File

Opening a UG File
241
249
253
Opening a SolidWorks File
256
The files are loaded into ACIS and then displayed by the HOOPS graphics engine. You can use the
Save As option from the Model menu to save your file as another file type. This is then displayed in the
caption at the top of your CAMIO screen.
Saving files
Saving a HOOPS Stream File
Saving an ACIS File
257
258
259
Saving a CATIA v4 File 260

Saving a CATIA v5 File 262
Saving an IGES File
263
Saving a Parasolid File

Saving a VDA File
266
268
Saving a STEP File
270
See Also:
File Types
36
225
Model Menu
28.2
Opening a CAD Model File as a Device

Opening a CAD Model File as a Device
You can open a CAD model as a device, to be used in a Compare to CAD function. This option is
available for ACIS format files (i.e. .sat and .sab files).
To open a CAD model as a device:
1.
With a part program open, from the Model tab on the CAMIO main toolbar, select Model Open in the
Model section.
2.
In the Open CAD Model dialog box:

select an ACIS file type in the Files of type field;
select the model file you wish to open in the File name field;
check the Device box and type in a name for the device in the adjacent field. For example:
.
3.
Click Open. CAMIO adds the following commands to your part program (in this example the CAD
model filename is cadfile.sab and the device name is device01):
DID(device01)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\cadfile.sab'
OPEN/DID(device01),CAD,VENDOR,'ACIS'
G(device01_ALL)=GEOM/DID(device01)
You can also use advanced programming commands to open the model as a device.
To open a CAD model as a device using advanced programming commands:
1.
Define your CAD model file as a device, using the Input/Output Device dialog box 940 . For example,
for a device called device01 and a CAD model file called cadfile.sab, the Input/Output Device dialog
box would look like this:
When you click OK, CAMIO adds this command to your part program for the example data:
226
DID(device01)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\cadfile.sab'
2.
Open the device as a CAD file, using the Open Device dialog box 941 and selecting the device you
defined above, selecting Input as the device type, and checking the CAD box:
.
When you click OK, CAMIO adds an OPEN/DID command to your part program, and a GEOM/DID
command that defines a geometry item for the whole device. For example:
OPEN/DID(device01),CAD,VENDOR,'ACIS'
G(device01_ALL)=GEOM/DID(device01)
See Also:
Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378
28.3
InterOp Warning and Error Messages

InterOp Warning and Error Messages
If, when opening or saving a file, an operation is not successful, the following InterOp Warning and Error
numbers may be displayed at the top of the conversion log file. The file is saved in the folder C:\LK
\Appdata\Log:
Warning Number
Description
Model partially loaded
16777 233
Model size exceeds bounding box
16777 234
Model size is smaller than bounding box
28.4
50331 654
Operation result is undetermined
Error Number
Description
No entities to open
File only contains entities that are not supported by

InterOp
16777 217
Operation failed or cannot be performed
16777 218
Error occurred during operation
16777 220
Functionality not supported
16777 221
Method not implemented
16777 223
Unexpected error occurred
16777 224
Error occurred because object was not initialised
16777 225
Invalid component
16777 226
Invalid object
16777 227
Parameter passed to function or method was invalid
16777 228
Licence checking failed
16777 229
File not found
16777 230
File not opened
16777 231
File not saved
16777 232
Encrypted file
16777 235
Write unit set is not suitable for system being

written to
16777 236
Unsupported file version
16777 237
Invalid file e.g. corrupted
33554 435
Operation aborted
227
Opening a CATIA v4 File
28.4.1 Opening a CATIA v4 File

You can open a CATIA v4 file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu. The Open dialog
box is displayed, where you can browse for a CATIA v4 (or other format) file. You can then either open it
immediately, or first display the CAD Model Options dialog box to view and change its properties.
To view and change the CATIA v4 file properties before opening the file, highlight the CATIA v4 file in the
Open dialog box, then click the Options button.
228
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities present in .exp or .
model files. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
CATIA v4 files have the extension .exp, .model or .session.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a CATIA v4 file:
Common Options - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
CATIA v4 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box 228
28.4.2 CATIA v4 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

CATIA v4 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
Purpose
229
Use the CATIA v4 tab page to set up options for the CATIA v4 file to be opened.
CATIA v4 files have the extension .exp, .model or .session. A session file is a collection of CATIA v4
model files. The session file contains reference to the model files in the session. A session file can be
saved from CATIA v4 using four options:
1.
Save references only
2.
Save copies of modified data
3.
Save copies of all data
4.
Save reference and update original data.
Saving a session file using options 1 and 4 produces one session file only that has references to the
model files in the session. Options 2 and 3 create some additional session files that are actually
modified model files. A session file that has been saved using option 1 or 4 can be opened by CAMIO.
Opening a file that has been saved using option 2 or 3 may not be successful. Model files that are
referred to in a session file must be in the same directory as the session file.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Open model in the Model section, in the Open dialog box
select CATIA v4 from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .exp or a .model file, click Options,
select the CATIA v4 tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select CATIA v4 from the Files of
type drop-down list, select a .exp or a .model file, click Options, select the CATIA v4 tab page

Master workspace - if checked, only the master workspace is read. If unchecked, all entities are read.
Attach attributes - if checked, layer, colour and label information is attached to the entities when
brought into ACIS.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves in the CATIA v4 file into corresponding ACIS edge
entities. If the CATIA v4 file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it will
speed up processing if you uncheck this box. (This option was previously called 'Wire bodies'.)
Free points - if checked, converts free points into ACIS vertex entities. Usually there are not many free
points, but if there are, it will speed up processing if you uncheck this box.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the CATIA v4 file into the corresponding
ACIS format. Some models may contain surface elements that do not need to be converted to ACIS.
Turning this option off may help to filter out unwanted construction geometry.
Solid bodies - if checked, converts solid body data from the CATIA v4 file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Mockup solids - if checked, converts mockup solid entities from the CATIA v4 file into the corresponding
ACIS format. (Mockup solids are tessellated solids without an exact representation of surfaces.)
Sheet bodies - if checked, converts sheet body data from the CATIA v4 file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Analytic surface data - if checked, the analytic definition of a surface is used when reading from a
CATIA v4 file. If unchecked, its polynomial surface definition is used.
Space-ditto entities - if checked, converts 'space-ditto' entities from the CATIA v4 file into the
corresponding ACIS format.
Workplanes - if checked, converts workplanes from the CATIA file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Workplanes in CATIA v4 are simple analytical planes which are not by default part of the core geometry.
230
This option allows you to load them when opening a CATIA file.
Make output model tolerant - if checked, ACIS accepts less precise geometric data from the
translated model, and creates a valid ACIS model. This increases the scope of the data that ACIS can
import.
Resurface NURBS surfaces - if checked, all spline surfaces in the ACIS model are checked for any
geometric problems, e.g. self-intersecting surfaces. If any problems are found, the surface is repaired
using ACIS spline resurfacing algorithms. This option can slow down file conversion.
Simplify NURBS surfaces - if checked, converts (where possible) NURBS surfaces into analytic forms
(planes, cylinders, cones, tori or spheres).
Heal all faces - if checked, heals all free faces (trimmed and untrimmed). This ensures that facetrimming curves are connected and lie on the surface within ACIS precision.
Check geometry - if checked, an ACIS entity check file is created (filename.chk). Any problem entities
are listed with their errors or warnings. The number of problem entities is given in the log file (filename_i.
log). Both the check file and the log file are written to the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log. This option can
slow down the conversion of larger files.
Additional options - displays the CATIA v4 Model Options dialog box 230 , where you can view and
change CATIA geometry import options.
See Also:
Model Menu
963

28.4.3 CATIA v4 Model Options - Geometry

CATIA v4 Model Options - Geometry
Purpose
Use the Geometry tab page to define how geometry entities are imported when opening a CATIA v4
file.
Navigation
select CATIA v4 from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .exp or a .model file, click Options,
select the CATIA v4 tab page, click Additional options
type drop-down list, select a .exp or a .model file, click Options, select the CATIA v4 tab page, click
231
Additional options

No show entities - if checked, allows the import of 'no show' entities.
No pick entities - if checked, allows the import of 'no pick' entities.
Root entities - if checked, only allows the import of root entities. If unchecked, all entities are read.
Extra root entities - if checked, allows the import of extra root entities. These entities are of the type
curve parent and child surface. If a curve is filtered out, its corresponding surface is also filtered out. If
this option is checked, the surface is set as root and imported.
See Also:
Model Menu
963

28.5
28.5.1 Opening a CATIA v5 File

You can open a CATIA v5 file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu. The Open dialog
box is displayed, where you can browse for a CATIA v5 (or other format) file. You can then either open it
To view and change the CATIA v5 file properties before opening the file, highlight the CATIA v5 file in the
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities present in .CATPart
or .CATProduct files. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
CATIA v5 files have the extension .CATPart or .CATProduct.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a CATIA v5 file:
172
28.5.2 CATIA v5 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

232
Purpose
Use the CATIA v5 tab page to set up options for the CATIA v5 file to be opened.
CATIA v5 files have the extension .CATPart or .CATProduct.
Navigation
select CATIA v5 from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .CATPart or a .CATProduct file, click
Options, select the CATIA v5 tab page
type drop-down list, select a .CATPart or a .CATProduct file, click Options, select the CATIA v5 tab
page

brought into ACIS.
Attach edge attributes - if checked, layer, colour and label information is attached to edge entities
233
when brought into ACIS. In most cases, this information is not meaningful. Transferring edge attributes
for large models can increase load time. For most models, CATIA v5 attributes are attached to the
model faces and processing of edge attributes is superfluous. This option has no impact on free edges.
Manufacturing information - if checked, Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) and hole feature
data are read from the CATIA v5 file into the corresponding ACIS format. Support is available for reading
data annotations such as text, datum, geometric tolerance and roughness. For hole features, support
includes reading information about physical properties of the hole, such as hole diameter, depth,
chamfer depth and counter bore diameter. Support is only provided for reading manufacturing information
from part (.CATPart) files, not from assembly (.CATProduct) files. This is a licensed option and is greyed
for users without the required licence.
Selection sets - if checked, converts selection sets from the CATIA v5 file into the corresponding ACIS
format. A selection set is a group of geometrical entities with a name specified by the user, e.g. Set 1,
Set 2.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves from the CATIA v5 file into the corresponding ACIS
format. If the CATIA v5 file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it will
speed up processing if you uncheck this box.
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the CATIA v5 file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Hidden entities - if checked, allows the import of entities marked as hidden.
Revolve surfaces as NURBS - if checked, converts revolve surfaces from the CATIA v5 file to NURBS
surfaces in ACIS. If unchecked, they are converted to B-spline surfaces.
Workplanes - if checked, converts workplanes from the CATIA v5 file into the corresponding ACIS
format. Workplanes in CATIA v5 are features of GSMPlane type. This option allows you to load them
when opening a CATIA v5 file.
CATIA v5 name
Select the name information to load with the model. A 'publication name' is a means of referencing an
object by a custom name and is normally used in assembly files to identify specific geometry in each
part that makes up the assembly. Therefore if a change is made to an object with a particular
publication name, all objects that have the publication name applied are also changed automatically.
None - no feature or publication names are loaded.
Feature name - feature names only are loaded.
Publication name - publication names only are loaded.
Feature and publication name - loads publication name followed by feature name.
import.
Heal all faces - if checked, heals all free faces (trimmed surfaces only). This ensures that facetrimming curves are connected and lie on the surface within ACIS precision.
234
See Also:
Model Menu
963

28.6
28.6.1 Opening an IGES File

You can open an IGES file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open dialog
box is displayed, where you can browse for an IGES (or other format) file. You can then either open it
To view and change the IGES file properties before opening the file, highlight the IGES file in the Open
dialog box, then click the Options button.
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities, healing of incorrect
face geometry while reading IGES files, reading and writing of colour and label information associated
with IGES entities, and reading of level information associated with IGES entities. A log file of the
conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
IGES files have the extension .iges or .igs.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening an IGES file:
IGES - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
172
234
IGES Model Options - IGES Header Info 236

IGES Model Options - Curve Trimming 238
IGES Model Options - Masking - Curves
239
IGES Model Options - Masking - Surfaces
28.6.2 IGES - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

IGES - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
235
Purpose
Use the IGES tab page to set up general options for the IGES file to be opened.
Navigation
select IGES from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .iges or .igs file, click Options, select the
IGES tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select IGES from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .iges or a .igs file, click Options, select the IGES tab page
236

brought into ACIS.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves in the IGES file into corresponding ACIS edge entities. If
the IGES file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it will speed up
processing if you uncheck this box.
Free points - if checked, converts free points into ACIS vertex entities. Usually there are not many free
points, but if there are, it will speed up processing if you uncheck this box.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the IGES file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Blanked entities - if checked, allows the import of blanked (independent) IGES entities.
Sub-figure entities - if checked, allows the import of IGES sub-figure instance entities.
Associativity instance entities - if checked, allows the import of entities contained in IGES
associativity entity #402.
Annotations - if checked, allows the import of IGES annotation data as geometrical entities.
Invalid IGES geometry - if checked, allows the import of all curve or surface IGES entities that ACIS
has classified as unacceptable geometry, i.e. possessing certain geometric properties (e.g. selfintersections, illegal singularities) that are not normally handled by ACIS.
import.
Heal all faces - if checked, heals all free faces (trimmed and untrimmed). This ensures that facetrimming curves are connected and lie on the surface within ACIS precision.
Flavour - if the IGES file has been saved as a particular 'flavour' from other CAD modelling packages,
select the flavour here, to ensure correct interpretation of the IGES data.
Additional options - displays the IGES Model Options dialog box
more IGES file properties.
236
, where you can view and change
See Also:
Model Menu
963
234
28.6.3 IGES Model Options - IGES Header Info

IGES Model Options - IGES Header Info
237
Purpose
Use the IGES Header Info tab page to view header information for the IGES file to be opened.
Navigation
IGES tab page, click Additional options, select the IGES Header Info tab page
drop-down list, select a .iges or a .igs file, click Options, select the IGES tab page, click Additional
options, select the IGES Header Info tab page

Version number - the version number of the IGES file being opened.
Document type - Assembly, Part or Visualisation. Assembly references one or more documents that
can contain topological and geometrical data. Part contains topological and geometrical data.
Visualisation contains a faceted picture of the model, but no topological and geometrical data.
Min. resolution - the smallest distance in model space that the system considers discernible. Coordinate locations less than this distance apart are considered to be coincident. This is the value used if
IGES is selected on the Minimum Resolution tab page.
Units - the units specified in the file.
File name - the IGES filename.
Sending system - the name or identifier used by the sender for the product.
Author - the name of the person who created the file.
238
Organisation - the file author's organisation.

Modification date - the date the IGES file was last modified.
Comments - a file description or other comments stored with the file.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
28.6.4 IGES Model Options - Curve Trimming

IGES Model Options - Curve Trimming
Purpose
Use the Curve Trimming tab page to define how curve trimming is applied when opening the IGES file.
Navigation
IGES tab page, click Additional options, select the Curve Trimming tab page
options, select the Curve Trimming tab page

Trim curves
239
Specifies whether a trim curve is to be read using 2D parametric data or 3D model-specific data. IGES
files specify 2D or 3D for each trim curve. The IGES preferences can be accepted or overridden here.
Using IGES preference - select this to accept the IGES file preference for specifying trim curves.
Always using 2D - select this to use 2D parametric data.
Always using 3D - select this to use 3D model space data.
2D copious data trim curves
Specifies how copious data curves are treated when converting them to ACIS curves. IGES files may
contain parametric trim curve data in copious data (or polyline) form. This can lead to data explosion in
the conversion process. If a copious data curve is converted to a single curve, some ACIS operations
may not work. If it is converted to multiple ACIS curves, then it will be valid in ACIS but data explosion
may occur.
Multiple spline curves - if checked, IGES copious data trim curves are imported as multiple spline
curves rather than a single entity. Translation is faster if this option is not checked.
Multiple line curves - if checked, IGES copious data trim curves are imported as multiple line curves
rather than a single entity. Translation is faster if this option is not checked.
Split discontinuous edges - specifies how discontinuities are handled in curves. If checked, curves are
split at G1 discontinuities, with a vertex placed at each split. If unchecked, curves are not split at
discontinuities.
Plane bound - sets a parameter value for a bounded plane from IGES so that it can be interpreted
correctly by ACIS. Set this to a positive value to trim the plane surface. For example, if you set this
value to 1000, the (u, v) range of the surface will be 0 - 1000 in each direction. If this value is zero or
negative, the surface is not trimmed.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
28.6.5 IGES Model Options - Masking - Curves

IGES Model Options - Masking - Curves
240
Purpose
Use the Masking - Curves tab page to select curve entities for masking in the IGES file to be opened. If
a curve entity is masked here, all curve entities sharing the same IGES entity ID number will be masked.
Masked curve entities will not appear in the model window. If you wish to recover the masked entities,
you must open the IGES file again with the appropriate masking defined.
Navigation
IGES tab page, click Additional options, select the Masking - Curves tab page
options, select the Masking - Curves tab page
See Also:
Model Window
Model Menu
49
963
28.6.6 IGES Model Options - Masking - Surfaces

IGES Model Options - Masking - Surfaces
241
Purpose
Use the Masking - Surfaces tab page to select surface types for masking in the IGES file to be opened.
If a surface entity is masked here, all surface entities sharing the same IGES entity ID number will be
masked. Masked surface entities will not appear in the model window. If you wish to recover the
masked entities, you must open the IGES file again with the appropriate masking defined.
Navigation
IGES tab page, click Additional options, select the Masking - Surfaces tab page
options, select the Masking - Surfaces tab page
See Also:
Model Window
Model Menu
49
963
28.7
28.7.1 Opening a Parasolid File

You can open a Parasolid file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open
dialog box is displayed, where you can browse for a Parasolid (or other format) file. You can then either
open it immediately, or first display the CAD Model Options dialog box to view and change its properties.
242
To view and change the Parasolid file properties before opening the file, highlight the Parasolid file in the
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities. It provides ACIS
body healing using tolerant modelling. Assemblies read from Parasolid files are flattened out in ACIS. A
log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
Parasolid files have the extension .xmt_txt or .x_t.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a Parasolid file:
172
PARASOLID - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
28.7.2 PARASOLID - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

PARASOLID - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Parasolid tab page to set up general options for the Parasolid file to be opened.
Parasolid files have the extension .xmt_txt or .x_t.
Navigation
243
select PARASOLID from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .xmt_txt or .x_t file, click Options,
select the PARASOLID tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select PARASOLID from the Files of
type drop-down list, select a .xmt_txt or a .x_t file, click Options, select the PARASOLID tab page

Attach attributes - if checked, layer, colour, label, line, thickness, pick and show information is
attached to the entities when brought into ACIS.
Attach face-ID attributes - if checked, a face index is attached to Parasolid face entities when brought
into ACIS.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves from the Parasolid file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the Parasolid file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the Parasolid file into the corresponding
ACIS format.
Make free faces if topology creation fails - if checked, and topology creation fails, the output is
generated face-wise, i.e. for each face of the input body, a separate output body is created. If
unchecked, the individual faces are joined together to create a single body.
import.
Heal all faces - if checked, if checked, heals all free faces (trimmed and untrimmed). This ensures that
face-trimming curves are connected and lie on the surface within ACIS precision.
File unit - determines the scale factor between Parasolid units and ACIS units. Parasolid data is in
metres (1000 mm) by default. Do not change this selection unless you must output Parasolid data in a
different system, or you know that a particular Parasolid file is not in metres.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
241
244
28.8
28.8.1 Opening a Pro/E File

You can open a Pro/ENGINEER file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The
Open dialog box is displayed, where you can browse for a Pro/E (or other format) file. You can then
either open it immediately, or first display the CAD Model Options dialog box to view and change its
properties.
To view and change the Pro/E file properties before opening the file, highlight the Pro/E file in the Open
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities present in Part files.
Assemblies can be read from Pro/E files, and are flattened out in ACIS. No support is provided for
conversion of compressed and encrypted Pro/E files. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:
\LK\Appdata\Log.
Pro/E files have the extension .asm or .prt.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a Pro/E file:
172
Pro/E - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
28.8.2 Pro/E - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

Purpose
245
Use the Pro/E tab page to set up general options for the Pro/ENGINEER file to be opened.
Pro/E files have the extension .asm or .prt.
Navigation
select Pro/E from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .asm or .prt file, click Options, select the
Pro/E tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select Pro/E from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .asm or a .prt file, click Options, select the Pro/E tab page

Attach attributes - if checked, colour and label information is attached to the entities when brought into
ACIS.
Manufacturing information - if checked, Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) and hole feature
data are read from the Pro/E file into the corresponding ACIS format. Support is available for reading
data annotations such as text, datum, geometric tolerance and roughness. For hole features, support
includes reading information about physical properties of the hole, such as hole diameter, depth,
chamfer depth and counter bore diameter. Support is only provided for reading manufacturing information
from part (.prt) files, not from assembly (.asm) files. This is a licensed option and is greyed for users
without the required licence.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves from the Pro/E file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the Pro/E file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the Pro/E file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
import.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
244
246
28.9
Opening a VDA File
28.9.1 Opening a VDA File

Opening a VDA File
You can open a VDA file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open dialog
box is displayed, where you can browse for a VDA (or other format) file. You can then either open it
To view and change the VDA file properties before opening the file, highlight the VDA file in the Open
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical entities, as well as the healing of incorrect
face geometry while reading VDA-FS files. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK
\Appdata\Log.
VDA files have the extension .vda.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a VDA file.
VDA - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
172
246
VDA Model Options - VDA Header Info
28.9.2 VDA - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

VDA - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
247
Purpose
Use the VDA tab page to set up general options for the VDA file to be opened.
Navigation
select VDA from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .vda file, click Options, select the VDA tab
page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select VDA from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .vda file, click Options, select the VDA tab page

Attach attributes - if checked, layer information is attached to the entities when brought into ACIS.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curve data from the VDA file into the corresponding ACIS format.
If the VDA file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it will speed up
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the VDA file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the VDA file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Trimmed surfaces - if checked, converts trimmed face data from the VDA file into the corresponding
248
ACIS format.
TOP element data - if checked, converts the top element data from the VDA file into the corresponding
ACIS format.
import.
Additional options - displays the VDA Model Options dialog box
header information.
248
, where you can view VDA file
See Also:
Model Menu
963
Opening a VDA File
246
28.9.3 VDA Model Options - VDA Header Info

VDA Model Options - VDA Header Info
249
Purpose
Use the VDA Header Info tab page to view header information for the VDA file to be opened.
Navigation
select VDA from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .vda file, click Options, select the VDA tab
page, click Additional options
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select VDA from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .vda file, click Options, select the VDA tab page, click Additional options
See Also:
Model Menu
963
Opening a VDA File
246
Saving a VDA File
28.10 Opening a STEP File

28.10.1 Opening a STEP File
Opening a STEP File
You can open a STEP file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open dialog
box is displayed, where you can browse for a STEP (or other format) file. You can then either open it
To view and change the STEP file properties before opening the file, highlight the STEP file in the Open
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical, topological and assembly entities. It
provides ACIS body healing using tolerant modelling. Assemblies read from STEP files are flattened
out in ACIS. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
STEP files have the extension . step or .stp.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a STEP file:
STEP - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
249
STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info
28.10.2 STEP - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

STEP - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
172
250
Purpose
Use the STEP tab page to set up general options for the STEP file to be opened.
STEP files have the extension .step or .stp.
Navigation
select STEP from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .step or .stp file, click Options, select
the STEP tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select STEP from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .step or a .stp file, click Options, select the STEP tab page
251

Attach attributes - if checked, colour, label, and product ID (only with bodies) information is attached to
the entities when brought into ACIS.
Selection sets - if checked, converts selection sets from the STEP file into the corresponding ACIS
format. A selection set is a group of geometrical entities with a name specified by the user, e.g. Set 1,
Set 2.
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the STEP file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Product definition entities - in most STEP files, all the bodies and assemblies in a model are related
to some product and product definition. But in some STEP files, extra bodies and assemblies are
written that are not related to any product. This option allows you to specify whether or not to read
these entities. If checked, only those entities related to a product are converted into the corresponding
ACIS format. If unchecked, all bodies and assemblies in the STEP file are converted.
Class 1 bodies - if checked, class 1 surface bodies are imported when the file is opened.
Class 4 bodies - if checked, class 4 surface bodies are imported.
Class 4 bodies as trim faces - if checked, class 4 surface bodies are imported as trim faces. If not
checked, all faces are treated as a single body, which reduces load time and ACIS output size.
Class 6 solids - if checked, class 6 solids (manifolds) are imported.
Class 5 faceted solids - if checked, class 5 faceted BREP solid data is imported.
Class 3 wires - if checked, class 3 wireframe bodies are imported.
Class 2 wires - if checked, class 2 wireframe bodies and assemblies are imported.
Class 2 wires as separate wire bodies - if checked, class 2 wireframe bodies and assemblies are
imported as separate wire bodies.
Class 2 faces - if checked, class 2 faces are imported.
import.
Additional options - displays the Step Model Options dialog box
header information.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
Opening a STEP File
249
252
, where you can view STEP file
252
28.10.3 STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info

STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info
Purpose
Use the STEP Header Info dialog box to view header information for the STEP file to be opened.
Navigation
select STEP from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .step or .stp file, click Options, select
the STEP tab page, click Additional options
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select STEP from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .step or a .stp file, click Options, select the STEP tab page, click Additional
options

Document type - Assembly, Part or Visualisation. Assembly references one or more documents that
can contain topological and geometrical data. Part contains topological and geometrical data.
Visualisation contains a faceted picture of the model, but no topological and geometrical data.
Units - the units specified in the file.
Tolerance - the smallest distance in model space that the system considers discernible. Co-ordinate
locations less than this distance apart are considered to be coincident.
File name - the STEP filename.
Time stamp - the date and time the file was saved.
253

Preprocess version - the version of the preprocessor which created the file.
Origin system - the preprocessor which created the file.
Comments - a file description or other comments stored with the file.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
Opening a STEP File
28.11 Opening a UG File

28.11.1 Opening a UG File
Opening a UG File
You can open a UG file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open dialog box
is displayed, where you can browse for a UG (or other format) file. You can then either open it
To view and change the UG file properties before opening the file, highlight the UG file in the Open dialog
box, then click the Options button.
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities. It provides ACIS
body healing using tolerant modelling. No support is provided for conversion of UG assembly files and
compressed UG16 files. All Parasolid data types present in the UG part files are supported. As UG is
based on the Parasolid kernel, the UG part file retains its 3D geometry in Parasolid format. All other
information, including attributes, associativity, history, etc., is in native format. The UG translator
extracts Parasolid geometry information from the UG part file. A log file of the conversion is saved in the
folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
The following errors may be displayed when opening a UG file:
Error Number
Description
No error (success)
Starting engine failed
Engine not running
Invalid file name
Unable to open file for reading
Unable to get temporary directory
Unable to get temporary filename
Unable to open temporary file for writing Parasolid

data
Unable to read part file
Parasolid header not found
10
Incorrect file header
11
Unable to set position in part file
12
Incorrect data size requested for read value
254
13
Unable to locate part information section
14
Unable to locate part information
15
Library expired
16
Not a Unigraphics file
17
Unsupported file version
18
No part selected for restoration
19
No part information present in file
20
Unknown error
21
Invalid scan output file
UG files have the extension .prt.

Click on the links below for information on the options for opening a UG file:
172
UG - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
28.11.2 UG - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

Purpose
255
Use the UG tab page to set up general options for the UG (Unigraphics) file to be opened.
UG files have the extension .prt.
Navigation
select UG from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .prt file, click Options, select the UG tab
page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select UG from the Files of type
drop-down list, select a .prt file, click Options, select the UG tab page

brought into ACIS.
Manufacturing information - if checked, Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) is read from the
Unigraphics file into the corresponding ACIS format. Support is available for reading data annotations
such as text, datum, geometric tolerance and roughness. Support is only provided for reading
manufacturing information from part (.prt) files, not from assembly (.asm) files. This is a licensed option
and is greyed for users without the required licence. It is not available for all UG versions.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves in the UG file into corresponding ACIS edge entities. If
the UG file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it will speed up
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the UG file into the corresponding ACIS format.
Free surfaces - if checked, converts free surface data from the UG file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Non blanked entities - if checked, allows the import of non blanked UG entities only.
Multiple bodies as single body - if checked, a UG file with multiple bodies is converted to a single
body when brought into ACIS.
Entities from visible layers only - if checked, only entities from visible layers are restored from the UG
file.
import.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
256
Opening a UG File
253
28.12 Opening a SolidWorks File

28.12.1 Opening a SolidWorks File
You can open a SolidWorks file in CAMIO using the Open option from the Model menu 963 . The Open
dialog box is displayed, where you can browse for a SolidWorks (or other format) file. You can then
either open it immediately, or first display the CAD Model Options dialog box to view and change its
properties.
To view and change the SolidWorks file properties before opening the file, highlight the SolidWorks file in
the Open dialog box, then click the Options button.
The translator provides support for conversion of geometrical and topological entities present in .sldprt
or .sldasm files. A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
SolidWorks files have the extension .sldprt or .sldasm.
Select the links below for information on the options for opening a SolidWorks file:
172
SolidWorks - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
28.12.2 SolidWorks - CAD Model Options Dialog Box

SolidWorks - CAD Model Options Dialog Box
Purpose
257
Use the SolidWorks tab page to set up general options for the SolidWorks file to be opened.
SolidWorks files have the extension .sldprt or .sldasm.
Navigation
select SolidWorks from the Files of type drop-down list, select a .sldprt or .sldasm file, click
Options, select the SolidWorks tab page
From the File menu, click Open model, in the Open dialog box select SolidWorks from the Files of
type drop-down list, select a .sldprt or a .sldasm file, click Options, select the SolidWorks tab page

brought into ACIS.
Free curves - if checked, converts free curves in the SolidWorks file into corresponding ACIS edge
entities. If the SolidWorks file contains many lines or curves not required in the inspection process, it
will speed up processing if you uncheck this box.
Free points - if checked, converts free point data from the SolidWorks file into the corresponding ACIS
format.
Hidden entities - if checked, allows the import of entities marked as hidden.
Suppressed entities - if checked, allows the import of suppressed entities from SolidWorks assembly
or part files.
import.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
256
29

258
Purpose
Use the Common tab page on the CAD Model Options dialog box to specify options when saving the
CAD model.
Note:
To generate features and touch points for saving with the model, you must switch on the Feature
creation options on the View tab page 68 of the Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Save Model As in the Model section, select a file type,
click Options
From the File menu, click Save Model As, select a file type, click Options

Include nominal/measured/constructed features - if checked, the corresponding features are saved
with the CAD model.
Include touch points as curve - if checked, any touch points for a measured feature are splined
together and saved as a free curve.
Include touch points - if checked, any touch points for a measured feature are saved with the CAD
model as free points.
See Also:
Model Menu
963
30

You can create a HOOPS stream file (.hsf) from the current model using the Save As option from the
Model menu. The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of HOOPS Stream Files, give
the file a name and select a location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving
259
to a HOOPS stream file, click the Options button on the Save Model dialog box. The CAD Model
Options dialog box is displayed.
HOOPS stream files have the extension .hsf.

Compression
The HOOPS stream file is a compressed file format.
Vertices - if checked, vertices are compressed when the .hsf file is saved.
Bits per vertex - the number of bits for each vertex, after compression.
Normals - if checked, normals are compressed.
Bits per normal - the number of bits for each normal, after compression.
Use advanced compression - if checked, advanced compression is used. However, the file may take
longer to save and there may be loss of accuracy.
Additional data
Include original model - if checked, geometric data from the original model is saved.
Include line/edge data - if checked, line and edge data are included.
Include topology information - if checked, topology information is included.
HSF version - the version of HOOPS which the data will be saved in.
See Also:
257
Model Menu
31
Saving an ACIS File

Saving an ACIS File
You can create an ACIS .sat or .sab file from the current model file using the Save As option from the
260
Model menu. The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of ACIS Text Files, give the file
a name and select a location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to an
ACIS file, click the Options button on the Save Model dialog box. The CAD Model Options dialog box is
displayed.
ACIS files have the extension .sat or .sab.

ACIS version - the version of ACIS which the data will be saved in. Select the version depending on the
application you wish to use the ACIS file in.
Combine entities into a single body - if checked, multiple bodies in a model are combined and saved
as a single ACIS body.
See Also:
257
Model Menu
32
Saving a CATIA v4 File

You can create a CATIA v4 file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model
menu. The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of CATIA v4, give the file a name and
select a location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to a CATIA v4 file,
click the Options button on the Save As dialog box. The CAD Model Options dialog box is displayed.
A log file of the conversion is saved in the folder C:\LK\Appdata\Log.
You can save CATIA v4 files as .model files.
261

Attach attributes - if checked, layer, colour and label information is attached to the entities when saved
to a CATIA v4 model file.
Free curves - if checked, free curve data is saved to a CATIA v4 model file.
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to a CATIA v4 model file.
Free surfaces - if checked, free surface data is saved to a CATIA v4 model file.
Analytic surface data - if checked, the analytic definition of a surface is saved to a CATIA v4 model file.
If unchecked, its polynomial surface definition is used.
Workplanes - if checked, workplanes are saved to a CATIA v4 model file. Workplanes in CATIA v4 are
simple analytical planes which are not by default part of the core geometry.
Solid as - determines how the solid model is saved. Select Solid to save the model as a solid model.
262
Select Faces to save the model as a set of faces in the CATIA v4 model file. Select Curves to save the
solid model as a set of curves (with no faces) in a CATIA model file.
SOLIDE/VOLUME - select SOLIDE to save the model as a SOLIDE in a CATIA model file, and select
VOLUME to save the model as a VOLUME in the CATIA model file.
CATIA v4 version - the version of CATIA v4 which the data will be saved in. Select the version
depending on the application you wish to use the CATIA v4 file in.
Author - the text you type in this field will add the author at the top of the file.
Model name - the text you type in this field will add the model name at the top of the file.
Language - if Japanese is selected, the CATIA v4 file can be read into a Japanese version of CATIA v4.
See Also:
172
Model Menu
33

You can create a CATIA v5 file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model
menu. The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of CATIA v5, give the file a name and
select a location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to a CATIA v5 file,
click the Options button on the Save Model dialog box. The CAD Model Options dialog box is
displayed.
You can save CATIA v5 files as .CATPart files.

to a CATIA v5 CATPart file.
263
Selection sets - if checked, selection sets are saved to a CATIA v5 CATPart file. A selection set is a
group of geometrical entities with a name specified by the user, e.g. Set 1, Set 2.
Free curves - if checked, free curve data is saved to a CATIA v5 CATPart file.
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to a CATIA v5 CATPart file.
Workplanes - if checked, workplanes are saved to a CATIA v5 CATPart file. Workplanes in CATIA v5
are features of GSMPlane type.
CATIA v5 version - the version of CATIA v5 which the data will be saved in. Select the version
depending on the application you wish to use the CATIA v5 file in.
See Also:
Model Menu
257
963
34
Saving an IGES File
34.1
Saving an IGES File

Saving an IGES File
You can create an IGES file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model menu.
The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of IGES, give the file a name and select a
location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to an IGES file, click the
Options button on the Save Model dialog box. The CAD Model Options dialog box is displayed.
264

to an IGES file.
Free curves - if checked, free curve data is saved to the IGES file.
Free curves as copious data - if checked, free curves are written as copious data.
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to the IGES file.
Free surfaces - if checked, free surface data is saved to the IGES file.
Use B-Rep entities - if checked, the current file is saved, using B-Rep entities, as a solid model in
IGES format. This enables the file to be read into a CAD system that supports the IGES B-Rep entities
to import the solid model topology. If the box is not checked, only the surface geometry of the model is
exported. This check box has no effect on exporting surface or wireframe models from ACIS.
Saving an IGES File
265
Analytical data
Surfaces as NURBS - if checked, all analytic surfaces in ACIS are written as IGES splines.
Curves as NURBS - if checked, all analytic curves in ACIS are written as IGES splines.
Flavour - select a particular 'flavour' of IGES file suitable for other CAD modelling packages.
Trim curve preference - IGES files specify 2D or 3D for each trim curve. Select whether trim curves
are to use 2D parametric data, or 3D model space data.
File unit - select the units used when saving the data to the IGES file: millimetres (MM), inches (IN),
centimetres (CM), feet (FT), metres (M), microns (UM). These units conform to the IGES standard.
Additional options - displays the IGES Model Options - Geometry dialog box
IGES file header information.
265
, where you can add
See Also:
257
Model Menu
34.2
IGES Model Options - Geometry (Saving an IGES File)

IGES Model Options - Geometry (Saving an IGES File)
Purpose
Use the Geometry tab page on the IGES Model Options dialog box to specify how surfaces are saved
when saving an IGES file.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Save model as in the Model section, select a file type of .
igs, click Options, select the IGES tab page, click Additional options
From the File menu, click Save model as, select a file type of .igs, click Options, select the IGES
tab page, click Additional options

B-Rep surfaces as parametric surfaces - if checked, all Manifold Solid B-Rep Object (MSBO)
surfaces in ACIS are written as parametric surfaces in an IGES file.
Split periodic surfaces - if checked, periodic surfaces are split when written to an IGES file.
See Also:
Saving an IGES File
263
266
Model Menu
34.3
IGES Model Options - IGES Header Info (Saving an IGES File)

IGES Model Options - IGES Header Info (Saving an IGES File)
Purpose
Use the IGES Header Info tab page on the IGES Model Options dialog box to add header information to
the IGES file when it is saved.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Save model as in the Model section, select a file type of .
igs, click Options, select the IGES tab page, click Additional options, select the IGES Header Info
tab page
From the File menu, click Save model as, select a file type of .igs, click Options, select the IGES
tab page, click Additional options, select the IGES Header Info tab page

Start section - the text you type in here is added as the first line in the IGES file.
Global header information - the text you type in these fields is added at the top of the IGES file, after
the start section text.
See Also:
Saving an IGES File
263
Model Menu
35

You can create a Parasolid file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model
267
menu. The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of PARASOLID, give the file a name
and select a location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to a Parasolid
file, click the Options button on the Save Model dialog box. The CAD Model Options dialog box is
displayed.
You can save Parasolid files as .x_t files.

Attach attributes - if checked, layer, colour, label, line, thickness, pick and show information is
attached to the entities when saved to a Parasolid file.
Attach face-ID attributes - if checked, a face index is attached to face entities when saved to a
Parasolid file.
Free curves - if checked, free curve data is saved to a Parasolid file.
268
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to a Parasolid file.

Free surfaces - if checked, free surface data is saved to a Parasolid file.
Free faces as solid - this option is only applicable if the model is a single solid body and topology
creation fails. If this is the case, and this option is unchecked, the Parasolid model is saved as
individual faces. If checked, the individual faces are joined together to create a single solid body.
Make free faces if topology creation fails - this option is applicable if the model consists of a number
of solid bodies. If checked, and topology creation fails, the output is generated face-wise, i.e. for each
face of the input body, a separate output body is created. If unchecked, the individual faces are joined
together to create a single body for each input body.
Save parts as assembly - if checked, all free parts are located in a single level assembly. For
example, if a .sat file with three solid blocks in it is saved as a Parasolid file, a single level assembly is
created in Parasolid and all three solid blocks are added to the assembly. There are no sub-assemblies
in the assembly. If unchecked, multiple parts are saved individually as separate entities. In this
example, the three solid blocks would be saved as three solid bodies.
Heal model - if checked, all generated Parasolid entities are healed. This ensures that any gaps in the
model are filled.
Check geometry - if checked, all generated Parasolid entities are checked and their status is entered
in the log file.
File unit - determines the scale factor between Parasolid units and ACIS units. Parasolid data is in
metres (1000 mm) by default. Do not change this selection unless you must output Parasolid data in a
different system, or you know that a particular file is not in metres.
Parasolid version - the version of Parasolid which the data will be saved in.
Mode - the format for the Parasolid file: either text format, or machine-dependent binary format.
See Also:
257
Model Menu
36
Saving a VDA File

Saving a VDA File
You can create a VDA file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model menu.
The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of VDA, give the file a name and select a
location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to a VDA file, click the
Saving a VDA File
269

Attach attributes - if checked, layer information is attached to the entities when saved to a VDA file.
Free curves - if checked, free curve data is saved to the VDA file.
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to the VDA file.
Free surfaces - if checked, free surface data is saved to the VDA file.
Global header information - the text you type in these fields is added at the top of the VDA file, after
the version text.
See Also:
Model Menu
257
270
37
Saving a STEP File
37.1
Saving a STEP File

Saving a STEP File
You can create a STEP file from the current model file using the Save As option from the Model menu.
The Save Model dialog box is displayed. Select a file type of STEP, give the file a name and select a
location to save it in. If you want to change the settings used when saving to a STEP file, click the
You can save STEP files as .stp files.

Attach attributes - if checked, an AP214 (automotive_design) version of the STEP file is saved, with
colour and label information attached to the entities. If unchecked, an AP203 (config_control_design)
version of the STEP file is saved, with no information attached to the entities.
Selection sets - if checked, selection sets are saved to AP214 (automotive_design) STEP files only. A
selection set is a group of geometrical entities with a name specified by the user, e.g. Set 1, Set 2.
Free points - if checked, free point data is saved to the STEP file.
Trim bodies - if checked, ACIS trim bodies are saved to the STEP file.
Class 6 solids - if selected, ACIS solid bodies are saved to the STEP file as solid bodies.
Saving a STEP File
271
Class 4 bodies - if selected, ACIS solid bodies are saved to the STEP file as trim bodies.
Class 2 wires - if selected, ACIS solid bodies are saved to the STEP file as wire bodies.
Angle unit - select whether the angles to be saved to the STEP file are in radians or degrees.
File unit - select the units used when saving the data to the STEP file.
Save
STEP format - select AP203 to save the file in config_control_design format or select AP214 to save the
file in automotive_design format.
Additional options - displays the STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info dialog box
can add STEP file header information.
271
, where you
See Also:
257
Model Menu
37.2
STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info (Saving a STEP File)

STEP Model Options - STEP Header Info (Saving a STEP File)
Purpose
Use the STEP Header Info tab page on the STEP Model Options dialog box to add header information to
the STEP file when it is saved.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Save Model As in the Model section, select a file type of .
stp, click Options, select the STEP tab page, click Additional options
From the File menu, click Save Model As, select a file type of .stp file, click Options, select the
STEP tab page, click Additional options
272

Global header information
The text you type in these fields is added at the top of the STEP file.
File description - the STEP application protocol and preprocessor used to generate the file.
Implementation level - the level of standard used for writing the STEP file.
File name - the STEP filename.
Preprocess version - the version of the preprocessor which created the file.
Origin system - the preprocessor which created the file.
Authorisation - the name of the person who authorised the output of the data present in the STEP file.
See Also:
Saving a STEP File
270
Model Menu
38
Inspecting Features
38.1
Inspecting Features
Inspecting Features
Purpose
The Features commands allow you to measure the various features. To start inspecting features, either
click New in the Inspect section (on the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab), or select a feature type from the
Features section. The following view is displayed:
Inspecting Features
273
Here you set up the inspection path for the features, selecting various commands to add to your
measurement information. The options available depend on the feature you are inspecting.
Defining nominal values for features
To start the measurement routine for a feature, define its nominal values in one of these ways:
Pick the feature off the CAD model in the model window 49 . Its nominal values are entered into the
Properties window 90 and the Grid window 76 . You can change these by overtyping. You can pick
some features directly from the model. Other features require you to select the feature type from the
Features section before picking the feature (see Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 ).
Click the icon for the feature in the Features section. CAMIO adds a template feature to the Teach
Path view and enters nominal values into the Grid window to some appropriate defaults. Pick the
feature to be inspected from the model, then select the feature in the Teach Path view. Its nominal
values are entered into the Properties window and the Grid window, replacing those already there.
You can change the nominal values by overtyping.
Teach the nominal values using the handbox. When you start taking points on a feature without
defining its nominal values by picking or typing them in, CAMIO updates the nominal values as you
take touches (and applies rounding if you select Rounding from the pop-up menu in the Grid window.
If you do not use rounding, the nominal values will be the same as the actuals). You can change
the nominal values yourself by overtyping or by picking again from the model. This method of
teaching the nominals also constitutes the measurement.
Use the Set Plane, Set Position and Set Orientation 402 options to set the nominal values of certain
features, by taking touches to establish the size, position, orientation, etc. of the feature.
Set the operation mode
Use the Mode section in the Properties window to specify the operation mode for measurement
MAN mode
In Manual operation mode, you do not need to pick a feature from the CAD model (except for curve).
Instead, you can type in its nominal values in the Properties window or Grid window, then click
274
Apply. CAMIO then prompts you to take touch points on the feature.
CNC mode (if you are working with descriptive commands)
In CNC operation mode, you do not need to take points if the feature has a canned cycle (internal
measuring routine). You can click Apply, and CAMIO will use the nominal values from the
Properties window and measure the feature automatically. For details of canned cycles, see Using
Canned Cycles when Measuring Features 275 . If the feature does not have a canned cycle, before
you can click Apply you will have to take the minimum number of points using the handbox, or by
generating them on the model using the options available for the feature type (see Setting Up the
Inspection Path 275 ).
PROG or AUTO mode (if you are working with DMIS commands)
In AUTO operation mode, you do not need to take points if the feature has a canned cycle (internal
measuring routine). You can click Apply, and CAMIO will use the nominal values from the
Properties window and measure the feature automatically. If the feature does not have a canned
cycle, PROG mode is used and before you can click Apply you will have to take the minimum
number of points using the handbox, or by generating them on the model using the options available
for the feature type.
The number of touches
box 134 . For some feature types, you can specify the number of touch points to take in the Mode
section of the Properties window 90 . If so, this overrides the value in the Teach Properties dialog box.
Fitting algorithms
You can use the Filter section of the Properties window
when measuring the various feature types.
90
to specify the fitting algorithms to be used
Evaluating the data

Use the tolerance commands in the Output section to create tolerances. Use the Properties window
to apply tolerances and evaluate the feature data.
90
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, use the Features section

Point
Circle
282
Cylinder
Line
Cone
298
Arc
324
Round Slot
Surface
Key Slot
Pattern
Stud
330
343
Christmas Tree
350
Hexagonal Hole
361
Impeller
542
Curve
338
Gap and Flush
359
346
Edge Point
296
Point Zero
365
314
Sphere
326
Square Slot
334
345
Welded Nut
Plane
290
284
356
Laser Surface
363
357
350
(3D curve)
Some options may only be available after customising the toolbars.

See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
411
449
Inspecting Features
275
91
38.2
Using Canned Cycles when Measuring Features

Some features (such as circles) can be measured in CNC (Automatic) mode (i.e. with CNC or AUTO
selected in the Teach Path view 94 ) using internal measuring routines, or 'canned cycles'. When you
create the program, if the commands you add to the Teach Path view can be placed outside the
measure block, and there are no touch (PTMEAS) points in the teach path, CAMIO sets the program to
Automatic mode 40 . Then, when the program is run, the features are measured automatically using the
canned cycle. If you add touches into the Teach Path view when creating the program, the mode is
Program (PROG) and the canned cycle is not used.
Features with canned cycles
Canned cycles are not used when measuring in Manual mode.
In CNC mode, canned cycles (using AUTO mode) are available for certain features.
The Add Touches and Touch inspection options request the creation of PTMEAS points. Clicking OK
directly without using either of these options sets your inspection to AUTO mode with no PTMEAS
points, so that it uses canned cycles (this functionality is available for point, circle, arc, bounded
cylinder, round slot, square slot and sphere features).
Point features
You can take a point at the current position of the sensor, by taking zero touches (see Measuring a Point
Feature with Zero Points 350 ).
Features without canned cycles
With CNC selected (or AUTO or PROG), these features are measured in Program (PROG) mode.
For line and plane features, using Automatic mode applies sensor clearance (i.e. moves the machine to
the clearance surface) before moving to the first touch. This avoids the need to insert a GOTO sensor
move for these features. The Automatic clearance for line and plane features box must be checked on
the Configuration dialog box, Conformance tab page 128 , to enable this option.
Canned cycles for scanning
You can also scan arc, circle, bounded cylinder, bounded cone, round slot and sphere features using an
analogue probe without picking points on the feature. In CNC (AUTO) mode, you can pick the nominal
feature from the model and immediately click
(Apply). This is because there is a scanning canned
cycle for these features for analogue probes. The scanning canned cycles use built-in controller routines
that optimise arc measurement.
See Also:
745
Scanning
38.3
Setting Up the Inspection Path

There are various options available to you when creating the inspection path using a CAD model.
Different options are available depending on the feature type, and depending on whether you are
scanning or taking touch points. These allow you to modify the inspection path. You can also modify
the display in the model window, so that you can see the parts of the inspection path in your preferred
style. Modifying the display can help you to see various options for modifying the path.
276
Example: creating an inspection path for a circle

1.
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, and click Circle in the Features section. The Teach Path view
is displayed to hold the commands you create.
2.
Pick the circle on the CAD model. To do this, you must make sure you have not selected any of
the options in the model window for manipulating the view of the model (such as the Pan option).
The cursor must be showing a small circle next to it.
3.
When you have picked the circle and selected it in the Teach Path view, its nominal values are
entered into the Grid window and the Properties window. Options for creating the inspection path for
the circle are available on the toolbar. You can use the Touch option to click on the model to define
touch (PTMEAS) points for the inspection path.
4.
You can select another feature type then click on the model if you want to inspect another feature.
5.
When you have created the inspection path, click Apply. If you have selected Manual (MAN) mode,
you are prompted to take points manually. If you have selected CNC (AUTO) mode, the circle is
measured automatically because it has a 'canned cycle' for measurement (but note that if you have
added PTMEAS points to the inspection path, or you are inspecting a feature that does not have a
canned cycle, it is measured in Program (PROG) mode).
Options for the inspection path

When you have selected your feature for inspection, set up the inspection path using the following
options:
The Touch option is available on the Inspect and Scan toolbars so you can click on the model to
define touch points for those features for which touches can be specified (but note that adding
touches for features with a canned cycle for measurement causes the canned cycle not to be used)
The Add Touches option is available on the Inspect toolbar for those features with a canned cycle for
measurement. Again, adding touches to the inspection path causes the canned cycle not to be
used
The Add Scans option is available on the Scan toolbar for those features with a canned cycle for
scanning
The Scan Teach option is available on the Scan toolbar for teaching a scan of a feature, setting the
start and end points and the direction of the scan
The Laser Teach option is available on the Laser toolbar for those features that can be inspected
using a laser scanning probe
If you want to inspect multiple features you can use the Features section on the toolbar (and select
them on the model) to add them to the Teach Path view.
You can also drag-and-drop features from the Planning window into the Teach Path view. The
inspection path is added between the features in the model window, and you can drag the handle
markers on the path to move it. CAMIO adds GOTO moves into the Teach Path view as you do this
Obstacle avoidance is achieved by manipulation of the points you have added to the feature. For
example, for circle and arc features, the touches comprise an arc and you can manipulate the arc
on the model in the model window by dragging the ends with the mouse. The touches are moved
accordingly. For cylinder features, the touches can form two arcs, one at either end of the cylinder.
You can move the ends of the arcs in the model window and you can raise and lower the arcs along
the axis of the cylinder
You can use a combination of the toolbar options to create the inspection path. For example, you could
use the Touch option to add touches to a circle, and then use the Auto Probe Search option to select an
appropriate sensor. The commands are executed in the order they are listed in the Teach Path view, so
you may want to rearrange the order by selecting commands and dragging them to a new position in the
list (path command names are then suffixed with _n). You can also modify the commands using the
pop-up menu options in the Teach Path view.
Inspecting Features
277
Note that during an inspection (while the Teach Path view is visible) you cannot change from one toolbar
to another (e.g. from Scan to Laser).
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Using Canned
272
275
Cycles when Measuring Features
275

Model Window
49
Teach Path View

Grid Window
58
94
76

Laser Scanning
40
811
Planning Window
88
95
Properties Window
38.4

The Feature wizard can be used to determine what feature type is being inspected. When you take
touches using the handbox, the Feature wizard 'intelligently' interprets the points, using the touch
direction and the number of points, to determine the following feature types:
Point feature (take one point)
Line feature (take two points)
Plane feature (take three points with similar touch directions)
Circle feature (take three points with all the touch directions nearly parallel to the feature plane)
Square slot feature (take five points on four sides, with all the touch directions nearly parallel to the
feature plane)
Round slot feature (take six points, three in each arc, with all the touch directions nearly parallel to
the feature plane)
Sphere feature (take one point on the top and three at the equator)
Cone feature (take six points normal to the surface, three at each of two different heights, so that
you obtain two circles of different diameters)
Cylinder feature (take six points normal to the surface, three at each of two different heights, so that
you obtain two circles of the same diameter)
Small features (< 1 mm) may be interpreted as point features by the Feature wizard.
The Grid window is updated with the determined feature type as you take the touches. Try to take the
278
points normal to the surface. If not, this can lead to misleading results. For example, if points are taken
at an acute angle to the surface, a plane could be misinterpreted as a circle.
This toolbar is displayed when you select Feature Wizard from the Alignment toolbar:
The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Datum Features Teach Path
view (below the Operation mode buttons). Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see
Setting Up the Inspection Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the feature when
you click Apply. You can move from feature to feature without restarting the Feature wizard.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Feature Wizard in the Datum Features section
Press Button 11 on the CAMIO CMM handbox
With touch and go enabled, and with a part program open and an active datum selected, take a
touch point using the handbox

Mode
Move
747
765
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Teach Path View
272
94

Touch and Go
Inspecting Features
38.5
279
Inspect Menu
38.5.1 Inspect Menu

Inspect Menu
Purpose
The Inspect menu allows you to measure the various features, and define and output tolerances in your
program.
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar

Inspect
279
Features
Probes
367
Properties
Touch Tools
280
Output
741
615
280
Move Tools
765
Probe Check
281
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
38.5.2 Inspect
Inspect
The Inspect section is accessed from the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab on the main toolbar and contains
New - opens a new inspection Teach Path
selections and make changes to settings.
94
where you can add measurements, moves, sensor
Apply - applies the current inspection Teach Path. The operations in the Teach Path are performed and
280
commands are inserted into your program.

Cancel - cancels the current inspection Teach Path. No operations are performed and no commands
are inserted into your program.
38.5.3 Features
Features
The Features section is accessed from the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab on the main toolbar and contains
Feature Tools - available options depend on whether the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab is being used:
Points on a Section Curve
Points on a Grid
Curve
388
390
Points on a Planar Curve

Points in a Box
Save Feature
390
Delete Feature
Edge Points on a Curve
390
Circles in a Plane
283
Recall Feature
407
390
295
409
410
Features - available features depend on whether the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab is being used:
Point
Circle
282
Cylinder
Line
Cone
298
Arc
324
Round Slot
Surface
Key Slot
Pattern
Stud
330
343
Christmas Tree
350
Hexagonal Hole
361
Impeller
542
Curve
338
Gap and Flush
359
346
Edge Point
296
Point Zero
365
314
Sphere
326
Square Slot
334
345
Welded Nut
Plane
290
284
Laser Surface
356
363
357
350
(3D curve)
38.5.4 Touch Tools

Touch Tools
The Touch Tools section is accessed from the Inspect tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Add Touches - allows you to automatically add touches to the feature highlighted in the Teach Path
view. This option is not available for all feature types.
Touch - allows you to add touch points to your program for the feature highlighted in the Teach Path
view. You can pick on the model or take points manually to define touch points.
Tools - displays the options available to set up touches on a feature. The following options are available,
depending on the feature type selected:
Edge Offset
Cylinder Lines
322
Section Touches
390
Planar Curve
Cylinder Circles
311
Grid Touches
390
Geometry - displays the Select Geometry dialog box

the CAD model.
366
313
388
, where you can select one or more faces on
Inspecting Features
281
See Also:
Touch Options - Inspecting a Feature
39
Inspecting Features - Probe Check

Inspecting Features - Probe Check
Purpose
Use the Probe Check options to position the simulated probe to a particular feature, so that you can
check the orientation of the probe to see if it is appropriate for the feature. Click Probe Check then use
the options available.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click a feature type, click Probe Check (not
available for all feature types)

Move to Selected - click to move the probe position and insertion point to a selected item in the Teach
Path view.
Previous/Next - click to move the probe position and insertion point (
Teach Path view 94 .
40
) through the items in the
Hole Search (Search for Feature)

Hole Search (Search for Feature)
This function provides a search facility for holes, slots and edge points which are out of position. It is
quite common for sheet metal 'body in white' components to have hole, slot and edge features with large
positional deviations (up to 10 mm). When using tactile probing on a CMM, the probe will fail to find the
feature and an error message will be displayed.
This new feature provides a search pattern for the tactile sensor to probe the surface of the component,
to locate the feature and allow it to be measured correctly.
This function is available for the following features:
Internal Circles
Round Slots
Square Slots
Edge Points
The search function is an extension to the existing relative measurement functionality and is configured
through a modification to the existing 'relative measure' user interface.
282
See Search for Feature
41
399
for more information.
Inspecting a Point
Inspecting a Point
Purpose
The Point inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a point. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection Path 275 ).
They are added into the measurement block for the point when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the point you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
You can adjust the view of the model (if you're using one) (see Model Window
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the point you wish to inspect on
the model. If you wish to ensure you are only picking CAD points, first check the Pick CAD points
only box (see Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 ). You can also ensure that you must first
set the plane that the point lies in, by checking the Measure feature plane box on the Teach
Properties dialog box 134 .
4.
Select the point in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
for manual inspection, PROG or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive text) for
automatic inspection. Point features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or CNC
selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. But if you prefer to add some
additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
Use the Properties window to use Relative Measurement
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the point to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available (depending on whether the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab is being used):
Add Touches
280
Geometry
366
Move
393
49
272
).
).
, and Compare to CAD
378
765
Inspecting a Point
Probes
367
Laser Teach
Output
615
Probe Check
Properties
819
741
Set Plane/Position
281
283
402

You can use the Touch option to click on the model or take the point manually to define the touch
point for the inspection path.
7.
Use the tolerance commands in the Output section to create tolerances. Use the Properties
window to apply tolerances and evaluate the feature data.
8.
Click Apply. The commands are added to your program and executed, depending on the
programming mode (see Teach, Command and Insert Modes 41 ).
Note:
To apply a surface offset to point features, type in a value in the Thickness field on the Picking tab page
of the Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Point in the Features section
See Also:
40

Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
411
449
91
42
Points in Box Dialog Box

275
284
Purpose
Use the Points in Box dialog box to select multiple points in the model window by drawing a box around
them. The points are then listed in the Points in Box dialog box. You can right-click on the points to
display a pop-up menu where you can delete points from the list or view and amend their properties in
the Point Feature dialog box. You can move the points up and down the list by dragging them with the
to add the points to the Teach Path view.
mouse. Click
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Points in a Box
from the Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section
See Also:
Model Window
49
523
Teach Path View
43
Inspecting a 3D Curve
43.1
285
Purpose
The 3D Curve options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for inspecting a 3D
curve and outputting the results. This is of use when inspecting impellers and propellers. The
commands you select from the toolbar are added to the Teach Path view
In the Teach Path view you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the 3D curve when you click Apply.
You must have a model present in the model window to use the 3D Curve options.
For details of inspecting an impeller, see Inspecting an Impeller
285
Navigation
Only available by editing a part program manually
See Also:
Scanning
43.2
Inspecting an Impeller
1.
Ensure that DMIS version 05.0 or higher is selected on the Conformance tab page 128 of the
Configuration dialog box. This enables PAMEAS commands for inspecting a curve to be added to
your part program.
2.
Start a program and load a model.
286
When loading the model, ensure Simplify NURBS surfaces is checked on the appropriate tab page
of the CAD Model Options dialog box.
3.
From the Model commands, select Add Circular Slice. The Add Circular Slice dialog box 986 is
displayed. You can click on the cone surface in the model window to update the dialog box with
information for the slice:
4.
287
Specify the slices to be added to the model. You can specify either a bounded cone or a bounded
cylinder to determine the location of the slices.
To specify a cylinder slice, set the Start diameter and End diameter to the same value, i.e. the
diameter of the cylinder. The Start centre and End centre fields specify points on the axis of the
cylinder which intersect the end surfaces.
To specify a cone slice, as shown below, set the Start diameter to zero and the Start centre to
the axis of the cone. Set the End diameter to the diameter of the base of the cone. The End
centre field specifies the centre of the cone base.
Select the number of slices to add to the model and the increment between the slices in the
current linear units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ). This controls the Start
diameter and End diameter increments applied between successive slices.
5.
To create the slices to add to the model, click Slice. The cone or cylinder surfaces defined above
are displayed on the model:
6.
If the positions are correct, click

to add the slices to the model. The slices are 3D curves
formed by the intersection of the CAD surfaces and the cones or cylinders specified. These are now
displayed on the model.
288
7.
The 3D Curve inspection option is only available by editing a part program manually.
8.
Use the 3D Curve Spacing dialog box 288 to set up the spacing along the curve generated on the
CAD model, for the final location of the points that will be generated from the curve:
9.
Set the Angular start offset to determine the start of the points on the curve, and set the spacing of
the points along the curve, then click
added to your part program.
(Apply). The commands for inspecting the curve are
10. In the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box 465 , select the curve and apply the PROFS
tolerance to output the profile surface tolerance. The tolerance is displayed in either polar or
rectangular co-ordinates depending on the definition of the GSURF feature for the impeller. When
you run the program, you can use the options on the Display Settings dialog box, Feature
Deviations tab page 69 , to display whiskers on each point on the curve to indicate the tolerance
value.
43.3
3D Curve Spacing Dialog Box

3D Curve Spacing Dialog Box
289
Purpose
Use the 3D Curve Spacing dialog box to set up the spacing along the curve generated on the CAD model
using the 3D Curve options 284 , for the final location of the points that will be generated from the curve.
Navigation
Only available by editing a part program manually

Polar/Rectangular - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in either rectangular or polar coordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is
selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360
can be entered.
Start - the X, Y, Z or R, A, H co-ordinates of the start of the curve.
End - the X, Y, Z or R, A, H co-ordinates of the end of the curve.
Spacing - specifies the spacing between points long the curve, in the current angular units (as shown
on the System Settings dialog box 101 ), from the Angular start offset value.
Angular start offset - the offset (in the current angular units) from the start point on the curve. For
example, an angular spacing of 10, with a start offset of 6, will result in points being taken at 6, 16, 26
and so on degrees along the curve, up to the end point.
290
43.4
Inspecting a Circle
43.4.1 Inspecting a Circle

Inspecting a Circle
Purpose
The Circle inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a circle. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the circle when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the circle you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the circle you wish to inspect on
the model. (If the pick does not find a circle, multi-point pick is automatically used. For details see
Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 .)
4.
Select the circle in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
automatic inspection. Circle features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or CNC
selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. You can use the Properties
window to specify the number of touches to add to the resulting MEAS command. But if you prefer
to add some additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
394
49
272
).
6.
291
Add the commands for inspecting the circle to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Add Touches
Teach
Move
292
Paths
809
765
Properties
Add Scans
741
371
Tools
294
Geometry
294
366
Probes
367
Laser Teach
Output
615
Probe Check
819
281
Set Plane/Position
403

You can use the Touch option to click on the model or take points manually to define touch points
for the inspection path.
7.
8.
Note:
To apply a surface offset to circle features, type in a value in the Thickness field on the Picking tab page
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Circle in the Features section
See Also:
40
Picking a Circle Using a Centre Point and Direction

Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
291
411
449
91
43.4.2 Picking a Circle Using a Centre Point and Direction

Picking a Circle Using a Centre Point and Direction
You can define a circle by picking the centre point and then establishing the direction.
1.
From the Model menu, select Add Point.
2.
Pick a point on the model in the model window, to define the centre point of the circle.
3.
In the Add Point dialog box, click Create, then
4.
From the Inspect tab, select Circle in the Features section.
5.
Click on the point you have added to the model, to pick it.
(Apply), then Yes.
292
6.
Click on a line which is in the direction of the normal for the circle
OR
Click on a plane which the circle lies on. The direction of the circle will be normal to the plane.
7.
If necessary, edit the definition of the circle in the Grid window.
8.
Click
(Apply). The commands for inspecting the circle are added to your program and
executed, depending on the programming mode (see Teach, Command and Insert Modes 41 ).
43.4.3 Add Touches Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs

Add Touches Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs
Purpose
The following information describes circle features but also applies to arc features.
Use the Add Touches option when inspecting a circle to automatically add touches appropriate to the
circle. First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 .
Select the feature in the Teach Path view, then click Add Touches in the Touch Tools section. Touches
are automatically added to the feature, according to the settings on the Teach Properties dialog box 134 .
The circle is then displayed like this.

The inspection path is shown by the
blue band. The edges can be
smoothed by reducing the path
segment length on the Measure
Display tab page of the Display
Settings dialog box. This only
changes the display, not the
inspection path. The smoother
edges are shown in the next picture.
The red spheres on the path indicate the touch points, and the black arrows
the sensor approach direction and distance to the touch points. The length
of the arrows reflects the distance for the sensor approach. You can adjust
the appearance of the arrows using the Measure Display options and the
Sensor Approach dialog box. Also displayed are red arrows for the sensor
retract direction and distance, but these are obscured by the arrows for the
sensor approach. Adjusting the display using the Sensor Retract dialog
box, and manipulating the view in the model window can allow you to see
these arrows.
293
When you select the circle by

clicking it in the model window, or
clicking its name in the Teach Path
view, it is displayed like this.
The arrowhead on the inspection
path indicates the direction of the
inspection. You can reverse this
using the pop-up menu options in
In this picture the direction of the
inspection has been reversed.
You can also change the thickness
of the path and arrow using the
Measure Display options.
You can highlight the touches in the
Teach Path view, then grab them
using the mouse and move them on
the feature, to adjust their location.
(You must not have any buttons
selected in the model window when
you do this.) As you do this, the
touch point co-ordinates are updated
in the Teach Path view. For circle
features, the inspection path is an
arc. The start point is indicated by a
black arrow and the ends of the arc
by hoops called 'handle markers'
shown here. These can also be
seen on the touch points. You can
adjust the size of the handle
markers using the Measure Display
options.
You can manipulate the arc by dragging the ends with the mouse. The touches are moved accordingly
to remain within the inspection path.
Click on the touches in the Teach Path view or on the model to select them.
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Circle or Arc in the Features section, pick a circle or an
arc on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Add Touches
See Also:
Inspecting a Circle
290
Inspecting an Arc
296
Teach Path View
94

743
742
60
294
Model Window
49

95
275
43.4.4 Scan Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs

Scan Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs
Purpose
Use the Paths drop-down list to access the options for setting up scan path elements on the circle or
arc feature, to define the path to take when scanning. The Paths options add PATH and PAMEAS
commands to your program, to enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as
this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click Circle or
Arc in the Features section, pick the feature on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view,
click Paths in the Scan Tools section

Cylinder Circles Path - displays the Circles Measurement dialog box 373 , where you can set up scan
paths on the feature. This option adds a PATH/ARC command to your program.
Curve Path - displays the Surface Measurement - Curve options 390 , where you can set up scan paths
on the feature. This option adds a PATH/CURVE command to your program.
See Also:
Inspecting a Circle
Inspecting an Arc
290
296
Known Path Scanning Using PATH and PAMEAS
43.4.5 Touch Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs

Touch Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs
295
Purpose
Use the Tools drop-down list Cylinder Circles option to display the Circles Measurement dialog box
, the touch points are added to
where you can set up touch points on the feature. When you click
the Teach Path view. A circle feature is displayed as in the picture on the right (an arc feature is
similar).
You can manipulate the points on the arc as you would when using the Add Touches option. For details
see Add Touches Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs 292 .
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Circle or Arc, pick a circle or an arc on the model, select
the feature in the Teach Path view, click Cylinder Circles from the Tools drop-down list in the Touch
Tools section

Clear teach path - if checked, any commands added to the Teach Path view for the feature inspection
are deleted when the touch points are added to the Teach Path view.
Number of arcs - not available for circles and arcs.
Touches per arc - the number of touches to add to the feature. The touches are evenly spaced around
the feature.
See Also:
Inspecting a Circle
Inspecting an Arc
290
296
Circles Measurement Dialog Box

Teach Path View
373
94
43.4.6 Circles on Plane Dialog Box

Circles on Plane Dialog Box
296
Purpose
Use the Circles on Plane dialog box to select multiple circles in the model window by picking the plane
on the model in which a number of circles lie. The circles are then listed in the Circles on Plane dialog
box. You can right-click on the circles to display a pop-up menu where you can delete circles from the
list or view and amend their properties in the Circle Feature dialog box. You can move the circles up and
down the list by dragging them with the mouse. Click
to add the circles to the Teach Path view.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Circles
in a Plane from the Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section
See Also:
Model Window
49
Circle Feature Dialog Box
525
Teach Path View
44
Inspecting an Arc
Inspecting an Arc
Inspecting an Arc
297
Purpose
The Arc inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for inspecting
an arc. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach Path view.
Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection Path 275 ). They are
added into the measurement block for the arc when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the arc you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the arc you wish to inspect on the
model.
4.
Select the arc in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
automatic inspection. Arc features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or CNC
selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. You can use the Properties
window to specify the number of touches to add to the resulting MEAS command. But if you prefer
to add some additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the arc to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available (depending on whether the Inspect or Scan tab is being used):
Add Touches
Paths
292
294
Tools
Teach
294
Geometry
366
Move
397
809
765
49
272
).
298
Probes
Properties
367
Probe Check
741
Output
615
Set Plane/Position
281
404

7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Arc in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
45
Inspecting a Cylinder
45.1
299
Purpose
The Cylinder inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a cylinder. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the cylinder when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the cylinder you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the cylinder you wish to inspect
on the model.
4.
Select the cylinder in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
MAN for manual inspection, PROG or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive text) for
automatic inspection. Bounded cylinder features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with
AUTO or CNC selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. You can use
the Properties window to specify the number of touches to add to the resulting MEAS command.
But if you prefer to add some additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the cylinder to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available (depending on whether the Inspect, Scan or Laser tab is being used). Add Touches and
Scan are only available for a bounded cylinder:
Add Touches
Paths
300
302
Add Scans
Geometry
371
366
393
49
272
).
Tools
310
Move
765
300
Probes
367
Laser Teach
Output
615
Probe Check
819
Properties
741
281

7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Cylinder in the Features section
See Also:
Hints for Measuring a Cylinder
Teach Path View
300
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
45.2

The results obtained from the cylinder (and cone) fitting algorithms depend very much upon the
information supplied to them. When the nominal values are available, fitting is successful. However,
when teaching a cylinder there is no nominal. The fitting algorithm does not have a unique solution.
When the algorithm provides a solution it will be mathematically correct but it has no knowledge of the
shape, size and orientation of the real component. Therefore, any extra information that can be supplied
to the algorithm will help the fitting. An approximate direction is extremely useful to the algorithm, so try
to estimate the direction. The position and diameter are less useful than the direction.
When measuring the cylinder, take more than six points. If you measure a long, narrow cylinder with
three points at each end the algorithm has two solutions: the long, narrow cylinder or a short, wide
cylinder. Putting just one point in the middle (or as far down the inside of the cylinder as you can) will
force the former rather than the latter solution.
45.3
Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Cylinder

Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
301
Purpose
Use the Add Touches option when inspecting a cylinder to automatically add touches appropriate to the
cylinder. First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 .
Select the feature in the Teach Path view, then click Add Touches in the Touch Tools section. Touches
are automatically added to the feature, according to the settings on the Teach Properties dialog box 134 .
The cylinder is then displayed like

this. There are two bands of points,
shown by the blue bands. The
inspection path can be smoothed by
reducing the path segment length on
the Measure Display tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box. This
only changes the display, not the
paths are shown in the next picture.
The red spheres on the bands indicate the touch points, and the black arrows
the sensor approach direction and distance to the touch points. The length of
the arrows reflects the distance for the sensor approach. You can adjust the
appearance of the arrows using the Measure Display options and the Sensor
Approach dialog box. Also displayed are red arrows for the sensor retract
direction and distance. Adjusting the display using the Sensor Retract dialog
box, and manipulating the view in the model window can allow you to see
these arrows if they are obscured.
When you select the cylinder by
clicking the arcs that comprise it in
the Teach Path view, it is displayed
like this (if you click only one arc,
only that arc and the cylinder are
selected and the other arc remains
blue).
The arrowheads on the bands
indicate the direction of the
inspection. You can reverse this for
one or both of the bands using the
pop-up menu options in the Teach
Path view. In this picture the
direction of the inspection has been
reversed on the top band.
of the bands and arrows using the
302

Teach Path view, then grab them
using the mouse and move them on
the feature, to adjust their location.
(You must not have any buttons
you do this.) As you do this, the
touch point co-ordinates are updated
in the Teach Path view. For cylinder
features, the bands of points are
arcs, one at either end of the
cylinder. The start point on each
band is indicated by a black arrow
and the ends of the arc by hoops
called 'handle markers' shown here.
These can also be seen on the
touch points. You can adjust the
size of the handle markers using the
You can manipulate the arc by dragging the ends with the mouse. The touches are moved accordingly
to remain within the inspection path. You can also raise and lower the arcs along the axis of the
cylinder by dragging the centre handle with the mouse (you may need to manipulate the view of the
feature to be able to do this).
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Cylinder in the Features section, pick a bounded cylinder
on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Add Touches in the Touch Tools
section
See Also:
Teach Path View
298
94

Model Window
742
743
49

45.4
60
95
275
Scan Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
45.4.1 Scan Option - Inspecting a Cylinder

303
Purpose
Use the Paths drop-down list to access the options for setting up scan path elements on the cylinder
feature, to define the path to take when scanning. The Paths options add PATH and PAMEAS
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click Cylinder in
the Features section, pick a bounded cylinder on the model, select the cylinder in the Teach Path
view, click Paths in the Scan Tools section

Cylinder Circles Path - displays the Circles Measurement dialog box 373 , where you can set up arcs
for the scan path on the feature (for details see Scan Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder 305 ). This
option is useful when evaluating circularity or circular runout.
Cylinder Helix Path - displays the Helix Measurement dialog box, where you can set up a helical scan
path for the feature (for details see Scan Option (Helix) - Inspecting a Cylinder 308 ). This option is useful
when evaluating diameter or cylindricity.
Cylinder Line Path - displays the Lines Measurement dialog box 376 , where you can set up lines for
the scan path on the feature (for details see Scan Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder 303 ). This option
is useful when evaluating diameter or cylindricity, for consistency with systems that do not support
helical scans.
See Also:
298
45.4.2 Scan Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder

Scan Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
304
Purpose
Use the Cylinder Line Path option to display the Lines Measurement dialog box where you can set up
scan paths on the feature. When you click
, the scan path is added to the Teach Path view. You
can then manipulate the scan path as described below. When you have added all the commands you
need to the Teach Path view, click
. PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any other commands
you have added to the Teach Path view) are added to your part program, to enable known path scanning.
You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
This option is useful when evaluating diameter or cylindricity, for consistency with systems that do not
support helical scans.
Navigation
the Features section, pick a bounded cylinder on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path,
click Cylinder Line Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

are deleted when the scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view.
Number of lines - the number of scan path elements to add to the cylinder. The lines are evenly
spaced.
Depth - scans are not governed by the SNSET/DEPTH command, so this field allows you to set the
distance into a feature at which the scan will be taken. The units for the depth are set in the Units dialog
box or the System Settings dialog box.
305
In this example, there are three scan

path lines within the cylinder. One
of the lines (show in yellow) is
selected.
The start point on each line is
indicated by a black arrow which
shows the sensor approach
direction. The length of the arrow
reflects the distance for the sensor
approach. You can adjust the
appearance of the arrows using the
Measure Display tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box and the
Sensor Approach dialog box.
The arrowhead on each inspection path indicates the direction of the inspection. You can reverse this
using the pop-up menu options in the Teach Path view. You can also change the thickness of the path
and arrow using the Measure Display options.
On the selected line, handle markers (shown by the hoops) indicate the start and end of the scan path.
You can drag the handle markers to move the ends of the path (you must not have any buttons selected
in the model window when you do this). The handle marker in the middle of the path allows you to move
the line around the perimeter of the cylinder by dragging with the mouse.
You can adjust the size of the handle markers using the Measure Display options.
Use the pop-up menu options in the Teach Path view to join or split inspection paths, etc.
See Also:
298
Lines Measurement Dialog Box

Teach Path View
376
94

Units Dialog Box
789
748
101

60
742
95
Model Window
45.4.3 Scan Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder

Scan Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
306
Purpose
Use the Cylinder Circles Path option to display the Circles Measurement dialog box where you can set
up scan paths on the feature. When you click
, the scan path is added to the Teach Path view.
You can then manipulate the scan path as described below. When you have added all the commands
you need to the Teach Path view, click
. PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any other
commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added to your part program, to enable known
path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS
commands.
This option is useful when evaluating circularity or circular runout.
Navigation
the Features section, pick a bounded cylinder on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path,
click Cylinder Circles Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Number of arcs - the number of scan path elements to add to the cylinder. The arcs are evenly spaced
within the length of the cylinder.
In this example, two arcs have been

added to the cylinder, to create two
scan paths shown by the blue
bands. The paths can be smoothed
by reducing the path segment
length on the Measure Display tab
page of the Display Settings dialog
box. This only changes the
display, not the inspection path.
The smoother paths are shown in
the next picture.
The start point on each line is
Measure Display tab page and the
The arrowhead on each inspection
the Teach Path view. In this
example, the upper scan path is
selected (shown in yellow) and the
direction of the lower scan path has
been reversed. You can also
change the thickness of the path
and arrow using the Measure
Display options.
On the selected circle, handle
markers (shown by the hoops)
indicate the start and end of the
scan path (in this example they are
both in the same place). You can
drag the handle markers to move
the ends of the path (you must not
have any buttons selected in the
model window when you do this).
The handle marker in the centre of
the circle allows you to move the
circle up and down the axis of the
cylinder.
307
308
In this example, the ends of the

upper scan path have been moved
and the scan path has been
lowered along the axis of the
cylinder.
Use the pop-up menu options in the

Teach Path view to join or split
inspection paths, etc.
See Also:
298

Teach Path View
373
94

Units Dialog Box
789
748
101

60
742
95
45.4.4 Scan Option (Helix) - Inspecting a Cylinder

Scan Option (Helix) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Purpose
Use the Helix Measurement dialog box to set up a helical scan path on a cylinder feature. When you
click
, the scan path is added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate the scan path as
described below. When you have added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
.
PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are
added to your part program, to enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as
This option is useful when evaluating diameter or cylindricity.
309
Navigation
the Features section, pick a bounded cylinder on the model, select the cylinder in the Teach Path,
click Cylinder Helix Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Pitch - the distance between the spirals of the helix.
Revolutions - the number of complete turns in the helix.
The cylinder is displayed like this

(for a helix with one revolution). The
blue band shows the scan path.
The start point is indicated by a
black arrow which shows the
sensor approach direction. The
length of the arrow reflects the
distance for the sensor approach.
You can adjust the appearance of
the arrows using the Measure
Settings dialog box and the Sensor
Approach dialog box.
This view shows that the scan path

helix has been split into two, using
the Path pop-up menu options in
the Teach Path view. The lower
section of the path is selected.
310
In this view, the lower section of the

path is selected. Handle markers
(shown by the hoops) indicate the
start and end of the section. You
can drag the handle markers to
move the ends of the path (you
must not have any buttons selected
in the model window when you do
this). The upper section of the path
has had its ends moved in this way.
You can adjust the size of the
handle markers using the Measure
Display options.
You can also see three more handle markers in the centre of the cylinder. Use these to adjust the
position of the helix. The upper and lower markers raise and lower the ends of the helix, to adjust its
pitch. The middle marker moves the whole path up and down the axis of the cylinder. Note that a
middle marker is only available if the whole path can be moved, and not if the path fills the cylinder.
See Also:
Teach Path View
298
94

Units Dialog Box
789
748
101

60
742
95
Model Window
45.4.5 Touch Option - Inspecting a Cylinder

45.4.5.1 Touch Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
Touch Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
Purpose
Use the Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools section to access the options for setting up touch points
on the cylinder feature.
Navigation
311
on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path, click the Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools
section

Cylinder Lines - displays the Lines Measurement dialog box 376 , where you can set up touch points in
lines along the length of the feature (for details see Touch Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder 311 ).
Cylinder Circles - displays the Circles Measurement dialog box 373 , where you can set up bands of
touch points on the feature (for details see Touch Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder 313 ).
See Also:
298

45.4.5.2 Touch Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Touch Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Purpose
Use the Tools drop-down list Cylinder Lines option to display the Lines Measurement dialog box where
you can set up touch points on the feature. When you click
, the touch points are added to the
Teach Path view. A cylinder feature is displayed as in the picture on the right (in Wireframe view, i.e.
after clicking the Wireframe button on the model window toolbar).
You can manipulate the points on the cylinder as described below.
Navigation
on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Cylinder Lines from the Tools dropdown list in the Touch Tools section

312
Number of lines - the number of vertical lines of touch points to add to the cylinder. The lines are
evenly spaced.
Touches per line - the number of touches to add to each line. The touches are evenly spaced along
the line.
In this example, there are three lines of

three points within the cylinder. One
of the lines (shown in yellow) is
selected.
You can manipulate the view of the

cylinder. This view more clearly shows
the red spheres that indicate the touch
points. The black arrows indicate the
sensor approach direction and
distance to the touch points. The
length of the arrows reflects the
distance for the sensor approach. You
can adjust the appearance of the
arrows using the Measure Display tab
page of the Display Settings dialog
box and the Sensor Approach dialog
box. Also displayed are red arrows for
the sensor retract direction and
distance, but these are obscured by
the arrows for the sensor approach.
Adjusting the display using the Sensor
Retract dialog box, and manipulating
the view in the model window can allow
you to see these arrows.
This view also shows the arrowheads
on the lines indicating the direction of
inspection. You can reverse this for
one or more of the lines using the popup menu options in the Teach Path
view. In this picture the direction of the
inspection has been reversed on the
top line. You can change the

thickness of the lines and the arrows
using the Measure Display options.
Teach Path view, then grab them using
the mouse and move them on the
feature, to adjust their location. (You
must not have any buttons selected in
the model window when you do this.)
As you do this, the touch point coordinates are updated in the Teach
Path view. The start point on each line
is indicated by a black arrow and the
ends of the line by hoops called
'handle markers' shown here. These
can also be seen on the touch points.
You can adjust the size of the handle
options.
You can manipulate the lines by
dragging the ends with the mouse.
The touches are moved accordingly to
remain within the inspection path. You
can also move the lines around the
perimeter of the cylinder by dragging
with the mouse (you may need to
manipulate the view of the feature to be
able to do this).
See Also:
Teach Path View
298
94

Model Window
60
742
743
49

54
275
45.4.5.3 Touch Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Touch Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
313
314
Purpose
Use the Tools drop-down list Cylinder Circles option to display the Circles Measurement dialog box
where you can set up touch points on the feature. When you click
, the touch points are added to
the Teach Path view. A cylinder feature is displayed as in the picture on the right.
You can manipulate the points on the cylinder as you would when using the Add Touches option. For
details see Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Cylinder 300 .
Navigation
on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Cylinder Circles from the Tools dropdown list in the Touch Tools section

Number of arcs - the number of bands of touch points to add to the cylinder. The bands are evenly
spaced within the length of the cylinder.
Touches per arc - the number of touches to add to the feature. The touches are evenly spaced around
the feature.
See Also:
Teach Path View
298
94
45.5
Inspecting a Plane
45.5.1 Inspecting a Plane

Inspecting a Plane
315
Purpose
The Plane inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a plane. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the plane when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the plane you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the plane you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the plane in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
automatic inspection. You can use the Properties window to specify the number of touches to add
to the resulting MEAS command.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the plane to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Paths
316
Geometry
Move
366
Probes
367
Laser Teach
Output
615
Probe Check
819
396
).
765
Properties
741
281
49
272
316
7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Plane in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
45.5.2 Scan Option - Inspecting a Plane

45.5.2.1 Scan Option - Inspecting a Plane
Scan Option - Inspecting a Plane

Purpose
Use the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section to access the options for setting up scan path
elements on the plane feature, to define the path to take when scanning. The options add PATH and
PAMEAS commands to your program, to enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan
mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click Plane in
the Features section, pick a plane on the model, select the plane in the Teach Path view, click
Paths in the Scan Tools section

Plane Multi-Line Path - displays the Multi Pick Line dialog box
scan path on the model.
317
, where you can set up lines for the
Plane Centre Circle Radius Path - displays the Centre Radius Circle dialog box, where you can set
up arcs as scan path elements on the model (for details see Scan Option (Centre Radius Circle) Inspecting a Plane 319 ).
Plane Edge Offset Path - displays the Offset Plane Edge dialog box 377 , where you can set up a scan
path around the edge of a plane (for details see Scan Option (Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane 321 ).
Curve Path - displays the Surface Measurement - Curve options 390 , which you can use to generate
features or touch points from divisions along a curve.
317
See Also:
Inspecting a Plane
314

45.5.2.2 Multi Pick Line Dialog Box
Multi Pick Line Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Multi Pick Line dialog box to set up lines for the scan path on the model. You can type in the
start and end co-ordinates for the lines, and click Add to add them to the list. Or you can click on the
model to define the lines. (You can now right-click on a line in the Multi Pick Line dialog box to display
a pop-up menu where you can delete the line or view its properties.) When you click
, the lines are
added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate the lines as described below. When you have
added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
part program depending on the probe:
. Commands are added to your
With the CMM off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any
other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added to your part program, to enable
known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and
PAMEAS commands
Using a laser scanner and selecting the Line Path option in the Surface section of the Laser tab,
PTMEAS and GOTO commands (and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view)
are added to your part program
Navigation
the Features section, pick a plane on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path, click Plane
Multi Line Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Select Geometry in the Surface section, pick a surface on
the model, click
to confirm your selection, click Line Path in the Surface section
318

Start - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the start of the line.
End - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the end of the line.
Add - if you type in the co-ordinates of the line, click to add the line to the list below.
In this example there are two lines.

One of the lines (shown with hoop
markers) is selected. The start point on
each line is indicated by a black arrow
which shows the sensor approach
The handle markers (shown by the
hoops) on the selected line indicate the
start, end and middle of the line. You
can drag the handle markers to
reposition the line (you must not have
any buttons selected in the model
window when you do this). The handle
markers at the ends of the line allow
you to move that end, and the marker in
the middle of the line allows you to pick
the line up and move it. You can adjust
the size of the handle markers using the
Teach Path view to join or split lines,
etc.
See Also:
Inspecting a Plane
314
Inspecting a Surface with a Laser Scanner

Teach Path View
350
94

Model Window
789
60
742
49
95
319
45.5.2.3 Scan Option (Centre Radius Circle) - Inspecting a Plane
Scan Option (Centre Radius Circle) - Inspecting a Plane
Purpose
Use the Centre Radius Circle dialog box to set up arcs as scan path elements on the selected plane.
This is useful for scanning around circular features on a plane. You can type in the details of the circular
feature and click Add, or you can select the pickable feature type and pick it on the model then click
Add. (You can now right-click on an arc to display a pop-up menu where you can delete the arc or view
its properties.) The scan path for the feature is then displayed on the model. When you click
, the
scan paths are added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate the scan paths as described
below. When you have added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
. PATH
and PAMEAS commands (and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added
to your part program, to enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is
implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
Navigation
Centre Circle Radius Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Centre - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the centre of the feature to be used to create the scan path element.
Radius - the radius of the feature to be used to create the scan path element, in the current units (as
given in the System Settings dialog box).
Offset - an offset from the edge of the feature (in the current units).
320
Pickable feature types - select the feature type to be picked to create the scan path element.
Add - click to add the scan path to the list below.
In this example there are two scan

path elements, created as arcs.
The start point on each arc is
This view shows that the arc on the
left has been selected. Handle
markers (shown by the hoops) on
the selected arc indicate the start,
end and centre of the arc. You can
drag the handle markers to move
the ends of the arc (you must not
have any buttons selected in the
model window when you do this).
The marker in the middle of the arc
allows you to pick the arc up and
move it. You can adjust the size of
the handle markers using the
In this example, the ends of the arc
have been moved and the arc scan
path itself has been moved away
from the arc feature used to create
it.

Teach Path view to join or split arc
paths, etc. This view shows the two
arcs joined into one scan path
element.
See Also:
Inspecting a Plane
Teach Path View
314
94

789
101
60
Model Window
321
49

45.5.2.4 Scan Option (Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane
Scan Option (Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane
Purpose
Use the Offset Plane Edge dialog box to set up a scan path on a plane, offset from the edge of the
model. The path is created as a CAD curve.
Click on the model near the edge of the plane on which you want to create the scan path. Click Add.
The scan path is then displayed on the model. If this is offset on the wrong side of the feature, rightclick on it, select Delete, then change the offset value from + to - (or from - to +), click again near the
edge of the plane and click Add again. The path is redrawn to show the new offset. (You can now rightclick on the CAD Curve to display a pop-up menu where you can delete the curve.) When you click
, the scan path is added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate the scan path as described
below. When you have added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
. PATH
and PAMEAS commands (and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added
to your part program, to enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is
implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
Navigation
Edge Offset Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Offset - the distance by which the scan path is offset from the edge of the plane, in the current units (as
given in the System Settings dialog box).
Add - click to add the scan path to the list below.
322
This view shows part of the scan

path created using the Offset Plane
Edge dialog box. The black arrows
indicate the sensor approach
direction at different locations on the
scan path. The length of the arrow
In this view a scan path has been
selected. Handle markers (shown
by the hoop) indicate the start and
end of the scan path. You can drag
the handle markers to reposition the
scan path (you must not have any
buttons selected in the model
window when you do this). You can
adjust the size of the handle
options.
In this view the handle markers have
been dragged to separate the ends
of the scan path. You can also use
the pop-up menu options in the
Teach Path view to manipulate the
scan path.
See Also:
Inspecting a Plane
314
Offset Plane Edge Dialog Box

Teach Path View
377
94

789
60
742
95
45.6

323
Purpose
Use the Tools drop-down list Edge Offset option to display the Offset Plane Edge dialog box where you
can set up touch points on the feature. Type in the offset from the plane edge (you can use a negative
number) then click the edge on the model to which you want the offset to apply. The offset is then
drawn on the model (if not, check that Show lines in render mode is checked on the View tab page 68 ,
Display Settings dialog box). Click Add. The offset path is added to the list below the Add button, and
the number of touches you have specified are added on the path, spaced equally around the edge. You
can see this in the picture below. Note that the first and last points are added in the same place, so
that in the picture below there appear to be only two touch points. (You can now right-click on the CAD
Curve to display a pop-up menu where you can delete the curve.)
When you click
, the touch points are added to the Teach Path view. A plane feature is displayed
as in the picture below. You can manipulate the points as described below.
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Plane in the Features section, pick a plane on the model,
select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Edge Offset from the Tools drop-down list in the
Touch Tools section

Offset - the distance from the plane edge at which touch points are added. You can add an offset inside
the plane edge or outside (you can type in a negative number). When you have typed in a value, click
near the plane edge to display the offset.
Touches - the number of touch points to add to the plane. The touch points are evenly spaced.
Add - click this button to add the offset and touches to the list below.
In this example, there is an offset

within the plane edge, with three
touch points on it (two in the same
place).
The red spheres on the offset line
indicate the touch points. The black
arrows indicate the sensor approach
direction and distance to the touch
points. The length of the arrows
324

Sensor Approach dialog box. Also
displayed are red arrows for the
sensor retract direction and distance,
but these are obscured by the arrows
for the sensor approach. Adjusting
the display using the Sensor Retract
dialog box, and manipulating the view
in the model window can allow you to
see these arrows.
The start and end points are indicated by hoops called 'handle markers'. You can adjust the size of the
handle markers using the Measure Display options. Arrowheads on the inspection path indicate the
direction of the inspection.
When you have added the points to the Teach Path view, you can manipulate the points by dragging the
start and end points with the mouse. (You must not have any buttons selected in the model window
when you do this.) The touches in between are moved accordingly to remain evenly spaced along the
offset edge (you may need to manipulate the view of the feature to be able to do this).
See Also:
Inspecting a Plane
314

Teach Path View
377
94

Model Window
60
742
743
49
46
Inspecting a Line
Inspecting a Line
Inspecting a Line
325
Purpose
The Line inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for inspecting
a line. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach Path view.
added into the measurement block for the line when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the line you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the line you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the line in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the line to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Teach
809
Probes
367
Probe Check
281
396
Geometry
366
Move
Properties
741
Output
).
765
615
Set Plane/Orientation
404
49
272
326
7.
8.
Bounded lines are displayed from the start to the end. Unbounded lines are displayed at a length
specified on the Feature Display tab page 66 , Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Line in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
47
Inspecting a Cone
47.1
Inspecting a Cone
Inspecting a Cone
Inspecting a Cone
327
Purpose
The Cone inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a cone. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the cone when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the cone you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the cone you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the cone in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the cone to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Add Touches
Teach
Move
300
Add Scans
Paths
809
328
Probes
765
367
371
Tools
397
366
Laser Teach
819
Properties
741
Output
615
).
310
Geometry
49
272
Probe Check
328
281

7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Cone in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
47.2
Scan Option - Inspecting a Cone

Purpose
Use the Cylinder Circles Path option from the Paths drop-down list to display the Circle Path dialog box
where you can set up an arc for the scan path for inspecting a cone. When you click
, the arc is
added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate the arc as described below. When you have
added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
. PATH and PAMEAS commands
(and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added to your part program, to
Inspecting a Cone
329
enable known path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and
PAMEAS commands.
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click Cone in
the Features section, pick a cone on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click
Cylinder Circles Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Centre - the location of the centre of the scan path, relative to the current datum.
Radius - the radius of the cone at the location of the scan path.
Distance from vertex - the distance of the scan path from the vertex of the cone. By default this is
halfway up the selected geometry along the cone normal. You can overtype this to change the location
of the scan path, or you can drag the scan path on the cone to move it.
The scan path is displayed like this.

The start point is indicated by a
black arrow which shows the sensor
approach direction. The length of
the arrow reflects the distance for
the sensor approach. You can
adjust the appearance of the arrow
using the Measure Display tab page
of the Display Settings dialog box
and the Sensor Approach dialog
box.
This picture shows the cone in

wireframe view (i.e. after clicking the
Wireframe button on the model
window toolbar), so that you can see
the inspection path more easily.
the Teach Path view. You can also
change the thickness of the path
and arrow, the size of the handle
markers that indicate the start, end
and centre of the path, and smooth
the path using the Measure Display
options. You can drag the start and
end of the path using the handle
markers (shown by the small hoops
at the ends of the path). The handle
marker in the centre of the path
allows you to move the path up and
down the axis of the cone.
330
In this picture there are two scan

paths on the cone. The yellow path
is selected and displays the handle
markers. These have been used to
drag the ends of the path to
separate them. The paths have also
been smoothed in comparison with
the path in the picture above.
See Also:
Inspecting a Cone
Teach Path View
326
94

54

60
742
47.3
789
95
Inspecting an Edge
47.3.1 Inspecting an Edge

Inspecting an Edge
Inspecting a Cone
331
Purpose
The Edge inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting an edge. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the edge when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the edge you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the edge you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the edge point in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
automatic inspection. Edge features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or CNC
selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. But if you prefer to add some
additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the edge to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Geometry
366
Move
Properties
741
Output
765
615
Probes
398
49
272
).
).
367
Probe Check
281
Set Orientation/Plane/Position
405

You can use the Touch option to click on the model or take a point manually to define the touch
point for the inspection path.
7.
332
8.
Note:
To apply a surface offset to edge features, type in a value in the Thickness field on the Picking tab page
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Edge in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
58
411
449
91
47.3.2 Inspecting an Edge - Worked Example

Inspecting an Edge - Worked Example
1.
Start a program and load a model:
Inspecting a Cone
2.
333
Select the Edge option from the Features section on the Inspect toolbar and pick an edge point on
the model. At the feature are two vectors and a plane. The plane and one vector define the edge to
be measured. The second vector is the surface adjacent to the edge. This can be used to set a
depth for the edge. If the depth is set to 1 mm, the edge is measured at 1 mm from the position and
orientation of the second vector.
334
3.
Use the Grid window or Properties window to modify the nominal information. You can change the i,
j,k values by double-clicking in one of the nominal direction fields (either the I,J,K or Surface i,j,k
fields) to display the Direction dialog box for line, edge point and slot features 81 . Use the options
in the left-hand box in the Direction dialog box to modify the edge normal direction, and use the
options in the right-hand box to modify the surface normal direction. Use the central
button to swap the edge and surface normals.
47.4
(Reverse)
Inspecting a Round Slot
47.4.1 Inspecting a Round Slot

When you pick a round slot to inspect on a model, if the pick does not find a round slot, multi-point pick
is automatically used. For details see Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 .
For a diagram of where to pick on the round slot, click here
336
Inspecting a Cone
335
Purpose
The Round Slot inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a round slot. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the
Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the round slot when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the round slot you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the round slot you wish to inspect
on the model.
4.
Select the round slot in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
automatic inspection. Round slot features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or
CNC selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. You can use the
Properties window to specify the number of touches to add to the resulting MEAS command. But if
you prefer to add some additional commands, continue from Step 5.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the round slot to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Add Touches
Move
336
765
Properties
741
Tools
338
394
).
Geometry
366
Probes
367
Laser Teach
Output
615
Probe Check
Set Plane/ Orientation/ Position
49
272
819
281
405

336
7.
window to apply tolerances and evaluate the feature data. If evaluating a round slot using the
advanced library (selected on the Conformance tab page of the Configuration dialog box), an error
may occur depending on the distribution of the points you have taken. If so, try evaluating the slot
without using the advanced library option.
8.
Note:
To apply a surface offset to slot features, type in a value in the Thickness field on the Picking tab page of
the Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Round Slot in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
40
94
Conformance - Configuration Dialog Box 128

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
58
411
449
91
47.4.2 Round Slot Multi-point Pick

Round Slot Multi-point Pick
When picking a round slot, if the pick does not find a round slot, multi-point pick is automatically used.
This means that any points you pick are used to define the feature. Pick the points in the order shown
in the diagram, i.e. three points at each end.
See Also:
334
47.4.3 Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Round Slot

Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Round Slot
Inspecting a Cone
337
Purpose
Use the Add Touches option when inspecting a round slot to automatically add touches appropriate to
the slot. First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 .
Select it in the Teach Path view, then click Add Touches in the Touch Tools section. Touches are
automatically added to the feature, according to the settings on the Teach Properties dialog box 134 .
The slot is then displayed like this. The touch points are arranged with a minimum of three points in the
radius at each end of the slot.
The red spheres on the slot indicate the touch points and the black arrows the sensor approach direction
and distance to the touch points. The length of the arrows reflects the distance for the sensor approach.
You can adjust the appearance of the arrows using the Measure Display tab page of the Display
Settings dialog box and the Sensor Approach dialog box. Also displayed are red arrows for the sensor
retract direction and distance, but these are obscured by the arrows for the sensor approach. Adjusting
the display using the Sensor Retract dialog box, and manipulating the view in the model window can
allow you to see these arrows.
Click on the touches in the Teach Path view or on the model to select them. In the next picture, two of
the touch points have been selected:
You can highlight the touches in the Teach Path view, then grab them using the mouse and move them
on the feature, to adjust their location. (You must not have any buttons selected in the model window
when you do this.) As you do this, the touch point co-ordinates are updated in the Teach Path view.
Hoops called 'handle markers' indicate that the selected points can be dragged. You can adjust the size
of the handle markers using the Measure Display options.
See Also:
334
338
Teach Path View
94

Model Window
60
742
743
49
47.4.4 Touch Option - Inspecting a Round Slot

Touch Option - Inspecting a Round Slot
Purpose
Use the Touch option in the Touch Tools or Scan Tools section to set up touch points on the feature.
The touch points are added to the Teach Path view. A round slot feature is displayed as in the picture
above.
You can manipulate the points on the slot as you would when using the Add Touches option. For
details see Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Round Slot 336 .
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Round Slot in the Features section, pick a round
slot on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Touch
See Also:
Teach Path View
334
94
47.5
Inspecting a Square Slot
47.5.1 Inspecting a Square Slot

When you pick a square slot to inspect on a model, if the pick does not find a square slot, multi-point
pick is automatically used. For details see Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 .
Inspecting a Cone
For a diagram of where to pick on the square slot, click here
340
339
Purpose
The Square Slot inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a square slot. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the
Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the square slot when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the square slot you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the square slot you wish to
inspect on the model.
4.
Select the square slot in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
automatic inspection. Square slot features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the square slot to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Add Touches
Move
341
Touch Tools
Probes
765
367
342
394
Geometry
741
Output
615
366
Laser Teach
Probe Check
281
Set Plane/Orientation/Position
406
).
).
819
Properties
49
272
340

7.
8.
Note:
To apply a surface offset to slot features, type in a value in the Thickness field on the Picking tab page of
the Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Square Slot in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
58
411
449
91
47.5.2 Square Slot Multi-point Pick

Square Slot Multi-point Pick
When picking a square slot, if the pick does not find a square slot, multi-point pick is automatically
used. This means that any points you pick are used to define the feature. Pick the points in the order
shown in the diagram, i.e. two points on one side (usually one of the long sides), the third point on the
opposite side, then the two remaining points one on each of the two remaining sides.
See Also:
338
Inspecting a Cone
341
47.5.3 Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Square Slot

Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Square Slot
Purpose
Use the Add Touches option when inspecting a square slot to automatically add touches appropriate to
the slot. First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 .
The slot is then displayed like this.

The touch points are arranged with at
least one on each of three sides and
at least two on the remaining side.
The red spheres on the slot indicate
the touch points, and the black
arrows the sensor approach direction
and distance to the touch points.
The length of the arrows reflects the
Approach dialog box. Also
displayed are red arrows for the
sensor retract direction and
distance, but these are obscured by
the arrows for the sensor approach.
Adjusting the display using the
Sensor Retract dialog box, and
manipulating the view in the model
window can allow you to see these
arrows.
Click on the touches in the Teach
Path view or on the model to select
them. The selected touches are
highlighted on the model. In this
picture, two of the touch points have
been selected. You can highlight
the touches in the Teach Path view,
then grab them using the mouse and
move them on the feature, to adjust
their location. (You must not have
any buttons select in the model
window when you do this.) As you
do this, the touch point co-ordinates
are updated in the Teach Path view.
Hoops called 'handle markers'
342
indicate that the selected points can

be dragged. You can adjust the size
of the handle markers using the
See Also:
Teach Path View
338
94

Model Window
60
742
743
49
275
47.5.4 Touch Option - Inspecting a Square Slot

Touch Option - Inspecting a Square Slot
Purpose
The touch points are added to the Teach Path view. A square slot feature is displayed as in the picture
above.
You can manipulate the points on the slot as you would when using the Add Touches option. For
details see Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Square Slot 341 .
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Square Slot in the Feature section, pick a
square slot on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Touch
See Also:
Teach Path View
338
94
Inspecting a Cone
47.6
343
Inspecting a Curve
47.6.1 Inspecting a Curve

Inspecting a Curve
Purpose
The Curve inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a curve. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the curve when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the curve you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the curve you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the curve in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
for manual inspection or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive text) for automatic
inspection.
5.
Add the commands for inspecting the curve to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Teach
809
Paths
344
Geometry
366
49
272
).
).
344
Move
Probes
765
Properties
367
741
Output
Probe Check
615
281
Set Plane
407

6.
7.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Curve in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
40
94
535
Curve Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0) 537

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
411
449
91
47.6.2 Scan Option - Inspecting a Curve

Scan Option - Inspecting a Curve
Purpose
Use the Paths drop-down list to access the options for setting up scan path elements on the curve
feature, to define the path to take when scanning. The Paths options add PATH and PAMEAS
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click Curve in
the Features section, pick a curve on the model, select the curve in the Teach Path view, click
Paths in the Scan Tools section

Curve Path - displays the Surface Measurement - Curve options 390 , which you can use to generate
See Also:
Inspecting a Cone
Inspecting a Curve
345
343
48
Inspecting a Surface
Inspecting a Surface
Purpose
The Surface inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a surface. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the surface when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the surface you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the surface you wish to inspect
on the model.
4.
Select the surface in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
MAN for manual inspection or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive text) for
5.
397
49
272
).
346
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the surface to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available:
Grid Touches
388
Geometry
Move
765
366
Probes
Properties
367
Output
615
741
Probe Check
281

7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Surface in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
49
Inspecting a Sphere
49.1
Inspecting a Sphere
Inspecting a Sphere
Inspecting a Sphere
347
Purpose
The Sphere inspection options allow you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a sphere. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach
They are added into the measurement block for the sphere when you click Apply.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the sphere you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the sphere you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the sphere in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
MAN for manual inspection or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive text) for
automatic inspection. Sphere features have a canned cycle for measurement, so with AUTO or
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the sphere to the Teach Path view. The following options are
Add Touches
Move
348
765
Touch
349
Probes
367
).
Geometry
366
Laser Teach
819
397
49
272
348
Properties
Output
741
615
Probe Check
281

7.
8.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Sphere in the Features section
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
411
449
91
49.2
Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Sphere

Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Sphere
Purpose
Use the Add Touches option when inspecting a sphere to automatically add touches appropriate to the
sphere. First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 .
The sphere is then displayed like this.

In this example, four touch points
have been added, one on the top of
the sphere and the remainder
equidistant around its equator. One
of the points is selected.
Inspecting a Sphere
349
The red spheres indicate the (unselected) touch points. The black arrows indicate the sensor approach
direction and distance to the touch points. The length of the arrows reflects the distance for the sensor
approach. You can adjust the appearance of the arrows using the Measure Display tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box and the Sensor Approach dialog box. Also displayed are red arrows for the
sensor retract direction and distance, but these are obscured by the arrows for the sensor approach.
Adjusting the display using the Sensor Retract dialog box, and manipulating the view in the model
window can allow you to see these arrows.
Selected touch points are indicated by hoops called 'handle markers'. You can adjust the size of the
handle markers using the Measure Display options. You can highlight the touches in the Teach Path
view, then grab them using the mouse and move them on the feature, to adjust their location. (You must
not have any buttons selected in the model window when you do this.) As you do this, the touch point
co-ordinates are updated in the Teach Path view.
See Also:
Inspecting a Sphere
Teach Path View
346
94

Model Window
60
742
743
49
Setting up the Inspection Path
49.3
Touch Option - Inspecting a Sphere

Purpose
The touch points are added to the Teach Path view. A sphere feature is displayed as in the picture
above.
You can manipulate the points on the sphere as you would when using the Add Touches option. For
details see Add Touches Option - Inspecting a Sphere 348 .
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click sphere in the Feature section, pick a sphere on
350
the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Touch
See Also:
Inspecting a Sphere
Teach Path View
346
94
50
Measuring a Point Feature with Zero Points

Measuring a Point Feature with Zero Points
Purpose
The Point Zero inspection option allows you to take a point at the current position of the sensor and add
this to your program, by measuring a point feature but taking zero touches. This adds a MEAS/POINT,F
(label),0 command to your program. Select Point Zero from the toolbar, then click Apply. The current
position of the probe is added as a point measurement to your part program.
Navigation
After customising the toolbars, click Point Zero
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Main Toolbar
272
135
51
51.1

Purpose
The Surface section allows you to generate a grid, lines, or points over a surface to define the scan path
for inspection of the surface using a laser scanner. The commands you select from the options on the
toolbar are added to the Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see
Setting Up the Inspection Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the surface when
you click Apply.
1.
Select Laser from the main toolbar. Click New in the Inspect section.
351
2.
You can adjust the view of the model (see Model Window
3.
Select the surface to be scanned by clicking the Select Geometry icon in the Surface section, then
picking a surface on the model by clicking with the mouse.
4.
Click
5.
In the Surface section the following options are available:

Area
).
to confirm your selection.
352
Curve Path
354
49
Line Path
317
Grid
388
Select Geometry
366
You can also use the other sections of the Laser menu to add commands to the Teach Path.
In this example, the

upper surface has been
selected using Select
Geometry. The Grid
option has been
selected from the
Surface section and the
grid is placed over the
selected surface before
being built.
When Build is clicked,

the scan lines are added
to the model. The
arrows on the scan lines
indicate the direction of
the scan.
352
This view shows that

one of the scan lines is
selected. It is
highlighted in yellow.
The ends of the line are
indicated by hoops
called 'handle markers'
shown here. You can
adjust the size of the
handle markers using
the Measure Display
options.
You can manipulate the
lines by dragging the
ends with the mouse.
6.
Use the pop-up menu options in the Teach Path view to manipulate the commands in the Teach
Path view. For example, to avoid an obstacle on the part, you could split a scan path into two lines
of equal length, then shorten each line.
7.
8.
When you have edited the commands to your requirements in the Teach Path view, click
(Apply). The commands are added to your program and executed, depending on the programming
mode (see Teach, Command and Insert Modes 41 ).
See Also:
Laser Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature 826
Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
60
95
411
449
51.2
Multi Pick Area Dialog Box

Multi Pick Area Dialog Box
353
Purpose
Use the Multi Pick Area dialog box to set up lines for the scan path on the model, to cover an area of the
model. Click on the model to define the lines. The first pick defines the start position of the lines, the
second pick defines the end of the lines, and the third pick defines the plane that the lines lie in and how
far along the plane the lines extend. If you know the co-ordinates, you can type in the start, end and to
co-ordinates for the lines, and click Add to add them to the list. (You can now right-click on a line in the
Multi Pick Area dialog box to display a pop-up menu where you can delete the line or view its
properties.) When you click
, the lines are added to the Teach Path view. You can then manipulate
the lines. When you have added all the commands you need to the Teach Path view, click
.
PTMEAS and GOTO commands (and any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Select Geometry in the
Surface section, pick a surface on the model, click
Surface section
to confirm your selection, click Area in the

Start - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the start of the lines.
End - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the end of the lines.
To - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of the position that the lines extend to along the plane the lines lie in.
Gap - the distance between the centres of the lines.
Add - if you type in the co-ordinates of the line, click to add the line to the list below.
See Also:
354
Teach Path View
51.3
94
Multi Pick Curve Dialog Box

Multi Pick Curve Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Multi Pick Curve dialog box to select points to be splined to generate a smooth curved path.
Click on the model to select the points. The first pick defines the start position of the curve, with further
picks defining points through which the curved path will pass. If you know the co-ordinates and
direction, you can type these in and click Add to add them to the list. (You can now right-click a line in
the Multi Pick Curve dialog box to display a pop-up menu where you can delete the line or view its
properties). When you click
, the points are splined to generate a smooth curved path, which is
added to the Teach Path view. When you have added all the commands you need to the Teach Path
view, click
. PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any other commands you have added to the
Teach Path view) are added to your part program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Select Geometry in the
Surface section, pick a surface on the model, click
in the Surface section
to confirm your selection, click Curve Path

Point - the X, Y, Z co-ordinates of a point to be added to make the curve path.
Direction - the direction of the point.
Add - if you type in the co-ordinates and direction of the point, click to add the PTMEAS to the list
below.
This option works by allowing the user to generate a curved path by clicking a series points on a CAD
355
surface:
On acceptance, the path is splined to generate a smooth curved path for the laser scanner to follow:
The generated DMIS code is a path/curve command. See the example below:
$$<LASER_GSURF>
P(PLin8)=PATH/CURVE,PTDATA,-14.3349,-82.5512,0,0,0,1,PTDATA,-23.9772,-38.7496,0,0,0,1,
PTDATA,-51.4978,-16.091,0,0,0,1,PTDATA,-87.9953,-15.0767,0,0,0,1,PTDATA,-102.5178,27.6462,0,0,0,1,PTDATA,-107.2946,-95.3746,0,0,0,1,PTDATA,-43.0567,-114.6123,0,0,0,1
MODE/PROG,MAN
F(SUR001)=FEAT/GSURF
MEAS/GSURF,F(SUR001),3
PAMEAS/DISTANCE,0.5,P(PLin8),0,0,1
ENDMES
$$<\LASER_GSURF>
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
60
356

Feature Tolerancing
95
411
Outputting Data
52
Inspecting a Gap and Flush Feature

Purpose
The Gap and Flush inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a gap feature between a pair of flat surfaces.
This option is for use with a laser scanning sensor. When you click Laser Teach, the Laser Teach
dialog box
Scan 819 .
829
357
is displayed for you to teach a laser scan of the feature. For details see Teaching a Laser
When inspecting a gap feature, you need about 10-20 scan lines. The number of scan lines is
determined by the number of points in the corresponding MEAS/OBJECT command for the gap feature.
The larger the number, the more densely packed the scan lines. The minimum number of points
required to define the gap feature type gives a reasonable scan density for feature extraction. You can
see the lines in the point cloud displayed in the model window 49 . Also, the distance between the lines
must be smaller than the gap you want to measure.
Navigation
To teach a laser scan, after customising the toolbars 45 and with the CMM on-line, select Laser
from the main toolbar, click Gap and Flush, click Teach in the Operations section
For offline programming, after customising the toolbars
from the main toolbar, click Gap and Flush
45
and with the CMM off-line, select Laser
See Also:
Gap & Flush Feature Dialog Box
53
Inspecting a Hexagonal Slot
53.1

When you pick a hexagonal slot to inspect on a model, if the pick does not find a hexagonal slot, multipoint pick is automatically used. For details see Picking - Display Settings Dialog Box 58 .
For a diagram of where to pick on the hexagonal slot, click
here.
358
Purpose
The Hexagonal Hole inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program
for inspecting a hexagonal slot. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to
the Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the hexagonal hole when you click Apply.
This option is for use with a laser scanning sensor.
).
1.
Define the nominal values for the hexagonal hole you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the hexagonal hole you wish to
4.
Select the hexagonal hole in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation
mode: MAN for manual inspection, PROG or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive
text) for automatic inspection. You can use the Properties window to specify the line and point
spacing for the laser scan and set up additional laser properties.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the hexagonal hole to the Teach Path view. The following options
are available:
Move
765
Probes
367
394
49
272
).
Laser Teach
819
Output
615
Probe Check
281
7.
359

8.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Hexagonal Hole in the Features section
See Also:
Hexagonal Slot Dialog Box
550

Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
58
411
449
53.2
Hexagonal Slot Multi-point Pick

Hexagonal Slot Multi-point Pick
When picking a hexagonal slot, if the pick does not find a hexagonal slot, multi-point pick is
automatically used. This means that any points you pick are used to define the feature. Pick the points
in the order shown in the diagram, i.e. two points on one side, the third point on the opposite side, then
one remaining point on an adjacent side.
See Also:
54
357
Inspecting a Key Slot

360
Purpose
The Key Slot inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a key slot.
This option is for use with a laser scanning sensor. When you click Laser Teach, the Laser Teach
dialog box 829 is displayed for you to teach a laser scan of the feature. For details see Teaching a Laser
Scan 819 .
Navigation
To teach a laser scan, after customising the toolbars 45 and with the CMM on-line, select Laser
from the main toolbar, click Key Slot, click Teach in the Operations section
For offline programming, after customising the toolbars
from the main toolbar, click Key Slot
45
and with the CMM off-line, select Laser
See Also:
Key Slot Dialog Box
Inspecting a Stud
55
Inspecting a Stud
55.1
Inspecting a Stud
361
Inspecting a Stud
When you pick a Stud to inspect on a model, two points are required.
For a diagram of where to pick on the Stud, click
here.
Purpose
The Stud inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a stud feature. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the
Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details seeSetting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the stud when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the stud you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the stud you wish to inspect on
the model.
4.
Select the stud in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode: MAN
49
272
).
).
362
automatic inspection. You can use the Properties window to specify the line and point spacing for
the laser scan and set up additional laser properties.
.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the stud to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available:
Move
Probes
765
394
Laser Teach
367
819
Output
Probe Check
615
281
7.
8.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click stud in the Features section
See Also:
Stud Dialog Box
552

Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
58
411
449
55.2
Picking a Stud
Picking a Stud
When picking a stud, you need to pick two points to define the feature. Pick the points in the order
shown in the diagram, i.e. one point on the side, then one remaining point on the top.
See Also:
Inspecting a Stud
361
Inspecting a Stud
55.3
363
Inspecting a Christmas Tree
55.3.1 Inspecting a Christmas Tree

When you pick a Christmas tree to inspect on a model, two points are required.
For a diagram of where to pick on the Christmas Tree, click
here.
Purpose
The Christmas Tree inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a Christmas tree feature. This is a threaded stud, measured to find the axis direction, top
centre position and diameter. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to
the Teach Path view. Here you can manipulate the commands (for details see Setting Up the Inspection
Path 275 ). They are added into the measurement block for the Christmas tree when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the Christmas tree you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the Christmas tree you wish to
4.
Select the Christmas tree in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation
mode: MAN for manual inspection, PROG or AUTO (or CNC if viewing your program as descriptive
49
272
).
).
364
text) for automatic inspection. Christmas tree features have a canned cycle for measurement, so
with AUTO or CNC selected as the Operation mode, you can now click Apply to use this. For an
LC scanner, the Christmas tree is scanned three times normal to the nominal (at the top, middle
and bottom of the Christmas tree). For an XC scanner, the Christmas tree is scanned twice, once in
the axial direction and once normal to the nominal (at the bottom). The scan at the bottom of the
Christmas tree will start and end at a distance from the centre given by the radius multiplied by the
overrun constant, to measure the base plane. The overrun constant is specified on the Feature
Measurement Overruns tab page of the Scanner Settings dialog box. You can use the Properties
window to specify the line and point spacing for the laser scan and set up additional laser properties.
.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the Christmas tree to the Teach Path view. The following options
are available:
Move
Probes
765
394
Laser Teach
367
819
Output
Probe Check
615
281
7.
8.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Christmas Tree in the Features section
See Also:
Christmas Tree Dialog Box
554
Feature Measurement Overruns - Scanner Settings Dialog Box

Teach Path View
40
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
849
58
411
449
55.3.2 Picking a Christmas Tree

Picking a Christmas Tree
When picking a Christmas Tree, you need to pick two points to define the feature. Pick the points in the
order shown in the diagram, i.e. one point on the side, then one remaining point at the bottom.
Inspecting a Stud
365
See Also:
56
363
Inspecting a Welded Nut

Purpose
The Welded Nut inspection option allows you to create a measurement block in your part program for
inspecting a welded nut feature. This is a welded nut on a base hole, measured to find the top centre
point of the welded nut so that concentricity can be evaluated between the welded nut and the base hole
feature. The commands you select from the options on the toolbar are added to the Teach Path view.
added into the measurement block for the welded nut when you click Apply.
1.
Define the nominal values for the welded nut you wish to inspect (see Inspecting Features
2.
3.
If you have a model and have not already done this in Step 1, pick the welded nut you wish to
4.
Select the welded nut in the Teach Path view. In the Properties window, select the operation mode:
49
272
).
).
366
automatic inspection. You can use the Properties window to specify the line and point spacing for
the laser scan and set up additional laser properties.
.
5.
6.
Add the commands for inspecting the welded nut to the Teach Path view. The following options are
available:
Move
Probes
765
394
Laser Teach
367
819
Output
Probe Check
615
281
7.
8.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Welded Nut in the Features section
See Also:
Welded Nut Dialog Box
555

Teach Path View
94

Feature Tolerancing
Outputting Data
40
58
411
449
57
Select Geometry Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Select Geometry dialog box to choose one or more faces on the CAD model, to specify the
faces to be used when performing the compare to CAD function. Select a face on the model, then use
Select Geometry to limit or expand your selection. While the Select Geometry dialog box is displayed,
you can select further faces.
367
Clicking on the model picks a face. If you click again in a different location, that face is now
selected and the first one is no longer selected.
SHIFT+CLICK adds any further entities you pick to your selection.
You can also drag the mouse cursor to draw a box over the area of the model that you wish to
select. All faces that are wholly or partially within the box are selected.
Click a face again to deselect it. When you have selected the faces you want, click
Select Geometry dialog box and continue creating your inspection.
to close the
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click a feature type, pick the feature type on the model, click
Select Geometry in the Touch Tools section
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click a feature type, pick the feature type on the model, click
Select Geometry in the Scan Tools section
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click a feature type, pick the feature type on the model, click
Select Geometry in the Surface section
See Also:
Inspecting Features
272

Model Window
58
49
Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378

101
Main Toolbar
58
Sensor Options - Inspecting a Feature
58.1

Purpose
Use the Probes section to select a sensor when inspecting a feature.
When you are creating your part program, it can be difficult to assess which sensor is the best one to
use to inspect the features on your part. From the Probes section you can display dialog boxes which
enable you to select a suitable sensor. This helps to avoid collision between the sensor and the
surface, and helps you to use the minimum number of probe orientations.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, use the Probes section
368

Select - displays the Select Sensor dialog box 714 where you can select a sensor either by label or by
geometry according to the setting on the Miscellaneous tab page 120 (Configuration dialog box). For
details of selecting sensors, see Selecting a Calibrated Sensor 709 .
Auto Probe Search - displays the Automatic Sensor Selection dialog box 368 , where you can select a
suitable sensor for inspecting the feature you have picked on the CAD model or in the Teach Path view.
Only appropriate sensors are displayed, taking into account the location of other features in the CAD
model. This helps to avoid collision between the sensor and the surface, and helps you to use the
minimum number of probe orientations.
See Also:
58.2
Automatic Sensor Selection Dialog Box

Automatic Sensor Selection Dialog Box
369
Purpose
Use the Automatic Sensor Selection dialog box to search for all the available sensors that can measure
the selected features. Based on the selected tolerances, one or more suitable sensors can be selected
to inspect the features and a Select sensor (SNSLCT) command is inserted into your program. The
programmer can easily set a series of GOTO moves to allow safe indexing to the selected sensor angle
and check for collisions on the selected program path before accepting it and committing it to the part
program.
If the current measurement is of a complex feature and requires more than one sensor to complete the
inspection, you can select other sensors between groups of touch points. Take a group of touch points
on the model then select a sensor and click
. A Select sensor command is inserted before the
group of touch points. Take another group of touch points, select a sensor and click
another Select sensor command before the group of touch points.
again to insert
Click the
(Cancel) button to cancel your selection and close this dialog box. Click the
button to accept your selection and close the dialog box.
Navigation
(OK)
370
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, pick a feature on the model, select the feature
in the Teach Path view, click Auto Probe Search in the Probes section

Angle - enter an angle that is +/- the tolerance for which the probe angle can lie in respect to the
average vector of the selected features.
Sensor Collection - select the sensor collection for a specific sensor, or select 'Any' to let the software
chose from all the available sensors.
Search - click to start the search process.
Available sensors - a green tick at the top of the dialog box indicates that the list of available sensors
has been filtered successfully. The Angular tolerance and Shared tools filters should operate instantly,
but Collision detection may take a few seconds. A red cross indicates that the list of sensors has failed
to pass a particular filter. Either run the search again with different parameters, or select a sensor that
has failed and use with caution. Clicking on a sensor from the list will load the appropriate probe model
in the CAD window. Use the Probe Check toolbar options to check the that orientation of the probe to is
appropriate for the feature, then click the green tick at the top of the dialog to add the selected sensor to
your part program.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Inspecting Features
272
59
Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature

Purpose
Use the Paths options to add scan path elements to a feature, to define the path to take when scanning.
The Path options add PATH and PAMEAS commands to your program, to enable known path
scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS
commands.
Navigation
Either off-line, or on-line with an analogue probe, select Scan from the main toolbar, click a feature
type, select the feature in the Teach Path view, the options in the Paths drop-down list in the Scan
Tools section are available for those features for which scan paths can be specified
See Also:
Scan Option - Inspecting Circles and Arcs
294
302
Scan Option - Inspecting a Plane

371
316
328
Scan Option - Inspecting a Curve 344

Scan Option - Inspecting a Surface
60
Add Scans Option - Inspecting Features

Add Scans Option - Inspecting Features
Purpose
The following information describes circle features but also applies to other features.
Use the Add Scans option when inspecting a circle to automatically add a scan appropriate to the circle.
First, pick the feature from the model. Its nominal values are entered into the Grid window 76 . Select
the feature in the Teach Path view, then click Add Scans in the Scan Tools section. The Scan is
automatically added to the feature.
The circle is then displayed like this.

The inspection path is shown by the
blue band. The edges can be
smoothed by reducing the path
segment length on the Measure
Settings dialog box. This only
changes the display, not the
edges are shown in the next picture.
The black arrow shows the sensor approach direction and distance to the start
of the scan. The length of the arrows reflects the distance for the sensor
approach. You can adjust the appearance of the arrows using the Measure
Display options and the Sensor Approach dialog box. Also displayed is a red
arrow for the sensor retract direction and distance, but this is obscured by the
arrow for the sensor approach. Adjusting the display using the Sensor Retract
dialog box, and manipulating the view in the model window can allow you to
see this arrow.
372
When you select the circle by

clicking its name in the Teach Path
view, it is displayed like this.
You can highlight the scan path in
the Teach Path view, then grab the
ends using the mouse and move
them on the feature, to adjust their
location. (You must not have any
buttons selected in the model
window when you do this.) As you
do this, the path information is
updated in the Teach Path view. For
circle features, the inspection path is
an arc. The start point is indicated
by a black arrow and the ends of the
arc by hoops called 'handle markers'
shown here. You can adjust the
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click a suitable feature in the Features section, pick a circle or
an arc on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Add Scans
See Also:
Teach Path View
94

Model Window
742
743
49

61
60
95
275

373
Purpose
Use the Touch option to specify the number of touches to take on a feature, and the location of the
touches. The touches are added when you click on the feature in the model window.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click a feature type, the Touch option is available on
the toolbar
See Also:
Touch Option - Inspecting a Cylinder
310
322
Touch Option - Inspecting a Round Slot

Touch Option - Inspecting a Square Slot
294
338
342
349
134
Main Toolbar
62

Purpose
Use the Circles Measurement dialog box to set up touch points or scan path elements on the feature.
The version on the left is displayed for touch points, and the version on the right is displayed for scan
paths. When you click
, the touch points or scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view,
and you can manipulate them there or on the model (for details see the appropriate 'Inspecting a feature'
374
topic).
Touch points
When you click
on the toolbar, touch points in the Teach Path view are added to your part program.
Scan path
You can manipulate the scan path as described below. When you have added all the commands you
need to the Teach Path view, click
on the toolbar. PATH and PAMEAS commands (and any other
commands you have added to the Teach Path view) are added to your part program, to enable known
path scanning. You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS
commands.
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Circle or Arc in the Features section, pick the feature on
the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Cylinder Circles from the Tools drop-down
list in the Touch Tools section
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Circle, Cylinder or Arc in the Features section, pick the
feature on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path view, click Cylinder Circles Path from the
Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

are deleted when the touch points or scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view.
Number of arcs - not available for circle or arc features. For cylinder features, the number of bands of
touch points, or the number of scan path elements to add to the cylinder. The arcs are evenly spaced
within the length of the cylinder.
Touches per arc - the number of touch points to add to each arc. The touch points are evenly spaced
around the arc.
box 748 or the System Settings dialog box 101 .
The circle or arc is displayed like

this. The blue band shows the scan
path. The start point is indicated by
a black arrow which shows the
sensor approach direction. The
length of the arrow reflects the
Approach dialog box.
using the pop-up menu options in the
Teach Path view.
of the path and arrow and the
smoothness of the path using the
This view shows that the scan path
arc has been selected and the ends
moved. Handle markers (shown by
the hoops) indicate the start and end
of the arc. You can drag the handle
markers to move the ends of the arc
(you must not have any buttons
you do this). You can adjust the
See Also:
Scan Option (Circles) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Teach Path View
294
94
Sensor Depth Dialog Box

Inspecting a Circle
Inspecting an Arc
305
744
290
296

742
60
789
375
376
63

Purpose
Use the Lines Measurement dialog box to set up touch points or scan path elements on the feature.
The version on the left is displayed for touch points, and the version on the right is displayed for scan
paths. When you click
, the touch points or scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view,
and you can manipulate them there or on the model (for details see the appropriate 'Inspecting a feature'
topic).
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Cylinder, pick the feature on the model, select the feature
in the Teach Path, click Cylinder lines from the Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools section
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Cylinder, pick the feature on the model, select the feature
in the Teach Path, click Cylinder line path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

are deleted when the touch points or scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view.
Number of lines - the number of vertical lines of touch points, or the number of scan path elements to
add to the cylinder. The lines are evenly spaced.
Touches per line - the number of touch points to add to each line. The touch points are evenly spaced
along the line.
box 748 or the System Settings dialog box 101 .
See Also:
Touch Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Scan Option (Lines) - Inspecting a Cylinder
Teach Path View
311
303
94
377
744
Main Toolbar
64
Touch Measurement Dialog Box

Touch Measurement Dialog Box
Purpose
, the
Use the Touch Measurement dialog box to set up touch points on the feature. When you click
touch points are added to the Teach Path view, and you can manipulate them there or on the model (for
details see the appropriate 'Inspecting a feature' topic).
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Round Slot, Square Slot or Sphere, pick the feature on
the model, click Touch

Number of touches - the number of touch points to add to the feature.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
65

378
Purpose
Use the Offset Plane Edge dialog box to set up touch points or scan path elements on the plane. The
options available in the dialog box depend on whether you are setting up touch points or scan path
elements. Type in the offset from the plane edge (you can use a negative number) then click the edge to
which you want the offset to apply. The offset is then displayed on the model (if not, check that Show
lines in render mode is checked on the View tab page 68 , Display Settings dialog box). Click Add. The
offset path is added to the list below the Add button. (You can now right-click on the path to display a
pop-up menu where you can delete the path.)
When you click
, the touch points or scan path elements are added to the Teach Path view, and
you can manipulate them there or on the model (for details see Touch Option - Inspecting a Plane 322 or
Scan Option (Edge Offset) - Inspecting a Plane 321 as appropriate).
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Plane, pick a plane on the model, select the plane in the
Teach Path, click Edge Offset from the Touch Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools section
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Plane, pick a plane on the model, select the plane in the
Teach Path, click Plane Edge Offset Path from the Paths drop-down list in the Scan Tools section

Offset - the distance by which the points or the scan path are offset from the edge of the plane, in the
current units (as given in the System Settings dialog box 101 ).
Number of points - the number of points to take on the scan path. The points are evenly spaced.
Add - click this button to add the points or the scan path to the list below.
66
Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces

The Compare to CAD function allows you to create an additional feature for each touch point, that
obtains its nominal value from the CAD model. This can be useful when inspecting such items as sheet
metal parts, particularly for manual measurements. It constructs a new nominal by finding the nearest
point on the specified CAD geometry to the touch taken. For details of comparing laser scan data to
CAD surfaces, see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 .
When the Compare to CAD function is used, CAMIO searches the model for the nearest point to the
379
touch point, and constructs this point as a nominal point for the touch. CAMIO searches all the model,
unless you limit its search by selecting one or more faces for it to search. You can do this once you
have picked the nominal point, using the Select Geometry 366 option from the toolbar.
You can also use Compare to CAD when generating points with the surface measurement commands
386 , and when constructing points 575 . If the construction fails, the search radius may be too small.
Increase the value in the Search radius field on the Picking tab page 58 of the Display Settings dialog
box and try again. Compare to CAD is also likely to fail if you have not aligned the part. To obtain
meaningful data, you must align the part 620 first.
To use the Compare to CAD function:
1.
Align the part.
2.
Open your CAD model file. If you want to specify a device name, you can open the model file as a
device. For details on how to do this, see Opening a CAD Model File as a Device 225 . This is not
necessary as CAMIO will open the model as a device for you.
3.
From the Features
4.
Pick a nominal point on the model. Select the point in the Teach Path view.
5.
In the Properties window, use the Compare to CAD drop-down list in the Geometric Items section to
select True.
6.
Click Apply.
7.
Before the inspection commands, for a CAD model filename of cadfile.sab, CAMIO adds the
following commands to your part program:
272
section of the Inspect tab, click Point.
DID(current_cad)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\cadfile.sab'
OPEN/DID(current_cad),CAD,VENDOR,'ACIS'
G(current_cad)=GEOM/DID(current_cad)
A point measure block is added to your part program. As well as the usual MEAS commands, the
block contains GEOM commands for the touch point, e.g.
F(PT002_G)=FEAT/GEOM,G(current_cad),CART
CONST/GEOM,F(PT002_G),NEARPT,FA(PT002)
8.
The point PT002_G is constructed as the nearest point on the model.
Note:
Points constructed in this way are identified by the suffix _G.
67
Measure Feature (MEAS/feature,F( ) Command) Dialog

Box
67.1
Measure Feature (MEAS/feature,F( ) Command) Dialog Box

380
Purpose
Use this dialog box to amend the parameters for measuring a feature. This picture shows the dialog box
for a circle feature. For the other features, including point, arc, cylinder, plane, line, cone, edge, slot,
curve, surface and sphere features, the dialog box displayed has the same functions as this one.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Measure feature command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the MEAS/feature command (if viewing your program as program
text)

Label - the unique label for the feature. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Number of points/feature - the number of points to be taken around the feature.
Relative - displays the Relative Measurement dialog box 393 , where you can set up relative
measurement (RMEAS) to account for discrepancies between the nominal and actual feature.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
272
Part Program Window
45
Note:
The dialog boxes for the other feature types are the Measure Point dialog box, the Measure Arc dialog
box, the Measure Cylinder dialog box, the Measure Plane dialog box, the Measure Line dialog box, the
Measure Cone dialog box, the Measure Edge dialog box, the Measure Slot dialog box, the Measure
Curve dialog box, the Measure Surface dialog box, and the Measure Sphere dialog box.
67.2
Measure Feature Dialog Box
67.2.1 Measure Feature Dialog Box

Measure Feature Dialog Box
381
Purpose
If the mode is Manual, the MEAS/feature,F( ) (Measure feature) command 379 opens a Measure Feature
dialog box. This picture shows the dialog box for a point feature. For the other features, the dialog box
displayed has the same function as this one, and is used to measure the selected feature in Manual
mode using the handbox. When taking more than one point on a feature, to maximise accuracy you
should take the points as far apart as possible.
Navigation
With the CMM on-line, in Manual mode, run the MEAS/feature,F( ) command
With the CMM on-line, in Manual mode, take touch points on a feature and click
Displayed when any of the Set options is clicked
The following information is displayed:

Points taken - the total number of points taken in the current sequence.
The following features can be measured manually using a touch probe:
Circle
Arc
Line
Cylinder
382
Sphere
382
Point
383
Slot (square)
Surface
385
384
Cone
382
Plane
383
382
383
Slot (round)
384
Slot (open)
384
Edge point
385
384
Parallel planes
385
Use this to delete the last operation or point taken.
Select this when you have taken the required number of points.
See Also:
Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box 444
Set Nominal Feature
40
(Apply)
382
67.2.2 Taking Points to Measure a Circle

Taking Points to Measure a Circle
Take a minimum of three points in order to calculate the diameter and centre of the circle.
67.2.3 Taking Points to Measure a Cylinder

Taking Points to Measure a Cylinder
Take a minimum of six points in order to calculate the diameter and attitude (and position if bounded) of
the cylinder. The points should be taken in bands of three or more points: a minimum of two bands with
three points in each.
67.2.4 Taking Points to Measure a Cone

Taking Points to Measure a Cone
Take a minimum of six points to calculate cone inclination, vertex position and included angle. The
points should be taken in bands of three or more points: a minimum of two bands with three points in
each.
67.2.5 Taking Points to Measure an Arc

Taking Points to Measure an Arc
383
Take a minimum of three points to calculate the radius and centre of the arc.
67.2.6 Taking Points to Measure a Sphere

Taking Points to Measure a Sphere
Take a minimum of four points in order to calculate the diameter and centre of the sphere. One point
must be taken on top of the sphere while the remainder should be taken equidistant around its equator.
67.2.7 Taking Points to Measure a Plane

Taking Points to Measure a Plane
Take a minimum of three points to calculate the direction of the plane.
67.2.8 Taking Points to Measure a Line

Taking Points to Measure a Line
Take a minimum of two points to calculate the attitude of the line.
384
67.2.9 Taking Points to Measure a Point

Taking Points to Measure a Point
Take one point to determine the position.
67.2.10 Taking Points to Measure a Round Slot

Taking Points to Measure a Round Slot
Take a minimum of six points in order to calculate the length, width, centre and attitude of the slot. A
minimum of three points must be taken in the radius at each end of the slot.
67.2.11 Taking Points to Measure a Square Slot

Taking Points to Measure a Square Slot
Take a minimum of five points in order to calculate the length, width, centre and attitude of the slot. The
points must be taken with at least one on each of three sides and at least two on the remaining side.
67.2.12 Taking Points to Measure an Open Slot

Taking Points to Measure an Open Slot
385
Take a minimum of four points in order to calculate the width and attitude of the slot. The points must
be taken with a minimum of two on each side of the slot.
67.2.13 Taking Points to Measure Parallel Planes

Taking Points to Measure Parallel Planes
Take a minimum of four points in order to calculate the attitude of the planes. The points should be
taken with a minimum of three on one plane and one on the other.
67.2.14 Taking Points to Measure a Surface (GSURF)

Taking Points to Measure a Surface (GSURF)
Take a minimum of three points on the surface.

A surface can be measured in manual mode, but a surface profile tolerance (TOL/PROFS) cannot be
applied because there is no nominal data for comparison. If a surface is scanned in manual mode, there
is too much nominal data for comparison.
67.2.15 Taking Points to Measure an Edge Point

Taking Points to Measure an Edge Point
386
Take one point, approaching along the edge normal, to determine the position of the edge feature.
67.3
Surface Measurement
67.3.1 Surface Measurement

Surface Measurement
Purpose
The surface measurement commands (from the Feature Tools and Tools drop-down lists) allow you to
generate points and define the measurement path when inspecting surface, plane, and curve features as
well as for multiple point and multiple edge inspections. You can use a combination of the surface
measurement options to create touches, point features and moves to add to your part program (for
details of adding touches, point features and moves with these options, see Surface Measurement Adding Points to the Model 387 ). You can also use these options with the Compare to CAD function to
generate touch points on CAD surfaces (for details, see Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378 ).
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Surface, Plane or Curve from the Features section, pick
the feature on the CAD model to define the nominal feature, select the feature in the Teach Path
view, select the appropriate option from the Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools section
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, select the
appropriate option from the Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section
The following options are available (not all of these options are available for each feature type):
From the Tools drop-down list
Section Touches
a curve.
Planar Curve
curve.
Grid Touches
390
- allows touch points, point features or edge points to be generated by dividing
- allows touch points, point features or edge points to be generated by dividing a
390
388
- allows touch points or point features to be generated from grid nodes.
From the Feature Tools drop-down list

Points on a Section Curve
dividing a curve.
390
- allows touch points, point features or edge points to be generated by
Points on a Planar Curve 390 - allows touch points, point features or edge points to be generated by
dividing a curve.
Edge Points on a Curve
dividing a curve.
Points on a Grid
Points in a Box
the model.
388
283
390
- allows touch points, point features or edge points to be generated by
- allows touch points or point features to be generated from grid nodes.

- allows touch points or point features to be generated from a selected area on
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Laser Surface Measurement
387
67.3.2 Surface Measurement - Adding Points to the Model

Surface Measurement - Adding Points to the Model
The Surface Measurement commands 386 allow you to create points on your CAD model (or in the model
window), to define the measurement path when inspecting certain feature types. There are various ways
of creating the points, and you can use a combination of the different ways.
The Grid options 388 allow you to generate a grid over the model, so you can build touch points or
point features on the model from the grid nodes (i.e. the intersections of the grid lines).
The Curve options 390 allow you to pick a curve on the model, so you can build touch points, point
features and edge points on the model from the curve divisions.
You can import points from a .pts file, to add to your model (see File Types
36
).
These options and the other toolbar options add touch points, point features, moves and commands to
, the points, moves and commands are added to your
the Teach Path view 94 . When you click
program. For Surface Measurement using a Laser scanner see the Laser Surface section 831 .
Accessing the surface measurement commands
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click Surface, Plane or Curve, pick the surface on the CAD model
to define the nominal feature, in the Touch Tools section select Section Touches, Planar Curve or Grid
touches from the Tools drop-down list (only options suitable for the feature type will be available).
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Points on a Section
Curve, Points on a Planar Curve, Edge Points on a Curve, Points on a Grid or Points in a Box from the
Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section.
Selecting a face on the model
When you have selected a feature to inspect on the model, you can use the Select Geometry
from the toolbar to add more faces to your selection.
366
button
Adding points from a curve

When inspecting surface, plane or curve features, you have the option to generate features or touch
points along a curve. Select the required Curve measurement option and pick a curve on the model.
Use the Curve options to manipulate the curve, e.g. adjust the start and end points, and the density of
points along the curve, and then build the points from the curve divisions. If the points are not as you
require, use the Clear option to remove them before changing the curve again. Once you have built the
points, you can delete individual points from the curve (you may need to use the Explode option from the
pop-up menu in the Teach Path view).
Adding another curve to the model
If you want to retain a curve you have added, and add another one to the model, first build the points on
your curve. Click
then select a Curve option again. Then pick a curve on another selected face.
You can then build additional points on this curve too. As you do this, you will see the points added to
your CAD model and to the Teach Path view, and can clear them, move them and rebuild them as you
wish.
Adding points from a grid
When inspecting plane or surface features, or multiple point features, you have the option to generate
features or touch points from a grid. Select the required Grid measurement option and pick a face on
the model. A grid is generated over the selected face. The grid lies in a plane of the current datum
which is closest to the feature nominal direction. Use the Grid options to manipulate the grid, e.g.
resize, rotate, and then build the points from the grid nodes. If the points are not as you require, use the
Clear option to remove them before changing the grid again. Once you have built the points, you can
delete individual points from the grid (you may need to use the Explode option from the pop-up menu in
the Teach Path view).
Adding points from a .pts file
When inspecting point features, you can add points from a .pts file to the model window. Select open
388
file in the Planning window. In the Open dialog box, browse for the .pts file. The points are added to the
model and the Planning window. Click a point in the list to highlight it in the model window. Select the
required points in the Planning window and drag them into the Teach Path view.
Adding the points and moves to your program
To add the points, moves and other commands shown in the Teach Path view to your program, click
.
See Also:
Model Window
49
67.3.3 Surface Measurement - Grid Options

Surface Measurement - Grid Options
Purpose
When inspecting plane or surface features, you can use the
Grid options to generate features or touch points from a grid
over the CAD model. The points are generated from the grid
nodes (i.e. the intersections of the grid lines).
For a Laser scan, select New in the Inspect section of the
Laser tab. Click Select Geometry 366 in the Surface section.
Pick the nominal feature on the model. You can add more
faces to be covered by the grid using CTRL+click in the
model window. When you have selected the faces to be
covered by the grid, click Grid in the Surface section.
For other probes, select New in the Inspect section of the
Inspect or Scan tab. Click Select Geometry 366 in the Touch
Tools sections. Pick the nominal feature on the model. You
can add more faces to be covered by the grid using CTRL
+click in the model window. When you have selected the
faces to be covered by the grid, click Points on a Grid from
the Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section.
The Grid options are displayed and a grid is generated over
the selected faces. The grid is generated in a plane of the
current datum which is closest to the nominal direction of the
selected feature.
Manipulate the grid to the location and size you require.
When you drag a corner node with the mouse, the grid
resizes accordingly. To pick the grid up and move it,
position the mouse cursor over the node in the centre of the
grid. You can also rotate the grid by positioning the mouse
cursor over a node on an edge of the grid and using the
mouse to rotate the grid. The grid is rotated around its
central point, in the plane in which the grid is displayed.
Click Build to build the points from the grid nodes. Point
features are generated for multi-point inspection, and touch
points for plane or surface inspection. If the points are not
as you require, use the Clear option to remove them before
changing the grid again. Click
(Apply) when you are
happy with the grid. You can add more points using another
389
grid, or the other commands for the feature type. For details,
see Surface Measurement - Adding Points to the Model 387 .
As you add points and moves, you can see what you have
added in the Teach Path view.
When you now click
again, a measure block (MEAS...
ENDMES block) is added to your part program for the
feature, containing touch (PTMEAS) points for surface and
plane features, point (FEAT/POINT) features for multi-point
inspection, or scan path (PAMEAS) commands for laser
scans, and any other commands you have added to the
Teach Path view (such as Move commands). The feature
can then be inspected using the generated points.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Points
on a Grid from the Feature Tools drop-down list in the Features section
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click surface or plane in the Feature section, pick the feature
on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path, click Grid Touches from the Tools drop-down list
in the Touch Tools section
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Grid in the Surface section

Try - updates the grid with any changes you've made to the spacing, direction and start.
Apply - closes the dialog, keeping any changes you've made.
Cancel - closes the dialog, discarding any changes you've made.
Clear - when clicked, removes the points generated by the Build option from the grid and from the Teach
Path view.
Build - when clicked, generates points by projecting the points defined by the grid nodes onto the
selected features.
Flip - when clicked, reverses the directions of the V parameters so that V is in the previous -V direction.
This reverses the direction of the points when they are built, and so determines the approach direction of
the probe.
Reverse - when clicked, reverses the direction of the grid so that the U direction becomes the V
direction and vice versa. The U and V directions are shown by labelled arrows on the grid, and
determine the order in which the points are built. The points are generated in the U direction first, then
the V direction, i.e. U1V1, U2V1, U3V1, UnV1....U1V2, etc.
Fit to Datum Plane - fits the grid to the plane of the current datum which is closest to the current
direction of the grid. It also sizes the grid so that it covers the selected geometry. For example, if you
set the plane direction then click Fit to Datum Plane, the grid aligns with the new closest datum plane
and resizes to cover the selected surfaces.
Spacing
Number of increments - if selected, the values in the U and V fields define the number of
increments in the grid in each direction. A value of, for example, 3.5, would result in three
increments of the same size and one half-sized increment.
Spacing - if selected, the values in the U and V fields define the spacing between the lines in the
grid in each direction (in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ).
390
U - if Number of increments is selected, this value is the number of increments in the grid in the U
direction. If Spacing is selected, this value is the space between the lines in the grid in the U
direction.
V - if Number of increments is selected, this value is the number of increments in the grid in the V
direction. If Spacing is selected, this value is the space between the lines in the grid in the V
direction.
Direction
X, Y, Z, -X, -Y, -Z - the plane that the grid lies in.
Other - select this to specify and use a plane that is not one of the datum planes. Type the plane
direction in the I, J, K fields.
I, J, K - the i, j, k direction vectors of the plane, relative to the current datum. These are normalised
when you click Build.
Start
X - the X start location of the grid, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box
101 ).
Y - the Y start location of the grid, in the current units.
Z - the Z start location of the grid, in the current units.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Surface Measurement Commands
386
Move Commands
67.3.4 Surface Measurement - Curve Options

Surface Measurement - Curve Options
391
Purpose
When inspecting certain features, and depending on the
server type, you can use the Curve options to generate
On the Inspect, Scan or Laser toolbar, click New in the
Inspect section and select Points on a Section Curve,
Points on a Planar Curve or Edge points on a Curve. The
Points on a Curve dialog is displayed. Pick a curve on
the selected face on the model.
From the Inspect toolbar, click Plane, Surface or Curve in
the Features section. Pick the nominal feature on the
model and select it in the Teach Path view. Select
Section Touches or Planar Curve from the Tools dropdown list in the Touch Tools section (not all options are
available for all the feature types). The Points on a Curve
dialog is displayed. Pick a curve on the selected face on
the model.
If you have used Points on a Planar Curve or Planar Curve
, the points are generated perpendicular to the plane of
the curve. If you have selected Points on a Section Curve
or Section Touches, the points are generated in the plane
of the curve selected.
Manipulate the curve, e.g. to adjust the start and end
points, and the density of points along the curve. When
you drag the ends of the curve, the points on it move
correspondingly. Build the points from the curve divisions
(if the points do not build, it may be that you have picked
an edge rather than a face). If the points are not as you
require, use the Clear option to remove them before
(Apply) when you
changing the curve again. Click
are happy with the curve. You can add more curves and
points using the other commands for the feature type.
For details, see Surface Measurement - Adding Touch
Points 387 . As you add points and moves, you can see
what you have added in the Teach Path view.
When you now click

again, a measure block (MEAS...ENDMES block) is added to your part
program for the feature. Depending on the feature type, the measure block contains either a touch point
(PTMEAS point) for each generated point, or a PATH/CURVE command. The measure block also
contains any other commands you have added to the Teach Path view (such as Move commands). The
feature can then be inspected using the generated points.
For GCURVE construction, a FEAT/GCURVE command is added to your part program. For details of
this construction, see Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF and a Plane 593 .
Navigation
Select Inspect from the main toolbar, click surface, plane or curve in the Features section, pick the
feature on the model, select the feature in the Teach Path, click Section Touches or Planar Curve
from the Tools drop-down list in the Touch Tools section
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Points
on a Section Curve or Points on a Planar Curve from the Feature Tools drop-down list in the
Features section
392
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click surface or curve in the Feature section, pick the feature on
the model, select the feature in the Teach Path, click Curve Path from the Paths drop-down list in
the Scan Tools section
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click New in the Inspect section, click Curve from the Feature
Tools drop-down list in the Features section

Try - updates the curve with any changes you've made to the spacing and inset value.
Apply - closes the dialog, keeping any changes you've made.
Cancel - closes the dialog, discarding any changes you've made.
Clear - when clicked, removes the points generated by the Build option from the curve and from the
Teach Path view.
Build - when clicked, generates points along the curve. If the points are not generated, it may be that
you have not picked a face. Try setting an inset value to move the curve slightly, and build it again.
Arrowheads on the inspection path indicate the direction of the inspection.
Reverse normal - when clicked, reverses the normal of the points on the curve.
Reverse - when clicked, reverses the direction of the points on the curve.
Flip Directions Spacing
Arc length - if selected, the spacing of points and the start and end locations of the curve are
measured in distance along the arc. The spacing will have equal arc distance between points.
Vector length - if selected, the spacing of points and the start and end locations of the curve are
measured in distance along the vector selected from the current datum. The points are spaced
along the curve so that there is equal distance between them along the vector (this means they may
not be equally spaced along the curve).
Vector X, Y, Z - if Vector length is selected, choose the axis from the current datum along which
the points are to be spaced.
Spacing - select Divisions to specify the number of increments along the curve. A value of, for
example, 3.5, would result in three increments of the same size and one half-sized increment.
Select Spacing to specify the spacing between the points along the curve (in the current units as
shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ).
Limits - check the Use range test box to specify a range of the curve to use, and specify its start
and end offset. This adjusts the start and end positions of the curve for vector length curves (the
start and end positions are not absolutely defined for arc length curves).
Inset - type in a positive or negative value by which to move the curve along the plane axis of the curve.
This value uses the current units from the System Settings dialog box 101 .
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Surface Measurement Commands

Move Commands
386
765
Laser Surface Commands
67.4
393
Relative Measurement Dialog Box
67.4.1 Relative Measurement Dialog Box

Relative Measurement Dialog Box
Relative measurement (RMEAS) is useful when measuring sheet metal parts where the deviation in
position along the feature axis may be greater than the material thickness. In this case you would
probably use the Sample surface option on the Relative Measurement dialog box, to define a nominal
target surface.
Relative measurement is also useful where the positions of two features are linked, i.e. where if one
feature is in error positionally, you expect the second to be in error by a similar amount. In this case
you would use the Feature actual option to adjust the position of the nominal measurement target,
based on the position and orientation of the first feature actual.
Once you have selected relative measurement for a feature type, it remains selected until you switch it
off by selecting the None (absolute) option on the appropriate Relative Measurement dialog box. The
relative measurement parameters are displayed at the top of the Teach Path view 94 .
The Relative Measurement dialog box presents different options depending on the feature being
measured. For supported features, a Search for Feature 399 function is also provided. The following
options are available:
Relative Measurement - for point features 393 .
Relative Measurement - for circle, slot and arc features 394 , and for cylinder features if the DMIS version
is set to 3.0 or command extensions are selected on the Conformance tab page 128 in the Configuration
dialog box.
Relative Measurement - for plane and line features 396 .
Relative Measurement - for cone, sphere and surface features 397 , and for cylinder features if the DMIS
version is set to 0.40 or higher and command extensions are not selected on the Conformance tab page
in the Configuration dialog box.
Relative Measurement - for edge features.
67.4.2 Relative Measurement (Point)

Relative Measurement (Point)
394
Purpose
Use the Relative Measurement dialog box to specify the parameters for performing relative measurement
of a feature. The relative measurement (RMEAS) command accounts for discrepancies between the
nominal and actual feature.
off by selecting the None (absolute) option.
Note:
This version of the Relative Measurement dialog box is displayed when inspecting point features.
Navigation
Click Relative on the Measure Feature (MEAS/feature,F( ) command) dialog box

Relative
None (absolute) - select this if no relative measurement is required. This allows you to change a
Relative measure (RMEAS) command to a Measure (MEAS) command in your part program.
Feature actual - select this to adjust the position of the nominal measurement target, based on the
position and orientation of a chosen feature. The nominal target position is projected onto the plane
of the actual reference feature, and the nominal target orientation is set to the direction of the
reference feature. Select the required feature from the Label list. Choose the approach direction for
the measurement from the options in the Approach box.
Sample surface - select this to take a specified number of points at a specified distance outside a
target area. This will be used to define a nominal target surface. The Radius and Number of points
fields are active for entering the appropriate data.
Axis - select this to approach the measurement down an axis. Select the axis from the options in
the Approach box.
Approach - the direction of approach to taking points. This overrides the existing definition of the
nominal surface for the feature. Selecting 'Feature nominal' results in the approach direction being
determined from the feature. The surface normal is used, i.e. the nominal vector of the point.
Radius - the distance outside a target area at which relative measurement points are taken.
Number of points - the number of points to be taken around the feature.
See Also:
Relative Measurement Dialog Box 393
Inspecting Features
272
379
Main Toolbar
67.4.3 Relative Measurement (Circle, Slot, Cylinder)

Relative Measurement (Circle, Slot, Cylinder)
395
Purpose
Note:
This version of the Relative Measurement dialog box is displayed when inspecting circle, slot and arc
features, and cylinder features if the DMIS version is set to 3.0 or command extensions are selected on
the Conformance tab page 128 in the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation

Relative
reference feature. Select the required feature from the Label list.
396
Search for feature is available for circles and slots - see Search for feature
Max.search radius - see Search for feature
399
399
topic.
topic.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
272
379
Main Toolbar
67.4.4 Relative Measurement (Plane, Line)

Profile Line Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Profile Line Tolerance dialog box to specify a profile of a line tolerance (TOL/PROFL) and assign
it to a label.
This is a profile tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
the Configuration dialog box. If you have selected Use advanced library as the method of calculation,
CAMIO performs a functional best fit of the data taking into account datum constraints and material
conditions (where supported). If you do not specify any datums, there are no constraints on the fit
applied. If you have not selected Use advanced library, CAMIO evaluates the tolerance in the current
datum.
For curve (GCURVE) features, the output from this tolerance includes the deviation at each point.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Profile of a line in the Output section

Label - the unique tolerance label. You can select any label available in this list, or type in a new one.
Data relating to an existing label is displayed in the dialog box.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the profile.
397
Datum feature 1/2/3 - select datums to use as references from the drop-down lists.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
67.4.5 Relative Measurement (Arc, Cone, Sphere, Surface, Cylinder)

Relative Measurement (Arc, Cone, Sphere, Surface, Cylinder)
Purpose
Note:
This version of the Relative Measurement dialog box is displayed when inspecting cone, sphere and
surface features, and cylinder features if the DMIS version is set to 0.40 or higher and command
extensions are not selected on the Conformance tab page 128 in the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation

Relative
398
Search for feature is only available for circles, edges, round and square slots.
Max. search radius is only for use with Search for Feature
399
See Also:
Inspecting Features
272
379
Main Toolbar
67.4.6 Relative Measurement (Edge)

Relative Measurement (Edge)
Purpose
This version of the Relative Measurement dialog box is displayed when inspecting edge features.
Navigation
399

Relative
Approach - the direction of approach to taking points. This overrides the existing definition of the
nominal surface for the feature. Selecting 'Feature nominal' results in the approach direction being
determined from the feature. The surface normal is used, i.e. the nominal vector of the point.
Edge approach - the plane in which the sensor approaches the edge when taking points. Selecting
'Feature nominal' results in the approach direction being determined from the edge normal.
Search for feature - see Search for feature
399
topic.
Max.search radius - see Search for feature
399
topic.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
272
379
Main Toolbar
67.4.7 Search for feature

Search for feature
This function provides the ability to specify a canned search routine for use with the RMEAS command.
It can only be used in AUTO mode, and only the following feature types are supported:
Circles (inside).
Rectangles (inside).
Slots with rounded ends (inside).
Edges of the sheet metal.
This functionality also allows the definition of a search radius above the standard laser search radius, so
where a hole or slot is out of position by more than its diameter, then the software will automatically
search the point cloud to locate the feature. The laser search is activated using the same user interface
as touch-trigger probes and produces the same DMIS syntax to maintain multi sensor interoperability.
Two different search cycles are provided, one for edges and another for the other feature types. In all
400
cases, the following must be specified:

Check Enable command extensions in the conformance page of the program configuration dialog Conformance - Configuration Dialog Box 128 .
Check Stop on failed feature search in the miscellaneous page of the program configuration dialog
IF the program is required to stop when it fails to locate a feature -Miscellaneous - Configuration
Dialog Box 120 .
Declare the RMEAS command to include a canned search by checking the Search for feature box
in the RMEAS user interface. Example below - also see Relative Measurement Dialog Box 393 .
Maximum search radius in the text box in the RMEAS user interface.
The parameters normally associated with an RMEAS sample surface or Feature Actual in the
RMEAS user interface.
The speed at which the search touch points are taken by setting SRCHVLT in the machine
configuration file - Variables tab of the CMM Driver Configuration dialog:
(this link opens the CMM Driver Help file. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the CMM Driver
Help.)
Under and over-travel distances to use for the search (set APPRCH, SEARCH in the DMIS
program: Sensor Approach Dialog Box 742 , Sensor Search Dialog Box 746 .
Depth below the surface plane at which the final inspection of the feature is carried out (set DEPTH
in the DMIS program - Sensor Depth Dialog Box 744 )
Clearance distance. This is used to position the probe above the surface, and is also used as the
step size when searching for an edge. (set CLRSRF in the DMIS program - Sensor Clearance Dialog
Box 745 ).
This function will insert the following line in your DMIS program:
RMEAS/var_1, F(label1), n, var_2, SEARCH, m
Where:
var_1 can be: CIRCLE, RECTANGLE, SLOT or EDGE.
F(label 1) is the label name of the previously defined feature nominal to be measured.
n is the number of points to be taken in the measurement of the circle.
var_2 can be: FA(label2) or VECBLD, r, n1 exactly as in the existing RMEAS command.
SEARCH is an optional command word to specify that a canned search routine is required.
m is maximum search radius.
A check box entitled "Search for feature" has been added to the RMEAS dialogs as shown below. When
this check box is ticked, the 'Max search radius' text box is enabled, otherwise it is grayed out. Both the
check box and the text box will be grayed out when either the None (absolute) radio button is selected
or 'Enable command extensions' is NOT checked in the program configuration dialog.
401
Pressing the 'OK' button will display a new line in the grid showing details of all the RMEAS parameters,
including the search parameters. This format of this line will reflect the RMEAS parameters selected.
Search for Feature can also be switched on or off using the Measurement mode section of theProperties
window 90 .
Stop on failed feature search - this is enabled on the Configure dialog Miscellaneous
120
tab. If the
402
feature is out of position, a touch is returned. In this case, after retracting from the surface, the probe will
vector to a position which is the maximum search radius (as specified in the RMEAS dialogue) in the
nominal direction of the edge, and APPROACH above the nominal surface. The probe will then repeat
the attempted touch. If a touch is again returned, either: (i) If Stop on failed feature search is checked,
an error message will be displayed, or (ii) if Stop on failed feature search is unchecked, Does not exist
will be reported in any output that is generated. If the second attempt at a touch fails, the cycle moves
into the Locate routine.
67.5
Set Nominal Feature
67.5.1 Set Nominal Feature

Set Nominal Feature
Use the Set Nominal Feature option to set the nominal values of certain features, by taking touches to
establish the size, position, orientation, etc. of the feature. The Grid window and Properties window are
updated with the new nominal values.
Set Nominal Feature is only available on-line, as you are setting the nominals for the feature by taking
measurements from the part.
Navigation
After customising the toolbars and with the CMM on-line, click an appropriate feature type, click Set
Plane, Set Position or Set Orientation
Set Nominal Feature is available for the following features:

Point
402
Circle
Arc
Line
403
404
404
Edge
405
Round slot
Square slot
Curve
405
406
407
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.2 Set Nominal Feature - Point

Set Nominal Feature - Point
Purpose
Use the Set Plane and Set Position options to define the plane that the point lies in, and the position of
the point. The plane gives you a nominal direction (i,j,k) for the point, a nominal centre (x,y,z) and the
position of the plane that the feature lies in. The position gives you a nominal centre (x,y,z). If you want
to define a nominal centre for your point, you must set the plane first.
403
To define the plane, click Set Plane. You are prompted to take points to define the plane. When you
have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either measure the point, or
you can click Set Position to set the nominal position of the point.
The Grid window and Properties window are updated with the new nominal values.
Navigation
After customising the toolbars and with the CMM on-line, select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the
main toolbar, click Point in the Features section, click Set Plane or Set Position

Set Plane - take three or more points to define a plane. This gives you a nominal direction (i,j,k) for the
point.
Set Position - take one point to define the centre co-ordinate, i.e. the touch co-ordinate becomes the
point centre.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.3 Set Nominal Feature - Circle

Set Nominal Feature - Circle
Purpose
Use the Set Plane and Set Position options to define the plane the circle lies in and the centre of the
circle. The plane gives you a nominal direction (i,j,k) for the circle, a nominal centre (x,y,z) and the
position of the plane that the feature lies in. The position gives you a nominal centre (x,y,z) and
diameter. If you want to define a nominal centre for your circle, you must first define the plane.
have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either measure the circle,
or you can click Set Position to set the centre of the circle.
Navigation
main toolbar, click Circle in the Features section, click Set Plane or Set Position

Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the circle to define the plane that the circle
lies in.
Set Position - take three or more points to define the centre of the circle.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
404
67.5.4 Set Nominal Feature - Arc

Set Nominal Feature - Arc
Purpose
Use the Set Plane and Set Position options to define the plane the arc lies in, and calculate the centre
of the arc. The plane gives you a nominal direction (i,j,k) for the arc and a nominal position of the plane
that the feature lies in. The position gives you a nominal centre (x,y,z). If you want to define a nominal
centre for your arc, you must first define the plane.
have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either measure the arc, or
you can click Set Position to set the centre of the arc.
Navigation
After customising the toolbars and with the CMM on-line, select Inspect or Scan from the main
toolbar, click Arc in the Features section, click Set Plane or Set Position

Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the feature to define the plane that the arc
lies in.
Set Position - take three or more points to define the centre of the arc. Take one point at each end of
the arc and one about halfway between these two.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.5 Set Nominal Feature - Line

Set Nominal Feature - Line
Purpose
Use the Set Nominal Feature option to define the normal and the direction of the line. The normal gives
you a nominal normal (i,j,k) for the line, and the direction gives you a nominal direction (i,j,k). If you want
to define a nominal direction for your line, you must first define the normal.
To define the normal, click Set Normal. You are prompted to take points to define the plane that the line
lies in. When you have taken the points, click Done in the Set Normal dialog box. Now you can either
measure the line, or you can click Set again to set the direction of the line.
Navigation
toolbar, click Line in the Features section, click Set Plane or Set Orientation
405

Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the line to define the plane that the line
lies in. This gives the nominal normal vector of the line.
Set Orientation - take three or more points on the line to define its nominal direction.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.6 Set Nominal Feature - Edge

Set Nominal Feature - Edge
Purpose
Use the Set Orientation, Set Plane, and Set Position options to define the orientation of the edge. You
must define these nominal values in the correct order: orientation (edge normal), plane (surface normal),
position.
To define the normal, click Set Orientation. You are prompted to take points to define the normal of the
edge. When you have taken the points, click Done in the Set Orientation dialog box. Now you can
either measure the edge, or you can click Set Plane to set the plane that the edge lies in. If you set the
plane, take points to define the plane, then click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either
measure the edge, or you can click Set Position to set the position of the edge.
Navigation
toolbar, click Edge in the Features section, click Set Orientation, Set Plane or Set Position

Set Orientation - take one point to define the normal of the edge.
Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the feature to define the surface normal of
the edge point.
Set Position - take one point to calculate a point on the edge.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.7 Set Nominal Feature - Round Slot

Set Nominal Feature - Round Slot
Purpose
406
Use the Set Plane, Set Orientation and Set Position options to define the plane that the slot lies in, the
orientation of the slot and its centre co-ordinates, and to calculate the length and width of the round-end
slot. You must define these nominal values in the correct order: plane, orientation, position.
To define the plane, click Set Plane. You are prompted to take points to define the plane that the slot
lies in. When you have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either
measure the slot, or you can click Set Orientation to set the orientation of the slot. If you set the
orientation, take points to define the slot orientation, then click Done in the Set Orientation dialog box.
Now you can either measure the slot, or you can click Set Position to set the centre of the slot.
Navigation
main toolbar, click Round Slot in the Features section, click Set Plane, Set Orientation or Set
Position

Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the slot to define the plane that the slot
lies in.
Set Orientation - take two or more points on one side of the slot to define its orientation in relation to
the current axis system.
Set Position - take three or more points in the radius at each end of the slot. These are used to
calculate slot length and width.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.8 Set Nominal Feature - Square Slot

Set Nominal Feature - Square Slot
Purpose
Use the Set Plane, Set Orientation and Set Position options to define the plane that the slot lies in, the
orientation of the slot and its centre co-ordinates, and to calculate the length and width of the square-end
slot. You must define these nominal values in the correct order: plane, orientation, position.
To define the plane, click Set Plane. You are prompted to take points to define the plane that the slot
lies in. When you have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can either
measure the slot, or you can click Set Orientation to set the orientation of the slot. If you set the
orientation, take points to define the slot orientation, then click Done in the Set Orientation dialog box.
Now you can either measure the slot, or you can click Set Position to set the centre of the slot.
Navigation
main toolbar, click Square Slot in the Features section, click Set Plane, Set Orientation or Set
Position
407

Set Plane - take three or more points in the area adjacent to the slot to define the plane that the slot
lies in.
Set Orientation - take two or more points on one side of the slot to define its orientation in relation to
the current axis system.
Set Position - take a minimum of five points in the slot in the following order - two points on one side of
the slot and one on each of the remaining three sides. These are used to calculate the length of the slot
and its width.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
67.5.9 Set Nominal Feature - Curve

Set Nominal Feature - Curve
Purpose
Use the Set Plane option to define the plane that the curve lies in.
To define the plane that the curve lies in, click Set Plane. You are prompted to take points to define the
plane. When you have taken the points, click Done in the Set Plane dialog box. Now you can measure
the curve.
Navigation
toolbar, click Curve in the Features section, click Set Plane

Set Plane - take three or more points on the curve to define the plane it lies in.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
Grid Window
135
76
68
Save Feature Dialog Box

Save Feature Dialog Box
408
Purpose
Use the Save Feature dialog box to save features either to the inspection database or to a file. They are
then available for use by any other CAMIO part program. You can save the feature displayed in the
Label field by clicking OK, or you can save multiple features by adding them to the list below the Label
field before clicking OK. For each feature saved, a Save feature line (SAVE/FA( ) command) is added to
your part program. To save features to a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.
e. a file of features) in the Device drop-down list. Otherwise, the features are saved to the inspection
database.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Save from the Feature Tools drop-down
list in the Features section

Add - adds the feature shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of features.
Delete - deletes the features selected in the adjacent list. This only removes them from the list, not
from the inspection database.
Device box - if checked, the selected features are saved to the storage device (i.e. a file of features)
specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of features). You must have created the file
as a device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command, then opened it with the Open Device
941 command. If you specify a device here, the features are saved to the file instead of being saved to
the inspection database.
See Also:
Inspecting Features
42
272
Main Toolbar
Recall Feature Dialog Box
69
409

Purpose
Use the Recall Feature dialog box to recall saved features either from the inspection database or from a
file. You must have saved the features first using the Save Feature dialog box. You can recall the
feature displayed in the Label field by clicking OK, or you can recall multiple features by adding them to
the list below the Label field before clicking OK. For each feature recalled, a Recall feature line
(RECALL/FA( ) command) is added to your part program. To recall features from a file, check the
Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of features) in the Device drop-down list. From
the Label field, select the features you wish to recall from the device.
If a feature recalled from a file is already present in the inspection database, the inspection database
instance will always be overwritten by the feature from the file, no matter what the date or time of the file.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Recall Feature from the Feature Tools
drop-down list in the Features section

Label - the unique label for the feature. Select a label from the drop-down list.
Add - adds the features shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of features.
Device box - if checked, the selected features are recalled from the storage device (i.e. a file of
features) specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of features). You must have opened it with
the Open Device 941 command.
See Also:
Save Feature Dialog Box 407
42
410
Inspecting Features
272
Main Toolbar
70
Delete Feature Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Delete Feature dialog box to delete saved features either from the inspection database or from a
file. The features will no longer be available to other part programs. You must have saved the features
first using the Save Feature dialog box. You can delete the feature displayed in the Label field by
clicking OK, or you can delete multiple features by adding them to the list below the Label field before
clicking OK. For each feature deleted, a Delete feature line (DELETE/FA( ) command) is added to your
part program.
To delete the features from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of
features) in the Device drop-down list. From the Label field, select the features you wish to delete from
the device.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Delete from the Feature Tools drop-down
list in the Features section

Add - adds the feature shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of features.
Device box - if checked, the selected features are deleted from the storage device (i.e. a file of features)
specified in the Device drop-down list. You must have opened the storage device using the Open Device
941 command.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of features). There will only be storage
devices listed here if you have previously saved feature data to a storage device. This is a file created as
a device using the Input/Output Device
940
411
advanced command.
See Also:
Save Feature Dialog Box 407
Inspecting Features
42
272
Main Toolbar
71
End of Measurement Dialog Box

End of Measurement Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the End of Measurement dialog box to end a measurement or calibration sequence. If you have not
taken enough points, you will be prompted to take more. If sufficient points have been taken, the feature
will be evaluated.
You can insert the ENDMES command using the Insert Command dialog box
201
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the End measure command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the ENDMES command (if viewing your program as program text)
See Also:
Part Program Window
72
Feature Tolerancing
72.1
Feature Tolerancing
Feature Tolerancing
You can apply tolerances to features either when inspecting or constructing the features, or after you
have run the inspection or construction.
Use the Tolerance commands to define the tolerances you wish to apply. You can define the tolerances
at the start of your inspection, or you can define them during the inspection process. For some
inspections tolerances are added automatically by CAMIO. Otherwise, any required tolerances must be
defined in the part program.
Tolerances are calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of the
To apply tolerances when inspecting or constructing a feature:
1.
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, then click the feature type you wish
412
to inspect or construct.
2.
Add the tolerances in the Grid window (see Using the Grid
78
) or the Properties window (seeUsing
the Properties Window 91 ). When you click

(Apply), the tolerances are evaluated. Data may
be output (see Outputting Vendor Format (VFORM) Data 451 ). Click the feature in the Explorer
window to display its data in the Grid window.
To apply tolerances after inspecting or constructing a feature:
Use the Output and Evaluate dialog boxes (see Output Commands
464
).
Or:
Drag-and-drop tolerances onto features in the Explorer window. As you do this, the feature
information is updated in the Grid window, and data may also be output to the Output window.
Note:
Tolerance data can be output from a non-programmed inspection if you first select the appropriate
options on the Format Output dialog box 478 . For example, to output tolerance data from a nonprogrammed inspection to the Output window, make sure you have checked Vendor in the Terminal box
on the Format Output dialog box.
See Also:
Tolerance Commands
412

Explorer Window
Grid Window
75
76
Output Window
72.2
Tolerance Commands
72.2.1 Tolerance Commands

Tolerance Commands
Purpose
The Tolerance commands allow you to define tolerances for use in evaluating features. Tolerances are
calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of the Configuration dialog
box. The tolerances available here depend on whether you have selected Use advanced library on the
Conformance tab page.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, use the Tolerance buttons in the Output
section
Feature Tolerancing
Angular
Angle between
416
Distance between
419
Angle with respect to
416
Distance with respect to Width
418
422
421
Bilateral position
Perpendicularity
Straightness
Cylindricity
432
Flatness
433
Circularity
Diameter
435
Radia
Profile surface
439
444
436
430
434
Concentricity
Profile line
440
396
Composite profile
Composite profile line
surface 447 (available for 448 (available for the
the advanced library
advanced library option)
option)
446
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
426
Total runout
429
Composite tolerance
437
443
Profile point
Parallelism
424
Circular runout
427
435
True position
Symmetry
Angularity
424
411
72.2.2 Select Tolerance - Tolerance Wizard

Select Tolerance - Tolerance Wizard
413
414
Purpose
On the Select Tolerance page you can select as many tolerances as you wish. When you click a
tolerance, its associated dialog is displayed. Here you can define its parameters. Click more
tolerances to add as many as you need.
Navigation
Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, New button
Evaluate Feature dialog box, New button
See Also:
Evaluate Feature Dialog Box 473
Feature Tolerancing
72.2.3 Select Program Mode - Tolerance Wizard

Select Program Mode - Tolerance Wizard
Purpose
On the Select Program Mode page, select an option for your tolerance commands. You can either add
them into your current program, in which case they are inserted above the current program line, or you
can save them into a separate template (.dmi) program.
Navigation
Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, click New, click Next until the Select Program Mode
Feature Tolerancing
415
page is displayed
Evaluate Feature dialog box, click New, click Next until the Select Program Mode page is displayed
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
72.2.4 Program List - Tolerance Wizard

Program List - Tolerance Wizard
Purpose
The Program List page shows the tolerance commands you have created.
If you have chosen to produce a new template program, the program is listed with the tolerance
commands added towards the bottom. When you click Finish, you are prompted to give the template
program a name and save it.
If you have chosen to insert the commands into your current program, just the new tolerance commands
are listed. When you click Finish, these are inserted into your current program above the current
program line.
Navigation
Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, click New, click Next until the Program List page is
displayed
Evaluate Feature dialog box, click New, click Next until the Program List page is displayed
416
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
72.2.5 Angle Tolerance Dialog Box

Angle Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Angle Tolerance dialog box to specify a tolerance on the angle of a feature (TOL/ANGL), for
example the included angle of a cone, and assign it to a label.
This is a direct tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, select Feature in the Output section, click New
in the Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, select Angular

High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the angle.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.6 Angle Between Tolerance Dialog Box

Angle Between Tolerance Dialog Box
Feature Tolerancing
417
Purpose
Use the Angle Between Tolerance dialog box to generate a tolerance to be used when applying 'angle
between' tolerances to two features (TOL/ANGLB).
the Configuration dialog box. When evaluating a round slot, if you have selected Use advanced library as
the method of calculation, an error may occur depending on the distribution of the points you have taken.
If so, try evaluating the slot without using the advanced library option.
Navigation
in the Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, select Angle between
Output Angle between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box, New button
Output Angle between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box, Teach button
Evaluate Angle between Features dialog box, New button

Angle - the nominal angle between the two features.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance band around the angle, in the current angular units (as shown in
the System Settings dialog box).
Work plane
The work plane options define either the work plane or the feature plane in which to evaluate the angle
between the features by projecting the two features into that plane.
2D/3D - select 2D to define a work plane or feature plane for evaluating the angle between the features,
and select the plane from the drop-down list below. Select 3D to indicate that the features are not
projected into a plane. The drop-down list is then greyed.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411

101
418
Tolerance Commands
412

Output Angle between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
487
Evaluate Angle between Features Dialog Box
72.2.7 Angle with Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box

Angle with Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Angle with Respect to Tolerance dialog box to specify an angle and a tolerance with respect to
a feature or datum (TOL/ANGLWRT) and assign them to a label.
Navigation
in the Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, select Angle with Respect to

Angle - the nominal value of the angle between the feature and the reference.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the angle.
Reference
Select a feature from the drop-down list to be used as a reference for the tolerance.
Feature nominal - use this to specify that the nominals of the selected feature will be used as a
reference.
Feature actual - use this to specify that the actuals of the selected feature will be used as a reference.
Datum feature - use this to specify that the feature actual associated with the datum label will be used
as a reference.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
Feature Tolerancing
419
72.2.8 Distance Between Tolerance Dialog Box

Distance Between Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Distance Between Tolerance dialog box to generate a tolerance to be used when applying
'distance between' tolerances to two features (TOL/DISTB).
TOL/DISTB is evaluated along the direction you specify. You can choose one of the current co-ordinate
axes (i.e. X axis, Y axis, Z axis) or point to point. CAMIO sets up a local axis system internally in
which to evaluate the distance. If you have chosen one of the current co-ordinate axes, then this is the
local axis. If you have chosen point to point, CAMIO determines the local axis as follows. If the two
features are point-reducible, the local axis is the direction from the centre of the first feature to the centre
of the second. If the first feature is a plane, the direction is the plane normal. If not, if the second
feature is a plane, the direction is the plane normal. If one feature is point-reducible and the other is linereducible (i.e. a line or a cylinder), the direction is from the point-reducible feature to the axis of the linereducible feature. If both features are line-reducible, the direction is from a point on the axis of the
second feature to the first feature.
Once the local axis is determined, evaluation is performed along the local axis of the local datum.
Point-reducible features (e.g. point, circle) are considered to have a 'touch point' at the centre.
Evaluation between two point-reducible features is therefore between the feature centres, so setting
Minimum, Maximum or Average has no effect. When features are not point-reducible, TOL/DISTB
420
evaluates the distances between all of the points in one feature to all of the points in the other feature,
using the average, minimum or maximum of the distances (depending on the Average, Minimum or
Maximum setting).
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Distance between in the Output section
Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features, New button
Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features, Teach button, OK
Evaluate Distance between Features dialog box, New button

Nominal (plus and minus) - if you have selected the Nominal option, complete the following fields:
Distance - the nominal distance between the two features. If you have accessed the Distance
Between Tolerance dialog box from the Output Distance between Actual Features dialog box, a
nominal value will have been calculated and entered in this field.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance band around the nominal distance.
Limit - High/Low - if you have selected the Limit button, specify the upper and lower values between
which the distance must lie.
Nominal/Limit - select Nominal to specify the nominal distance and tolerance band in the Nominal box
above, or select Limit to specify the values between which the distance must lie in the Limit box above.
X, Y, Z axis/Point to point - select the axis in which the 'distance between' lies, or select a point-topoint measurement.
Average/Maximum/Minimum/None - the type of distance between the features - the average distance
between, maximum or minimum distance, or none.
For two point-reducible features, the distance between is always the distance between the centres
of the features, so that the setting here is irrelevant.
For features that are not point-reducible, CAMIO looks at the touch data, and applies the tolerances
to the average distance between the two features, the maximum distance or the minimum distance,
depending on the option you have selected. If you select None, no option (Average, Maximum or
Minimum) is added to the TOL/DISTB command, but the average distance is evaluated.
n.00 - rounds off the value in the Distance field. The value entered into the Rounding field on the
Miscellaneous tab page on the Configuration dialog box determines the factor for rounding.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box

Tolerance Commands
468
412

Evaluate Distance between Features Dialog Box
475
Feature Tolerancing
421
72.2.9 Distance with Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box

Distance with Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Distance with Respect to Tolerance dialog box to specify a distance and a tolerance with
respect to a feature or datum (TOL/DISTWRT) and assign them to a label.
TOL/DISTWRT is evaluated along the direction you specify. You can choose one of the current coordinate axes (i.e. X axis, Y axis, Z axis) or point to point. CAMIO sets up a local axis system internally
in which to evaluate the distance. If you have chosen one of the current co-ordinate axes, then this is
the local axis. If you have chosen point to point, CAMIO determines the local axis as follows. If the two
features are point-reducible, the local axis is the direction from the centre of the first feature to the centre
of the second. If the first feature is a plane, the direction is the plane normal. If not, if the second
feature is a plane, the direction is the plane normal. If one feature is point-reducible and the other is linereducible (i.e. a line or a cylinder), the direction is from the point-reducible feature to the axis of the linereducible feature. If both features are line-reducible, the direction is from a point on the axis of the
second feature to the first feature.
Once the local axis is determined, evaluation is performed along the local axis of the local datum.
Point-reducible features (e.g. point, circle) are considered to have a 'touch point' at the centre.
Evaluation between two point-reducible features is therefore between the feature centres, so setting
Minimum, Maximum or Average has no effect. When features are not point-reducible, TOL/DISTWRT
evaluates the distances between all of the points in one feature to all of the points in the other feature,
using the average, minimum or maximum of the distances (depending on the Average, Minimum or
Maximum setting).
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Distance with Respect to from the
Distance between drop-down list in the Output section
422
In the part program window, double-click the TOL/DISTWRT command

Nominal (plus and minus) - if you have selected the Nominal option, complete the following fields:
Distance - the nominal distance between the feature and the reference feature or datum.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance band around the nominal distance.
Limit - High/Low - if you have selected the Limit button, specify the upper and lower values between
which the distance must lie.
Nominal/Limit - select Nominal to specify the nominal distance and tolerance band in the Nominal box
above, or select Limit to specify the values between which the distance must lie in the Limit box above.
X, Y, Z axis/Point to point - select the axis in which the distance lies, or select a point-to-point
measurement.
Average/Maximum/Minimum/None - the type of distance between the feature and the reference
feature or datum - the average distance between, maximum or minimum distance, or none.
For two point-reducible features, the distance between is always the distance between the centres of the
features, so that the setting here is irrelevant.
For features that are not point-reducible, CAMIO looks at the touch data, and applies the tolerances to
the average distance between the two features, the maximum distance or the minimum distance,
depending on the option you have selected. If you select None, no option (Average, Maximum or
Minimum) is added to the TOL/DISTWRT command, but the average distance is evaluated.
Reference
Select a feature from the drop-down list to be used as a reference for the tolerance. The output feature
is output relative to this reference feature.
reference.
Feature actual - use this to specify that the actuals of the selected feature will be used as a reference.
Datum feature - use this to specify that the feature actual associated with the datum label will be used
as a reference.
n.00 - rounds off the value in the Distance field. The value entered into the Rounding field on the
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412

Part Program Window
45
72.2.10 Width Tolerance Dialog Box

Width Tolerance Dialog Box
Feature Tolerancing
423
Purpose
Use the Width Tolerance dialog box to specify a linear size (width) tolerance (TOL/WIDTH) and assign it
to a label.
the Configuration dialog box. When evaluating a round slot, if you have selected Use advanced library as
the method of calculation, an error may occur depending on the distribution of the points you have taken.
If so, try evaluating the slot without using the advanced library option. When evaluating the width of a
parallel plane (PARPLN) feature, the results obtained when using the advanced library option may differ
slightly from those obtained when this option is not used. This is because of the different algorithms
used in the evaluation.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Width in the Output section

High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the linear size (width).
Direction - select an option to specify where the tolerance is applied.
Long - the width is toleranced along the slot (CPARLN) length orientation vector.
Short - the width is toleranced perpendicular to the slot orientation vector, in the plane of the slot.
Other - type in the i, j, k direction vector along which the linear width is to be calculated.
+/- X, Y, Z - select the axis along which the tolerance is applied. The corresponding i, j, k direction
vector is displayed in the i, j, k fields.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
424
72.2.11 Bilateral Position Tolerance Dialog Box

Bilateral Position Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Bilateral Position Tolerance dialog box to specify the bi-directional co-ordinate tolerancing of the
current feature in Cartesian or polar co-ordinates (TOL/CORTOL) and assign it to a label. This is a coordinate tolerance between a feature and the current datum origin, along a specified axial direction,
radius or angle. Tolerances are calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab
page of the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Bilateral position in the Output section

Axis/Radius/Angle
X, Y, Z axis - select one of these to specify that the rectangular co-ordinate method is to be used to
tolerance the position along the X, Y or Z axis. The method used is selected in the Bilateral position
fields on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog box.
Radius - select this to specify that the polar co-ordinate method is to be used to tolerance the radial
position.
Angle - select this to specify that the polar co-ordinate method is to be used to tolerance the angular
position.
High/Low - the high and low tolerance values for the co-ordinate tolerancing.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
120
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.12 Angularity Tolerance Dialog Box

Angularity Tolerance Dialog Box
Feature Tolerancing
425
Purpose
Use the Angularity Tolerance dialog box to specify an angularity tolerance (TOL/ANGLR) and assign it to
a label.
This is an orientation tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Angularity in the Output section

Tolerance - one of the following, depending on the feature:
The width of the tolerance zone defined by two parallel lines within which all points of the feature
must lie.
The distance between parallel planes within which the centre plane of the feature must lie.
The diameter of a cylindrical tolerance zone within which the axis of the feature must lie.
Feature bonus - the conditions that apply to the feature being toleranced.
MMC - select this to specify that the maximum material condition applies.
LMC - select this to specify that the least material condition applies.
RFS - select this to specify regardless of feature size.
None - select this to specify that no condition applies.
Before MMC or LMC can be used, TOL/DIAM must be evaluated for circle and cylinder features. TOL/
WIDTH must be evaluated for slot and parallel plane features.
Reference bonus - select a feature from the drop-down list to be used as a reference for the tolerance.
reference.
426
Feature actual - use this to specify that the actuals of the selected feature will be used as a
reference.
Datum feature - use this to specify that the feature actual associated with the datum label will be
used as a reference.
MMC - use this to specify that the maximum material condition applies to the reference feature.
LMC - use this to specify that the least material condition applies to the reference feature.
RFS - use this to specify regardless of reference feature size.
None - use this to specify that no condition applies to the reference feature.
See Also:
Diameter Tolerance Dialog Box 435
Feature Tolerancing
422
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.13 Parallelism Tolerance Dialog Box

Parallelism Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Parallelism Tolerance dialog box to specify a parallelism tolerance (TOL/PARLEL) and assign it
to a label.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Parallelism in the Output section
Feature Tolerancing
427
must lie.
reference.
reference.
Note:
MMC can be used in TOL/PARLEL for width, using two opposite planes, one as feature and the other as
datum. Before MMC is used for width, TOL/DISTB must be evaluated.
See Also:
422

Feature Tolerancing
419
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.14 Perpendicularity Tolerance Dialog Box

Perpendicularity Tolerance Dialog Box
428
Purpose
Use the Perpendicularity Tolerance dialog box to specify a perpendicularity tolerance (TOL/PERP) and
assign it to a label.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Perpendicularity in the Output section

must lie.
reference.
Feature Tolerancing
429
reference.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
422
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.15 Circle Runout Tolerance Dialog Box

Circle Runout Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Circle Runout Tolerance dialog box to specify a circular runout tolerance (TOL/CRNOUT) and
assign it to a label. Select a datum to use as an axis from the Datum feature drop-down list. You can
also select another feature for reference in the Reference box, and add it to the Label/Reference box.
This is a runout tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
the Configuration dialog box. Note that you should not use the ASME advanced library option when
using a datum and a reference feature, as this method of calculation requires a compound datum. If
using the ASME advanced library option, assign a compound feature as a datum and select this
compound datum in the Datum feature field.
Navigation
in the Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, select Circular runout
430

Tolzon - the width of a tolerance zone within which a single circular element, i.e. a circular cross
section, must lie.
Datum feature - the datum to be used as an axis for the runout tolerance.
Reference
Feature nominal - select this to use a feature nominal as a reference, and select its label in the
drop-down list.
Feature actual - select this to use a feature actual as a reference, and select its label in the dropdown list.
Datum feature - select this to use a feature datum as a reference, and select its label in the dropdown list.
Add/Delete/Edit - only the first item in the Label/Reference box is used as a reference. If there is a
second item, this is not used.
Add - click this button to add the feature selected in the Reference drop-down list to the Label/
Reference box to use as a reference in tolerancing.
Delete - click this button to delete the feature highlighted in the Label/Reference box.
Edit - click this button to replace the feature highlighted in the Label/Reference box with new
information selected in the Reference drop-down list.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412

Assign Datum Dialog Box
72.2.16 Total Runout Tolerance Dialog Box

Total Runout Tolerance Dialog Box
Feature Tolerancing
431
Purpose
Use the Total Runout Tolerance dialog box to specify a total runout tolerance (TOL/TRNOUT) and assign
it to a label. Select a datum to use as an axis from the Datum feature drop-down list. You can also
select another feature for reference in the Reference box, and add it to the Label/Reference box.
This is a runout tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
the Configuration dialog box. Note that you should not use the ASME advanced library option when
using a datum and a reference feature, as this method of calculation requires a compound datum. If
using the ASME advanced library option, assign a compound feature as a datum and select this
compound datum in the Datum feature field.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Total runout in the Output section

Tolzon - one of the following, depending on the feature:
must lie.
Datum feature - the datum to be used as an axis for the runout tolerance.
Reference
Feature nominal - select this to use a feature nominal as a reference, and select its label in the
drop-down list.
Feature actual - select this to use a feature actual as a reference, and select its label in the dropdown list.
Datum feature - select this to use a feature datum as a reference, and select its label in the dropdown list.
Add/Delete/Edit - only the first item in the Label/Reference box is used as a reference. If there is a
432
second item, this is not used.

Add - click this button to add the feature selected in the Reference drop-down list to the Label/
Reference box to use as a reference in tolerancing.
Delete - click this button to delete the feature highlighted in the Label/Reference box.
Edit - click this button to replace the feature highlighted in the Label/Reference box with new
information selected in the Reference drop-down list.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412

72.2.17 Straightness Tolerance Dialog Box

Straightness Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Straightness Tolerance dialog box to specify a straightness tolerance (TOL/STRGHT) and
This is a tolerance of form calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Straightness in the Output section

must lie.
Feature Tolerancing
433
Note:
For a cylinder feature, a cylindrical tolerance zone can be evaluated for the derived median line of the
cylinder using TOL/STRGHT. Measurement must be implemented in at least three cross-sections and
at least three points should be measured in each cross-section.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
422
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.18 Flatness Tolerance Dialog Box

Flatness Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Flatness Tolerance dialog box to specify a flatness tolerance (TOL/FLAT) over an area,
calculating the largest deviation from individual areas over a surface, and assign it to a label.
You can bound a flatness tolerance using the Bound Feature/Tolerance dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Flatness in the Output section

Tolerance - the tolerance zone defined by two parallel planes within which the surface of the feature
434
actually lies.
Length/Width - to evaluate the flatness of the whole feature, set both length and width to 0. If you use
other values, a local flatness is evaluated around each touch point using the other touch points in the
neighbourhood, i.e. within the length and width specified. If you check the Local plane fitting box, the
touch points additionally have a local plane of the specified length and width fitted, to establish the local
flatness. Length and width are measured in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog
box 101 ).
See Also:
Bound Feature/Tolerance Dialog Box 489
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.19 Circularity Tolerance Dialog Box

Circularity Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Circularity Tolerance dialog box to specify a circularity tolerance (TOL/CIRLTY) and assign it to
a label.
the Configuration dialog box. When evaluating the circularity of a sphere, if you have selected Use
advanced library as the method of calculation, the evaluation is performed by considering slices across
the sphere. Otherwise, the evaluation is performed by considering the distribution of points around the
sphere.
You can bound a circularity tolerance using the Bound Feature/Tolerance dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Circularity in the Output section

Tolerance - the width of the tolerance zone bounded by two concentric circles within which the
elements of the surface of the feature actually lie.
See Also:
Bound Feature/Tolerance Dialog Box 489
Feature Tolerancing
411
Feature Tolerancing
Tolerance Commands
435
412
72.2.20 Cylindricity Tolerance Dialog Box

Cylindricity Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Cylindricity Tolerance dialog box to specify a cylindricity tolerance (TOL/CYLCTY) and assign it
to a label.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Cylindricity in the Output section

Tolerance - the tolerance zone bounded by two concentric cylinders within which elements of the
surface of the feature actually lie.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.21 Diameter Tolerance Dialog Box

Diameter Tolerance Dialog Box
436
Purpose
Use the Diameter Tolerance dialog box to specify a diameter tolerance (TOL/DIAM) and assign it to a
label.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Diameter in the Output section

High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the diameter.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.22 Radius Tolerance Dialog Box

Radius Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Radius Tolerance dialog box to specify a radial tolerance (TOL/RAD) and assign it to a label.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Radius in the Output section

High/Low - the high and low tolerance values applied to the radius.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
Feature Tolerancing
437
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.23 True Position Tolerance Dialog Box

True Position Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the True Position dialog box to specify a position tolerance (TOL/POS) and assign it to a label.
This is a location tolerance calculated according to the method selected on the Conformance tab page of
The Dynamic datum setting on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog box is used when
evaluating TOL/POS. If you select None, the datum references in the tolerance (i.e. the datums
specified in the True Position Tolerance dialog box) must match the current datum in name and order,
because the tolerance is evaluated in the current datum. If you select Implicit, the datum references in
the tolerances are checked against the current datum for name and order. If they match, the current
datum is used. Otherwise, CAMIO uses the datum references to create a local co-ordinate system to
438
evaluate the tolerances, using the associated evaluated features. If you select Optimal, CAMIO
calculates all the candidate datums then selects the datum that gives the least deviation.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click True position in the Output section

Method - the method for finding the true position tolerance.
X, Y, Z axis - select one of these to specify that the rectangular co-ordinate method is to be used to
tolerance the position along the X, Y or Z axis.
Radius - select this to specify that the polar co-ordinate method is to be used to tolerance the radial
position.
Angle - select this to specify that the polar co-ordinate method is to be used to tolerance the angular
position.
None - select this to specify no direction when finding the true position tolerance. This produces
either a circular (for 2D features) or a cylindrical (for 3D features) tolerance zone.
Tolerance - the diameter of a circular zone within which the actual centre of the feature must fall. The
zone lies in the plane of the feature, at its nominal centre.
MMC/LMC/RFS/None - the conditions that apply to the feature being toleranced.
2D/3D
2D - select this to apply a tolerance zone evaluated in a two-dimensional plane normal to the
nominal feature vector.
3D - select this to apply a tolerance zone whose axis is co-linear with the vector of the feature
nominal. The feature cylinder being toleranced must be bounded.
Number of datums - select the number of datums to be used as references from the drop-down list.
This determines how many of the Datum boxes are available.
Datum 1/2/3 - select datums to use as references from the drop-down lists. Then select the conditions
that apply to the datums.
See Also:
120
Feature Tolerancing
439

Feature Tolerancing
422
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.24 Composite Position Tolerance Dialog Box

Composite Position Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Composite Position Tolerance dialog box to specify a composite positional tolerance (TOL/
COMPOS) for use with patterns of circles, cylinders, slots and parallel planes (FEAT/PATERN features),
and assign it to a label. The features within the pattern and the pattern itself are toleranced.
Composite tolerance of a pattern in the XY, YZ and ZX planes is supported for 2D patterns. Composite
tolerance of 3D patterns is supported where the features are circles, cylinders or slots and:
The feature axis is parallel to the pattern axis
or
The features lie in a radial pattern where their axes are perpendicular to the pattern axis
or
The features are coaxial to the pattern axis
The Dynamic datum setting on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog box is used when
evaluating TOL/COMPOS. If you select None, the datum references in the tolerance (i.e. the datums
specified in the Composite Position Tolerance dialog box) must match the current datum in name and
order, because the tolerance is evaluated in the current datum. If you select Implicit, the datum
references in the tolerances are checked against the current datum for name and order. If they match,
440
the current datum is used. Otherwise, CAMIO uses the datum references to create a local co-ordinate
system to evaluate the tolerances, using the associated evaluated features. If you select Optimal,
CAMIO calculates all the candidate datums then selects the datum that gives the least deviation.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Composite tolerance in the Output
section

Tolerance - the diameter of the circular tolerance zone for the pattern (pattern bonus) or for the features
within it (feature bonus), or the diameter of the cylindrical tolerance zone within which the feature axis
must lie. When a cylindrical tolerance zone is required, the features being toleranced must be bounded.
MMC/LMC/RFS/None - the conditions that apply to the feature being toleranced.
This determines how many of the Datum boxes are available.
See Also:
120

Feature Tolerancing
422
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.25 Concentricity Tolerance Dialog Box

Concentricity Tolerance Dialog Box
Feature Tolerancing
441
Purpose
Use the Concentricity Tolerance dialog box to specify a concentricity tolerance (TOL/CONCEN) and
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Concentricity in the Output section

Tolerance - the diameter of the cylindrical tolerance zone around the reference in which the axis of the
feature lies.
Reference - select a feature from the drop-down list to be used as a reference for the tolerance.
reference.
reference.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.26 Concentricity Tolerance for ISO Dialog Box

Concentricity Tolerance for ISO Dialog Box
442
Purpose
Use the Concentricity Tolerance dialog box to specify a concentricity tolerance (TOL/CONCEN) and
This is a location tolerance calculated according to the ISO standard which must be selected under
GD&T on the Conformance tab page of the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Concentricity in the Output section
In the Output Actual/Nominal Feature dialog box, click New to show Select Tolerance page, select
Concentricity

Tolerance - the diameter of the cylindrical tolerance zone around the reference in which the axis of the
feature lies.
Before MMC or LMC can be used, TOL/DIAM must be evaluated for circle and cylinder features.
reference.
reference.
Feature Tolerancing
443
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.27 Symmetry Tolerance Dialog Box

Symmetry Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Symmetry Tolerance dialog box to specify a symmetry tolerance (TOL/SYM) for a parallel plane
feature and a parallel plane datum and assign it to a label. You can then evaluate the symmetry
tolerance between two parallel planes that are equally disposed about the centre plane (datum).
you can use plane features as well as parallel plane features as the reference for the tolerance. When
evaluating symmetry, an error may occur depending on the distribution of the points you have taken,
because the advanced library option evaluates opposing points. In this case you can either ensure that
you take opposing points, or you can evaluate symmetry without using the advanced library option.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Symmetry in the Output section

Tolerance - the distance between parallel planes within which the centre plane of the feature must lie.
Reference - select a feature from the drop-down list to be used as a reference for the tolerance. If you
444
have selected Use advanced library as the method of calculation, you can use plane features as well as
parallel plane features as the reference for the tolerance. Otherwise, the list shows parallel planes
(PARPLN) features only.
reference.
reference.
Note:
Only RFS (regardless of feature size) conditions apply to the features being toleranced.
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.28 Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box

Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Surface Profile Tolerance dialog box to specify a profile of a surface tolerance (TOL/PROFS) and
datum.
For curve (GCURVE) and surface (GSURF) features, the output from this tolerance includes the deviation
at each point.
Navigation
Feature Tolerancing
445
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Profile of a surface in the Output section

See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.29 Profile Line Tolerance Dialog Box

Profile Line Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Profile Line Tolerance dialog box to specify a profile of a line tolerance (TOL/PROFL) and assign
it to a label.
datum.
For curve (GCURVE) features, the output from this tolerance includes the deviation at each point.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Profile of a line in the Output section

446
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.30 Point Profile Tolerance Dialog Box

Point Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Point Profile Tolerance dialog box to specify a profile of a point tolerance (TOL/PROFP) and
datum.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Profile of a point in the Output section

Feature Tolerancing
447
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.31 Composite Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box

Composite Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Composite Surface Profile Tolerance dialog box to specify a composite profile tolerance of a
surface (TOL/CPROFS) and assign it to a label.
the Configuration dialog box. CAMIO performs a functional best fit of the data taking into account datum
constraints and material conditions (where supported). If you do not specify any datums, there are no
constraints on the fit applied.
at each point.
Navigation
With Use advanced library selected on the Conformance tab page of the Configuration dialog box,
select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Composite profile of a surface in the
Output section

448

Upper tier/Lower tier
The upper tier is concerned with the location of the feature being toleranced, and the lower tier is
concerned with its form.
Average deviation - if checked, the average of the measured feature deviations is calculated. This
allows you to check whether the form of the surface is correct but the offset from nominal is incorrect.
This determines how many of the Datum boxes are available
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
72.2.32 Composite Line Profile Tolerance Dialog Box

Composite Line Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Feature Tolerancing
449
Use the Composite Line Profile Tolerance dialog box to specify a composite profile tolerance of a line
(TOL/CPROFL) and assign it to a label.
the Configuration dialog box. CAMIO performs a functional best fit of the data taking into account datum
constraints and material conditions (where supported). If you do not specify any datums, there are no
constraints on the fit applied.
at each point.
Navigation
With Use advanced library selected on the Conformance tab page of the Configuration dialog box,
select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Composite profile of a line in the Output
section

Upper tier/Lower tier
The upper tier is concerned with the location of the feature being toleranced, and the lower tier is
concerned with its form.
Average deviation - if checked, the average of the measured feature deviations is calculated. This
allows you to check whether the form of the surface is correct but the offset from nominal is incorrect.
This determines how many of the Datum boxes are available
See Also:
Feature Tolerancing
411
Tolerance Commands
412
73
Outputting Data
73.1
Outputting Data
Outputting Data
You can output data from CAMIO in a number of formats:
DMIS
450
450
Vendor (VFORM)
CSV
459
XML
459
DTA
461
Q-DAS
461
QIS data
462
451
See Also:
Outputting Data for Import into Another Application
452
462
462
Feature Tolerancing
73.2
Outputting DMIS Data

The DMIS commands from your part program can be output as DMIS format data. DMIS format data is
output as a result of the OUTPUT command, or by virtue of the DMIS command's own characteristics (i.
e. some DMIS commands are output when executed).
DMIS format data looks like this example data:
PRCOMP/ON
OUTPUT/FA(PT1),TA(TPF0)
FA(PT1)=FEAT/POINT,CART,-54.642,-2.67,-0.002,0,0,1
TA(TPF0)=TOL/PROFP,-0.002,INTOL
OUTPUT/F(PT1),T(TPF0)
F(PT1)=FEAT/POINT,CART,-54.639,-2.666,0,0,0,1
T(TPF0)=TOL/PROFP,-0.003,0.003
The .out file
If output to a file, DMIS format data is output to the .out file specified on the Program tab page
168
of the
The .out file is created if the DISPLY command contains the STOR,DMIS minor words, e.g. DISPLY/
STOR,DMIS. If so, any data present in the file is deleted each time the DMIS program is run, and
replaced with current data when the DMIS program is closed. If the DISPLY command does not contain
the STOR,DMIS minor words, the .out file is not created (if there are any existing .out files, these are left
unchanged). If probe compensation is off, the point data in this file is raw data (RAWDATA), i.e. the
touches, and if probe compensation is on, the point data is actual data (PTDATA), i.e. the same number
of points as the nominal points. Both are in current datum co-ordinates. The DISPLY command can be
added to your program using the Format Output dialog box 478 .
Where is the data output?
You can output the data to a number of devices, depending on what you have selected on the Format
Output dialog box. If you do not select any devices on the Format Output dialog box, you will not output
any data. You will see no data in the Output window 82 , and nothing will be printed or saved to the .out
file. (However, you can still output data to any devices opened for the output of formatted data (FDATA)
using the Open Device dialog box 941 .)
Outputting Data
451
How is the data produced?

You will only output DMIS format data if:
You have selected DMIS (standard) output on the Format Output dialog box or you are using
advanced programming commands 889 to output data to a device
AND
Either the DMIS command has an output format, or an Output command has been used to output
DMIS data
73.3
Outputting Vendor Format (VFORM) Data

The vendor format information from your part program can be output as vendor format (VFORM) data.
Vendor format data is data that is formatted in a way determined by the vendor (in this case Metris).
Vendor format data can look like this:
Temperature Compensation: OFF
or like this:
Temperature compensation is off
or any other format as specified by the vendor. Vendor format data only exists if the vendor has created
vendor text for a particular command.
The .res file
If output to a file, VFORM data is output to the .res file specified on the Program tab page
168
of the
The .res file is the Metris vendor report file, created if the DISPLY command contains the STOR,V(label)
minor words, e.g. DISPLY/STOR,V(0). If so, any data present in the file is deleted each time the DMIS
program is run, and replaced with current data when the DMIS program is closed. If the DISPLY
command does not contain the STOR,V(label) minor words, the .res file is not created (if there are any
existing .res files, these are left unchanged). Point data is only output in this file if tolerances have been
applied, so the result will be actual points, in current datum co-ordinates. The layout of the .res file can
be determined by commands in the part program, e.g. the header from the Configuration dialog box,
Reporting Key Questions tab page 125 , and the content from the Format Output dialog box 478 . The .res
file also contains the date and time the program was run, and dashed lines between feature data and to
indicate page breaks (as determined by the Printer lines box on the Miscellaneous tab page,
Configuration dialog box). If the ENDFIL (End of part program) command is executed when the program
is run, the program duration and the number of features in and out of tolerance are also shown. The .res
file can be printed automatically at the end of the program by checking Auto print at end on the
Reporting tab page 174 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box.
Example VFORM data
dd-mmm-yyyy hh:mm
Start Template
Page
--------------------------------------------------------------------(mm)
ACTUAL
NOMINAL
LO-TOL HI-TOL DEVIATION GRAPHIC
ERROR
--------------------------------------------------------------------Point:PT1
Point-Profile -0.002
-0.003 +0.003
-0.002
-*-+---
Where is the data output?

You can output the data to a number of devices, depending on what you have selected on the Format
452
Output dialog box. If you do not select any devices on the Format Output dialog box, you will not output
any data. You will see no data in the Output window 82 , and nothing will be printed or saved to the .res
file. (However, you can still output data to any devices opened for the output of formatted data (FDATA)
using the Open Device dialog box 941 .)
How is the data produced?
You will only output vendor format data from a command if:
Vendor text has been created by the vendor for that command
AND
You have selected vendor output on the Format Output dialog box, or you are usingadvanced
programming commands 889 to output data to a device
AND
For toleranced features, you have selected appropriate data to output using the Vendor Output
Format dialog box 480
AND
You have used an OUTPUT command to output the data
73.4
73.4.1 Outputting Data for Import into Another Application

You can output data from CAMIO so that it can be imported into another application. For example, you
may wish to export some commands to be used in another application.
You could obtain the DMIS commands from the .out file produced by your part program, but this
contains all the DMIS output from your part program. If you wish to use just some of the DMIS
commands in another application (that supports DMIS), you can output only the commands you are
interested in, by writing those commands to a device, creating a file of formatted data (FDATA) from
CAMIO. For an example procedure, see Outputting a Datum for Importing into Focus Inspection 452 .
You can also create a file for import into an application that does not support DMIS. In this case the file
you create is formatted ASCII text. For details see Writing Formatted ASCII Text to a File 455 .
See Also:
File Types
73.4.2 Outputting a Datum for Importing into Focus Inspection

Outputting a Datum for Importing into Focus Inspection
You can output DMIS commands from CAMIO so that they can be imported into an application that
supports DMIS, by creating an FDATA file (of formatted data) of the commands you wish to import into
the application. To do this, in your part program:
1.
Create a device.
2.
Open the device for the output of DMIS commands.
3.
In your part program, add the DMIS commands you wish to add to the FDATA file.
4.
Close the device. CAMIO creates a file containing the DMIS commands you added between
opening and closing the device.
Example
Outputting Data
453
The following example procedure creates an FDATA file containing a CAMIO datum translation
command that can then be imported into Focus Inspection.
1.
In CAMIO, ensure that you have created the datum you wish to export.
2.
From the main toolbar select Advanced, click Device in the Device section.
3.
In the Input/Output Device dialog box, type in a name for the device in the Label field. The name is
used to refer to the file of FDATA. Double-click in the File field to display the DEVICE dialog box,
where you can type in the name of the file that will hold the FDATA (i.e. the commands you are
exporting) and select the location you wish to save it to. The filename is then added to the Input/
Output Device dialog box. (A filename extension is not required for creating the file.) Click OK:
4.
From the Advanced commands, select Open. In the Open Device dialog box, select the name of the
device and a device type of Output. Check the User defined box and select Standard to output the
data as DMIS commands. Click OK:
5.
From the Datum commands, select Recall. In the Recall Datum dialog box, select the datum you
wish to export and click OK:
454
6.
From the Advanced commands, select Close. In the Close Device dialog box, select the name of
the device that you created in step 3 and select Keep to save the file of data. Click OK:
CAMIO creates the file of DMIS commands and these can be imported into another application, in
this example Focus Inspection.
Example output file
The above example creates the following commands in the file focustest.dat:
OPEN/DID(datumtest),FDATA,DMIS,OUTPUT,OVERWR
RECALL/DA(0)
DA(0)=RECALL/TRMATX,1,0,0,0,1,0,0,0,1,0,0,0
DMIS code for this example
For the above example, CAMIO adds the following commands to your part program:
DID(datumtest)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\focustest.dat'
OPEN/DID(datumtest),FDATA,DMIS,OUTPUT,OVERWR
RECALL/DA(0)
CLOSE/DID(datumtest),KEEP
See Also:
Input/Output Device Dialog Box
452
940
Open Device Dialog Box 941

Recall Datum Dialog Box
646
Outputting Data
Close Device Dialog Box
455
942
Advanced Commands
73.4.3 Writing Formatted ASCII Text to a File

Writing Formatted ASCII Text to a File
You can output data from CAMIO so that it can be imported into another application, by creating a file of
formatted ASCII text.
1.
Use the DMIS commands OBTAIN and ASSIGN to place the values you require into variables.
2.
Concatenate the variables into string variables.
3.
Output the string variables to a file.
Example
The following example procedure creates a file containing information about a measured circle. The file
is created containing values in the format:
x;y;z
diameter
i;j;k
where the x, y, z and diameter values are output to 2 decimal places and the i, j, k vectors are output to
3 decimal places.
1.
In CAMIO, measure the circle you wish to output details for.
2.
From the Advanced tab, select Declare in the Variables section.
3.
In the Declare Variable dialog box, select Module as the scope and select Double as the type. Then
create a variable for each value you wish to output from the circle, by typing in a name for each
variable and clicking Add between each one. When you have added a variable for each value you
are going to output, click OK:
4.
From the Advanced tab, select Obtain in the Variables section. Use the Obtain dialog box to obtain
the x, y, z, i, j, k and diameter values from the circle and assign each to its declared variable. For
example to obtain the x value, select x in the Varname drop-down list, ensure that Feature actual is
selected in the Type drop-down list, select the circle in the Label drop-down list, and ensure that the
correct ordinal for the x value is selected in the Ordinal field:
456
For details of the ordinals for feature actuals, see Ordinals in Advanced Programming 958 .
5.
From the Advanced tab, select Declare again. In the Declare Variable dialog box, create a string
variable to hold a semicolon. This will be used to separate the values in the file you are going to
output:
6.
From the Advanced tab, select Assign in the Variables section. In the Assign Variable dialog box,
select the semicolon variable in the Name drop-down list, and type in a value of ';' in the Value field
(a string such as a semicolon must be enclosed in single quotes). Click OK.
7.
From the Advanced tab, select Device in the Device section. In the Input/Output Device dialog box,
type in a name for the device in the Label field. The name is used to refer to the file of circle data.
Double-click in the File field to display the DEVICE dialog box, where you can type in the name of
the file that will hold the circle data and select the location you wish to save it to. The filename is
Outputting Data
457
then added to the Input/Output Device dialog box. (A filename extension is not required for creating
the file.) Click OK:
8.
From the Advanced tab, select Open in the Device section. In the Open Device dialog box, select
the name of the device and a device type of Output. Click OK:
9.
From the Advanced tab, select Write in the Device section. Use the Write to Output Device dialog
box to write the circle information to the device (i.e. to the file of circle data). Select the name of the
device in the Label drop-down list. Add variables by selecting each variable from the drop-down list,
typing in the width and precision if required, and clicking Add between each variable. You can add
the semicolon variable to separate the data when it is output. When you have added the variables
you wish to output to a line in the device, click OK:
458
For each line of circle data you wish to add to the device, open the Write to Output Device dialog
box again and complete the details. This adds a separate WRITE command to your part program
for each line of data output to the device.
10. From the Advanced tab, select Close in the Device section. In the Close Device dialog box, select
the name of the device for the file of circle data and select Keep to save the file of data. Click OK:
CAMIO creates the file of circle data and this can be imported into another application.
Example output file
For a circle feature of these parameters:
F(CIR001)=FEAT/CIRCLE,INNER,CART,1123.2554,2.4763,999.9111,0,0,1,0.1969
the above example creates the following data in the file circle.txt:
1123.26; 2.48;999.91
0.20
0.000;0.000;1.000
DMIS code for this example
For the above example, CAMIO adds the following commands to your part program:
DECL/LOCAL,DOUBLE,diameter,i,j,k,x,y,z
x=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),4
y=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),5
z=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),6
i=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),7
Outputting Data
459
j=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),8
k=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),9
diameter=OBTAIN/FA(CIR001),10
DECL/LOCAL,CHAR,512,semicolon
semicolon=ASSIGN/';'
DID(myfile)=DEVICE/STOR,'c:\lk\appdata\camio\circle.txt'
OPEN/DID(myfile),DIRECT,OUTPUT,OVERWR
WRITE/DID(myfile),x:5:2,semicolon,y:5:2,semicolon,z:5:2
WRITE/DID(myfile),diameter:5:2
WRITE/DID(myfile),i:5:3,semicolon,j:5:3,semicolon,k:5:3
CLOSE/DID(myfile),KEEP
See Also:
Declare Variable Dialog Box
Obtain Dialog Box
452
894
904
Assign Variable Dialog Box
903
940

Write to Output Device Dialog Box
944
942
Advanced Commands
74
Outputting CSV Format Data

Outputting CSV Format Data
CSV format data is a comma-delimited file of the program output. This takes the name and directory of
the .res file (as shown on the Program tab page 168 of the New/Open Inspection dialog box) but with .csv
as the file extension. If you change the .res filename and directory, the .csv filename and directory are
changed accordingly.
A .csv file is created when your program runs the End of program (ENDFIL) command, if you have
selected Create CSV file on the New/Open Inspection dialog box, Reporting tab page.
75
Outputting XML Data

Outputting XML Data
XML data is output if you select XML output on the Program tab page 168 of the New/Open Inspection
dialog box. An output file of inspection data in XML format is created when the ENDFIL (End of program)
command is run.
Viewing the .xml file
You can view the .xml file in a text editor or in a browser. If the file does not display in Microsoft
Internet Explorer, copy all the .dtd files present in C:\LK\LKCamio\DTD\n.n (where n.n indicates the DML
460
(Dimensional Markup Language) version supported) to the folder containing the .xml file.
Output of the reporting_transform element
The reporting_transform element is output for all features. This is the name of the datum in force when
the feature was output. This applies to feature nominals and actuals as the datum could be different for
the two.
Output of the part_inspection_status element
The part_inspection_status element is output for the inspection. This is set to true if all tolerances in the
file passed. Otherwise, it is set to false.
Output of positional tolerance types
Positional tolerance elements are output as follows:
TOL/POS,RADIUS: position_ang_zone/position_ang_actual
TOL/POS,ANGLE: position_rad_zone/position_rad_actual
TOL/POS,2D: position_cyl_zone/position_cyl_actual
TOL/POS,3D: position_sph_zone/position_sph_actual
Output of PROFL/PROFS worst_*_distance element
The worst_negative_distance/worst_positive_distance output for PROFL and PROFS outputs the worst
value. Note that either of these values can be negative.
XML output can be further controlled using QIS statements:
The common space datum
QIS label = LK_COMMON_SPACE_DATUM
Adding a common space datum to your .xml output ensures that all features are output relative to a
common datum and can then be compared to each other. If this QIS item is not present in the REPORT
command, no common space datum is defined and a warning comment is added to the .xml file.
The schema reference
QIS label = LK_WRITE_SCHEMA_REFERENCE
If you write the schema reference to the XML output, a line is added at the top of the .xml file that
indicates the schema used to validate the XML content. If the schema cannot be found, the .xml file
may not be opened (but this depends on the application being used to open the .xml file). If this QIS
item is not present, no schema reference is output and the XML is not validated.
The touch points
QIS label = LK_WRITE_TOUCHES
You can cause the touch data to be output to the XML file. Note that the touch points can form a
significant proportion of the .xml file even for digital inspections, and for analogue scans, the touch point
data will cause the .xml file size to be very large. If this QIS item is not present, the touches ARE
output.
Adding the QIS items to your part program
You can specify that the .xml file includes a common space datum, the schema reference and does not
include the touch point data, but you must do this by adding QIS items to your part program, which
must then be output as part of a REPORT command.
, scroll down the list of QIS statements to the Q( )
1.
Using the Quality Information dialog box

=QISDEF/"," statement.
2.
Double-click the Q( )=QISDEF/"," statement to display the QIS Definition dialog box. Use this to
define the QIS items:
482
Outputting XML Data
461
To define the QIS item for the common space datum, type in LK_COMMON_SPACE_DATUM in
the Label field, and type in the label for the datum in both the Type and Text fields. The datum
need not yet be defined. You can add it to your part program after the QIS item.
To define the QIS item for the schema reference, type in LK_WRITE_SCHEMA_REFERENCE in
the Label field. In both the Type and Text fields, type in YES in English. You MUST use
English for this, i.e. type in YES.
To define the QIS item for the touch data, type in LK_WRITE_TOUCHES in the Label field. In
both the Type and Text fields, type in NO in English. You MUST use English for this, i.e. type
in NO.
3.
Use the Step option from the Program toolbar 140 to step through these commands when you have
added them to your part program. This makes them available for selection.
4.
On the QIS Information dialog box 484 , type in LK_DML in the upper Label field.
5.
Select Q from the ID drop-down list. This ensures that the QIS items are displayed in the Label field
directly above the ID drop-down list. Select each of the LK_ items in turn, clicking Add between
each one to add it to the left-hand list. Then click OK. You have now created a report command
that includes each of the LK_ QIS items.
6.
Using the Output QIS Data dialog box 481 , add the output command OUTPUT/R(LK_DML) to your
program. This will output the report command information for the LK_ QIS items to the .xml file
produced from your part program.
7.
Run the part program. An output file of inspection data in XML format is created when the ENDFIL
(End of program) command is run.
See Also:
Outputting QIS Data
76
Outputting a .dta File

Outputting a .dta File
.Dta files can be used to transfer data to legacy systems and to some data analysis packages.
A .dta file is created when your program runs the End of program (ENDFIL) command, if you have
selected DTA Output on the New/Open Inspection dialog box, Program tab page.
77
Outputting Q-DAS Data

Outputting Q-DAS Data
You can save .dfq, .dfd and .dfx files from your part programs. These files are compatible with the QDAS ASCII file transfer format.
A .dfd/dfx pair of files is created when the End of program (ENDFIL) command is executed when running
programs using production runs or special runs from the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS software.
A .dfq file is created when the End of program (ENDFIL) command is executed when running programs
using study runs from the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS software.
See Also:
(this link opens the LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS Help file. To return to CAMIO Help, close the
LAUNCHPAD for Q-DAS Help.)
462
78
Outputting QIS Data

Outputting QIS Data
1.
Define the QIS item in your program using the Quality Information dialog box 482 . For example, you
could add the command PS(P1)=PARTSN/'123', to include the part serial number in your inspection
data.
2.
Using the QIS Information dialog box 484 , add a report command to your program that refers to the
QIS item. In this example, for a report called 'R1', this would be R(R1)=REPORT/PS(P1).
3.
Using the Output QIS Data dialog box 481 , add the output command OUTPUT/R( ) to output the
report command information. In our example, this would be OUTPUT/R(R1).
4.
Run the commands in steps 1-3. The QIS data is output and can be used in reports.
See Also:
Adding QIS Information to a Report Header
79

Whenever a feature is measured, the buffer (or background) points are stored. Depending on the
construction type, buffer points may also be stored when features are constructed. You can output
buffer points using the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box 465 .
1.
In the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box, select a feature or features so that they are added
to the Feature Nominal/Actual list.
2.
Double-click a feature that you want to output buffer points from. The Point Buffer dialog box
displayed.
3.
Select the first and last points to use from the range of points in the buffer. Click OK. The range of
points selected is shown in the Feature Nominal/Actual list on the Output Nominal/Actual Feature
dialog box.
4.
To insert the command in your program, click OK. When the program is run, the point data for each
selected buffer point is output. The data is output to the devices specified on the Format Output
dialog box 478 (buffer point data is DMIS format data).
597
is
See Also:
Using Buffer Points
211
Ordinals in Advanced Programming
80

Setting up the DISPLY command
In the Format Output dialog box (DISPLY command), check the Printer box for Standard if you want to
print any DMIS commands that are output, and check the Printer box for Vendor if you want to print any
vendor format data that is output.
Selecting the printer
The data is printed to the printer specified using the Print Set-Up option on the File menu. The printer
463
must be a local printer, not a network printer, to avoid printing delays and interruptions.
Printer type
Dot matrix-type (line) printer - each line of output is printed as it is generated. When the number of
printer lines set on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog box is reached, a new page is
started.
Laser-type (page) printer - nothing is printed until the number of lines of output reaches the number of
printer lines set on the Miscellaneous tab page. Then each page is printed as the specified number of
lines of output is generated. If the final page does not contain the specified number of lines, it is not
printed until the ENDFIL (End of part program) command is run.
Printing other data
You can print the .res file automatically from your part program by selecting Auto print at end on the
Reporting tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box. When the ENDFIL command is run, the .res
file is printed to the printer selected using the Print Set-Up option from the File menu.
You can print the contents of the model window by using the Print button in the model window.
See Also:
Format Output Dialog Box
File Menu
478
105
120
File Types
81
Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous

Requirement
Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous Requirement
Where two or more patterns of features are:
1.
Located by basic dimension

and
2.
Related to common datum features that are referenced in the same order of precedence and at the
same material condition, as applicable
they are considered a composite pattern with the geometric tolerances applied simultaneously with a
common datum. They can be evaluated together in CAMIO using the simultaneous requirement
(SIMREQT) commands.
To add a block of simultaneous requirement commands
1.
Ensure you have inspected at least two pattern features.
2.
In the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box
465
add at least two pattern features to the Feature list;

check the SIMREQT option and select First or Optimal (see Candidate datum creation below);
add tolerances to the Tolerances list. Typically TOL/COMPOS and TOL/DIAM are used to
evaluate patterns using simultaneous requirement.
3.
Click OK. A block of simultaneous requirement commands is added to your program. When the
program is run, the patterns within the block are evaluated simultaneously.
464
Note:
You can also add the SIMREQT command using the Simultaneous Requirement dialog box
486
Automatic datum creation within the SIMREQT block

Datum creation occurs automatically within the SIMREQT block, i.e. it is not necessary to set the
datum with a DATSET command and the datum type is not limited to DAT( ) (nominal and actual
features F( ) and FA( ) can be used as references). A candidate datum set is determined from specified
datum features and you can select Optimal to use the optimal datum, i.e. the candidate datum that
creates the 'best' result, or select First to use the first candidate datum, no matter what result is
obtained. The created datum is for temporary use within the SIMREQT block and the datum returns to
the current datum at the end of the block.
Sample code
T(1)=TOL/COMPOS,PATERN,0.1,RFS,DAT(A),RFS,DAT(B),RFS,DAT(C),RFS,FEATUR,0.1,
RFS,DAT(A),RFS
SR(1)=SIMREQT/FIRST
OUTPUT/FA(PAT0),TA(DIAM_1),TA(1)
ENDSIMREQT
SR(2)=SIMREQT/OPTIMAL
ENDSIMREQT
82
Output Commands
82.1
Output Commands
Output Commands
Purpose
The Output commands allow you to output feature and tolerance data in a variety of ways. You can
apply tolerances to evaluate features, for example when checking errors in fit. You can also output the
results of the tolerances, and you can configure the output.
The data generated can be checked using advanced programming
889
The Output window 82 displays the DMIS and vendor format (VFORM) output from the DMIS program (if
you have set up your output options to do this. For details, see Outputting DMIS Data 450 and
Outputting Vendor Format (VFORM) Data 451 ).
Example output commands
The following commands will output a part serial number from your program:
Output Commands
465
PS(0)=PARTSN/'1234'
R(0)=REPORT/PS(0)
OUTPUT/R(0)
The following commands will output a measured feature PT0, defined tolerance TA(0) and the above part
serial number from your program:
PS(0)=PARTSN/'1234'
R(0)=REPORT/PS(0)
OUTPUT/FA(PT0),TA(0),R(0)
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, use the Output section

Feature
Text
465
Distance Between
763
Distance with Respect

to 469
Evaluate Distance
Between 475
Angle Between
Evaluate Angle Between Evaluate Feature
487
Angle Between Wizard

472
476
Vendor Format
Format
480
478
Bound
489
See Also:
Outputting QIS Data
462
462
Main Toolbar
82.2
Output Nominal/Actual Feature Dialog Box

468
473
466
Purpose
Use the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box to output feature nominals and actuals, and apply
tolerances to the actuals and nominals of an individual feature or multiple features. Select an individual
feature, or several features of the same type (when you have selected a feature, only the remaining
features of that type are shown in the Label field). You can then select tolerances from the Tolerance
list, or generate new ones and apply them to the selected features. Pattern features can be evaluated
simultaneously using the SIMREQT option.
You can also output buffer points. Double-click a feature in the Feature Nominal/Actual list to display
the Point Buffer dialog box 597 , where you can select buffer points to output. If you wish to output the
nominal buffer points, i.e. the original touch targets, using OUTPUT/F( )[n,m], the buffer points are only
available if the feature was measured in Program mode 40 , in which case the points are the PTMEAS
points. Note that you cannot apply tolerances to buffer points.
The data is output to the devices specified in the Format Output dialog box 478 , and to any devices
opened for the output of formatted data (FDATA) using the Open Device dialog box 941 .
The Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box adds an OUTPUT/FA( ) and/or an OUTPUT/F( ) command
to your program depending on whether you check Actual and/or Nominal.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Feature in the Output section
Explorer view, right-click a feature in the lower area, select Output
Output Commands
467

Nominal/Actual - select Nominal to output the feature nominals and Actual to output the feature
actuals.
QIS/Report
QIS - select this to report additional information that cannot be calculated from the feature and
tolerance output data, for example the part name.
Report - if you have selected QIS, type in the report label or select it from the drop-down list. The
report must first have been defined using the QIS Information dialog box. If the report contains
DATE, TIME and TEMPC or TEMPF QIS parameters, the date, time and temperature at the time the
feature was inspected will be output. (If TECOMP was off or temperature compensation was
disabled in the CMM configuration before the feature was measured, the feature temperature is not
reported.) You can output the current date, time and temperature using the Output QIS Data dialog
box.
SIMREQT - available for at least two pattern features, that can be evaluated using the simultaneous
requirement (SIMREQT) commands. Add at least two pattern features to the Feature list, then check
the SIMREQT box. Select First to use the first candidate datum when evaluating the features, or select
Optimal to use the 'best' candidate datum when evaluating features. For details, click the link to
Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous Requirement.
Feature Nominal/Actual - the features to which the tolerances apply. Add features of the same type
to this box by selecting them from the Label drop-down list. Once you select a feature, only features of
that type are shown in the Label drop-down list. Double-click a feature to display the Point Buffer dialog
box where you can select a range of points to output from the buffer.
Tolerances - the tolerances to be used when reporting on features. Add tolerances to this box by
selecting them from the Tolerance drop-down list. If the tolerance you want is not in the list, generate it
by clicking New.
Tolerance - select the tolerances to be applied to the features from this drop-down list. If the tolerance
you want is not in this list, generate it by clicking New.
Add/Delete/New
Add - if you have deleted a tolerance from the Tolerances list, and it is displayed in the Tolerance
drop-down list, click this button to add it back to the Tolerances list.
Delete - click this button to delete the highlighted item in the Feature or Tolerances box. If you
delete an item from the Feature box, it becomes available again in the Label drop-down list. If you
delete an item from the Tolerances box this does not delete it from the Tolerance drop-down list.
New - click this button to display the Tolerance wizard, which you can use to define a tolerance for
the feature.
See Also:
QIS Information Dialog Box 484
Output QIS Data Dialog Box
481
Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous Requirement 463

Tolerance Wizard
Tolerance Commands
412

Outputting Data
462
449
Main Toolbar
468
82.3

Purpose
Use the Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box to apply distance between
(DISTB) tolerances to the actuals or nominals of two selected features. Select tolerances from the
Tolerance list, or generate new ones then apply them to the selected features.
The Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box adds an OUTPUT/FA( ),FA( ),TA( )
command to your program for actual features, and an OUTPUT/F( ),F( ),T( ) command for nominal
features.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Distance between in the
Output section

actuals.
1st/2nd feature - select the two features to which tolerances are to be applied.
QIS/Report
Output Commands
469
box.
by clicking New.
Add/Delete
Delete - click this button to delete the tolerance highlighted in the Tolerances box. This does not
delete it from the Tolerance drop-down list.
Teach - displays the Distance Between dialog box where you can specify the axis in which the
measurement is to be made, or specify a point-to-point measurement.
New - displays the Distance Between Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to define a tolerance for
the features.
See Also:
481
Distance Between Dialog Box
471

Tolerance Commands
Outputting Data
419
412
449
Main Toolbar
82.4
Output Distance with Respect to Nominal/Actual Features

Dialog Box
Output Distance with Respect to Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
470
Purpose
Use the Output Distance with Respect to Nominal/Actual Features dialog box to apply distance with
respect to (DISTWRT) tolerances to the actual or nominal of a selected feature. Select tolerances from
the Tolerance list, or generate new ones then apply them to the selected feature.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Distance with Respect to from
the Distance between drop-down list in the Output section

Feature
actuals. Select the feature to which the tolerances are to be applied from the drop-down list.
QIS/Report
box.
by clicking New.
Output Commands
471
Add/Delete
New - displays the Distance with Respect to Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to define a
tolerance for the features.
See Also:
481
471
Distance with Respect to Tolerance Dialog Box

Tolerance Commands
Outputting Data
421
412
449
Main Toolbar
82.5

Purpose
Use the Distance Between dialog box when applying tolerances to features to specify the axis in which
the 'distance between' measurement lies, or to specify a point-to-point measurement. When you click
OK, the Distance Between Tolerance dialog box 419 is displayed and a nominal value is entered in its
Distance field.
Navigation
Output Distance between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box
Evaluate Distance between Features dialog box
475
468
, Teach button
, Teach button
472
82.6
Angle Between Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Angle Between dialog box to apply an angle between (ANGLB) tolerance to the actuals or
nominals of two selected features. Check Nominal if using the feature nominals, and select the first and
second features. You can choose to use a feature or an axis for the second feature, by selecting
Feature or Axis in the Second feature box.
Select 2D to evaluate the angle between the two features, projected into the selected plane or the plane
defined by the feature selected from the drop-down list in this box. Select 3D to evaluate the angle
between the features in the plane defined by the directions of the features (i.e. the plane the feature
directions lie in). The angle is always positive from the first feature to the second feature.
The Angle Between dialog box adds tolerance and output commands to your program. When the
evaluation is 2D, TOL/ANGLB and OUTPUT/FA/( ),FA( ),TA( ) commands are added. When the
evaluation is 3D, a TOL/ANGLWRT command is added as this is more appropriate to the evaluation, and
an OUTPUT/FA( ),TA( ) command .is also added.
The angle between your selections is displayed in the model window. The example above shows the
external angle between two features.
Navigation
Output Commands
473
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Angle Between wizard in the
Output section

The
(arrow) button indicates which list is currently active.
Nominal - if checked, the nominal values of the two features are used.
First feature - the first feature to use when determining the angle between two features. Select a
feature from the drop-down list.
Second feature - the second feature to use when determining the angle between two features. Select
Feature to list the available features in the drop-down list in this box. If you want to output the angle
between the first feature and an axis, select Axis to list the available axes in the drop-down list in this
box.
2D - evaluates the angle between the two features, projected into the selected plane or the plane defined
by the feature selected from the drop-down list in this box.
3D - evaluates the angle between the features in the plane defined by the directions of the features (i.e.
the plane the feature directions lie in).
Limits - the upper and lower tolerance limits, in the current angular units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box).
Angle - displays the external and internal angles between the two features. Click to select the angle
you wish to evaluate.
See Also:
Output Angle Between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
Outputting Data
101
449
Main Toolbar
82.7
Evaluate Feature Dialog Box

Evaluate Feature Dialog Box
487
474
Purpose
Use the Evaluate Feature dialog box to apply tolerances to evaluate the selected feature or features. If
the DMIS version is set to 3.0 on the Configuration dialog box, Conformance tab page 128 , you can also
re-evaluate the feature without applying tolerances. This can be useful if, for example, you have changed
the geometry algorithm (GEOALG) and wish to recalculate the feature actual.
The Evaluate Feature dialog box produces no output other than that displayed in the Grid window.
Select an individual feature, or several features of the same type (when you have selected a feature, only
the remaining features of that type are shown in the Label field). Select tolerances from the current list,
or generate new ones then apply them to the selected features. The data generated can then be
checked using advanced programming 889 . For example, you could perform an action depending on
what Evaluate Feature tells you about a particular feature, but without outputting that feature data.
The Evaluate Feature dialog box adds an EVAL/FA( ) command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Evaluate Feature in the Output
section

Feature - the features to which the tolerances apply. Add features of the same type to this box by
Output Commands
475
selecting them from the Label drop-down list. Once you select a feature, only features of that type are
shown in the Label drop-down list.
by clicking New.
Add/Delete/New
Delete - click this button to delete the highlighted item in the Feature or Tolerances box. If you
delete an item from the Feature box, it becomes available again in the Label drop-down list. If you
delete an item from the Tolerances box this does not delete it from the Tolerance drop-down list.
New - click this button to display the Tolerance wizard, which you can use to define a tolerance for
the feature.
See Also:
Geometry Algorithm Dialog Box
Grid Window
756
76
Select Tolerance - Tolerance Wizard

Main Toolbar
413
135
Output Commands
82.8

Purpose
Use the Evaluate Distance between Features dialog box to evaluate the 'distance between' (DISTB)
476
tolerances of two features. Select tolerances from the current list, or generate new ones then apply
them to the selected features. The data generated can then be checked using advanced programming
889 . For example, you could perform an action depending on what Evaluate Distance between Features
tells you about a particular feature, but without outputting that feature data.
The Evaluate Distance between Features dialog box adds an EVAL/FA( ),FA( ),T( ) command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Evaluate Distance between
from the Distance between drop-down list in the Output section

by clicking New.
Add/Delete
New - displays the Distance Between Tolerance dialog box, which you can use to define a tolerance for
the features.
See Also:
471

Main Toolbar
419
135
Output Commands
82.9

Output Commands
477
Purpose
Use the Evaluate Angle between Features dialog box to evaluate the 'angle between' (ANGLB)
tolerances of two features. Select tolerances from the current list, or generate new ones then apply
them to the selected features. The data generated can then be checked using advanced programming
889 . For example, you could perform an action depending on what Evaluate Angle between Features
tells you about a particular feature, but without outputting that feature data.
The Evaluate Angle between Features dialog box adds an EVAL/FA( ),FA( ),T( ) command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Evaluate Angle between from
the Angle between wizard drop-down list in the Output section

by clicking New.
Add/Delete
Teach - displays the Angle Between Tolerance dialog box where you can define an 'angle between'
tolerance for the two features.
New - displays the Angle Between Tolerance dialog box where you can define an 'angle between'
478

See Also:
Main Toolbar
416
135
Output Commands
82.10 Format Output Dialog Box

82.10.1 Format Output Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Format Output dialog box to specify what is output from the part program, and where it is output
to.
The Vendor box shows what items of vendor format data can be output for toleranced features. If these
are not what you require, select a different vendor format label from the drop-down list. You can create
other vendor format labels, specifying different data to output, using the Vendor Output Format dialog
box 480 .
The Format Output dialog box adds a DISPLY command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Format in the Output section

Terminal - determines what is output to the screen.
Standard - if checked, DMIS format data is output to the screen (in the Output window).
Vendor - if checked, vendor format (VFORM) data is output to the Output window.
Output Commands
479
Storage file - determines what is output to the .out and .res storage files. These files are specified in
the New/Open Inspection dialog box, Program tab page. If you output data to these files, any data
already present in files of the same filename is deleted each time the DMIS program is started, and
replaced with current data when the DMIS program is closed. This means that you will not see your
DMIS or vendor format data in these files until the DMIS program is closed.
Standard - if checked, DMIS format data is output to the .out file.
Vendor - if checked, vendor format (VFORM) data is output to the .res file.
Printer - determines what is output to the printer as the program runs. The output is sent to the printer
specified using the DMIS Output Print Set-Up option from the File menu. A dot matrix printer will print
the output line-by-line as each line is produced. Other printer types (e.g. ink jet, laser) will only print a
pageful at a time (until the end of the program is reached when the final page will be printed) so it is
advisable to print to a local, dedicated printer so that the print is not interrupted. The font used will be
the printer's default font, unless you can change this on the printer itself.
Standard - if checked, DMIS format data is output to the printer.
Vendor - if checked, vendor format (VFORM) data is output to the printer.
Serial port - determines what is output to another device. The port used is set in the Port field in the
New/Open Inspection dialog box, Reporting tab page.
Standard - if checked, DMIS format data is output to the device attached to the serial port.
Vendor - if checked, vendor format (VFORM) data is output to the device attached to the serial port.
Vendor - determines what vendor format data can be output from your part program for toleranced
features. Type in a vendor label or select one from the drop-down list. The corresponding vendor format
output options will be displayed. If these are not what you require, use the Vendor Output Format dialog
box to set up another vendor label with the data you wish to output.
Nominal - shows nominal data in the vendor format output.
Actual - shows actual data.
Deviation - shows deviation data.
Error - shows error data.
All - shows all of the above data in the vendor format output.
Graphic - shows the contents of the graphical report from the model window in the vendor format
output.
Errors only - only tolerances in error are output. If a feature has no tolerances in error, nothing is
output for that feature. The data output for each tolerance in error is determined by what is selected
in the Nominal, Actual, Deviation, Error and All check boxes. For example, if only Actual is
checked, only the actual of the tolerance in error is output.
Features in error only - features are only output if one or more of the tolerances is in error. If so, all
the tolerances in the output statement are output. The data output for each tolerance is determined
by what is selected in the Nominal, Actual, Deviation, Error and All check boxes. For example, if
only Actual is checked, only the actual of the tolerance is output.
New - displays the Vendor Format Output dialog box, where you can create a configuration to use when
outputting vendor format data.
See Also:
450
451

168
462
480
File Menu
105

File Types
174
36
Main Toolbar
82.10.2 Vendor Output Format Dialog Box

Vendor Output Format Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Vendor Output Format dialog box to create a configuration to use when outputting vendor format
data. This determines what vendor format data can be output from your program for toleranced features.
Type in a label for the configuration, or select one from the drop-down list. Then select the output
options. When you click OK, the configuration is saved, and you can select it on the Format Output
dialog box 478 to determine what items of vendor format data can be output.
The Vendor Output Format dialog box adds a VFORM command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Vendor Format in the Output
section
Format Output dialog box, click New

Label - type in a vendor label or select one from the drop-down list. The corresponding vendor format
output options will be displayed. If these are not what you require, select other options.
Nominal - shows nominal data in the vendor format output.
Actual - shows actual data.
Deviation - shows deviation data.
Error - shows error data.
Output Commands
481
All the above - shows all of the above data in the vendor format output.
Graphic form - shows the graphical reporting information from the model window in the vendor format
output.
Errors only - only tolerances in error are output. If a feature has no tolerances in error, nothing is output
for that feature. The data output for each tolerance in error is determined by what is selected in the
Nominal, Actual, Deviation, Error and All check boxes. For example, if only Actual is checked, only the
actual of the tolerance in error is output.
Features in error only - features are only output if one or more of the tolerances is in error. If so, all
the tolerances in the output statement are output. The data output for each tolerance is determined by
what is selected in the Nominal, Actual, Deviation, Error and All check boxes. For example, if only
Actual is checked, only the actual of the tolerance is output.
See Also:
451

Model Window
462
49
Main Toolbar
82.11 Output QIS Data Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Output QIS Data dialog box to output QIS (Quality Information System) items from the part
program. Type in the report label for the report containing the QIS items, or select it from the drop-down
list and click OK. The report must first have been defined using the QIS Information dialog box 484 . If
the report contains DATE, TIME and TEMPC or TEMPF QIS parameters, the current date, time and
temperature are output. (If TECOMP is off or temperature compensation is disabled in the CMM
configuration, the current temperature is not reported.) You can output the date, time and temperature
at the time a feature was inspected using the Output Nominal/Actual Feature dialog box 465 . The data is
output to your selected devices (on the Format Output dialog box). You can also output QIS data in
report headers.
The Output QIS Data dialog box adds an OUTPUT/R( ) command to your program.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click QIS Data in the Reporting section
See Also:
478
Adding QIS Information to a Report Header 509

482
Outputting QIS Data
462
Main Toolbar
82.12 Quality Information Dialog Box

82.12.1 Quality Information Dialog Box
Quality Information Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Quality Information dialog box to select QIS (Quality Information System) statements for use in
reports. Highlight the QIS statement and double-click. A dialog box for the statement is displayed
where you can define its label and associated text. When you click OK in the dialog box, a QIS
statement is added to your program. This can then be used when creating reports in the QIS Information
dialog box 484 .
If the QIS statement is output from the DMIS program using the output commands, the QIS variables are
stored in the inspection database.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click QIS Definition in the Reporting section
See Also:
QIS Statement Dialog Box
482

Main Toolbar
42
135
Outputting QIS Data
462
Advanced Commands
82.12.2 QIS Statement Dialog Box

Output Commands
483
Purpose
Use the QIS Statement dialog box to specify the label and text for the selected QIS statement. This
picture shows the dialog box for the Clamp ID (CLMPID) statement. For most other statements, the
dialog box contains the same fields as this one.
However, the QIS Definition (QISDEF) statement allows you to create custom report items. You can
specify labels and text, and also types. For example, you could create a QISDEF statement with
Material in the Type field and steel in the Text field, and another with Material in the Type field and
plastic in the Text field, so that you could output Material: steel and Material: plastic where appropriate.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click QIS Definition in the Reporting section, highlight a
statement and double-click
See Also:
Outputting QIS Data
482
462
Main Toolbar
82.12.3 DME Software Version Dialog Box

DME Software Version Dialog Box
484
Purpose
Use the DME Software Version dialog box to specify the version of the software that created the DMIS
program. You can add the DMESWV command to a report using the QIS Information dialog box 484 ,
and then output it. This allows you to track the version number of the software that produced the output
file.
You can insert the DMESWV command using the Insert Command dialog box
201
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the DME software version command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the DMESWV command (if viewing your program as
program text)
In the Quality Information dialog box double-click the DV command
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
82.13 QIS Information Dialog Box

QIS Information Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the QIS Information dialog box to define reports on QIS data for direct output or for use when
outputting feature data. Direct output uses the OUTPUT/R( ) command, and can be considered as
'inspection level' output, i.e. it applies to your inspection program as a whole. The output of feature data
uses the OUTPUT/FA( ),TA( ),R( ) command, and can be considered as 'feature level' output, i.e. it is for
a particular feature.
Output Commands
485
You can report various items, including date and time. Specify the report label, and add the IDs and
their labels to the ID/Label list.
The QIS Information dialog box adds an R( )=REPORT command to your program.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click QIS Information in the Reporting section

Label - the report name. This is the name by which the report is identified in the R( ) part of the
command, e.g. R(report1)=REPORT.
Report Label - the label for the item selected in the Report ID field. Type in a label, or select one from
the drop-down list. If you type in a label, you must ensure it is defined in your part program using the
appropriate QIS statement dialog box.
Report ID - the ID for the report item, such as date or time, and for QIS statements (defined using the
appropriate QIS statement from the Quality Information dialog box 482 ). Select an ID from the drop-down
list.
Add - adds the item selected in the Report box to the ID/Label list.
Delete - deletes the item highlighted in the ID/Label list. This does not delete it from the Report box.
Edit - replaces the item highlighted in the ID/Label list with the items selected in the Report box.
See Also:
Outputting QIS Data
482
462
Main Toolbar
82.14 File Label Dialog Box

File Label Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the File Label dialog box to specify an internal identification (FILNAM) within the DMIS file. Type in
a text string, using ASCII printable characters. This is passed to the output file (the .out file 36 or a
device opened for the output of FDATA using the Open Device dialog box) when executed, so that the
DMIS program and its output file can be associated. FILNAM must be the first line in a DMIS output file.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click File Identifier from the
Program Header drop-down list in the Program section
486
See Also:
Output Commands
464
Main Toolbar
82.15 Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box

Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Simultaneous Requirement dialog box to define a block of simultaneous requirement
(SIMREQT) commands. These associate a group of pattern features so as to evaluate the feature
tolerances using a common datum. The datum must be a common datum for all the features and
tolerances in the group.
For details of using the SIMREQT commands, see Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous
Requirement 463 .
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Simultaneous Requirement in the Reporting section

Label - a unique name for the simultaneous requirement block.
First - uses the first candidate datum when evaluating the features.
Optimal - uses the 'best' candidate datum when evaluating features.
See Also:
Output Commands
464
Main Toolbar
82.16 End of Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box

End of Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box
Output Commands
487
Purpose
Use the End of Simultaneous Requirement dialog box to add an ENDSIMREQT (End of simultaneous
requirement) command to your part program. This indicates the end of a block of DMIS commands that
form a simultaneous requirement routine and begin with a SIMREQT (Simultaneous Requirement)
command. When the part program is run, the feature tolerances are evaluated simultaneously using a
common datum. For details, see Evaluating Features That Have a Simultaneous Requirement 463 .
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click End of Simultaneous Requirement in the Reporting
section
See Also:
Simultaneous Requirement Dialog Box
Output Commands
486
464
Main Toolbar
82.17 Output Angle Between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box

Output Angle Between Nominal/Actual Features Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Output Angle between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box to apply angle between (ANGLB)
tolerances to the actuals or nominals of two selected features. Select tolerances from the current list, or
generate new ones then apply them to the selected features.
488
The Output Angle between Nominal/Actual Features dialog box adds an Output feature (OUTPUT/FA( ),
FA( ),TA( )) command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Angle between from the Angle
between wizard drop-down list in the Output section
In the part program window, double-click the appropriate Output feature command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the OUTPUT/FA( ),FA( ),TA( ) command (if viewing your
program as program text)

actuals.
QIS/Report
box.
by clicking New.
Add/Delete
Teach - displays the Angle Between Tolerance dialog box where you can define an 'angle between'
New - displays the Angle Between Tolerance dialog box where you can define an 'angle between'
See Also:
201
472

481
Output Commands
489
416
Part Program Window
82.18 Bound Feature/Tolerance Dialog Box

Bound Feature/Tolerance Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Bound Feature/Tolerance dialog box to bound features or tolerances using nominal or actual
planes.
Cone features can be bounded using planes that have the same direction as the cone axis. This allows
the cone to be scanned in Automatic mode using a scanning canned cycle.
For circularity tolerances, bound is used to exclude one or more cross-sections of cones or cylinders,
allowing the evaluation of a local circularity. For example, to obtain the circularity of a cone at gauge
height, you must bound the gauge position using two planes, one above the position and one below, with
the positive directions of the planes pointing towards each other. You can then output this bounded
tolerance to give the circularity of the cone between the two planes.
For flatness tolerances, bound is used to isolate regions of a plane for local flatness evaluation, for
example by defining two parallel planes perpendicular to the toleranced plane.
Select a type of Tolerance or Feature and select a tolerance or feature respectively from the Label field.
Then select the bounding planes. When you click OK, a Define boundary line (BOUND command) is
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define boundary command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the BOUND command (if viewing your program as program text)
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Bound in the Output section
490

Type - select Tolerance to create a bounded tolerance. Select Feature to create a bounded feature.
Label - select the tolerance or feature to be bounded.
Bounding planes - the planes for bounding the tolerance or the feature. If bounding a tolerance, the
positive directions of the two planes must point towards each other. If bounding a cone feature, the
planes must have the same direction as the cone axis.
Actual/Nominal - select the actual or nominal bounding plane.
Add - click to add the bounding plane to the adjacent list, to be used in bounding the feature or
tolerance.
Delete - click to remove the highlighted bounding plane from the adjacent list.
See Also:
Scanning
40
780
Circularity Tolerance Dialog Box

Part Program Window
Output Commands
434
45
464
Construction Commands
83
Reporting
83.1
Reporting
Reporting
Constant reporting
The constant reporting function in CAMIO allows you to output text and graphic reports on measured
component features as the inspection program runs. For details of report types click here 491 . Text
reports output a view of the model window with labels containing data on the measured features. The
labels and their leader lines are arranged automatically around the model. Label styles, report styles
and data content can all be configured to your own requirements.
The Constant Reporting option is available from the View menu. This displays the Constant Reporting
window which displays a report on your current inspection. Use the Constant Report dialog box and the
other options available from the Constant Reporting window to configure the report if you wish to change
its layout and content.
Reporting on previous inspections
To report on previous inspections, use Studio Reporting. All your inspection data will be available in the
inspection database, including multiple inspection runs of the same program.
Profile reporting
The graphical reporting function in the model window allows you to create a profile report for certain
feature types and output it to a .html file. For details see Profile Report from the Model Window 52 .
See Also:
Saving Your Inspection Data for Reporting 491
(this link opens the Studio Reporting Help File. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the Studio
Reporting Help.)
Reporting
491
83
Constant Report Dialog Box
493
174
Report Options - Constant Reporting Window
492
42
View Menu
83.2
Saving Your Inspection Data for Reporting

Saving Your Inspection Data for Reporting
Inspection database
When you run a part program in CAMIO, a new record is created in the inspection database on the local
computer, i.e. on the computer used when carrying out the inspection. Each inspection is date and time
stamped and always available unless deleted through the CAMIO Database Admin Tool. Reports can be
created and run through Studio Reporting on any inspection stored in the CAMIO database.
See Also:
42
Reporting Help.)
83.3
Report Types
Report Types
These are the types of reports you can produce using the Constant Reporting window. You select them
as part of your report configuration on the Constant Report dialog box 493 .
Text Label - Single Piece
Shows the reported features with labels and leader lines from the labels to the associated features.
Contour Colour - Single Piece
The reported features are coloured according to the colours set up on the Tolerance Colours tab page 501
. The report has labels with leader lines to the reported features.
Full Contour - Single Piece
The reported features are coloured according to the colours set up on the Tolerance Colours tab page.
The report has no labels for the features.
On Model - Single Piece
Shows the reported features with labels positioned closely together on the CAD model. This type of
report is suitable for points taken along a curve or an edge. You can use a label type with small text and
limit the data items you report, so that your report will show, for example, the curve with a series of
labels showing errors along the curve.
See Also:
File Types
83
492
83.4
View Options - Constant Reporting Window

Use the view options in the Constant Reporting window to display, resize and position the CAD model on
the report. Note that Orbit, Pan, Zoom and Zoom to Box remain selected until you deselect them. If
you want to expand and reduce the display of the report in the window by clicking on it, you must have
deselected them.
Pan
Orbit
Zoom to Box
Zoom
Zoom
Zoom to Extents
In/Out
View
Rendered
Wireframe
Hidden Line
For details of these view options, see Model Window Toolbar Buttons
54
See Also:
83.5
83.5.1 Report Options - Constant Reporting Window

Use the report options in the Constant Reporting window to manipulate the content of the constant
report.
Configure - displays the Constant Report dialog box
the current inspection.
Labels - displays the Report Labels dialog box
data reported.
495
Options - displays the Report Options dialog box
493
where you can configure and save the report on
where you can set up report labels to determine the

501
where you can set up colours to represent
Reporting
493
tolerance bands. The tolerance bands are used in contour reports. The colours are also used in report
labels to indicate tolerances according to the colour of the text in the label.
Header - displays the Header Information dialog box 504 where you can set up the report header,
including options for inserting a logo and choosing the header text font.
See Also:
83.5.2 Constant Report Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Constant Report dialog box to create and save report configurations for constant reports.
494
Constant reports are displayed in the Constant Reporting window 83 as the inspection runs, and include
all the features inspected and output so far. You can report different data as your inspection runs by
changing the report configuration (at a Pause command in the program).
To create a new report configuration, click New and set up the options for the report. Then click Save. If
you now click OK, your new configuration is selected and the report in the Constant Reporting window is
updated with the new configuration. If you do not want to use this new configuration yet, make sure the
configuration you require is displayed in the Configuration sets drop-down list before you click OK.
To edit an existing report configuration, select it in the Configuration sets drop-down list, then make the
changes in this dialog box and click Save.
To select an existing report configuration, select it from the Configuration sets drop-down list and click
OK.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Configure

Configuration sets - the available report configurations. The configuration displayed in this drop-down
list is the one used when you click OK.
Configuration name - the name of the current report configuration. When you create a report
configuration, click New. This allows you to type in a name for the configuration in this field. When you
save the new configuration, it is listed in the Configuration sets drop-down list.
Report type - select the report type. Click here
491
for details of report types.
Labels
Select the labels for your report (you must click Set or Set all feature types to confirm your selection).
Your report labels contain data on the measured features. The Dimension option defines what data
appears in the labels, and Style defines how the labels are set out (font, colour, etc.). (The label
templates and defaults are created using options from the Report Labels dialog box 495 .) You combine
the Dimension and Style labels on your report to output the data as you require. For example, you
could specify a particular dimension label and a particular style label for circle features, while for cylinder
features you might use a different dimension label but the same style label as circle features.
Feature type - select the feature type for which you want to specify labels.
Dimension label type - select a dimension label template. When you click Set, this is assigned to the
feature type.
Style label type - select a style label template. When you click Set, this is assigned to the feature
type.
Set - assigns the current dimension and style label types to the feature in the Feature type field.
Set all feature types - assigns the current dimension and style labels to all feature types.
Page layout - displays and prints the report in either portrait or landscape orientation.
Display
Determines the display of items on the report. The contour options customise the points used in
contour reports. You can select a style and size that the points will be displayed in to suit the density
of the point cloud.
Contour size - a value that determines the size of the points used in contour reports, for example, a
value of 1.0 causes the markers for the points to be small.
Contour style - determines the markers used for the points on a contour report.
Reporting
495
Feature deviations - if checked, feature deviations are displayed in the Constant Reporting window and
printed on the report for points, curve (GCURVE) and surface (GSURF) features that have had a profile
tolerance applied (curve and surface features are shown as a number of points). The normal direction
and the deviation from the point nominal are shown. The deviations are displayed according to the
settings last saved on the Feature Deviations tab page of the Display Settings dialog box. If the feature
deviations do not display when you check this box, re-run the part program.
Feature filter
Defines what features are included in the report.
Type - if checked, the corresponding features are included in the report.
Subset - select a subset of the feature types in the report. You can select all features, or those outside
various tolerance bands. The tolerance bands are defined on the Report Options dialog box, Tolerance
Colours tab page 501 .
Suppress non-visible features - if checked, only those features visible in the model window are
included in the report.
Override label
You can override the dimension label definition to specify the data to be reported on.
Do not display - if these boxes are checked, the data is not included in the report. If Hide in-tol is
checked, this means do NOT apply the hide in-tol option, i.e. feature data for items within tolerance IS
reported.
Always display - if these boxes are checked, the data is included in the report, even if not specified in
the dimension label definition. If Hide in-tol is checked, this means DO apply the hide in-tol option, i.e.
feature data for items within tolerance is NOT reported.
New - allows you to create a new instant report.
Delete - deletes the current report configuration.
Save - saves the report configuration under the name in the Configuration name field.
OK - closes the Constant Report dialog box and applies the configuration selected when you closed it to
the constant report in the Constant Reporting window.
See Also:
Model Window
83.5.3 Report Labels Dialog Box

83.5.3.1 Report Labels Dialog Box
Report Labels Dialog Box
510
69
496
Purpose
Use the Report Labels dialog box to set up report labels. The Dimension option allows you to define
what data you want to appear in the label, and Style allows you to define how you want labels to be set
out (font, colour, etc.).
You use these Dimension and Style labels to report the information you require in the format you prefer,
by attaching them to different features on the Constant Report dialog box 493 .
You can combine the Dimension and Style labels on your report to output the data as you require. For
example, circle feature CR0 might use a particular dimension label and a particular style label, while
cylinder feature CY0 might use a different dimension label but the same style label as CR0.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Labels

Edit default - displays the Default Labels dialog box
for feature types.
497
, where you can select default label templates
Report type list - the available report type, i.e. Text Label - Single Piece.
Dimension/Style - select Dimension to specify what data you want to appear in the label. Select Style
to specify the text style, colour, etc.
Create - displays a Create Label dialog box. The content of this varies depending on whether
Dimension or Style is selected. Use this to create a label. If Dimension is selected you can specify
what data will appear in the label. If Style is selected you can specify the text style, colour, etc. for the
label.
Edit - displays the appropriate Edit Label dialog box for the label displayed in the list below the buttons.
Use this to configure the label.
Display - displays the appropriate View Label dialog box for the label displayed in the list below the
buttons. Use this to view the configuration of a label template.
Delete - displays the appropriate Delete Label dialog box for the label displayed in the list below the
buttons. These are the same as the Create Label dialog boxes but when you click OK, the label is
deleted.
Label name list - lists the available labels.
Reporting
497
Profile tolerance display

Specifies how the profile tolerance is output.
Worst value - select this to output the worst value from the profile tolerance. This may be the actual
high tolerance value or the actual low tolerance value. For example, if the actual high tolerance value is
+0.7 and the actual low tolerance value is -0.8, then -0.8 is output.
Range value - select this to output the range of the profile tolerance. For example, if the actual high
tolerance value is +0.7 and the actual low tolerance value is -0.8, then 1.5 is output.
See Also:
83

83.5.3.2 Default Labels Dialog Box
Default Labels Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Default Labels dialog box to specify which dimension and style label templates are to be used
when creating a constant report configuration. For example, if you specify dimension label type A for
circle features in the selected report type, all circle feature labels will default to type A when the report is
created using the Constant Report dialog box. You can specify the same label for all feature types if
required, or different labels for different feature types.
Select a feature type, then select a dimension label and style label for it. Click Save. Repeat this
process for all the feature types you want to set defaults for. If you click All features, this assigns the
corresponding label type to all the feature types in the Feature type drop-down list.
You must click Save to save your selections before you click Done.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Labels, click Edit default

Report type - the report type for the default labels.
Feature type - select the feature type for which you want to specify a default label.
Dimension label type - select a dimension label template. When you click Save, this is assigned to
the selected feature type.
498
Style label type - select a style label template. When you click Save, this is assigned to the selected
feature type.
Note:
The label types available are created for the report type using the Create command in the Report Labels
dialog box.
All features - assigns the current dimension or style label type to all the features listed in the Feature
type field. Using separate Dimension and Style label templates you can, for instance, create a report
which uses a common label style for various feature types which have differing dimension data, or use
individual style labels to distinguish feature types by colour.
Save - saves the selections made.
Reset all - resets all fields to the default settings.
Done - closes the dialog box. This does not save your selections, so you must click Save first if you
want to retain your selections.
See Also:
493
495
83

83.5.3.3 Single Piece Label - Create Label Dialog Box
Single Piece Label - Create Label Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Single Piece Label tab page to determine the data shown in the labels on the report displayed in
the Constant Reporting window. Type in a name for the label. Check the boxes for the dimension data
you want to show in the label (X, Y, Z, diameter, etc.), and check the boxes for the data types you want
to show in the label (nominal, actual, high tolerance, car body, etc.).
Reporting
499
Warning:
If Hide in-tol is checked, feature data that is within tolerance is not reported. This can result in labels
containing no data on your report.
When you have created the dimension label, you can select it on the Constant Report dialog box when
creating a report configuration.
Note:
If you have clicked Edit, Display or Delete on the Report Labels dialog box, this dialog box will be called
Edit Label, Display Label or Delete Label respectively.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Labels, select Dimension, click
Create

Label name - a unique name for the report dimension label.
Dimensions - the dimensions available for inclusion in the label. Here you can select the dimensions
you want to report on. Initially all dimensions are checked. Uncheck those you do not want to include
in the label.
For all - if a data type box is checked in the For all section, that data will be included for all the
dimensions checked - except where individual settings have been made in the For selected box. For
example, if you check For all - Nominal, then highlight X-axis and uncheck For selected - Nominal, the
label will display the nominal data for all the dimensions checked in the Dimensions list, except for the
X-axis. You can see which items have been unselected for certain dimensions because the
corresponding For all box is checked, but on a grey background.
For selected - these boxes become active when an individual checked dimension is highlighted. Use
the For selected boxes to modify the data types reported on for the highlighted dimension.
For example, if Nominal is checked in the For all section, you could exclude Nominal data from the
Diameter dimension by highlighting Diameter and unchecking For selected - Nominal. Nominal data
would still be included for all the other checked dimensions.
Alternatively you could uncheck all the boxes and thus exclude a selected dimension from reporting.
See Also:
83
493

83.5.3.4 Single Piece Style Label - Create Label Dialog Box
Single Piece Style Label - Create Label Dialog Box
500
Purpose
Use the Single Piece Style Label tab page to define the text style of labels used on the report displayed
in the Constant Reporting window. You can name the label, specify fonts, colours, and how you want
titles and leader lines to be displayed, etc. When you have created the style label, you can select it on
the Constant Report dialog box when creating a report configuration.
Note:
If you have clicked Edit, Display or Delete on the Report Labels dialog box, this dialog box will be called
Edit Label, Display Label or Delete Label respectively.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Labels, select Style, click
Create

Label name - a unique name for the report style label.
Swap row/columns - if checked, swaps the row/column layout of the label. The default layout is for the
dimensions to be listed down the left-hand side of the label and the data types to be ranged across the
Reporting
501
top of the label.

Number of decimal places - the number of decimal places you want shown in the data.
Field width - the width of the Actual/Nominal, High/Low tolerance, etc. fields in characters, including
the decimal point.
Decimal places - the number of decimal places shown for the Actual/Nominal, etc. data. This value
overrides that in the Number of decimal places field above it.
Abbreviated - if checked, data titles (Nominal. Actual, etc.) and tolerance titles (Diameter, etc.) are
abbreviated in the label.
Numeric part of feature ident only - if checked, only the numeric part of a feature ID is displayed in
the label, for example CR0 would be displayed as 0.
Suppress - if checked, data titles (Nominal. Actual, etc.), tolerance titles (Diameter, etc.), feature IDs
(CR0, etc), the label border and the leader line are not included in the label. (User text is not available in
Constant Reporting.)
Line len. (dots) - the length of the leader line in dots (for on-model reports). For example, if a printer
prints 300 dots per inch, a line length of 150 dots would be half an inch long.
...end - the type of pointer at the end of the line (for on-model reports). Choose 'line' to have a straight
line only, and 'arrow' to have an arrowhead at the end of the line.
Leader line start - indicates where on the label the leader line starts (for on-model reports). For
example, if you select the upper left-hand button, the leader line will start at the upper left corner of the
label. This, together with the leader line angle, determines where the label is positioned on the model.
Leader line angle - indicates the angle of the leader line from the label to the feature (for on-model
reports). This, together with the leader line start position, determines where the label is positioned on
the model.
Text font - displays the Font dialog box. Use this to specify the font style and size required for all the
label text.
Number font - displays the Font dialog box. Use this to specify the font style and size used in the data
list.
Back colour - displays the Change Item Colour dialog box where you can choose a background colour
for the labels.
See Also:
83
493
83.6
Tolerance Colours - Report Options Dialog Box

502
Purpose
Use the Tolerance Colours tab page to customise the colours of tolerances. These are then used to
show tolerance bands in contour reports, and to indicate tolerances in report labels, where the colour of
the text indicates the tolerance (for single piece reports printing to a colour printer). You can set up the
tolerance band colours and the percentage above and below tolerance that the colours represent. You
can define colour bands to represent the multiple by which a feature is above or below high and low
tolerance, and you can define a percentage threshold at which the colours used for features change
within the tolerance bands. Click the buttons to open the Change Item Colour dialog box where you can
select a colour that will represent points in each tolerance band. The diagram below shows how the
colours selected relate to the different tolerance bands.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Options

Above - the colour of points which are above the high tolerance limit by the specified multiple. In this
example the same colour is defined for points which are 4, 3 and 2 times the high tolerance limit (bands
1, 2 and 3). Click Above to open the Change Item Colour dialog box where you can select a colour to
represent points in this tolerance band. For example, you can type in 4, click Above and select orange.
The orange colour will now represent points that are four times above the high tolerance limit. You can
set three separate limits.
Reporting
503
Above high tol. - the colour of points which are above the high tolerance limit (but in this example less
than two times the high tolerance limit i.e. band 4).
Above x% of high tol. - the colour of points which are above the percentage of the high tolerance set in
the x% high tol. field. In this example points above 50% of the high tolerance limit will be displayed in
orange (band 5).
Above y% of low tol/below x% of high tol. - the colour of points which are within the percentage of
the upper and lower tolerance limits set in the x% high tol./y% low tol. fields. In this case, all points
less than 50% of the high and low tolerance limits will be displayed in green (band 6).
x% high tol. - the percentage of the high tolerance limit. Points below this percentage tolerance will be
displayed in the colour set for the middle tolerance band (in this case green, band 6). Points above this
percentage tolerance (up to the high tolerance limit) will be displayed in the next higher band (in this
case orange, band 5).
y% low tol. - the percentage of the low tolerance limit. Points below this percentage tolerance will be
displayed in the colour set for the middle tolerance band (in this case green, band 6). Points above this
percentage tolerance (up to the low tolerance limit) will be displayed in the next lower band (in this case
moss green, band 7).
Below y% of low tol. - the colour of points which are above the percentage of the low tolerance set in
the y% low tol. field. In this case, points above 50% of the low tolerance limit will be displayed in moss
green (band 7).
Below low tol. - the colour of points which are below the low tolerance limit, but less than 2 times (in
this case) the low tolerance limit (band 8).
Below - the colour of points which are below the low tolerance limit by the specified multiple. In this
example the same colour is defined for points which are 4, 3 and 2 times the low tolerance limit (bands
9, 10 and 11). Click Below to open the Change Item Colour dialog box where you can select a colour to
represent points in this tolerance band. For example, you can type in 4, click Below and select orange.
The orange colour will now represent points that are four times below the low tolerance limit. You can
set three separate limits.
Feature line width - the weight of the point styles. A higher setting will be needed for lower density
point clouds. This will help blend the points together to create the contour effect. Some printers may
need to dither to produce certain colours. If a line width of 1 is selected, the correct colour may not be
reproduced. Use a line width of at least 2. The default setting is 3.
Defaults - resets all the items on this dialog box to their default settings.
Note:
Getting the best results from Full Contour reports depends upon the balance between all of the settings.
The correct balance will be determined by the expected deviation of measured points (features) within
tolerance limits.
83.7
Car Body Options - Report Options Dialog Box

Car Body Options - Report Options Dialog Box
504
Purpose
Use the Car Body Options tab page to set up car body options when the Car Body data type is selected
on the Create Label dialog box 498 . The options allow you to add textual tags to the report to signify that
a feature's position is e.g. High, Low, Fore, Aft of its nominal position. Each tag can be a string of up to
eight characters.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Options, select the Car Body
Options tab page
83.8
Header Layout - Header Information Dialog Box
83.8.1 Header Layout - Header Information Dialog Box

Header Layout - Header Information Dialog Box
Reporting
505
Purpose
Use the Header Layout tab page to specify the content of the header on the report in theConstant
Reporting window 83 .
The header layout in use when you save the report determines what header information is displayed if
you then open the report in Studio Reporting.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Header

Font - displays the Font dialog box. Use this to specify the font size and style for the text in the report
header.
Report title - if checked, includes the report title at the top of the report header. The title is obtained
from the Constant Report dialog box, Configuration sets field.
CAD filename - if checked, includes the name of the CAD file in the report header. This is the name of
the CAD model file currently displayed in the model window.
Program name - if checked, includes the name of the .DMI program in the report header. This is the
name of the inspection program used to create the feature data.
Units - if checked, includes the CAD model units in the report header.
Tolerance legend - if checked, includes a key to the colours of the tolerance bands in the report
header.
506
Logo - if checked, includes a picture in the report header. Use the Browse button to select the picture.
Most graphics formats are supported, e.g. BMP, TIFF, JPEG.
Model WCS - if checked, includes a picture of the model WCS in the report header. The picture
represents the orientation of the model co-ordinate system consistent with the view of the model shown
on the report. This is not necessarily the same as the orientation of the part on the CMM.
Page number/Date/Day/Time - if checked, includes these items in the report header.
Input/Title
Displays the user-defined headers that will be included at the top of the report. These are set up on the
Enter User Defined Header dialog box. To display this dialog box, right-click or double-click in the Input/
Title box.
Input - not currently supported.
Title - the information in this column is printed in the report header.
See Also:
Reporting Help.)
Model Window
493
49
Enter User Defined Header Dialog Box
83.8.2 Enter User Defined Header Dialog Box

Enter User Defined Header Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Enter User Defined Header dialog box to create user-defined headers to include in reports. You
can also delete any headers you have created. User-defined headers can include information such as
component title, report compiler's name, inspection run, etc.
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Header, right-click or doubleclick in the Input/Title box

Input - not currently supported.
Title - the user-defined header title.
Delete - deletes the user-defined header.
See Also:
Header Layout - Header Information Dialog Box 504
Reporting
507
83.8.3 QIS Header - Header Information Dialog Box

83.8.3.1 QIS Header - Header Information Dialog Box
QIS Header - Header Information Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the QIS Header tab page to select QIS (Quality Information System) items from your inspection and
place them in the report header in the Constant Reporting window 83 .
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Header

Select all QIS - if checked, all QIS items are included in the report header. Checking this box ensures
that any QIS items added to a report label in your inspection after the QIS header has been defined are
included in the header. (You must make sure the OUTPUT/R command for the report label has been run
so that new items have been output.)
Suppress labels - if checked, DMIS labels (shown in the Label column) are not included in the header.
Checking this box ensures that any items added to a report label after the QIS header has been defined
do not have the label displayed in the header. (You must make sure the OUTPUT/R command for the
report label has been run so that new items have been output.)
Available labels - the QIS items available to be included in the report header.
508
Selected labels - the QIS items to be included in the report header. Use the adjacent
and
buttons to move items up and down the list, to determine the order in which they are placed on the
report header. To edit an item, right-click or double-click it. This displays the Edit Selected Label dialog
box, where you can change the content of the selected label.
New - displays the Edit Selected Label dialog box, where you can create new report labels and QIS
labels. This allows you to define labels that you have not yet added into your part program.
Add all - adds all the available report labels to the Selected labels box. To add the report labels one by
one, highlight a label and click the
button next to the Add all button.
Remove all - removes all the selected labels from the Selected labels box. To remove the report labels
one by one, highlight a label and click
next to the Remove all button.
See Also:
Edit Selected Label Dialog Box
83.8.3.2 Edit Selected Label Dialog Box
Edit Selected Label Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Edit Selected Label dialog box to create or edit a QIS item for inclusion in a report header. If
you create a new item, this will not be shown in the report header until you have:
1.
Added it into your inspection program (using the appropriate QIS statement dialog box)
2.
Added it to the appropriate report command (R( )=REPORT) (i.e. to the one which you referred to
here by its report label)
3.
Run the report command
4.
Run the corresponding OUTPUT/R command
Navigation
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Header, select the QIS Header
tab page, click New
Constant Reporting window, Report Options drop-down menu, click Header, select the QIS Header
tab page, highlight a selected label, right-click or double-click to edit the label

Report label - the DMIS report label. You can type in an existing report label (as defined in the R( )
=REPORT command created using the QIS Information dialog box) or a new one.
Type - the type of QIS item.
Reporting
509
Label - the label for the QIS item as defined in the QIS Statement dialog box.
Display label - if checked, the label of the QIS item is displayed in the report header. For example, the
label in the QIS command:
CS(Clampno)=CLMPSN/'Clamp serial number'
is Clampno.
Save - saves the label information.
See Also:
83

482

83.8.3.3 Adding QIS Information to a Report Header
Adding QIS Information to a Report Header

Displaying QIS items in the header on a constant report requires the appropriate commands to be
present in your part program. To display QIS items in the header, follow these steps.
1.
Define the QIS item in your program using the Quality Information dialog box. For example, you
could add the command PS(P1)=PARTSN/'123', to include the part serial number in your report
header.
2.
Using the QIS Information dialog box, add a report command to your program that refers to the QIS
item. In this example, for a report called 'R1', this would be R(R1)=REPORT/PS(P1).
3.
Using the Output QIS Data dialog box, add the output command OUTPUT/R( ) to output the report
command information. In our example, this would be OUTPUT/R(R1).
4.
Run the commands in steps 1-3.
5.
Display the Constant Reporting window and, from the report options in this window, select Header.
6.
In the Header Information dialog box, select the QIS Header tab page. Ensure that the report label
R1 for the QIS item P1 is added to the Selected labels list (i.e. using our example). When you click
OK, the QIS item 'Part Serial No' is added to the header on the constant report.
See Also:
482

481
492
QIS Header - Header Information Dialog Box 507

Outputting QIS Data
462
84
Print and Page Options - Constant Reporting Window

Print and Page Options - Constant Reporting Window
510
Use the print, save and page selection options in the Constant Reporting window as follows:
Print - displays the Print dialog box, where you can select the required pages and number of copies for
printing.
Save Report File - displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save the constant report as a .rpx
file and specify its name and location. The report can then be opened in Studio Reporting. The header
layout in use when you save the report is saved with it, and the configuration is obtained from the
configuration in use at the time of saving in the Constant Report dialog box 493 .
First/Last Page - display the first and the last pages of the report respectively.
Previous/Next Page - display the page before and the page after the current page respectively.
Choose Page - displays the Choose Page to Display dialog box, where you can select which page of
the report to display in the Constant Reporting window. The dialog box also tells you how many pages
the report has.
See Also:
File Types
83
36
Reporting Help.)
85

If no labels are displayed:
You must have output some data in order to have labels in your Constant Reporting window. Check
in the Output window that you have outputted data.
The features you are reporting on may not be visible. Try unchecking the Suppress non-visible
features box on the Constant Report dialog box, then click Save then OK. Or click the
(Zoom to Extents) button on the Constant Reporting window toolbar.
If the labels are displayed as black boxes:
Your labels contain colour but your printer is black and white. Select the Print Set-Up option from
the File menu and select a colour printer. You must then refresh the display of the report. You can
do this by selecting Configure from the Report options in the Constant Reporting window and
clicking OK. Alternatively, use a label style that is black and white.
511
If the labels contain no data:

Your features are all within tolerance and you have checked the Hide in-tol box on the Single Piece
Label dialog box or the Constant Report dialog box.
You may have labels selected that are not appropriate to your data. Check the labels selected for
the feature type on the Constant Report dialog box.
If the model image in the Constant Reporting window is very small:
Click Zoom to Extents from the View options.
If the leader lines from your labels do not point to the associated features on the model:
You may be using a part program in which a work cell was previously applied to the model. You
should select the same work cell when selecting the model file, or you may find that the leader lines
from your report labels do not point to the features on the model. You can correct this by using the
Load Work Cell command from the Model menu to select the appropriate work cell used when the
program was saved.
See Also:
Output Window
83
82
493
492
Single Piece Label - Create Label Dialog Box
498
Model Menu
86
86.1

This information is for LK and C3 machines with an LK CMM Driver and Controller and factory-fitted
temperature sensors. If Temp Comp is being integrated to a C3 CMM which has no factory-fitted sensors
and wiring, then see UK864 for instructions. For other configurations, temperature compensation is dealt
with by the provider of the server.
Temp Comp requires a licence and thermal sensors are only fitted as standard to the higher accuracy
LK V CMMs (the Evolution and Libero range). It is also recommended for all large CMMs, particularly rail
machines. It is essential that the CMM is fully error corrected using VECPD according to Technical
Memo UK676 and that Temperature Compensation is switched on before CMMA.dmi is run and the
scaling factors collected. Note that CMMs with Heidenhain or RSF scales will require different thermal
compensation to machines with Renishaw (bonded) scales. In some cases, it may be necessary to
disable TComp on some axes by customising the loop file (see UK605).
The MCC200 (and ACT-AIM) controllers have four channels for temperature sensors, three for the X, Y
and Z axes and one for the part or component. With large CMMs and rail machines, additional sensors
can be used by fitting an expansion card (SBA0073) to the controller motherboard. This provides an
additional 8 channels, which are numbered 1 - 8, but effectively become channels 5 - 12. The connection
512
instructions are to be found in the text file that accompanies the thermal definition (loop) file (see Step 1
- Configuration Files for Temperature Compensation 514 ). Note that systems using CMES (up to version
5.3) will require an External TComp Box (UK679, UK756, UK604 and UK642) which bypasses the LK
Controller, and must use customer-specific loop files. Current versions of CMES operate through the
CAMIO CMM Driver and use the built-in 4-channel TComp, SBA0073 expansion card and standard loop
files (see UK814).
Standard 4-channel Temp Comp connections:
Loom connection panel on rear of MCC200 controller

X, Y, Z, P - three axes and part (component)
1, 2, 3, 4 - temp sensor connections
A typical 7-channel arrangement:
SBA0073 Expansion card:
1 = X+ Sensor
2 = Y+ Sensor
513
3 = Z+ (lower) Sensor
4 = Component
5 = X- Sensor
6 = Y- Sensor
7 = Z- (upper) Sensor
Manual temperature compensation

If the CMM does not have factory-fitted temperature sensors, or they are not to be used for any reason
(eg when there is a temperature-controlled environment), then manual (or fixed) temperature
compensation can be used:
1.
The CMM has to be On-line. From the CAMIO Menu bar, check that On-line is ticked. This
procedure will also work with the CMM Simulator.
2.
Use the CAMIO Options menu to select CMM Configure... You must have sufficient privileges for
this (see User Privileges in the CAMIO Help). Click OK on the warning dialog.
3.
Select the Temperature Compensation tab. Ensure that the Compensation type is set to Local and
the correct file name for the CMM is entered. This must correspond exactly with the file name in C:
\LK\Appdata\Tcomp. Tick the box for Use fixed temperature values and click the OK button to save
the changes to the CMM configuration. These changes will not have any effect until CAMIO is
closed down and reopened.
4.
After CAMIO is restarted, open the CMM configuration dialog again to the Temperature
Compensation tab. The Fixed temperature values will appear in the list box and can be modified
individually by double-clicking each value in turn, or use Set all to change all the values to a new
temperature. Only 4 channels are available with manual compensation - 1, 2, and 3 are for the X, Y
and Z axes and 4 is for the component or part. Click OK to save the changes.
514
86.2
Configuring CAMIO for Temperature Compensation
86.2.1 Configuring CAMIO for Temperature Compensation

Configuring CAMIO for Temperature Compensation
This information is for LK and C3 machines with a Metris driver and controller (for other configurations
temperature compensation is dealt with by the provider of the server).
Follow these steps to configure CAMIO for temperature compensation:
Step 1 - Configuration Files for Temperature Compensation 514
Step 2 - Configuring the CMM Driver for Temperature Compensation517
Step 3 - Enabling Temperature Compensation in CAMIO 519
Step 4 - Setting the Probe Assembly Expansion Value
521
Step 5 - Creating a Local Thermal Datum
86.2.2 Step 1 - Definition Files for Temperature Compensation

Step 1 - Definition Files for Temperature Compensation
Three types of definition file are used. A complete set is installed by running the TempCompVNpn.exe
installation, downloaded from the 'thermal loops' folder on the LK Engineering CD, or from the Metris UK
FTP site and the Metris Online Support website. This utility will be upgraded when required, so "Npn" will
be the latest version, starting at 1p0. It installs the currently available files in the C:\LK\Appdata\TCOMP
folder. The three file types are:
thermal_loop.def (where 'thermal_loop' is a name which indicates the machine type and may also refer
to the type of granite)
The 'thermal loop' file containing machine components, e.g. scales and materials, and sensor allocation.
thermal_loop.txt (where 'thermal_loop' is the name from the corresponding thermal loop (.def) file)
A description of the thermal loop file. This file provides information, eg the required sensors listed by
515
position on the CMM and the channel they should be connected. It is not essential for the operation of
Materials.def
A file common to all machines, providing coefficient of expansion values for all of the materials used.
Temperature compensation requires data about the components in the 'thermal loop' or path within which
temperature will affect measurement accuracy. The thermal loop includes all components, even variables
such as the part and probe assembly. If the component to be measured is small compared to the total
measurement volume, any corrections applied may exceed the total error, especially if there is a long
length of granite between the part and the control point. To reduce this potential error, CAMIO can
eliminate some of the machine components from the thermal loop calculations. This is 'Local'
compensation. 'Global' compensation includes all components. The type of compensation is selected on
the Temperature Compensation tab page of the CMM Driver Configuration dialog box. For details see
Step 2 - Configuring the CMM Driver for Temperature Compensation514 .
The currently available files are as follows:
Machine type and size
Definition File.
Text File.
Ascent (4 sensor)
Ascent.def
Ascent.txt
Ascent (7 sensor)
Ascent_7Sensor.def
Ascent_7Sensor.txt
C3 V 30.20.10 50.25.15 G
Athena.def
Athena.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (4
sensor)
Bridge_Impala.def
Bridge_Impala.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (7
sensor)
Bridge_Impala_7Sensor.def
Bridge_Impala_7Sensor.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (4
sensor)
Bridge_Kuru.def
Bridge_Kuru.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (7
sensor)
Bridge_Kuru_7Sensor.def
Bridge_Kuru_7Sensor.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (4
sensor)
Bridge_Lanhelin.def
Bridge_Lanhelin.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (7
sensor)
Bridge_Lanhelin_7Sensor.def
Bridge_Lanhelin_7Sensor.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (4
sensor)
Bridge_Qianshao.def
Bridge_Qianshao.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (7
sensor)
Bridge_Qianshao_7Sensor.def
Bridge_Qianshao_7Sensor.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (4
sensor)
Bridge_Vire.def
Bridge_Vire.txt
LK V 8.7.6 - 60.25.20 (7
sensor)
Bridge_Vire_7Sensor.def
Bridge_Vire_7Sensor.txt
C3 V 7.7.5 - 24.10.10
Hera.def
Hera.txt
C3 V (black granite in X)
C3bridge_x_black_gr.def
C3bridge_x_black_gr.txt
516
C3 V 5.4.4 - 6.5.4
EOS.def
EOS.txt
LK V 6.5.4 - 30.15.15 (4
sensor)
G90C.def
G90C.txt
LK V 6.5.4 - 30.15.15 (7
sensor)
G90C_7Sensor.def
G90C_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(4 sensor)
HC90_Impala.def
HC90_Impala.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Left)
HC90_Impala_Left_7Sensor.def
HC90_Impala_Left_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Right)
HC90_Impala_Right_7Sensor.def
HC90_Impala_Right_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(4 sensor)
HC90_Kuru.def
HC90_Kuru.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Left)
HC90_Kuru_Left_7Sensor.def
HC90_Kuru_Left_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Right)
HC90_Kuru_Right_7Sensor.def
HC90_Kuru_Right_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(4 sensor)
HC90_Lanhelin.def
HC90_Lanhelin.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Left)
HC90_Lanhelin_Left_7Sensor.def
HC90_Lanhelin_Left_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Right)
HC90_Lanhelin_Right_7Sensor.def
HC90_Lanhelin_Right_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(4 sensor)
HC90_Qianshao.def
HC90_Qianshao.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Left)
HC90_Qianshao_Left_7Sensor.def
HC90_Qianshao_Left_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Right)
HC90_Qianshao_Right_7Sensor.def
HC90_Qianshao_Right_7Sensor.
txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(4 sensor)
HC90_Vire.def
HC90_Vire.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Left)
HC90_Vire_Left_7Sensor.def
HC90_Vire_Left_7Sensor.txt
LK H 10.4.6 - 100.16.30
(7 sensor Right)
HC90_Vire_Right_7Sensor.def
HC90_Vire_Right_7Sensor.txt
C3 V 15.13.10 33.20.15
Kronos.def
Kronos.txt
LY90
LY90.def
LY90.txt
C3 V 25.15.10 120.25.20 GP
MCT.def
MCT.txt
C3 H 20.10.15 60.15.20 T
SwanL.def
SwanL.txt
C3 H 20.10.12 60.16.25 R
SwanSI.def
SwanSI.txt
LK V 30.30.25 160.50.40
Ultima_G_rail.def
Ultima_G_rail.txt
LK V 30.30.25 160.50.40
Ultima_G_7Sensors.def
Ultima_G_7Sensors.txt
DEA Global
DEA_Global.def
DEA_Global.txt
ALL CMMs
Materials.def
517
86.2.3 Step 2 - Configuring the CMM Driver for Temperature Compensation

Step 2 - Configuring the CMM Driver for Temperature Compensation
This information is for LK machines with a Metris driver and controller (for other configurations
On the Temperature Compensation tab page:
1.
Ensure that the Use fixed temperature values field is unchecked.
2.
Select Local in the Compensation type field.
3.
Ensure that the name of the temperature compensation (.def) file for the CMM is present in the
Filename field.
If using an on board temperature interface:

1.
On the Temperature Compensation tab page, check Enable controller messages.
518
2.
Ensure that there is a value in the Interval between messages field. The default value is 600, in units
of 0.1 seconds. Therefore the value of 600 represents an interval of one minute between readings.
If using an external temperature interface:

1.
On the Comms1 tab page select the appropriate COM port in the Temp. sensor interface port field:
2.
On the Temperature Compensation tab page ensure that Enable controller messages is unchecked:
519
86.2.4 Step 3 - Enabling Temperature Compensation in CAMIO

Step 3 - Enabling Temperature Compensation in CAMIO
Temperature compensation must be enabled in the DMIS part program, as the default is always off.
Nikon Metrology also recommends that all temperature compensation commands are included in all part
programs. The temperatures are automatically updated every minute, so once temperature
compensation is enabled, it remains on. If CAMIO is closed down, temperature compensation must be
re-enabled when you start it again.
To enable temperature compensation:
1.
Select the units for temperature on the Units dialog box
748
520
2.
Set temperature compensation on using the Temperature Compensation dialog box
3.
Set the coefficient of expansion for the part being inspected, using the Thermal Datum option in the
Thermal Compensation section of the Machine tab. This displays the Call Routine dialog box 915
with Software selected and PARTDEFS selected from the Routine drop-down list. Double-click in
the Arguments field to display the Part Temperature Compensation dialog box where you can enter
the coefficient of expansion:
754
The coefficient of expansion is used until a new coefficient of expansion is specified in the part
program.
521
86.2.5 Step 4 - Setting the Probe Assembly Expansion Value

Step 4 - Setting the Probe Assembly Expansion Value
The probe assembly can have a major impact on thermal errors. To compensate, the coefficient of
expansion is required for each probe configuration used. You can use the CAMIO Probe Wizard to
create a model of the probe and this will calculate the coefficient of expansion for the probe assembly if
you require it.
To specify the coefficient of expansion for the probe assembly:
Set the coefficient of expansion for the probe assembly,using the Probe CofE option in the Thermal
Compensation section of the Machine tab. This displays the Call Routine dialog box 915 with Software
selected and PROBECOFE selected from the Routine drop-down list. Double-click in the Arguments
field to display the Probe Temperature Compensation dialog box where you can enter the coefficient of
expansion:
The coefficient of expansion is stored with all probe calibrations.
86.2.6 Step 5 - Creating a Local Thermal Datum

Step 5 - Creating a Local Thermal Datum
The thermal datum is a point generated from any measured or constructed feature that the component or
fixture will in theory expand from. The method used to clamp or fixture the component dictates the
thermal datum position. It will also vary depending on the part.
Ideally the feature is a measured or constructed point that the part will expand from. Sometimes the
thermal datum may only be estimated, but the point used can be edited at any time if it is proved
incorrect. The correct coefficient of expansion must be used.
To create a thermal datum:
Select the feature to use as the thermal datum and set the coefficient of expansion for the part being
inspected, using the Thermal Datum option in the Thermal Compensation section of the Machine tab.
This displays the Call Routine dialog box 915 , with Software selected and PARTDEFS selected from the
Routine drop-down list. Double-click in the Arguments field to display the Part Temperature
Compensation dialog box where you can enter the feature to use and the coefficient of expansion of the
part:
522
87
Calculating Temperature Compensation

Calculating Temperature Compensation
International Standards
All engineering drawings are drawn and dimensioned at 20 C. This is rarely specified but is an agreed
international standard and can be assumed. Any length is only valid if the temperature it was measured
at is stated. If components are measured at a temperature other than 20 C, the length must be
compensated back to what it would have measured at 20 C.
ASME B89 Specification
The ASME B89 standard provides this calculation for temperature compensation:
CMR = MR.[L2 + Ksx.(Tsx- 20).X2 + Ksy.(Tsy - 20).Y2 + Ksz.(Tsz - 20).Z2 - Kg.(Tg - 20).L2]/L2
where:
CMR
Corrected machine
reading
Ksx Expansion coefficient of X scale
MR
Machine reading
Ksy Expansion coefficient of Y scale
Kg
Expansion coefficient of
calibration gauge
Ksz Expansion coefficient of Z scale
Tg
Temperature of calibration Tsy Temperature of Y scale

gauge
Tsx
Temperature of X scale
Tsz Temperature of Z scale
The equation assumes that there is no temperature change during the measurement cycle. The thermaI
error is referred to in B89 as a differential error to indicate that the machine reading will be in error by an
amount which is dependent upon two effects: scale and gauge expansion. It is not possible to correct
for this error by compensating for one of these effects.
The Metris temperature compensation packages perform this calculation and output CMR values when
temperature compensation is on and MR values when temperature compensation is off.
Feature (Declare) Commands
88
88.1
523
Purpose
The Feature commands allow you to define feature nominals. The feature nominal is used as the target
for inspection if the feature is measured in Automatic mode 40 .
You can add Feature commands to your program using the Construct Nominal Feature section from the
Construct menu. Click a feature type. The Feature dialog box is displayed with nominal values and a
label for the feature. You can change these if necessary, by overtyping or by picking a feature from the
CAD model, then click Ok to insert the feature command into your program.
Feature commands are also added by CAMIO when you inspect or construct a feature. The Feature
dialog boxes can also be accessed by double-clicking the appropriate command in the part program
window. The corresponding feature is highlighted on the CAD model if this is open in the model window.
For most feature types, you can pick another feature of the same type on the CAD model and the
nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also edit the values in the
dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is redrawn.
Point
Arc
523
526
Parallel Plane
Round Slot
Surface
543
Circle
525
Line
Plane
529
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
541
Square Slot
534
534
Surface (from
05.0) 539
538
Curve (from 05.0) Pattern
530
542
527
531
Edge Point
Curve
533
535
Compound
545
537

See Also:
Part Program Window
Model Window
45
49
CAMIO Structure
43
88.2

524
Purpose
Use the Point Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/POINT command. The selected feature is highlighted on the CAD
model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different point feature on the CAD model and
the nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also edit the values in
the dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is redrawn.
Construct tab. Click a feature type. Nominal values and a label for the feature are displayed in the Grid
window 76 and the Properties window 90 . You can change these if necessary, then click Apply to
insert the feature command into your program.
Feature commands are also added by CAMIO when you inspect or construct a feature.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define point command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/POINT command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, select Point in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Label - the unique label for the current feature. You can select any feature available in this list, or type
in a new one. Data relating to an existing feature is displayed in the dialog box.
Position - the location of the point. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in either
rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle,
height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar
angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Normal - the direction of the surface normal at the location of the point (pointing away from the part if
appropriate).
n.00 - click this if you wish to round off the co-ordinates in the X, Y and Z (rectangular) or R, A and H
(polar) data fields and use these as nominals. The value entered into the Rounding field on the
Reverse - use this to reverse the direction of the normal relative to the feature.
525
See Also:
Part Program Window
Teach Path View
45
94
283
120
88.3

Purpose
Use the Circle Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/CIRCLE command. The selected feature is highlighted on the
CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different circle feature on the CAD
model and the nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also edit the
values in the dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is redrawn.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define circle command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/CIRCLE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Circle in the Construct Nominal Feature section
526
Centre - the location of the centre of the feature. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in
either rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius,
angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A
polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Plane - the direction vector of the plane that the feature lies in.
Diameter - type in the nominal diameter of the feature.
Type - select the option that describes the current feature - either inner or outer.
See Also:
Part Program Window
Teach Path View
45
94
Circles on Plane Dialog Box
295
120
88.4
Arc Feature Dialog Box

Arc Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Arc Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/ARC command. The selected feature is highlighted on the CAD
model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different arc feature on the CAD model and
527
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define arc command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/ARC command (if viewing your program as program text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Arc in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Type - select the option that describes the current feature - either inner or outer. If the 4 point box is
checked, the measurement information is used to define the arc with four points, i.e. centre, start, mid
and end points.
Radius - type in the radius of the arc (from its centre).
Start angle - type in the angle at which the arc will start. This is defined as the angle from the current
major axis, taken in a positive direction toward the minor axis. The major and minor axes are as defined
in the WKPLAN (work plane). The first letter signifies the major axis and the second the minor axis, i.e.
XY - where X is the major axis and Y is the minor axis.
Incl. angle - type in the sweep of the arc from its start position to its end position.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
88.5
Cylinder Feature Dialog Box

Cylinder Feature Dialog Box
528
Purpose
Use the Cylinder Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/CYLNDR command. The selected feature is highlighted on
the CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different cylinder feature on the CAD
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define cylinder command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/CYLNDR command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Cylinder in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Position - the location of the centre of the feature. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in
Axis - the direction vector of the plane that the feature lies in.
Bound - if the feature is bounded, select Enabled and type in the length of the cylinder.
529
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
88.6
Plane Feature Dialog Box

Plane Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Plane Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/PLANE command. The selected feature is highlighted on the
CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different plane feature on the CAD
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define plane command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/PLANE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Plane in the Construct Nominal Feature section

530
Position - the location of a point on the plane. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in
Direction - the direction of the normal to the surface of the plane (pointing away from the part if
appropriate).
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
88.7
Line Feature Dialog Box

Line Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Line Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/LINE command. The selected feature is highlighted on the CAD
model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different line feature on the CAD model and
531
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define line command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/LINE command (if viewing your program as program text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Line in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Normal - the normal vector of the plane that the line lies in.
Direction - the direction of the line.
Position - the location of a point on the line. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in either
Bound - select Yes to specify that the line is bounded, i.e. has a specified length. Type in its coordinates in the Start/End fields.
Start/End - the nominal X, Y and Z co-ordinates for the start and end points of the line.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45

88.8
Cone Feature Dialog Box

Cone Feature Dialog Box
120
532
Purpose
Use the Cone Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/CONE command. The selected feature is highlighted on the CAD
model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different cone feature on the CAD model and
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define cone command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/CONE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Cone in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Vertex - the location of the vertex of the cone. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the vertex in
Axis - the direction vector of the axis of the cone, pointing away from the vertex towards the base.
Angle - specify the angle of the cone.
533
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
88.9
Edge Point Feature Dialog Box

Edge Point Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Edge Point Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/EDGEPT command. The selected feature is highlighted on
the CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different edge point feature on the
CAD model and the nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also
edit the values in the dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is
redrawn.
Feature commands are also added by CAMIO when you inspect or construct a feature. EDGEPT
commands are added to your program by CAMIO when you create an inspection path for edge points
using the Curve option (see Surface Measurement - Curve Options 390 ).
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define edge command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/EDGEPT command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Edge Point in the Construct Nominal Feature section
534

Position - the location of the edge point. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in either
Edge - the vector normal to and pointing away from the edge in which the edge point lies.
Surface - the vector normal to and pointing away from the surface adjacent to the edge in which the
edge point lies.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Part Program Window
45
120
88.10 Slot Feature Dialog Box

Slot Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Slot Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/CPARLN command. The selected feature is highlighted on the
CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different slot feature on the CAD model
and the nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also edit the values
in the dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is redrawn.
535
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define slot command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/CPARLN command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Round Slot or Square Slot in the Construct Nominal
Feature section

Centre - the location of the centre point of the slot. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location
in either rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius,
Width - type in the nominal width of the feature.
Length - type in the nominal length of the slot feature. For an open-end slot type in an approximate
length.
Form - define the slot as either square-, round- or open-ended.
Plane - a vector normal to and pointing away from the surface in which the slot feature lies.
Orientation - the orientation vector for the slot length, perpendicular to the normal vector.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45

88.11 Curve Feature Dialog Box

120
536
Purpose
Use the Curve Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/GCURVE command. This version of the Curve Feature dialog box
is displayed if the FEAT/GCURVE command is a DMIS 3.0 or 04.0 version command. The selected
feature is highlighted on the CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different
curve feature on the CAD model and the nominal values in the Feature dialog box are changed
accordingly. You can also edit the values in the dialog box, and the feature is adjusted accordingly in
the model window when it is redrawn.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define curve command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GCURVE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Curve in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Position - the location of a point on the plane in which the curve lies. Choose Rectangular or Polar to
define the location in either rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to
R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current WKPLAN
(work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Plane - the direction of the plane that the curve lies in.
See Also:
537
Curve Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0) 537

Part Program Window
45
120
88.12 Curve Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)

Curve Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)
Purpose
Use the Curve Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/GCURVE command. This version of the Curve Feature dialog box
is displayed if the FEAT/GCURVE command is a DMIS 05.0 or higher version command. This version of
the FEAT/GCURVE command contains enough information to allow the curve to be measured in
Automatic mode.
Construct tab. Feature commands are also added by CAMIO when you inspect or construct a feature.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define curve command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GCURVE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Curve in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Label - the unique label for the curve feature. You can select any feature available in this list, or type in
a new one. Data relating to the specified feature is displayed in the dialog box.
Plane
538
The Plane options define the plane that the curve lies in.
Position - the position of the plane that the curve lies in.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates of the points in the Curve
points list in either rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H
(radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work
plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Plane - the normal of the plane that the curve lies in.
Reverse - reverses the direction in the i, j, k fields. For the curve points, this does not change the
highlighted point until you click Modify.
Point
The Point options define the points on the curve. There must be at least two curve points defined.
Position - the position of a point on the curve.
Direction - the local surface normal of the curve point.
Add - adds the point details to the Curve points list, at the bottom of the list.
Insert - inserts the point details in the Curve points list, immediately above the highlighted point.
Modify - replaces the highlighted point with the values in the Position and Direction boxes.
Curve points - lists the points on the curve feature. The order of the points determines the order in
which the points are taken, or the scan path if scanning the curve. You can add more points to the list
using the Position and Direction boxes, and clicking Add or Insert. Points are also added to the list from
the picked curve. (The number of points added depends on the setting on the Picking tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box.)
Delete - deletes the highlighted point from the Curve points list.
See Also:
535

40
58
88.13 Surface Feature Dialog Box

Purpose
539
Use the Surface Feature dialog box to select a GSURF feature in the Label field. This modifies the
corresponding FEAT/GSURF command. This version of the Surface Feature dialog box is displayed if
the FEAT/GSURF command is a DMIS 3.0 or 04.0 version command.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define surface command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GSURF command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Surface in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Rectangular/Polar - not currently used.
See Also:
Surface Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0) 539
Part Program Window
45
88.14 Surface Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)

Surface Feature Dialog Box (from DMIS 05.0)
540
Purpose
Use the Surface Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/GSURF command. This version of the Surface Feature
dialog box is displayed if the FEAT/GSURF command is a DMIS 05.0 or higher version command. This
version of the FEAT/GSURF command contains enough information to allow the surface to be measured
in Automatic mode.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define surface command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GSURF command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Surface in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Label - the unique label for the surface feature. You can select any feature available in this list, or type
in a new one. Data relating to the specified feature is displayed in the dialog box.
Position - the position of a point on the surface. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates
of the points in the Surface points list in either rectangular or polar co-ordinates. The X, Y, Z, fields
(rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined
in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Direction - the local surface normal of the surface point.
Reverse - reverses the direction of the highlighted point.
541
Add - adds the point details to the Surface points list, at the bottom of the list.
Insert - inserts the point details in the Surface points list, immediately above the highlighted point.
Modify - replaces the highlighted point with the values in the Position and Direction boxes.
Surface points - lists the points on the surface feature. The order of the points determines the order in
which the points are taken, or the scan path if scanning the surface. You can add more points to the list
using the Position and Direction boxes, and clicking Add or Insert. Points are also added to the list from
the picked surface. (The number of points added depends on the setting on the Picking tab page of the
Display Settings dialog box.)
Delete - deletes the highlighted point from the Surface points list.
See Also:
538

40
523
88.15 Sphere Feature Dialog Box

Sphere Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Sphere Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/SPHERE command. The selected feature is highlighted on
the CAD model if this is open in the model window. You can pick a different sphere feature on the CAD
542
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define sphere command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/SPHERE command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Sphere in the Construct Nominal Feature section
Calibrate Sensor dialog box, New button
Calibration Update dialog box, New button

Centre - the location of the centre of the sphere. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the location in
Orientation - the orientation of the plane where the semi-sphere lies or the orientation of the sphere
stem.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45

Calibrate Sensor Dialog Box
120
728
Calibration Update Dialog Box
843
88.16 Pattern Feature Dialog Box

Pattern Feature Dialog Box
543
Purpose
Use the Pattern Feature dialog box to define the parameters for a pattern feature - a group of circles,
cylinders, slots or parallel planes defined as a single feature. This creates a FEAT/PATERN command.
If you open the Pattern Feature dialog box from the Inspect toolbar, a MEAS/PATERN command is also
inserted in your program when you click OK.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define pattern command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/PATERN command (if viewing your program as program
text)
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Pattern in the Construct Nominal Feature section

Feature type - select the type of feature to be included. Only previously defined circle, cylinder, slot
and parallel plane features are available for selection.
Features - select a feature from the list of available feature and click Add to add this to the list on the
left-hand window. The Delete button will remove the highlighted feature from the list.
See Also:
Part Program Window
Inspecting Features
45
272
88.17 Parallel Planes Feature Dialog Box

Parallel Planes Feature Dialog Box
544
Purpose
Use the Parallel Planes Feature dialog box to define the nominal values for a parallel planes feature.
This creates a FEAT/PARPLN command.
If the feature already exists, it is highlighted on the CAD model if this is open in the model window. You
can pick a different parallel planes feature on the CAD model and the nominal values in the Feature
dialog box are changed accordingly. You can also edit the values in the dialog box, and the feature is
adjusted accordingly in the model window when it is redrawn.
Bilateral Position tolerance 424 (TOL/CORTOL) can be used to evaluate parallel planes only when the
direction of evaluation is the same as the normal direction of the centre plane. The evaluation in other
directions is meaningless because the centre of centre plane is not fixed.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Parallel Plane in the Construct Nominal Feature
section
In the part program window, double-click the Define feature parallel planes command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/PARPLN command (if viewing your program
as program text)

Centre position - type in the co-ordinates of a point in a plane lying centrally between the two parallel
planes.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used. The X, Y, Z fields
(rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined
in the current WKPLAN (work plane).
545
Plane 1 position/Plane 2 position - type in the co-ordinates for a point in each of the two opposite
planes.
Plane 1 normal/Plane 2 normal - specify the directions of the normals for the two opposite planes.
Reverse - use this to reverse the directions of the Plane 1 and Plane 2 normals relative to the features.
Width - type in the nominal width of the feature.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
88.18 Compound Feature Dialog Box

Compound Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Compound Feature dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/COMPOUND command.
Feature commands are added by CAMIO when you inspect or construct a feature.
Select a feature type for the compound feature, then use the options in the Features box to add the
features that make up the compound feature. Specify the position and direction of the compound feature
and click OK.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define feature command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/COMPOUND command (if viewing your program as
program text)
546
After customising the toolbars, select Declare Compound

Feature type - select the type of compound feature. The adjacent drop-down list displays the available
features appropriate to the selected feature type. For axial compound features, only coaxial axial
features such as cones or cylinders can be used. For plane compound features, only coplanar features
such as planes can be used. For sphere compound features, only spheres that share the same centre
point can be used.
Features - the features that make up the compound feature. Select a feature in the drop-down list and
click Add to add it to the list of features for the selected type of compound feature.
Add/Delete - click Add to add the feature highlighted in the Features drop-down list to the list of
features for the compound feature. Highlight a feature in the list of features and click Delete to remove it.
Direction - the direction vector of the plane that the feature lies in. For an axial feature, the direction
vector is along the axis of the axial feature. For a planar feature, the direction vector is the plane normal
pointing away from the part.
See Also:
120
88.19 Geometry Point Feature Dialog Box

Geometry Point Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Geometry Point Feature dialog box to edit a FEAT/GEOM command in your program. This
command is added automatically by CAMIO when performing a Compare to CAD function (see
Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378 ), or you can add it using this dialog box.
The command defines the nominal values for a GEOM feature. This allows you to create an additional
547
feature for each touch point, that obtains its nominal value by finding the nearest point on the CAD
model.
Type in a name for the GEOM feature and select the geometry to which the points will be compared.
Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used for the feature.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define feature GEOM command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GEOM command (if viewing your program as
program text)

Label - type in a name for the GEOM feature, or use the default name provided.
Geometry - select the geometry from the CAD model to which the feature will be compared.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used for the feature. X, Y
and Z co-ordinates are used for rectangular co-ordinates, and R, A and H (radius, angle, height) are used
for polar co-ordinates.
88.20 Geometry Surface Feature Dialog Box

Geometry Surface Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Geometry Surface Feature dialog box to edit a FEAT/GEOMSURF command in your part
program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define feature GEOMSURF command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GEOMSURF command (if viewing your

Label - type in a name for the GEOMSURF surface feature, or use the default name provided.
Geometry - select the geometry from the CAD model to which the points in the surface feature will be
compared.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used for the points in the
surface feature. X, Y and Z co-ordinates are used for rectangular co-ordinates, and R, A and H (radius,
angle, height) are used for polar co-ordinates.
548
88.21 Geometry Curve Feature Dialog Box

Geometry Curve Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Geometry Curve Feature dialog box to edit a FEAT/GEOMCURVE command in your part
program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define feature GEOMCURVE command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/GEOMCURVE command (if viewing your

Label - type in a name for the GEOMCURVE curve feature, or use the default name provided.
Geometry - select the geometry from the CAD model to which the points in the curve feature will be
compared.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used for the points in the
curve feature. X, Y and Z co-ordinates are used for rectangular co-ordinates, and R, A and H (radius,
angle, height) are used for polar co-ordinates.
88.22 Gap & Flush Feature Dialog Box

Gap & Flush Feature Dialog Box
549
Purpose
Use the Gap & Flush Feature dialog box to define the nominal values for a gap feature. This creates a
FEAT/OBJECT,GAP command, which defines a gap feature between a pair of flat surfaces.
Nominal values and a label for the feature are displayed in the Gap & Flush Feature dialog box. You can
change these if necessary, then click OK to insert the feature command into your program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define object command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,GAP command (if viewing your program as
program text)

Normal - the normal vector of the plane that the feature lies in.
550
Direction - the direction of the feature.

Position - the location of the centre of the feature.
Gap - the nominal distance between the two sides of the gap.
Flush - the nominal difference in level between the two sides of the gap.
Length - the length of the scan.
n.00 - click this if you wish to round off the co-ordinates in the X, Y and Z (data fields and use these as
nominals. The value entered into the Rounding field on the Miscellaneous tab page on the Configuration
dialog box determines the factor for rounding.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
356
135
Part Program Window
45
523
88.23 Hexagonal Slot Dialog Box

Hexagonal Slot Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Hexagonal Slot dialog box to define the nominal values for a hexagonal slot feature. This
creates a FEAT/OBJECT,...,'HEXHOLE' command, which defines a hexagonal slot.
Nominal values and a label for the feature are displayed in the Hexagonal Slot dialog box. You can
change these if necessary, then click Apply to insert the feature command into your program.
Navigation
551
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,...,'HEXHOLE' command (if viewing your

Centre - the co-ordinates of the centre of the hexagon.
Corner - the co-ordinates of a corner of the hexagon. This defines the size of the hexagon.
n.00 - click this if you wish to round off the co-ordinates in the X, Y and Z data fields and use these as
See Also:
Main Toolbar
357
135
Part Program Window
45
523
88.24 Key Slot Dialog Box

Key Slot Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Key Slot dialog box to define the nominal values for a key slot feature. This creates a FEAT/
OBJECT,...,'KEYSLOT' command, which defines a key slot.
552
Nominal values and a label for the feature are displayed in the Key Slot dialog box. You can change
these if necessary, then click Apply to insert the feature command into your program.
Navigation
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,...,'KEYSLOT' command (if viewing your

Centre 1/Centre 2 - the key slot is defined by two circles. Type in the co-ordinates of the centre of
each circle.
Radius 1/Radius 2 - type in the radius of each of the two circles that define the key slot.
n.00 - click this if you wish to round off the co-ordinates in the X, Y and Z data fields and use these as
See Also:
Main Toolbar
359
135
Part Program Window
45
523
88.25 Stud Dialog Box

Stud Dialog Box
553
Purpose
Use the Stud dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field. This
modifies the corresponding FEAT/OBJECT,...,'STUD' command.
Navigation
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,...,'STUD' command (if viewing your program as
program text)

See Also:
Part Program Window
45

Inspecting a Stud
523
120
554
88.26 Christmas Tree Dialog Box

Christmas Tree Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Christmas Tree dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label
field. This modifies the corresponding FEAT/OBJECT,...,'XMASTREE' command.
The Christmas Tree feature is a threaded stud, measured to find the axis direction, bottom centre
position/base position and diameter.
Navigation
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,...,'XMASTREE' command (if viewing your

555
See Also:
Part Program Window
45

120
523
88.27 Welded Nut Dialog Box

Welded Nut Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Welded Nut dialog box to modify the nominal values for the feature selected in the Label field.
This modifies the corresponding FEAT/OBJECT,...,'WELDEDNUT' command.
Navigation
descriptive text), or double-click the FEAT/OBJECT,...,'WELDEDNUT' command (if viewing your

556
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
120
89
Constructing Features
89.1
Purpose
The Construct tab allows you to declare and create theoretical features(e.g. points in space, intersection
of two planes) using previously defined, measured or constructed features, or actual buffer points, and
output them.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar

Construct Feature
558
Construct Nominal
Feature 523
Output
615
To construct a feature:
1.
From the main toolbar, select Construct.
2.
Click the arrow

for a feature type in the Construct Feature section. The drop-down list
shows all the possible constructions for that feature.
557
3.
Click the construction type you want to use (or click the feature type to use the Construction Wizard
559 ). The appropriate Construct window is displayed. The name of the feature to be constructed is
shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window and values for it are entered into the Grid
window. You can overtype the name and nominal values here to change them.
4.
Select the features you want to use in your construction. You can drag features from the Explorer
window to the Construct window, or double-click them, and you can select entities from the CAD
model. If the Construct window shows a Feature list, you can right-click on a feature to display a
pop-up menu of additional options. From this you can edit the label of the feature to change the
feature selected, and can select the feature actual or nominal.
5.
When you have selected appropriate features for the construction type, the
button is available.
Click the button to construct the feature and add a Construct feature line (CONST/feature command)
to your part program.
Note:
When constructing features, the features to be used in the construction are highlighted with a thick line,
and the solution to the construction is also highlighted in this way. The features to be used in the
construction are displayed in the temporary feature colour in the model window. The feature to be
constructed is displayed in the constructed feature colour. If there is more than one solution to the
construction, CAMIO selects the construction nearest to the nominal of the feature being constructed
and displays it in the highlighted feature colour. You can pick one of the other solutions to construct
that one instead. The colours used are defined in theCAD Colours dialog box 73 . The solution has the
name currently displayed in the Grid window. If you change the name in the Grid window, the name of
the construction is updated with the new name.
See Also:
Construction Types
Explorer Window
Model Window
557
578
75
49
558
Main Toolbar
89.2

Whenever a feature is measured, the buffer (or background) points are stored. Depending on the
construction type, buffer points may also be stored when features are constructed. Nominal buffer
points are stored within the software for the life of the part program, and actual buffer points are stored in
the inspection database with the feature. You can use actual buffer points to construct other features.
The DMIS command for constructing a feature using actual buffer points has the format:
CONST/feature,F(feature name),construction type,FA(measured or constructed feature name)[n,m]
For example:
CONST/CIRCLE,F(test),BF,FA(CR13)[1,12]
constructs the circle 'test' from the first 12 actual buffer points of feature CR13.
CONST/CIRCLE,F(test),BF,FA(CR13)[1],FA(CR14)[4,6]
constructs the circle 'test' from the first actual buffer point of feature CR13 and the fourth to sixth actual
buffer points of feature CR14. Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer
points from all features in the construction, and the features must all have been measured using a
558
sensor with the same radius.

If you are constructing features that have a 'best fit' construction, e.g. circles and arcs, you can use the
Construction window in CAMIO to construct them with buffer points. However, if you are using
construction types that do not provide the option through CAMIO to select buffer points (such as
MOVEPT), and you want to use buffer points, you will have to edit the program commands directly in the
Part Program window, using the correct DMIS syntax.
The following steps explain how to use buffer points when constructing a circle using best fit.
1.
From the main toolbar, select Construct.
2.
Click the arrow

under Circle in the Construct Feature section. A drop-down list shows the
possible constructions for circle features.
3.
Click the Best Fit construction type. The Construct Best Fit window is displayed. The name of the
circle to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it
here to change it.
4.
Select the features you want to use in your construction. To do this, drag-and-drop features from
the Explorer window into the Construct Best Fit window, or double-click the features in the Explorer
window. When you have enough appropriate features in the Construct Best Fit window from which
to construct a 'best fit' circle, the
(OK) button is available.
5.
Right-click the features and select the Point Buffer option to display the Point Buffer dialog box 597 ,
where you can select the actual buffer points to use in constructing the feature. You must do this
for all the features you are using in the construction.
6.
Click
in the Construct Best Fit window. When the program is run, the circle is constructed
using the features or buffer points you have selected.
See Also:
Using Buffer Points
211
556
Construction Using Best Fit, Offset, Centre of Gravity

Part Program Window
Explorer Window
578
42
45
75
Main Toolbar
89.3
89.3.1 Construction Commands

Purpose
The Construct commands allow you to create theoretical features (e.g. points in space, intersection of
two planes) using previously defined, measured or constructed features, or actual buffer points (see
556
and Constructing Features from Buffer Points
557
559
).
You can use the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 to specify the fitting algorithms to be used when
constructing features using BF (best fit) and offset constructions.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, use the Construct Feature section

Point
Plane
Circle
575
Cylinder
564
Round Slot
Surface
577
572
Line
561
Sphere
564
Square Slot
573
Parallel Planes
570
See Also:
Using Buffer Points
211
Construction Types
89.3.2 Construction Wizard

Construction Wizard
Arc
566
Edge
576
568
Pattern
569
563
Cone
567
Curve
574
Compound
569
560
Purpose
The Construction wizard is available when constructing all feature types. It allows you to select features
for the construction by dragging-and-dropping from the Explorer window, or double-clicking in the
Explorer window, then determines for you which construction type is appropriate to the features you have
selected. As you add features to the Construction wizard, the feature that could be constructed is
displayed in blue in the model window and its values are entered into the Grid window.
When you have selected appropriate features for a construction, the
(OK) button is available. Click
it to construct the feature and add a Construct feature line (CONST/feature command) to your part
program.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click a feature type in the Construct Feature section

Feature - the features to use in the construction. You can add features to this list by dragging them
from the Explorer window or by double-clicking in the Explorer window, and by selecting labelled entities
from the CAD model.
You can right-click in the list to display a pop-up menu. Use this to add and delete features and to move
them up or down the list (depending on the feature to be constructed, the order of features in the list may
affect which construction types are available). You can also display the Point Buffer dialog box 597 ,
where you can select buffer points to use in the construction. Note that if you use buffer points from one
feature, you must use buffer points from all features in the construction, and the features must all have
561
been measured using a sensor with the same radius. You can use the Nominal option to specify that
the highlighted feature is a nominal feature. (You cannot use the Nominal option with the Point Buffer
option, because only actual buffer points can be used in constructions.)
Actual/Nominal - indicates whether the feature is an actual or nominal feature.
Point Buffer - displays the range of buffer points (if any) to be used in the construction.
Construction type drop-down list - the options in the Construction type drop-down list at the bottom of
the Construction wizard are appropriate to the features you add to the Feature list.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
Explorer Window
Model Window
Grid Window
557
578
75
49
76
Main Toolbar
89.3.3 Constructing a Circle

Constructing a Circle
Purpose
Use the construction options for a circle to construct a circle from defined, measured or constructed
features, or actual buffer points, using various construction options.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Circle or the Circle drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Circle - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
, where you can drag-and-drop features to use in the
562
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a circle to a number of selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/CIRCLE,
F( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points from
all features in the construction, and the features must all have been measured using a sensor with the
same radius.
Projection - projects a circle onto a plane or the working plane if no plane is specified (CONST/CIRCLE,
F( ),PROJCT command). This is projected down the surface normal of the plane.
Sphere projection - constructs a circle by projecting a sphere onto a plane (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),
PROJCT command). The centre of the circle is the centre of the sphere projected onto the plane and its
diameter is the sphere diameter.
Intersection (cone-plane) - constructs a circle by intersecting a cone with a plane (CONST/CIRCLE,F
( ),INTOF command).
Intersection (sphere-plane) - constructs a circle at the intersection of a plane with a sphere (CONST/
CIRCLE,F( ),INTOF command).
Cone - constructs a circle from a cone either by specifying a known distance from the vertex of the
cone, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),CONE command). The
circle has the same axis as the cone.
Sphere - constructs a circle from a sphere either by specifying a known distance from the centre of the
sphere, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle along a specified direction (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),
SPHERE command). The constructed circle has the same direction as the specified direction.
Tangent to Two Lines, Tangent to Two Circles, Tangent to Line and Circle - construct a circle
that is tangent to two features that may be line or circle features (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),TANTO
command). The features must be coplanar. Where multiple solutions exist, the solution nearest to the
nominal of the feature being constructed is highlighted. You can pick one of the other solutions to use
that one instead. The nominal diameter of the constructed circle is used as the constructed diameter.
However, if the nominal diameter is too small to have tangency points, the diameter is increased
automatically to the minimum size required to obtain two tangency points.
Tangent to Two Curves - constructs a circle that is tangent to two coplanar curve features (CONST/
CIRCLE,F( ),TANTO,FA( ), FA( ) command). Where multiple solutions exist, the solution nearest to the
that one instead. The nominal diameter of the constructed circle is used as the constructed diameter.
However, if the nominal diameter is too small to have tangency points, the diameter is increased
automatically to the minimum size required to obtain two tangency points.
Tangent to Circle through Point, Tangent to Line through Point, Tangent to Plane through
Point - construct a circle that is tangent to a circle, line or plane and passes through a point-reducible
feature (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),TANTO,FA( ),THRU,FA( ) command).
Copy - copies a circle (CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the circle you are
copying has been scanned and a filter has been specified (using GEOALG/...ELIMINATE...FILTER - see
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed circle contains filtered touch data.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
563
89.3.4 Constructing an Arc

Constructing an Arc
Purpose
Use the construction options for an arc to construct an arc from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Arc or the Arc drop-down list in the Construct Feature
section

Arc - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of an arc feature to a number of selected point-reducible features (CONST/
ARC,F( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points
from all features in the construction, and the features must all have been measured using a sensor with
the same radius.
Projection - projects an arc onto a plane-reducible feature (CONST/ARC,F( ),PROJCT command). This
is projected down the surface normal of the plane.
Copy - copies an arc (CONST/ARC,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the arc you are copying has
been scanned and a filter has been specified (using GEOALG/...ELIMINATE...FILTER - see the
Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed arc contains filtered touch data.
Extract - extracts a bounded arc from a (scanned) generic curve (GCURVE) (XTRACT,F( ),FA( )
command).
See Also:
556

Construction Types
578
Construction Using Extract Feature

Extract Feature Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
603
582
557
564
89.3.5 Constructing a Cylinder

Constructing a Cylinder
Purpose
Use the construction options for a cylinder to construct a cylinder from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Cylinder or the Cylinder drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Cylinder - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a cylinder to a number of selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/
CYLNDR,F( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer
sensor with the same radius.
Copy - copies a cylinder (CONST/CYLNDR,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the cylinder you are
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed cylinder contains filtered touch data.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.6 Constructing a Plane

Constructing a Plane
565
Purpose
Use the construction options for a plane to construct a plane from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Plane or the Plane drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Plane - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a plane to a number of selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/PLANE,
same radius.
Perpendicular - constructs a plane perpendicular to another feature whilst passing this plane through a
given point (CONST/PLANE,F( ),PERPTO command).
Mid-Plane - constructs a plane that is the mid-plane between two planes (CONST/PLANE,F( ),MIDPL
command).
Parallel (to a feature) - Construct Parallel Plane for Point-reducible Feature 571 , ie parallel to a plane
and passes through a point-reducible feature,eg (CONST/PLANE,F( ),PARTO,FA( ),THRU,FA( )
command).
Offset - constructs a plane from the offsets obtained from the nominal feature definitions of a number of
features (CONST/PLANE,F( ),OFFSET command). The actual construction features are projected along
the nominal plane direction by a distance equal to the distance of their nominal values from the nominal
plane.
Copy - copies a plane (CONST/PLANE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the plane you are
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed plane contains filtered touch data.
Tangent to Circle through Point - constructs a plane that is tangent to a circle and passes through a
point-reducible feature (CONST/PLANE,F( ),TANTO,FA( ),THRU,FA( ) command). The constructed
plane is perpendicular to the circle. The through point must not lie within the cylindrical volume
produced by the projection of the circle along the axis of the circle.
566
See Also:
556
557
Construct Parallel Plane for Point-reducible Feature

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
571
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.7 Constructing a Line

Constructing a Line
Purpose
Use the construction options for a line to construct a line from defined, measured or constructed
Bounded lines are displayed from the start to the end. Unbounded lines are displayed at a length
specified on the Feature Display tab page 66 , Display Settings dialog box.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Line or the Line drop-down list in the Construct Feature
section

Line - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a line to a number of selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/LINE,F
( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points from all
features in the construction, and the features must all have been measured using a sensor with the
same radius.
567
Projection - projects a line onto a plane (CONST/LINE,F( ),PROJLI command). This is projected down
the surface normal of the plane or the working plane if no plane is specified.
Perpendicular - constructs a line perpendicular to another feature whilst passing this line through a
given point (CONST/LINE,F( ),PERPTO command).
Mid-Line - constructs a line that is central between two features (CONST/LINE,F( ),MIDLI command).
Intersection - constructs a line at the intersection of two features (CONST/LINE,F( ),INTOF command).
Offset - constructs a line from the offsets obtained from the nominal feature definitions of a number of
features (CONST/LINE,F( ),OFFSET command). The actual construction features are projected along
the nominal line normal by a distance equal to the distance of their nominal values from the nominal line.
Copy - copies a line (CONST/LINE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the line you are copying has
been scanned and a filter has been specified (using GEOALG/...ELIMINATE...FILTER - see the
Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed line contains filtered touch data.
Tangent to Two Circles - constructs a line that is tangent to two circles (CONST/LINE,F( ),TANTO
command). The circles must be coplanar. Where multiple solutions exist, the solution nearest to the
that one instead.
Tangent to Circle through Point - constructs a line that is tangent to a circle and passes through a
point-reducible feature (CONST/LINE,F( ),TANTO,FA( ),THRU,FA( ) command). The point which the line
passes through must be in the plane of the circle but not within the circle.
Extract - extracts a bounded line from a (scanned) generic curve (GCURVE) (XTRACT,F( ),FA( )
command).
See Also:
556

Construction Types
557
578

582
603
Main Toolbar
89.3.8 Constructing a Cone

Constructing a Cone
Purpose
Use the construction options for a cone to construct a cone from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
568
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Cone or the Cone drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Cone - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a cone to a number of selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/CONE,F
( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points from all
same radius.
Copy - copies a cone (CONST/CONE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the cone you are copying
has been scanned and a filter has been specified (using GEOALG/...ELIMINATE...FILTER - see the
Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed cone contains filtered touch data.
Bound - displays the Bound Feature/Tolerance dialog box 489 , where you can specify bounding planes
to allow automatic (scanned) measurement of a cone.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
557
578
Main Toolbar
89.3.9 Constructing an Edge

Constructing an Edge
Purpose
Use the construction options for an edge to construct an edge from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Edge or the Edge drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Edge - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Copy - copies an edge point (CONST/EDGEPT,F( ),TR command).

See Also:
556

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
569
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.10 Constructing a Pattern

Constructing a Pattern
Purpose
Use the construction options for a pattern to construct a pattern from defined, measured or constructed
features, using various construction options.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Pattern or the Pattern drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Pattern - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - creates a CONST/PATERN,F( ),BF command from the selected features.
Copy - copies a pattern (CONST/PATERN,F( ),TR command).
See Also:
Construction Types
556
578
Main Toolbar
89.3.11 Constructing a Compound Feature

Constructing a Compound Feature
Purpose
Use the construction options for a compound feature to construct a compound feature from defined,
measured or constructed features, using various construction options.
Navigation
After customising your toolbar
45
and with Use advanced libraries enabled on theConformance tab
570
page
128
of the Configuration dialog box, select one of the construct Compound options

Wizard - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of the compound feature to the selected features (CONST/COMPOUND,F( ),BF
command).
Copy - copies a compound feature (CONST/COMPOUND,F( ),TR command).
See Also:
Construction Types
Main Toolbar
556
578
135
89.3.12 Constructing Parallel Planes

Constructing Parallel Planes
Purpose
Use the construction options for parallel planes to construct parallel planes from defined, measured or
constructed features, or actual buffer points, using various construction options.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Parallel Plane or the Parallel Plane drop-down list in
the Construct Feature section

Wizard - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of two parallel planes to a number of points (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),BF
command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points from all
same radius. There must be at least four points, and at least one on each plane. The side that the
points are on is determined by comparing their distances from the two nominal planes. If all but one of
the points are on one plane, the plane is fitted through the point and a parallel plane is created through
the other point. If each plane has at least three points, a plane is fitted through each set of points.
Probe compensation is then applied depending on whether the feature is an inner or outer feature.
Copy - copies a parallel planes feature (CONST/PARPLN,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the
571
parallel planes feature you are copying has been scanned and a filter has been specified (using
GEOALG/...ELIMINATE...FILTER - see the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed parallel
planes feature contains filtered touch data.
See Also:
556
557

Construction Types
571
578
Main Toolbar
89.3.13 Construct Parallel Plane for Point-reducible Feature

Purpose
Use the construction options for a plane to construct a plane that is parallel to a plane and passes
through a point-reducible feature.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Parallel from the Plane drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Reference Plane selectable via drop down or direct click in CAD window
572
Point reducible feature - for constructed plane to pass parallel through - selectable via drop down or
direct click in CAD window.
The following DMIS syntax is produced for the construct parallel plane:
F(PLN002)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,0,0,0,0,1 CONST/PLANE,F(PLN002),PARTO,FA(PLN001),THRU,FA
(CIR001)
See Also:
556

Constructing a Plane
Construction Types
Laser Scanning
Main Toolbar
557
564
578
811
135
89.3.14 Constructing a Round Slot

Constructing a Round Slot
Purpose
Use the construction options for a round slot to construct a round slot from defined, measured or
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Round Slot or the Round Slot drop-down list in the
Construct Feature section

Round Slot - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a round slot to five selected point-reducible features, or to a number of buffer
points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),
BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer points from all
same radius. Points from two parallel planes (lines) are used to evaluate the width of the slot, and
points from the ends of the slot determine the length of the slot.
Projection - constructs a round slot by projection of a feature onto a plane (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),
PROJCT command). This is projected down the surface normal of the plane or the working plane if no
573
plane is specified. If the slot and the plane are not parallel, the centre and the orientation of the slot are
projected onto the plane but the width and length are inherited from the projected slot.
Copy - copies a round slot (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),TR command).
See Also:
556

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.15 Constructing a Square Slot

Constructing a Square Slot
Purpose
Use the construction options for a square slot to construct a square slot from defined, measured or
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Square Slot or the Square Slot drop-down list in the

Square Slot - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a square slot to five selected point-reducible features, or to a number of
buffer points from selected features all measured using a sensor with the same radius (CONST/
CPARLN,F( ),BF command). Note that if you use buffer points from one feature, you must use buffer
sensor with the same radius. Points from two parallel planes (lines) are used to evaluate the width of the
slot, and points from the ends of the slot determine the length of the slot.
Projection - constructs a square slot by projection of a feature onto a plane (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),
PROJCT command). This is projected down the surface normal of the plane or the working plane if no
plane is specified. If the slot and the plane are not parallel, the centre and the orientation of the slot are
projected onto the plane but the width and length are inherited from the projected slot.
Copy - copies a square slot (CONST/CPARLN,F( ),TR command).
See Also:
556
574

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.16 Constructing a Curve

Constructing a Curve
Purpose
Use the construction options for a curve to construct a curve (GCURVE) from defined, measured or
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Curve or the Curve drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Curve - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Copy - copies a curve (CONST/GCURVE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the curve you are
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed curve contains filtered touch data.
Intersection - constructs a curve by intersecting a surface (GSURF) with a plane (CONST/GCURVE,F
( ),INTOF command). For details, see Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF and
a Plane 593 .
Nearest Points on Geometry - displays the Compare Curve Feature to CAD dialog box 610 , where you
can construct a curve (GEOMCURVE) feature by comparing the points from a source feature to the
nearest CAD points. For details, see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)
589 .
See Also:
556

Construction Types
557
578
Main Toolbar
575
89.3.17 Constructing a Point

Constructing a Point
Purpose
Use the construction options for a point to construct a point from defined, measured or constructed
If you selected Compare to CAD 378 to be True in the Properties window, the nearest point on the CAD
model is obtained using a touch point centre which is inferred from the construction type.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Point or the Point drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Point - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Mid-Point - constructs a point that is in a central position between the centres of two defined features
(CONST/POINT,F( ),MIDPT command).
Projection - constructs a point by projecting the centre of a feature onto a plane (CONST/POINT,F( ),
PROJPT command). This is projected down the surface normal of the plane or the working plane if no
plane is specified.
Intersection (Line-Plane, Cylinder-Plane, Line-Line, Circle-Circle, Line-Circle, CylinderCylinder, Line-Curve, Plane-Curve) - constructs a point at the intersection of various features
(CONST/POINT,F( ),INTOF command).
Intersection between line and curve - if both line and curve are coplanar, the resulting xyz
coordinate is the intersection point of the line and the curve and the resulting ijk vector is the
cross-product of the normal direction of the curve at that point and the line direction. If both the
line and curve are not coplanar, the resulting xyz coordinate is the midpoint between the nearest
point on the curve and the line. The resulting ijk vector is the cross product of the normal
direction of the curve at that point and the line direction. If multiple solutions exist, the one
close to the nominal point value is selected as the intersection point. The line feature should be
a bounded line.
Intersection between plane and curve - the resulting xyz coordinate is the intersection point of
the plane and the curve and the resulting ijk vector is the normal direction of the plane.
576
Move Point - constructs a point by moving the centre co-ordinates of a previously measured point
(CONST/POINT,F( ),MOVEPT command).
Vertex - constructs a point using the vertex of a cone (CONST/POINT,F( ),VERTEX command).
Curve - constructs a point at the intersection of two features that contain both location and orientation
data (CONST/POINT,F( ),CURVE command). The features must reduce to points. The features are
treated as planes which, when intersected, form a line representing the curve. The position on the line
(curve) is determined by projecting the centres of the construction features onto the line and finding the
mid-point of these two positions.
Extreme - constructs a point at the extreme measurement point of a feature, in a specified direction
(CONST/POINT,F( ),EXTREM command).
Centre of Gravity - constructs a point at the averaged centre of the geometric centre derived from the
specified point-reducible features (CONST/POINT,F( ),COG command). The point-reducible features can
be arcs, circles, cones, slots, bounded cylinders, edge points or points.
Pierce (Line-Plane, Line-Cylinder, Line-Cone, Line-Sphere) - constructs a point at the intersection
of a line-reducible feature (line, cylinder or cone) with a surface feature (plane, sphere, cylinder, cone)
(CONST/POINT,F( ),PIERCE command. Where multiple solutions exist, the solution nearest to the
that one instead.
Copy - constructs a point at the centre of the specified (point-reducible) feature (CONST/POINT,F( ),TR
command).
Nearest Point - displays the Compare Point Feature to CAD dialog box
GEOM point by comparing a point feature to the nearest CAD point.
612
, where you can construct a
See Also:
556

Construction Types
557
578
Main Toolbar
89.3.18 Constructing a Sphere

Constructing a Sphere
Purpose
Use the construction options for a sphere to construct a sphere from defined, measured or constructed
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Sphere or the Sphere drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section
577

Sphere - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Best Fit - allows 'best fit' of a sphere to a number of selected point-reducible features (CONST/SPHERE,
same radius.
Copy - copies a sphere (CONST/SPHERE,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the sphere you are
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 ), the constructed sphere contains filtered touch data.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
Laser Scanning
557
578
811
Main Toolbar
89.3.19 Constructing a Surface

Constructing a Surface
Purpose
Use the construction options for a surface to construct a surface (GSURF) from defined, measured or
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Surface or the Surface drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section

Surface - displays the Construction wizard
construction.
559
Copy - copies a surface (CONST/GSURF,F( ),TR command). From DMIS 05.0, if the surface you are
the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 , or using the filter options from the Laser Operations menu 852 ),
the constructed surface contains filtered touch data.
See Also:
556

Construction Types
578
Main Toolbar
557
578
89.4
Construction Types
89.4.1 Construction Types

Construction Types
For details of how to use the different construction types, select an option:
Construction Using Projections, Intersections, Etc.
Construction Using Cone
580
580
Construction Using Sphere
581

Construction Using Move Point
Construction Using Vertex
582
584
585
Construction Using Hi-Lo Point (Extreme)

Construction Using Copy
578
586
587
Construction Using Retrieve
588
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)

Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF)
589
591
Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF and a Plane
89.4.2 Construction Using Best Fit, Offset, Centre of Gravity

Purpose
579
Use this Construct window to construct features using the best fit, offset or centre of gravity construction
types.
Select features for the construction by dragging-and-dropping from the Explorer window, or by doubleclicking features in the Explorer window. The name of the feature to be constructed is shown in the top
left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it to change it.
program.
When a best-fit construction is performed where all the source features are points, the feature is fitted
through the probe centres of the touch points. If probe compensation is switched on, the fitted feature is
then probe compensated. If any of the source features are not points, then the feature is fitted through
the probe-compensated feature centres.
When a best-fit construction is performed using buffer points, the feature is fitted through the probe
centres of the buffer points then probe compensated.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click the drop-down list for a feature type that provides the
best fit, offset or centre of gravity construction types in the Construct Feature section, click Best Fit,
Offset or Centre of Gravity

Feature - the features to use in the construction. You can add features to this list by dragging them
from the Explorer window, or by double-clicking features in the Explorer window, and by selecting
entities from the CAD model.
You can right-click in the list to display a pop-up menu. Use this to add and delete features and to move
them up or down the list (depending on the feature to be constructed, the order of features in the list may
affect which construction types are available). You can also display the Point Buffer dialog box, where
you can select buffer points to use in the construction. Note that if you use buffer points from one
feature, you must use buffer points from all features in the construction, and the features must all have
been measured using a sensor with the same radius. You can use the Nominal option to specify that
the highlighted feature is a nominal feature. (You cannot use the Nominal option with the Point Buffer
option, because only actual buffer points can be used in constructions.)
Actual/Nominal - indicates whether the feature is an actual or nominal feature.
Point Buffer - displays the range of buffer points (if any) to be used in the construction.
See Also:
556
Probe Compensation Dialog Box
755

Construction Types
Explorer Window
Grid Window
578
75
76
Main Toolbar
557
580
89.4.3 Construction Using Projections, Intersections, Etc.

Construction Using Projections, Intersections, Etc.
Purpose
Use this Construct window type to construct features using the projection, intersection, tangent, pierce,
curve, mid-feature and perpendicular construction types.
Select features for the construction from the drop-down lists, or by selecting from the model. (Click the
(arrow) button to indicate which list the selected feature should be added to.) Select whether the
actual or nominal values from the selected features are to be used. For plane features, selecting None
uses the current work plane. The name of the feature to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand
corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it to change it.
program.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click the drop-down list for a feature type that provides the
projection, intersection, tangent, pierce, curve, mid-feature or perpendicular construction types in the
Construct Feature section, click the construction type
See Also:
Construction Types
Grid Window
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.4 Construction Using Cone

581
Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct a circle from a cone, either by specifying a known distance from
the vertex of the cone, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle. The circle has the same axis as
the cone.
Select a cone for the construction from the drop-down list, or by selecting from the model. The name of
the feature to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype
it to change it.
When you have selected an appropriate feature for a construction, the
Click it to construct the feature and add a Construct feature line (CONST/feature command) to your part
program.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Cone from the Circle drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section
See Also:
Construct Circle from Cone Dialog Box
Construction Types
Grid Window
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.5 Construction Using Sphere

600
582
Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct a circle from a sphere either by specifying a known distance
from the centre of the sphere, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle along a specified
direction. The constructed circle has the same direction as the specified direction. The direction is
shown for the nominal feature displayed in the Grid window. You can change it by overtyping it, but you
must then recalculate the circle (e.g. by typing in the diameter again).
Select a sphere for the construction from the drop-down list, or by selecting from the model. The name
of the feature to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can
overtype it to change it.
program.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Sphere from the Circle drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section
See Also:
Construct Circle from Sphere Dialog Box
Construction Types
Grid Window
602
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.6 Construction Using Extract Feature

583
Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct features using the extract feature construction type. This
extracts geometrical features from general features. The first version is displayed for arc features, and
the second version is displayed for line features.
Select a feature for the construction from the drop-down list, or by selecting from the model. Bounded
arcs and bounded lines are extracted from (scanned) generic curves (GCURVE). The name of the
feature to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it to
change it.
Click it to construct the feature and add an Extract feature line (XTRACT,F( ),FA( ) command) to your
part program.
The construction limits the region to be extracted based on the nominal values of the feature to be
extracted. A theoretical cylinder, with a radius as specified in the Zone radius field, is placed around the
nominal feature (for an arc the cylinder is a bent pipe around the arc). The construction then checks that
consecutive points have a change to the tangency angle (for a line) or the curvature ratio (for a cylinder)
that is within the value specified in the Tangency angle field or the Curvature ratio field. Points outside
these values are rejected.
If probe compensation is on, the extracted feature is probe compensated.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Extract from the Arc or Line drop-down list in the

Source feature - the feature from which you are extracting the constructed feature.
Parameters
The default values for these parameters are set using the XTRACTPARAM DME command.
Zone radius - the radius of a theoretical cylinder placed around the nominal feature being extracted.
Data lying outside the cylinder is ignored.
Curvature ratio - a measure of the rate of change of curvature. The fitting process examines the
curvature ratio between successive points when constructing the feature, and points outside this ratio
are rejected.
584
Tangency angle - if successive points in the touch data lie outside this angle, the data is excluded
from the construction.
See Also:
Construction Types
603
556
578

Grid Window
755
76
DME Commands
916
Main Toolbar
89.4.7 Construction Using Move Point

Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct features using the move point construction type. This
constructs a point by moving the centre co-ordinates of a previously measured feature.
actual or nominal values from the selected features are to be used. The name of the feature to be
constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it to change it.
program.
585
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Move Point from the Point drop-down list in the

Centre - the feature the centre of which is to be moved to construct the new feature.
Offset - select Offset to move the centre of the selected feature by an absolute distance (in the current
units as shown in the System Settings dialog box). Type in the co-ordinates for the new position in the
dx, dy and dz fields.
Vector - select Vector to move the centre of the selected feature along the vector of the same or a
different feature. Type in the distance for the movement in the Distance field (in the current units).
See Also:
Construction Types
Grid Window
101
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.8 Construction Using Vertex

Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct features using the vertex construction type. This constructs a
point using the vertex of a cone.
Select a cone for the construction from the drop-down list, or by selecting from the model. The name of
the feature to be constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype
it to change it.
program.
586
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Vertex from the Point drop-down list in the Construct
Feature section
See Also:
Construction Types
Grid Window
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.9 Construction Using Hi-Lo Point (Extreme)

Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct a point at the extreme measurement point of a feature, in a
specified direction.
actual or nominal values from the selected features are to be used. The name of the feature to be
constructed is shown in the top left-hand corner of the Grid window. You can overtype it to change it.
program.
587
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Extreme Point from the Point drop-down list in the

Feature - the feature containing the measured points.
Type - select whether to use the minimum (low) or maximum (high) measured point in the selected
direction.
Direction - select the direction of the extreme point.
X, Y, Z axis - the extreme point is the furthest point in the X, Y or Z direction.
Vector - specify a non-axial direction in the adjacent i, j and k fields.
Feature radius - a direction pointing away from the centre and perpendicular to the surface of the
measured feature at the measured point.
Nominal/actual reference - use the nominal or actual direction of the feature selected in the adjacent
drop-down list to determine the extreme measurement point.
See Also:
Construction Types
Grid Window
556
578
76
Main Toolbar
89.4.10 Construction Using Copy

Construction Using Copy
Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct a copy of a feature. If you select Actual, and the feature has
been scanned, and a filter has been defined, this construction creates the copy by applying a filter to the
scan data. The filter applied is that set up for the feature type using the Elimination and Filter type
options on the Geometry Algorithm dialog box, or those filters applied to laser scanned data using the
filter options from the Laser Operations menu.
You can execute more than one filter command, to change the filter and output the results again for
comparison.
588
Select the feature to be used as the source feature from the drop-down list and select Actual or Nominal.
Type the definition of the target feature (i.e. the copy of the source feature) in the Grid window. Then
. This adds a Construct feature line (CONST/feature,F( ),TR command) and a feature definition
click
line (F( )=FEAT/feature type command) to your program.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Copy from the drop-down list for a feature type in the
See Also:
Filtering Scan Data
783

Laser Operations Menu
Construction Types
756
852
556
578
Main Toolbar
89.4.11 Construction Using Retrieve

Construction Using Retrieve
Purpose
Use this Construct window to construct features by extraction from a point cloud generated by laser
scanning a surface (GSURF) feature. This picture shows the window for a circle feature. For other
features, the window shown has options appropriate to the feature.
This construction type is currently for use with laser probes, not touch probes.
To retrieve a feature from a point cloud, follow these steps.
1.
Using the Load Point Clouds dialog box

from.
871
, load the point cloud that you want to retrieve the feature
589
2.
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar. Click the feature type that you want to retrieve in the
Retrieve from Point Cloud section.
3.
Type in the nominal values for the feature in the Grid window or pick the feature from the CAD model
4.
Check that the values in the Retrieve Feature from Surface dialog box (example shown above) are as
you require (for information on the options for different features seeRetrieve Feature Type Dialog
Boxes
608
) and click
(Try). The message area confirms whether the construction is valid and
the
(Apply) button becomes available. Commands for extracting the feature from the point
cloud are added to your part program, including the CONST/feature type,F( ),RETRIEVE command.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click the feature type in the Retrieve from Point Cloud
section
For more details of the retrieve construction type, see Retrieve Feature Type Dialog Boxes 608 .
See Also:
Construction Types
Laser Scanning
Grid Window
578
811
76
Model Window
Main Toolbar
556
49
135
Laser - Multiple Feature Extraction using Retrieve
89.4.12 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)

89.4.12.1 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE)

This construction enables feature nominals to be generated for a curve feature that has no touch data.
This ensures that a profile tolerance can be applied to obtain analytic output and feature deviations in the
model window. The following procedure uses example code.
The following procedure uses example code.
1.
Define and open your CAD model file as a device. For details on how to do this, seeOpening a CAD
Model File as a Device 225 . For a CAD model filename of cadfile.sab and a device name of device01,
CAMIO adds the following commands to your part program:
DID(cadfile)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\cadfile.sab'
OPEN/DID(cadfile),CAD,VENDOR,'ACIS'
G(cadfile_ALL)=GEOM/DID(cadfile)
2.
If you are constructing features from scanned data such as that obtained from the laser scanner,
carry out filtering of the scan data as follows, to obtain touch points that are saved in the database:
Using the appropriate filter option from the Point Cloud tab, define an algorithm to apply when
creating the target surface feature. Specify the original surface cloud (i.e. the point cloud of
scanned data) in the Surface section, for example:
590
GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERGRID',2,2,2
CONST/GSURF,F(SUR001),TR,FA(SUR_ORIGINAL)
This applies the filter algorithm to the point cloud. By default this purges all the points that have
been filtered out of the point cloud. The original point cloud is not saved. The resulting filtered
point cloud is copied to the target surface feature (in this example SUR001), providing actual
point data that can be saved.
Mesh the point cloud using the Mesh option in the Point Cloud Operations section, and
selecting the targe surface (in this example SUR001). This meshes the point cloud to create a
surface effect.
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD',WAIT,'SUR001',POINTSON
3.
From the Construct menu, click Curve drop-down list in the Construct Feature section, select
Nearest Points on Geometry.
4.
In the Compare Curve Feature to CAD dialog box 610 , select a valid GCURVE feature, e.g. a filtered
point cloud, from the Feature drop-down list. Select the geometry item (cadfile_ALL in this example)
in the CAD geometry drop-down list. If touch points in the GCURVE feature compare to the
selected CAD geometry entity, the
(Apply) button is enabled.
You can define your own CAD geometry entity by clicking on faces on the CAD model. The faces
are added to the Define geometry list. To use them, click Accept. This adds a new G( )=GEOM
command to your part program and enables the
button.
Using the Grid window, you can apply a tolerance to the feature to be constructed and change its
name.
5.
To add the Compare to CAD commands to your program, click

. FEAT/GEOMCURVE and
CONST/GEOMCURVE commands are added to your part program.
Note:
If a CAD model is open but not defined as a device, i.e. Step 1 above has not been carried out, you can
create the construction from any existing surface feature by picking faces on the model, and clicking
. CAMIO adds the device commands from Step 1 to the part program, defining a
Accept, then
device, opening it and defining the appropriate geometry entities.
See Also:
Construction Types
556
578

Output Window
936
Model Window
49
523
83

89.4.12.2 Example Constructed GCURVE Using Nearest Points on Geometry
Example Constructed GCURVE Using Nearest Points on Geometry
591
89.4.13 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF)

89.4.13.1 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF)

This construction enables feature nominals to be generated for a surface feature that has no touch data.
This ensures that a profile tolerance can be applied to obtain analytic output and feature deviations. This
construction is most likely to be used for laser point clouds.
You can carry out this construction by first defining your CAD model as a device then opening the device
as a CAD file, or you can allow CAMIO to add the commands for this automatically. For details, select
an option:
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device Manually
591
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device Automatically

89.4.13.2 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device Manually
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device Manually

procedure is most likely to be used for laser point clouds, and assumes that you have loaded a point
cloud and opened a corresponding CAD model in themodel window 49 .
592
The following procedure uses example code.

1.
Define and open your CAD model file as a device. For details on how to do this, seeOpening a CAD
Model File as a Device 225 . For a CAD model filename of cadfile.sab and a device name of device01,
CAMIO adds the following commands to your part program:
DID(cadfile)=DEVICE/STOR,'C:\LK\Demo\cadfile.sab'
OPEN/DID(cadfile),CAD,VENDOR,'ACIS'
G(cadfile_ALL)=GEOM/DID(cadfile)
2.
If you are constructing a surface from scanned data such as that obtained from the laser scanner,
carry out filtering of the scan data as follows, to obtain touch points that are saved in the database:
CONST/GSURF,F(SUR001),TR,FA(SUR_ORIGINAL)
point cloud is copied to the target surface feature (in this example SUR001), providing actual
point data that can be saved.
selecting the targe surface (in this example SUR001). This meshes the point cloud to create a
surface effect.
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD',WAIT,'SUR001',POINTSON
3.
From the Construct menu, click the Surface drop-down list in the Construct Feature section, select
4.
In the Compare Surface Feature to CAD dialog box 611 , select a valid GSURF feature, i.e. the filtered
point cloud, from the Feature drop-down list. Select the geometry item (cadfile_ALL in this example)
in the CAD geometry drop-down list. If touch points in the GSURF feature compare to the selected
CAD geometry entity, the
(Apply) button is enabled.
You can define your own CAD geometry entity by clicking on faces on the CAD model. The faces
are added to the Define geometry list. To use them, click Accept. This adds a new G( )=GEOM
command to your part program and enables the
button.
5.
Using the Grid window, you can apply a tolerance to the feature to be constructed and change its
name.
6.
To add the Compare to CAD commands to your program, click

CONST/GEOMSURF commands are added to your part program.
. FEAT/GEOMSURF and
See Also:
Load Point Clouds Dialog Box
871

89.4.13.3 Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry - Defining the Device Automatically

Automatically
593
procedure is most likely to be used for laser point clouds, and assumes that you have loaded and filtered
a point cloud and opened a corresponding CAD model in the model window 49 . When comparing point
clouds to a CAD model in CAMIO, the point clouds must first be filtered using the copy construction (for
details, see Construction Using Copy 587 ).
1.
From the Construct menu, click the Surface drop-down list in the Construct Feature section, select
2.
In the Compare Surface Feature to CAD dialog box 611 , select the filtered point cloud in the Feature
drop-down list. You can then either select a CAD geometry definition in the CAD geometry dropdown list, to compare the point cloud to, or you can define the CAD geometry you want to use in the
Define geometry list.
3.
To define the CAD geometry, click on the faces you wish to use on the CAD model. The faces are
added to the Define geometry list.
4.
To use the faces you have selected, click Accept. CAMIO creates a CAD geometry entity from the
faces in the Define geometry list and adds it to the CAD geometry list. CAMIO also adds
commands to your part program to define a device for the CAD geometry entity, to open the CAD
geometry entity as a device, to add a geometry definition to define the whole CAD model, and to add
a geometry definition which defines the faces you have specified as a subset of the whole CAD
model.
The subset is automatically selected in the CAD geometry drop-down list and CAMIO performs a
subset of the Compare to CAD process, to validate whether the point cloud lies near the surface. If
the validation is successful, the
tolerance in the Grid window 76 .
5.
(Apply) button is enabled. You can now add a surface profile
Click
. CAMIO creates a FEAT/GEOM definition for the new surface feature created and
performs a Compare to CAD action for each point in the filtered point cloud. CAMIO then creates a
CONST/GEOM command for the surface feature. If you have added a surface profile tolerance in the
Grid window, CAMIO outputs the toleranced features. The surface is then displayed in the model
window as a heat map, based on the tolerance evaluation.
See Also:
591
89.5
Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF

and a Plane
Construction of a GCURVE from the Intersection of a GSURF and a Plane
This construction allows the construction of a curve (GCURVE) feature from a scanned surface
(GSURF). A slice added to the CAD model provides nominal values, and actuals are derived from the
intersection of a plane and the GSURF.
The following procedure assumes the DMIS version is set to 05.0 or higher on theConformance tab page
128 of the Configuration dialog box, and that you have a model and a scanned surface from the model
present in the model window 49 .
1.
Create a new GSURF feature by filtering the data from the scanned surface:
594
F(SUR_TARGET)=FEAT/GSURF
CONST/GSURF,F(SUR_TARGET),TR,FA(SUR_ORIGINAL)
point cloud is copied to the target surface feature (in this example SUR_TARGET), providing
actual point data that can be saved.
selecting the targe surface (in this example SUR_TARGET). This meshes the point cloud to
create a surface effect.
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD',WAIT,'SUR_TARGET',POINTSON
, add a slice to the model that slices the filtered surface
2.
Using the Add Slice dialog box

(SUR_TARGET).
3.
From the Construct menu, click Intersection from the Curve drop-down list in the Construct Feature
section. This displays a toolbar with Curve and Surface options.
4.
Click Surface and select the filtered surface (SUR_TARGET in this example) from the drop-down list.
5.
Select the slice on the model by clicking it.
6.
Use the Curve section, to select options for building the curve on the model. The slice is used to
calculate the curve nominals. For details of the Curve options, see Surface Measurement - Curve
Options 390 .
7.
When you have built the curve on the model, click Apply. A nominal curve is generated and a plane
is calculated automatically from the nominal curve. The command to construct the curve from the
intersection of the filtered surface with the plane is added by CAMIO to your program.
8.
You can then apply a profile tolerance:
983
T(4)=TOL/PROFS,-1,1
OUTPUT/FA(curve),TA(4)
This outputs nominal, actual and feature deviation values to the Output window.
Example:
For an existing GSURF with some scan data called SUR_ORIGINAL and where a slice has already been
defined on the CAD model:
$$ defines an algorithm to apply when constructing the target GSURF
$$ applies the algorithm defined before to the original GSURF, then copies
$$ the resulting point cloud into the target GSURF
F(SUR_TARGET)=FEAT/GSURF
CONST/GSURF,F(SUR_TARGET),TR,F(SUR_ORIGINAL)
$$ Now the target GSURF will have touches that are saved in the database.
$$ Mesh the point cloud
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD',WAIT,'SUR_TARGET',POINTSON
$$ defines a GCURVE
F(CUR001)=FEAT/GCURVE,CART,0,730.71747,572.25017,-0.99019,-0.1397,-0.00109,
595
PTDATA,0,730.71757,572.23623,0.14125,-0.98995,
-0.00755,0,730.70692,573.63035,0.14108,-0.98997,
-0.00758,0,730.69622,575.02447,0.14091,-0.98999,
-0.00762,0,730.68547,576.41859,0.14073,-0.99002,
-0.00765,0,730.67467,577.81271,0.14056,-0.99004,
-0.00768,0,730.66383,579.20683,0.14039,-0.99007,
-0.00772,0,730.65294,580.60095,0.14022,-0.99009,
-0.00775,0,730.642,581.99507,0.14005,-0.99011,
-0.00778,0,730.63102,583.38919,0.13988,-0.99014,
-0.00782,0,730.61999,584.78331,0.13971,-0.99016,
-0.00785,0,730.60891,586.17743,0.13953,-0.99019,-0.00789
$$ defines the plane used to intersect the GSURF
F(PL_CUR001)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,730.71747,572.25017,-0.99019,-0.1397,0.00109
$$ constructs the GCURVE
CONST/GCURVE,F(CUR001),INTOF,FA(SUR_TARGET),F(PL_CUR001)
$$ defines a tolerance to be applied
T(4)=TOL/PROFL,-2,2
$$ analytic output of all the points in the GCURVE with tolerance applied
OUTPUT/FA(CUR001),TA(4)
See Also:
Constructing a Curve
Construction Types
523
852
574
578
Output Window
89.6
Construct Dialog Boxes

Construct Dialog Boxes
596
Purpose
Use the various Construct dialog boxes to construct a feature using previously defined, measured or
constructed features. Type in a label for the new feature and select whether the actual or nominal values
from the selected features are to be used. For plane features, selecting None uses the current work
plane.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the appropriate Construct feature command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/feature command (if viewing your program
as program text)
See Also:
Construction Types
556
578
Construct Best Fit Dialog Box

Construct Offset Dialog Box
597
599
Part Program Window
89.7
597

Purpose
Use this dialog box to select a range of points from the buffer. Whenever a feature is measured, the
buffer (or background) points are stored. Depending on the construction type, buffer points may also be
stored when features are constructed.
You can construct features using actual buffer points, and you can also output buffer points.
Navigation
Output Actual Feature dialog box, add a feature to the Feature Nominal/Actual list and double-click
it
Construct Best Fit dialog box, double-click a feature in the Centres list
Construct Best Fit window, right-click a feature, select Point Buffer

Start point - select the first point you want to use from the range of points in the buffer.
End point - select the last point you want to use from the range of points in the buffer.
See Also:
465
597

557
Using Buffer Points
89.8

578
598
Purpose
Use the Construct Best Fit dialog box to 'best fit' a feature to a number of centres of features through
which it will be constructed. Add the features that you want to use in the construction to the Centres
list. You can use the Nominal and Actual buttons to specify whether the highlighted feature's nominal or
actual value is used in the construction. You can double-click any of the features to display the Point
Buffer dialog box, where you can select the actual buffer points to use in constructing the feature (if a
feature has no buffer points an error is reported).
You can use the Geometry Algorithm dialog box 756 to specify the fitting algorithms to be used when
constructing features using BF (best fit) constructions.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/feature,F( ),BF command (if viewing your

Feature label - the unique label for the feature being constructed. Select a label from the drop-down
list, or type in a new one.
Centres - the centres of all features listed are used during the construction process. Use the Add
button to add features from the drop-down list, and use the Delete button to delete the selected feature
from the list of centres. The Nominal button specifies that the currently selected feature's nominal value
is used in the construction, and the Actual button specifies that the feature's actual value is used.
See Also:
557

Part Program Window
578
45
Note:
The dialog boxes for constructing features using 'best fit' include the Construct Best Fit Circle dialog
box, the Construct Best Fit Arc dialog box, the Construct Best Fit Cylinder dialog box, the Construct
599
Best Fit Plane dialog box, the Construct Best Fit Line dialog box, the Construct Best Fit Cone dialog
box, the Construct Best Fit Pattern dialog box, the Construct Best Fit Parallel Planes dialog box, the
Construct Best Fit Sphere dialog box, the Construct Best Fit Round Slot dialog box and the Construct
Best Fit Square Slot dialog box.
89.9

Purpose
Use the Construct Offset dialog box to construct a feature from the offsets obtained from the nominal
feature definitions of a number of features. Add the features that you want to use in the construction to
the Centres list. You can use the Nominal and Actual buttons to specify whether the highlighted
feature's nominal or actual value is used in the construction. For example, when constructing a plane
using actual values, the features' actuals are projected normal to the plane by a distance equal to the
distance of the feature nominals from the plane. If you selected a feature nominal, this would be
projected onto the plane. The resulting constructed plane is best fit through the projected features. The
same process is used when constructing a line feature.
You can use the Geometry Algorithm dialog box
constructing features using offset constructions.
756
to specify the fitting algorithms to be used when
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/feature,F( ),OFFSET command (if viewing
your program as program text)

Centres - all features listed are used during the construction process. Use the Add button to add
features from the drop-down list, and use the Delete button to delete the selected feature from the list of
600
centres. The Nominal button specifies that the currently selected feature's nominal value is used in the
construction, and the Actual button specifies that the feature's actual value is used.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
578
89.10 Construct Circle from Cone Dialog Box

Construct Circle from Cone Dialog Box
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a circle from a cone, either by specifying a known distance from the
vertex of the cone, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle. The circle has the same axis as the
cone.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),CONE command (if viewing

Label - the unique label for the feature being constructed. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type
in a new one.
Cone - the feature used to construct the circle.
Diameter - select this to construct a circle of the diameter in the Value field.
Distance from vertex - select this to construct a circle at the distance specified in the Value field from
the vertex of the cone.
Value - if Diameter is selected, the diameter of the cone at the position used to construct the circle. If
Distance from vertex is selected, the distance from the vertex of the cone, used to construct the circle.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
601
580
89.11 Construct Build Compound Dialog Box

Construct Build Compound Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Construct Build Compound dialog box to construct a compound feature by fitting it to a number
of centres of features through which it will be constructed.
For axial compound features, only coaxial axial features such as cones or cylinders can be used. For
plane compound features, only coplanar features such as planes can be used. For sphere compound
features, only spheres that share the same centre point can be used.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Construct Compound feature command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/COMPOUND,(F ),BUILD command (if
viewing your program as program text)

602
89.12 Construct Circle from Sphere Dialog Box

Construct Circle from Sphere Dialog Box
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a circle from a sphere, either by specifying a known distance from the
centre of the sphere, or by specifying a known diameter for the circle along a specified direction. The
constructed circle has the same direction as the specified direction. The direction is shown for the
nominal feature displayed in the Grid window. You can change it by overtyping it, but you must then
recalculate the circle (e.g. by typing in the diameter again).
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/CIRCLE,F( ),SPHERE command (if viewing

in a new one.
Sphere - the feature used to construct the circle.
Diameter - select this to construct a circle of the diameter in the Value field.
Distance from centre - select this to construct a circle at the distance specified in the Value field from
the centre of the sphere.
Value - if Diameter is selected, the diameter of the sphere at the position used to construct the circle. If
Distance from centre is selected, the distance from the centre of the sphere, used to construct the
circle.
Direction - the direction of the constructed circle.
603
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
581
89.13 Extract Feature Dialog Box

Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a feature by extraction from a geometrical feature. Bounded arcs and
bounded lines are extracted from (scanned) generic curves (GCURVE).
You can specify parameters using a CALL/EXTERN command.
If probe compensation is on, the extracted feature is probe compensated.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the XTRACT/F( ),FA( ) command (if viewing your

Target feature - a bounded line or an arc.
Source feature - a generic curve (GCURVE).
See Also:
915

556
755
Part Program Window
89.14 Move Point Dialog Box

Move Point Dialog Box
582
604
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a point by moving the centre co-ordinates of a previously measured
feature. Type in a label for the new feature and select whether the actual or nominal values from the
selected features are to be used.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/POINT,F( ),MOVEPT command (if viewing

in a new one.
Centre - the feature the centre of which is to be moved to construct the new feature.
Offset - select Offset to move the centre of the selected feature by an absolute distance (in the current
units as shown in the System Settings dialog box). Type in the co-ordinates for the new position in the
dx, dy and dz fields.
Vector - select Vector to move the centre of the selected feature along the vector of the same or a
different feature. Type in the distance for the movement in the Dist field (in the current units).
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
101
584
605
89.15 Construct Vertex Point Dialog Box

Construct Vertex Point Dialog Box
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a point using the vertex of a cone.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/POINT,F( ),VERTEX command (if viewing

in a new one.
Cone - the feature from which the vertex will be used to construct the point.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
585
89.16 Construct Hi-Lo Point Dialog Box

Construct Hi-Lo Point Dialog Box
606
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a point at the extreme measurement point of a feature, in a specified
direction.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/POINT,F( ),EXTREM command (if viewing

in a new one.
Feature - the feature containing the measured points. Select a feature from the drop-down list, or type
one in.
Type - select whether to use the minimum (low) or maximum (high) measured point in the selected
direction.
Direction
Select the direction of the extreme point.
X, Y, Z axis - the extreme point is the furthest point in the X, Y or Z direction.
Vector - specify a non-axial direction in the adjacent i, j and k fields.
Feature radius - a direction pointing away from the centre and perpendicular to the surface of the
measured feature at the measured point.
Nominal/actual reference - use the nominal or actual direction of the feature selected in the adjacent
drop-down list to determine the extreme measurement point.
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
607
586
89.17 Construct Point with COG Dialog Box

Construct Point with COG Dialog Box
Purpose
Use this dialog box to construct a point at the averaged centre of the geometric centre derived from the
specified point-reducible features.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/POINT,F( ),COG command (if viewing your

See Also:
Part Program Window
45

578
608
89.18 Retrieve Feature Type Dialog Boxes

Retrieve Feature Type Dialog Boxes
Purpose
Use the various Retrieve dialog boxes to edit the CONST/feature,F( ),RETRIEVE commands in your
program. These commands are added by CAMIO when constructing features by extraction from a point
cloud generated by laser scanning a surface (GSURF) feature (for details see Construction Using
Retrieve 588 ).
The following feature types can be retrieved:
Circle
Cylinder
Plane
Cone
Round slot
Square slot
Point
609
Sphere
Edge
Select the label for the feature to be retrieved and select the surface (GSURF) scanned to generate the
point cloud. Set up the remaining options for the feature to be retrieved.
Navigation
program as descriptive text), or double-click the CONST/feature,F( ),RETRIEVE command (if viewing

one in.
Surface - the surface feature scanned to generate the point cloud.
Search radius - the radius (in microns) of a cylinder where all the scanned points within the cylinder are
used for the retrieval of the feature. The axis of the cylinder is defined by the direction of the feature and
passes through the centre point of the feature. The radius is used in an iterative process to filter out
points that are too far from the feature. At the start, many points are used to fit the new feature. As the
iteration proceeds, the feature is refined and points outside the radius are discarded. At the end of the
process, all the points used must lie within the radius. If a search radius of zero is used, all of the
scanned data is used for the retrieval of the feature.
Search radius 1 - for edge and sphere extraction. Not currently used.
Distance between planes - for points, the distance, in the current units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box 101 ), between two parallel planes that cut through a sphere used to define a volume
around the nominal point. Only the points that lie within the volume defined by the planes and the
sphere are used for feature extraction.
Depth - for circles and slots, the measuring depth, in the current units. The points on a plane that is
parallel to the surface at the set depth are used for the feature retrieval.
Distance - for edge extraction. A distance from the edge, in the current units, used to calculate the
normal of the surface where the edge point is.
Patch radius - for edge extraction. A radius (in the current units) around a point at a distance from the
edge as given in the Distance field above. Only the points within the radius are used to calculate the
normal of the surface.
Sphere direction - the axis of the sphere being extracted from the surface.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135

Part Program Window
523
45
Note:
The dialog boxes for retrieving features include the Retrieve Circle from Surface dialog box, the Retrieve
Cylinder from Surface dialog box, the Retrieve Plane from Surface dialog box, the Retrieve Cone from
Surface dialog box, the Retrieve Edge from Surface dialog box, the Retrieve Slot from Surface dialog
box, the Retrieve Point from Surface dialog box and the Retrieve Sphere from Surface dialog box.
610
89.19 Compare Curve Feature to CAD Dialog Box

Compare Curve Feature to CAD Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Compare Curve Feature to CAD dialog box to select the CAD geometry to compare to a curve
feature, to construct another curve feature. When you select a curve feature in the Feature drop-down
list and a CAD geometry entity in the CAD geometry list, if the touch points in the feature compare to
the CAD geometry, then the
(Apply) button is enabled. If there is no suitable CAD geometry in the
list, you can define your own by clicking on faces on the CAD model. The faces are added to the Define
geometry list. To use them, click Accept. This adds a new CAD geometry entity to the CAD geometry
drop-down list, adds a G( )=GEOM command to your part program and enables the
button.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Nearest Points on Geometry from the Curve drop-down
list in the Construct Feature section

Feature - lists all GCURVE features in your part program. Select a feature from the drop-down list.
CAD geometry - lists all the CAD geometry defined in your part program. Select a CAD geometry
entity from the drop-down list.
Define geometry - if there is no suitable CAD geometry in the list, you can define your own by clicking
on faces on the CAD model. The faces are added to the Define geometry list. To use them, click
Accept. This adds a new G( )=GEOM command to your part program and enables the
button.
611
Accept - creates a CAD geometry entity from the faces in the Define geometry list and adds it to the
CAD geometry list.
Delete - deletes the highlighted geometry entities from the Define geometry list.
See Also:
589
89.20 Compare Surface Feature to CAD Dialog Box

Compare Surface Feature to CAD Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Compare Surface Feature to CAD dialog box to select the CAD geometry to compare to a
surface feature, to construct another surface feature. When you select a surface feature in the Feature
drop-down list and a CAD geometry entity in the CAD geometry list, if the touch points in the feature
compare to the CAD geometry, then the
(Apply) button is enabled. If there is no suitable CAD
geometry in the list, you can define your own by clicking on faces on the CAD model. The faces are
added to the Define geometry list. To use them, click Accept. This adds a new CAD geometry entity to
the CAD geometry drop-down list, adds a G( )=GEOM command to your part program and enables the
button.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Compare to Cad in the Cad Compare section

612
Feature - lists all GSURF features in your part program. Select a feature from the drop-down list.
button.
CAD geometry list.
See Also:
591
Compare Curve Feature to CAD Dialog Box 610

Compare Point Feature to CAD Dialog Box
89.21 Compare Point Feature to CAD Dialog Box

Compare Point Feature to CAD Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Compare Point Feature to CAD dialog box to select the CAD geometry to compare to a point
feature, to construct another point feature. When you select a point feature in the Feature drop-down list
and a CAD geometry entity in the CAD geometry list, if the touch point in the feature compares to the
CAD geometry, then the
(Apply) button is enabled. If there is no suitable CAD geometry in the list,
you can define your own by clicking on faces on the CAD model. The faces are added to the Define
613
geometry list. To use them, click Accept. This adds a new CAD geometry entity to the CAD geometry
drop-down list, adds a G( )=GEOM command to your part program and enables the
button.
Navigation
Select Construct from the main toolbar, click Nearest Point from the Point drop-down list in the

Feature - lists all point features in your part program. Select a feature from the drop-down list.
button.
CAD geometry list.
89.22 Construct Nearest Points Dialog Box

Construct Nearest Points Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Construct Nearest Points dialog box to edit the command for constructing a curve (GCURVE) or
surface (GSURF) feature by comparing the points from a source feature to the nearest CAD points. This
generates nominal points, so that a profile tolerance can be applied to obtain output and feature
deviations in CAD.
The Construct Nearest Points dialog box adds a CONST/GEOMCURVE,F( ),NEARPT,FA( ) or a
CONST/GEOMSURF,F( ),NEARPT,FA( ) command to your program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click a CONST/GEOMCURVE,F( ),NEARPT,FA( ) command or
a CONST/GEOMSURF,F( ),NEARPT,FA( )
614
Label - a label for the curve or surface feature to be constructed., or select one from the drop-down list.
The feature must have been defined using the Geometry Curve Feature dialog box or the Geometry
Surface Feature dialog box.
Source feature - select the source feature for the construction.
Nominal/Actual - select whether the actual or nominal values from the selected feature are to be used.
See Also:
Constructing a Surface
589
591
577
Geometry Curve Feature Dialog Box 548

Geometry Surface Feature Dialog Box
547
Part Program Window
89.23 Construct Nearest Point Dialog Box

Construct Nearest Point Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Construct Nearest Point dialog box to edit a CONST/GEOM,F( ),NEARPT,FA( ) command in
your program. This command is added automatically by CAMIO when performing a Compare to CAD
function (see Comparing Touch Data to CAD Surfaces 378 ), or you can add it using this dialog box.
The command constructs a point feature by comparing a source feature to the nearest CAD point. This
generates a nominal point, so that a profile tolerance can be applied to obtain output and feature
deviations in CAD.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click a CONST/GEOM,F( ),NEARPT,FA( ) command

Label - a label for the point to be constructed.
Source feature - the source feature for the construction.
Nominal/Actual - specify whether the actual or nominal values from the selected feature are to be used.
See Also:
Constructing a Point
575
Geometry Point Feature Dialog Box
615
546
Part Program Window
90
Output
Output
Purpose
The Output section allows you to define tolerances for use in evaluating features and to output feature
and tolerance data in a variety of ways. There are two sets of commands, Tolerance commands 412 and
Output commands 464 .
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar
91
Datums and Alignments
91.1

Purpose
The Datum commands allow you to set, manipulate and use datums and alignments. When a datum
change is carried out, the alignment and transformation matrix information is output to all active DMIS
devices.
For discussion of creating alignments, and different types of alignments, see Aligning the Part
620
When you save your datums, you can save them to an external file (see Saving Datums to a File
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar
.
640
).
616
Datum
Wizard
619
641
Datum Features
616
Alignment
Translate
616
619
Best Fit
Model
618
Rotate
618
619
See Also:
Main Toolbar
91.2
Alignment
Alignment
The Alignment section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the
following options:
MCS - displays the Machine Co-ordinates dialog box
ordinates datum.
662
where you can set up the Machine Co-
Datum Definition - displays the Assign Datum dialog box

feature.
659
where you can assign a datum label to a
3-2-1 Alignment - displays the Create Datum dialog box where you can set the axes for a datum.
91.3
Datum Features
91.3.1 Datum Features

Datum Features
The Datum Features section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the
following options:
Apply - inserts the commands from the Datum Features Teach Path into your program.
Cancel - cancels any commands from the Datum Features Teach Path and does not insert them into
your program.
Feature Wizard - starts the Feature wizard 277 , which can be used to determine what feature type is
being inspected. Only available with the CMM on-line.
Plane, Line, Point, Cylinder, Circle, Round Slot, Square Slot, Sphere - displays the Datum
Features Teach Path 616 where you can set up the datum feature to be measured.
Mode - displays the Program Mode dialog box
747
, where you can select the operation mode.
Offset - displays a drop-down list where you can choose to add a Axis Offset
Probe Offset 776 or Surface Offset 772 move to your part program.
773
, Feature Offset
775
Absolute Moves - displays a drop-down list where you can choose to add an Absolute or Incremental
move to your part program.
91.3.2 Datum Features Teach Path View

Datum Features Teach Path View
617
Purpose
The Datum Features Teach Path view shows the touches and any changes to settings in the order you
made them. You can use the handbox to take points and add moves, or you can select the feature from
a model. For details see Setting Up the Inspection Path 275 .
box 134 . When available, you can specify the number of touch points to take in a Number of touches
field displayed under the Operation mode options (as shown in the picture on the right). If so, this
overrides the value in the Teach Properties dialog box.
The commands you add into the Datum Features Teach Path view are inserted into your program when
you click
(Apply). Drag-and-drop the commands in the Datum Features Teach Path view to reorder them. Commands are inserted into the Datum Features Teach Path view immediately before the
insertion point
, and you can drag-and-drop this into another position in the list of commands.
You can select touches on the model by clicking them whilst holding down the SHIFT or CTRL key.
This highlights them in the Datum Features Teach Path view.
Select the operation mode for CAMIO:
MAN (or Manual if you are NOT viewing Program Text)
Puts the machine into Manual mode and creates a manual part program. When you run the program,
you must manually take the points using the handbox. The number of points to take is displayed in the
Number of touches field and you can change it there before you click
(Apply).
PROG
Puts the program into Program mode.
AUTO (or CNC if you are NOT viewing Program Text)
Puts the program into Automatic mode.
If the feature being inspected does not have a 'canned cycle' (internal measuring routine), the mode is
618
Program. If the feature has a canned cycle, the mode is Automatic, unless you have moves and touch
points in the Datum Features Teach Path view. In this case, the mode is Program.
In AUTO mode, when you click
(Apply), CAMIO automatically measures the feature, unless you
have already measured the part by using the handbox and the feature does not have a canned cycle, or
you have added moves and touch points. When you run the program, CAMIO automatically measures
the feature (unless the feature does not have a canned cycle, or you have added moves and touch
points). If the CMM is off-line, collision detection 186 is enabled on the Simulation tab page 63 in the
Display Settings dialog box and a model is present in the model window 49 , any collisions are shown in
the Collisions window 186 .
Scan mode on
If checked, adds a SCNMOD/ON command to your part program, to enable tactile probe scanning. The
SCNMOD/ON command is required if you are NOT using PATH and PAMEAS commands to define the
scan path for the feature (it is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands).
Number of touches
Select the number of touches to add to the teach path. (When scanning features with a laser scanner,
the number of touches indicates the scan density. The larger the number, the more densely packed the
scan lines. The minimum number of points required to define the feature type gives a reasonable scan
density for feature extraction.)
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
40
Scanning
92
Alignment Menu - Best Fit

Alignment Menu - Best Fit
The Best Fit section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
RPS Align - displays the Reference Point Alignment dialog box
constraints to create a datum.
Best Fit - displays the Locate Datum dialog box
through a number of features.
Iterate - displays the Iterate dialog box
649
659
652
where you can select features and
where you can create a datum that is a best fit
where you can set up the iterations for a best fit alignment.
Six Point Best Fit - displays the Six Point Locate dialog box
locate alignment.
672
where you can create a six point
Functional Mating - displays the Functional Mating dialog box where you can set up parameters for
mating features together.
93
Rotate
Rotate
The Rotate section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
By Angle - displays the Rotate by Angle dialog box
angle about an axis.
663
where you can rotate a datum by a specified
Rotate
619
To Feature - displays the Rotate to Feature dialog box where you can rotate the current axis system
about the specified axis to align with the selected feature.
94
Translate
Translate
The Translate section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the
following options:
By Value - displays the Translate by Value dialog box
origin by specified distances.
667
where you can translate the current axis
To Feature - displays the Translate to Feature dialog box 665 where you can translate the current axis
origin to the nominals or actuals of a selected feature origin.
To Datum - displays the Translate to Datum dialog box
origin to the datum of a selected feature.
665
where you can translate the current axis
By Probe Radius - displays the Translate by Probe Radius dialog box where you can translate the
current axis origin by a distance equal to the effective radius of the probe in either a plus or minus
direction.
95
Model
Model
The Model section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
Associate - displays the Associate Datum with CAD WCS dialog box 669 where you can associate a
part co-ordinate system (pcs) with the CAD co-ordinate system (model datum).
Equate - displays the Equate Datums dialog box
equivalent.
671
where you can define two actual datums as being
Set - displays the Set CAD Transform dialog box where you can equate an actual datum to a nominal
transform in the CAD model.
96
Datum
Datum
The Datum section is accessed from the Alignment tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
Save - displays the Save Datum dialog box
database or to a file.
645
where you can save datums either to the inspection
Recall Datum - displays the Recall Datum dialog box

from the inspection database or from a file.
646
where you can recall saved datums either
Delete - displays the Delete Datum dialog box where you can delete saved datums either from the
inspection database or from a file.
620
97
Aligning the Part
97.1
Aligning the Part

Aligning the Part
Alignment establishes the relationship between the machine and the part. This allows you to produce
meaningful data about where features are in the machine volume. Usually you will want to create an
alignment before carrying out an inspection, but you may decide you don't need one if you are simply
measuring how big features are and where they are in relation to each other, or if you just want to make
a simple measurement, such as looking at the circularity of a ring-gauge.
An alignment is always a datum and, except for translation by value and rotation by angle, the datum
commands all change the alignment. This is because if you create a datum (using DATSET), you are
re-defining the relationship between nominal space (e.g. on the CAD model) and actual space (i.e. on
the machine).
There are several ways to create an alignment.
Use the Datum wizard 641 . This prompts you to use appropriate features for your alignment. If you
do not have appropriate features, it prompts you to measure them.
Use the Create Datum dialog box 658 . Unlike the Datum wizard, this requires the datum features to
already exist, but it allows a much wider choice of features and their origin and direction than is
possible with the Datum wizard. (You could achieve the same result using a combination of rotate
and translate datum commands.)
Use the Locate Datum dialog box 659 to create a datum that is a best fit through a number of
features. This also aligns the model.
Use the Reference Point Alignment (RPS) dialog box 652 to perform a 3-2-1 alignment (i.e.
constraining the alignment with three constraints in one axis direction, two in another and one in the
third direction). This allows you to define the way in which the features used constrain the
alignment.
Use Model Locate 967 - this is a theoretical locate, and is useful off-line with probe selection 368 to
help you find suitable probe angles for your inspection, i.e. these are off-line programming tools. (An
alignment established off-line, other than with Model Locate, may not be valid, as the measurements
will just reflect the nominal feature for Automatic or Manual modes 40 , or touches for Program
mode.)
If the alignment fails you can try again, selecting different features, or selecting different constraints or
axes. There are also a number of complex alignments 621 that you can create using the LOCATE,
MATDEF and GEOM commands.
When you have created an alignment, you can check that it is in the correct place. Use the handbox to
move the sensor tip to where you think the new datum is. The DRO 86 should display (0,0,0). You can
then move the active datum around the part, but each time you do so, the alignment is altered depending
on the commands used. You usually move the active datum by rotating and translating it, usually to a
feature actual or by a nominal value. You could also use the Create Datum dialog box to create a 1-, 2or 3-axis DATSET command.
Manual and automatic alignment
If you create your alignment in Manual mode, it is advisable to recreate it in Automatic mode, as this is
more accurate. You could do this using the Program Mode dialog box 747 to set the mode to Automatic
after the alignment, then using a combination of IF 907 and JUMPTO 910 commands to re-run the
alignment commands (click here 632 for some sample code).
Creating an alignment program
If you are creating a program just for aligning the part, make sure you recall any sensors you might need
(using the Recall Sensor dialog box 718 ) and select the first sensor (using the Select Sensor dialog box
Aligning the Part
621
). You can use the Output Text dialog box 763 to add prompts to your program, to indicate which
features to measure for the alignment. Use the Absolute Move dialog box 766 to insert sensor clearance
moves.
714
See Also:
Co-ordinate Systems
97.2
Complex Alignments Using LOCATE, MATDEF and GEOM
97.2.1 Complex Alignments Using LOCATE, MATDEF and GEOM

Complex Alignments Using LOCATE, MATDEF and GEOM
The LOCATE, MATDEF, GEOM, FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM commands allow you to perform a
variety of complex alignments. You can use these commands to align parts in specific applications
including sheet metal, turbine blades and fixtures. These alignments do not move the current inspection
datum.
For details, including sample code and discussion of how and why commands can be combined to
perform the alignments, click the following options:
6 Point Alignment Using LOCATE
621
7+ Point Alignment Using LOCATE
623
Selection of Features and Constraints for RPS and Best-Fit Alignments

Best Fitting Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM
Planar Best Fitting
627
627
Holding Fixture Emulation and Functional Matings
628
Best Fitting Using Point Features Mating to Geometry

RPS
625
629
629
Holding Fixture Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders
631
Aligning a Fixture with Three Spheres
97.2.2 6 Point Alignment Using LOCATE

6 Point Alignment Using LOCATE
This alignment can be created using the Six Point Locate Dialog Box
672
D(1)=LOCATE/FA(PT1),FA(PT2),FA(PT3),FA(PT4),FA(PT5),FA(PT6)
The above command defines a fully-constrained alignment using six point features. It is fully-constrained
and not over-constrained because the number of constraints (i.e. the features) matches the number of
degrees of freedom. The LOCATE command as used above has no restriction specified for the degrees
of freedom, which implies it is free to move in 3D space, i.e. it has six degrees of freedom.
The selection of the points by the user is key to the success of the alignment. The first part of the
alignment (the pre-alignment) looks through the features listed in the LOCATE command for three noncoincident, non-collinear features. These features are not necessarily the first three features specified in
the command, although the first is always used. The pre-alignment then calculates a transformation that
makes all three nominal features coplanar with all three actual features, the first two nominal and actual
features collinear, and the first nominal and actual features coincident. If three such features cannot be
found, the pre-alignment is skipped, and this will probably cause the final phase to fail as well. If three
pre-alignment features are found, there may still be problems if the coincidence and collinearity tests
have been passed but only by a narrow margin. This depends on the nature and size of the part being
622
measured. Consider the case on a small part where the three points lie within 1 mm of a straight line. If
the three points are spaced 2-3 mm apart, then they are clearly not collinear, but if they are hundreds of
millimetres apart on a large part then that is not nearly so clear, as a deviation of 1 mm does not give a
reasonable plane. This is because the test for collinearity is not proportional to the distance the features
are apart. If the three points are 1 m apart but the deviation from a straight line is 1 mm or so, the plane
fitted through the features is likely to be unreliable in determining the pre-alignment correctly. The best
distribution of points has at least three forming an equilateral triangle that is as large as possible.
The next phase is to transform all the input features by the pre-alignment transformation calculated (if
there is one).
The final phase is to call the fitting algorithm. This calculates the transformation that fits the six nominal
features to the six actual features. The algorithm requires two further pieces of information for each
feature: the direction of the fit and the distance the nominal and actual features are apart. The fit
direction is the feature nominal direction. The distance is calculated as the magnitude of the distance
between the nominal and actual features along the feature's fitting direction. The algorithm requires that
the fitting directions of the features have components in all three axial directions. Three should have a
component in one axial direction, two in another and one in the last. It is not necessary for any
directions to be mutually orthogonal, but the more orthogonal they are the better. As the fitting direction
is the direction associated with the feature, extreme caution should be used when using features other
than points. For example, a circle is often measured with no regard to the deviation along the circle's
direction: the important positional information is within the plane of the circle. Therefore, the fitting
direction and distance are often meaningless for a circle, unless the surface around the circle has been
measured and accounted for (i.e. relative measurement 393 has been used). Similar caution should be
used when considering unbounded features, as the distance between the nominal and actual is
somewhat arbitrary. An example of how six feature points might be distributed on a freeform surface is
shown below.
The result of a fully-constrained (but not over-constrained) alignment is that the features used have zero
error in the direction of fit. For point features, this can be seen by applying a point profile (PROFP)
tolerance to each one.
Aligning the Part
623
It is probably desirable to iterate the alignment once especially if, the first time through, the features are
measured in manual mode. As the deviation is to be tested along the feature nominal vectors, the
Nominal option must be selected on the Iterate dialog box 649 if using this to create the alignment. If
using the Six Point Locate dialog box to create the alignment, the ITERAT command generated
automatically uses the Nominal option.
In order to force iteration, even if the alignment is 'perfect', the absolute convergence tolerance should be
set to a suitably low value, e.g. zero if the iteration check is performed after the LOCATE command, or a
low value if it is performed before.
97.2.3 7+ Point Alignment Using LOCATE

7+ Point Alignment Using LOCATE
D(2)=LOCATE/FA(PT1),FA(PT2),FA(PT3),FA(PT4),FA(PT5),FA(PT6),FA(PT7)
The above command is an over-constrained and therefore best fit alignment using seven points. It is
over-constrained because the number of features is greater than the number of degrees of freedom in this
case (there is no constraint on the fit in this LOCATE command therefore the number of degrees of
freedom is six).
The selection of the points by the user is key to the success of the alignment. The first part of the
alignment (the pre-alignment) looks through the features listed in the LOCATE command for three noncoincident, non-collinear features. These features are not necessarily the first three features specified in
the command, although the first is always used. The pre-alignment then calculates a transformation that
makes all three nominal features coplanar with all three actual features, the first two nominal and actual
features collinear, and the first nominal and actual features coincident. If three such features cannot be
found, the pre-alignment is skipped, and this will probably cause the final phase to fail as well. If three
pre-alignment features are found, there may still be problems if the coincidence and collinearity tests
have been passed but only by a narrow margin. This depends on the nature and size of the part being
measured. Consider the case on a small part where the three points lie within 1 mm of a straight line. If
the three points are spaced 2-3 mm apart, then they are clearly not collinear, but if they are hundreds of
millimetres apart on a large part then that is not nearly so clear, as a deviation of 1 mm does not give a
reasonable plane. This is because the test for collinearity is not proportional to the distance the features
are apart. If the three points are 1 m apart but the deviation from a straight line is 1 mm or so, the plane
fitted through the features is likely to be unreliable in determining the pre-alignment correctly. The best
distribution of points has at least three forming an equilateral triangle that is as large as possible.
The next phase is to transform all the input features by the pre-alignment transformation calculated (if
there is one).
The final phase is to call the fitting algorithm. This calculates the transformation that fits the six nominal
features to the six actual features. The algorithm requires two further pieces of information for each
feature: the direction of the fit and the distance the nominal and actual features are apart. The fit
direction is the feature nominal direction. The distance is calculated as the magnitude of the distance
between the nominal and actual features along the feature's fitting direction. The algorithm requires that
the fitting directions of the features have components in all three axial directions. Three should have a
component in one axial direction, two in another and one in the last. It is not necessary for any
directions to be mutually orthogonal, but the more orthogonal they are the better. As the fitting direction
is the direction associated with the feature, extreme caution should be used when using features other
than points. For example, a circle is often measured with no regard to the deviation along the circle's
direction: the important positional information is within the plane of the circle. Therefore, the fitting
direction and distance are often meaningless for a circle, unless the surface around the circle has been
measured and accounted for (i.e. relative measurement 393 has been used). Similar caution should be
used when considering unbounded features, as the distance between the nominal and actual is
somewhat arbitrary.
However, because there are more than six features the restriction on the component directions is
relaxed slightly. At least three should have a component in one axial direction, at least two in another
624
and at least one in the last. An example of how a group of feature points might be distributed on a part
is shown below.
As long as at least two features have one axial component and another has one of the other axial
components, then all of the other features can be orthogonal to these three. Another, more typical,
example on a freeform surface is shown below.
Aligning the Part
625
The result of an over-constrained alignment is a best fit. This averages the error over the features. In the
first picture above where the features are on orthogonal faces, the error on the features on the upper and
right hand faces will be zero, as they constrain but do not over-constrain those directions. The errors on
the features on the left hand face will be averaged in such a way that the mean squared error on each
feature is minimised. In the second example above, the error will be distributed over all the features, as
no two are mutually orthogonal. In fact, the errors in any three mutually orthogonal directions (e.g. the
three Cartesian co-ordinate axes) are averaged.
The considerations for iterating a best fit alignment are the same as for a fully-constrained alignment (in
terms of determination of directions) except that the convergence tolerance is typically set to be nonzero and is often set to be an incremental convergence. The change in total error between iterations is
checked rather than the total, for which an absolute convergence value may not be known or relevant.
The iteration typically involves re-measuring the features relative to the best fit datum and recalculating
the alignment.
The fit can be weighted in favour of certain features by including them in the LOCATE command multiple
times: specifying a feature twice gives it double weighting, three times gives it triple weighting, etc.
97.2.4 Selection of Features and Constraints for RPS and Best-Fit Alignments
Selection of Features and Constraints for RPS and Best-Fit Alignments
The LOCATE command used for RPS and best-fit alignments relies upon mathematical optimisation
algorithms that reduce the error between nominal and actual pairs of positions along a specified vector.
Ensuring an Optimal Solution
The first operation during the datum calculation is an approximate alignment that calculates the gross
translational and rotational components of displacement to adjust the data so that the algorithm can
succeed. This is because the algorithm is limited to calculating a transform that has a maximum of
approximately 30 degrees in any single axis, 20 degrees in any 2 axes, or 10 degrees in all three axes
(but with unlimited translation).
If the data after this initial alignment still lies outside these constraints, then the algorithm may succeed
but return a solution that is not optimal (in mathematical terms the solution has converged to a local
626
minimum). Ideally the features measured should be as widely spaced as possible: this is most
significant for the first three features that are neither mutually coincident nor collinear. More generally it
is important to space the measurement features so that any measurement position error is small in
proportion to the distance between features.
This lack of convergence to the optimal solution can still occur when performing an RPS alignment
where there are six constraints and six degrees of freedom if the actual data is collected inaccurately,
as will inevitably be the case when performing an initial set-up manually. In this situation the alignment
should be iterated, either in CNC mode (on a CNC machine) or with target-driven measurement (on a
manual system).
Selection of Constraints
The selection of constraints applied to features is also crucial to ensuring the calculation of an optimal
alignment. Mathematically, there must be at least one constraint per degree of freedom of the fit to
achieve a solution, but they still need to be carefully selected. Consider the measurement of three
coplanar circles that are to be used in an RPS-style alignment:
If the constraints are chosen as follows:

Example 1
CIR001 - xyz
CIR002 - yz
CIR003 - z
the alignment is likely to converge to the optimal solution. However, if the following constraints are
chosen:
Example 2
CIR001 - xyz
CIR002 - xz
CIR003 - z
Aligning the Part
627
or, worse:
Example 3
CIR001 - y
CIR002 - xyz
CIR003 - yz
then the alignment is likely to converge to a local minimum. The underlying mathematics requires that if
two features are to act as constraints in the same direction, the line between them should not be parallel
to that direction. In the above examples the displacement between circles CIR001 and CIR002 is mostly
in x and between CIR002 and CIR003 lies solely in y, i.e. along the constraining directions in examples
2 and 3, respectively.
97.2.5 Best Fitting Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM

Best Fitting Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM
The program segment you see if you click here 634 shows how a best-fit alignment can be created using
'compare to CAD' points, i.e. FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM commands. The significant fact here is
that the feature measurement is not repeated but instead the nominal and actual features are
recalculated (using EVAL commands). In each iteration, the values used for the nominal and actual
positions are the ones calculated by the last 'compare to CAD' operation. Because the measurement is
not repeated, this operation is far faster than re-measuring the features, but this method assumes that
the feature nominal positions are not significant in themselves, e.g. they do not represent master
location points.
The fit direction for each feature is the surface normal of the nearest point on CAD geometry.
97.2.6 Planar Best Fitting

Planar Best Fitting
There is often a requirement to perform a best fit alignment but to constrain the degrees of freedom of the
alignment. The most common of these is to allow movement only within a given datum plane. An
example of this is measuring (probably scanning) a turbine blade at a series of parallel cross-sections,
typically along the stacking axis of the blade. The program segment you see if you click here 636 shows
the measurement of a series of four GCURVE features and a best fit alignment applied to fit within the
ZX-plane only.
628
The specification of GCURVE features in the LOCATE command implies that the fit is to be performed
by treating each of the nominal-actual point pairs of the GCURVE features as individual point features.
The fit direction for each point is the nominal PTMEAS direction projected into the plane of the
GCURVE.
97.2.7 Holding Fixture Emulation and Functional Matings

97.2.7.1 Holding Fixture Emulation and Functional Matings
Holding Fixture Emulation and Functional Matings

The DMIS standard uses the term 'holding fixture emulation' to describe how a part can be mounted on a
theoretical fixture. This fixture is 'created' by defining a number of nominal features that represent
mountings on the 'real' fixture. The features on the part that contact these mountings are then measured
and the nominal mounting feature and the actual measured feature are mated together using the
MATDEF command. The DMIS standard calls this a functional mating. The syntax of a typical
MATDEF command is:
MA(CIR001_Y)=MATDEF/F(CIR001_Y),FA(CIR001),PT2PL,BF,0,0
The significance of the MATDEF command is that it can be used in a LOCATE command instead of a
feature reference. This means that the fit is to be made between the nominal feature in the MATDEF
command and the actual feature along a direction other than the measured feature nominal direction. By
selecting the correct direction parameter in the MATDEF command, the relationship between part and
virtual fixture can be made. The direction options available are:
PT2PT or none (point -to-point) - the direction used is the direction between the centre of the nominal
feature and the centre of the actual feature.
PT2PL (point-to-plane) - the direction used is the direction of the nominal feature.
PT2LN (point-to-line) - the direction used is normal to the nominal feature direction through the centre
of the actual feature.
LN2LN (line-to-line) - the direction used is normal to both the nominal and actual feature directions.
Finally, the MATDEF command allows multiple actual features to be mated to the same nominal feature
or geometry. This might be used where multiple points lie on the same surface (PLANE, CONE, etc)
and provides a compact syntax for defining this, but it is not functionally different from defining a
Aligning the Part
629
separate MATDEF command for each actual feature.

97.2.7.2 Best Fitting Using Point Features Mating to Geometry
Best Fitting Using Point Features Mating to Geometry

MA(1)=MATDEF/G(aaa_ALL),FA(PT001),FA(PT002),FA(PT003),FA(PT007),FA(PT008),FA(PT010),FA
(PT010_1),FA(PT010_10),FA(PT010_11),FA(PT010_2),FA(PT010_3),FA(PT010_4),FA(PT010_5),FA
(PT010_6),FA(PT010_7),FA(PT010_8),FA(PT010_9),PT2PL,BF,0,0
D(3)=LOCATE/MA(1)
The above code shows an operation similar to best fitting using 'compare to CAD' points. The POINT
features in the MATDEF command are not 'compare to CAD' points but the MATDEF itself references a
GEOM label. When the mating is used in the LOCATE command this is interpreted as requiring each of
the points mated to be compared to the CAD geometry specified before calculating the alignment. The
nominal and actual values used to calculate the alignment (including the pre-alignment) are obtained
from these compare to CAD operations. The difference between this and the use of FEAT/GEOM
features is that this compare operation is only used to calculate the alignment. It does not alter the
nominal or actual value of the mated features and does not create any new features. Because of this,
there is no point in re-evaluating the features after the alignment and if the alignment is to be iterated, the
features will need to be re-measured.
97.2.7.3 RPS
RPS
The principle of the RPS (Referenz-Punkt-Systematik) specification is that component alignments are
defined using a series of RPS features, each with one or more axis constraints applied. The component
designer specifies the feature and the constraints, based on factors such as how the part will be fixtured,
which in turn is determined by how the part will physically mate to other components.
Sample RPS sheet
To see an RPS sheet (a document that shows which features are to be used for alignment and how they
constrain the alignment), click here 638 .
Typically, three features are specified: the first constrains all three axes, the second feature constrains
two axes and the last feature constrains an axis constrained by both of the first two. Therefore, there
are six constraints: one axis has three constraints, another axis has two constraints and the last axis
has one constraint. As such, the alignment is fully-constrained and not over-constrained. This is
always the case: the RPS alignment is always fully- but not over-constrained and is therefore not a best
fit alignment.
There are typically three RPS features, but this is not always the case. Between three and six features
may be specified, but there are always six constraints and the constraints are divided 3-2-1 between the
three axes.
The Reference Point Alignment (RPS) dialog box 652 for creating RPS alignments automatically
determines which axes a selected feature is most likely to constrain (you can override this though). The
selection of axes is as follows:
CIRCLE, ARC, CPARLN, CYLNDR, CONE- the two axes orthogonal to the feature direction.
POINT, PLANE, EDGEPT, PARPLN - the axis nearest to the feature direction.
SPHERE - all three axes.
LINE - the axis nearest to the line normal direction.
No other features are supported.
In addition, if a CIRCLE, ARC or CPARLN feature has been measured with a vector build (RMEAS/...
VECBLD), the axis nearest to the feature direction is also considered as constrained and this axis takes
630
precedence over the other two.

The axes selected for each feature type are based on what the feature represents on the physical part.
For example, a circular hole is probably a fixing point where two components are attached. Because of
this, the RPS sheet will probably mark the feature as constraining all three axes. The sample RPS
sheet shows the syntax used. A hole (circle or slot) is designated with the letter H and a surface with
the letter F. Upper-case letters are used for main mounting points and lower-case for 'support' points.
The axes constrained are marked with a lower-case x, y, or z.
When a feature is selected in the Reference Point Alignment (RPS) dialog box, the feature type and its
nominal definition are used to determine the constraints. In the example below, circle, slot and point
features have been selected. The circle was selected first and, as it had been measured with a vector
build, all three axes are constrained. Next, the slot was selected. Again, it was measured with a vector
build so all three axes would be constrained, but, as the circle already constrains three axes, the slot
can only constrain two: the axis nearest its direction and one other. Finally, the point was selected and
was determined to constrain the axis nearest to its direction. As the features were defined 'correctly',
this has produced a 3-2-1 pattern of constraints on the axes.
97.2.7.4 Running an Iterated Alignment
Running an Iterated Alignment

The Reference Point Alignment (RPS) dialog box
to set up an iterated alignment.
652
and the Six Point Locate dialog box
672
allow you
When you run your program, the alignment is performed and iterated if you have set up iteration. If you
have iterated the alignment, these are the possible outcomes:
The convergence value in your variable is less than or equal to the convergence tolerance. The
alignment succeeds and the program continues from the next line.
The convergence value is greater than the convergence tolerance. The maximum number of
iterations has not been reached and the program loops back to the start label.
The convergence value is greater than the convergence tolerance. The maximum number of
iterations has been reached, the alignment fails and the program jumps to the failure label.
Aligning the Part
631
97.2.7.5 Holding Fixture Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders
Holding Fixture Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders

The program segment you see if you click here 638 shows how a fixture using three tooling spheres and
three cylindrical trim-stops can be emulated in a DMIS program.
There are several significant points in this application.

The planes where the tooling spheres sit are measured as vector build points. In theory, they could
be measured as planes but the pre-alignment routine requires that the feature actual locations are
accurate. With plane features, the actual and nominal locations could be defined anywhere within
the planes. Points have clearly defined locations so the pre-alignment will work if the initial manual
measurement of the points is reasonably accurate.
The software takes care of the diameters of the nominal spheres and cylinders and does not just
treat them as points and lines respectively. This correctly represents the physical reality of the part
surface sitting on the surface of the fixture mounts.
The nominal cylinders are mated to the actual lines line-to-line. This is because the cylinders are
perpendicular to the linear features they contact.
The position and direction of the nominal cylinders are very significant. In the pictures, the three
cylinders are at the ends of the bounded lines: one at each end of the first line and one at the end of
the second. In practice, this is not the best set-up: the third cylinder is better positioned in the
centre of the line. Alternatively, a fourth cylinder could be defined at the other end of the second
line, although this will then produce a best-fit alignment.
632
97.2.7.6 Aligning a Fixture with Three Spheres
Aligning a Fixture with Three Spheres

Often a part is aligned by aligning the fixture it sits on, so when the part is placed on the aligned fixture it
is also aligned. Usually this alignment is performed without using the LOCATE and MATDEF
commands. A local alignment is performed on the fixture and then a nominal translation is performed to
move the datum out to the part co-ordinate system, e.g. car body co-ordinates. However, if the fixture
has three alignment spheres defined in part co-ordinates it is logical to use them in a LOCATE
alignment.
The program segment you see if you click here 639 shows how to perform this alignment. There is no
great difference from a standard RPS type alignment except that the points with axial directions have to
be constructed at the centres of the measured spheres, otherwise a point-to-plane mating of the actual
sphere and the RPS-defined nominal point at its centre will result in mating the nominal point to the
sphere surface, i.e. the alignment will be out by a sphere radius.
97.2.7.7 Aligning the Part - Automatic Alignment Sample Code
Aligning the Part - Automatic Alignment Sample Code
Aligning the Part
97.2.7.8 Six Point Locate - Sample Code
Six Point Locate - Sample Code
633
634
97.2.7.9 Best Fitting Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM - Sample Code
Best Fitting Using FEAT/GEOM and CONST/GEOM - Sample Code
Aligning the Part
635
636
97.2.7.10 Planar Best Fitting - Sample Code
Planar Best Fitting - Sample Code
Aligning the Part
637
638
97.2.7.11 RPS Sheet - Sample
RPS Sheet - Sample
97.2.7.12 Holding Fixture Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders - Sample Code
Holding Fixture Emulation Using Spheres and Cylinders - Sample Code
Aligning the Part
97.2.7.13 Aligning a Fixture with Three Spheres - Sample Code
Aligning a Fixture with Three Spheres - Sample Code
639
640
98
Saving Datums to a File

You can save your datums to an external file rather than to the inspection database. You can then
recall them from the external file (and delete them from it). This avoids the need to set up datums again
if these are lost from the inspection database. You simply recall them from the external file. The
external file is specified as a storage device using advanced commands 890 .
1.
Define a file as a device using the Input/Output Device dialog box 940 .
2.
Open the device using the Open Device dialog box 941 . This allows you to read from or write to the
file. Select the device, set the Device Type to Input, and check the Part co-ordinate system box.
Click OK.
3.
In the Save Datum dialog box 645 , add the datums you wish to save to the file to the list below the
Label field. Check the Device box, and select the device (file) in the Device drop-down list. Click
OK.
4.
Close the open file using the Close Device dialog box
file.
5.
You can now use the Recall Datum dialog box

it again first.
646
942
. Make sure you select Keep to save your
to recall datums from the device. You must open
See Also:
Datum Wizard Dialog Box
99
99.1
641
Purpose
Use the Datum Wizard dialog box to perform an alignment. This generates the DMIS code for an
alignment from existing features or from features you measure as you use the Datum wizard.
When you select the type of alignment from the list on the left, the pictures at the top of the dialog box
change to reflect your choice. Type in a datum label. Select each of the three features in turn for the
datum, set the axis and origin fields if necessary, and click Apply.
Selecting features
You can select features for your alignment in a number of ways. You can drag features from the
Explorer window 75 onto the pictures of the features. Clicking on the feature pictures displays the
Select Feature for Alignment dialog box, which lists the defined features that can be used, and allows
you to measure a new one if you wish. You can select features from the CAD model then measure
them or, if you do not have a suitable feature, you can measure one with the Datum wizard open. While
you are selecting features and measuring them, you have access to various commands from the toolbar.
These allow you to add moves and change settings as you measure the feature.
Using IntelliDatum
The IntelliDatum option helps you to perform an alignment by interpreting the points you take as
particular features, and prompting you to take other points appropriate to the alignment. Select
IntelliDatum, and click the first feature picture (now called Wizard). IntelliDatum prompts you to take
points. When you have taken enough points for IntelliDatum to create a plane, you can click Apply.
IntelliDatum then prompts you to take points for the next two features in the alignment.
Resetting the alignment
642
The Reset button clears the selected features. Some alignments insert DMIS code into the program
when features are selected, so you should check your program after clicking Reset.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Datum in the Wizard section

Datum label - the unique label for the datum. Type one in, or use the default name provided.
Axis - the axis for the highlighted feature. The Datum wizard only allows selections which are valid for
the chosen alignment type. As features are added to the alignment, the Datum wizard calculates the
axis which is closest to the feature direction, and updates the axis settings accordingly. The direction of
the secondary axis feature determines the appropriate axis, depending on the primary axis feature. The
tertiary axis is then the cross-product of the primary and secondary axes. However, you can change the
options chosen by the Datum wizard. For example, the Datum wizard will set the axis direction, but it
may not be possible to measure the positive side of a feature, so you can choose the reverse direction.
Origin - the origin of the highlighted feature. As features are added to the alignment, the Datum wizard
calculates the origin which is closest to the feature direction, and updates the origin settings accordingly
(however, for line features, the selected origin is the axis nearest to the normal to the line). The Datum
wizard only allows selections which are valid for the chosen alignment type.
Hide during measurement - minimises the Datum wizard while you measure a datum feature. The
Datum wizard is displayed again when you click
(Apply).
Save datum - adds a Save datum command to your part program when adding the DMIS code for the
alignment.
Apply - adds the code for the alignment to your part program.
Close - closes the Datum wizard without creating an alignment.
Reset - clears the selected features. Some alignments insert DMIS code into the program when
features are selected, so you should check your program after clicking Reset.
See Also:
Select Feature for Alignment Dialog Box
Aligning the Part
642
620
Main Toolbar
99.2

643
Purpose
Use the Select Feature for Alignment dialog box to select from a list of the defined features that can be
used in the alignment, or measure a new one if you wish. Select an existing feature from the drop-down
list, or click Measure to start the measurement process. You can select features from the CAD model
then measure them or, if you do not have a suitable feature, you can measure one with the Datum
wizard open. While you are selecting features and measuring them, you have access to various
commands from the toolbar. These allow you to add moves and change settings as you measure the
feature.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Wizard in the Datum section, click on the highlighted
feature picture
See Also:
Datum Wizard
641
Main Toolbar
100 Delete Datum Dialog Box

Delete Datum Dialog Box
644
Purpose
Use the Delete Datum dialog box to delete saved datums either from the inspection database or from a
file. The datums will no longer be available to other part programs. You must have saved the datums
first using the Save Datum dialog box. You can delete the datum displayed in the Label field by clicking
OK, or you can delete multiple datums by adding them to the list below the Label field before clicking
OK. For each datum deleted, a Delete datum line (DELETE/DA( ) command) is added to your part
program.
To delete the datums from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of
datums) in the Device drop-down list. From the Label field, select the datums you wish to delete from
the device.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Delete in the Datum section

Label - the unique label for the datum. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Add - adds the datum shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of datums.
Delete - deletes the datums selected in the adjacent list. This only removes them from the list, not from
Device box - if checked, the selected datums are deleted from the storage device (i.e. a file of datums)
specified in the Device drop-down list. You must have opened the storage device using the Open Device
941 command.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of datums). There will only be storage
devices listed here if you have previously saved datums to a storage device. This is a file created as a
device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command.
See Also:
Save Datum Dialog Box
Alignment Menu
645
831
42
Main Toolbar
645
101 Save Datum Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Save Datum dialog box to save datums either to the inspection database or to a file. They are
then available for use by any other CAMIO part program. You can save the current datum (displayed in
the Label field) by clicking OK, or you can save multiple datums by adding them to the list below the
Label field before clicking OK. For each datum saved, a Save datum line (SAVE/DA( ) command) is
added to your part program. To save datums to a file, check the Device box and select an open storage
device (i.e. a file of datums) in the Device drop-down list. Otherwise, the datums are saved to the
inspection database.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Save in the Datum section

Add - adds the datum shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of datums.
Delete - deletes the datums selected in the adjacent list. This only removes them from the list, not from
Device box - if checked, the selected datums are saved to the storage device (i.e. a file of datums)
specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of datums). You must have created the file
as a device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command, then opened it with the Open Device
941 command. If you specify a device here, the datums are saved to the file instead of being saved to
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
42
646
640
Main Toolbar
102 Recall Datum Dialog Box

Recall Datum Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Recall Datum dialog box to recall saved datums either from the inspection database or from a
file. A Recall datum line (RECALL/DA( ) command) is added to your part program. To recall the datum
from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of datums) in the Device
drop-down list. From the Label field, select the datum you wish to recall from the device.
If a datum recalled from a file is already present in the inspection database, the inspection database
instance will always be overwritten by the datum from the file, no matter what the date or time of the file.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Recall Datum in the Datum section

Label - the unique label for the datum. Select a label from the drop-down list.
Device box - if checked, the datum is recalled from the storage device (i.e. a file of datums) specified in
the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of datums). You must have opened it with
See Also:
Alignment Menu
42
831
640
Main Toolbar
Define Functional Mating Dialog Box
647
103 Define Functional Mating Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Define Functional Mating dialog box to set up parameters for mating features together. You can
mate a feature nominal or elements of CAD geometry with feature actuals. This emulates a holding
fixture for the part. The choice of nominal feature and mating direction represents different fixture pins,
pads, tooling spheres, etc. You can then use the functional mating when carrying out a Best-fit datum
(LOCATE) command, set up using theLocate Datum dialog box 659 . If the functional mating in the
LOCATE command references CAD geometry for the feature nominal, then a 'compare to CAD' function
is performed before calculating the alignment.
If one of the features you are mating is a nominal or actual sphere, its diameter is accounted for. If one
of the features you are mating is a nominal cylinder and you are using line to line (LN2LN) or point to line
(PT2LN) mating, the diameter of the cylinder is accounted for. If one of the features you are mating is an
648
actual cylinder and you are using LN2LN mating, the diameter of the cylinder is accounted for. However,
if you do not want to account for the diameter in these cases, you must construct or define an
appropriate point (for a sphere) or a line (for a cylinder) and use these features instead of the sphere or
cylinder.
The Define Functional Mating dialog box adds a MATDEF command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Functional Mating in the Best Fit section

Mating label - the unique label for the functional mating. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type
one in.
Nominal - the type of nominal for the mating, i.e. nominal feature or CAD geometry. The drop-down list
displays the available nominals for the type you select.
Direction
The direction of mating, determined as shown in the following diagrams, where 1 = nominal feature, 2 =
actual feature and 3 = mating direction.
None - the direction used
is that along the vector
between the centre of the
nominal feature and the
centres of the actual
features (i.e. as per Point
to point).
Point to point - the

direction is along the vector
between the centre of the
nominal feature and the
centres of the actual
features
Point to line - the direction

is determined by taking the
vector of the nominal, then
the normal of that vector
where it fits through the
centre of the actual feature
649
Point to plane - the

direction is the vector of the
nominal feature
Line to line - the direction

is the normal that is
common to the nominal
and actual directions of the
features
Actual mating features - the features to be mated to the selected feature nominal or CAD geometry.
The Add button adds the feature shown in the drop-down list to the adjacent list box. The Delete button
only removes features from the list, not from the inspection database.
Tolerance
If the actual feature in the functional mating is a feature of size, e.g. a circle, with a size tolerance
applied, the band width specified in the Deviation box below can be modified by any existing material
condition bonus. Check the Apply tolerance box and select an appropriate tolerance of size from the
drop-down list. Select MMC for a hole and LMC for a boss.
Deviation
A means of applying a weighting to the functional mating, based on the band width of the best fit band or
fit zone. The weighting is also proportional to the deviation between the actual and nominal features in
the functional mating. Select Fit zone to specify a zone for the mating and type in the zone width in the
Zone field. Or select Best fit to specify a best fit band, and type in an upper and a lower limit for the
band.
The smaller the band width, the closer to nominal (i.e. tighter) is the fit for that mating.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831

Main Toolbar
104 Iterate Dialog Box

Iterate Dialog Box
42
650
Purpose
Use the Iterate dialog box to iterate a best fit alignment, looping the program until the convergence
criteria you define here are met. This allows you to determine whether the fit has been achieved.
First add a label to your program before the alignment. This label will be used for the program to jump to
when starting another iteration of the alignment. You can also add a label for the program to jump to if
the alignment fails when the maximum number of iterations has been carried out. Insert a label by rightclicking at an appropriate point in the program in the part program window 45 , and using the Insert
Command dialog box 201 to type in the label text. The label should be in parentheses, and should
contain no spaces, e.g. (startlabel). You can also insert labels in your program using the Create New
Label dialog box 937 .
Then complete the Iterate dialog box shown here. Specify the convergence tolerance used to test for
successful alignment. This is the value below which the deviation between nominal and actual of the
Iterate Dialog Box
651
features you are testing must fall. Enter the maximum number of iterations of the alignment, and select
the features you want to use to test the convergence. CAMIO obtains the convergence value from these
features, by finding the largest deviation between nominal and actual along the specified axes or vectors.
For example, if you select feature PT1 and Z axis, and PT2 and Y axis, the convergence value will be
the larger of the deviations between nominal and actual along the Z axis for PT1, and between nominal
and actual along the Y axis for PT2. If this value is greater than the convergence tolerance, and the
maximum number of iterations has not yet been carried out, the program will jump to the start label you
have entered and run the alignment again.
The Iterate dialog box adds an ITERAT command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Iterate in the Best Fit section

Convergence tolerance - the value (in the current linear units) used to test whether the alignment has
succeeded. The alignment has succeeded if the error is less than this value, i.e. if the largest of the
deviations between nominal and actual of the selected features, along the axes specified, is less than
this value. For example. if one constraint has a deviation of 0.01 mm and another also has a deviation of
0.01 mm, but the remaining four constraints have a deviation of zero, the convergence value is 0.01 mm.
Maximum iterations - the maximum number of iterations of the best fit alignment.
Type - the type of convergence tolerance. Select Absolute to specify that the error of the current
iteration is used as the convergence value. Select Incremental to specify that the difference in error
between the current iteration and the previous iteration is used as the convergence value.
Start label - the label the program will jump to if the convergence tolerance has not been met, and the
maximum number of iterations has not been reached.
Failure label - the label the program will jump to if the convergence tolerance has not been met, and
the maximum number of iterations has been reached.
Variable - the variable used to hold the convergence value. You can check the current value of this
variable using the Variables tab page 909 of the Watch dialog box.
New variable - displays the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box
double variable to hold the error from the alignment.
896
, where you can create a new
Features - the features used to test the convergence. The deviations between actuals and nominals
along the directions defined by the selected axes or i, j, k vectors are added to give the convergence
value. Select the features to be tested for convergence from the drop-down list. Click Add to add the
feature in the drop-down list to the adjacent list of selected features. To remove features from the list of
selected features, click Delete. For each feature added to the list, select the axes or i, j, k vector or
feature nominal.
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
652
105 Datum and Constraints - Reference Point Alignment (RPS)

Dialog Box
Datum and Constraints - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Datum and Constraints tab page to select features for reference point alignment (RPS) and to
define the way in which those features constrain the alignment. This emulates a six point alignment
fixture for the part.
First measure the features you are going to use in the alignment. Then, use the Datum and Constraints
tab page to select those features and their constraints. An RPS alignment has six degrees of freedom
(of movement of the part) and therefore six corresponding constraints. This tab page limits you to
defining a fully-constrained alignment with six degrees of freedom, by ensuring that the features and
axes you select represent a 3-2-1 alignment, i.e. one axis has three constraining features, one axis has
two and one axis has one constraint. CAMIO determines the appropriate constraints and fills in the X, Y
and Z boxes for you, but you can change these. It is possible to over-constrain the fit, but CAMIO will
ask you if this is what you intend, as this will result in a best-fit alignment, rather than an RPS
alignment.
If you wish to iterate the alignment, check the Iterate box. This will enable the remaining tab pages
where you can set up the iteration.
In Teach mode 41 , when you click OK in this dialog, the code for performing the RPS alignment is
executed and added to your program. For each constraint, the code contains a nominal point definition
(with the i, j, k vector along the selected axis), and a Functional mating (MATDEF) command for the
functional mating between the nominal point and the measured feature. A Best-fit datum (LOCATE)
command listing the functional matings is also added to your program. However, if the LOCATE
command fails, no code is added to your program.
When the program is run, the RPS alignment is performed using the features and constraints selected
(for details of iterating an RPS alignment see Running an Iterated Alignment 630 ).
Datum and Constraints - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
Click here
657
653
for some sample code.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click RPS Align from the Best Fit section

Datum - the unique label for the datum. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Feature - select features from this drop-down list for the reference point alignment. To add them to the
list of selected features, click Add.
Add - adds the feature shown in the Feature drop-down list to the list of selected features for the
reference point alignment. When you add the feature, the most likely axes that the feature will constrain
are checked in the X, Y and Z boxes. CAMIO determines which axes these are from the feature type,
nominal definition and the axes already constrained by features selected previously. The default axes
constrained by each feature type are these:
Point, edge (EDGEPT), plane - the axis nearest the nominal direction of the feature.
Line - the axis nearest the nominal feature normal.
Circle, arc, slot (CPARLN) - the two axes normal to the nominal direction of the feature, unless relative
measurement (RMEAS) has been used, in which case all three axes are used.
Cylinder, cone - the two axes normal to the nominal direction of the feature.
Sphere - all three axes.
Curve (GCURVE), surface (GSURF), pattern (PATERN) - RPS is not allowed with these features.
Note that relative measurement (RMEAS) takes precedence over these defaults. For example, you may
have measured three circles in the same plane using RMEAS. By default, when you select the first
circle, all three axes are constrained. When you select the second circle, two axes are constrained; the
axis nearest to the direction of the feature (i.e. the axis with RMEAS applied) and one other. When you
select the third circle, only one constraint has not yet been set, so the axis with RMEAS applied is
constrained.
Feature list - the features used for RPS. The type of feature is shown, and the axes constrained by the
feature are checked. You can change the axes by clicking the boxes to select different axes.
Delete - removes the highlighted feature from the list of selected features.
Iterate - if checked, the remaining tab pages are enabled so that you can set up iteration of the RPS
alignment.
See Also:
Reference Point Alignment (RPS)
629

Locate Datum Dialog Box
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
647
659
Main Toolbar
106 Iterate - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box

Iterate - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
654
Purpose
Use the Iterate tab page to set up iteration of a reference point alignment, defined on the Datum and
Constraints tab page.
You will have initially measured the features for the alignment manually, so you will probably at least
want to carry out one automatic measurement of each feature. You can set this up as an iteration. Use
the convergence tolerance to test whether the alignment has succeeded. It succeeds if the error from
the alignment is less than or equal to this value. For an RPS alignment, you typically set the
convergence tolerance to 0, as RPS is a forced fit and should therefore have zero error. For more details
see Running an Iterated Alignment 630 .
You will need to add a start label to your program to indicate the start of the iteration, and a failure label
to go to if the alignment fails after the maximum number of iterations. If you do not have these labels in
your program, use the Create New Label tab page 655 to add them. You also need a variable to hold the
value of the error from the alignment, for checking against the convergence tolerance. Use the New
variable button to display the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box, where you can create a new double
variable to hold this value.
The Iterate tab page adds an ITERAT command to your program.
Click here
657
Navigation
Select Datum from the main toolbar, click RPS, check Iterate, select the Iterate tab page

Iterate in automatic mode - if checked, a Set automatic mode (MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN) command
is added to your part program before the Iterate command. This sets the mode to Automatic so that the
features for the RPS alignment are measured in Automatic mode when the alignment is iterated.
655
deviations between nominal and actual of the selected features (from the Datum and Constraints tab
page), along the axes specified, is less than this value. For example, if one constraint has a deviation of
0.01 mm and another also has a deviation of 0.01 mm but the remaining constraints have a deviation of
zero, the convergence value is 0.01 mm.
Maximum iterations - the maximum number of iterations of the alignment.
maximum number of iterations has not been reached.
Failure label - the label the program will jump to if the convergence tolerance has not been met, and
the maximum number of iterations has been reached.
New variable - displays the Declare Multiple Variable dialog box
double variable to hold the error from the alignment.
896
, where you can create a new
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
629
40
Main Toolbar
107 Create New Label - Reference Point Alignment (RPS)

Dialog Box
Create New Label - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
656
Purpose
Use the Create New Label tab page to set up labels that your program can jump to when iterating an
RPS alignment.
Type in a name for the label (without character spaces). You can then insert the label in your program.
To insert the label above a selected program line, highlight a line in the Code field and click Insert. The
Code field shows you the program code around the line you have selected (this changes if you type in a
different line number to show the code around the new line number).
To automatically insert the label in the appropriate place in your program, click Start label or Failure
label.
When you have added labels to your program you can change their position by cutting and pasting in
your program (using the DMIS Program Editor 197 ).
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click RPS Align in the Best Fit section, check Iterate,
select the Create New Label tab page

Name - type in a name for the label (without character spaces).
Insert - inserts the label on the line above the highlighted program line.
Start label - inserts the label before the definition of the first RPS feature. This button is only available if
you have added a feature on the Datum and Constraints tab page.
Failure label - inserts the label at the end of the series of commands created when you click OK, i.e.
after the ITERAT command.
Delete - deletes the highlighted label.
Create New Label - Reference Point Alignment (RPS) Dialog Box
657
Line - the program line where your label will be inserted if you click Insert. Your label is inserted
immediately before the line you specify.
Code - the code around the program line. This allows you to see where your label will be inserted in the
program.
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
629
Main Toolbar
108 RPS - Datum and Constraints - Sample Code

RPS - Datum and Constraints - Sample Code
109 RPS - Iterate - Sample Code

RPS - Iterate - Sample Code
658
110 Create Datum Dialog Box

Create Datum Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Create Datum dialog box to set the axes for a datum, generating an alignment using feature
actuals. The dialog box generates a Datum feature (DATDEF) command for each feature and a Set
datum (DATSET) command that references all of the DATDEF commands.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click 3-2-1 Alignment in the Alignment section

Datum label - type in a name for the datum, or select one from the drop-down list, or use the default
name provided.
Label (Primary, Secondary, Tertiary) - the datum reference to which the feature actual will be
referred. If the datum reference has a feature associated with it this will be displayed in the Feature field.
Feature - the feature actual for the datum reference (in the Label field). If a selected feature already has
axis and origin defined, these will be displayed in the corresponding axis and origin sections.
Axis - the axis (+ or - direction) which the specified feature (reduced to a direction) will form. The
Tertiary axis is controlled by the selections made for the Primary and Secondary axes.
Origin - the origin which the specified feature (reduced to a centre) will form.
Create Datum Dialog Box
659
Disabled - disables the Secondary and Tertiary axis sections, allowing you to set specific axes in
isolation.
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
111 Assign Datum Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Assign Datum dialog box to assign a datum label to a feature actual.
The Assign Datum dialog box adds a DATDEF command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Datum Definition in the Alignment section

Label - select a feature datum from the drop-down list or type in a new one.
Feature - select a feature from the drop-down list. The datum will be assigned to the feature actuals.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
112 Locate Datum Dialog Box

660
Purpose
Use the Locate Datum dialog box to create a datum that is a best fit through a number of features. The
datum is created by fitting a set of nominals to a set of actuals. Select the features used in the Master
locating points box, and specify the degrees of freedom for the fit.
The Locate Datum dialog box adds a LOCATE command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Best Fit in the Best Fit section

Datum label - the unique label for the datum. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Master locating points
Select the type of features used for the fitting process. The contents of the adjacent drop-down list
change accordingly. You can select more than one type of feature and add it to the list of master
locating points. Surface (GSURF) and curve (GCURVE) features are interpreted as equivalent to a
number of feature points, i.e. as one point per nominal/actual pair of points within the feature.
Feature actual - the nominal and actual values used in the fitting process are from the feature, and the
fitting direction is the normal direction of the nominal feature.
661
Datum feature - the nominal and actual values used in the fitting process are from the feature in the
corresponding Assign datum (DATDEF) command.
Functional mating - the nominal is the nominal feature in the corresponding Functional mating
(MATDEF) command (set up using the Define Functional Mating dialog box 647 ) and the actuals are the
actual features in the MATDEF command. The fitting direction is determined by the mating type in the
MATDEF command. Note that a single MA(label) parameter can be equivalent to one or more FA(label)
parameters. If the MATDEF command references CAD geometry as the feature nominal, an implicit
'compare to CAD' function is performed to specify the nominal position and direction to be found by the
fitting algorithm. (If the actual feature is a surface or a curve, the individual touch points are compared to
CAD.)
Degrees of freedom - select the constraints on the fit. For example, checking X translation and Y
translation allows translation in the X and Y axial directions, but not in the Z direction, and does not
allow rotation. Selecting all degrees of freedom allows a full 3D best fit.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Aligning the Part
620
Main Toolbar
113 Locate Datum Dialog Box (with Location Method)

Locate Datum Dialog Box (with Location Method)
Purpose
This Locate Datum dialog box is displayed for best-fit datum commands created using a location
method, i.e. using the command D( )=LOCATE/<location method>. It is used to modify those
commands (they create a datum that is a best fit through a number of master locating features or
datums). Select a location method then specify the master locating points, features or datums for that
method.
Example command
D(test)=LOCATE/'3Point',FA(PT1),FA(PT2),FA(PT3)
662
Navigation
Double-click the Best-fit datum (LOCATE/<location method>) command in the part program window

Locate method
Select a location method from the drop-down list. The following options are available:
Default - performs a least squares fit alignment. This works best for an existing datum that is already a
good fit to the master locating points.
3 point - a basic set-up alignment from three point features only. No best fitting is applied.
6 point - as the default method, but limited to point features. You can measure and specify six master
locating points, i.e. this method does not require an existing datum.
From nominal datum - used when programming off-line in a known orientation on the CMM. The
datum is created from nominals, then the CAD model is aligned from the nominal datum. The model
window positions the reset sphere and probe in the correct orientation with respect to the model.
Least squares - as the default method, but limited to point features. You can use this after creating a
datum using the 6 point method, to perform a least squares fit for that datum.
To actual datum - used with a CAD model, to set up the datum off a feature where the actuals are
known. This ensures the datum matches the part origin in the CAD model, so that the CAD model
appears in the correct orientation allowing you to program on-line from the model.
Master locating points
Displayed if a locate method other than From nominal datum or To actual datum is selected. All
features listed are used during the 'best fitting' process. Click Add to add features from the drop-down
list, and Delete to delete the selected feature from the list of master locating points.
Master datum
Displayed if a locate method of From nominal datum or To actual datum is selected. All datums listed
are used during the 'best-fitting' process. Click Add to add datums from the drop-down list, and Delete
to delete the selected datum from the list of datums.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Part Program Window
45
114 Machine Co-ordinates Dialog Box

Machine Co-ordinates Dialog Box
Machine Co-ordinates Dialog Box
663
Purpose
Use the Machine Co-ordinates dialog box to select a datum. When you click OK the selected datum is
set to the machine co-ordinate system, where the origin is set to the master reset origin and the axes
become parallel to the machine world axes.
The Machine Co-ordinates dialog box adds a DATSET/MCS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click MCS in the Alignment section

See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
115 Rotate by Angle Dialog Box

Rotate by Angle Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Rotate by Angle dialog box to rotate a datum by a specified angle about an axis.
The Rotate by Angle dialog box adds a ROTATE command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click By Angle in the Rotate section
664

Angle - the angle by which the current axis system will be rotated. This follows normal right hand
system rules.
About - the axis about which the current axis system will be rotated.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
116 Rotate to Feature Dialog Box

Rotate to Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Rotate to Feature dialog box to rotate the current axis system about the specified axis to align
with the selected feature. The feature is reduced to a direction - either its nominals F( ), actuals FA( ) or
a feature datum DAT( ).
The Rotate to Feature dialog box adds a ROTATE command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click To Feature in the Rotate section

About - the axis about which the current axis system will be rotated.
To align - the axis and direction of the current datum that will be rotated to align with the nominals,
actuals, or feature datum of the selected feature.
Rotate to Feature Dialog Box
665
With - select the feature or datum with which the axis will be aligned from the drop-down list.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
117 Translate to Datum Feature Dialog Box

Translate to Datum Feature Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Translate to Datum Feature dialog box to translate the current axis origin to the datum of a
selected feature.
The Translate to Datum Feature dialog box adds a TRANS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click To Datum in the Translate section

X, Y, Z origin - select the feature to be used in the translation from the drop-down lists. Use None if
you do not wish to translate the origin, or Datum feature to translate the origin to the selected feature
datum.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
118 Translate to Feature Dialog Box

Translate to Feature Dialog Box
666
Purpose
Use the Translate to Feature dialog box to translate the current axis origin to the nominals or actuals of
a selected feature origin.
The Translate to Feature dialog box adds a TRANS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click To Feature in the Translate section

X, Y, Z origin - select the feature to be used in the translation from the drop-down lists. Use None if
you do not wish to translate the origin, Feature nominal to translate the origin to the nominals of the
selected feature reduced to a centre, or Feature actual to translate the origin to the actuals of the
selected feature reduced to a centre.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
119 Translate by Probe Radius Dialog Box

Translate by Probe Radius Dialog Box
Purpose
Translate by Probe Radius Dialog Box
667
Use the Translate by Probe Radius dialog box to translate the current axis origin by a distance equal to
the effective radius of the probe in either a plus or minus direction.
The Translate by Probe Radius dialog box adds a TRANS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click By Probe Radius in the Translate section

X, Y, Z origin - select Probe radius to translate the origin by the probe radius in a positive direction, and
-Probe radius to translate the origin by the probe radius in a negative direction. Use None if you do not
wish to translate the origin.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
120 Translate by Value Dialog Box

Translate by Value Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Translate by Value dialog box to translate the current axis origin by specified distances.
The Translate by Value dialog box adds a TRANS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click By Value in the Translate section

X, Y, Z origin - the distance by which the origin will be translated in the X, Y, and Z origin fields, in the
current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box). You can have zero translation for one or
668
more axes.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
Main Toolbar
831
135
121 Translate Datum Dialog Box

Translate Datum Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Translate Datum dialog box to specify a datum translation using a combination of nominal
values, datums and probe radiuses. This dialog box is displayed from a datum command of the following
format:
D( )=TRANS/XORIG,DAT( ),YORIG,PRBRAD,ZORIG,F( )
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the appropriate Translate datum command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the appropriate D( )=TRANS/ command (if viewing your

None - select this option if you do not wish to translate the axis origin.
Value - select this option to translate the axis origin by a specified distance. Type in the distance in
the drop-down list at the bottom of the axis origin box, in the current units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box).
Feature nominal - select this option to translate the origin to the nominals of the selected feature
reduced to a centre. Select the feature in the drop-down list at the bottom of the axis origin box.
Translate Datum Dialog Box
669
Feature actual - select this option to translate the origin to the actuals of the selected feature reduced
to a centre. Select the feature in the drop-down list at the bottom of the axis origin box.
Datum feature - select this option to translate the origin to the selected feature datum. Select the
feature in the drop-down list at the bottom of the axis origin box.
Probe radius - select this option to translate the origin by the probe radius in a positive direction.
-Probe radius - select this option to translate the origin by the probe radius in a negative direction.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
122 Associate Datum with CAD WCS Dialog Box

Associate Datum with CAD WCS Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Associate Datum with CAD WCS dialog box to associate a part co-ordinate system (pcs) with
the CAD co-ordinate system (model datum). This ensures the datum matches the part origin in the CAD
model, so that the CAD model appears in the correct orientation.
The Associate Datum with CAD WCS dialog box adds an EQUATE/DA( ),CADCS command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Associate in the Model section

Datum label - the label for the part co-ordinate system. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type
one in.
Device - select the open storage device (i.e. the device that refers to the CAD model) that contains the
model datum. You must have opened the storage device using the OPEN/DID command. For details of
how to open the CAD model as a device, see Opening a CAD Model File as a Device 225 .
670
Default - indicates that the model datum from the CAD model is to be associated with the part coordinate system.
From file - this option is not currently available.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
Main Toolbar
831
135
Co-ordinate Systems
123 Set CAD Transform Dialog Box

Set CAD Transform Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Set CAD Transform dialog box to equate an actual datum to a nominal transform in the CAD
model. You can then synchronise the actual measurements and the model even if the datum does not
represent the model datum (CAD co-ordinate system). Note that if the datum (part co-ordinate system)
is changed, the CAD transform is not retained and you must add another EQUATE/DA( ),CADCS
command.
The Set CAD Transform dialog box adds an EQUATE/DA( ),CADCS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Set in the Model section
Set CAD Transform Dialog Box
671

Datum label - the label for the part co-ordinate system. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type
one in.
Device - select the open storage device (i.e. the device that refers to the CAD model) that contains the
model datum. You must have opened the storage device using the OPEN/DID command. For details of
how to open the CAD model as a device, see Opening a CAD Model File as a Device 225 .
Origin, X/Y/Z axis - the transformation within the CAD co-ordinate system.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
Main Toolbar
831
135
Co-ordinate Systems
124 Equate Datums Dialog Box

Equate Datums Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Equate Datums dialog box to define two actual datums as being equivalent. This allows
features measured with the part in one orientation to be reported consistently with features measured in
another orientation. This is used when a large part has to be moved on the CMM to measure the
required features but all the features need to be reported using the same datum.
The two datums should refer to the same physical reference on the part, for example by using the same
datum features.
The Equate Datums dialog box adds an EQUATE/DA( ),DA( ) command to your program. When the
command is run, the actual and nominal values of the features from one datum are treated as though
they were the actual and nominal values with respect to the other datum, effectively moving their actual
position in the machine co-ordinate system (mcs). The features thus moved are then associated with
the datum that they have been moved to. The command converts the features from the first datum (i.e.
that in the Datum label field) and makes them valid in the second datum (i.e. that in the Equate to field).
Note:
Neither datum needs to be the current datum. The current datum is not changed by issuing the
EQUATE command.
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Equate in the Model section
672
Datum label - the label for the first of the two datums. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type
one in. Features measured in this datum are valid in the 'Equate to' datum below.
Equate to - select the label for the second of the two datums. Features measured in the datum above
are valid in this datum.
See Also:
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
125 Six Point Locate Dialog Box

Six Point Locate Dialog Box
673
Purpose
Use the Six Point Locate dialog box to create a six point locate alignment. This dialog box is used for
point-reducible features to minimise the error along the feature normal direction when iterating. This
emulates a six point alignment fixture for the part. For information on six point alignment using the
LOCATE command see 6 Point Alignment Using LOCATE 621 .
First measure the points you are going to use in the alignment. Then select those points to use as
locating features for creating a datum. If you wish to iterate the alignment, check the Iterate box and set
up the iteration in the Iterate properties box.
In Teach mode 41 , when you click OK in this dialog, the code for performing the six point locate
alignment is executed and added to your program. A Best-fit datum (LOCATE) command listing the
points is also added to your program. However, if the LOCATE command fails, no code is added to your
674
program.
When the program is run, the alignment is performed using the points selected (for details of iterating an
RPS alignment see Running an Iterated Alignment 630 ).
Click here
633
Navigation
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Six Point Best Fit in the Best Fit section

Locate properties
Select features to use as locating features for creating the datum:
Datum - the unique label for the datum. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Feature - select point features from this drop-down list for the six point locate. To add them to the list
of selected features, click Add.
Add - adds the feature shown in the Feature drop-down list to the list of selected features for the six
point locate
Feature/Type list - the features used for the six point locate and their feature types.
Delete - removes the highlighted feature from the list of selected features.
Iterate - if checked, the remaining tab pages are enabled so that you can set up iteration of the six point
locate.
Iterate properties
Set up iteration of the six point locate. You will have initially measured the features for the alignment
manually, so you will probably at least want to carry out one automatic measurement of each feature.
You can set this up as an iteration. Use the convergence tolerance to test whether the alignment has
succeeded. It succeeds if the error from the alignment is less than or equal to this value. For a six
point locate alignment, you typically set the convergence tolerance to 0, as six point locate is a forced fit
and should therefore have zero error.
CAMIO automatically adds a start label before the first selected feature, to indicate the start of the
iteration. CAMIO also adds a failure label to go to if the alignment fails after the maximum number of
iterations. A variable is also added to hold the value of the error from the alignment, for checking against
the convergence tolerance. You can create a new double variable to hold this value, use the New
variable button to display the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box 896 .
Iterate in automatic mode - if checked, a Set automatic mode (MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN) command
is added to your part program before the Iterate command. This sets the mode to Automatic so that the
features for the alignment are measured in Automatic mode when the alignment is iterated.
deviations between nominal and actual of the selected features is less than this value. For example, if
one constraint has a deviation of 0.01 mm and another also has a deviation of 0.01 mm but the
remaining constraints have a deviation of zero, the convergence value is 0.01 mm.
Maximum iterations - the maximum number of iterations of the alignment.
675
maximum number of iterations has not been reached. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type in a
label name.
New variable - displays the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box, where you can create a new double
variable to hold the error from the alignment.
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Alignment Menu
831
Main Toolbar
126 Sensors
126.1 Sensors
Sensors
In CAMIO, 'probe' refers to the physical structure of the equipment used to measure a part, and may
consist of a probe head, body, stylus, tip, etc., but does not include any angle definitions. When
CAMIO creates a probe model, this is created at angles 0,0. A 'sensor' is a probe at specified A and B
angles.
You can organise and manage your probes and sensors using either the options available in the Sensors
window or the options from the Probe Calibration and Probes sections on the Machine tab.
The Sensors window is available if you enable sensor management on the Miscellaneous tab page 120 of
the Configuration dialog box, and ensure Sensors is checked in the View menu. The sensor
management function consolidates the various operations associated with sensor definition, calibration
and selection into the Sensors window. For details, see Sensor Management 675 .
If you do not enable sensor management, the Sensors window is not displayed, and you can manage
probes and sensors using the commands from the Probe Calibration and Probes sections on the
Machine tab (see Probe Commands 713 ).
See Also:
View Menu
126.2 Sensor Management

126.2.1 Sensor Management
Sensor Management
The sensor management function consolidates the various operations associated with sensor definition,
calibration and selection, and provides them in the Sensors window and the Probe Calibration section of
the Machine tab.
Using the Sensors window, you can:
Create new probe definitions (i.e. define the physical probe structure)
Create new sensors (i.e. define the probe at specified angles)
Define calibration spheres
Add sensors to your part program
676
Using the Probe Calibration section, you can:

Create a program to locate the calibration spheres
Create a program to calibrate selected sensors
To enable sensor management:
1.
From the CAMIO Options menu on the CAMIO menu bar, select Program Configure.
2.
In the Configuration dialog box, select the Miscellaneous tab page.
3.
Check the Use sensor management box. Note that with sensor management enabled, your sensors
are selected by label not by geometry.
4.
Click OK.
You can toggle the display of the Sensors window using the Sensors option from the View menu 116
Note that the options available from the Probes and Probe Calibration sections depend on whether
sensor management is enabled.
For details of the functions available in the Sensors window, see Using the Sensors Window
676
To create a part program for locating calibration spheres, see Creating a Program to Locate the
Calibration Spheres 694 .
To create a part program for calibrating sensors, see Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors.
126.2.2 Using the Sensors Window

126.2.2.1 Using the Sensors Window

The Sensors window is available when sensor management is enabled on the Miscellaneous tab page of
the Configuration dialog box. It allows you to manage and organise your sensor data. CAMIO stores
the data in the file SensorManagement.xml, saved in the folder default in C:\LK\Appdata\CAMIO. The
contents of the Sensors window are retained when you close CAMIO.
You can toggle the display of the Sensors window using the Sensors option from the View menu
116
Different pop-up menu functions are available in the Sensors window for the different items. For details
see:
Menu Options for Sensor Collections in the Sensors Window
Menu Options for Probes in the Sensors Window
679
683
Menu Options for Calibration Spheres in the Sensors Window
688
Sensor collections
These are groups of probes and sensors (i.e. specified angles for a probe). This allows you to calibrate
a group of sensors or to use a collection for a particular part program.
In the example below, TC1 is a sensor collection containing probes P1, P2 and P3. Each probe has a
sensor or sensors defined. Right-clicking on a probe displays a pop-up menu allowing you to define
more sensors for the probe, to remove the probe and its sensors from the sensor collection (this does
not delete probes or sensors), or to insert sensor commands in your part program. Sensors that have
been calibrated are marked by a green tick. The sensor that is currently selected is displayed in bold.
Sensors
677
Creating probes
Use the right-click menu options in the Probes list to add a new probe to the list and define its details
(see Menu Options for Probes in the Sensors Window 683 ).
Displaying a probe in the model window
When you right-click on a probe in the list of probes or in the sensor collections list and select Preview
Model, CAMIO displays a model of the probe in the model window. The probe model is displayed for
several seconds.
Viewing the probe information
When you hover your mouse pointer over a probe or sensor, data about the probe is displayed in a popup window:
Probes are defined in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Generated Probes
When you run an existing part program, if it contains sensor definitions that are not listed in the Sensors
window, CAMIO creates a probe for them in the Generated Probes list.
Calibration spheres
The calibration spheres that you can use when calibrating sensors are listed. Any details you create for
a master sphere update the corresponding details on the Calibration tab page of the Configuration dialog
box. CAMIO can create a part program for you to perform the location of the calibration spheres. For
details see Creating a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres 694 . Calibration spheres that have
been located are marked by a green tick. The master calibration sphere is denoted by the letter M.
678
Viewing the calibration sphere information

When you hover your mouse pointer over a calibration sphere, data about the calibration sphere is
displayed in a pop-up window:
Drag-and-drop
The drag-and-drop function allows you to organise your probes and sensors easily. Dragging-anddropping in the Sensors window creates a copy of the item you have dragged. It does not move the
item. If you wish to remove an item from an area in the Sensors window, you must delete it.
Add probes into a sensor collection by dragging-and-dropping a probe or probes from the probes list
onto a sensor collection.
Add angles to a probe by dragging-and-dropping a probe onto a sensor collection.
When you drag-and-drop a star probe from the probes list into a sensor collection, CAMIO creates a
probe for each tip of the star probe. The Define Sensors dialog box, where you can define sensors
(i.e. angles for the tip) for the selected probe, is displayed for each tip.
Adding new sensors to a sensor collection
Right-click on a probe in a sensor collection and select Edit Sensor angles to display the Define
Sensors dialog box where you can add new sensor positions to the probe.
Adding sensors to the part program
Right-click on sensors in the sensor collections to display a pop-up menu and select the option to insert
the sensors as SNSLCT (Select sensor) commands or RECALL (Recall sensor) commands. You can
insert any nominal sensors as RECALL commands. You can only insert actual sensors as RECALL
commands if you have first saved them using the Save Sensor dialog box. The Sensors window stores
probe configurations directly to the database, so SNSDEF (Sensor defintion) commands are not
required.
Sensors Window toolbar
The Sensors window toolbar allows you to quickly and easily create calibration spheres, define probes
and select sensor angles. The following options are available:
Create a new sphere
689
Create a new probe using the Probe Wizard

custom probe 685
Define sensor angles
702
, create a new Laser probe
687
, or create a new
682
Sensors
679
Delete the selected items

Start the Components Editor
691
See Also:
Sensor Management
120
675
Define Sensors Dialog Box - Sensors Window

682
717
101
Calibration - Configuration Dialog Box 119

The Probe Wizard
126.2.2.2 Menu Options for Sensor Collections in the Sensors Window
Menu Options for Sensor Collections in the Sensors Window

Pop-up menu options are available by right-clicking on items in the Sensors window. The options
available depend on the item you highlight in the window.
The following menu options are available for all items in the sensor collections list:
Manage All Sensor Calibrations - displays the Calibrated Sensors dialog box
and delete calibrated sensors.
681
, where you can view
Sensor collections list
The following menu options are available for the sensor collections list:
New Sensor Collection - adds a new sensor collection item to the list of sensor collections. You can
then add probes and sensors to the new sensor collection by dragging-and-dropping from the Probes
list.
Manage All Sensor Calibrations - see above.
Sensor collection
680
The following menu options are available for each sensor collection in the sensor collections list:
Delete - removes the sensor collection from the list of sensor collections, but does not delete any
probes or sensors from CAMIO's sensor data.
Rename - allows you to rename the highlighted sensor collection.
Probe
A probe is the physical probe structure, for which you can define sensors. Sensors are defined as the
probe at specified A and B angles.
The following menu options are available for probes in each sensor collection:
Edit Sensor Angles - displays the Define Sensors dialog box, where you can select sensors for the
probe using a grid of sensor angles.
Delete - removes the probe and its sensors from the sensor collection, but does not delete any probes
or sensors from CAMIO's sensor data.
Preview Model - displays a preview of the probe model in the Model window.
Sensor
Sensors
681
The following menu options are available for each sensor for a probe:
Delete - removes the sensor from the probe, but does not delete any sensors from CAMIO's sensor
data.
Rename - allows you to rename the highlighted sensor.
Recall - adds a RECALL command to your part program for each highlighted sensor. You must have
saved the sensors first using the Save Sensor dialog box.
Select - adds a SNSLCT command to your part program for the highlighted sensor. If the sensor has
been calibrated, CAMIO selects the actual sensor, otherwise the nominal sensor is selected.
Preview Model - see above.
See Also:
676

126.2.2.3 Calibrated Sensors Dialog Box
Calibrated Sensors Dialog Box
682
682
Purpose
Use the Calibrated Sensors dialog box to view and delete calibrated sensors. Length and radius are
given in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog box.
Navigation
With sensor management enabled, right-click on the Sensor Collections title and select Manage all
sensor calibrations from the pop-up menu

View - displays the Calibrated Sensor Data dialog box where you can view the geometry, origin and
calibration details of the highlighted calibration.
Delete - deletes the highlighted calibration from the machine database and from the memory for the
current part program. This will display a warning dialog informing you that the calibration will be deleted.
Delete all - deletes all calibrations in the current listing from the machine database and from the
memory for the current part program. This will display a warning dialog informing you that all calibrations
will be deleted.
Print - prints a report of all the sensor calibrations currently available in the database. This prints to the
default printer. The report gives A and B angles, length and radius (in the current units as shown in the
System Settings dialog box), and date and time of calibration.
See Also:
Calibrated Sensor Data Dialog Box
Sensor Management
Sensors Window
725
675
75

126.2.2.4 Define Sensors Dialog Box - Sensors Window
Sensors
683
Purpose
Use the Define Sensors dialog box available from the Sensors window to quickly define multiple sensors
with the same base geometry for a probe selected in a sensor collection.
The Define Sensors dialog box adds a sensor to the probe for each of the probe angles you add here.
Navigation
In the Sensors window, drag-and-drop a probe onto a sensor collection
In the Sensors window, right-click on a probe in a sensor collection, select Edit sensor angles from
the pop-up menu

Base Probe - the name of the probe selected in the sensor collection is displayed.
Sensor Collection - the name of the sensor collection to which the probe belongs.
Tip - which tip of a star probe the sensor belongs.
Selected configurations - a grid of the A and B head angles for calibration, in decimal degrees. Click
the appropriate cells in the grid to select the required combinations of A (row) and B (column) angles.
For manual indexing probe heads, the grid provides 15 degree increments up to the maximum A angle.
Clear grid - click to clear all the selections from the grid.
See Also:
Sensors Window
75
126.2.2.5 Menu Options for Probes in the Sensors Window

Pop-up menu options are available by right-clicking on probes in the Sensors window. The options
available depend on whether the probe model has been created and on whether or not the probe is in a
sensor collection. If it is in a sensor collection, it may be in use, so you will not be able to delete or
684
rename it.
Probes list
The following menu option is available for the probes list:

New Probe (Wizard) - displays the Probe Wizard 702 for creating a probe model for single or star
probes. When you click Finish, the probe details are transferred to CAMIO and the Create Probe Probe Wizard dialog box 686 is displayed where you can specify a name for the new probe.
New Probe (Laser) - displays the Create Probe - New Laser dialog box 687 where you can specify the
probe name and the type of laser.
New Probe (Custom) - displays the Probe Geometry dialog box 685 where you can specify basic probe
details. CAMIO creates a simple .sat (model) file for the probe, saved by default in C:\LK\Probes.
Probes
The following options are available for each probe in the probes list:
Edit Model Files - displays the Probe Edit dialog box
associated with the probe.
687
, where you can change the .sat (model) files
Delete - available for probes which are not in a sensor collection. Deletes the probe from the probes
list. Calibration data for the selected sensors is deleted from the memory for the current part program,
from the shared area of the machine database and from the saved area of the machine database. This
does not delete the .sat (model) file for the probe. If you create a new probe using the name of a deleted
probe, the .sat file for the deleted probe is updated.
Rename - available for probes which are not in a sensor collection. Allows you to rename the
highlighted probe. The probe name must not contain underscore or hyphen (dash) characters.
Preview Model - displays a preview of the probe model in the Model window.
See Also:
Sensors

685
676
717
The Probe Wizard

126.2.2.6 Create Probe - Geometry Dialog Box
Create Probe - Geometry Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Probe Geometry dialog box to specify basic geometry for a new probe added to the Sensors
window. CAMIO creates a simple .sat (model) file for the probe.
Navigation
With sensor management enabled, right-click the Probe list in the Sensors window, select New
Probe (Custom)

Probe - type in a name for the probe.
Indexing/Fixed
Indexing - select this to define the probe as indexable, so that it can be set to different orientations.
Fixed - select this to define the probe as a probe in a fixed orientation, so that it cannot be set to
different orientations.
Sphere/Cylinder
Sphere - select this if the sensor is spherical.
686
Cylinder - select this if the sensor is cylindrical.

Length - the distance from the probe head articulation centre to the centre of the sensor tip.
Diameter - the diameter of the sensor tip.
Stylus x, y, z - for star styli, an additional offset to define the x, y and z offsets from the end of the
sensor to the centre of the stylus tip. The x, y, z directions are defined in relation to the sensor angle.
Coefficient of expansion - enter the coefficient of expansion for the probe body to be used with
See Also:
Sensor Management
Sensors Window
675
75

126.2.2.7 Create Probe - Probe Wizard Dialog Box
Create Probe - Probe Wizard Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Create Probe - Probe Wizard dialog box to specify a new probe to add to the Sensors window
after creating the model for the probe in the Probe Wizard.
When you click OK the probe you define here is added to the list of probes in the Sensors window.
Navigation
Probe (Wizard), select the required components in the wizard, click Finish

Name - type in a name for the probe.
Indexing/Fixed
Indexing - select this to define the probe as indexable, so that it can be set to different orientations.
Fixed - select this to define the probe as a probe in a fixed orientation, so that it cannot be set to
Sphere/Cylinder
Sensors
687

See Also:
Sensor Management
Sensors Window
675
75
Probe Wizard
126.2.2.8 Create Probe - Laser Dialog Box
Create Probe - Laser Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Create Probe - Laser dialog box to specify basic geometry for a new laser probe to add to the
Sensors window.
When you click OK the probe you define here is added to the list of probes in the Sensors window.
Navigation
Probe (Laser)

Name - type in a name for the laser probe.
Type - select the type of laser probe from the drop-down list.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
Sensors Window
126.2.2.9 Probe Edit Dialog Box
Probe Edit Dialog Box
688
Purpose
The Probe Edit dialog box allows you to change the .sat (model) file and the collision model associated
with a probe created through the Sensors window. The
Navigation
In the Sensors window, right-click on a probe in the Probes list, select Edit model files from the popup menu

Probe - displays the probe name.
CAD file - displays the CAD model file currently associated with the probe. Use the adjacent
(Browse) button to search for a different CAD file.
Collision CAD file - this can be a modified version of the probe model which is either simplified in
structure, or larger in some dimensions. A simpler model will speed up collision detection 186 , while a
larger model (for critical areas) can be used to give a bigger safety factor. Use the adjacent
(Browse) button to search for a different CAD file.
See Also:
Sensors Window
75
Probe Properties dialog box

126.2.2.10Menu Options for Calibration Spheres in the Sensors Window
Menu Options for Calibration Spheres in the Sensors Window

Pop-up menu options are available by right-clicking on calibration spheres in the Sensors window. The
options available depend on the item you highlight in the window.
Sensors
689
The following option is available for calibration spheres:

New Sphere - displays the New Sphere dialog box 689 where you can type in details for a new
calibration sphere including the name, ijk values, diameter and location. You can also specify whether
the sphere is for the calibration of tactile (contact) probes or laser probes, and whether it is a master
sphere. Once created, these details can be accessed and modified in the Grid window by highlighting
the sphere. For details of creating a part program for the location of spheres, see Creating a Program to
Locate the Calibration Spheres 694 .
Right-click on a sphere or a group of highlighted spheres to display more options:
Delete - deletes the sphere from the list of calibration spheres.

Rename - allows you to rename the sphere. If a sphere is renamed, any program created to locate the
sphere needs to be recreated.
See Also:
126.2.2.11New Sphere Dialog Box
New Sphere Dialog Box
690
Purpose
Use the New Sphere dialog box to specify details for a new calibration sphere to add to the Sensors
window.
When you click OK the sphere you define here is added to the list of calibration spheres in the Sensors
window.
Navigation
With sensor management enabled, right-click the Calibration Spheres list in the Sensors window,
select New sphere

Label - type in a name for the calibration sphere.
Type
Select Contact for a sphere that is to be used to calibrate tactile probes or Laser if the sphere is
to be used to calibrate laser scanning probes.
Select Master for the master calibration sphere or Satellite for a sphere that is not the master
calibration sphere.
Diameter - type in its diameter.
Location - type in its location. If you leave these as zero, the location of the sphere will need to be
taught when creating a program to locate the calibration spheres 694 .
Direction - type in its ijk values (to provide the orientation of the stem of the sphere).
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
Sensors
Sensors Window
691
75
126.2.2.12The Component Editor

126.2.2.12.1 The Component Editor
The Component Editor

The Probe Wizard provides a variety of components for building custom probes but it is likely that you
will also want to define your own components. The Component Editor is a tool that allows you to do
this. You can use it to define, view, edit and delete probe components.
A component model is made of basic solid bodies. The definition of a component is saved in the
components database, i.e. the file pw_data.eqp. This is a text file, which can be edited directly, but
direct editing makes it possible to introduce errors. Therefore it is preferable to use the Component
Editor.
The Component Editor is accessed using the Components Editor button on the Sensors window toolbar.
Probe Component Editor
Type - select the component type from the drop-down list. All components of that type will be displayed
in the Components Editor.
Defined Components - lists the components of the selected type.
692
Delete - deletes the selected component from the components database.

Edit - expands the Components Editor dialog box to display options for editing the component. You can
also double-click the component to edit it.
Add New - expands the dialog box to display options for adding a new component of the selected type.
126.2.2.12.2 Creating a New Component
Creating a New Component

To create a new component, select its type in the Type drop-down list on the Components Editor screen
and click Add New. The following dialog box is displayed, in which you define the new component and
then each body that makes up the component. Add each body in turn to the list of items in the
component by clicking Add.
Name - type in a name for the new component. As you type in the name, it is automatically entered at
the top of the item list below.
Use Defined Materials - select this to use a defined material from the materials database.
Use Coeff. of Thermal Expansion - select this to use your own custom value for the coefficient of
thermal expansion of the component in the Coefficient of Thermal Expansion field.
Material - if using defined materials, select a material from the drop-down list. If you are editing an
existing component and have selected Use the same material for all items, you cannot change its
material.
Use the same material for all items - if using defined materials, check this to specify the same
material for all the items that make up the component.
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion - if using a coefficient of thermal expansion, type in a value for the
Sensors
693
component. If using defined materials the value of the coefficient is displayed when the first item with a
length is added to the item list below. As you add more items, the Probe Wizard recalculates the
coefficient from the coefficients held in the materials database and updates the value.
Body - use this to define the bodies the component is made from. Select each body in turn from the
drop-down list (they are listed in order from top to bottom, i.e. in the -Z direction). The associated fields
under the Body field relate to the selected body, so that you can specify its diameter, length, etc. A
CAD model can be used as a probe or quill component. It has a component body type of 'model'.
Only .SAT files can be used in this way. Any component can be specified from a CAD model. The
length of the model must be specified. The model origin is assumed to be the connection point for the
component above it. The model origin plus the model length defines the connection point for
components below the model.
The types of bodies and their parameters are shown below:
Body Type Key Word Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Sphere
sph
Diameter
N/A
N/A
Cylinder
cyl
Diameter
Length
N/A
Cone
con
Top Diameter
Bottom Diameter
Length
Block
blk
Width
Length
Height
Model
mdl
Filename
Length
N/A
Colour - use this to select the body colour.

Component Item List - the items that make up the component are listed in the lower right area of the
dialog box. The items are defined as they appear in the pw_data.eqp file, using the format:
data=body_type,parameter1,parameter2,parameter3,colour,material
where the number of parameters depends on the body type. The material value is an integer that
identifies the material in the materials database. It is not present if a custom thermal coefficient was
used.
Use the toolbar buttons immediately above the Component Item list to reset the body type and colour
fields so that you can create a new body, to select the body type, delete items, and move them up or
down. You can also double-click an item to edit it.
Add - adds the details of the item defined in the Body and associated fields to the adjacent list of the
component items. Items are added to the bottom of the list. You can move them within the list by
clicking the up and down arrows above the list.
Apply Changes - copies any changes you have made to the selected item into the Component Item
list. To edit an item double-click it in the Component Item list.
Save - saves the component and adds it to the Defined Components list in the Components box on the
left of the Components Editor dialog box.
126.2.2.12.3 Editing Existing Components
Editing Existing Components

To edit an existing component select its type in the Type drop-down list on the Components Editor
dialog box and double-click, or click Edit.
All the operations that can be performed when creating a new item can also be carried out with an
existing one. To edit an item double-click it. Its properties will be displayed. If a component was
defined to use the same material for all items, new items added to the component will use that material.
694
However, if not defined to use the same material, added items can be made of any material.
If the component has a custom thermal coefficient, you can change it. If not, it is calculated on-line
each time the changes in the component structure and composition demand it and the updated value is
displayed.
You can change the name of a component. This allows you to add new components by editing existing
ones. The existing one is retained and the edited one is added to the list of components.
If you edit a component item from the list of items, ensure you have double-clicked it before editing, and
click Apply Changes before clicking Save.
126.3 Creating a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres

Creating a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres
With sensor management enabled, CAMIO can quickly create a program for locating any calibration
spheres you wish to use.
To create a program to locate the calibration spheres:
1.
Position the calibration spheres on the machine table.
2.
Ensure sensor management is enabled on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog
box.
3.
In the Sensors window, right-click on the Calibration Spheres item and select New Sphere. The
New Sphere dialog box is displayed.
Type in a name for the sphere.
Select Contact for a sphere that is to be used to calibrate tactile probes or Laser if the sphere is
to be used to calibrate laser scanning probes.
Select Master for the master calibration sphere or Other for a sphere that is not the master
calibration sphere.
Type in its calibrated diameter.
Type in its xyz values (if these are known).
Type in its ijk values (to provide the orientation of the stem of the sphere).
A new sphere item is added to the list of calibration spheres. The details for each calibration
sphere are also available by highlighting the sphere and viewing the Grid window.
Repeat for each of the calibration spheres you wish to define.

4.
Select Machine from the main toolbar. Open a program (this can be an existing program or a new
one) and select Locate Spheres from the Probe Calibration section. CAMIO now displays the
Sphere Setup dialog box 696 , where you can select which calibration spheres to locate, set up
Sensors
695
various settings, specify whether to use the nominal or actual sensor and whether to manually
locate the spheres. If the sensor has not been calibrated, CAMIO adds the code for calibration of
the sensor to the program. CAMIO also adds commands to measure each sphere you selected.
5.
When you click OK, CAMIO adds a CALL/EXTERN for the sphere location program at the position of
the current line.
Warning:
CAMIO adds the code at the position of the current program line, so ensure that this is where you
want to add the code.
6.
You can now edit the program, for example to add a clearance routine to avoid any obstacles
between a sphere and a tool changer.
7.
Run the program. CAMIO measures the master sphere first, then any other spheres added to the
program.
Note:
When you create this program, if a calibration sphere has X, Y, Z axes of 0,0,0, CAMIO prompts you to
locate the sphere manually first, by taking a point on the top of the sphere.
The pop-up window shown when you hover your cursor over the calibration sphere name in the Sensors
window is updated with the actual sphere position obtained by running the program.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
120
198
696
Grid Window
126.4 Sphere Setup Dialog Box

Sphere Setup Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Sphere Setup dialog box to select the calibration spheres to locate, select which nominal or
actual sensor to use when locating the calibration spheres and to modify measurement settings.
Warning:
Camio adds the code at the position of the current program line, so ensure that this is where you want to
add the code.
Sensor management is enabled on the Miscellaneous tab page
120
of the Configuration dialog box.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Locate Spheres in the Probe Calibration section (you
must have already created your calibration spheres in the Sensors window 75 , for details see
Creating a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres 694 )
Sensors
697

Sphere selection - the window displays the available spheres from the Calibration spheres list in the
Sensors window. Select which calibration spheres are to be located. Use CTRL+click and SHIFT+click
to select multiple spheres.
Use sensor nominal/actual - select whether you wish to use the sensor nominal or actual when
locating the calibration spheres. If the sensor has not been calibrated, you cannot select Actual. Camio
adds commands for calibrating the sensor to the program.
Approach - the distance from the touch point where the probe path becomes normal to the touch point
surface.
Retract - the distance the probe backs off after a touch has been detected.
probe to take another point.
Touch velocity - the CMM touch velocity, i.e. the speed at which the sensor approaches and touches
the part.
Enable scanning - check this box to perform the calibration sphere location in scan mode.
Scan velocity - the CMM velocity during a scan.
Enable temperature compensation - if checked, the TECOMP command is inserted in the calibration
program so that temperature compensation is enabled when the calibration program is run.
Sphere coefficient - enter the coefficient of expansion for the calibration sphere.
Manually locate spheres - if checked, you will be prompted in the program to manually take a point on
top of each calibration sphere to locate it.
Output DMIS file - the name and location of the DMIS program used to measure the calibration spheres
to establish sphere positions. Use the adjacent Browse button to search for the program.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
Sensors Window
126.5 Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors

Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors
With sensor management enabled, CAMIO can quickly create a program for calibrating sensors.
To create a program for calibrating sensors:
1.
Ensure sensor management is enabled on the Miscellaneous tab page of the Configuration dialog
box.
2.
Ensure you have created calibration spheres in the Sensors window and located them (see Creating
a Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres 694 ).
3.
Select Machine from the main toolbar. Open a program (this can be an existing program or a new
one) and select Calibration Wizard in the Probe Calibration section. The Calibration Wizard Sensor
selection dialog box 698 is displayed where you can select a probe or individual sensors to be
calibrated.
4.
Click Next. CAMIO displays the Calibration Wizard List of Sensors to be Calibrated dialog box 699 ,
where you can confirm the sensors to be calibrated, check the calibration spheres to be used and
modify required settings. If you have more than one calibration sphere, CAMIO chooses the best
698
sphere to use depending on the sensor angle, the sphere direction and the probe type. You can use
the drop-down lists adjacent to each sensor to select a different calibration sphere for that sensor.
5.
Click Finish. CAMIO adds a CALL/EXTERN for the sensor calibration program at the position of the
current program line 198 , so ensure that this is positioned where you want to add the code.
6.
You can now edit the program, for example to add a clearance routine to avoid any obstacles
between a sphere and a tool changer.
7.
Run the program.
See Also:
698
List of Sensors to be Calibrated Dialog Box

Sensor Management
699
675
126.6 Sensor Selection Dialog Box

Sensors
699
Purpose
Use the Calibration Wizard's Sensor Selection dialog box to select the sensors to be calibrated.
Highlight the probe or sensors, then use the arrow buttons to move the them between the Available and
Selected boxes. The sensors in the Selected box are added to the calibration program when you click
OK.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibration Wizard in the Probe Calibration section
126.7 List of Sensors to be Calibrated Dialog Box

List of Sensors to be Calibrated Dialog Box
700
Purpose
Use the Calibration Wizard's List of Sensors to be Calibrated dialog box to view the sensors that CAMIO
will add to your calibration program, when creating a calibration program using sensor management.
You can change the calibration sphere to be used, and modify global settings.
Navigation
With sensor management enabled, select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibration Wizard in
the Probe Calibration section, click Next

Sensor - lists the sensors for which CAMIO will add calibration commands to your part program.
Sphere - the name of the sphere which CAMIO will use to calibrate the adjacent sensor. Where
multiple calibration spheres are available, CAMIO chooses the best sphere to use depending on the
sensor angle, the sphere direction and the probe type. You can use the drop-down lists adjacent to
each sensor to select a different calibration sphere for that sensor.
Approach - the distance from the touch point where the probe path becomes normal to the touch point
surface.
Retract - the distance the probe backs off after a touch has been detected.
Scan velocity - the CMM velocity during a calibration in scan mode.
Touch velocity - the CMM touch velocity, i.e. the speed at which the sensor approaches and touches
the part.
Use DMIS error handling - if checked, an ERROR command is added to your program to attempt
recovery when an error occurs during sensor calibration.
Sensors
701
Use temperature compensation - if checked, the TECOMP command is inserted in the calibration
program so that temperature compensation is enabled when the calibration program is run.
Sphere coefficient - enter the coefficient of expansion for the calibration sphere.
Output DMIS file - enter a different name for the file if required. Click the Browse button to browse for a
different location to save your file in.
See Also:
Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors
Sensor Management
697
675
126.8 The Probe Wizard

126.8.1 The Probe Wizard
The Probe Wizard
The Probe Wizard is used for designing, modifying, saving and retrieving CMM probe models. It also
provides a Component Editor for maintaining a database of probe components such as heads, styli, etc.
You can start the Probe Wizard from the following locations:
The New Sensor dialog box
The New Star Sensor Definition dialog box
The New Probe (Wizard) option in the Sensors window
You must:
Make sure the data file pw_data.eqp is in the C:\LK\Probes directory. If this is missing the CAMIO
Probe Wizard will not work correctly. This file contains the definitions of probe components.
Make sure the data file pw_mat.eqp is also in the C:\LK\Probes directory.
702
Create new probe - starts the process of creating a new probe using wizard pages.
Load probe - allows you to select and load an existing probe into the Probe Wizard.
126.8.2 Creating a New Probe

126.8.2.1 Creating a New Probe
Creating a New Probe
Sensors
703
To create a new probe, follow the wizard property sheets and select the various components to construct
the probe. (You can create new components using the Component Editor from the Sensors window
toolbar. Note that this option must be carried out before starting the Probe Wizard.)
There are four property sheets:
Probe Head
Probe Extension (includes autojoint adaptor)
Probe Type
Stylus (displays different information for single and multiple styli)
To create the probe you must select a head, probe type and stylus. The probe extension, autojoint
adaptor and stylus extension are optional.
The probe is built and the details are sent to the appropriate fields in CAMIO when you click Finish
(these depend on where you launched the Probe Wizard from).
126.8.2.2 Creating a New Probe - Probe Extensions
Creating a New Probe - Probe Extensions
704
Use the Probe Extensions wizard page to specify the autojoint adaptor and probe extension for your
probe. Both of these items are optional. Click Back to return to the Probe Head wizard page 702 , click
Next to continue to the Probe Type wizard page or click Cancel to exit the Probe Wizard.
126.8.2.3 Creating a New Probe - Probe Type
Creating a New Probe - Probe Type
Sensors
705
Use the Probe Type wizard page to specify the type of probe. You must specify the probe type to
continue in the wizard. Use the Stylus type section to specify a single stylus or multiple styli (starstyli). Click Back to return to the Probe Extensions wizard page 703 . If you have selected a single
stylus, clicking Next takes you to the Probe Stylus wizard page for a single stylus 705 . If you selected
multiple styli, clicking Next takes you to the Probe Stylus wizard page for multiple styli . Click Cancel to
exit the Probe Wizard.
126.8.2.4 Creating a New Probe - Stylus
Creating a New Probe - Stylus
706
Use the Stylus wizard page to specify the stylus extension and the stylus type. The stylus extension is
optional, but you must specify the stylus type to complete your probe. Click Back to return to the Probe
Type wizard page 704 , click Finish to complete the wizard and create the probe, click Cancel to exit the
Probe Wizard.
126.8.2.5 Specifying the Stylus Type and Extension for Multiple Styli
Specifying the Stylus Type and Extension for Multiple Styli

If you select a stylus type of 'multiple' on the Probe Type property sheet, the Stylus property sheet for
multiple styli is displayed next.
Sensors
707
A multi-way holder type is always selected.

Axis - enables all axes.
Stylus Type - selects the same stylus for all axes.
Extension Type - selects the same stylus extension for all axes.
To select the stylus and extension type for individual axes, use the check boxes against each row to
enable the selection buttons for that axis, then click the buttons on the row.
Finish - this is only available if at least one stylus is selected and each stylus extension selection has a
stylus attached to it.
Note:
Clicking a stylus type or extension type button displays a pop-up menu with a list of available styli or
extensions. The current selection is checked.
126.9 Loading a Probe Model

Loading a Probe Model
When loading a probe model (i.e. opening the SAT file) from the New Sensor dialog box or the New Star
Sensor Definition dialog box the Probe Wizard displays the Load Probe dialog box.
Only probes created using the Probe Wizard are displayed. The Probe Wizard also checks if the SAT
file exists and removes any invalid entries (these can occur if files are moved or deleted outside the
Probe Wizard). If the file is not found in the default probes folder (LK\Probes) and does not appear in the
Probes list you can locate it by clicking From file.
708
To load a probe model select the model name and click OK, or use the pop-up menu which is displayed
when you right-click on the model name and click Load. The probe properties are sent to the
corresponding fields in the New Sensor dialog box or the New Star Sensor Definition dialog box (for
multi-stylus probes requires you to select the stylus first).
Delete - deletes the selected probe from the hard disk of your computer.
Cancel - closes the Load Probe dialog box.
From file - allows you to browse for a SAT file if the probe you want is not displayed in the list of probes
and quills.
127 Calibrating Sensors

Calibrating Sensors
For step-by-step instructions on creating a program to calibrate sensors using Sensor Management,
see Creating a Program to Calibrate Sensors 697 .
Shared and saved sensors
When a sensor is calibrated, it is saved into a shared area in the machine database and is then available
for selection by any program, by using the Select Sensor dialog box 714 . When a sensor is saved using
the Save Sensor dialog box 717 , it is written to a separate section of the machine database called the
saved area. It can be recalled from here by label using theRecall Sensor dialog box 718 .
Modifying your calibrations
You may wish to add a couple more calibrations to your calibration program or directly into your
inspection program. First use the View All Sensors dialog box 734 to see if the additional sensors you
are calibrating exist in the shared area, then delete them. This will ensure that when you select your
newly calibrated sensors, you do not inadvertently select an old calibration. You can also make sure
you do not overwrite any labels in the saved area by using new sensor labels, saving the new
calibrations to the saved area then recalling them.
See Also:
Calibrating Sensors
Sensor Management
709
675
Selecting a Calibrated Sensor
709

Using Calibrate Sensor - Hints and Tips
42
730
Calibrating an Analogue Probe 712

Sensor Commands
128 Calibrate the Probe Head

Calibrate the Probe Head
The probe head calibration procedure examines the probe head axis system to work out the angles at
which it is mounted. It gives you the option to adjust the configuration to compensate for any 'out of
square' errors with the machine axis system.
Note:
Once the probe head has been calibrated, you only need to re-calibrate it if it is replaced, remounted
(adjusted) or knocked in a collision.
1.
Select Machine on the main toolbar. In the CMM section make sure On-line is selected (or use the
Online check box on the menu bar).
2.
From the CMM section, click Calibrate Head. The Calibrate Head dialog box 720 prompts you to
position a reset sphere on the machine table so that it can be measured from the angles given. The
number of angles depends on the type of probe head.
3.
Click Start. A CMM - WARNING message is displayed before each index move. Make sure the
probe is free from obstructions before you click OK, as a motorised probe will rotate to the correct
orientation for taking points. If you are using a manual indexing probe head, ensure it is in the
correct position for taking points.
4.
The Measure Feature dialog box then prompts you to take sets of four points, one set at each
position. Take the points using the handbox. Use it on normal speed to get close to the required
position, then select touch (slow) speed to take the point. Take the four points, one at the top of the
sphere and three around the equator. Between each set of four points, the CMM - WARNING
message is displayed. Move the probe clear each time, as a motorised probe will rotate again to
the next angle when you click OK. If you are using a manual indexing probe head, ensure it is in
the correct position for taking points.
5.
The calibration result is displayed when you have taken all the sets of points. Check the probe
length. It should not differ by more than a millimetre from the probe length which you can obtain
using the Probe Wizard (if it does, there may be a problem, e.g. a loose stylus).
6.
To compensate for any 'out of square' errors, click OK. This updates the DMIS configuration file with
the reset sphere position, and updates the CMM configuration file with the probe head attitude.
See Also:
(this link opens the Probe Wizard Help File. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the Probe Wizard
Help.)
129 Selecting a Calibrated Sensor

Selecting a sensor
710
If you are performing alignment and inspection within the same program as the sensor calibrations,
select the required sensor on the Select Sensor dialog box 714 .
Sensors are selected either by label or by geometry according to the setting on the Miscellaneous tab
page 120 (Configuration dialog box).
When selecting by geometry, the A and B angles must match the nominal angles in the
corresponding SNSDEF command, and the probe radius, probe offset and star offset are checked by
CAMIO and must be within the tolerance set in the Tolerance field on theCalibration tab page 119
(Configuration dialog box). If the geometry does not match then you are prompted to calibrate the
sensor.
When selecting by label, CAMIO checks whether a sensor with that label is present in memory for
the current part program. If not, you are prompted to calibrate the sensor. If a sensor with the label
is present, CAMIO checks its geometry against the nominal definition if possible, i.e. if the CMM
server supports this, and displays a warning if the geometry does not match. You can still select
the sensor if you wish.
Recalling a sensor
If the sensor has been calibrated in another program, recall and select it as follows.
to recall an existing sensor. When you select the sensor
1.
Use the Recall Sensor dialog box

label, its geometry is displayed.
2.
To select the recalled sensor, use the Select Sensor dialog box.
718
See Also:
New Sensor Dialog Box
130 Using an Analogue Probe

130.1 Using an Analogue Probe
Using an Analogue Probe
Scanning
At DMIS versions 3.0 and 04.0 make sure you set scan mode on using the Scan On/Off dialog box 791 if
you are scanning with an analogue probe (from DMIS 05.0 the use of PAMEAS commands implicitly
turns on scanning). However, the controller knows whether it is using an analogue probe so knows
whether to apply the analogue probe configuration variables 711 . Also the software checks whether the
controller is using an analogue probe to decide whether to use the scanning canned cycles (these are
only available with analogue probes and inAutomatic mode 40 ).
Filtering
You can apply filters to the point information collected by scanning, to cut out noise and achieve a better
approximation to the surface. Filters are set up using the options available from the Geometry Algorithm
dialog box 756 . When a feature is scanned, an attribute is attached to it flagging it as a scanned feature.
When a filter is to be applied, if the feature is not flagged as a scanned feature, the data from it is not
filtered.
Taking touch points
To use an analogue probe to take touch points, ensure scan mode is off. (This is not necessary if the
feature is a type that cannot be scanned, e.g. a point.)
See Also:
SP25 Calibration
712
Scanning
711
130.2 Analogue Probe Configuration Variables

Analogue Probe Configuration Variables
The following list shows the configuration variables associated with analogue probes. These can be set
in the CMM Configuration dialog box, Variables tab page.
Some values can also be changed via your part program. Certain values are changed automatically by
the CMM driver depending upon the operation being undertaken.
APNT (suggested values: Working = 0 Low = 0 High = 2)
Analogue probe measurement method, normally set by inspection software.
(0=Resolved, 1=Threshold, 2=Calibration)
PDESD (suggested values: Working = 0.900 Low = 0.800 High = 1.000)
Probe deflection (mm) which, if exceeded, will cause the analogue scan to be aborted.
PDLLD (suggested values: Working = 0.020 Low = 0.020 High = 0.050)
Minimum probe deflection value allowed during analogue scan (mm).
PDRDINT (suggested values: Working = 10 Low = 2 High = 5000)
Time interval (ms) between analogue probe readings when scanning. This variable is used if SMTD is
set to 1. You can set it using the Scan Settings dialog box 792 (see SMTD below).
PDSRD (suggested values: Working = 0.200 Low = 0.050 High = 0.450)
Probe deflection (mm) that the controller attempts to maintain during analogue scanning. This value
depends on the surface to be scanned. You may need to increase it for a rough surface. You can set
this in your part program by issuing a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'PDSRD' command, using the Call Routine
dialog box 915 .
PDULD (suggested values: Working = 0.700 Low = 0.600 High = 0.800)
Maximum deflection value (mm) allowed during analogue scan.
SCVEL (suggested values: Working = 0.200 Low = 0.100 High = 3.000)
Scanning velocity (m/min). This is the same variable used for contact probe scanning. You can set this
in your part program using the Scan Velocity dialog box 793 .
SINT (suggested values: Working = 0.500 Low = 0.000 High = 20.000)
The distance (mm) between data points when analogue scanning. This variable is used if SMTD is set
to 2. If the SINT value is small, the controller may override the scanning velocity and reduce it to achieve
the requested point density. You can set SINT in your part program using the Scan Settings dialog box
(see SMTD below).
SMTD (suggested values: Working = 1 Low = 1 High = 2)
Selects time- (PDRDINT) or distance- (SINT) based intervals when scanning (1=time-based, 2=distancebased). You can set this in your part program using the Scan Settings dialog box. In this dialog box,
select Drag, and either Time or Distance. Selecting Time sets the SMTD variable to 1, and the
PDRDINT variable to the number of seconds you have typed in multiplied by 1000 (to convert it to ms).
Selecting Distance sets the SMTD variable to 2, and the SINT variable to the measurement you have
typed in (converted to mm).
See Also:
(this link opens the CMM Driver Help File. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close the CMM Driver
Help.)
710

DME Commands
916
Scanning
712
130.3 Calibrating an Analogue Probe

Calibrating an Analogue Probe
For calibration of analogue probes (e.g. SP600, SP25), Nikon Metrology recommends that you use the
scanning canned cycles, by scanning the reset sphere in Automatic mode. This is the only valid option
for the SP25 sensor. However, it is possible to calibrate the Renishaw SP600 probe in Manual, Program
or Automatic mode, using individual touch points (i.e. with scan mode off). In this case the minimum
number of points is 21, although Nikon Metrology recommends 52 as a minimum and uses 52 in its
built-in calibration routine.
See Also:
40
730
710
SP25 Calibration
130.4 SP25 Calibration

SP25 Calibration
When the SP25 probe is first calibrated, CAMIO creates a matrix which maps the deflection of the probe
to its linear movement. The probe offset is also determined, and the tip radius. The matrix does not
change, so only needs to be calculated once. Therefore full calibration is only required the first time the
probe is calibrated (using a CALIB/SENS command or a SNSDEF/SNSLCT command, or the Calibrate
All Sensors dialog box). Subsequently, only the qualification part of the calibration is required, i.e. only
the probe offset and tip radius determination.
When the probe calibration is run, CAMIO checks whether the matrix exists and if it does, CAMIO does
not recalculate it. Only the qualification is then performed, i.e. the determination of the probe offset and
tip radius.
To force calibration of the SP25 probe, i.e. to force the calculation of the matrix as well as the
qualification of the probe offset and tip radius, delete the calibration using the DELETE/ALLSA command
from the Delete Sensor dialog box, or the Delete options from the View All Sensors dialog box.
See Also:
Calibrate All Sensors Dialog Box
Delete Sensor Dialog Box
730
732
716
View All Sensors (from Probe Commands)
131 Saving Calibrations to a File

Saving Calibrations to a File
You can save your sensor calibrations to an external file rather than to the machine database. You can
then recall them from the external file (and delete them from it). This avoids the need to recalibrate
sensors if these are lost from the machine database. You simply recall them from the external file. The
external file is specified as a storage device using advanced commands 890 .
1.
Define a file as a device using the Input/Output Device dialog box 940 .
2.
Open the device using the Open Device dialog box 941 . This allows you to read from or write to the
713
file. Select the device, set the Device Type to Input, and check the Sensor box. Click OK.
3.
In the Save Sensor dialog box 717 , add the calibrations you wish to save to the file to the list below
the Label field. Check the Device box, and select the device (file) in the Device drop-down list. Click
OK.
4.
Close the open file using the Close Device dialog box
file.
5.
You can now use the Recall Sensor dialog box

open it again first.
718
942
. Make sure you select Keep to save your
to recall calibrations from the device. You must
See Also:
132 Probe Commands (Machine Menu)

132.1 Probe Commands (Machine Menu)
Probe Commands (Machine Menu)
Purpose
The Probes commands allow you to select, define and calibrate sensors. The commands available
depend on whether sensor management is enabled.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, use the Probes section
The following options are available (depending on whether sensor management is enabled):
New
722
New Star Probe
New Laser
736
726
Select
714
Save
Delete
716
View All
Recall
717
734
Output Probe
See Also:
Sensor Management
Calibrating Sensors
675
708

Probe Compensation
755
Main Toolbar
718
730
737
714
132.2 Select Sensor Dialog Box

132.2.1 Select Sensor Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Select Sensor dialog box to select a sensor from the shared calibrations in the machine
database. If the sensor you require does not exist, you can set it up by clicking New.
Sensors are selected either by label or by geometry according to the setting on the Miscellaneous tab
page 120 (Configuration dialog box). For details of selecting sensors, see Selecting a Calibrated Sensor
709 .
The Select Sensor dialog box adds a SNSLCT command to your program. When the SNSLCT
command is run, CAMIO displays the sensor image in the model window. To obtain the sensor image,
CAMIO passes the sensor length, tip diameter, type and offsets (for star probes) to the Probe Model
Manager. CAMIO searches the list in the Probe Model Manager for the first set of matching values, then
displays the sensor image in the model window from the associated .sat file. For details, see Probe
Model Manager 738 .
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSLCT command, select Properties
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Select in the Probes section
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the menu bar, click Select in the Probes section

Sensor label - select a sensor definition from the drop-down list, or type one in. The sensor definition
must already exist. The sensor label has the format S( ),a,b or SA( ),a,b where a and b are the A and B
probe head angles.
Nominal - specifies that the sensor is a nominal sensor, i.e. as defined using the SNSDEF command
through the New Sensor dialog box 722 . This is used, for example, to position a sensor to a particular
angle for initial tip changing (and not taking account of any calibrations).
Actual - specifies that the sensor uses actual calibration values.
OK - if the CMM is off-line, the command is not active.
For an actual (SA) sensor, if the CMM is on-line, what happens when you click OK depends on whether
the sensor is calibrated. If the sensor is not calibrated, the Calibration Options dialog box 715 is
displayed. You can then select which dialog boxes and prompts are displayed during calibration. Click
OK to calibrate the sensor. It is saved to the shared calibrations area in the machine database.
If an actual sensor is already calibrated, CAMIO displays the CMM - WARNING dialog box to warn of a
probe head move and/or a sensor clearance move.
715
New - click this button to display the New Sensor dialog box where you can set up the sensor geometry
for a sensor (not available through the Inspect, Scan or Laser tabs).
See Also:
Sensor Commands
42
730
713
View All Sensors (from New Sensor Dialog Box)

Teach Path View
724
367
94
95
Main Toolbar
132.2.2 Calibration Options Dialog Box

Calibration Options Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibration Options dialog box to select which dialog boxes and prompts are displayed during
calibration.
Navigation
Displayed when an uncalibrated actual (SA) sensor is selected in the Select Sensor dialog box or in
the Calibrate All Sensors dialog box

Prompt for options - if checked, the Calibration Sphere Options dialog box 733 is displayed when you
click Yes. This prompts you for the calibration sphere location and sphere measurement options.
Prompt for manual calibration - if checked, a prompt gives you the option to calibrate manually when
this is not required.
CMM driver warnings - if checked, CAMIO displays the CMM - WARNING dialog box to warn of a
probe head move and/or sensor clearance move.
716
Display result - if checked, the effective radius of the sensor tip (i.e. the stylus) is displayed, in the
current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ).
See Also:
Sensor Commands
713
714
132.3 Delete Sensor Dialog Box

Delete Sensor Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Delete Sensor dialog box to delete sensors (i.e. calibrations) from the machine database or from
a file, or from the memory for the current part program. The sensors will no longer be available to other
part programs. You can delete the sensor displayed in the Label field by clicking OK, or you can delete
multiple sensors by adding them to the list below the Label field before clicking OK. For each sensor
deleted, a Delete sensor line (DELETE/SA( ) command) is added to your part program. (If you check
the All sensors box, a DELETE/ALLSA command is added to your program.)
Deleting sensors from the machine database if sensor management is enabled:
DELETE/SA( ) - calibration data for the selected sensor is deleted from the memory for the current part
program, from the shared area of the machine database and from the saved area of the machine
database.
DELETE/ALLSA( ) - all calibration data is deleted from the memory for the current part program, from the
shared area of the machine database and from the saved area of the machine database.
Deleting sensors from the machine database if sensor management is NOT enabled:
DELETE/SA( ) - calibration data for the selected sensor is deleted from the saved area of the machine
database.
DELETE/ALLSA( ) - all calibration data is deleted from the memory for the current part program, from the
shared area of the machine database and from the saved area of the machine database.
Deleting sensors from a device:
To delete the sensors from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of
sensor calibration data) in the Device drop-down list. From the Label field, select the sensors you wish
to delete from the device.
717
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Delete in the Probes section

Label - the unique label for the sensor. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Add - adds the sensor shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of sensors.
Delete - deletes the sensors selected in the adjacent list. This only removes them from the list, not
from the machine database. Sensors are not deleted until you click OK, when the sensor displayed in
the Label field and any sensors displayed in the list are deleted.
All sensors - either deletes all saved sensors in the machine database or, if a device is specified,
deletes all sensors in the storage device.
Device box - if checked, the selected sensors are deleted from the storage device (i.e. a file of sensor
calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list. You must have opened the storage device using
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of sensor calibration data). There will only
be storage devices listed here if you have previously saved sensor calibration data to a storage device.
This is a file created as a device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675

Sensor Commands
717
713
Main Toolbar
132.4 Save Sensor Dialog Box

Purpose
42
718
Use the Save Sensor dialog box to save sensors either to the machine database or to a file. They are
then available for use by any other CAMIO part program. You can save the sensor displayed in the
Label field by clicking OK, or you can save multiple sensors by adding them to the list below the Label
field before clicking OK. For each sensor saved, a Save sensor line (SAVE/SA( ) command) is added to
your part program. To save sensors to a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.
e. a file of sensor calibration data) in the Device drop-down list. Otherwise, the sensors are saved to the
saved area in the machine database, and can be used by issuing a Recall sensor 718 (RECALL)
command.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Save in the Probes section
Displayed at the end of the operations invoked when OK is clicked in the Calibrate Sensor dialog
box

Label - the unique label for the sensor. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
from the machine database.
Device box - if checked, the selected sensors are saved to the storage device (i.e. a file of sensor
calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of sensor calibration data). You must have
created the file as a device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command, then opened it with
the Open Device 941 command. If you specify a device here, the sensor calibration data is saved to the
file instead of being saved to the machine database.
See Also:
Sensor Commands
713

Main Toolbar
42
712
135
132.5 Recall Sensor Dialog Box

Recall Sensor Dialog Box
719
Purpose
Use the Recall Sensor dialog box to recall sensors into your part program so that they are available for
selection. Saved sensors can be recalled either from the machine database or from a file. You must
have saved the sensors first using the Save Sensor dialog box. Alternatively, if using the I++/DME
server, you can recall the sensors from the server. CAMIO interrogates the I++/DME server for the
available sensors.
Available sensors are listed in the Label field. You can recall the sensor displayed in the Label field by
clicking OK, or you can recall multiple sensors by adding them to the list below the Label field before
clicking OK. For each sensor recalled, a Recall sensor line (RECALL/SA( ) command) is added to your
part program.
Recalling sensors from the machine database if sensor management is enabled:
If you are using sensor management to manage your sensors and calibrations, sensors are recalled from
the shared area in the machine database.
Recalling sensors from the machine database if sensor management is NOT enabled:
If you are NOT using sensor management, sensors are recalled from the saved area in the machine
database.
Recalling sensors from a device:
To recall the sensors from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of
sensor calibration data) in the Device drop-down list. From the Label field, select the sensors you wish
to recall from the device. If a sensor recalled from a file is already present in the machine database, the
machine database instance will always be overwritten by the sensor from the file, no matter what the
date or time of the file.
When you have recalled a sensor, you can select it in the Select Sensor dialog box.
720
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Recall in the Probes section

Label - the unique label for the sensor. Select a label from the drop-down list.
Device box - if checked, the selected sensors are recalled from the storage device (i.e. a file of sensor
calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of sensor calibration data). You must have
opened it with the Open Device 941 command.
Geometry - the sensor geometry is displayed for the sensor selected in the Label field.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
709

717

Sensor Commands
42
714
713
712
Main Toolbar
132.6 Calibrate Head Dialog Box

Calibrate Head Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibrate Head dialog box to calibrate the probe head datum axis system. If you do not know
the sensor length supplied with the sensor, the resulting value for the sensor length (distance from the
axis of probe head articulation to the centre of the sensor tip i.e. the stylus) can be entered into the
Length field on the New Sensor dialog box 722 .
This picture shows the dialog box for a motorised probe.
721
Navigation
With the CMM on-line, select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibrate Head in the CMM
section
Click Start to display the Measure Feature dialog box.
Take four points around the calibration sphere at the first probe position. When you complete this, the
CMM WARNING - Ready for Probe Head index move dialog box is displayed. Click OK. A motorised
probe head will then change orientation to take the next set of points on the sphere. If you are using a
manual indexing probe head, ensure it is in the correct position for taking points. When this is
completed, further Measure Feature dialog boxes are displayed to enable points to be taken at the
remaining probe positions.
Note:
Select the down arrow to delete the last point and take a replacement.
On completion at position C the following dialog is displayed:
The value for the sensor length shown here (distance from the axis of probe head articulation to the
centre of the sensor tip) can be entered into the Length field in the New Sensor dialog box or the
Calibration wizard dialog box.
OK - selecting this causes the data from this dialog box to be written to the configuration file, updating
the reset sphere position.
Cancel - select this button to abort the command; the data in this dialog box is not written to the
configuration file.
See Also:
CMM Menu
139
Main Toolbar
722
132.7 New Sensor Dialog Box

132.7.1 New Sensor Dialog Box
New Sensor Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the New Sensor dialog box to define the sensor geometry for a sensor that will be used in the part
program. You can use the Calibrations button to view and select calibrated sensor geometry. This will
set up the geometry in the New Sensor dialog box to match the selected calibration.
If you change sensor details part way through a program, the sensor .sat file is updated and the sensor
image in the model window is redrawn to reflect the change.
The New Sensor dialog box adds a SNSDEF command to your program. The Probe Model Manager
dialog box 738 is automatically updated with details of the new sensor.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click New in the Probes section (not available if sensor
management is enabled)
Displayed when the New button is clicked in the Select Sensor dialog box (not available if sensor
management is enabled)

Sensor label - the unique label for the sensor. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type in a new
one. Data relating to an existing sensor is displayed in the dialog box when a sensor is selected from
the drop-down list.
723
Polar/Vector/Rectangular
Polar - select this if you wish to define the orientation of the sensor by probe head angle. Type in
the PH A and PH B angles in the A and B fields.
Vector - select this if you wish to define the orientation of the sensor by direction. Type in the i j k
vectors in the i, j and k fields.
Rectangular - select this if you wish to define the orientation of the sensor by Cartesian coordinates. Type in the x y z co-ordinates in the x, y and z fields.
Indexing/Fixed
Indexing - select this to define the sensor as indexable, so that it can be set to different orientations.
Fixed - select this to define the sensor as a sensor in a fixed orientation, so that it cannot be set to
Sphere/Cylinder
Length - the distance from the probe head articulation centre to the centre of the sensor tip. This is not
applicable if Rectangular has been selected. You can use the length supplied with the sensor or, if you
do not know this, the length calculated when calibrating the probe head.
Diameter - the diameter of the sensor tip. However, if the sensor is the base probe for a star sensor,
this is NOT the diameter of the base probe tip. Instead, it is a unique number used to identify star stylus
base configurations. CAMIO obtains the number from the .bpf file specified on the Create Calibration
Program dialog box, and increments it by 1 for each star stylus definition. This allows CAMIO to
distinguish between different star styli of identical length.
Stylus x, y, z - for star styli, an additional offset to define the x, y and z offsets from the end of the
sensor to the centre of the stylus tip. The x, y, z directions are defined in relation to the sensor angle.
Temp. coeff. - the coefficient of expansion of the sensor. This is of relevance if you are using
temperature compensation. Double-click in this field to display the Probe Temperature Compensation
dialog box, where you can type in the expansion coefficient.
Calibrations - displays the View All Sensors dialog box
calibrations.
724
, where you can view and select the available
Try - click this to move the sensor to the orientation specified in this dialog box.
Restore - click this to return the sensor to its original orientation (as it was before clicking Try).
Create new probe - starts the Probe Wizard for creating a new probe model. Once you have created
or edited a probe model using the Probe Wizard, it is automatically added to the Probe Model Manager.
Load probe - starts the Probe Wizard for loading an existing probe and/or transferring probe properties
to CAMIO. Only probes created using the Probe Wizard are displayed.
See Also:
Sensor Commands
File Types
713
36
Calibrate Head Dialog Box

Sensor Management
Main Toolbar
720
675
135

Creating a New Probe 702
714
724
132.7.2 View All Sensors (from New Sensor Dialog Box)

Purpose
Use the View All Sensors dialog box accessed from the New Sensor dialog box 722 to view and select
the available calibrations. This will set up the geometry in the New Sensor dialog box to match the
selected calibration. This is useful when you have an existing calibration that is correct for the current
sensor but you do not know its exact geometry. Calibrations are added to the Shared calibrations list
when sensors are calibrated, and are also added to the Saved calibrations list using the Save Sensor
dialog box 717 . Length and radius are given in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog
box 101 .
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click New in the Probes section, click Calibrations

Shared calibrations - system-wide sensor calibrations in your program that can be accessed from
other programs using the Select sensor 714 (SNSLCT) command.
Saved calibrations - system-wide sensor calibrations produced by using the Save sensor (SAVE/SA)
command. These can only be used by issuing a Recall sensor 718 (RECALL) command.
Select - transfers the details of the highlighted calibration to the New Sensor dialog box.
View - displays the Calibrated Sensor Data dialog box
725
where you can view the geometry, origin and
See Also:
734
709
Sensor Commands
725
713
Main Toolbar
132.7.3 Calibrated Sensor Data Dialog Box

Calibrated Sensor Data Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibrated Sensor Data dialog box to view details of the calibration of a specific sensor,
including its geometry and the date it was calibrated. The first picture shows the details for a contact
probe and the second picture shows the details for a laser probe. The form/sigma value is the standard
deviation of the fitted calibration data. This value indicates the quality of the qualification, and is sensordependent.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click View all in the Probes section, highlight a calibration
and click View
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click New in the Probes section, click Calibrations, highlight
a calibration and click View
In the Sensors window, right-click on the Sensor Collections title and select Manage all sensor
calibrations from the pop-up menu, in the Calibrated Sensors dialog box, highlight a calibration and
click View
See Also:
Calibrated Sensors Dialog Box
Sensors Window
Probe Commands
75
713
Main Toolbar
681
726
132.7.4 New Star Sensor Definition Dialog Box

132.7.4.1 New Star Sensor Definition Dialog Box
New Star Sensor Definition Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the New Star Sensor Definition dialog box to define the sensor geometry for a star sensor that will
be used in the part program.
In the Base probe box, type in a label for the base sensor that the star sensor is relative to. Then, to
add definitions for the star sensor tip to the Styli definitions box, click Create probe or Load Probe. Both
options open the Probe Wizard, where you can either define a new sensor or load an existing one into
the Probe Wizard window. To add the probe definition back into the New Star Sensor Definition dialog
box, click Accept All on the Probe Wizard toolbar.
The New Star Sensor Definition dialog box adds SNSDEF commands to your program, one for the base
probe and one for each tip. The Probe Model Manager dialog box 738 is automatically updated with
details of the new sensor.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select New Star from the New drop-down list in the Probes
section (not available if sensor management is enabled)

727
Base probe label - the label for the base sensor that the star sensor is relative to.
Styli definitions
Label - the label for the star sensor
X, Y, Z offset - the offset of the star sensor tip in Cartesian co-ordinates
Diameter - the diameter of the star sensor tip, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings
dialog box 101 )
Create probe - starts the Probe Wizard for creating a new probe. Once you have created the probe,
click Finish to transfer the styli definitions back to CAMIO. The new probe model is automatically added
to the Probe Model Manager.
Load probe - starts the Probe Wizard for loading an existing probe into the Probe Wizard. You can
then click OK or Load to transfer the styli definitions back to CAMIO. Only probes created using the
Probe Wizard are displayed.
See Also:
Sensor Management
Sensor Commands
Main Toolbar
675
713
135
Creating a New Probe 702

132.7.4.2 New Star Sensor Dialog Box
New Star Sensor Dialog Box
728
Purpose
Use the New Star Sensor dialog box to modify the sensor geometry for a star sensor used in the part
program. This modifies the corresponding SNSDEF command.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Define sensor command for a star sensor (if viewing
your program as descriptive text), or double-click the SNSDEF command for a star sensor (if viewing

Sensor label - the unique label for the star sensor. Data relating to an existing sensor is displayed in
the dialog box when a sensor is selected from the drop-down list. To select a different star sensor,
select another label from the drop-down list. To modify the label, type in a new one.
Base sensor label - the label for the base sensor that the star sensor is relative to.
Indexing/Fixed
Indexing - if selected, defines the sensor as indexable, so that it can be set to different orientations.
Fixed - if selected, defines the sensor as a sensor in a fixed orientation, so that it cannot be set to
Diameter - the diameter of the sensor tip.
Temperature coefficient - the coefficient of expansion of the sensor. This is of relevance if you are
using temperature compensation.
Vector/Rectangular
These options define an offset from the base sensor position to the star stylus tip, using either a unit
vector and length (the Vector option), or a co-ordinate offset (the Rectangular option):
Vector - if selected, the offset of the star sensor tip is defined by direction. The i j k vectors are
displayed in the i, j and k fields.
Rectangular - if selected, the offset of the star sensor tip is defined by Cartesian co-ordinates. The x
y z co-ordinates are displayed in the x, y and z fields.
Length - the distance from the base sensor position to the tip of the star stylus (in the current units, as
shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ). This is not applicable if Rectangular has been selected.
See Also:
New Star Sensor Definition Dialog Box
132.7.5 Calibrate Sensor Dialog Box

132.7.5.1 Calibrate Sensor Dialog Box
729
Purpose
Use the Calibrate Sensor dialog box to calibrate an existing sensor against a calibration (requalification)
sphere. Use Nominal (F) to specify a nominal calibration sphere. Use Actual (FA) for a satellite
calibration sphere, which must be measured first using a sensor that has already been selected and
calibrated using the master calibration sphere.
When measuring a sphere, the first point is taken on the equator or to the side of the sphere, then points
are taken around the equator and over the top of the sphere. If a direction is specified for the sphere,
this is used to avoid the shaft, adjusting the point locations accordingly. At the end, the sensor is
returned to a position above the top of the sphere.
The Calibrate Sensor dialog box adds a Calibrate sensor (CALIB/SENS) command to your program.
The options available depend on whether sensor management is enabled.
When the calibration has finished, you are prompted to save the calibration using the Save Sensor dialog
box 717 . If you do, the calibration is saved to the saved area in the machine database as well as to the
shared area. This allows you to recall your calibrated sensor subsequently using the Recall Sensor
dialog box 718 .
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibrate Probe in the Probe Calibration section

Sensor label - type in a label for an existing sensor (defined using the New Sensor dialog box
select one from the drop-down list.
722
), or
Sphere - the label for the calibration sphere. Type in a label for an existing sphere, or select one from
the drop-down list. If sensor management is enabled, you must have run a program to locate the sphere
you wish to use or it will not be displayed in the list of available calibration spheres. See Creating a
Program to Locate the Calibration Spheres 694 . If sensor management is not enabled and there is no
existing sphere, click New to define a calibration sphere.
Nominal/Actual - select Nominal to use sphere nominals, and Actual to use sphere actuals (for a
satellite calibration sphere).
New - displays the Sphere Feature dialog box
541
, where you can define a new calibration sphere.
Target actual sphere - if checked, the actual sphere is used as the target of the touch points when
730
calibrating. If a nominal sphere is selected, the nominal sphere is used for the calculation of the
calibration even though the actual sphere is used as the target.
Perform autodetect intensity before measurement - for laser sensors. If checked, the black and
white and exposure time reference values from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used but the intensity
value is adjusted to suit the current operation. Otherwise, the black, white, exposure time and intensity
reference values from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used. After the measurement the intensity that
was active before the measurement is restored.
Mode - displays the Program Mode dialog box
747
, where you can select the measurement mode.
Number of points - the number of points to be taken when calibrating the sensor in Manual and
Automatic modes 40 (in Program mode the PTMEAS points are used).
OK - when you click OK, the resulting action depends on the operating mode. If the CMM is off-line, an
internal routine is called that provides nominal calibration data. The Save Sensor dialog box is
displayed. (When the program is run, the sensor is recalibrated and the nominal data is overwritten.) If
the CMM is on-line, the following occur:
Manual mode - the Set Sphere Position dialog box
731
is displayed for you to take touches.
Program and Automatic modes - the CMM - WARNING dialog box is displayed to warn of sensor
movement, and the sensor is automatically calibrated. The Save Sensor dialog box is then displayed.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675

Sensor Commands
730
713
40

Adjust to Light Dialog Box
42
842
Main Toolbar
132.7.5.2 Using Calibrate Sensor - Hints and Tips

The Calibrate sensor (CALIB/SENS) command provides you with the ability to program sensor
calibrations. (The Select sensor (SNSLCT) command detects whether a sensor has been calibrated and
prompts you to perform a calibration, if required.)
Selecting a nominal or actual sphere
The Calibrate Sensor dialog box 728 allows you to select a nominal or actual sphere as the calibration
artefact. Take care when choosing whether to use a nominal or actual sphere. For example, when
calibrating with a satellite sphere, the location of the actual sphere should be determined by measuring
the sphere with a sensor calibrated using the master calibration sphere, but the diameter of the sphere
should be its calibrated value (provided by the sphere manufacturer). Therefore it is often necessary to
measure the actual sphere but declare a nominal sphere with the same location but different diameter, to
use in the CALIB/SENS command.
The master calibration sphere location
The CALIB/SENS command never updates the location of the master calibration sphere as defined in
the configuration file (lkinspect.cfg). A sphere feature (nominal or actual) can be specified as the master
calibration sphere using the CALL/EXTERN,DME,'MRS' command (added to your program using the Call
Routine dialog box 915 ).
Warning:
731
The 'built-in' calibration procedure associated with the SNSLCT command, or from theCalibrate All
Sensors dialog box 732 , does update the master calibration sphere position and configuration file. If you
are using a combination of CALIB/SENS and SNSLCT automatic calibrations, it is important that the
location of the sphere feature and the master sphere are the same.
Modifying programs which use master calibration sphere co -ordinates of 0,0,0
Programs which depend on the master calibration sphere having co-ordinates of 0,0,0 (e.g. programs
created with earlier versions of CAMIO, automatic set-ups) must be modified by adding the CALL/
EXTERN,DME,'DATUMSPHERE',D( ) command. This creates a datum at the location of the master
calibration sphere as specified in the configuration file (lkinspect.cfg), oriented along the machine axes.
Calibration of sensors
For calibration of standard sensors (Renishaw PH9/10 with TP2, TP200, etc.) the CALIB/SENS
command works in automatic, program and manual modes as required. The minimum number of points
required is four.
For calibration of analogue sensors, Nikon Metrology recommends that you use the scanning canned
cycles, by scanning the reset sphere in automatic mode. This is the only valid option for the SP25
sensor. However, it is possible to calibrate the Renishaw SP600 sensor in manual, program or
automatic mode, using individual touch points (i.e. with scan mode off). In this case the minimum
number of points is 21, although Nikon Metrology recommends 52 as a minimum and uses 52 in its
built-in calibration routine.
See Also:
714

Calibrating Sensors
40
708
Calibrating an Analogue Probe

132.7.5.3 Set Sphere Position Dialog Box
Set Sphere Position Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Set Sphere Position dialog box to calibrate the sensor in Manual mode using the handbox.
Take between four and 12 points around the calibration sphere. You should take at least one point on
top of the sphere and three points around the centre. Any more points may give a roundness outside
tolerance. If necessary, change the Roundness value on the Calibration tab page on the Configuration
dialog box.
Navigation
Displayed when a sensor is to be manually calibrated and no calibration exists
732
The following information is displayed:

Points taken - the total number of points taken in the current sequence.
Use this to delete the last operation or point taken.
Select this when you have taken the required number of points.
See Also:
728

132.7.6 Calibrate All Sensors Dialog Box

132.7.6.1 Calibrate All Sensors Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibrate All Sensors dialog to calibrate some or all sensors. It displays all the sensors defined
in your part program.
Navigation
Displayed when switching to on-line mode on the CMM menu, if any defined sensors are not
calibrated (not available if sensor management is enabled)

Start - starts calibration of the highlighted sensors. The Calibration Options dialog box
where you can set up the sensor options before calibrating the sensor.
715
is displayed,
All/None - selects and deselects all of the sensors listed.

Set - displays the Calibration Sphere Options
calibration sphere.
733
dialog box, where you can set the properties of the
733
See Also:
Sensor Management
Sensor Commands
675
713
Main Toolbar
132.7.6.2 Calibration Sphere Options Dialog Box
Calibration Sphere Options Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibration Sphere Options dialog box to set the sphere properties and the clearance, depth and
approach distances.
Navigation
Select Sensor from the main toolbar, click Calibrate All, click Set

Sphere diameter - the diameter of the calibration sphere, in the current units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box 101 ). This is used to calculate the effective sensor radius and must be entered
accurately.
Sphere direction i j k - the direction cosines of the stem that supports the calibration sphere.
Clearance distance - the distance, in the current units, from the current location to which the sensor
will move before the probe head manipulates the sensor to the next calibration position.
Depth distance - the distance, in the current units, below the equator of the sphere at which the sensor
will take points.
Approach distance - the distance, in the current units, from the touch point where the sensor path
becomes normal to the touch point on the sphere. The CMM will approach the sphere from this distance
at 'touch velocity'.
Undo - resets values to those that were present when the dialog box was first opened.
See Also:
Sensor Commands
713
734
Main Toolbar
132.8 View All Sensors (from Probe Commands)

Purpose
Use the View All Sensors dialog box to view and delete calibrations. Calibrations are added to the
Shared calibrations list when sensors are calibrated, and are also added to the Saved calibrations list
using the Save Sensor dialog box 717 . Length and radius are given in the current units as shown in the
System Settings dialog box 101 .
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click View All in the Probes section

Shared calibrations - system-wide sensor calibrations in your program that can be accessed from
other programs using the Select sensor 714 (SNSLCT) command.
Saved calibrations - system-wide sensor calibrations produced by using the Save sensor (SAVE/SA)
command. These can only be used by issuing a Recall sensor 718 (RECALL) command.
View - displays the Calibrated Sensor Data dialog box
725
where you can view the geometry, origin and
Delete - deletes the highlighted calibration. This will display a warning dialog informing you that the
calibration will be deleted.
Delete all - deletes all calibrations in the current listing. This will display a warning dialog informing you
that all calibrations will be deleted.
Print - prints a report of all the sensor calibrations currently available in the database. This prints to the
default printer. The report gives A and B angles, length and radius (in the current units as shown in the
System Settings dialog box), and date and time of calibration.
735
See Also:
Sensor Management
675

Probe Commands
724
709
713
Main Toolbar
132.9 Rack Set-up Dialog Box

Rack Set-up Dialog Box
Purpose
If you are not using the Sensor Changer Manager (SCM), you must ensure that one or both of the
autochanger:INSTALLED and tipchanger:INSTALLED options in the CMM configuration file (Lkcmmdrv.
cfg) are set to YES. If only one is set to YES, the Stall field refers to either the autochanger or the
tipchanger as appropriate. If both are set to YES, the first eight stalls (1-8 in the Stall field) refer to the
autochanger, and the next five stalls (9-14 in the Stall field) refer to the tipchanger. Use the Rack Set-up
dialog box to define a sensor holder/changer and specify the sensors associated with it. When you have
associated the sensors with the stalls in the Sensor box, and added them to the Label/Stall box, click
OK to save the sensor holder definition.
If you are using the Sensor Changer Manager, the autochanger:INSTALLED and tipchanger:INSTALLED
options in the CMM configuration file (Lkcmmdrv.cfg) must be set to NO. You should have set up the
Sensor Changer Manager with the same sensor configurations as are present in your part program. You
can do this by first running the Sensor Changer Manager stand-alone. If using the Sensor Changer
Manager, this Rack Set-up dialog box operates as a check that the items you are defining in it match
the set-up in the Sensor Changer Manager.
The Rack Set-up dialog box adds a THLDEF command to your program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Rack Set-up in the Tool Changer section

Label - the label for the sensor holder.
Sensor stall - the number of the stall containing the associated sensor specified in the Sensor Label
736
field. Type in a stall number, or select one using the scroll buttons.
Sensor label - the label for the sensor in the associated stall specified in the Sensor Stall field. Type in
a label, or select one from the drop-down list, using the small scroll buttons in the list to scroll through
the available labels.
Add/Delete/Edit
Add - click this button to add the sensor and its stall selected in the Sensor box to the Label/Stall
box.
Delete - click this button to delete the sensor and stall highlighted in the Label/Stall box. This
removes it from the sensor holder definition.
Edit - click this button to replace the sensor and stall highlighted in the Label/Stall box with new
information selected in the Sensor box.
See Also:
(this link opens the Sensor Changer Manager (SCM) Help File. To return to Metris CAMIO Help, close
the Sensor Changer Manager (SCM) Help.)
Sensor Commands
713
Main Toolbar
132.10New Laser Sensor Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the New Laser Sensor dialog box to define the sensor geometry for a laser scanning probe.
The New Laser Sensor dialog box adds a SNSDEF/LASER command to your program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select New Laser from the New drop-down list in the Probes
section (not available if sensor management is enabled)

Sensor label - the unique label for the sensor. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type in a new
one. CAMIO adds one of the following suffixes to the label, depending on the activated calibration map,
and this ensures that the corresponding laser probe model is selected and displayed in the model
window when the SNSCLT command is run:
737
_XC50
_XC50LS
_LC15
_LC50S, _LC50L or _LC50 (these display a model of the LC50 laser probe)
_LC100
Data relating to an existing sensor is displayed in the dialog box when a sensor is selected from the
drop-down list.
Polar - the orientation of the probe. Type in the PH A and PH B angles in the A and B fields.
Try - click this to move the probe to the orientation specified in this dialog box.
See Also:
Sensor Management
675
Activate Calibration Map Dialog Box
860

Model Window
Laser Scanning
63
49
811
Sensor Commands
713
132.11Output Sensor Dialog Box

Output Sensor Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Output Sensor dialog box to output information about the calibrated sensor selected in the
Sensor field. The data is output to the devices specified in the Format Output dialog box 478 , and to any
devices opened for the output of formatted data (FDATA) using the Open Device dialog box 941 .
Selecting the Storage file options on the Format Output dialog box outputs the sensor information to
the .out and .res files.
Select a sensor in the Sensor drop-down list. If you have selected Vendor in the Format Output dialog
box, vendor format data is output when you click OK, and if you have selected Standard in the Format
Output dialog box, DMIS format data is output:
Vendor format data - probe offset, the nominal and actual tip diameter, the size of the calibration
artefact and its form
738
DMIS format data - probe offset, the nominal and actual tip diameter, the size of the calibration
artefact and its form, the artefact position and label
If the sensor has not been calibrated using a CALIB/SENS command, the artefact label defaults to
LKMASTER, indicating that the sensor was calibrated from the reset sphere as configured on the
Configuration dialog box, Calibration tab page 119 .
Other information may be required about the sensor for Q-DAS analysis and can be output using the
options in the Tolerances box. This is the variation in form and the variation in size (in DMIS terms the
circularity and diameter tolerances) of the calibrated sensor tip.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Output Probe in the Probes section

Sensor - select the sensor which you want to output information about from the drop-down list.
Tolerances
If you wish to output information about the variation in form and size of the calibrated sensor tip for QDAS analysis, check the form or size tolerance box, or both.
Form - check the Form box to output the variation in form of the calibrated sensor tip from the nominal
sensor tip. Select the circularity tolerance for the form from the adjacent drop-down list.
Size - check the Size box to output the variation in size of the calibrated sensor tip from the nominal
sensor tip. Select the diameter tolerance for the size from the adjacent drop-down list.
See Also:
Sensor Management
File Types
675
36
Sensor Commands
713
Main Toolbar
132.12Probe Model Manager

132.12.1Probe Model Manager
Probe Model Manager
739
Purpose
Use the Probe Model Manager dialog box to view a list of the probe models available for display in the
model window and available to the Sensor Changer Manager (SCM). The dimensions of the probes are
given in mm. You can edit the properties displayed for existing models (although this does not change
the associated .sat file) and add new models to the list.
It is important for collision detection 186 that the sensor image used is correct, even if it is not displayed
in the model window. To obtain the sensor image, CAMIO passes the sensor length, tip diameter, type
and offsets (for star probes) to the Probe Model Manager. CAMIO searches the list in the Probe Model
Manager for the first set of matching values, then uses the sensor image from the associated .sat file.
CAMIO considers that the values match if the length, diameter and offsets are within 0.1 mm of the
geometry in the SNSDEF (Define sensor) command. If CAMIO does not find matching values, it creates
a simple .sat file and adds it to the list in the Probe Model Manager.
If you select a different sensor part way through a program, an appropriate .sat file is selected or created
and the sensor image is updated.
If you are using the SCM, the .sat filename is used to match the .sat file to the sensor in the SCM.
Warning:
The Probe Model Manager is not a means of creating (other than by automatic creation of a simple
model as above) or editing probe model files. This should be done using the Probe Wizard. Once you
have created or edited a probe model using the Probe Wizard, you must add it to the Probe Model
Manager by dragging it in from Microsoft Windows Explorer or by clicking New to create properties for
a new probe from your new probe model. If you drag the probe model in from Windows Explorer, you
may need to click Edit to correct the probe properties, as default properties are used when you first add
the probe model. Note, however, when creating probes using the New Sensor dialog box, or the New
Star Sensor Definition dialog box (both of which use the Probe Wizard to create new probes), the Probe
Model Manager dialog box is automatically updated with the new probe details.
Navigation
After customising the toolbars (the Probe Model Manager is listed in the Sensor category of the
Commands tab page of the Quick Access Menu), use the Probe Model Manager option (not
available if sensor management is enabled)
740
New - displays the Probe Properties dialog box

model, using an existing .sat file.
740
, where you can enter the properties for a probe
Edit - displays the details of the highlighted model in the Probe Properties dialog box, for you to change
its displayed properties. This does not change the associated .sat file.
Delete - deletes the highlighted model. This only removes it from the list of available probe models in
the Probe Model Manager. It does not delete the .sat file.
Undo - undoes the changes made to the last model you edited. Click again to undo previous changes
in the order you made them.
See Also:
Sensor Management
Sensor Commands
Model Window
Probe Wizard
675
713
49
701
132.12.2Probe Properties Dialog Box

Probe Properties Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Probe Properties dialog box to create entries in the Probe Model Manager for probe models, and
to edit existing models from the Probe Model Manager. It is important to set up the properties correctly,
because CAMIO uses the information in the Probe Model Manager to display probe models in the model
window and to make them available to the Sensor Changer Manager (SCM).
You should ensure that the values you enter here match those in the .sat file that you select in the File
field.
Navigation
Probe Model Manager, click New to create new probe model details, or Edit to change details of an
existing probe model
741

Name - the probe name.
Length - the distance from the probe head articulation centre to the centre of the sensor tip in mm.
Diameter - the diameter of the sensor tip in mm.
Type - the type of probe: analogue (for single point measurement or continuous contact scanning),
digital (for single point measurement or 'pecked' scanning), or solid (typically used on manual
machines).
Stylus offset X, Y, Z - for star styli, an additional offset in mm to define the x, y and z offsets from the
end of the probe to the centre of the stylus tip. The x, y, z directions are defined in relation to the probe
angle.
File - the probe model (.sat) file.
Collision file - this can be a modified version of the probe model which is either simplified in structure,
or larger in some dimensions. A simpler model will speed up collision detection 186 , while a larger model
(for critical areas) can be used to give a bigger safety factor.
See Also:
Probe Model Manager
738
Sensor Commands
713
File Types
133 Properties Commands

133.1 Properties Commands
Properties Commands
Purpose
The Properties commands allow you to specify various settings, including CMM accelerations and
positioning velocities and measurement units.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, use the Properties section
The following sections are available (depending on where you displayed the Properties
section from):
Measurement
742
Modal
742
Scan
791
742
See Also:
Main Toolbar
133.2 Measurement Commands

Measurement Commands
The Measurement drop-down list in the Properties section is accessed from the Inspect or Scan tab on
the main toolbar, and contains the following commands:
Approach
Clearance
742
745
Retract
743
Depth
Search
746
Measurement Velocity
744
750
Measurement
Acceleration 749
Positional Velocity
Algorithm
Curve Algorithm
Positional Acceleration
753
752
756
760
133.3 Modal Commands

Modal Commands
The Modal drop-down list in the Properties section is accessed from the Inspect or Scan tab on the main
toolbar, and contains the following commands:
Mode
Fly Mode
747
Work Plane
Probe Compensation
748
Decimal Places
Units
765
755
748
Fine Positioning
762
764
133.4 Sensor Approach Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Sensor Approach dialog box to set the distance from the touch point where the probe path
becomes normal to the touch point surface. This controls the probe path taken in automatic vector
moves to touch.
If the distance you set here is greater than that in the CMM configuration file (Lkcmmdrv.cfg) or the I++
Properties Commands
743
server, the value from the configuration file or server is used.

The Sensor Approach dialog box adds a Set sensor approach distance (SNSET/APPRCH) command to
your program (Metris CMM driver variable STUT).
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSET/APPRCH command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Approach from the Measurement drop-down list
in the Properties section
Note:
The units for the distance are set in the Units dialog box
748
or the System Settings dialog box
101
See Also:
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.5 Sensor Retract Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Sensor Retract dialog box to set the distance the probe backs off after a touch has been
detected. The distance is set for both scanning backoff and standard backoff. This controls the probe
path for manual and automatic touch.
The Sensor Retract dialog box adds a Set sensor retract distance (SNSET/RETRCT) command to your
program (Metris CMM driver variables SBAK and SSBAK).
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSET/RETRCT command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Retract from the Measurement drop-down list in
the Properties section
Note:
744
748
101
See Also:
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.6 Sensor Depth Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Sensor Depth dialog box to set the distance into a feature (hole, slot, etc.) that the CMM will
take the probe to take a point. This controls the probe path taken for the MEAS commands in
Automatic mode and the PTMEAS command in Program mode.
The Sensor Depth dialog box adds a Set sensor depth (SNSET/DEPTH) command to your program.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSET/DEPTH command, select Properties
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Depth in the Operations section
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, select Depth from the Measurement drop-down list in
Type in a distance for the depth in the Distance field. From the drop-down list, select a feature to be
used in the depth reference. Then select one of the following options:
Feature nominal - applies the depth relative to the nominal of the feature being measured.
Nominal reference - applies the depth relative to the nominal of the feature selected in the drop-down
list.
Properties Commands
745
Actual reference - applies the depth relative to the actual of the feature selected in the drop-down list.
Datum feature - applies the depth relative to the datum of the feature selected in the drop-down list.
Active - if checked, the probe moves to the plane of the specified depth before moving to the approach
point for inspecting the feature. Otherwise, the probe moves directly to the approach point.
Note:
748
101
See Also:
Main Toolbar
40
95
135
133.7 Sensor Clearance Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Sensor Clearance dialog box to set the distance from the feature that the CMM uses as a
clearance zone when moving the probe to inspect another feature. This controls the probe path taken
when the measurements operate in Automatic mode.
The options Nominal reference, Actual reference and Datum feature allow the clearance zone to be
relative to a second feature, enabling the definition of a CLRSRF plane.
If the Automatic clearance for line and plane features box is checked on the Conformance tab page 128 ,
Configuration dialog box, sensor clearance moves can be applied to line and plane features even though
these are measured in Program mode (see Using Canned Cycles when Measuring Features 275 ). This
avoids the need to insert any GOTO sensor moves in the program for these features.
The Sensor Clearance dialog box adds a Set sensor clearance distance (SNSET/CLRSRF) command to
your program.
Navigation
746
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSET/CLRSRF command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Clearance from the Measurement drop-down list
Type in a distance for the clearance zone in the Distance field. From the drop-down list, select a
feature. The clearance zone will be applied relative to the feature's nominal, actual or datum, depending
on which option you select:
Feature nominal - applies the clearance relative to the nominal of the feature being measured.
Nominal reference - applies the clearance relative to the nominal of the feature selected in the dropdown list.
Actual reference - applies the clearance relative to the actual of the feature selected in the drop-down
list.
Datum feature - applies the clearance relative to the datum of the feature selected in the drop-down list.
Active - if checked, the probe moves to the CLRSRF plane before moving to inspect another feature.
Otherwise, the probe moves directly to the next feature.
Note:
748
101
See Also:
Main Toolbar
40
95
135
133.8 Sensor Search Dialog Box

Sensor Search Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Sensor Search dialog box to set the distance the CMM travels after reaching the target touch.
This controls the probe path taken in automatic vector moves to touch. If the probe reaches the target +
overtravel (STOT) distance without contacting anything, the CMM stops and issues a NO TOUCH
DETECTED message.
The Sensor Search dialog box adds a Set sensor search distance (SNSET/SEARCH) command to your
program (Metris CMM driver variable STOT).
Navigation
Properties Commands
747
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the SNSET/SEARCH command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Search from the Measurement drop-down list in
Note:
748
101
See Also:
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.9 Program Mode Dialog Box

Program Mode Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Program Mode dialog box to select the operation mode.
The Program Mode dialog box adds a MODE/MAN command to your program if you select Manual, a
MODE/PROG,MAN command if you select Program and a MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN command if you
select Automatic.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Mode from the Modal drop-down list in the
Properties section
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, click Mode in the Datum Features section
Calibrate Sensor dialog box, Mode button
Calibration Update dialog box, Mode button
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
728
843
40
748
Modal Commands
133.10Units Dialog Box

Units Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Units dialog box to set the units of measurement. (You can also set the units of measurement
in the System Settings dialog box 101 .)
The Units dialog box adds a UNITS command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, select Units from the Modal drop-down list in the
Properties section

Linear - select the linear unit of measurement.
Angular - select the angular unit of measurement.
Temperature - select the temperature units.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Modal Commands
133.11Working Plane Dialog Box

Working Plane Dialog Box
Properties Commands
749
Purpose
Use the Working Plane dialog box to control the plane in which polar co-ordinates are defined.
The Working Plane dialog box adds a WKPLAN command to your program.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the WKPLAN command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Work Plane from the Modal drop-down list in the
Properties section
See Also:
Main Toolbar
95
135
Modal Commands
133.12Measurement Acceleration Dialog Box

Measurement Acceleration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Measurement Acceleration dialog box to set the CMM backoff acceleration, i.e. the rate at
which the CMM accelerates away (i.e. retracts) from the part after a touch.
750
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low acceleration (ACCB) limits set in the CMM
configuration file or I++ server, CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the acceleration at the
appropriate limit.
The Measurement Acceleration dialog box adds a Set measure acceleration (ACLRAT/MESACL)
command to your program (Metris CMM driver variable ACCB).
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the ACLRAT/MESACL command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Measurement Acceleration from the
Measurement drop-down list in the Properties section

Acceleration - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in an acceleration rate.
Metres/Inches/min/min - the units for the acceleration rate.
Percentage, etc.
Percentage - select this to define the acceleration as a percentage of the range set by the high and
low values in the CMM configuration file or I++ server. Type a value between 0 and 1 in the
Acceleration field.
Value - select this to set the acceleration to a specific rate. Type the rate in the Acceleration field
and select the units for the acceleration rate.
Low - select this to use the default low acceleration value for this machine type. The value is
displayed in the Acceleration field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file
and is not normally changed by the user.
High - select this to use the default high acceleration value for this machine type. The value is
displayed in the Acceleration field when High is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file
See Also:
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.13Measurement Velocity Dialog Box

Measurement Velocity Dialog Box
Properties Commands
751
Purpose
Use the Measurement Velocity dialog box to set the CMM touch velocity, i.e. the speed at which the
sensor approaches and touches the part.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low velocity (VELT) limits set in the CMM configuration
file or I++ server, CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the velocity at the appropriate limit.
The Measurement Velocity dialog box adds a Measurement feed rate (FEDRAT/MESVEL) command to
your program (Metris CMM driver variable VELT).
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the FEDRAT/MESVEL command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Measurement Velocity from the Measurement
drop-down list in the Properties section

Velocity - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in a velocity.
Metres/Inches per minute - the units for the velocity.
Percentage, etc.
Percentage - select this to define the velocity as a percentage of the range set by the high and low
values in the CMM configuration file or I++ server. Type a value between 0 and 1 in the Velocity
field.
High - select this to use the default high velocity value (displayed in the Velocity field) for this
machine type. The value is displayed in the Velocity field when High is selected. It is defined in the
CMM configuration file and is not normally changed by the user.
Low - select this to use the default low velocity value for this machine type. The value is displayed
in the Velocity field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file and is not
normally changed by the user.
Value - select this to set the velocity to a specific value. Type the value in the Velocity field and
select the units for the velocity.
See Also:
752
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.14Positional Acceleration Dialog Box

Positional Acceleration Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Positional Acceleration dialog box to set the CMM accelerations for positioning moves, i.e. the
working acceleration and deceleration rates of the CMM.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low acceleration limits set in the CMM configuration file
or I++ server, CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the acceleration at the appropriate limit.
The Positional Acceleration dialog box adds a Set move acceleration (ACLRAT/POSACL) command to
your program (Metris CMM driver variable ACCV).
Note:
If axis optimisation is enabled in the CMM configuration file, the Value option is not available with
LK2000, LK4000,ACT, AIM or MCC200 controllers.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the ACLRAT/POSACL command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Positional Acceleration from the Measurement
drop-down list in the Properties section

Acceleration - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in an acceleration rate.
Metres/Inches/min/min - the units for the acceleration rate.
Percentage, etc.
Properties Commands
753
low values in the CMM configuration file or I++ server. Type a value between 0 and 1 in the
Acceleration field.
Value - select this to set the acceleration to a specific rate. Type the rate in the Acceleration field
and select the units for the acceleration rate.
displayed in the Acceleration field when High is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file
See Also:
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.15Positional Velocity Dialog Box

Positional Velocity Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Positional Velocity dialog box to set the CMM positioning velocity, i.e. the working velocity of
the CMM.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low velocity limits set in the CMM configuration file or I++
server, CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the velocity at the appropriate limit.
The Positional Velocity dialog box adds a Move feed rate (FEDRAT/POSVEL) command to your program
(Metris CMM driver variable VELV).
Note:
If axis optimisation is enabled in the CMM configuration file, the Value option is not available with
LK2000, LK4000,ACT, AIM or MCC200 controllers.
754
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the FEDRAT/POSVEL command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Positional Velocity from the Measurement dropdown list in the Properties section

Percentage, etc.
field.
CMM configuration file and is not normally changed by the user.
in the Velocity field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file and is not
See Also:
Help.)
Main Toolbar
95
135
133.16Temperature Compensation Dialog Box

Temperature Compensation Dialog Box
Purpose
For LK machines with a Metris driver and controller, use the Temperature Compensation dialog box to
specify whether temperature compensation is on or off (otherwise temperature compensation is dealt
with by the provider of the server. See Selecting the Server Type for CAMIO 32 ). Temperature
compensation (TECOMP) compensates for the expansion of materials at different temperatures. It can
be used to compensate for temperature values set in the part program, or measured by temperature
Properties Commands
755
compensation equipment. To use TECOMP you will need a machine definition file available from Nikon
Metrology. This is the file specified on the Temperature Compensation tab page of the CMM
The Temperature Compensation dialog box adds a TECOMP command to your program.
Navigation
For LK machines with a Metris driver and controller, select Machine from the main toolbar, click
Temp Comp in the Thermal Compensation section
See Also:
Temperature Compensation
522
Help.)
Main Toolbar
133.17Probe Compensation Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Probe Compensation dialog box to specify whether probe compensation is on or off.
Measurements are taken to the centre of the stylus. Probe compensation adjusts the measurement by
the radius of the stylus.
If probe compensation is off, the point data in the .out file 36 is raw data (RAWDATA) and if probe
compensation is on, the point data is actual data (PTDATA) in current datum co-ordinates.
The Probe Compensation dialog box adds a PRCOMP command to your program.
You can configure the settings used for probe compensation tolerances in program (PROG) mode.
When inspecting features in PROG mode using a number of different probe angles or configurations, a
tolerance value for the variation in probe radiuses is used by CAMIO to determine whether to average the
probe radiuses or whether to compensate along the probe direction. This tolerance value defaults to 10
microns. Below this value, the probe radiuses are averaged for probe compensation. Above this value,
probe compensation is applied along the probing direction. There is also a limit for the variation in probe
radiuses, above which an error is returned and probe compensation is not applied. Both values are
configurable in the lkinspect.cfg file.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Probe Compensation from the Modal drop-down
list in the Properties section
756
If probe compensation is switched on, features are compensated as follows:

Point - the actual point is compensated along the nominal feature direction, unless an RMEAS/
VECBLD command is used with three or more points, in which case the actual point is
compensated along the local actual direction. You can also use a CALL/EXTERN routine with the
COMPTOUCHPT DME command 916 to allow compensation along the touch direction, the feature
nominal direction, or the X, Y or Z axis. This is particularly useful on manual machines.
Edge point - the actual point is compensated along the nominal edge direction.
Circle, arc, sphere, cylinder - the feature is fitted and its diameter is adjusted by a probe diameter
(i.e. two radiuses) based upon whether the feature is an inner or an outer feature.
Line - the line is fitted and compensated along the actual line normal. The actual normal is
obtained by calculating the vector within the nominal feature plane, orthogonal to the actual line
direction.
Plane - the plane is fitted and its position is adjusted by a probe radius along the actual plane
direction.
Cone - the cone is fitted and the vertex is adjusted by a distance calculated by dividing the probe
radius by the sine of the actual half vertex angle.
Parallel planes (PARPLN) - each plane is fitted and compensated along the individual actual plane
directions.
Surface (GSURF) - the individual touches are compensated along the nominal PTMEAS (touch
point) directions.
Curve (GCURVE) - the GCURVE is compensated according to the currently selected geometric
fitting algorithm (on the Geometry Algorithm GCURVE dialog box 760 ). The following options are
available.
Extended least squares
Default
Closest raw
Normal to nominal
Nominal vector
Round and square slots - the slot is fitted and its length and width are adjusted by a probe
diameter (two radiuses).
Pattern - each feature is compensated according to its type.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
40
135
Modal Commands
133.18Geometry Algorithm Dialog Box

Properties Commands
757
Purpose
Use the Geometry Algorithm dialog box to specify any fitting algorithms to be used for certain types of
features, and to apply filters to the point information collected by digital or analogue tactile probe
scanning. (Filters are applied to the data from laser scanning using the filter options from the Laser
Initialisation commands 833 .)
The Geometry Algorithm dialog box adds a GEOALG command to your program.
You can also apply the fitting algorithms and filters to a feature using the Grid window or the Properties
window, when measuring features. For details see Using the Grid Window 78 andUsing the Properties
Window 91 .
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Filter from the Scan drop-down list in the Properties
section
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Algorithm from the Measurement drop-down list

Feature type - select the feature from the drop-down list of features to which feature fitting can apply.
Fitting algorithm - select the fitting algorithm from the drop-down list of algorithms applicable to the
feature. The Default option is Least squares (when this exists). Least squares uses a least-squares
fitting algorithm that uses Gaussian elimination (verified by the PTB) to minimise the average error of the
fit. For features that have a Minmax, Minimum circumscribed or Maximum inscribed option the
algorithm used is Tschebyscheff.
When tolerancing a circle or cylinder feature using MMC or LMC, the following settings are suggested
(because they represent a physical fit of the feature):
MMC
external feature
Minimum circumscribed
internal feature
Maximum inscribed
758
LMC
external feature
Maximum inscribed
internal feature
Minimum circumscribed
When tolerancing a slot or parallel planes feature, the following settings are suggested (because they
represent a physical fit of the feature):
MMC
LMC
external feature
Maximum width
internal feature
Minimum width
external feature
Minimum width
internal feature
Maximum width
Circle features
The following algorithms are used for circle features:
Default - this is Least squares.
Least squares - minimises the average squared error.
Maximum inscribed - the biggest circle that fits inside all the points.
Minimum circumscribed - the smallest circle that encloses all the data.
Minmax - the circle is fitted halfway between two circles, with a common centre, which have a minimum
distance between them to enclose all the data. This algorithm minimises the maximum error. Note that
the two circles are not the same as those produced using Maximum inscribed and Minimum
circumscribed.
Arc features
The following algorithms are used for arc features and work as per circle: Default, Least squares,
Minmax.
Cone features
The following algorithms are used for cone features and work as per circle but 3D: Default, Least
squares, Minmax.
Cone, cylinder and sphere features
The following algorithms are used for cone, cylinder and sphere features and work as per circle but 3D:
Default, Least squares, Maximum inscribed, Minimum circumscribed, Minmax.
Curve features
Please use the Geometry Algorithm - GCURVE dialog box
760
for curve features.
Line features
The following algorithms are used for line features and work as per circle: Default, Least squares.
Parallel planes features
The following algorithms are used for parallel planes features: Default, Least squares, Maximum width,
Minimum width. Least squares fits two parallel planes through the data. Maximum and minimum width
determine two parallel planes at either the maximum or minimum limits of the data.
Plane features
The following algorithms are used for plane features: Default, Least squares (minimises the average
error), Minmax (the maximum error).
Slot features
The following algorithms are used for slot features: Default, Least squares (uses the algorithm on the
circles at the ends of a round slot, or on the parallel lines in an open slot), Maximum width, Minimum
Properties Commands
759
width (these place two parallel lines at either the maximum or minimum limits of the data).
Geometry points
The following algorithms are used for geometry points: CAD 'global', CAD ray test, CAD surface
equation, CAD trimmed faces, Default.
CAD 'global' - this algorithm is quick for large data sets such as point clouds. It works by creating
an optimised representation of the CAD model and then comparing points to this representation. It
is not suitable for individual points.
CAD ray test - for each face to compare against, this algorithm checks if the touch direction points
to the face. If it does not then the algorithm ignores the face. This is not suitable for use with laser
trackers or machines with solid probes.
CAD surface equation - this algorithm takes each selected face in turn and finds the closest point on
it, ignoring the trimming of the surface. For example a plane with cut-outs will be tested as an
infinite plane without cut-outs. This is used for example on fixture measurement where the faces
being measured extend beyond the visible faces. When using this algorithm, measure near to the
part. This algorithm is of limited use when comparing to more than one face at a time as the
equations extend beyond the visual surface.
Default and CAD trimmed faces - takes each selected face in turn and finds the closest point on it.
This is the most reliable algorithm but may be slower than CAD 'global' where that can be used.
Filtering
approximation to the surface.
When a feature is scanned, points are collected by the probe and stored in the inspection database, and
an attribute is attached to the feature flagging it as a scanned feature. When a filter is to be applied, if
the feature is not flagged as a scanned feature, the data from it is not filtered. The filter is applied to the
scan data when the CONST/TR command is executed (seeConstruction Using Copy 587 ).
comparison.
Elimination
Use the Elimination box to set up the standard deviation algorithm used in scanning features. This
applies a filter to the scanning data so that you can reduce noise and achieve a good approximation to
the surface.
Apply - if checked, the filter is applied to the scanning data for the selected feature type. This adds a
GEOALG/...ELIMINATE command to your program.
Standard deviations - the number of standard deviations above which points are considered to be noise
and are filtered out. For example, if you select 3, any point that is more than three standard deviations
from the mean is ignored.
Filter type
Off - filtering is not applied to scan data for the selected feature type.
Linear - applies a filter to the scanning data obtained from scanning the selected feature type. The
linear filter acts on linear and other objects. For 3D features, the filtering is performed along the path of
the scan data, which applies the filter to the deviation from the feature actual against the actual distance
travelled. If you do not have many points, the filter will be less accurate. The more points you have, the
better the approximation. The minimum number of points is 10 times the number of undulations required
in the length.
The Linear option adds a GEOALG/...FILTER,LAMBDAC command to your program (the LAMBDAC
filter takes into account both the surface finish and the undulations of the feature profile).
Wavelength (displayed when Linear is selected) - determines the number of undulations along a
760
surface length. The available wavelengths are shown in the drop-down list, in the current linear units (as
given in the System Settings dialog box). Frequencies higher than the selected wavelength (i.e. with a
smaller wavelength) are filtered out. For example, if you select 2.5 mm, there can only be one
undulation every 2.5 mm, so the data is approximated to a wavelength of 2.5 mm and smaller
wavelengths have an exponentially smaller effect on the approximation.
A value of 25 mm establishes the location of the feature, and filters out noise or small surface
undulations. A value of 2.5 mm filters out the high frequency oscillations and gives the overall shape of
the feature. A value of 0.25 mm gives the actual surface finish. However, feature surface is a factor, so
you must adjust the filter accordingly. If the surface has a rough finish, then 0.25 mm may be too fine a
filter.
Circular - applies a filter to the scanning data obtained from scanning the selected feature type. The
circular filter acts on circular objects only. If you do not have many points, the filter will be less
accurate. The more points you have, the better the approximation. The minimum number of points is 10
times the number of undulations required in the circumference.
The Circular option adds a GEOALG/...FILTER,CIRCULAR command to your program.
UPR (displayed when Circular is selected) - the number of peaks allowed around the circumference. For
example, if you select 5, then there can only be five peaks, so the data is approximated to five peaks.
The approximation calculates the five most significant peaks and filters out the rest.
A value of 5 undulations per revolution (UPR) establishes the location of the feature, and gives a good
circularity value, but at the expense of information. A value of 15 UPR gives the overall shape of the
feature. A value of 50+ UPR gives the actual surface finish. However, feature size is a factor, so you
must adjust the filter accordingly. A big circle will require a higher UPR value to reduce noise and
achieve a good approximation to the surface.
See Also:
755

Main Toolbar
42
101
135
742
Scan Commands
133.19Geometry Algorithm - Curve

Geometry Algorithm - Curve
Properties Commands
761
Purpose
Use the Geometry Algorithm - GCURVE dialog box to specify any fitting algorithms to be used for
GCURVES, and to apply best fitting for probe compensation.
This dialog box adds a GEOALG command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Curve Algorithm from the Measurement dropdown list in the Properties section

Geometry algorithm - select the fitting algorithm from the drop-down list of algorithms applicable to the
feature:
Extended least squares - the raw data is aligned to the nominal curve using a best-fit (the
various best-fit options are described below). For each raw point, the surface normal is
calculated using information from the nominal curve; this allows probe compensation to be
applied. For each nominal point, the
corresponding actual is calculated by finding
the closest point on the raw curve.
Nominal vector - a raw curve is fitted through the uncompensated probe centres. The actual
point corresponding to each nominal point is found by intersecting the corresponding nominal
direction (projected into the plane of the nominal curve, obtained from the touch (PTMEAS)
points) with the raw curve. The point is then compensated by the probe tip radius along this
nominal direction (projected into the plane of the nominal curve), but no cosine error correction is
applied.
Closest raw - a raw curve is fitted through the uncompensated probe centres. The actual point
corresponding to each nominal point is found by taking the closest position on this raw curve to
the nominal point. The point is then compensated by the probe tip radius along the
perpendicular to the raw curve, through the nominal point. An additional adjustment is then
made to account for cosine error correction within the feature plane.
Normal to nominal - a raw curve is fitted through the uncompensated probe centres. The
actual point on this raw curve is determined by intersecting the normal to the nominal curve,
762
projected into the plane of the nominal curve at the nominal point, with the raw curve. The raw
curve position is then compensated along the normal to the raw curve. An additional adjustment
is then made to account for cosine error correction within the feature plane.
Default - this is the same as Closest raw.
Best-fit options for probe compensation (only available for Extended least squares):
Best-fitting is used when associating the raw points with the nominal curve in order to calculate the raw
IJKs. Any combination of the following can be enabled / disabled
Translation raw profile can be translated within scan plane
Rotation raw profile can be rotated about scan plane normal
Magnification raw profile can be stretched / shrunk
The best choice of options is dependent on the particular application. For example, if a circular arc scan
is performed as a GCURVE, rotational fitting should be disabled otherwise the actuals can be shifted
tangentially. If a linear scan is performed as a GCURVE, the translation option should be disabled (as
should be the magnification).
The magnification option is intended to help with blade analysis to avoid the problems at the leading /
trailing edge which often arise when a blade is too long / short compared to the nominal.
For blade analysis applications, it is recommended that all three best-fit options be selected.
Error reporting options (only available for Extended least squares):
This option determines whether to report absolute position errors or simply errors in the form; this is
reflected in the generation of actuals. If the user is interested in reporting form errors (but is not
interested in the location) 'Form only' should be selected; in this case, a best-fit is applied to the actuals
to minimise the deviation from the nominal curve. If the user wishes to report errors in the position of the
feature, the 'Absolute position' options should be selected; no best-fit is applied in this case. When
applying the best-fit to the actuals, a magnification factor is not applied - this ensures that the reported
dimensions of the feature are correct.
See Also:
755
101
742
133.20Fine Positioning Dialog Box

Fine Positioning Dialog Box
Purpose
Properties Commands
763
For LK machines with a Metris driver and controller, use the Fine Positioning dialog box to specify
whether fine positioning is on or off. When fine positioning is on, the sensor is positioned with highresolution accuracy at a low velocity after the normal positioning move.
The Fine Positioning dialog box adds a FINPOS command to your program.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the FINPOS command, select Properties
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Fine Position from the Modal drop-down list in
See Also:
Main Toolbar
95
135
Modal Commands
133.21Output Text Dialog Box

Output Text Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Output Text dialog box to create messages and select output options for the messages. Type
the message into the box, using printable ASCII characters, and select an output option. You can
display messages on the screen, or you can send messages to the .res file (see File Types 36 ).
The Output Text dialog box adds a TEXT/MAN command to your program if Manual prompt is selected;
a TEXT/OPER command if Operator prompt is selected; and a TEXT/OUTFIL command if Output file is
selected.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the TEXT command, select Properties
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Text in the Input / Output
section
Select Inspect, Scan, Laser or Construct from the main toolbar, click Text in the Output section

Manual prompt - displays the message for the operator when in Manual mode
40
764
Operator prompt - displays the message no matter what the mode.

Output file - sends the message to the .res file.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
212
95
135
Advanced Commands
890
Output Commands
133.22Decimal Places Dialog Box

Decimal Places Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Decimal Places dialog box to set the number of decimal places used for various values in your
part program. This allows you to set different numbers of decimal places for distance values, angles,
vectors, etc.
If you check the Default box for an item, the value from the Output precision field on theMiscellaneous
tab page 120 , Configuration dialog box, is used. Checking the Default box for the All option sets all the
items to the value from the Output precision field. If you check All but not its Default box, all the items
are set to the value used for the All option.
The Decimal Places dialog box adds a DECPL command to your program.
Note:
The Deviation option applies to all tolerance output and overrides the settings for angle and distance for
tolerance output.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Decimal Places from the Modal drop-down list in
Properties Commands
765
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Modal Commands
134 Move Commands

134.1 Move Commands
Move Commands
Purpose
The Move commands allow you to specify sensor moves by location, magnitude and direction.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, use the Move Tools section
Select Alignment from the main toolbar, use the Offset and Absolute Moves drop-down lists in the
Datum Features section

Axis Offset
Absolute
773
Feature Offset
Increment
766
775
768
Probe Offset
Free Position
776
778
Surface Offset
Set Home
Position (From)
771
Move Home
767
Rotary Move 1008
See Also:
Main Toolbar
134.2 Fly Dialog Box

Fly Dialog Box
772
766
Purpose
Use the Fly dialog box to specify continuous motion when using GOTO points. Select On, then specify
a radius in the associated field. When executing a series of GOTO commands, the probe will not carry
out individual straight-line movements, but instead will pass within the specified radius for each GOTO
point. This ensures a smooth motion.
The Fly dialog box adds a FLY command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect or Scan from the main toolbar, click Fly mode from the Modal drop-down list in the
Properties section
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Fly mode from the Operations drop-down list in the
Operations section
Note:
The Fly option is available if the CMM is off-line, or for certain controller types.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
134.3 Absolute Move Dialog Box

Absolute Move Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Absolute Move dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move. The
sensor will travel to this target relative to the origin of the part co-ordinate system.
Move Commands
767
The Absolute Move dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Absolute from the Absolute Moves dropdown list in the Move Tools section
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the GOTO command, select Properties

Target - the point to which the sensor will travel. You can input values into the Target fields in one of
two ways:
Type in the X, Y and Z co-ordinates.
Click the X, Y and Z buttons to automatically insert the corresponding value displayed in the CMM
position box.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used. The X, Y, Z
(rectangular) Target and CMM position fields change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is
selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current work plane. A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be
entered.
CMM position - the current position of the sensor.
OK - click this button to read the values for the sensor move from the Target box.
Teach - click this button to read the values for the sensor move from the CMM position box. This
copies the current co-ordinate data in the CMM position box to the Target fields. If this button is clicked,
no CMM operations occur.
Note:
If the command is executed, the way that it is executed depends on the measurement mode:
Manual - the GOTO command will not be active.
Program, machine on-line - the command will be active.
Automatic, machine on-line - the command will only be active outside measurement or calibration
blocks.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Move Commands
134.4 Home Dialog Box

Home Dialog Box
Purpose
95
40
768
Use the Home dialog box to move the CMM to the position defined in the From dialog box. This target is
specified in current datum, tip co-ordinates. The system calculates the centre of the probe head
(typically PH9/10) in machine co-ordinates relative to the machine axes. When the GOHOME command
is issued, the CMM axes are driven so as to place the centre of rotation in the physical location
determined by FROM, regardless of head angles or current datum.
The Home dialog box adds a GOHOME command to your program.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the GOHOME command, select Properties
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Move Home from the Absolute Moves
drop-down list in the Move Tools section
See Also:
From Dialog Box
771

Main Toolbar
95
135
Move Commands
134.5 Increment Dialog Box

Increment Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Increment dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the magnitude and direction of the
move. The sensor will travel the specified distance and direction relative to its current position (as
defined in current datum co-ordinates).
The Increment dialog box adds a GOTO/INCR command to your program.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Increment from the Absolute Moves dropdown list in the Move Tools section
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the GOTO/INCR command, select Properties

Move Commands
769
Target - the point to which the sensor will travel. Type in the magnitude of the move in the Distance
field, in the current linear units (shown in the System Settings dialog box). This is the distance from the
current location. Specify the direction cosines in the i, j and k fields.
OK - click this button to read the values for the sensor move from the Target box.
Note:
If the command is executed, the way that it is executed depends on the measurement mode and
whether the Teach button was used. If the Teach button was used, no CMM operations occur. If the
Teach button was not used, the outcome is this:
Manual - the GOTO/INCR command will not be active.
blocks.
See Also:
101

Main Toolbar
40
95
135
Move Commands
134.6 Point Measurement Dialog Box

Point Measurement Dialog Box
Purpose
770
Use the Point Measurement dialog box to execute an automatic point measurement, specifying the
target and the direction vector of the touch point. With the Point Measurement dialog box displayed,
you can pick a different touch point on the CAD model and the values in the dialog box are changed
accordingly.
The Point Measurement dialog box adds a PTMEAS command to your program.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on a touch point, select Properties

three ways:
Click the X, Y and/or Z buttons to automatically insert the corresponding value displayed in the CMM
position box.
Click Teach to automatically teach a point to be taken. The co-ordinates of the point are transferred
into the Target fields.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used.
The X, Y, Z (rectangular) Target and CMM position fields change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when
Polar is selected. R, A, and H are defined in the current work plane. A polar angle of -360 to +360
can be entered.
Direction
X, Y, Z - specify the plane that the point lies in. Select 'none' if you do not wish to specify a
direction. Select 'other' if you wish to specify and use a plane that is not one of the datum planes.
i, j, k - display the directional cosines of the plane in which the point lies.
Normalise - click this button to set the direction normal to the feature being measured. This is only
available in a MEAS or CALIB block.
Teach - if the CMM is on-line, click this button to display the TEACH dialog box where you can
manually teach a point using the handbox. The co-ordinates of the point are transferred into the Target
fields.
Note:
Whether the PTMEAS points are used depends on the measurement mode:
Manual - PTMEAS points are not used.
Program, machine on-line - PTMEAS points are used.
Automatic - PTMEAS points are not used if a feature is supported in automatic operations, i.e. if a
canned cycle (an internal measuring routine) exists for the feature. If a canned cycle does not exist, the
PTMEAS points are used.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
40
95
135
Move Commands
765
Move Commands
771
134.7 From Dialog Box

From Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the From dialog box to define the position to which the CMM axes will travel when the GOHOME
command is issued. This target is specified in current datum, tip co-ordinates. The system calculates
the centre of the probe head (typically PH9/10) in machine co-ordinates relative to the machine axes.
When the GOHOME command is issued, the CMM axes are driven so as to place the centre of rotation
in the physical location determined by FROM, regardless of head angles or current datum.
The From dialog box adds a FROM command to your program. GOHOME is added using the Home
dialog box.
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the FROM command, select Properties
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Set Home Position (From) from the
Absolute Moves drop-down list in the Move Tools section

two ways:
position box.
Note:
If the command is executed, the way that it is executed depends on the measurement mode and
whether the Teach button was used. If the Teach button was used, no CMM operations occur. If the
Teach button was not used, the outcome is this:
Manual - the FROM command will not be active.
772
blocks.
See Also:
Home Dialog Box
767

Main Toolbar
40
95
135
Move Commands
134.8 Surface Offset Dialog Box

Surface Offset Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Surface Offset dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move by
picking a surface point on the CAD model and using an offset. The sensor will travel to the target relative
to the origin of the part co-ordinate system. While the Surface Offset dialog box is displayed, the target
is indicated in the model window by a small circle.
Use the
button to set Repeat mode on, so that you can add more target points. Click
between each target point that you add. You can drag the target points around on the model to change
their location and offset. To add your target points to your program, ensure that
before clicking
is not selected
The Surface Offset dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program for each target you create.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Surface Offset from the Offset drop-down
list in the Move Tools section
Move Commands
773

Target - displays the point to which the sensor will travel. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the coordinates used. The X, Y, Z (rectangular) fields change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is
entered.
Offset - the distance from the surface in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Multiple features
When inspecting multiple features (for example using the Inspect - Multi Circle option), if you have
accessed this dialog box from the Teach Path view pop-up menu, the Before and After boxes are also
available:
Before - if checked, a GOTO command is added to the Teach Path view before each selected feature.
After - if checked, a GOTO command is added to the Teach Path view after each selected feature.
See Also:
Model Window
49

Main Toolbar
95
135
Move Commands
765
Co-ordinate Systems
38
134.9 Axis Offset Dialog Box

Axis Offset Dialog Box
774
Purpose
Use the Axis Offset dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move by
selecting an axis and an offset. The sensor will travel to the target relative to the origin of the part coordinate system. While the Axis Offset dialog box is displayed, the target is indicated in the model
window by a small circle.
Use the
between each target point that you add. You can drag the target points along the selected axis to
change their location. To add your target points to your program, ensure that
clicking
is not selected before
The Axis Offset dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program for each target you create.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Axis Offset from the Offset drop-down list
in the Move Tools section

entered.
Datum axis - the axis that the target point is located on. You can drag it along this axis using the
mouse.
Offset - the distance from the current inspection datum (pcs) along the selected axis (in the current
Move Commands
775
units as shown in the System Settings dialog box).

Multiple features
available:
See Also:
Model Window
49

Main Toolbar
95
135
Move Commands
765
Co-ordinate Systems
38
134.10Feature Offset Dialog Box

Feature Offset Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Feature Offset dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move by
picking a feature and using an offset. The sensor will travel to the target relative to the origin of the part
co-ordinate system. While the Feature Offset dialog box is displayed, the target is indicated in the
model window by a small circle.
776
Use the
between each target point that you add. You can drag the target points along the feature normal or
feature axis as appropriate to change their location. To add your target points to your program, ensure
that
is not selected before clicking
The Feature Offset dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program for each target you create.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Feature Offset from the Offset drop-down

entered.
Offset - the distance from the feature along the feature normal or feature axis (in the current units as
shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Multiple features
available:
Pickable feature types - select a feature type to pick when defining the sensor move. Not all features
are suitable for defining a clearance move in this way, for example a surface (GSURF) feature has no
appropriate direction.
See Also:
Model Window
49

Main Toolbar
58
95
135
Move Commands
765
Co-ordinate Systems
38
134.11Probe Offset Dialog Box

Probe Offset Dialog Box
Move Commands
777
Purpose
Use the Probe Offset dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move by using
an offset along the probe axis. While the Probe Offset dialog box is displayed, the target is indicated in
the model window by a small circle.
Use the
between each target point that you add. You can drag the target points along the probe axis to change
their location. To add your target points to your program, ensure that
clicking
The Probe Offset dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program for each target you create.
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Probe Offset from the Offset drop-down

entered.
Offset - the distance from the current probe tip position along the probe axis (in the current units as
shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Multiple features
available:
778
See Also:
Model Window
49

Main Toolbar
95
135
Move Commands
765
Co-ordinate Systems
38
134.12Free Position Dialog Box

Free Position Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Free Position dialog box to execute a sensor move, defining the end point of the move by
dragging it in the plane of view in the model window. While the Free Position dialog box is displayed,
the target is indicated in the model window by a small circle. On first displaying the Free Position dialog
box, the target is located at the current inspection datum and can be dragged to a new position from
there.
Use the
between each target point that you add. You can drag the target points in the plane of view to change
their location. To add your target points to your program, ensure that
clicking
The Free Position dialog box adds a GOTO command to your program for each target you create.
Move Commands
779
Navigation
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Free Position from the Absolute Moves
drop-down list in the Move Tools section

entered. You can input values into the Target fields in one of two ways:
position box.
Multiple features
available:
See Also:
Model Window
49

Main Toolbar
95
135
Move Commands
765
Co-ordinate Systems
38
134.13Move Offset Dialog Box

Move Offset Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Move Offset dialog box to change the target for a sensor move specified by a GOTO command.
The Move Offset dialog box is available for GOTO commands added using the Offset options from the
Move commands.
Navigation
780
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, select New in the Inspect section, add a
GOTO command using the Surface Offset, Axis Offset, Feature Offset or Probe Offset options from
the Offset drop-down list in the Move Tools section, right-click on the move command in the Teach
Path view, select Properties

Offset - type in a new offset for the associated GOTO command.
See Also:
Move Commands
765
Teach Path View
135 Scanning
135.1 Scanning
Scanning
Scanning can be carried out using a digital or an analogue probe.
When the program is run, a feature will be scanned if:
Scan mode is on AND touch points (PTMEAS points) exist for the feature AND the program mode is
Automatic or Program
or
Scan mode is on AND you are using an analogue probe AND a scanning canned cycle exists for the
feature AND the program mode is Automatic
or
From DMIS version 05.0, the program mode is Program and PATH and PAMEAS commands define
a scan path for the feature
Unknown scanning
Unknown scanning 784 is scanning of an unknown profile. The start position, end position and the
direction to start scanning in must be specified, but in unknown scanning the form of the profile in
between is not known.
Known path scanning
When scanning with an analogue probe, you can perform known path scanning 786 . This allows rapid
programmed scanning along a given path (which does not necessarily lie in a plane).
Digital scanning
Digital probes use a 'pecking' action to sample points at intervals determined by the controller. Ensure
the Peck option on the Scan Settings dialog box 792 is selected for digital scanning. Scanning with a
digital probe is slower than analogue scanning and is always planar. All digital probe scanning is
unknown.
Analogue scanning
Analogue probes use a 'dragging' action, where the probe remains in continuous contact with the part.
Ensure the Drag option on the Scan Settings dialog box is selected for analogue scanning. Points are
sampled according to the options you choose in the Sampling box on the Scan Settings dialog box.
Analogue scanning can be known or unknown.
Canned cycles for analogue scanning
You can scan arc, circle, bounded cylinder, bounded cone and sphere features using an analogue probe
Scanning
781
without defining a scan path for the feature. With scan mode on, in CNC mode (i.e. with CNC or AUTO
selected in the Teach Path view), you can pick the nominal feature from the model and immediately
click
(Apply). This is because there is a scanning canned cycle for these features for analogue
probes. The scanning canned cycles use built-in controller routines that optimise arc measurement.
You can use the BOUND command to specify the extent of unbounded cones (you can insert the
BOUND command using the Insert Command dialog box 201 ). Cylinders are bounded if they have a
length parameter. Bounded cones and cylinders are scanned using the same scanning algorithm as
that used for a circle.
Features without a scanning canned cycle
If the feature does not have a canned cycle, you must provide a scan path for the machine to follow.
Either pick at least two touch points on the feature. The feature is scanned from the first point you pick
to the last point. Or, from DMIS version 05.0, add scan path elements to the feature (see Scan Options
- Inspecting a Feature 370 ).
Teaching a scan
You also have the option to teach a scan, to show the probe where to scan. Instead of picking points or
adding scan paths to the selected feature, use the Scan Teach commands 809 to set the start and end
points of the scan and its direction. The Scan Teach commands use unknown scanning.
Saving the scan data
You can save the data to a scan data file, as well as to the inspection database (for details of setting up
the scan data file, see Program Inspection - Scan Options 180 ).
See Also:
Scan On/Off Dialog Box
Laser Scanning
791
811
Teach Path View
94

Scan Commands
135.2 Scan Menu

135.2.1 Scan Menu
Scan Menu
42
782
Purpose
The Scan menu allows you to measure the various features, set up scanning parameters, turn scanning
on and off, and define and output tolerances in your program.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar

Inspect
279
Features
Probes
367
Properties
Scan Tools
280
Output
741
782
Move Tools
765
Probe Check
615
281
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
135.2.2 Scan Tools

Scan Tools
The Scan Tools section is accessed from the Scan tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
Add Scans - allows you to add a scan path to the feature highlighted in the Teach Path view. This
option is not available for all feature types.
Touch - allows you to add touch points to your program for the feature highlighted in the Teach Path
view. You can pick on the model or take points manually to define touch points.
Teach - displays the options available to teach an inspection of a feature using a scan, i.e. instead of
picking points on the selected feature, use the Scan Teach 809 options to set the start and end points of
the scan and its direction.
Paths - displays the options available to set up scan path elements on a feature. The following options
are available, depending on the feature type selected:
Circle Path
373
Cylinder Line Path

Curve Path
390
303
Cylinder Circles Path
305
Cylinder Helix Path
Plane Multi Line Path
317
Plane Centre Circle Radius

Path 319
Plane Edge Offset Path
Geometry - displays the Select Geometry dialog box

the CAD model.
308
321
366
, where you can select one or more faces on
See Also:
Scanning
783
135.2.3 Output
Output
Purpose
Navigation
136 Filtering Scan Data

Filtering Scan Data
Contact probe data
approximation to the surface.
When a feature is scanned using a contact probe, points are collected by the probe and stored in the
inspection database, and an attribute is attached to the feature flagging it as a scanned feature.
When a filter is to be applied to this data, if the feature is not flagged as a scanned feature, the data from
it is not filtered. The filter is created using the Geometry Algorithm dialog box and applied to the scan
data when the CONST/TR command is executed (see Construction Using Copy 587 ). Therefore, to filter
your scan data, construct a feature of the same type as the scanned feature.
comparison.
Laser scanner data
You can apply filters to the point cloud data to reduce the numbers of points and you can save the point
cloud data from a scan using the options from the Point Cloud menu 867 .
Laser scanner data is not automatically saved to the inspection database. To provide actual point data
that can be saved to the inspection database, filter the laser scanner data using the GEOALG
commands. You can add these to your part program using the laser filter dialog boxes available from
the Point Cloud menu 867 . A GEOALG command added in this way contains the corresponding
LASERFILTER command as a parameter, so that the scan data from the laser-scanned surface is
filtered when creating a target feature. The filter is applied to the point cloud when the CONST/feature,F
( ),TR command is executed. The filtered points are placed in the point buffer and then automatically
saved in the inspection database.
See Also:
42
784
137 Unknown Scanning

137.1 Unknown Scanning
Unknown Scanning
Unknown scanning is scanning of an unknown profile. The start position, end position and the direction
to start scanning in must be specified, but in unknown scanning the form of the profile in between is not
known. An unknown scan is always planar. Unknown scanning can be performed using a digital or an
analogue probe (in fact, digital scanning is always unknown).
There are two methods for performing an unknown scan:
Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS commands
784
From DMIS version 05.0, using the PATH/UNKNOWN command
785
See Also:
Scanning
137.2 Unknown Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS

Unknown Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS
To create an unknown scan path using SCNMOD and PTMEAS commands:
1.
Ensure the program is in Program mode. You can use the Power User Settings dialog box 103 to
select Program mode. (The mode can be Automatic for features which do not have canned cycles
as this uses Program mode.)
2.
Switch on scanning by selecting On in the Scan On/Off dialog box
3.
Pick the feature to be scanned on the model.
4.
Use the Scan Teach commands 809 to generate the scan path for unknown scanning. This requires
the following information to be defined:
791
The start position for the scan

The end position for the scan
The direction of the scan
The scanning plane
You can use the SCAN/PAUSE and SCAN/CONTIN commands to break your scan into sections,
allowing you to perform other activities between sections of the scan, such as indexing the probe or
adding GOTO moves.
Sample code for unknown scanning using SCNMOD and PTMEAS
SCNPLN/AUTO
SCNMOD/ON
F(CON003)=FEAT/CONE,INNER,CART,0,0,-12.191,0,0,1,119
MEAS/CONE,F(CON003),4
PTMEAS/CART,15.6,0,-3.0027,-0.5055,0,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,0,15.6,-3.0027,0,-0.5055,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,-15.6,0,-3.0027,0.5055,0,0.8628
Unknown Scanning
785
PTMEAS/CART,0,-15.6,-3.0027,0,0.5055,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,15.6,0,-3.0027,-0.5055,0,0.8628
SCAN/PAUSE
GOTO/10,0,-3.1
SCAN/CONTIN
PTMEAS/CART,15.1,0,-3.297,-0.5055,0,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,0,15.1,-3.297,0,-0.5055,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,-15.1,0,-3.297,0.5055,0,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,0,-15.1,-3.297,0,0.5055,0.8628
PTMEAS/CART,15.1,0,-3.297,-0.5055,0,0.8628
ENDMES
See Also:
Unknown Scanning
784
Unknown Scanning Using PATH/UNKNOWN and PAMEAS

Scan Pause/Continue Dialog Box
785
40
795
Move Commands
137.3 Unknown Scanning Using PATH/UNKNOWN and PAMEAS

Unknown Scanning Using PATH/UNKNOWN and PAMEAS
From DMIS version 05.0, you can create an unknown scan path using the PATH/UNKNOWN and
PAMEAS commands. The program must be in Program mode (or it can be in Automatic mode for
features which do not have canned cycles as this uses Program mode). You do not need to switch on
scanning as this is implicit in the PATH/UNKNOWN command.
Add the PATH/UNKNOWN command to your program or edit an existing PATH command using the
Unknown Path dialog box 806 . The PATH/UNKNOWN command has the following format:
P(label)=PATH/UNKNOWN,x_start,y_start,z_start,x_direction,y_direction,z_direction,x_end,y_end,
z_end,i,j,k
The PATH command defines where the scan is to be taken. The PAMEAS command then references
the appropriate PATH command to perform the scan (see the sample code below). The ijk values in the
PAMEAS command define the approach to the scan. If they are not present, the approach is from the
current position to the start of the scan. Add the PAMEAS command to your program using the
Measure Path dialog box 807 .
CAMIO fits a plane through the positions in the PATH/UNKNOWN command and performs the unknown
scan, using the following process:
If the x,y,z positions are in a line, and there are no ijk values, the plane cannot be determined, so
this results in an error.
If the x,y,z positions are in a line, and there are ijk values, this gives the scanning plane so the
unknown scan can be carried out.
If the x,y,z positions are not in a line, a plane can be fitted through them to give the scanning plane.
This must agree with the plane from the ijk values, or this results in an error.
CAMIO determines if the PATH/UNKNOWN command contains ijk values from the number of ordinals in
786
the command. If there are 13 ordinals, the final three are the ijk values.
You can break your scan into sections by adding moves and other commands between the PAMEAS
commands.
Sample code for unknown scanning using PATH/UNKNOWN and PAMEAS
$$ MEAS
CONE
P(UN1)=PATH/UNKNOWN,15.6,0,-3.0027,0,15.6,-3.0027,15.6,0,-3.0027,0,0,1
P(UN2)=PATH/UNKNOWN,15.1,0,-3.297,0,15.1,-3.297,15.1,0,-3.297,0,0,1
F(CON003)=FEAT/CONE,INNER,CART,0,0,-12.191,0,0,1,119
MEAS/CONE,F(CON003),6
PAMEAS/P(UN1),-0.5055,0,0.8628
PAMEAS/P(UN2),-0.5055,0,0.8628
ENDMES
$$ ENDMES
See Also:
Unknown Scanning
784
Unknown Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS

784
40
Ordinals in Advanced Programming 958

795
Move Commands
137.4 Known Path Scanning

137.4.1 Known Path Scanning
Known Path Scanning
When scanning with an analogue probe, you can perform known path scanning.
Known path scanning allows rapid programmed scanning along a given path (which does not necessarily
lie in a plane). There are two methods for performing known path scanning:
Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS commands
786
From DMIS version 05.0, using PATH and PAMEAS commands
789
See Also:
Scanning
137.4.2 Known Path Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS

Known Path Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS
You can create a known path scan using SCNMOD and PTMEAS commands. You provide a number of
touch points (PTMEAS points) in a Measure feature (MEAS) block. The PTMEAS points are used to
calculate the path for the machine to follow. The feature is scanned from the first point to the last point.
The algorithm uses the directions of the PTMEAS points to account for probe radius offset along the
path. The scan is planar, unless you select the curve option in the Known Path Scan dialog box 796 .
Unknown Scanning
787
To create a known path scan using SCNMOD and PTMEAS commands:

You must be using an analogue probe 710 .
Scan mode must be on. You can set scan mode on using the Scan On/Off dialog box
791
The program must be in Program mode, or it can be in Automatic mode for features which do not
have canned cycles (as this uses Program mode).
If the feature does not have a canned cycle, there must be at least two touch points.
Switch on known path scanning using the Known Path Scan dialog box. The setting for known path
scanning will apply to all subsequent programmed scans until you use the Known Path Scan dialog
box to switch it off. You can select Curve to specify that the scan should follow the path defined by
the touch points. Or you can select Planar to specify that the scan should follow the path defined
by the touch points, but within a plane defined by the start point and the current scan plane. The
touch points are projected into the current scanning plane.
You can use the SCAN/PAUSE and SCAN/CONTIN commands to break your scan into sections,
allowing you to perform other activities between sections of the scan, such as indexing the probe or
adding GOTO moves.
Click here
787
See Also:
Known Path Scanning
Scanning
786
780
795
Move Commands
137.4.3 Known Path Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS - Sample Code
Known Path Scanning Using SCNMOD and PTMEAS - Sample Code
788
Unknown Scanning
789
137.4.4 Known Path Scanning Using PATH and PAMEAS

From DMIS version 05.0, you can use PATH and PAMEAS commands to create the known path scan.
To create and run a known path scan using PATH and PAMEAS commands:
You do not need to set scan mode on, as this is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands.
The program must be in Program mode, or it can be in Automatic mode for features which do not
have canned cycles (as this uses Program mode).
If the feature does not have a canned cycle, there must be a scan with at least one PATH and
corresponding PAMEAS command.
Use the scan options available when inspecting certain feature types to set up the PATH and
PAMEAS commands (see Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature 370 ) or add these commands using
the appropriate path dialog box from the scan commands, and theMeasure Path dialog box 807 .
The scan is continuous. If the scan is made up of consecutive sections (i.e. a PAMEAS command
referencing multiple path elements), CAMIO scans in a straight line from the end of one section to
the start of the next (unless the PAMEAS command refers to a PATH/UNKNOWN command, in
which case the probe retracts from the part before and after the command). You can add moves and
other commands between the PAMEAS commands in your scan.
Click here
789
See Also:
Known Path Scanning
Scanning
786
780
40
Move Commands
137.4.5 Known Path Scanning Using PATH and PAMEAS - Sample Code
Known Path Scanning Using PATH and PAMEAS - Sample Code
Sample 1
Sample 2
790
Unknown Scanning
791
137.5 Scan Commands

137.5.1 Scan Commands
Scan Commands
Purpose
The Scan commands allow you to set up scanning parameters, and turn scanning on and off.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, use the Scan drop-down list in the Properties section (you may
need to customise the toolbar for some options)

On/Off
Scan Settings
791
Scan Plane
795
792
Scan Deflection
798
Scan
Acceleration
Scan Arc Path
793
Scan Filter
756
Scan Pause/
Continue 795
Scan Known Path
Scan Line Path
Scan Curve Path
796
801
798
Scan Unknown
Path 806
800
Scan Velocity
Scan Measure
Path 807
Scan Helix Path

802
See Also:
Scanning
780
Main Toolbar
135
137.5.2 Scan On/Off Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Scan On/Off dialog box to specify whether scan mode is on or off, for tactile probe scanning.
These commands have no effect on the program until the MEAS command is executed. Then if the
feature can be scanned and the program is not in Manual mode, the CMM will scan the feature rather
than measuring individual points.
The Scan On/Off dialog box adds a SCNMOD command to your program. The SCNMOD/ON command
792
is required if you are NOT using PATH and PAMEAS commands to define the scan path for the feature
(it is implicit in the PATH and PAMEAS commands).
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click On/Off from the Scan drop-down list in the Properties
section
See Also:
Scanning
780
40
Main Toolbar
137.5.3 Scan Settings Dialog Box

Scan Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Scan Settings dialog box to define the type of scan and the sampling method.
The Scan Settings dialog box adds a SCNSET command to your program. If you do not add this
command, the Default option is assumed.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Settings from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
Unknown Scanning
793
Routine
The type of scan.
Peck - the probe uses a 'pecking' action to sample points at intervals determined by the controller. This
option is for use with digital probes.
Drag - the probe uses a 'dragging' action to sample points according to the settings in the Sampling
box. This option is for use with analogue probes.
Deflection - the scan reference deflection, i.e. the deflection of an analogue probe that the controller
attempts to maintain during analogue scanning, in the current linear units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box 101 ).
Stop zone - select this to set a 3-D box (of the dimension in the associated field, measured in the
current units) around the co-ordinate where you want the scan to stop. The dimensions of the box will
depend on the scanning velocity, which determines the distance between individual points taken. If the
box is too small for the set velocity, the probe could 'jump over' the box and continue taking points. If
the box is too big, the scan could stop before all points are taken. The scanning velocity is set in the
Scan Velocity Dialog Box 793 .
Sampling
The method of sampling (taking touch points) when performing a scan.
Default - select this to use the current values.
Distance - select this to sample data points at intervals of distance, measured in the current units.
Type in the measurement for the interval in the associated field. This option sets the CMM variable
SMTD to 2 and SINT to the measurement you have typed in (converted to mm). (The drop-down list to
the right of the Distance field is not used.)
Time - select this to sample data points at time intervals. Type in the number of seconds for the interval
in the associated field. This option sets the CMM variable SMTD to 1 and PDRDINT to the number of
seconds you have typed in multiplied by 1000 (to convert it to ms).
See Also:
Analogue Probe Configuration Variables
Scanning
711
780
Main Toolbar
135
137.5.4 Scan Velocity Dialog Box

Scan Velocity Dialog Box
794
Purpose
Use the Scan Velocity dialog box to set the scanning velocity.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low velocity limits set in the CMM configuration file or I++
server, CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the velocity at the appropriate limit.
The Scan Velocity dialog box adds a Scan feed rate (FEDRAT/SCNVEL) command to your program
(Metris CMM driver variable SCVEL).
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Velocity from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section

Percentage, etc.
field.
CMM configuration file or I++ server and is not normally changed by the user.
in the Velocity field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file or I++ server
See Also:
Help.)
Scanning
780
Unknown Scanning
795
Main Toolbar
137.5.5 Scan Pause/Continue Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Scan Pause/Continue dialog box to pause the scan within a measuring block, to enable
commands such as clearance moves or probe changes to be executed. For example, this could be
useful when scanning a surface with a sudden bend in it. With the CMM off-line, select the nominal
surface then pick points on it. Click Apply. This adds a measure block to your program. In the part
program window 45 , select the appropriate PTMEAS command at the sudden bend where you want to
pause the scan. You can now use the Scan Pause/Continue dialog box to insert SCAN/PAUSE and
SCAN/CONTIN commands into the measure block, to allow you to select a different sensor. In this
example, you would insert the SNSLCT command between the SCAN/PAUSE command and the SCAN/
CONTIN command.
You might also want to pause a scan when scanning a feature such as a plane. If you create a grid of
points on the plane (using the Surface Measurement - Grid Options 388 ), you could use the SCAN/
PAUSE and SCAN/CONTIN commands between rows of the grid, and when moving over holes, etc., to
allow you to insert sensor moves into your program.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Pause/Continue from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
See Also:
Scanning
780
Main Toolbar
137.5.6 Scan Plane Dialog Box

Scan Plane Dialog Box
796
Purpose
Use the Scan Plane dialog box to specify the scanning plane. If you do not specify a scanning plane
here, the direction associated with the feature is used for the scan.
The Scan Plane dialog box adds a SCNPLN command to your program.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Plane from the Scan drop-down list in the Properties
section

Type - the type of plane to be used in the scan.
Vector - enter the vector of the plane in the Vector direction box.
Nominal reference - select this to use the vector of the nominal from the feature you select in the
Label field.
Actual reference - select this to use the vector of the actual from the feature you select in the Label
field.
Feature nominal - select this to use the vector of the feature being scanned.
Vector direction - if Vector type is selected, enter the values for the vector.
Label - the unique label for the reference feature, if you selected Nominal reference or Actual reference
in the Type field. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
See Also:
Scanning
780
Main Toolbar
137.5.7 Known Path Scan Dialog Box

Known Path Scan Dialog Box
Unknown Scanning
797
Purpose
Use the Known Path Scan dialog box to switch known path scanning on or off, and to specify the type of
scanning.
Known path scanning allows rapid programmed scanning along a given path (which does not necessarily
lie in a plane). In Automatic mode 40 , features with canned cycles (internal measuring routines) are
scanned automatically if scanning is enabled. In Program mode (or Automatic mode for features without
canned cycles), you provide a number of touch points (PTMEAS points) in a Measure feature (MEAS)
block. The PTMEAS points are used to calculate the path for the machine to follow. The algorithm uses
the directions of the PTMEAS points to account for probe radius offset along the path.
To use known path scanning:
Scan mode must be on. You can set scan mode on using the Scan On/Off dialog box
791
The program must be in Program mode, or it can be in Automatic mode for features which have
canned cycles.
If the feature does not have a canned cycle, there must be at least two touch points.
The Known Path Scan dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'KNOWNSCAN' command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Known Path from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section

Path
The type of scan.
Planar - specifies that the scan should follow the path defined by the touch points, but within a plane
defined by the start point and the current scan plane. The touch points are projected into the current
scanning plane (SCNPLN) defined on the Scan Plane dialog box 795 .
Curve - specifies that programmed scanning operations should follow the touch points (PTMEAS points)
specified, regardless of whether they lie in the current scanning plane.
Off - returns to unknown scanning, using the current scanning plane setting and the first PTMEAS point
to establish the scan plane. The scanning direction is determined by the first and second PTMEAS
points projected into the scanning plane. The setting for known path scanning will apply to all
subsequent programmed scans until you use this option to revert to unknown scanning.
See Also:
786
798
Scanning
780
Main Toolbar
137.5.8 Scan Deflection Dialog Box

Scan Deflection Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Scan Deflection dialog box to set the scan reference deflection, i.e. the deflection of an
analogue probe that the controller attempts to maintain during analogue scanning.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Deflection from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section

Scan deflection value - type in a value between the minimum and maximum values displayed on the
slider, or drag the slider to set the value. The values displayed on the slider are the minimum and
maximum configured values, as specified in the Metris CMM driver variable PDSRD or in the I++/DME
server if this is used. The values are displayed in the current linear units (as shown in the System
Settings dialog box 101 ).
See Also:
Scan Commands
137.5.9 Scan Acceleration Dialog Box

Scan Acceleration Dialog Box
Unknown Scanning
799
Purpose
Use the Scan Acceleration dialog box to set the scanning acceleration.
The Scan Acceleration dialog box adds a Set SCNACL acceleration (ACLRAT/SCNACL) command to
your program (Metris CMM driver variables XSKNACCM, YSKNACCM, ZSKNACCM).
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Acceleration from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section

Acceleration - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in an acceleration value.
Metres/Inches per minute - the units for the acceleration.
Percentage, etc.
low values in the CMM configuration file or I++ server. Type a value between 0 (low) and 1 (high) in
the Acceleration field.
High - select this to use the default high acceleration value (displayed in the Acceleration field) for
this machine type. The value is displayed in the Acceleration field when High is selected. It is
defined in the CMM configuration file or I++ server and is not normally changed by the user.
or I++ server and is not normally changed by the user.
Value - select this to set the acceleration to a specific value for all three CMM driver variables (i.e.
for XSKNACCM, YSKNACCM, ZSKNACCM) or for the value defined in the I++ server, if this is used.
Type the value in the Acceleration field and select the units for the acceleration.
See Also:
Scan Commands
791
800
137.5.10Arc Path Dialog Box

Arc Path Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Arc Path dialog box to define an arc scan path, or to modify an existing P( )=PATH/ARC
command that defines an arc scan path. Arc scan path commands are also added to your program by
CAMIO when you create a scan path using the Scan options available when inspecting certain features
(see Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature 370 ).
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Arc Path from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the Arc command, select Properties
In the part program window, double-click the Scan path arc command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the P( )=PATH/ARC command (if viewing your program as program
text)

Label - the unique label for the arc path. You can select any arc path available in this list, or type in a
new one.
Radius - the radius of the arc (from its centre).
Start angle - the angle at which the arc will start. This is the angle from the zero reference in the plane
of the arc.
Included angle - the sweep of the arc from its start position to its end position. This can be greater
than 360 (either positive or negative), to allow 'over scan' to avoid bad data when accelerating or
decelerating at the start and end of the scan.
Unknown Scanning
801
Centre - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the centre as either rectangular or polar co-ordinates.
The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A
and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Plane - the X, Y and Z fields specify the plane that the feature lies in. Select 'Other' if you wish to
specify and use a plane that is not one of the datum planes. I, j and k display the directional cosines of
the plane the feature lies in. Click Reverse to reverse the vector of the plane.
Zero reference - a vector which specifies the position of the zero angle, in the plane of the arc path.
Click Reverse to reverse the vector.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Part Program Window

Scanning
789
45
780
137.5.11Line Path Dialog Box

Line Path Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Line Path dialog box to define a linear scan path, or to modify an existing P( )=PATH/LINE
command that defines a linear scan path. Line scan path commands are also added to your program by
CAMIO when you create a scan path using the Scan options available when inspecting certain features
(see Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature 370 ).
Navigation
802
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Line Path from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the Line command, select Properties
In the part program window, double-click the Scan path line command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the P( )=PATH/LINE command (if viewing your program as program
text)

Label - the unique label for the line path. You can select any line path available in this list, or type in a
new one.
Rectangular/Polar - choose Rectangular or Polar to define the co-ordinates used. The X, Y, Z fields
(rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A and H are defined in
the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Start/End - the co-ordinates of the start and end points of the line.
Plane - the X, Y and Z fields specify the plane that the feature lies in. Select 'Other' if you wish to
specify and use a plane that is not one of the datum planes. I, j and k display the directional cosines of
the plane the feature lies in.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Part Program Window

Scanning
789
45
780
137.5.12Helical Path Dialog Box

Helical Path Dialog Box
Unknown Scanning
803
Purpose
Use the Helical Path dialog box to define a helical scan path, or to modify an existing P( )=PATH/
HELICAL command that defines a helical scan path. When using a helical path to scan a sphere or a
cone, CAMIO calculates the variation in the radius of the helix based on the nominal feature.
Helical scan path commands are also added to your program by CAMIO when you create a scan path
using the Scan options available when inspecting certain features (see Scan Options - Inspecting a
Feature 370 ).
Navigation
In the Teach Path view, right-click on the Helix command, select Properties
In the part program window, double-click the Scan path helix command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the P( )=PATH/HELICAL command (if viewing your program as
program text)
After customising the toolbars, click Scan Helix Path

Label - the unique label for the helical path. You can select any helical path available in this list, or
type in a new one.
Radius - the radius of the helix (from its centre).
Start angle - the angle at which the helix will start. This is the angle from the zero reference, in the
plane defined by the centre point and the axis of the helix.
Included angle - the sweep of the helix from its start position to its end position. This can define more
than one complete revolution of the helix, i.e. it can be greater than 360 (either positive or negative).
Centre - the position on the axis of the helix which determines the zero reference for the starting point of
the helix. Choose Rectangular or Polar to define the centre as either rectangular or polar co-ordinates.
The X, Y, Z, fields (rectangular) change to R, A, H (radius, angle, height) when Polar is selected. R, A
804
and H are defined in the current WKPLAN (work plane). A polar angle of -360 to +360 can be entered.
Axis - the direction of the helix. Click Reverse to reverse the direction of the helix.
Zero reference - a vector which specifies the position of the zero angle, in the plane specified by the
axis of the helix and its centre. Click Reverse to reverse the vector.
See Also:
Teach Path View
94
Part Program Window

Scanning
789
45
780
748
137.5.13Curve Path (Point Data) Dialog Box

Curve Path (Point Data) Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Curve Path (Point Data) dialog box to define a curve scan path, or to modify an existing P( )
=PATH/CURVE,x1,y1,z1,i1,j1,k1... command that defines a curve scan path.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Scan path curve command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text, but note that the same command is also used for the Curve Path (Feature
Reference) and Curve Path (Geometry Reference) dialog boxes), or double-click the P( )=PATH/
CURVE,x1,y1,z1,i1,j1,k1... command (if viewing your program as program text)
Unknown Scanning
805
Label - the unique label for the curve path. You can select any curve path available in this list, or type
in a new one.
Point - the co-ordinates of the highlighted point in the Path points list. Add a new point to the Path
points list by typing in the X, Y, Z co-ordinates, selecting a direction in the adjacent X, Y, Z or i, j, k
options, and clicking Add or Insert.
Add - adds a new point to the bottom of the Path points list, with the co-ordinates and direction as
specified in the X, Y, Z and i, j, k fields.
Insert - inserts a new point in the Path points list immediately above the highlighted point, with the coordinates and direction as specified in the X, Y, Z and i, j, k fields.
Modify - replaces the highlighted point with the values in the X, Y, Z and i, j, k fields.
Reverse - reverses the direction in the i, j, k fields. This does not change the highlighted point until you
click Modify.
Path points - lists the points on the curve path. The order of the points determines the scan path. You
can add more points to the list using the options in the Point box, and clicking Add or Insert.
Delete - deletes the highlighted point from the Path points list.
See Also:
Part Program Window
789
45
Scanning
137.5.14Curve Path (Feature Reference) Dialog Box

Curve Path (Feature Reference) Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Curve Path (Feature Reference) dialog box to modify the command that uses a nominal curve
(GCURVE) to define a scan path.
You can insert the PATH/CURVE,F( ) command using the Insert Command dialog box.
Navigation
descriptive text, but note that the same command is also used for the Curve Path (Point Data) and
Curve Path (Geometry Reference) dialog boxes), or double-click the P( )=PATH/CURVE,F( )
command (if viewing your program as program text)

806
in a new one.
Reference feature - a nominal curve (GCURVE) feature to use as the scan path.
See Also:
Part Program Window
789
201
45
Scanning
137.5.15Curve Path (Geometry Reference) Dialog Box

Curve Path (Geometry Reference) Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Curve Path (Geometry Reference) dialog box to modify the command that uses a piece of CAD
geometry to define a scan path.
You can insert the PATH/CURVE,G( ) command using the Insert Command dialog box.
Navigation
descriptive text, but note that the same command is also used for the Curve Path (Feature
Reference) and Curve Path (Point Data) dialog boxes), or double-click the P( )=PATH/CURVE,G( )
command (if viewing your program as program text)

in a new one.
Reference geometry - the CAD geometry to use as the scan path.
See Also:
Part Program Window
789
201
45
Scanning
137.5.16Unknown Path Dialog Box

Unknown Path Dialog Box
Unknown Scanning
807
Purpose
Use the Unknown Path dialog box to define an unknown scan path, or to modify an existing PATH/
UNKNOWN command that defines an unknown scan path.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Unknown Path from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
In the part program window, double-click the Scan path unknown command (if viewing your program
as descriptive text), or double-click the PATH/UNKNOWN command (if viewing your program as
program text)

Label - the unique label for the current scan path element. You can select any path element available
in this list, or type in a new one. Data relating to an existing path element is displayed in the dialog box.
Start - the start point for the scan.
Direction - the point towards which the scan moves from the start point.
End - the end point for the scan.
Plane - the scanning plane.
See Also:
Unknown Scanning
784
137.5.17Measure Path Dialog Box

Measure Path Dialog Box
808
Purpose
Use the Measure Path dialog box to edit or create PAMEAS commands in your part program. You can
edit or define the sequence of paths in a scan, and edit or define the parameters for each path. The
parameters available depend on the server type.
PAMEAS commands are added to your program by CAMIO when you create a scan path using the
Scan options available when inspecting certain features (see Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature 370 ).
To add a sequence of paths, select a path from the drop-down list and select the approach direction and
other parameters. To add the path to the Path list, click Add.
To edit a path, highlight the path in the Path list and change its parameters in the fields below. Then
click Modify.
Navigation
Select Scan from the main toolbar, click Scan Measure Path from the Scan drop-down list in the
Properties section
In the part program window, double-click the Scan measurement command (if viewing your program
as descriptive text), or double-click the PAMEAS command (if viewing your program as program
text)

Path - the unique label for the current scan path element. You can select any path element available in
this list, or type in a new one. If you are editing an existing PAMEAS command, this will then overwrite
the current name in the PAMEAS command in your program.
Approach direction - the approach to the scan. If None is selected, the approach is from the current
position to the start of the scan.
See Also:
Part Program Window
Scanning
45
780
Unknown Scanning
784
789
Unknown Scanning
809
137.6 Scan Teach Commands

137.6.1 Scan Teach Commands
Scan Teach Commands
Purpose
Use the Scan Teach options to teach an inspection of a feature using a scan, i.e. instead of picking
points on the selected feature, use the Scan Teach options to set the start and end points of the scan
and its direction. You can use an analogue or a digital probe.
If scan mode is on (using the Scan On/Off dialog box), unknown scanning 784 is used to inspect the
feature (if scan mode is not on, the feature is inspected by taking touch points). If known path scanning
786 is switched on when the Scan Teach options are used, CAMIO assumes unknown scanning for the
feature, then returns to known path scanning mode once the feature has been scanned.
When you have selected the scanning method, the Scan dialog box displays instructions on taking
touch points to determine the start, end and direction of the scan (the dialog box for a direct scan is
shown above). When you have taken the touches, the machine attempts to perform the scan (if you are
using the CMM Simulator, the Scan Data File Name dialog box 810 is displayed for you to select a file of
data for the scan). The machine scans the feature and theScan Filter dialog box 810 is then displayed,
where you can specify what percentage of the points taken by the scan you wish to keep. Then click
(Apply) to insert the corresponding commands into your part program.
Setting the scanning plane
If you select Direct or Closed scanning, you must have set the scanning plane for the feature by typing
in its nominal ijk vectors in the Grid window 76 . When CAMIO performs the scan, it uses this plane and
not any SCNPLN (scan plane) command defined elsewhere in the part program. Therefore, you must
make sure the nominal ijk vectors are correct. If you select Open scanning, you have to take three
touches, and these are used to determine the plane unless they lie in a straight line, in which case the
ijk vectors from the Grid window are used.
Navigation
Scan Teach is not available for all feature types. With the CMM on-line, select Scan from the main
toolbar, select an appropriate feature in the Features section, select the feature in the Teach Path,
click Teach in the Scan Tools section

Direct - take a start point for the scan, then take an end point. The scan will be executed from the start
point to the end point in this direction: start to end, taking the most direct path. So, for example, if
810
scanning a circle, the scan could be executed clockwise or anti-clockwise, depending on which is the
most direct path.
Closed - take a start point for the scan, then take a point close to the start point. The scan will start
and finish at the first point taken, and will be executed in this direction: start point to point close to start.
Open - take a start point for the scan, then take a point close to the start point. Finally, take an end
point. The scan will be executed from start point to end point in this direction: start point to point close
to start. So, if scanning a circle, an open scan defines whether the scan is executed clockwise or anticlockwise.
See Also:
Scan Plane Dialog Box
Scanning
791
795
780
Main Toolbar
137.6.2 Scan Data File Name Dialog Box

Scan Data File Name Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Scan Data File Name dialog box to select a file of data to be used when performing unknown
scanning using the Scan Teach commands.
Navigation
If using the CMM Simulator, displayed when you have taken touches for the scan type selected from
the Scan Teach commands
See Also:
Scanning
780
Scan Teach Commands
137.6.3 Scan Filter Dialog Box

Scan Filter Dialog Box
Unknown Scanning
811
Purpose
Use the Scan Filter dialog box to define what percentage of touches taken by the scan you wish to
keep.
Navigation
Displayed at the end of a scan when creating a part program

Points taken - the number of touches taken by the scan.
Filter - the percentage of touches that you wish to keep. The touches kept define the PTMEAS points
for the feature.
See Also:
Scanning
780
Scan Teach Commands
138 Laser Scanning

138.1 Laser Scanning
Laser Scanning
Laser scanning enables fast acquisition of points from a part without contact with the part. The point
cloud obtained can then be used for part inspection, or for reverse engineering using third-party software
for surface modelling. The laser scanner measures features in a single scan by using a laser stripe
scanner to give an accurate representation of the measured feature.
Warning:
When removing the laser from the machine, you must switch off the laser power before disconnecting
the scanner from the PH10. If not, damage to the scanner could result and CAMIO may hang the next
time you start it. If CAMIO hangs, restart the services: from the Start menu select Programs, Metris
Scan Server, Restart Communication. A Server Busy dialog box is displayed. If this is hidden behind
the CAMIO splash screen you can access it from the status bar. Right-click on its title and select the
Move option from the pop-up menu. Then drag the dialog box from behind the splash screen and click
Retry. CAMIO then starts.
Supported feature types
812
All features that can be scanned by the laser scanner can be scanned automatically, including circle,
cylinder, plane, cone, edge, round slot, square slot, surface, sphere, gap & flush, hexagonal slot, key
slot and welded nut. This means that the CMM can calculate where to start and end the scan from the
feature definition (i.e. the FEAT command). For best results, a feature should be scanned in a single
pass. If the feature can be scanned in one scan in one direction, and one dimension fits in the field of
view of the scanner, then there is no limitation on feature size. Circle features must be less than 50 mm
in diameter to fit in the field of view of the LC50, LC100 and XC scanners; they must be less than 15 mm
in diameter to fit in the field of view of the LC15 scanner.
If a feature does not fit in the field of view of the scanner, it can be scanned by multiple passes, then
extracted from the resulting point cloud. CAMIO calculates automatically where to scan around circles,
slots and spheres if they are larger than the field of view of the scanner.
For details of how to teach a scan, select an option:

Teaching a Laser Scan
819

Switching on the laser scanner
Switch on the laser scanner using the Power and Intensity dialog box 845 , or using a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'LASERPOWER' command in your part program, added using the Laser Power dialog box 857 . The
scanner needs to be warmed up for 45 minutes to an hour. It can be warmed up on the CMM, on a
warm-up station or, if you have an ACR3 tool changer with an optional plug for the scanner, it can be
plugged in and kept switched on there. For best results, allow an hour's warm-up. This should be taken
into account when first starting the scanner, or when using it with a tool changer.
Setting up the laser scanner profile
The first time you use a new laser scanner, you must set up its profile using the Laser Scanner Profile
dialog box 834 . This ensures that the laser scanner has its calibration data assigned to it. This
includes:
Calibration map (.scm file)
Tool offset file (.tof file)
Velocity compensation file (.bin file)
Activating the laser scanner profile
When a laser scanner profile is selected, the calibration data files that it needs are automatically
activated. Select the profile that you wish to activate using the Activate Profile dialog box 841 .
Updating the calibration map file
You should update the calibration map file periodically (see Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map
817 ). For laser scanners, the term 'calibration' refers to calibration of the scanner itself and the term
'qualification' refers to the calibration of the scanner at selected angles. As a general rule, update the
calibration map file once a fortnight and requalify the sensor angles every few days.
Measurement modes
CAMIO provides the functionality to teach features, and to measure features in manual mode and
automatic mode using the laser scanner.
When teaching features using a laser scanner, set the start and end positions for the scan then scan
the feature to generate a point cloud. When teaching a laser scan of a specific feature, the feature is
Laser Scanning
813
extracted for you from the point cloud using the SNSET/DEPTH setting and the laser tolerance setting
(you can change this setting using the Feature Measurement Overruns - Scanner Settings dialog box 849
). GSURF features do not provide a laser teach option. For details of scanning a surface see Inspecting
a Surface with a Laser Scanner 350 .
When a feature is measured in automatic mode, start and end points for the scan are automatically
calculated.
Scan density
The scan density depends on the speed of the scan and the distance between the scan lines. The
faster the scan, the lower the scan density. The greater the distance between the scan lines, the lower
the scan density (see Extracting Features from a Laser Scan 818 for details of the scan density for
different feature types). You can adjust the distance between scan lines using these methods:
Using the DME command, LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES (you can add this to your
program using the Distance Between Stripes dialog box 858 , or by setting the Line Spacing and
Point Spacing in the Properties Window 91 ). Any scan carried out after the command is executed
uses this distance. To stop using this command, add another
LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES command with a value of 0 to your part program. Any
subsequent scan then uses either the value in the Number of touches field or the value in the MEAS
command as described below.
Using the Number of touches field in the Teach Path view 94 (the larger the number of touches, the
more densely packed the scan lines). This method is no longer recommended.
Editing the number of points in the corresponding MEAS/OBJECT or MEAS/feature command (the
more points, the more densely packed the scan lines). This method is no longer recommended.
Teaching a laser scan
When teaching a laser scan of a specific feature, the feature is extracted for you from the point cloud
using the SNSET/DEPTH setting and the laser tolerance setting (you can change this setting using the
Scanner Settings dialog box, Feature Measurement Overruns tab page).
Saving scan data
You can save the point cloud data from a scan using the Save Point Cloud dialog box 872 from the Point
Cloud menu. You can also extract features from the point cloud using the appropriate Retrieve Feature
option from the Construct menu options in CAMIO.
All features scanned with the laser scanner (except GSURFs) can be saved using the Save option from
the Model menu, remembering that this saves changes made to the current CAD model file so that
constructed, measured and nominal features can no longer be identified as constructed, measured or
nominal features.
Scanning surfaces to generate point clouds or to extract features
When scanning a surface (GSURF), you can add a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERSAVEPOINTCLOUD'
command to your program (using the Save Point Cloud dialog box) to save the point cloud data to a file.
You can also extract features from the point cloud using the appropriate Retrieve Feature option. For
details, seeConstruction Using Retrieve 588 . You can filter the scan data from the GSURF and use CAD
compare to generate surface and curve features. For details, see Construction Using Nearest Points on
Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 .
To change the laser intensity during the GSURF scan, add the LASERINTENSITY DME command into a
block of surface (GSURF) scan commands (using the Laser Intensity dialog box 853 ).
See Also:
744
814
Model Menu
963
File Types
138.2 Laser Scanner Safety

Laser Scanner Safety
The light source for the laser probe has potential safety implications.
The output power of the laser probes is 5mW or less and the beam is in the visible part of the spectrum.
There is no Nominal Hazard Zone specified for the laser probes as the light beam does not exceed the
Maximum Exposure Limit at its point of focus.
When using a laser probe the light is scattered in all directions (diffuse radiation) from the surface being
measured so the operator will only be exposed to a very small amount of the original output.
On a bridge-style CMM it is unlikely that an operator could be exposed directly to the output beam but it
could be possible on a larger horizontal arm machine. As the output is visible light it is assumed that
the Natural Aversion Response (blinking and turning away) should be enough to prevent injury. The
output beam from the probe is swung through its field of view by a rotating mirror and so would only be
able to shine directly into an operator's eye for a short period. Even at the point of focus the exposure
level is below the Maximum Permissible Exposure.
Definitions
Class 2 (LC15, LC50, LC100 and XC50-LS Scanners)
Low risk to eyes. No risk to skin. No fire hazard.

Class 2 laser products are defined as those emitting
visible light for which the Natural Aversion Response
to bright light (including the blink reflex) prevents
retinal injury, including direct viewing of the laser
beam with optics that could concentrate the laser
output into the eye. These lasers do, however,
present a dazzle hazard.
Class 3R (XC50 Scanner)
Low risk to eyes. Low risk to skin. No fire hazard.

The risk of injury for direct viewing of a Class 3R laser
beam remains low, but efforts should be taken in the
use of these lasers to prevent direct eye exposure.
138.3 Preparing the Laser Scanner for Use

Preparing the Laser Scanner for Use
Step 1 - Set the Calibration Sphere Information
Determine the location of the master reset sphere. You must do this using a digital or analogue contact
probe, and the sphere must be of a material and accuracy appropriate for a contact probe. The location
Laser Scanning
815
of the master reset sphere is required for one of two purposes:

To establish the configured location of the sphere (as given in the Calibration tab page
Configuration dialog box from Program Configure in the CAMIO Options menu)
119
of the
To define a sphere feature in the part program to act as a primary calibration sphere
If satellite spheres are required for calibrating other sensors, whether contact or laser, the positions of
the satellite spheres should also be determined using a calibrated probe. This is true regardless of the
sensor type or the sphere type.
Now measure the laser calibration sphere, to determine its location. Again, if you are only using laser
probes, this can be done using a laser probe, but if you are using both laser and contact probes, this
must be done using a contact probe. The laser calibration sphere can then be used, together with the
calibrated diameter supplied with the sphere, to perform all laser calibration and qualification tasks.
Step 2 - Set the CMM Configuration Variable
From the CAMIO Options menu, select CMM Configure and select the Variables tab. In the Category
drop-down list, select Default. Scroll through the list of variables and check that the SERL variable is set
correctly. The recommended working value is the minimum achievable value for the CMM. This variable
allows the scanner to position itself with high-resolution accuracy at a low velocity after the normal
positioning move.
Step 3 - Switch on the Laser Power
Using the Power and Intensity dialog box 845 (which you can access from the Laser Scanner Profile
dialog box), switch on the laser scanner. The scanner needs to be warmed up for 45 minutes to an
hour. It can be warmed up on the CMM, on a warm-up station or, if you have an ACR3 tool changer with
an optional plug for the scanner, it can be plugged in and kept switched on there. For best results, allow
an hour's warm-up. This should be taken into account when first starting the scanner, or when using it
with a tool changer.
Step 4 - Create the Laser Scanner Profile
The first time you use a new Metris scanner, you must set up its profile using the Laser Scanner Profile
dialog box 834 . This ensures that the laser scanner has its calibration data assigned to it. This
includes:
Step 5 - Set the Laser Intensity, Exposure Time and Black & White Levels (Adjust to Light)
To get the best results from qualifications, calibrations and feature extractions, you need to set the right
laser intensity. For an analogue laser scanner you also need to set the black and white levels; and for a
digital laser scanner you need to set the exposure time. Ensure you use the calibration sphere supplied
with the laser scanner. For the optimum settings, position the laser scanner so that the calibration
sphere is detected as a clear arc in the middle of the 2D Preview view 826 . Then open the Adjust to Light
dialog box 842 and click Detect. This automatically sets both the laser intensity and the black & white
levels or exposure time to appropriate settings for measuring the sphere.
Step 6 - Activate and Save the Laser Scanner Profile
In the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box, highlight the laser scanner you wish to use and click Activate,
then click Save profile.
Scanning the Part
You will now have an activated calibration map, a tool offset, four qualifications and a velocity
compensation, to enable use of the laser scanner, and you can now scan the part. Use the appropriate
Adjust to Material dialog box (for an analogue or a digital laser scanner) to adjust the laser intensities
when measuring a new part.
816
If there are significant differences between the positions obtained from a contact probe and from a laser
scan, this may be because you calculated the tool offset and qualifications with a calibration sphere
position that was not accurate. Try recalculating the calibration sphere position with a contact probe
and then recalculate the tool offset and qualifications. After that, calculate the position of the sphere
using the laser scanner. This position should now be accurate, i.e. the same as the position obtained
using the contact probe. If you are not using a contact probe, then this is not required.
Updating the Calibration Map
For a step-by-step procedure see Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map
817
You should update the calibration map file when the sigma error for a given qualification exceeds a
certain value (for the LC100 scanner, it would be around 20 microns; for the cross-scanner and LC50
scanner, it would be around 15 microns, and for an LC15 scanner, around 6 microns, depending on the
machine). The maximum sigma error is defined on theQualification tab page 846 of the Scanner Settings
dialog box. At the end of each qualification, the sigma error from the qualification is displayed. You can
recalculate the calibration map using the Update Calibration Map dialog box in CAMIO or, if you want to
add the LASERCALIBRATIONUPDATE command to your part program, using the Calibration Update
dialog box 843 . The calibration update needs a qualification, and for this you need a calibration map (for
example as initially supplied by Nikon Metrology) and tool offset.
If you carry out a calibration update after running a program, CAMIO uses the last selected sensor for
the calibration update.
If you carry out the calibration update before selecting a sensor, CAMIO retrieves all the laser scanner
qualifications from the database and allows you to select one to use for the calibration update.
The calibration update will take a few minutes to scan the calibration sphere and then a few minutes to
calculate the new map. The new map is saved and activated as part of the update process. After a
calibration update you should recalculate the tool offset (which recalculates all the qualifications) and the
velocity compensation. If using the Calibration Update dialog box, you can select the tool offset
parameters as part of the calibration map update, and if you do, velocity compensation is also performed
automatically by CAMIO.
Warning:
Note that the laser scanner moves to each sensor position from its start position (i.e. the position it was
at before moving to the first sensor position), and it returns to the start position after qualifying each
sensor, so ensure that the start position will not result in any collisions.
See Also:
Adjust to Material Dialog Box (Analogue Laser Scanner)
854
Adjust to Material Dialog Box (Digital Laser Scanner)
138.4 Calibrating the Laser Scanner

Calibrating the Laser Scanner
Ensure that the laser scanner is ready for use, as described in Preparing the Laser Scanner for Use
814
1.
On the Activate Profile dialog box
2.
Position the laser scanner so that the calibration sphere is detected as a clear arc in the middle of
the 2D Preview view 826 . Ensure you use the calibration sphere supplied with the laser scanner.
Then open the Adjust to Light dialog box 842 and click Detect. This automatically sets the laser
intensity, and the black & white levels (for an analogue laser scanner) and the exposure time (for a
digital laser scanner) to appropriate settings for measuring the sphere.
841
, select the profile for the laser scanner and click Activate.
Laser Scanning
817
Calculate a tool offset for the laser probe, using the Tool Offset wizard 837 . The wizard leads you
through the procedure. Check in the 2D Preview view that the calibration sphere is displayed as a
clear arc with no part of the support displayed.
The tool offset wizard allows you to specify which sphere to use. This can either be a master
sphere or, if this is of a material suitable only for a contact probe, a satellite sphere of a material
appropriate for a laser probe.
The tool offset wizard also creates four qualifications in the database for the four orientations used
in the tool offset calculation. At the end of each qualification, the sigma error from the qualification
is displayed. For the LC100 scanner, the error should not exceed 20 microns. For the crossscanner and LC50 scanner, the error should not exceed 15 microns. For an LC15 scanner, the
sigma error should not exceed 6 microns.
If the sigma error is acceptable, continue with step 4.
If the sigma error is too great, check that the laser intensity, black & white levels or exposure time,
and calibration sphere information are all correct, and run the tool offset wizard again. If the errors
are still too great, continue the calibration process as described below, completing a calibration
map update using the Update Calibration Map dialog box, then start again with the tool offset
wizard.
.
3.
Calculate the velocity compensation, using the Velocity Compensation dialog box
4.
Update the calibration map, using the Update Calibration Map dialog box. The calibration update will
take a few minutes to scan the calibration sphere and then a few minutes to calculate the new map.
The new map is saved and activated as part of the update process.
5.
Recalculate the tool offset (which recalculates all the qualifications) and the velocity compensation.
839
Warning:
Note that the laser scanner moves to each sensor position from its start position (i.e. the position it was
at before moving to the first sensor position), and it returns to the start position after qualifying each
sensor, so ensure that the start position will not result in any collisions.
138.5 Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map

Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map
A calibration map file is supplied with the laser scanner. The calibration map is used to map the image
obtained by the camera in the scanner to a 3D image. You should carry out a calibration update of this
map file when you start to get high sigma errors when qualifying the laser scanner angles. The
maximum sigma error is defined on the Qualification tab page 846 of the Scanner Settings dialog box. At
the end of each qualification, the sigma error from the qualification is displayed.
To update the calibration map, use the Calibration Map Update dialog box 843 from the Laser
Initialisation section on the Machine tab. This adds a LASERCALIBRATIONUPDATE command to your
part program.
Carry out the update as follows:
1.
Ensure that you have at least one laser sensor qualification (calibration) present. Without this the
location of the sensor on the machine is not known, and the scanner cannot move appropriately. If
there are no qualifications, create a new sensor using the New Laser Sensor dialog box 736 and
calibrate it using the Calibrate Sensor dialog box 728 .
2.
On the Calibration Update dialog box, ensure that the Perform auto detect intensity before
measurement box is checked. Check the Tool offset box and select a further three sensors if you
818
want a tool offset calculation to be performed. After the tool offset, CAMIO automatically performs a
velocity compensation procedure to determine the value to apply for velocity compensation when
laser scanning.
3.
Select the sphere to be used for the update. For calibration update, any sphere can be used, not
just the calibration sphere defined on the Calibration tab page of the Configuration dialog box.
4.
Select the program mode and click Ok.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
Sensor Commands
138.6 Extracting Features from a Laser Scan

Extracting Features from a Laser Scan
Laser tolerance for feature extraction
A low laser tolerance value causes the feature extraction algorithm to be slower but more precise. A
high laser tolerance value is quicker - it places a larger theoretical circle around the edge points of the
feature to be extracted from the point cloud, so that the feature extraction algorithm encounters the edge
points sooner than if there were a lower laser tolerance with a smaller circle around the points, but this is
less precise than using a low laser tolerance. The tolerance is set using the Default feature extraction
tolerance option on the Scanner Settings dialog box, Feature Measurement Overruns tab page 849 , or
overridden using the LASERTOLERANCE DME command which you can add to your program using the
Tolerance for Feature Extraction dialog box 858 . The units are the current units from the System
Settings dialog box 101 . Suitable tolerance values are 0.1 mm, 50 microns or 25 microns, depending on
the accuracy of the CMM and the scanners. A LASERTOLERANCE value of 25 microns and a short
distance between scan lines (i.e. a high scan density) generally give the best accuracy and
repeatability. You can adjust the distance between scan lines using these methods:
Using the DME command, LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES (you can add this to your
program using the Distance Between Stripes dialog box 858 , or by setting the Line Spacing and
Point Spacing in the Properties window 91 ). Any scan carried out after the command is executed
uses this distance. To stop using this command, add another
LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES command with a value of 0 to your part program. Any
subsequent scan then uses either the value in the Number of touches field or the value in the MEAS
command as described below.
Using the Number of touches field in the Teach Path view 94 (the larger the number of touches, the
more densely packed the scan lines). This method is no longer recommended.
Editing the number of points in the corresponding MEAS/OBJECT or MEAS/feature command (the
more points, the more densely packed the scan lines). This method is no longer recommended.
Scanning surfaces to generate point clouds or to extract features
To save the point cloud data to a file when scanning a surface (GSURF), you can add a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'LASERSAVEPOINTCLOUD' command to your program using the Save Point Cloud dialog box.
You can also extract features from the point cloud using the appropriate Retrieve Feature option. For
details, see Construction Using Retrieve 588 . You can filter the scan data from the GSURF and use CAD
compare to generate surface and curve features. For details, see Construction Using Nearest Points on
Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 andConstruction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 .
To change the laser intensity during the GSURF scan, add the LASERINTENSITY DME command into a
block of surface (GSURF) scan commands, using the Laser Intensity dialog box 853 .
Extracting an object feature (gap & flush, hexagonal slot, key slot, welded nut, etc.) from the
Laser Scanning
819
scan data
When scanning object features, you can change the density of the scan by editing the corresponding
MEAS/OBJECT command. The more points, the more dense the scan, and therefore the smaller the
distance between the scan lines. You can also use the LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES
command as described above.
Extracting a gap feature from the scan data
When inspecting a gap feature, you need about 10-20 scan lines. The number of scan lines is
determined by the number of points in the corresponding MEAS/OBJECT command for the gap feature
(for details see Inspecting a Gap and Flush Feature 356 ). The more points there are, the more densely
packed the scan lines. If you use the minimum number of points for gap feature inspection, this
automatically generates enough scan lines to extract the gap feature. The distance between the lines
must be smaller than the gap you want to measure.
Extracting an edge feature from the scan data
If you use the minimum number of points for edge feature inspection, this automatically generates
enough scan lines to extract the edge feature. An edge is detected when there is an abrupt end of the
scan line.
When measuring an edge using the MEAS/EDGEPT command, the SNSET/SEARCH value is used as
the patch radius.
138.7 Teaching a Laser Scan

Follow the procedure below to teach a laser scan for all feature types except a GSURF. For details of
scanning a surface (GSURF), see Laser Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature 826 .
Use the appropriate Adjust to Material dialog box (for an analogue or a digital laser scanner) to adjust
the laser intensities when measuring a new part.
1.
Select the feature type in the Features section of the Laser toolbar.
2.
Click Teach in the Operations section:
The Laser Teach dialog box is displayed, and the Properties window and Grid window are updated
with the feature name and parameters.
820
3.
Position the laser where you want the scan to start. Check in the Laser 2D Preview view that the
laser line is in the field of view. If not, try moving the scanner closer to or further from the part until
the laser line is displayed.
4.
Press Manual Print (Button 9 - Teach Point) on the handbox. The position of the laser line is added
to the Laser Teach dialog box and to the Teach Path view.
5.
Position the laser for another point and press Manual Print (Button 9 - Teach Point) again.
6.
Click Scan then click OK in the CMM WARNING dialog box. The laser scanner scans from the
start position through the points you have specified. If the scanner finds a feature of the selected
type, this is extracted from the point cloud generated by the scan and displayed in the model
window. The Grid window is updated with the scanned feature parameters.
7.
Click
8.
You can now change the settings in the Teach Path view, if required. CAMIO sets the Line Spacing
and Point Spacing fields in the Properties window to values appropriate to the selected feature. Set
them to different values if needed (a smaller number indicates a higher density). Select the
in the Laser Teach dialog box.
operation mode in the Properties window. Click

(Apply). A FEAT (Define feature) command
and a MEAS (Measure) block are added to the part program for the feature.
9.
For Manual operation mode you are prompted to take the scan positions again using Manual Print
(Button 9 - Teach Point) on the handbox. The feature is then scanned again. For Auto mode, the
feature is scanned again using start and end positions calculated from the feature nominals given in
the FEAT (Define feature) command.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
854
856
811
Teach Path View
94
Laser 2D Preview View 826

Grid Window
40
76
Model Window
49
Properties Window
Laser Scanning
821
138.8 Object Features - Teaching a Laser Scan

Object Features - Teaching a Laser Scan
Follow the procedure below to teach a laser scan for the following feature types: gap & flush, corner,
hexagonal slot, key slot. For details of scanning circle, cylinder, plane, cone, edge, round slot, square
slot, surface and sphere features, see Teaching a Laser Scan 819 . For details of scanning a surface
(GSURF), see Laser Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature 826 .
. For some feature
1.
Select the feature type from the Laser toolbar

types you need to customise the toolbar 45 first.
2.
Click Teach in the Operations section of the toolbar. The Laser Teach dialog box is displayed, and
the Properties window and Grid window are updated with the feature name and parameters.
3.
Position the laser where you want the scan to start. Check in the Laser 2D Preview view that the
laser line is in the field of view. If not, try moving the scanner closer to or further from the part until
the laser line is displayed.
4.
Press Manual Print on the handbox. The position of the laser line is added to the Laser Teach
dialog box.
5.
Position the laser for another point and press Manual Print again. Continue doing this until you have
added all the positions you want the laser to scan.
6.
Click Scan then click OK in the CMM WARNING dialog box. The laser scanner scans from the
822
start position through the points you have specified. If the scanner finds a feature of the selected
type, this is extracted from the point cloud generated by the scan and displayed in the model
window. The Grid window is updated with the scanned feature parameters.
7.
Click
in the Laser Teach dialog box. A FEAT (Define feature) command and a MEAS
(Measure) block are added to the part program for the feature.
8.
For MAN operation mode, you are prompted to take the scan positions again using the Manual Print
button on the handbox. The feature is then scanned again. For AUTO mode, the feature is scanned
again using start and end positions calculated from the feature nominals given in the FEAT (Define
feature) command.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
Teach Path View
94

Grid Window
40
76
Model Window
138.9 Laser - Multiple Feature Extraction using Retrieve

Purpose
Laser Scanning
823
Using the Surface section of the Laser tab, multiple features can be extracted from the point cloud
generated by laser scanning a surface. To retrieve multiple features from a laser scan, follow these
steps.
1.
With a Laser scanner selected and a model open, select Laser from the main toolbar.
2.
Select an option from the Surface section (e.g. Area) and pick on the model to define to area to be
scanned, then click Apply.
3.
Make sure the insertion point

surface feature.
4.
Select a feature type to be retrieved in the Features section (not all feature types are available).
Pick the feature on the model. Repeat this process for all of the features you want to retrieve from
the surface. The features are added inside the measurement block in the Teach Path view.
5.
Select the surface feature in the Teach Path view and change any required details in the Properties
window (e.g. the program mode).
6.
Select the features to be extracted in the Teach Path view and change any required details in the
Properties window (e.g. to output a tolerance), then click Apply in the Inspect section.
7.
The surface will be scanned and the selected features will be automatically retrieved from the
resulting point cloud. Commands for inspecting the surface and extracting the features from the
point cloud are added to your part program, including the CONST/feature type,F( ),RETRIEVE
commands and any output commands you specified.
in the Teach Path view is inside the measurement block for the
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, use the Surface and Features sections
See Also:
Construction Types
Laser Scanning
Model Window
Laser Surface
Main Toolbar
556
578
811
49
831
135
Properties Window
138.10Laser - Profile Reporting

Laser - Profile Reporting
824
Purpose
Using the Surface section of the Laser tab, the profile of a surface can be quickly generated with a
constant report. To generate a surface profile from a laser scan, follow these steps.
1.
With a Laser scanner selected and a model open, select Laser from the main toolbar.
2.
Select an option from the Surface section (e.g. Area) and pick on the model to define to area to be
scanned, then click Apply.
3.
Select the surface feature in the Teach Path view and change any required details in the Properties
window (e.g. the program mode).
Laser Scanning
825
4.
Make sure the insertion point

surface feature.
in the Teach Path view is inside the measurement block for the
5.
Create a grid of points on the model by clicking Points on a Grid from the Feature Tools drop-down
list in the Features section. Arrange the grid, build it and click Apply. The points are added inside
the measurement block in the Teach Path view and in the model window.
6.
Select the points in the Teach Path view and select a Profile of a Point tolerance in the Properties
window (you may need to create a tolerance first by selecting Profile of a Point in the Output section
of the main toolbar). Click Apply in the Inspect section.
7.
The surface will be scanned, the points will be automatically retrieved from the resulting point cloud
and the points will be output. Commands for inspecting the surface, extracting the points from the
point cloud and outputting them are added to your part program.
8.
Use the Constant Reporting window to view and modify your report.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, use the Surface and Features sections
See Also:
Laser Scanning
Model Window
Laser Surface
811
49
831
826
Main Toolbar
135
Properties Window
90
138.11Laser Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature

Laser Scanning a Surface (GSURF) Feature
A laser scan of a surface (GSURF) feature is used for one of two purposes, either to collect data from
the surface and save it as a point cloud for reverse engineering, or to scan a surface in which a number
of features lie and extract the features from the surface.
Use the appropriate Adjust to Material dialog box (for an analogue or a digital laser scanner) to adjust
the laser intensities when measuring a new part.
Scanning surface features
You can scan a surface feature using the Surface section from the Laser tab. For details, see Inspecting
a Surface with a Laser Scanner 350 . If you do not have a CAD model, i.e. you are manually scanning a
surface, then follow these steps:
.
1.
Select Surface from the Inspect toolbar
2.
Using the handbox, take at least two points on the surface using Manual Print (Button 9 - Teach
Point).
3.
Click
(Apply). A FEAT (Define feature) command and a MEAS (Measure) block are added to
the part program for the feature. The laser scanner scans the surface from the first point to the
second and so on.
272
Saving a point cloud

To save the point cloud from the scan, use the Save Point Cloud dialog box
872
Extracting features from a point cloud

To extract features from the scan, use the appropriate Retrieve Feature option. For details see
Construction Using Retrieve 588 .
See Also:
Laser Scanning
854
856
811
Model Window
138.12Laser 2D Preview View

Laser 2D Preview View
Laser Scanning
827
Purpose
The Laser 2D Preview view shows the field of view of the laser scanner from the selected camera on the
sensor. The view shows what the camera is detecting, so it displays the live image and the laser line if
these are in the field of view. This helps you when positioning the scanner, to ensure that the laser line
is correctly positioned. The optimal position for the image is positioned in the centre of the window
where the lines that divide the window into quadrants cross.
The colour of the image indicates the light saturation. A red line from the image indicates that too much
light is available to the camera:
828
The optimal light saturation is indicated in blue:
If there is too much light (indicated by an unbroken red line as shown above), the individual points cannot
be detected. You can change this value by adjusting the laser intensity setting using the Power and
Intensity dialog box 845 or the Laser Intensity dialog box 853 .
Adjusting the black and white or exposure time settings on the Adjust to Light dialog box
842
or on the
Laser Scanning
829
appropriate Adjust to Material dialog box (for an analogue or a digital laser scanner) also affects the
image in the 2D Preview view, which shows a filtered representation calculated from the black and white
image to indicate where the scanner camera can detect points.
The bar on the right of the field of view is a quality bar to indicate the quality of the laser stripe in the field
of view. The bar can be green, yellow or red. A green bar indicates that no points in the laser stripe are
in saturation, i.e. the quality is good. A red bar indicates that many points are in saturation, so that too
much light is available to the camera. The length of the bar is determined by the average intensity of the
points. An intensity of 254 (see Enable saturation filter below) fills the bar.
Navigation
View menu, Laser 2D option

More - click to toggle the display of the additional fields on and off.
Intensity - sets the laser intensity to determine how much light is available from the image. If there is
too much light (indicated by an unbroken red line in the 2D Preview view), the individual points cannot be
detected.
Buttons 1, 2, 3 - when using the cross-scanner, the three buttons allow you to switch the image in the
2D Preview view between the three laser stripe scanners that make up the cross-scanner.
Quality filter - each point in a point cloud has a quality value associated with it. If the quality value is
lower than this threshold, the point is filtered out of the point cloud.
Enable saturation filter - the saturation filter sets the extraction intensity. If checked, the extraction
intensity is set to 255. Otherwise it is set to 256. Each point has an intensity of 0-254 associated with
it. There is a correlation between the intensity and the quality of a point in that a point with a higher
intensity has a higher quality. So the greater the intensity the better, unless the intensity is 255 (i.e.
saturated) in which case the intensity may be too high and information may be lost (because the
intensity is unknown). The saturation filter can be set as follows:
256: saturated points are included in the point cloud
255 and below: saturated points are filtered out of the point cloud
Min signal strength - the threshold that must be exceeded by the signal to the camera, otherwise the
point is not detected. The usual value is 50 but when scanning shiny materials the peak may not reach
50 so a smaller value is recommended.
See Also:
138.13Laser Teach Dialog Box

Laser Teach Dialog Box
854
830
Purpose
Use the Laser Teach dialog box to determine the path for a laser scan, and to start the scan. Position
the laser where you want the scan to start. Check in the Laser 2D Preview view that the laser line is in
the field of view. If not, try moving the scanner closer to or further from the part until the laser line is
displayed.
Press Manual Print (Button 9 - Teach Point) on the handbox. The position of the laser line is added to
the Laser Teach dialog box.
Position the laser for another point and press Manual Print (Button 9 - Teach Point) again.
The initial values for the Line and Point spacing displayed in the Properties window 90 have been
calculated by CAMIO to give a reasonable scan density for feature extraction for the feature type
selected. If required, you can change the distance between the scan lines using these fields. The
smaller the number, the more densely packed the scan lines and points.
Navigation
On-line with a laser probe, select Laser from the main toolbar, click a feature type that can be
scanned with a laser probe in the Features section, click Teach in the Operations section

Start - move the laser to the start position. Click the start button to set the laser scan start position to
the current position of the laser.
End - move the laser to the end position. Click the End button to set the laser scan end position to the
current position of the laser.
Scan - click to start the laser scan. When the scan completes, an image of the area scanned is
displayed in the model window.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
819
811
Laser Scanning
831
138.14Laser Tab
138.14.1Laser Tab
Laser Tab
Purpose
The Laser menu allows you to measure the various features, set up parameters for using the laser
scanner, and define and output tolerances in your program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar

Inspect
Features
279
Move Tools
765
Surface
280
Operations
Output
852
831
615
Probes
367
Probe Check
281
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
138.14.2Surface
Surface
The Surface section is accessed from the Laser tab on the main toolbar, and contains the following
options:
Area - displays the Multi Pick Area dialog box
model, to cover an area of the model.
352
, where you can set up lines for the scan path on the
Line Path - displays the Multi Pick Line dialog box
317
, where you can set up lines for the scan path on
832
the model.
Grid - displays the Points on a Grid dialog box
CAD model.
388
, where you can set up scan lines from a grid over the
Curve Path - displays the Multi Pick Curve dialog box

generate a smooth curved path on the model.
354
, where you can set up points to be splined to
Select Geometry - displays the Select Geometry dialog box 366 , where you can choose one or more
faces on the CAD model, to specify the faces to be used when creating laser scan paths.
See Also:
138.14.3Output
Output
Purpose
Navigation
138.15Laser Commands
138.15.1Laser Commands
Laser Commands
Purpose
The Laser commands are grouped under different menus according to the tasks they perform:
The Laser Initialisation menu provides
access to tasks that are carried out
initially to set up the laser scanner.
This is accessed from the Machine
tab on the main toolbar.
Laser Scanning
833
The Laser Operations menu provides

access to tasks concerned with using
the laser scanner. The dialog boxes
accessed from this menu add
commands to your part program.
This is accessed from the Laser tab
on the main toolbar.
The Point Cloud menu provides

access to commands that allow you
to load, filter and save point cloud
data from laser scanning. This is
accessed from the Point Cloud tab on
the main toolbar.

833
Laser Operations
852
Point Cloud
867
See Also:
Laser Scanning
138.15.2Laser Initialisation Commands

138.15.2.1Laser Initialisation Commands
Laser Initialisation Commands
Purpose
Use the laser initialisation commands when setting up the laser scanner, or when updating the settings.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, use the Laser Initialisation section

834
Edit Laser Profile
834
Activate Laser Profile
Calibration Map Update Scanner Settings
841
Adjust to Light
842
846

See Also:
Laser Scanning
811

138.15.2.2Laser Scanner Profile Dialog Box
Laser Scanner Profile Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box to set up profiles for all your laser scanners, so that each laser
scanner has its calibration data assigned to it. This allows you to have multiple laser scanners defined
and ready for use, so that when a laser scanner is selected, the calibration data files that it needs are
automatically activated.
The calibration files that you can assign to each laser scanner are:
When you open the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box, the active profile is highlighted in the Profiles list
and can be edited using the Edit button.
Viewing the files assigned to a laser scanner
Highlight the name of a laser scanner in the Profiles list. If calibration files have been assigned to the
laser scanner, the filenames and locations are displayed in the fields below the Profiles list. A value of
******** in a field indicates that a file of that type has not yet been assigned to the selected laser scanner
Laser Scanning
835
profile.
Adding a new laser scanner to the list
If the laser scanner you require is not displayed in the Profiles list, click New to display the Laser Profile
Name dialog box, where you can create a new laser scanner name for a particular laser scanner type.
Setting up a new profile
To set up a new profile for a laser scanner, highlight the laser scanner name in the Profiles list. Select a
calibration map for the laser scanner using the Browse button and click Activate.
If tool offset information is not present in the calibration map, a message is displayed. You can then set
up the tool offset and velocity compensation for the laser scanner (see below).
To save the profile, ensure the laser scanner is highlighted in the Profiles list and click Save profile.
CAMIO creates a folder for the laser scanner by default in C:\LK\Appdata\MetrisData and copies its
assigned calibration map and any tool offset and velocity compensation files into the folder. The folder
name is the same as the laser profile name.
Setting up tool offset and velocity compensation data for the active profile
If tool offset information is not present in the calibration map, click Edit (this is only available for the
active profile). You can then click New in the Tool offset box to display the Tool Offset wizard, where
you can calculate a tool offset for the laser scanner. Click New in the Velocity compensation box to
display the Velocity Compensation dialog box where you can determine the value to apply for velocity
compensation for the laser scanner.
Saving the details
To save the details for a laser scanner, highlight the laser scanner in the Profiles list and click Save
profile. This only saves details for the highlighted laser scanner.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Laser Scanner Profiles in the Laser Initialisation
section

Profiles - lists the available laser scanner profiles. Highlight a profile in the list to display its associated
details in the fields below.
New - displays the Laser Profile Name dialog box, where you can create a new name for a laser
scanner profile.
Activate - activates the highlighted profile and displays messages if there is no tool offset information
associated with the profile.
Edit - for the active profile, click to enable the New buttons in the Tool offset and Velocity compensation
boxes.
Delete - click to delete the profile for the highlighted laser scanner. This deletes the folder of calibration
files assigned to the laser scanner.
Calibration map - the calibration map assigned to the highlighted laser scanner. Click Browse to
select the calibration map. If the calibration map does NOT contain tool offset information, a message is
displayed and you can create a tool offset for the laser scanner using the Tool Offset wizard.
Tool offset - the tool offset file for the laser scanner highlighted in the Profiles list. If the calibration map
contains tool offset information, the corresponding filename is displayed. Otherwise, to manually create
a tool offset for the active laser scanner, click Edit then New in the Tool offset box. The Tool Offset
wizard is displayed for you to create a tool offset file.
Velocity compensation - the velocity compensation for the laser scanner highlighted in the Profiles list.
To create a velocity compensation file for the laser scanner, click Edit then New in the Velocity
836
compensation box. The Velocity Compensation dialog box is displayed for you to create a velocity
compensation file.
Power and intensity - displays the Power and Intensity dialog box, where you can switch on the laser
scanner and set the laser intensity.
Adjust to light - displays the Adjust to Light dialog box, where you can adjust the image in the field of
view of the laser scanner cameras, to obtain good data when scanning.
Save - click to save the profile for the laser scanner highlighted in the Profiles list. This only saves
details for the highlighted laser scanner. CAMIO creates a folder for the laser scanner by default in C:
\LK\Appdata\MetrisData and copies its assigned calibration map and any tool offset and velocity
compensation file into the folder. The folder name is the same as the laser profile name.
Close - click to close the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box. Details of new or changed laser scanner
profiles not saved by clicking Close. They are only retained if you have clicked Save profile for each new
or changed profile.
See Also:
Laser Profile Name Dialog Box
Tool Offset Wizard
836
837
Velocity Compensation Dialog Box

Power and Intensity Dialog Box
839
845

138.15.2.3Laser Profile Name Dialog Box
Laser Profile Name Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Laser Profile Name dialog box to create a name for a laser scanner. The name you type in in
the Label field is appended to the scanner type and added to the list of profiles on the Laser Scanner
Profile dialog box.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Edit Laser Profile from the Laser Initialisation section,
click New

Scanner type - select a laser scanner type from the drop-down list. This is used as the first part of the
laser scanner name.
Label - type in a name for the selected laser scanner type. This is appended to the laser scanner type
Laser Scanning
837
and used as the scanner name in the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box.
See Also:
834
138.15.2.4Tool Offset Wizard

138.15.2.4.1 Tool Offset Wizard
Tool Offset Wizard
Purpose
Use the Tool Offset wizard to calculate a tool offset that is used when qualifying (calibrating) the laser
scanner angles. The tool offset is the distance from the focal point of the scanner to the attachment of
the scanner at the autojoint.
You should calculate the tool offset if you change the probe head but retain the scanner, and you should
also calculate it when updating the laser scanner calibration map 817 .
All existing laser sensors (SNSDEF/LASER) in your part program are listed. Four sensors are required
for the calibration, so select these by clicking them to highlight them in the list. The tool offset process
calibrates the sensors if they are uncalibrated, and recalibrates them if they are already calibrated.
To add sensors to the list, click New Sensor. The New Laser Sensor dialog box 736 is displayed for you
to define a new laser sensor. The data in the New Laser Sensor dialog box is entered by CAMIO from
the values specified on the Default Orientation tab page of the Scanner Settings dialog box. That is, the
New Laser Sensor dialog box is populated with the next unused sensor from the Default Orientation tab
page.
838
The tool offset wizard allows you to specify which sphere to use. This can either be a master sphere or,
if this is of a material suitable only for a contact probe, a satellite sphere of a material appropriate for a
laser probe.
When you have selected four sensors and a sphere, the Next button is ungreyed. Click Next to display
the Safe Position page 838 of this tool offset wizard.
When you have completed the tool offset wizard, CAMIO creates a tool offset (.tof) file for the laser
scanner and saves it by default in C:\LK\Appdata\MetrisData.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Edit Laser Scanner in the Laser Initialisation section,
in the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box click Power and intensity and switch on the laser power, in
the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box highlight the active laser scanner for which you wish to create a
tool offset, click Edit, in the Tool offset box click New

Sensor selection - lists the sensor selected for the calibration.
New sensor - click to display the New Laser Sensor dialog box where you can select or define a sensor
to add to the list.
Perform autodetect intensity before measurement - if checked, the black and white and exposure
time reference values from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used but the intensity value is adjusted to
suit the current operation. Otherwise, the black, white, exposure time and intensity reference values
from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used. After the measurement the intensity that was active before
the measurement is restored.
Use existing tool offset for initial positions - if checked, CAMIO will use the existing tool offset file to
calculate the four initial positions used during the tool offset procedure. CAMIO will then move the
machine to each of these four positions and you to confirm that they are OK before performing the
automatic tool offset procedure. If the box is unchecked then CAMIO will ignore any existing tool offset
file and will require you to manually drive the machine to each of the four initial positions before
performing the automatic tool offset procedure.
Sphere - specify the sphere to use for tool offset. This can either be a master sphere or, if this is of a
material suitable only for a contact probe, a satellite sphere of a material appropriate for a laser probe.
Select Nominal to use sphere nominals, Actual to use sphere actuals for a satellite sphere or Master to
use the master reset sphere. Select the sphere in the drop-down list. To define a new calibration
sphere, click New to display the Sphere Feature dialog box 541 .
See Also:
Default Orientation - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
848

138.15.2.4.2 Safe Position - Tool Offset Wizard
Safe Position - Tool Offset Wizard
Laser Scanning
839
Purpose
The tool offset wizard takes you through the process for manually calculating the tool offset used in
qualifying (calibrating) the laser scanner angles. The Safe Position dialog box shown here is displayed
when you click Next in the Tool Offset dialog box 837 , having selected four sensor angles and a sphere to
use in calculating the tool offset. Move the scanner to a safe position and click Next. The CMM
WARNING - Ready for Probe Head index move dialog box is displayed. Click OK. The probe head then
changes orientation to the first of the laser scanner angles listed in the Tool Offset dialog box, and the
Initial Positions page of the wizard is displayed:
Move the laser scanner over the reset sphere on the CMM table, so that the 2D preview view 826 shows a
stripe on the sphere for each camera. Click the Get position button. Repeat this process for each of the
four laser scanner angles. The Next button is then available. Click it to display the Tool Offset page of
the wizard:
Click Start to begin the tool offset calculation. The scanner scans the sphere at each scanner angle and
calculates the tool offset. When you have completed the tool offset wizard, CAMIO creates a tool offset
(.tof) file for the laser scanner and saves it by default in C:\LK\Appdata\MetrisData.
See Also:
Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration 817
138.15.3Velocity Compensation Dialog Box

840
Purpose
Use the Velocity Compensation dialog box to determine the value to apply for velocity compensation
when laser scanning. During a continuous scan, for example when scanning a surface (GSURF) feature,
the laser scan line is not normal to the axis of motion but is skewed. Velocity compensation applies a
correction for this error.
You should calculate the velocity compensation when you update the calibration map. For details of
how to update the map, see Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map 817 .
When you have completed the velocity compensation calculation, CAMIO creates a velocity
compensation (.bin) file for the laser scanner and saves it by default in C:\LK\Appdata\MetrisData.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Edit Laser Profile in the Laser Initialisation section,
highlight the laser scanner for which you wish to calculate velocity compensation, click Edit, in the
Velocity compensation box click New

Sphere - specify the sphere to use for velocity compensation. This can either be a master sphere or, if
this is of a material suitable only for a contact probe, a satellite sphere of a material appropriate for a
laser probe. Select Nominal to use sphere nominals, Actual to use sphere actuals for a satellite sphere
or Master to use the master reset sphere. Select the sphere in the drop-down list. To define a new
calibration sphere, click New to display the Sphere Feature dialog box 541 . Information is displayed
about the calibration sphere that is scanned when calculating the velocity compensation.
Laser Scanning
841
Calculate - click to start the velocity compensation process. To calculate the velocity compensation,
the laser performs a fast scan and then a slow scan of the calibration sphere for each of its cameras i.e.
for the cross-scanner, it performs three fast and three slow scans.
Velocity information - displays information on the scanning process and the error margin. If the sigma
error from the velocity compensation is less than or near the sigma error from the qualifications, the
velocity compensation result is good.
See Also:
Qualification - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
Laser Scanning
846
811
833
138.15.4Activate Profile Dialog Box

Activate Profile Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Activate Profile dialog box to activate a laser scanner profile, for example when changing laser
scanners. Highlight the laser scanner you wish to activate in the Profiles list. The calibration map
assigned to the laser scanner is displayed in the Calibration map field. If you wish to assign a different
calibration map to the laser scanner, use the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box.
If you wish to add a command to your part program to select and activate a calibration map, use the
Activate Calibration Map dialog box.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Activate Laser Profile in the Laser Initialisation section
842

Profiles - lists the available laser sensor profiles, created using the Laser Scanner Profile dialog box.
Calibration map - the calibration map assigned to the highlighted laser scanner.
Activate - click to activate the highlighted laser scanner profile. A message is displayed confirming
successful activation.
See Also:
834
138.15.5Adjust to Light Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Adjust to Light dialog box to adjust the image in the field of view of the laser scanner cameras,
to obtain good data when scanning. A narrow line in the black and white window improves the detection
of points in the point cloud. You can check the Colour box to display the image in colour, and this can
help to show where white areas occur that should be reduced to improve the detection of points.
The changes you make are reflected in the Laser 2D Preview view and the Reference settings are used
for calibration. All subsequent intensity settings are then relative to these Reference settings.
For digital laser scanners, the options on this dialog box are as shown here:
Laser Scanning
843
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Adjust to Light in the Laser Initialisation section
click Adjust to light
Select Laser from the main toolbar, select Adjust to Light from the Operations drop-down list in the
Operations section

Black/White/Intensity - adjust the values in these boxes to alter the image in the Adjust to Light
window. Laser points with an associated value below the black value or above the white value are
ignored. Only points that lie between the two values are detected.
Exposure time - determines the 'rolling shutter width' used by the digital laser scanner. This controls
how much laser light is collected for each image. Generally, an increase in the exposure time requires a
reduction in the intensity, and vice versa. An exposure time of 1 sets the rolling shutter width to 1, 2
sets it to 2 and so on. The wider the shutter width, the more light is collected.
Buttons 1, 2, 3 - when using the cross-scanner, the three buttons allow you to switch the image in the
Adjust to Light window between the three laser stripe scanners that make up the cross-scanner.
Colour - if checked, shows the image in the Adjust to Light window in colour. This can help to show
where white areas occur that should be reduced to improve the detection of points.
Apply/Restore - click Apply to set the Reference fields to be the same as the values in the Black,
White, Exposure time and Intensity fields. The window can take a little while to refresh when you have
clicked Apply. The Apply button then changes to a Restore button which you can click to undo your
changes to the Reference fields.
Detect - click to automatically set the correct black, white, exposure time and intensity values for the
material that the laser scanner is currently directed at. These values are then used until you change
them.
Reference black/white/exposure time/intensity - the values in these fields are used in calibration,
unless overridden during the calibration. You can alter these values by changing the values in the Black,
White, Exposure time and Intensity fields then clicking Apply. The reference values are then set to the
values in the Black, White, Exposure time and Intensity fields. All subsequent intensity settings are
then relative to the Reference setting.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
138.15.6Calibration Update Dialog Box

856
854
844
Purpose
Use the Calibration Update dialog box to perform a calibration update of the laser scanner, adding a
CALIB/SENS,S( ),F( ),'LASERCALIBRATIONUPDATE' command to your part program. The calibration
update updates the calibration map file. The calibration map is used to map the image obtained by the
camera in the scanner to a 3D image. You should carry out a calibration update when you start to get
high sigma errors when qualifying the laser scanner angles (for details see Updating the Laser Scanner
Calibration Map 817 ). The maximum sigma error is defined on the Qualification tab page 846 of the
Scanner Settings dialog box. At the end of each qualification, the sigma error from the qualification is
displayed.
If you check the Tool offset box and select a further three sensors, a tool offset calculation is also
performed. The tool offset is used in qualifying (calibrating) the laser scanner angles. After the tool
offset, CAMIO performs a velocity compensation procedure to determine the value to apply for velocity
compensation when laser scanning. During a continuous scan, for example when scanning a surface
(GSURF) feature, the laser scan line is not normal to the axis of motion but is skewed. Velocity
compensation applies a correction for this error. If the Tool offset option is selected here, this dialog box
adds a CALIB/SENS,S(n),F( ),'LASERCALIBRATIONUPDATE',S(n2),S(n3),S(n4) command to your part
program, where n-n4 are four different laser sensors.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibration Map Update in the Laser Initialisation
section

Sensor label - type in a label for an existing sensor (defined using the New Laser Sensor dialog box), or
select one from the drop-down list.
Tool offset - if checked, a tool offset calculation is performed using the sensors selected in the Sensor
label fields.
Laser Scanning
845
Sensors for tool offset - if Tool offset is checked, select a further three sensors for the tool offset
calculation.
Sphere - the label for the calibration sphere. Type in a label for an existing sphere, or select one from
the drop-down list. If there is no existing sphere, click New to define a calibration sphere. For
calibration update, any sphere can be used, not just the calibration sphere defined on the Calibration tab
Nominal/Actual - select Nominal to use sphere nominals, and Actual to use sphere actuals (for a
satellite calibration sphere).
New - displays the Sphere Feature dialog box, where you can define a new calibration sphere.
Mode - displays the Program Mode dialog box, where you can select the measurement mode.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
736
811
852
Sphere Feature Dialog Box

Program Mode Dialog Box
541
747

138.15.7Power and Intensity Dialog Box

Power and Intensity Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Power and Intensity dialog box to set the intensity for the laser scanner and to switch the laser
scanner on or off. To do these activities when a program is running, use the Laser Intensity dialog box
and the Laser Power dialog box.
Warning:
the scanner from the PH10.
Navigation
846
click Power and Intensity

Laser intensity - set the laser intensity to determine how much light is available from the image. Set
the intensity to a value between 0 and 63 depending on the surface. For example, scanning a dark
surface requires a high intensity. If there is too much light (indicated by an unbroken red line in the 2D
preview view) the individual points cannot be detected.
Power - if checked, the scanner is switched on. Otherwise it is switched off. The scanner needs to be
warmed up for 45 minutes to an hour. It can be warmed up on the CMM, on a warm-up station or, if you
have an ACR3 tool changer with an optional plug for the scanner, it can be plugged in and kept switched
on there. For best results, allow an hour's warm-up. This should be taken into account when first
starting the scanner, or when using it with a tool changer.
See Also:
Laser Intensity Dialog Box
Laser Power Dialog Box
833
853
857
834
138.15.8Laser Scanner - Settings Dialog Box

138.15.8.1Laser Scanner - Settings Dialog Box
Laser Scanner - Settings Dialog Box

The Scanner Settings dialog box has a number of tab pages where you can define the settings for a
laser scanning probe.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Scanner Settings in the Laser Initialisation section
Select Laser from the menu bar, select Scanner Settings from the Operations drop-down list in the
Operations section
Select the options below for information on each tab page:

Qualification
846
Default Orientation
848
Feature Measurement Overruns
849
See Also:
138.15.8.2Qualification - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
Qualification - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
Laser Scanning
847
Purpose
Use the Qualification tab page to define parameters used when calibrating the laser scanner angles as
part of the tool offset calculation procedure (see Preparing the Laser Scanner for Use 814 ).
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, select Scanner Settings in the Laser Initialisation section,
select the Qualification tab page
Select Laser from the main toolbar, select Scanner Settings from the Operations drop-down list in
the Operations section, select the Qualification tab page

Number of shots - the 2D preview view is divided into four quadrants. This value is the number of
camera shots on the qualification (calibration) sphere for each quadrant in the field of view.
Qualifications carried out as part of the tool offset procedure are performed by taking a number of
individual shots, not by continuous scanning. (When selecting a laser sensor that has not been
qualified, qualification is performed by continuous scanning of the qualification sphere, three times per
laser.)
Average accuracy threshold - a stripe filter to exclude laser stripes with noise. For example, if set to
3, the stripes with a sigma value greater than 3 times the average sigma value are filtered out. Leave
this threshold set at the default value.
Percentage threshold - a stripe filter to exclude laser stripes with noise. A lower value means the
laser scan takes longer. If set to 90, for example, the best 90% of all laser stripes are included in the
848
qualification, i.e. those with the least noise, and the noisiest 10% of stripes are filtered out. Type in a
value from 5 to 100. A value of 5 gives the minimum number of points required to calculate the sphere
when calibrating.
Maximum sigma - the maximum sigma error above which the qualification is considered to be in error
when you calibrate the laser sensor angles. At the end of each qualification, the sigma error from the
qualification is displayed.
See Also:
833

138.15.8.3Default Orientation - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
Default Orientation - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Default Orientation tab page to specify the default scanner angles to be used when manually
determining the tool offset for the laser scanner. The tool offset is the distance from the focal point of the
scanner to the attachment of the scanner at the autojoint. It is used when qualifying (calibrating) the
laser scanner angles. The angles you enter here are displayed in the New Laser Sensor dialog box 736
when adding sensors to the Sensor selection list on the Tool Offset wizard 837 .
The picture shows typical angles for a right arm CMM. Typical values for a bridge CMM might be:
45,90
45,-90
Laser Scanning
849
0,0
0,180
Navigation
select the Default Orientation tab page
the Operations section, select the Default Orientation tab page

Tool offset fitting - four A and B angles for the calibration of the laser scanner. If you are adding new
sensors to the Sensor selection list in the Tool Offset wizard, the sensors listed on this Default
Orientation tab page are used to populate the New Laser Sensor dialog box.
See Also:
138.15.8.4Feature Measurement Overruns - Scanner Settings Dialog Box
850
Purpose
Use the Overruns tab page to define overrun constants, used to calculate the scan path for automatic
measurement of features. For example, if a circle is measured, the scan will start at a distance from the
edge of the circle determined using the Circle start value, and end at the distance determined using the
Circle end value.
The values are in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog box.
Navigation
select the Feature Measurement Overruns tab page
the Operations section, select the Feature Measurement Overruns tab page

Circle start/Circle end - values used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a
circle. The scan will start at a distance from the centre of the circle given by the radius plus Circle start
value, and end at a distance given by the radius plus the Circle end value.
Sphere - a value used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a sphere. The scan
Laser Scanning
851
will start and end at a distance from the centre given by the radius plus this value.
Cylinder - a value used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a cylinder. The scan
will start at a distance above the start of the cylinder given by this value and end at a distance below the
end of the cylinder given by this value. The scan is around the nominal position of the cylinder.
Cone - the length of the scan when inspecting a cone. The scan is along the nominal position of the
cone.
Edge - the length of the scan when inspecting an edge.
Slot start/Slot end - values used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a slot. The
scan will start at a distance from the edge of the slot given by the Slot start value, and end at the
distance from the edge given by the Slot end value.
Hexagonal hole start/Hexagonal hole end - values used to calculate the start and end of the scan
when inspecting a hexagonal hole. The scan will start at a distance from the edge of the hexagonal hole
given by the Hexagonal hole start value, and end at the distance from the edge given by the Hexagonal
hole end value.
Key slot start/Key slot end - values used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a
key slot. The key slot is defined by two circles. The scan will start at a distance from the centre of the
first circle given by the radius plus the Key slot start value, and end at the distance from the centre of
the second circle given by the radius plus the Key slot end value.
Plane and point - the length of the scan when inspecting a plane or point. The scan is around the
nominal position.
Welded nut start/Welded nut end - values used to calculate the start and end of the scan when
inspecting a welded nut.. The scan will start at a distance from the centre of the welded nut given by the
radius plus Welded nut start value, and end at a distance given by the radius plus the Welded nut end
value.
Christmas tree - a value used to calculate the start and end of the scan when inspecting a Christmas
tree (a type of threaded stud on a base). For an LC scanner, the Christmas tree is scanned three times
normal to the nominal (at the top, middle and bottom of the Christmas tree). For an XC scanner, the
Christmas tree is scanned twice, once in the axial direction and once normal to the nominal (at the
bottom). The scan at the bottom of the Christmas tree will start and end at a distance from the centre
given by the radius multiplied by this value, to measure the base plane.
Default feature extraction tolerance - the tolerance for the feature extraction algorithms for the laser
scanner. For details, see Laser Scanning 811 . The value set here is used unless you override it in your
part program by adding a LASERTOLERANCE command (using theTolerance for Feature Extraction
dialog box 858 ).
See Also:
833
138.16Select Qualification File Dialog Box

Select Qualification File Dialog Box
852
Purpose
Use the Select Qualification File dialog box to select a qualified (i.e. calibrated) scanner angle for the
laser scanner. The available qualifications are listed in the drop-down list.
Navigation
Displayed if no sensor is selected, and you click Calculate on the Velocity Compensation dialog
box, or you click Calibration update on the Update Calibration Map dialog box
See Also:
839
Update Calibration Map Dialog Box

138.17Laser Operations Menu

138.17.1Laser Operations Menu
Laser Scanning
853
Purpose
The Laser Operations menu options allow you to set various parameters for using the laser scanner.
These options add commands to the part program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, use the Operations section

Teach
Fly Mode
829
Adjust to Light
Mode
765
747
Laser Intensity
853
Adjust to Material 854

Adjust to Material 856
(analogue laser scanner) (digital laser scanner)
Laser Extract Tolerance
Laser Minimum Signal

Strength 861
Laser Quality Filter
Split Quality Point

Clouds 862
Scanner Settings
Power
842
846
859
Laser Calibration Map

860
857
Laser Stripe Distance

858
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Laser Scanning
811
Laser Commands
138.17.2Laser Intensity Dialog Box

Laser Intensity Dialog Box
858
Depth
744
854
Purpose
Use the Laser Intensity dialog box to set the intensity for the laser scanner.
The Laser Intensity dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERINTENSITY' command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, select Laser Intensity from the Operations drop-down list in the
Operations section

Detect - select this to set the correct laser intensity automatically for the part being inspected.
Set - select this to set the laser intensity using the Laser intensity field.
Laser intensity - set the laser intensity to a value between 0 and 63 depending on the surface. For
example, scanning a dark surface requires a high intensity. The value is relative to the active reference
intensity from the Adjust to Light dialog box. If the reference intensity has been set using the Adjust to
Material dialog box, the value is relative to that.
See Also:
852
842
854
138.17.3Adjust to Material Dialog Box (Analogue Laser Scanner)

Laser Scanning
855
Purpose
Use the Adjust to Material dialog box to adjust the laser intensities when measuring a new part, to
obtain good data when scanning. The changes you make are reflected in the Laser 2D Preview view.
These values are used when measuring. They are not used when performing qualifications or
calibrations. The values from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used for qualifications and calibrations.
The Adjust to Material dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERBLACKANDWHITE' command to
your program.
Navigation
Using an analogue laser scanner, select Laser from the main toolbar, click Adjust to Material from
the Operations drop-down list in the Operations section

Enable - if checked, the options for setting the black and white levels and laser intensity are available.
Otherwise the reference values set in the Adjust to Light dialog box are used.
Detect - select this option to automatically detect and set the correct black and white values and laser
intensity for the part being inspected. The values set using this option are used until you change them.
Set - select this option to type in the black and white values and the laser intensity in the fields below.
Black level/White level - adjust the values in these boxes to obtain good data when scanning. These
values are relative to the values set on the Adjust to Light dialog box. Laser points with an associated
value below the black value or above the white value are ignored. Only points that lie between the two
values are detected.
Intensity - adjust the value in this box to set the correct laser intensity for the part being inspected. Set
the laser intensity to a value between 0 and 63 depending on the surface. For example, scanning a dark
surface requires a high intensity. This value is relative to the value set on the Adjust to Light dialog box.
It is used as the relative intensity in any subsequent LASERINTENSITY commands.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
842
856
856
138.17.4Adjust to Material Dialog Box (Digital Laser Scanner)

Purpose
Use the Adjust to Material dialog box to adjust the laser intensities when measuring a new part, to
obtain good data when scanning. The changes you make are reflected in the Laser 2D Preview view.
These values are used when measuring. They are not used when performing qualifications or
calibrations. The values from the Adjust to Light dialog box are used for qualifications and calibrations.
The Adjust to Material dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERROLLINGSHUTTERWIDTH'
command to your program.
Navigation
Using a digital laser scanner, select Laser from the main toolbar, click Adjust to Material from the
Operations drop-down list in the Operations section

Exposure time
Determines the 'rolling shutter width' used by the laser scanner. This controls how much laser light is
collected for each image. Generally, an increase in the exposure time requires a reduction in the
intensity, and vice versa.
Detect - select this option to automatically detect and set the correct exposure time for the material that
the laser scanner is currently directed at.
Manual - select this option to type in the exposure time in the field below. An exposure time of 1 sets
the rolling shutter width to 1, 2 sets it to 2 and so on. The wider the shutter width, the more light is
collected.
Intensity
Determines the correct laser intensity for use in inspection. This value is used as the reference intensity
in any subsequent LASERINTENSITY commands. Generally, an increase in the exposure time requires
a reduction in the intensity, and vice versa.
Detect - select this option to automatically detect and set the correct intensity for the material that the
Laser Scanning
857
laser scanner is currently directed at. The intensity set using this option is used until you change it.
Automatic - select this option to automatically detect and set the correct intensity for the material that
the laser scanner is currently directed at. If you then direct the laser scanner at a different material, the
laser dynamically adjusts the intensity for that material.
Manual - select this option to type in the intensity in the field below. Set the laser intensity to a value
between 0 and 63 depending on the surface. For example, scanning a dark surface requires a high
intensity.
See Also:
854

Laser Scanning
842
811
138.17.5Laser Power Dialog Box

Laser Power Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Laser Power dialog box to switch the laser scanner on or off, for example when changing
scanners. The scanner needs to be warmed up for 45 minutes to an hour. It can be warmed up on the
CMM, on a warm-up station or, if you have an ACR3 tool changer with an optional plug for the scanner, it
can be plugged in and kept switched on there. For best results, allow an hour's warm-up. This should
be taken into account when first starting the scanner, or when using it with a tool changer.
The Laser Power dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERPOWER' command to your program.
Warning:
the scanner from the PH10.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Power in the Operations section
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
858
138.17.6Tolerance for Feature Extraction Dialog Box

Tolerance for Feature Extraction Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Tolerance for Feature Extraction dialog box to set the tolerance for the feature extraction
algorithms for the laser scanner. The tolerance is set in the current units, as shown in the System
Settings dialog box. This value overrides the default value set on the Scanner Settings dialog box,
Feature Measurement Overruns tab page.
The Tolerance for Feature Extraction dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERTOLERANCE'
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Laser Extract Tolerance from the Operations drop-down list
in the Operations section
See Also:
101

Laser Scanning
849
811
138.17.7Distance Between Stripes Dialog Box

Distance Between Stripes Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Distance Between Stripes dialog box to set the distance between stripes and points in a laser
scan. Any scan carried out after the command is executed uses this distance. The smaller the
distance, the more dense the stripes and the more points taken.
A value of 0 for the distance between the stripes means that the number of stripes depends on the
velocity of the scan: a faster speed results in fewer stripes. A value of 0 for the distance between points
Laser Scanning
859
means that CAMIO uses as high a density as achievable for the points.
The Distance Between Stripes dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Laser Stripe Distance in the Operations section

Distance between stripes - type in the distance between the stripes in the laser scan (in the current
units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box).
Distance between points - type in the distance between the points on a stripe in the laser scan.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
101
811
138.17.8Quality Filter Dialog Box

Quality Filter Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Quality Filter dialog box to set the extraction quality threshold and saturation filter for points
acquired in a laser scan.
The Quality Filter dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASEREXTRACTIONQUALITY' command to
your program.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Laser Quality Filter from the Operations drop-down list in
the Operations section

Quality filter - each point in a point cloud has a quality value associated with it. If the quality value is
lower than this threshold, the point is filtered out of the point cloud.
Enable saturation filter - the saturation filter sets the extraction intensity. If checked, the extraction
intensity is set to 255. Otherwise it is set to 256. Each point has an intensity of 0-254 associated with
860
it. There is a correlation between the intensity and the quality of a point in that a point with a higher
intensity has a higher quality. So the greater the intensity the better, unless the intensity is 255 (i.e.
saturated) in which case the intensity may be too high and information may be lost (because the
intensity is unknown). The saturation filter can be set as follows:
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
138.17.9Activate Calibration Map Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Activate Calibration Map dialog box to select and activate a calibration map for the laser sensor,
e.g. when changing scanners. This maps each point in the field of view of the scanner to a set of coordinates, i.e. it converts the image to a set of 3D positions. You should update the map yourself from
time to time, depending on how much the scanner is used. If errors seem to be increasing when
qualifying (calibrating) the laser scanner angles, then this indicates that you should update the
calibration map. For details of how to update the map, see Updating the Laser Scanner Calibration Map
817 .
The activated calibration map is used by CAMIO to determine which suffix to add when creating a new
laser sensor using the New Laser Sensor dialog box, and therefore which laser sensor model to display
The Activate Calibration Map dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERCALIBRATIONMAP'
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, select Laser Calibration Map from the Operations drop-down list
in the Operations section

Calibration map file name - type in the name of an existing calibration map file, or use the
button to browse for it.
OK - click to activate the selected calibration map. A message is displayed confirming successful
activation.
See Also:
736
Laser Scanning
861

Update Calibration Map Dialog Box
Laser Scanning
811
Model Window
Minimum Signal Strength Dialog Box

138.17.10
Minimum Signal Strength Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Minimum Signal Strength dialog box to set a threshold which must be exceeded by the value of
a local peak from the scanned surface to the laser scanner camera, or a point is not created.
The Minimum Signal Strength dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMINSIGNALSTRENGTH'
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Laser Minimum Signal Strength from the Operations dropdown list in the Operations section

Minimum signal strength - type in a value for the threshold that must be exceeded by the signal to the
camera, otherwise the point is not detected. The usual value is 50 but when scanning shiny materials
the peak may not reach 50 so a smaller value is recommended.
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
Laser Rack Power Dialog Box

138.17.11
Laser Rack Power Dialog Box
862
Purpose
Use the Laser Rack Power dialog box to switch the laser tool changer rack on or off. Switching the rack
on ensures the laser scanner does not change temperature when the scanner is being changed.
The Laser Rack Power dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERRACKPOWER' command to your
program.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Call external from the Call Routine section, select
Software, select LASERRACKPOWER from the Routine drop-down list, click the browse button
next to Arguments
See Also:
Laser Scanning
811
Split Quality Point Clouds Dialog Box

138.17.12
Split Quality Point Clouds Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Split Quality Point Clouds dialog box to switch on and off the generation of split quality point
clouds. Split quality point clouds are displayed in the model window in colours ranging from dark red to
light green, depending on the quality index of the individual points. They are used for diagnostic
purposes, as a visual check of the quality of the scan data, allowing you to identify areas of poor quality
within the cloud.
Each point in a point cloud has a quality value (index) associated with it, in the range 0 to 63, where 0
indicates a poor quality point and 63 indicates a high quality point. The quality is measured as the ratio
of the intensity to the scan line width for the point.
When enabled, any subsequent laser scan creates a point cloud subdivided into additional smaller point
clouds according to the point quality values, so that each subdivision only contains points with the same
quality index. Therefore it is possible that 63 subdivisions of the single point cloud are created. The
Laser Scanning
863
single point cloud is retained. Each subdivision is named by CAMIO using the main point cloud name
and a suffix of Qn where n is the quality value. For example, sur1_Q20 is a point cloud containing only
points with a quality value of 20.
These split quality point clouds are displayed in the model window in red or green according to their
quality values:
Low quality points (index 0 to 10)
Dark red (0) to light red (10)
Higher quality points (index 11 to 63)
Dark green (11) to bright green (63)
The Split Quality Point Clouds dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERSPLITQUALITY'

Warning:
Point clouds can only be split as they are collected, not retrospectively.
Navigation
Select Laser from the main toolbar, click Split Quality Point Clouds from the Operations drop-down
list in the Operations section
See Also:
Model Window
49
Grid Filter Dialog Box

138.17.13
Purpose
Use the Grid Filter dialog box to add a GEOALG command to your part program, containing the
LASERFILTERGRID command as a parameter, so that the scan data from the laser-scanned surface is
filtered when creating a target feature. Creating a GEOALG command with a laser filter command as a
parameter allows touch points to be saved in the database for the feature constructed from the filtered
scan data (see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and Construction
Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 ).
The Grid Filter dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERGRID',n,n,n command
to your program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the appropriate Fitting algorithm command (if viewing your
864
program as descriptive text), or double-click the GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,

DME,'LASERFILTERGRID' command (if viewing your program as program text)

X, Y, Z - specify the dimensions (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box) of a
cuboid which is applied to an area of the point cloud, filtering out all but the point nearest to the centre of
the cuboid, then filtering the next area of the point cloud, and so on.
See Also:
101
Point Cloud Menu
Curvature Dependent Filter Dialog Box

138.17.14
Purpose
Use the Curvature Dependent Filter dialog box to add a GEOALG command to your part program,
containing the LASERFILTERCURVATUREDEPENDENT command as a parameter, so that the scan
data from the laser-scanned surface is filtered when creating a target feature. Creating a GEOALG
command with a LASER filter command as a parameter allows touch points to be saved in the database
for the feature constructed from the filtered scan data (see Construction Using Nearest Points on
Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 andConstruction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 ).
The Curvature Dependent Filter dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,
DME,'LASERFILTERCURVATUREDEPENDENT',n,n,n,n command to your program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Fitting algorithm command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,
DME,'LASERFILTERCURVATUREDEPENDENT' command (if viewing your program as program
text)

Minimum - applies a grid to an area of high curvature, such that the distance between points must be at
least the specified value (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box). Points at a
Laser Scanning
865
distance less than this value, i.e. closer together, are filtered out. A lower value in this field ensures that
a greater number of points is retained.
Maximum - applies a grid to an area of low curvature, such that the distance between points must be at
least the specified value. Points at a distance less than this value are filtered out. A higher value in this
field ensures that a smaller number of points is retained.
Contrast - this value is applied to filter out points from areas of intermediate curvature. The higher the
contrast value, the fewer points are filtered out in areas with relatively small curvature. Usually the
contrast value is initially set at 50%. If this does not produce appropriate filtering, remove the filter and
increase it to 75%. Filtering at 75% will retain more points on areas that are not very curved.
Smallest detail - represents the size of the smallest detail in the point cloud to take into account when
filtering. If set to 0, the detail is determined automatically. To filter out noise, set this value to a larger
value than noisy areas of the point cloud.
See Also:
101
Filter Curvature Dependent Dialog Box 874

Scatter Filter Dialog Box

138.17.15
Purpose
Use the Scatter Filter dialog box to add a GEOALG command to your part program, containing the
LASERFILTERSCATTER command as a parameter, so that the scan data from the laser-scanned
surface is filtered when creating a target feature. Creating a GEOALG command with a LASER filter
command as a parameter allows touch points to be saved in the database for the feature constructed
from the filtered scan data (see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 ).
The Scatter Filter dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERSCATTER',n,n
Navigation
DME,'LASERFILTERSCATTER' command (if viewing your program as program text)

Range - the radius (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box) of a sphere
866
centred on a point in the point cloud. The number of points in the sphere is counted, and if this is less
than the value in the Near points field, the point that the sphere is centred on is considered to be a
scatter point and is filtered out.
Near points - the number of points that must be within the range of a particular point, or that point is
filtered out.
See Also:
Filter Scatter Dialog Box
101
875
Smoothing Filter Dialog Box

138.17.16
Purpose
Use the Smoothing Filter dialog box to add a GEOALG command to your part program, containing the
LASERFILTERSMOOTH command as a parameter, so that the scan data from the laser-scanned
surface is filtered when creating a target feature. Creating a GEOALG command with a LASER filter
command as a parameter allows touch points to be saved in the database for the feature constructed
from the filtered scan data (see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 ).
The Smoothing Filter dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERSMOOTH',n,n
Navigation
DME,'LASERFILTERSMOOTH' command (if viewing your program as program text)

Maximum deviation - the maximum distance (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings
dialog box) that a point can be moved towards the average position of its neighbours, to smooth the point
cloud.
Iterations - the number of times the smoothing algorithm is performed on the point cloud.
See Also:
Filter Smooth Dialog Box
101
880
Laser Scanning
867
Purge Filtered Points Dialog Box

138.17.17
Purpose
Use the Purge Filtered Points dialog box to add a GEOALG command to your part program, containing
the LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS command as a parameter. This discards all points that have been
filtered out of the point cloud obtained from a laser scan. The original point cloud is not saved. This
produces a smaller point cloud that is not filtered.
The Purge Filtered Points dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,
DME,'LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Call External in the Call Routine section, select
Software, select the LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS routine, double-click in the Arguments field
See Also:
Purge Points Dialog Box
888
139 Point Cloud Menu

139.1 Point Cloud Menu
Point Cloud Menu
868
Purpose
The Point Cloud menu allows you to load, filter and save point cloud data from laser scanning, and
retrieve features.
For information on how to delete point clouds that you have displayed in the model window, see Deleting
a Point Cloud from the Model Window 869 .
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar

Display
Import Export
868
Point Cloud Operations
868
869
Filters
Retrieve from Point Cloud Cad Compare
869
611
588
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Laser Scanning
139.2 Display
Display
The Display section is accessed from the Point Cloud tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
All - displays the Pointcloud Display dialog box
cloud data.
886
. Use this to enable or disable the display of point
Set Display - displays the Display Pointclouds dialog box . Use this to switch on or off the display of
individual point clouds in the model window.
139.3 Import Export

Import Export
The Import Export section is accessed from the Point Cloud tab on the main toolbar and contains the
following options:
Load - displays the Load Point Clouds dialog box
871
. Use this to retrieve files of point cloud data.
Save - displays the Save Point Clouds dialog box. Use this to save the point cloud from a laser scan to
a file of point cloud data, in the current co-ordinate system.
Point Cloud Menu
869
139.4 Point Cloud Operations

Point Cloud Operations
The Point Cloud Operations section is accessed from the Point Cloud tab on the main toolbar and
contains the following options:
Cut - displays the Cut Point Cloud dialog box
an elastic window.
877
. Use this to select and cut areas of point clouds using
Mesh - displays the Mesh Point Cloud dialog box 878 . Use this to apply a mesh to the point cloud, by
applying triangles between all points that are then used to create a surface effect.
Offset Mesh - displays the Offset Mesh dialog box 879 . Use this to offset a meshed point cloud a
specified distance along the meshed surface normal.
Smooth - displays the Filter Smooth dialog box 880 . Use this to perform point cloud smoothing by
specifying a maximum displacement that limits the distance a point can be moved towards the average
position of its neighbours, and a number of iterations to achieve the smoothing.
Assembly Match - displays the Assembly Match dialog box
aligning overlapping point clouds.
Merge - displays the Merge dialog box
into a reference point cloud.
883
882
. Use this to assemble a point cloud by
. Use this to merge separate point clouds from a laser scan
Subtract and Blend - displays the Subtract and Blend dialog box 885 . Use this to subtract selected
point clouds obtained from a laser scan from a reference surface. You can also blend the point clouds
to create a point cloud from points in the overlapping area between the selected point clouds.
139.5 Filters
Filters
The Filters section is accessed from the Point Cloud tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Grid Filter - displays the Filter Grid dialog box
obtained from a laser scan.
873
Use this to apply a grid filter to the point cloud
Curvature Dependent Filter - displays the Filter Curvature Dependent dialog box
apply a curvature filter to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan.
874
. Use this to
Scatter Filter - displays the Filter Scatter dialog box . Use this to apply a scatter filter to the point cloud
obtained from a laser scan.
139.6 Deleting a Point Cloud from the Model Window

Deleting a Point Cloud from the Model Window
1.
Right-click in the model window and select Model Explorer from the pop-up menu.
2.
In the Model Explorer dialog box, double-click System layers to display the list of layers in the lefthand pane:
870
3.
Click Point clouds to display the list of point clouds in the right-hand pane:
4.
Right-click on the point cloud you wish to delete and select Delete from the pop-up menu:
Point Cloud Menu
871
The point cloud is deleted from the list and from the model window.
See Also:
Model Window
73
49
139.7 Load Point Clouds Dialog Box

Load Point Clouds Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Load Point Clouds dialog box to retrieve files of point cloud data. The point clouds are displayed
in the model window. CAMIO displays each point cloud in a different colour, from a sequence of 10
colours. So, for example, if you load 11 different point clouds, the first 10 are displayed in the 10
available colours. The 11th point cloud is displayed in the first colour from the sequence, so that there
are two point clouds of the same colour.
File formats of point cloud data that can be opened include delimited ASCII files, .stl (STL files as faces
in binary format), .stlt (STL files as faces in ASCII format), and .msc (Metris scan file for diagnostic
purposes).
The Load Point Clouds dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERLOADPOINTCLOUD' command
to your program for each point cloud loaded.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Load in the Import Export section
872

Delete - deletes the highlighted files from the list.
Browse - displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for point cloud files.
See Also:
Model Window
49
File Types
139.8 Save Point Cloud Dialog Box

Save Point Cloud Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Save Point Cloud dialog box to save the point cloud from a laser scan to a file of point cloud
data, in the current co-ordinate system. File formats of point cloud data include .txt (text file), .sat
(ACIS file), .igs (IGES points), .stl (STL files as faces in binary format), and .msc (Metris scan file for
diagnostic purposes).
The Save Point Cloud dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERSAVEPOINTCLOUD' command to
your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Save in the Import Export section

Surface - type in the name of the surface feature for a point cloud obtained from a laser scan, or select
it from the drop-down list.
Total points - the total number of points in the point cloud obtained from the laser scan.
File - type in the name for the file of point cloud data. Use the button to browse for the location to save
the file in.
See Also:
Point Cloud Menu
File Types
873
36
139.9 Filter Grid Dialog Box

Filter Grid Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Filter Grid dialog box to apply a grid filter to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan. This
filters out points that are furthest from the centre of a defined cuboid, retaining the point closest to the
centre of the cuboid, and creates a new surface from the filtered data. CAMIO gives the new surface a
name according to the settings in the Teach Properties dialog box.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Filter Grid dialog box adds a
GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERGRID',n,n,n command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Grid Filter in the Filters section

Total points - the total number of points in the cloud obtained from the laser scan.
X,Y,Z - specify the dimensions (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box) of a
cuboid which is applied to an area of the point cloud, filtering out all but the point nearest to the centre of
the cuboid, then filtering the next area of the point cloud, and so on.
Try - click to see the effect of applying the filter to the point cloud. The effect can be seen in the model
874
window and the value in the Expected filtered points field may change.
See Also:
134

Model Window
860
101
49
139.10Filter Curvature Dependent Dialog Box

Filter Curvature Dependent Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Filter Curvature Dependent dialog box to apply a curvature filter to the point cloud obtained from
a laser scan. This filters out points based on the rate of change of the points, using a combination of
maximum and minimum grids. The maximum grid is applied to flat areas or areas with a low rate of
change, to filter out the maximum number of points. The minimum grid is used on curved areas or areas
with a high rate of change, to retain more points. CAMIO creates a new surface from the filtered data,
giving it a name according to the settings in the Teach Properties dialog box.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Filter Curvature Dependent
dialog box adds a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERCURVATUREDEPENDENT',n,n,n,n
Point Cloud Menu
875

Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Curvature Dependent Filter in the Filters section

Contrast - this value is applied to filter out points from areas of intermediate curvature. The higher the
contrast value, the fewer points are filtered out in areas with relatively small curvature. Usually the
contrast value is initially set at 50%. If this does not produce appropriate filtering, remove the filter and
increase it to 75%. Filtering at 75% will retain more points on areas that are not very curved.
Maximum grid - applies a grid to an area of low curvature, such that the distance between points must
be at least the specified value. Points at a distance less than this value are filtered out. A higher value
in this field ensures that a smaller number of points is retained.
Minimum grid - applies a grid to an area of high curvature, such that the distance between points must
be at least the specified value (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box). Points
at a distance less than this value, i.e. closer together, are filtered out. A lower value in this field ensures
that a greater number of points is retained.
Suggest - when clicked, CAMIO finds the size of the smallest detail available in the point cloud and
enters this value in the adjacent field. Using this value for the filter can provide a good approximation of
the underlying form of the model, when used with smooth point clouds that have no discontinuities in
gradient, i.e. no sharp ridges or spikes.
Smallest detail - represents the size of the smallest detail in the point cloud to take into account when
filtering. If set to 0, the detail is determined automatically. To filter out noise, set this value to a larger
value than noisy areas of the point cloud.
See Also:
134

Model Window
860
101
49
139.11Filter Scatter Dialog Box

Filter Scatter Dialog Box
876
Purpose
Use the Filter Scatter dialog box to apply a scatter filter to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan.
This filters out points that do not have a defined number of neighbouring points in a defined area, and
creates a new surface from the filtered data. CAMIO gives the new surface a name according to the
settings in the Teach Properties dialog box.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Filter Scatter dialog box adds a
GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERSCATTER',n,n command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Scatter Filter in the Filters section

Range - the radius (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box) of a sphere
centred on a point in the point cloud. The number of points in the sphere is counted, and if this is less
than the value in the Neighbours field, the point that the sphere is centred on is considered to be a
scatter point and is filtered out
Neighbours - the number of points that must be within the range of a particular point, or that point is
filtered out.
See Also:
134
Point Cloud Menu

Model Window
877
860
101
49
139.12Cut Point Cloud Dialog Box

Cut Point Cloud Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Cut Point Cloud dialog box to select and cut areas of point clouds using an elastic window.
CAMIO creates a new surface from the resulting data, giving it a name according to the settings in the
Teach Properties dialog box.
Cutting a point cloud
To cut an area of a point cloud, click on the cloud in the model window. A line tool is then available.
Click further locations on the cloud to define the area you wish to cut. To close the boundary of the
area, click the middle button of the mouse. Then click the middle button again to perform the cut.
Depending on your selections in the Select box, new point clouds may be created with the suffix 'inner'
or 'outer', and added to the list of point clouds in this dialog box.
Note:
878
The actions you perform with this dialog box do not delete any of the existing point clouds or meshes.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Cut in the Point Cloud Operations section

Point cloud and meshes list - lists the available point clouds and meshes from the current part
program. Check the boxes for the items you wish to display in the model window.
Select
To select an area of the displayed point clouds, click with the mouse to draw a boundary around the
area. Then click the middle mouse button to close the boundary of the area.
Cut and separate - cuts the selected area to create a new point cloud.
Cut and keep - cuts the selected area and keeps the points within it. All points outside the area are
deleted from the resulting point cloud.
Cut and delete - cuts the selected area and keeps the points outside it. All points inside the area are
deleted from the resulting point cloud.
Visible parts of meshes only - if checked, only the visible parts of meshes are included when cutting.
Keep copy of original - if checked, the original point cloud is retained. Otherwise it is removed from
the model window and from the list of point clouds.
See Also:
134
Model Window
139.13Mesh Dialog Box

Mesh Dialog Box
Point Cloud Menu
879
Purpose
Use the Mesh dialog box to apply a mesh to the point cloud, by applying triangles between all points
that are then used to create a surface effect. You should first filter the point cloud to reduce the number
of points. This facilitates the meshing process by allowing the triangles to approximate to an equilateral
shape. CAMIO creates a new surface from the meshed data, giving it a name according to the settings
in the Teach Properties dialog box.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser scanner, the Mesh dialog box adds a
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Mesh in the Point Cloud Operations section

Display points - if checked, the points in the point cloud are displayed in the model window, as well as
the surface effect. Otherwise, only the surface effect is displayed when the filter is applied.
The following two options are only available if a surface profile tolerance is defined in your part program.
Compare to CAD model - if checked, the points in the point cloud are evaluated using the surface
profile tolerance selected below. The cloud is displayed using the tolerance colours from the Report
Options dialog box.
Tolerance - select a surface profile tolerance from the drop-down list. This must be defined in your part
program.
See Also:
Model Window
49
Tolerance Colours - Report Options Dialog Box 501

Surface Profile Tolerance Dialog Box
139.14Offset Mesh Dialog Box

Offset Mesh Dialog Box
880
Purpose
Use the Offset Mesh dialog box to offset a meshed point cloud a specified distance along the meshed
surface normal.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser scanner, the Mesh dialog box adds a
CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASEROFFSETMESHPOINTCLOUD' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Offset Mesh in the Point Cloud Operations section

Mesh surfaces - lists the available meshes from the current part program. Check the boxes for the
items you wish to display in the model window.
Keep copy of original - if checked, the original meshed surface is kept when the offset is performed.
Offset distance - the distance, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box), along
which the meshed point cloud is offset (along the meshed surface normal).
See Also:
860
139.15Filter Smooth Dialog Box

Filter Smooth Dialog Box
Point Cloud Menu
881
Purpose
Use the Filter Smooth dialog box to perform point cloud smoothing by specifying a maximum
displacement that limits the distance a point can be moved towards the average position of its
neighbours, and a number of iterations to achieve the smoothing. CAMIO creates a new surface from
the filtered data, giving it a name according to the settings in the Teach Properties dialog box.
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Filter Smooth dialog box adds
a GEOALG/GSURF,EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERSMOOTH',n,n command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Smooth in the Point Cloud Operations section

Smoothing results - displays the results of the point cloud smoothing, after clicking Try.
Maximum displacement - the maximum displacement that a point can be moved towards the average
position of its neighbours (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box).
No. of iterations - the number of iterations for the smoothing.
882
window and the results are displayed in the Smoothing results box.
See Also:
134
101
Model Window
49
139.16Assembly Match Dialog Box

Assembly Match Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Assembly Match dialog box to assemble a point cloud by aligning overlapping point clouds.
This works by specifying a search distance, i.e. an upper limit on the distance between overlapping
regions of the clouds, and a filter to specify how many points are used. The reference surface does not
move. The movable surfaces move to minimise the overlap error between the surfaces. CAMIO creates
a new surface from the filtered data, giving it a name according to the settings in the Teach Properties
dialog box.
Point Cloud Menu
883
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Assembly Match dialog box
adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERASSEMBLYMATCH' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Assembly Match in the Point Cloud Operations
section

Reference surface - type in the name of the surface feature for a point cloud obtained from a laser
scan, or select it from the drop-down list. The reference surface is not moved when the filter is applied.
Total points - the total number of points in the reference surface.
Movable surfaces - the available surfaces are listed. You can select one or more in the list. The
movable surfaces move to minimise the overlap error between the surfaces.
Total points - the total number of points in the highlighted movable surface. If more than one movable
surface is highlighted, the total points are not displayed.
Search distance - the maximum distance (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog
box) between overlapping regions of the point clouds, within which distance a point can be moved.
Minimum improvement - the assembly match is an iterative process that stops when the improvement
in a step of the iterative process is less than the minimum improvement specified here.
Filter - a filter on the points to speed up the assembly match. Approximately one in nFilter points is
used, where nFilter is the value specified here. For example, a value of 1 uses 1 out of every 1 points, i.
e. all of the points are used. This slows down the assembly match. A value of 10 uses 1 in every 10
points and speeds up the assembly match.
See Also:
134
101
Model Window
139.17Merge Dialog Box

Merge Dialog Box
884
Purpose
Use the Merge dialog box to merge separate point clouds from a laser scan into a reference point cloud.
CAMIO creates a new surface from the merged data, giving it a name according to the settings in the
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Merge dialog box adds a CALL/
EXTERN,DME,'LASERMERGEPOINTCLOUDS' command to your program.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Merge in the Point Cloud Operations section

scan, or select it from the drop-down list. The selected point clouds will be merged into this point cloud.
Merge surfaces - the available surfaces are listed. You can select one or more in the list. The
selected merge surfaces are merged into the reference point cloud.
Total points - the total number of points in the highlighted merge surface. If more than one merge
surface is highlighted, the total points are not displayed.
See Also:
134
Point Cloud Menu
885
139.18Subtract and Blend Dialog Box

Subtract and Blend Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Subtract and Blend dialog box to subtract selected point clouds obtained from a laser scan from
a reference surface. You can also blend the point clouds to create a point cloud from points in the
overlapping area between the selected point clouds. The points in and near to the overlapping area are
moved. The distance between the point clouds determines which points will be moved. The maximum
distance must be at least as large as the (perpendicular) overlap distance. If the maximum distance is
larger than the overlap distance, points outside the overlapping area will also be blended, creating a more
gradual blend.
Red and blue lines: original point clouds
Purple line: moved points
Length of black lines (dDist) = maximum
distance
If you have an activated calibration map and a selected laser sensor, the Subtract and Blend dialog box
adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERSUBTRACTPOINTCLOUDS' command to your program for
subtracting point clouds, and a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERBLEND' command to your program
for blending point clouds.
886
CAMIO creates a new surface from the resulting data, giving it a name according to the settings in the
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Subtract and Blend in the Point Cloud Operations
section

scan, or select it from the drop-down list. The selected point clouds will be subtracted from and can
also be blended with this point cloud.
Surfaces to subtract - the available surfaces are listed. You can select one or more in the list. The
selected point clouds are subtracted from and can also be blended with the reference point cloud.
Total points - the total number of points in the highlighted surface. If more than one surface is
highlighted, the total points are not displayed.
Maximum distance - the maximum distance between the reference surface and any of the surfaces to
subtract from it (in the current units, as shown in the System Settings dialog box). Points which lie
outside this distance are not subtracted.
Blend - if checked, a point cloud is created from points in the overlapping area between the selected
surfaces.
See Also:
134
860
139.19Pointcloud Display Dialog Box

Purpose
The processing of point cloud data can be a large overhead for CAMIO. Part of this overhead is the
display of the point cloud in the model window, because this requires CAMIO to create a display of the
data. It is possible to disable this display, to avoid carrying out this processing. This does not affect the
creation of the point clouds themselves.
Use the Pointcloud Display dialog box to enable or disable the display of point cloud data. The options
affect the ability to display subsequent point clouds, not those already displayed. The Pointcloud
Display dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERPOINTCLOUDDISPLAY' command to your
program.
Point Cloud Menu
887
You can also use these methods to enable the display of point cloud data:
Check the Create point cloud box on the View tab page of the Display Settings dialog box.
Check the Create point cloud box on the Model tab page of the New/Open Inspection dialog box.
This setting is stored with the part program. You can override it using the same option on the View
tab page of the Display Settings dialog box.
Once the display of point clouds is enabled, you can choose whether or not to display the point cloud in
the model window.
To display a selected point cloud in the model window by adding a DMIS command for this to your
part program, use the Display Pointclouds dialog box.
To display a selected point cloud in the model window without adding a DMIS command to your part
program, use the Model Explorer dialog box. The Model Explorer dialog box also allows you to
choose whether to display all point clouds or selected point clouds.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click All in the Display section

Display points - if checked, the display of point cloud data is enabled so that subsequently-created
point clouds can be displayed in the model window. Uncheck this box to disable the display of point
cloud data.
Display fitted points - if checked, the display is enabled of points that have been fitted to features from
point cloud data. These points are displayed in green. Uncheck this box to disable the display of fitted
points.
See Also:
Model Window
49
Display Pointclouds Dialog Box

887
73
68
139.20Display Pointclouds Dialog Box

Display Pointclouds Dialog Box
888
Purpose
Use the Display Pointclouds dialog box to switch on or off the display of individual point clouds in the
model window.
The Display Pointclouds dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERSETDISPLAY' command to
your program.
Note that a point cloud can only be displayed if the display of point clouds is enabled using the
Pointcloud Display dialog box.
Navigation
Select Point Cloud from the main toolbar, click Set Display in the Display section

Surface - type in the name of the point cloud obtained from the laser scan, or select it from the dropdown list.
Displayed - the number of points currently displayed in the point cloud (which may be after a filter has
been applied).
Total - the total number of points available in the point cloud (which may be the number of points in the
cloud obtained from the laser scan, or in the cloud after it has been filtered and purged of filtered points).
Display - if checked, the point cloud selected in the Surface field is displayed in the model window
(provided the display of point clouds is enabled).
See Also:
Model Window
49
139.21Purge Points Dialog Box

Purge Points Dialog Box
Point Cloud Menu
889
Purpose
Use the Purge Points dialog box to discard all the points that have been filtered out of the point cloud
obtained from a laser scan. The original point cloud is not saved. This produces a smaller point cloud
that is not filtered.
The Purge Points dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS' command to
your program.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Call external program 'LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS'
command (if viewing your program as descriptive text) or double-click the CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS' command (if viewing your program as program text), in the
Call Routine dialog box double-click in the Arguments field

Displayed - the number of points currently displayed in the point cloud (which may be after a filter has
been applied).
Total - the total number of points available in the point cloud (which may be the number of points in the
cloud obtained from the laser scan, or in the cloud after it has been filtered and purged of filtered points).
See Also:
867
Laser Scanning
140 Advanced Programming

140.1 Advanced Programming
Advanced Programming
The advanced commands are statements that extend the capabilities of CAMIO beyond feature
measurement, sensor calibration, tolerancing and output.
The advanced commands allow you to use advanced programming options when building inspection
890
programs. The following options are available:

Variables
Using a group of standard data type variables, it is possible to perform a wide range of calculations
within the part program. The calculation might involve measured results, tolerance results, calibration
results, user input, data read from a text file or data from another part program. For details, see
Variables 955 .
User prompts
When interaction between the operator and part program is required, a user prompt dialog box can be
created and displayed. You can add buttons, check boxes, edit boxes, radio buttons, drop-down lists,
pictures, sounds and text labels to your user prompt dialog box. For details, see CAMIO Prompt Editor
924 .
Macros and external files
Normally a program consists of a single group of statements. Using external files, several programs can
be combined to form one program. This is particularly useful when a group of statements applies to two
or more programs. This principle can be further extended by the use of macros. Just like a program, a
macro performs a specific task. However, the macro is capable of receiving some form of input. As a
result the task the macro performs could be different each time it is used. For details, see External File
Declaration Dialog Box 952 and Macro Dialog Box 946 .
File input and output
When data required by the part program is saved in a file, advanced commands can be used to read the
data from the file into a variable. Advanced commands can also be used to create new files and to write
data to new or existing files. For details, see Read from Input Device Dialog Box 943 and Write to Output
Device Dialog Box 944 .
Selective processing
Normally a program is executed one line at a time, starting with the first line and ending with the last
line. Using advanced commands it is possible to jump or skip program lines, selectively execute
program lines based on a logical decision, repeat program lines a fixed or variable number of times and
recover from errors. For details, see Jump to Wizard 910 , If Wizard 907 ,Do Wizard 911 , and Error Dialog
Box 949 .
See Also:
Advanced Commands
140.2 Advanced Commands

140.2.1 Advanced Commands
Advanced Commands
891
Purpose
The advanced commands allow you to use advanced programming options, including declared variable
data or text strings, when building inspection programs.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar

Variables
Loop
891
Input / Output
892
External
893
Macro
Program
893
Reporting
Call Routine
893
892
893
Error Recovery
894
894
See Also:
Main Toolbar
41
889
135
140.2.2 Advanced - Variables

Advanced - Variables
The Variables section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Declare Wizard - displays the Declare Variable wizard
step-by-step procedure.
Declare - displays the Declare Variable dialog box
string) by its name, type and scope.
894
897
, where you can declare a variable using a
, where you can declare a variable (number or
Declare Multiple - displays the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box

number of variables at a time.
Assign Wizard - displays the Assignment wizard
calculation to a variable.
Assign - displays the Assign Variable dialog box
calculation to a variable.
899
903
Obtain Wizard - displays the Obtain Value wizard

to a variable.
896
, where you can declare a
, where you can assign a value or the result of a
, where you can assign a value or the result of a
905
, where you can assign an item of inspection data
Obtain - displays the Obtain dialog box 904 , where you can assign a value obtained from a data source
(such as a feature, or a sensor, or a storage device) to your selected variable.
Value - displays the Value dialog box
939
. Use this to assign a value from a measured feature or
892
tolerance to a variable.
Watch - displays the Watch dialog box
debugging of programs.
909
, where you can track the use of variables, to assist in the
System Variables - displays the System Variable Manager dialog box, where you can view a list of
common variables (variables available to all inspections) and delete variables from the list.
140.2.3 Loop
Loop
The Loop section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
If Wizard - displays the If wizard 907 , where you can enter a conditional expression to be evaluated by
the IF command. Depending on the result, execution continues elsewhere in the program.
If - in Insert mode (not available in Teach or Command mode), displays the If dialog box 906 , where you
can enter a conditional expression to be evaluated by the IF command. Depending on the result,
execution continues elsewhere in the program.
Else - in Insert mode (not available in Teach or Command mode), displays the Else dialog box
you can add an ELSE command to its associated IF command.
906
End If - in Insert mode (not available in Teach or Command mode), displays the End If dialog box
where you can add an ENDIF command to an associated IF command.
Loop Wizard - displays the Do wizard
a set of commands.
911
, where
906
, where you can create a loop in your part program, to repeat
Start Loop - displays the Start Loop dialog box

a program loop.
End Loop - displays the End Loop dialog box
loop.
913
914
, where you can set up the parameters for the start of
, which you can use to indicate the end of a program
Jump to Wizard - displays the Jump to wizard 910 . The JUMPTO command causes the program to
jump to the command containing or preceded by the command label.
Label - displays the Create New Label dialog box. Use this to create a label and insert it in your part
program.
140.2.4 Input / Output

Input / Output
The Input / Output section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the
following options:
Define - displays the Input/Output Device dialog box 940 . Use this to define storage devices for input
and output. You can then use the Open command to open the device for input or output, so that CAMIO
can send data to and receive data from the device.
Open - displays the Open Device dialog box 941 . Use this to open a file or comm (communications) port
specified using the Device command.
Close - displays the Close Device dialog box 942 . Use this to close a file or serial port specified as a
storage device using the Device command. You can choose whether to keep or delete the file when you
close it.
Read - displays the Read from Input Device dialog box 943 . Use this to read data from a file specified as
a storage device using the Device command.
Write - displays the Write to Output Device dialog box

output storage device.
944
893
. Use this to write formatted text to a selected
Prompt - displays the CAMIO Prompt Editor 924 application, where you can create your own prompt
dialogs to be displayed as your part program runs.
Text - displays the Output Text dialog box. Use this to create messages and to specify how the
messages are displayed.
140.2.5 External
External
The External section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Start - displays the Start of External File Declaration dialog box
the start of an external file block.
951
. The XTERN command indicates
Define External - displays the External File Declaration dialog box 952 . Use this to specify the name of
an external file. When executed, the program checks that the file exists.
End - displays the End of External File Declaration dialog box. The ENDXTN command indicates the
end of an external file block.
140.2.6 Macro
Macro
The Macro section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Define - displays the Macro dialog box
commands) for repetitive tasks.
946
where you can define a macro routine (a block of DMIS
End - displays the End Macro dialog box. The ENDMAC command indicates the end of a macro
routine.
140.2.7 Call Routine

Call Routine
The Call Routine section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the
following option:
Call External - displays the Call Routine dialog box. Use this to call an external program or a macro.
140.2.8 Program
Program
The Program section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Program Header - displays the Program Header dialog box 953 , where you can specify external
program identification (DMISMN) for a DMIS input program.
Subroutine Header - displays the Subroutine Header dialog box 953 , where you can specify external
program identification (DMISMD) for a DMIS input module.
End of File - displays the End of File dialog box
955
. Use this to specify the end of a program.
894
File Identifier - displays the File Label dialog box

(FILNAM) within a DMIS file.
485
, where you can specify an internal identification
Pause - displays the Edit Command dialog box, which allows you to insert a Pause command into the
program.
140.2.9 Advanced - Reporting

Advanced - Reporting
The Reporting section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
QIS Definition - displays the Quality Information dialog box
(Quality Information System) statements for use in reports.
482
define, where you can select QIS
QIS Information - displays the QIS Information dialog box 484 , where you can define reports on QIS
data for direct output or for use when outputting feature data.
QIS Data - displays the Output QIS Data dialog box
System) items from the part program.
481
. Use this to output QIS (Quality Information
Simultaneous Requirement - displays the Simultaneous Requirement dialog box

define a block of simultaneous requirement (SIMREQT) commands.
486
. Use this to
End of Simultaneous Requirement - displays the End of Simultaneous Requirement dialog box. Use
this to add an ENDSIMREQT (End of simultaneous requirement) command to your part program.
140.2.10Error Recovery
Error Recovery
The Error Recovery section is accessed from the Advanced tab on the main toolbar and contains the
following options:
Error - displays the Error dialog box
949
. Use this to specify what happens when a touch error occurs.
Resume - displays the Resume dialog box. Use this to determine what happens when starting the
program again after it has jumped to a particular line in response to an error.
140.2.11Declare Variable Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Declare Variable dialog box to declare a variable (number, string, co-ordinate or vector) by its
name, type and scope. The Declare Variable dialog box adds a DECL (Declare variable) command to
895
your program. A DECL command is also added when you use the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box
896 or the Declare Variable wizard 897 .
If you access the Declare Variable dialog box by double-clicking a DECL command in your part program,
you can edit the parameters for the variables in that command. To edit a variable, select it in the Name
drop-down list, change its scope and/or type and click OK.
To add more than one variable to a DECL command, type in a new variable name for each variable and
click Add between each one. This adds your new variables to an internal list. When you click OK, all
the new variables you have just added are appended to the DECL command, which is also amended to
use the scope and type selected when you clicked OK. If you want to add variables of different scopes
and types, click OK whenever you change the scope or type. A new DECL command is added to your
program each time.
To delete the variable in the Name field, click Delete. Any local and global variables you have deleted in
this way are still displayed in any variable lists until you close the program or module.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Declare in the Variables
section
In the part program window, double-click the Declare variable command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the DECL command (if viewing your program as program text)

Scope - select Module to add a local variable available only to the current sub-program. Select Program
to add a global variable available to this sub-program, its main program, and all other sub-programs of its
main program. Select System to add a common variable available to all programs.
Type - the variable type. Integer and long integer are variables of whole numbers. Real and double are
variables which can have decimal values. Boolean specifies variables with a value of true or false.
Character specifies variables that contain characters (the printable ASCII characters in the range 0-255).
Vector/coordinate specifies variables that contain a triplet of numbers representing a Cartesian or polar
co-ordinate or a direction vector. (Note that vector/co-ordinate variables can only be assigned using the
Assign Variable dialog box.)
Name - lists the variables in the selected DECL command. You can add a new variable by typing in a
new name.
Add - to create a new variable, type in a new variable name, select its scope and type, then click Add.
This adds the variable to an internal list, and it is added to the selected DECL command when you click
OK.
Delete - deletes the variable from the Name field and from the associated DECL command. Local and
global variables are then deleted from variable lists when you close the program or module. You can
delete common (system) variables using the System Variable Manager dialog box.
Warning:
The values of local and global variables are not saved to a file. Therefore, if you close CAMIO then
restart it and run your programs containing these variables again, the previous values of these local and
global variables will have been lost. (To save local and global variable values you could write them to a
storage device, using the Write to Output Device dialog box 944 , then read them back into your program
using the Read from Input Device dialog box 943 .)
See Also:
Variables
955
896

Part Program Window
903
45
Advanced Commands
140.2.12Declare Multiple Variables Dialog Box

Declare Multiple Variables Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box to declare variables (number or string) by their name, type
and scope. Whenever you display this dialog, default settings for the next new variable are displayed.
To declare the variable, edit its settings and click OK. You can rename the variable by overtyping its
name. Select the type, scope and for character variables set the size, using the arrow buttons in the
row. To create another new variable, click in the first empty row.
When you click OK, a Declare variable (DECL) command is added to your part program for each set of
variables of different type or scope.
You can delete a variable from the list by clicking the X button in the appropriate row.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Declare Multiple from the
Declare drop-down list in the Variables section

X - deletes the adjacent row.
Type - the variable type. Integer and long integer are variables of whole numbers. Real and double are
variables which can have decimal values. Boolean specifies variables with a value of true or false.
Character specifies variables that contain characters (the printable ASCII characters in the range 0-255).
Scope - select Module to add a local variable available only to the current sub-program. Select Program
to add a global variable available to this sub-program, its main program, and all other sub-programs of its
897
main program. Select System to add a common variable available to all programs.
Size - for character variables, use the small scroll buttons to select the maximum number of characters
in the variable.
Warning:
See Also:
Variables
955

Main Toolbar
894
135
Advanced Commands
140.2.13Declare Variable Wizard

Declare Variable Wizard
Purpose
Use the Declare Variable wizard to create and declare a new variable.
The Declare Variable wizard adds a DECL command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Declare Wizard from the
Declare drop-down list in the Variables section
Assignment wizard, select a variable, click Next, select Function, click Next, click New
898
If wizard, select a variable, click Next, select Function, click Next, click New
Type in a name for the new variable and click Next. The following page of the wizard is displayed:
Select the type of the new variable. Integer and long integer are variables of whole numbers. Real and
double are variables which can have decimal values. Boolean specifies variables with a value of true or
false. Character specifies variables that contain characters (the printable ASCII characters in the range
0-255).
Click Next. The following page of the wizard is displayed:
Select the scope of the new variable. Select Module to add a local variable available only to the current
sub-program. Select Program to add a global variable available to this sub-program, its main program,
and all other sub-programs of its main program. Select System to add a common variable available to
899
all programs.
You can either close the Declare Variable wizard at this point, or check the Assign value box and click
Next to display the final page of the wizard, where you can assign a value to the new variable:
Warning:
See Also:
Variables
955
Assignment Wizard
If Wizard
899
907
894

Advanced Commands
140.2.14Assignment Wizard
140.2.14.1Assignment Wizard
Assignment Wizard
896
900
Purpose
Use the Assignment wizard to assign a value or the result of a calculation to a variable. Any data
previously assigned to the variable is lost when the assignment is made.
The Assignment wizard adds an ASSIGN command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Assign Wizard in the
Variables section
Select the variable from the list and click Next. The following page of the wizard is displayed.
901
Here you can select the type of value for your variable. The following options are available:
Value - allows you to set a value for your variable. You can only set a value of the appropriate type for
the variable type.
Function
901
- allows you to assign a value calculated using an intrinsic function to the variable.
Variable - allows you to select an existing variable to assign to the variable.

Obtain
902
- allows you to obtain a value from a feature or tolerance to assign to the variable.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
903
135
Advanced Commands
140.2.14.2Assignment Wizard - Assigning a Function to a Variable
Assignment Wizard - Assigning a Function to a Variable
Purpose
This page of the Assignment wizard allows you to assign a value calculated using an intrinsic function to
your selected variable.
Intrinsic functions are not commands in themselves but they can be used in ASSIGN commands to set
the value of a variable. They are mainly mathematical (like cos, sin, tan, etc.) or manipulate strings (e.g.
CONCAT for concatenating two or more strings). If the function you require is not present in the
Function drop-down list, you can edit the ASSIGN command directly using the Edit Command dialog
box 201 . The functions supported by CAMIO that you can use in this way are listed for the ASSIGN
command in the characterisation file chfile.dmi. This is located in C:\LK\Appdata\LKDmis.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Assign Wizard from the
Assign drop-down list in the Variables section, on the second page of the Assignment wizard select
Function, click Next
902

Function - select a function to use in calculating the value to assign to the variable. Only functions of
the appropriate type for the type of variable are displayed.
Parameters - select variables to use as parameters for the function. Only variables of an appropriate
type are available.
New - displays the Declare Variable wizard
parameter for the function.
897
, where you can create a new variable for use as a
See Also:
Assignment Wizard
Main Toolbar
899
135
Advanced Commands
140.2.14.3Assignment Wizard - Assigning an Obtained Value to a Variable
Assignment Wizard - Assigning an Obtained Value to a Variable
Purpose
This page of the Assignment wizard allows you to assign a value obtained from a feature or a tolerance
to your selected variable.
Note:
The values you can obtain depend on the variable type. For example, if your selected variable is a
character variable, you can only obtain a text value from a feature or tolerance, and other non-text
properties are not listed in the Property drop-down list.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Assign Wizard from the
Assign drop-down in the Variables section, on the second page of the Assignment wizard select
Obtain, click Next
903

Object - select a feature or tolerance to assign to your variable from the drop-down list.
Actual/Nominal - select Actual or Nominal to determine whether you wish to obtain the value from the
actual or nominal feature or tolerance.
Property - the particular value you wish to obtain from the object. For example, the object you have
selected might be a tolerance, and its property could be its lower tolerance value. Note that the variable
you selected on the first page of the wizard must be a variable that can accept a property, otherwise this
drop-down list will be empty. For example, an integer variable will not accept a property that is not an
integer.
See Also:
Assignment Wizard
Main Toolbar
899
135
Advanced Commands
140.3 Assign Variable Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Assign Variable dialog box to assign a value or the result of a calculation to a variable.
The Assign Variable dialog box adds an ASSIGN command to your program. An ASSIGN command is
also added when you assign variables using the Assignment wizard 899 .
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the menu bar, click Assign from the Assign Wizard
drop-down list in the Variables section
In the part program window, double-click the Assign variable command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the ASSIGN command (if viewing your program as program text)

Scope - displays the variable scope - local (available only to the current sub-program), global (available
to this sub-program, its main program, and all other sub-programs of its main program) or common
(available to all programs).
904
Type - displays the variable type. Integer and long integer are variables of whole numbers. Real and
double are variables which can have decimal values. Boolean specifies variables with a value of true or
false. Character specifies variables that contain characters (the printable ASCII characters in the range
0-255).
Name - the variable name. If you select a different variable, the displayed scope and type change
accordingly.
Value - the value or calculation you wish to assign to the variable. You can use a value, a function,
another variable, or you can use a complex expression. A string must be enclosed in single quotes. To
assign the contents of another variable, you must first declare the variable and ensure that its name is
not enclosed in quotes in this field. To assign a vector or co-ordinate variable, type in vcart(n,n,n) or vpol
(n,n,n) where vcart indicates Cartesian co-ordinates and vpol indicates polar co-ordinates, and n,n,n
indicates the x,y,z co-ordinates for Cartesian co-ordinates, and the radius, angle and height for polar coordinates.
See Also:
Variables
955
Part Program Window
45
Advanced Commands
140.4 Obtain Dialog Box

Obtain Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Obtain dialog box to assign a value obtained from a data source (such as a feature, or a sensor,
or a storage device) to your selected variable.
The Obtain dialog box adds an OBTAIN command to your program. An OBTAIN command is also
added when you obtain values using the Obtain Value wizard 905 .
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Obtain from the Obtain
Wizard drop-down list in the Variables section
In the part program window, double-click the Obtain value command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the OBTAIN command (if viewing your program as program text)
905

Varname - the name of the variable which the obtained value will be assigned to.
Type - the type of data item which the value is obtained from, e.g. feature nominal.
Sub-type - the sort of feature, tolerance, etc. for the label selected in the label field below. For example,
you may have measured a circle feature and given it a label name of circle1. If you then selected circle1
in the Label field, this Sub-type field would display 'Circle'.
Label - the names of the features, tolerances, storage devices, etc. present in your program.
Ordinal - the property which you wish to obtain from the data item. The ordinal gives the position of the
property in the list of parameters for a data item, from the first item after the / character. For example, in
the bilateral position tolerance T(0)=TOL/CORTOL,XAXIS,-0.1,0.1, to obtain the X axis value you would
specify ordinal 2. If you are obtaining the property from a buffer point, check the Buffer points box and
specify which buffer point to use in the adjacent field. In this case, the ordinal is the position of a
parameter for that buffer point (see below).
Buffer points - if checked, obtains a point from the buffer. Enter the point number to obtain in the
adjacent field. To determine the ordinals of the buffer point parameters, use the format of the PTMEAS
command, i.e. PTMEAS/CART,x,y,z,i,j,k. For example, if you selected buffer point 3, and wanted to
obtain its y value, you would type 3 in the Ordinal field.
See Also:
Using Buffer Points
211
Part Program Window
45
Advanced Commands
140.5 Obtain Value Wizard

Obtain Value Wizard
Purpose
Use the Obtain Value wizard to assign a value obtained from a feature or a tolerance to your selected
906
variable. On the first page of the wizard, select the feature or tolerance you want to obtain a value from.
On the second page, select which value to obtain from the feature or tolerance. Select whether you
want to obtain the value from the actual or nominal feature or tolerance. On the final page of the wizard,
select the variable you want to store the resulting value in.
The Obtain Value wizard adds an OBTAIN command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Obtain Wizard in the
Variables section
Note:
You can use the Obtain dialog box
904
to obtain values from other sources, e.g. a storage device.
See Also:
Using Buffer Points
Main Toolbar
211
135
Advanced Commands
140.6 If Dialog Box (IF Command)

If Dialog Box (IF Command)
Purpose
Use the If [ if..else..endif ] dialog box to enter a conditional expression to be evaluated by the IF
command. Depending on the result, execution continues elsewhere in the program. Use the Else
dialog box to enter the action to take as a result of the evaluation, and use the End If dialog to indicate
the end of the IF expression.
The conditional expression can use the following relational operators, to specify the relationship between
the items in the expression. Note that a . (full stop) character is required immediately before and after
each operator.
.AND.
.OR.
.NOT.
.TRUE.
.FALSE.
.GT. (greater than)
.GE. (greater than or equal to)
.EQ. (equal to)
907
.LT. (less than)

.LE. (less than or equal to)
.NE. (not equal to)
Navigation
With a part program open and in Insert mode (not available in Teach or Command mode), select
Advanced from the main toolbar, click If from the If Wizard drop-down list in the Loop section
In the part program window, double-click the If command (if viewing your program as descriptive
text), or double-click the IF command (if viewing your program as program text)
See Also:
If Wizard
907
Part Program Window
45
Advanced Programming Operators
958
Advanced Commands
140.7 If Wizard
If Wizard
Purpose
Use the If wizard to enter a conditional expression to be evaluated by the IF command. Depending on
the result, execution continues elsewhere in the program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click If Wizard in the Loop
section
908
See Also:
If Dialog Box (IF Command) 906
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.8 System Information - Watch Dialog Box

System Information - Watch Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the System Information tab page to view current system information for CAMIO.
Navigation
Select CAMIO Options from the menu bar, click System Status
Select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Watch in the Variables section

Program file - the name and location of the currently-open part program.
Project - the text associated with the DMISMN command in the part program.
Module - the text associated with the DMISMD command in the part program.
Program mode - the current program mode: Automatic, Programmed or Manual.
Probe compensation - On or Off.
909
Datum - the label of the current working datum.

Sensor - the label of the active sensor. This also indicates whether a nominal sensor is selected.
Work plane - the current work plane.
CMM status - the current status of the CMM: on-line, off-line, alarm, etc.
Scan mode - On or Off.
Temperature compensation - On or Off.
Geometric correction - On or Off. Geometric correction should always be on.
Units - the current linear, angular and thermal units.
Execution mode - the Teach, Command or Insert
41
programming mode.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.9 Variables - Watch Dialog Box

Variables - Watch Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Variables tab page to track the use of variables, to assist in the debugging of programs. This
shows you the current value of the listed variables.
Click in the Variable column to type in a variable name. Its current value is then displayed in the
adjacent Value column. You can delete the highlighted row using the DELETE key on your keyboard.
This only deletes it from the current display.
You can leave the Watch dialog box displayed on the screen while you run your program, to monitor the
910
values of the variables.

Navigation
Select CAMIO Options from the menu bar, click System Status, select the Variables tab page
Select Advanced from the menu bar, click Watch in the Variables section, select the Variables tab
page
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.10Jump to Wizard
Jump to Wizard
Purpose
Use the Jump to wizard to insert a Program jump (JUMPTO) command into your program. The JUMPTO
command causes the program to jump to the command containing or immediately preceded by a label
you insert into the program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Jump to Wizard in the Loop
section

Jump to - the labels that you can jump to within the current program. Select a label from the list. The
Code field shows the location of the label in your program (in the DMIS code).
911
New - displays the Create New Label dialog box 937 , where you can set up a label to jump to in your
program.
Code - shows the program code immediately following the label selected in the Jump to field.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.11Jump to Label Dialog Box (JUMPTO Command)

Jump to Label Dialog Box (JUMPTO Command)
Purpose
Use the Jump to Label dialog box (accessed from a Program jump program line) to edit the target of the
program jump.
You can insert a Program jump (JUMPTO) command using the Insert Command dialog box 201 . It is
also added when you enter program jump commands using the Jump to wizard 910 . You can also insert
labels in your program using the Create New Label dialog box.
Navigation
In the part program window, double-click the Program jump command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the JUMPTO command (if viewing your program as program text)

Command label - type in a label that you want the program to jump to when it is run.
See Also:
Create New Label Dialog Box 937
Part Program Window
45
Advanced Commands
140.12Do Wizard
Do Wizard
912
Purpose
Use the Do wizard to create a loop in your part program, so that a set of commands is repeated as
many times as you require. You might use this, for example, to inspect a series of holes in a part,
spaced at regular intervals, without creating a separate measurement block for each hole.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Loop Wizard in the Loop
section
First select the variable you are going to use to count the number of times the loop is repeated. You
must have declared this variable as an integer variable using theDeclare Variable dialog box 894 . When
you click Next, the following dialog box is displayed:
913
Specify the start value for the loop counter, the number of loops, and the value by which the loop counter
is to be incremented each time the loop is repeated. When you click Finish, Start of loop (DO) and End
of loop (ENDDO) commands are added to your program. Between these commands, the comment
'Enter loop code here' prompts you to create the code that you wish to be repeated and insert it into the
loop.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.13Start Loop Dialog Box

Start Loop Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Start Loop dialog box to set up the parameters for the start of a program loop (that uses the
DO...ENDDO commands to repeat a set of commands, for example, to inspect a series of holes in a
part, spaced at regular intervals, without creating a separate measurement block for each hole). The
Start Loop dialog box adds a DO (Start of loop) command to your program. You must add a
corresponding ENDDO (End of loop) command using the End Loop dialog box. Between these
commands, insert the code that you wish to be repeated.
914
DO and ENDDO commands are also added when you create a program loop using the Do wizard
911
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Start Loop from the Loop
Wizard drop-down list in the Loop section
In the part program window, double-click the Start of loop command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the DO command (if viewing your program as program text)

Index - the variable used to count the number of times the loop is repeated.
Initial - the start value of the loop counter.
Limit - the number of loops.
Increment - the value by which the loop counter is to be incremented each time the loop is repeated.
See Also:
End Loop Dialog Box
Part Program Window
914
45
Advanced Commands
140.14End Loop Dialog Box

End Loop Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the End Loop dialog box to indicate the end of a program loop (that uses the DO...ENDDO
commands to repeat a set of commands). In Insert mode 41 , the End Loop dialog box adds an ENDDO
(End of loop) command to your program. There should be a corresponding Start of loop (DO) command,
which you can add using the Start Loop dialog box 913 .
DO and ENDDO commands are also added when you create a program loop using the Do wizard
911
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click End Loop from the Loop
In the part program window, double-click the End of loop command (if viewing your program as
descriptive text), or double-click the ENDDO command (if viewing your program as program text)
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
Advanced Commands
915
140.15Call Routine Dialog Box

140.15.1Call Routine Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Call Routine dialog box to call and invoke the execution of an external program or a macro.
Select arguments by double-clicking in the Arguments field.
The Call Routine dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN (Call external program) command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Call External in the Call
Routine section

System/Subroutine/Software/Macro
The paths used to locate these files when executing the Call external program (CALL/EXTERN)
command are specified on the External Paths tab page when opening or creating a .dmi file.
System - select this if a system program is to be called. This may be written in any language.
Arguments are passed separated by spaces, not by commas. You can use this option to call .vbs
script programs to perform functions as your part program is run. Use the adjacent
search for the program.
button to
Subroutine - select this if a DMIS sub-routine is to be run. Any arguments are passed through to the
sub-routine, which should have corresponding dummy arguments.
Software - select this if an executable for Dimensional Measuring Equipment is to be run. Arguments
are specific to the DME file called.
Macro - select this if a macro routine is to be called. When a CALL command is issued, the program
jumps to the MACRO command and executes all the commands up to the ENDMAC. After executing
the ENDMAC, the program returns to the line after the CALL command.
Routine - the name of the routine to be called. Select a routine from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Arguments - enter arguments for the routine separated by commas (system arguments are separated
by spaces). You can double-click in this field to call up a dialog box appropriate to the routine, in which
you can set up the parameters for the arguments.
See Also:
916
DME Commands
916
Call Macro Dialog Box
948

Main Toolbar
177
135
Advanced Commands
140.15.2Auto Mode Warning Disable/Enable Dialog Box

Auto Mode Warning Disable/Enable Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Auto Mode Warning Disable/Enable dialog box to enable or disable the warning dialog when you
switch from Manual to Automatic mode 40 . The Auto Mode Warning dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'DMISRUNAUTO' (Call external program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select DMISRUNAUTO from the Routine drop-down list, doubleclick in the Arguments field

Disable - when switching from Manual to Automatic mode, no warning dialog is displayed.
Enable - when switching from Manual to Automatic mode, you must click OK on the warning dialog
before the program will continue.
See Also:
Call Routine dialog box
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
140.15.3DME Commands
DME Commands
The following options are available to the CALL/EXTERN,DME command. The CALL/EXTERN,DME
command is specified using the Call Routine dialog box 915 .
All the options except DATUMSPHERE and MRS are modal switches, i.e. the setting applies until
another option overrides it.
917
CALDATA - specifies a file to write data to after a probe calibration. The data is overwritten each time a
calibration is performed.
CALIBSET - allows a calibrated sensor to be created that is a copy of an existing calibration, but with a
different effective probe diameter. The new sensor must be defined with an appropriate SNSDEF
command, and the reference sensor must be calibrated and have the same nominal geometry as the
new sensor.
COMPTOUCHPT - specifies how probe compensation is applied for point features: feature nominal
direction (default and compliant with DMIS standard, selected by None); the nearest datum axis; the
direction of the probe head orientation; or the touch direction. COMPTOUCHPT is particularly useful on
manual machines where the nominal direction is not known or cannot be achieved during measurement.
DATUMSPHERE - sets a datum on the master reset sphere.
DATUMTRANSFORM - using declared variables, obtains the angles of rotation and the translation
distances (in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ) for a datum relative to
the machine co-ordinate system (MCS).
DIO - for digital input/output. Used for communication with external devices, when sending signals to
the devices.
DISPLYPTTIME - sets the DRO
86
(digital read-out) display time for point measurements.
DMISRUNAUTO - enables or disables the warning dialog when you switch from Manual to Automatic
mode 40 .
DP - specifies that the DRO should freeze when a point feature is measured, and display the errorcorrected position for a specified time.
GUIDANCE - enables or disables guidance mode for arms and tracker machines that use guidance.
This can be used, for example, when creating a datum, to ensure that guidance mode is not
automatically switched on before the datum creation is complete.
FITCONECENTRE FITSTDDEV KNOWNSCAN - specifies that programmed scanning operations should follow the PTMEAS points
specified, regardless of whether they lie in the current SCNPLN. The CURVE parameter specifies that
the scan should follow the path defined by the points. The PLANAR parameter also specifies that the
scan should follow the path defined by the points, but within a plane defined by the start point and the
current scan plane. Setting the OFF parameter returns to unknown scanning.
LASERBLACKANDWHITE - sets the black and white levels for the laser scanner.
LASERCALIBRATIONMAP - loads and activates a calibration map for the laser scanner, e.g. when
changing scanners.
LASERDISTANCEBETWEENSTRIPES - sets the distance between stripes in a laser scan. Any scan
carried out after the command is executed uses this distance.
LASEREXTRACTIONQUALITY - sets the extraction quality threshold for points acquired in a laser
scan. Each point has an intensity of 0-254 associated with it. There is a correlation between the
intensity and the quality of a point in that a point with a higher intensity has a higher quality. So the
greater the intensity the better, unless the intensity is 255 (i.e. saturated) in which case the intensity
may be too high and information may be lost (because the intensity is unknown). The saturation filter
can be set as follows:
Note:
If the following LASERFILTER commands are added via the Call Routine dialog box, so that they are
added to the CALL/EXTERN command, the point data is not added to the database. If a LASERFILTER
command is added via the laser filter dialog boxes, accessed from theLaser Initialisation commands 833 ,
918
so that it is added to the GEOALG command, the data is saved to the database.
LASERFILTERASSEMBLYMATCH - allows a point cloud to be assembled by moving a point cloud in a
pair of overlapping point clouds. This works by specifying a search distance, i.e. an upper limit on the
distance between overlapping regions of the clouds, and a filter to specify how many points are used.
LASERFILTERBLEND - allows a point cloud to be created from points in the overlapping area between
two point clouds. The points in and near to the overlapping area are moved. The distance between the
point clouds determines which points will be moved. The maximum distance must be at least as large
as the (perpendicular) overlap distance. If the maximum distance is larger than the overlap distance,
points outside the overlapping area will also be blended, creating a more gradual blend.
Red and blue lines: original point clouds
Purple line: moved points
Length of black lines (dDist) = maximum
distance
LASERFILTERCURVATUREDEPENDENT - applies a curvature filter to the point cloud obtained from a

laser scan. This filters out points based on the rate of change of the points, using a combination of
maximum and minimum grids. The maximum grid is applied to flat areas or areas with a low rate of
change, to filter out the maximum number of points. The minimum grid is used on curved areas or areas
with a high rate of change, to retain more points.
LASERFILTERGRID - applies a grid filter to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan. This filters out
points that are furthest from the centre of a defined cuboid, retaining the point closest to the centre of the
cuboid.
LASERFILTERPURGEPOINTS - discards all points that have been filtered out of the point cloud
obtained from a laser scan. The original point cloud is not saved. This produces a smaller point cloud
that is not filtered.
LASERFILTERSCATTER - applies a scatter filter to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan. This
filters out points that do not have a defined number of neighbouring points in a defined area.
LASERFILTERSMOOTH - performs point cloud smoothing by specifying a maximum displacement that
limits the distance a point can be moved towards the average position of its neighbours, and a number of
iterations to achieve the smoothing.
LASERINTENSITY - sets the intensity for the laser scanner. This command can be inserted into a
block of surface (GSURF) scan commands, to change the laser intensity during the GSURF scan.
LASERLOADPOINTCLOUD - retrieves a file of point cloud data. File formats of point cloud data that
can be opened include delimited ASCII files, Hyscan files, .iso (ISO files), .stl (STL files as faces), .igs
and .iges (IGES points), and .ris (RIS files).
LASERMERGEPOINTCLOUDS - merges two separate point clouds from a laser scan into the first of the
two point clouds.
LASERMESHPOINTCLOUD - applies a mesh to the point cloud, by applying triangles between all
points that are then used to create a surface effect. You should first filter the point cloud to reduce the
number of points. This facilitates the meshing process by allowing the triangles to approximate to an
equilateral shape.
LASERMINSIGNALSTRENGTH - sets a threshold which must be exceeded by the value of a local peak
from the scanned surface to the laser scanner camera, or a point is not created.
LASEROFFSETMESHPOINTCLOUD - offsets a meshed point cloud a specified distance along the
meshed surface normal.
LASERPOINTCLOUDDISPLAY - switches on or off the creation of the display in the model window
49
919
of the point cloud data from a laser scan.

LASERPOWER - switches the laser scanner on or off, for example when changing scanners. The
scanner needs to be warmed up for 45 minutes to an hour. It can be warmed up on the CMM, on a
warm-up station or, if you have an ACR3 tool changer with an optional plug for the scanner, it can be
plugged in and kept switched on there. For best results, allow an hour's warm-up. This should be taken
into account when first starting the scanner, or when using it with a tool changer.
LASERRACKPOWER - switches the laser tool changer rack on or off. Switching the rack on ensures
the laser scanner does not change temperature when the scanner is being changed.
LASERROLLINGSHUTTERWIDTH - sets the exposure time and intensity for digital laser scanners.
LASERSAVEPOINTCLOUD - saves the point cloud from a laser scan to file of point cloud data, in the
current co-ordinate system.
LASERSETDISPLAY - allows you to switch on or off the display of individual point clouds in the model
window. The display must first have been created by CAMIO.
LASERSPLITQUALITY - switches the creation of split quality point clouds on or off. Split quality point
clouds are displayed in the model window in colours ranging from dark red to light green, depending on
the quality index of the individual points. They are used for diagnostic purposes, as a visual check of the
quality of the scan data, allowing you to identify areas of poor quality within the cloud.
LASERSUBTRACTPOINTCLOUDS - allows you to subtract one point cloud obtained from a laser scan
from another.
LASERTOLERANCE - sets the tolerance for the feature extraction algorithms for the laser scanner. The
tolerance is set in the current units. This value overrides the default value set on the Scanner Settings
dialog box, Overruns tab page 849 .
LASERUNFILTER - removes any filters applied to the point cloud obtained from a laser scan.
MMC - calls the Metris MMC executable. This takes nominal and actual feature data from bores
measured in one plane, and analyses the positional/diameter deviations. If a fit with a mating part is
possible, an overall deviation is calculated in the form of a translation and a rotation about the current
datum, using one of three optimising algorithms. Not currently supported on 64-bit systems.
MODEL - allows the part program to open and close a CAD model. The Arguments field can contain
CAMERA coordinates which record a model view, created with the Record Camera 964 option.
MRS - sets a sphere feature to be the master reset sphere. This updates the lkinspect.cfg file by
copying the location of the sphere feature into the file. The orientation and diameter are not updated.
PARTDEFS - sets the coefficient of expansion of the part for thermal error correction.
PDSRD - sets the analogue probe reference deflection for scanning measurement (CMM driver variable
PDSRD).
PROBECOFE - sets the coefficient of expansion of the probe assembly for thermal error correction.
PROBETIP - enables or disables the probe tip (CMM driver variable TPLON).
REPORTING RESETSPHEREPOSITION - sets a sphere feature to be the master reset sphere. This updates the
lkinspect.cfg file by copying the location of the sphere feature into the file. The orientation and diameter
are not updated.
SAVESNSCMES - saves sensor calibration data in the CMES format.
SETRTOL - sets the roundness tolerance for probe calibration.
SETSTOL - sets the size tolerance for probe calibration.
THREESCANS - enables scanning of curve (GCURVE) features with three scans so that the surface
normal direction can be calculated for each point on the scan, which helps in the evaluation of curves
with large bow and twist. The GCURVE is first scanned one way offset slightly to one side, then
920
scanned back offset slightly to the other side and then scanned forwards again along the curve.
XTRACTPARAM - provides parameters for the XTRACT command used in feature constructions.
See Also:
Co-ordinate Systems
38

Laser Scanning
786
811
Co-ordinate Systems
140.15.4Calibration Data Dialog Box

Calibration Data Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Calibration Data dialog box to specify a file to write data to after a probe calibration. The data is
overwritten each time a calibration is performed. The Calibration Data dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'CALDATA' (Call external program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select CALDATA from the Routine drop-down list, double-click in
the Arguments field

On - data will be written to a file after a probe calibration.
Off - data will not be written to a file after a probe calibration.
File - the file to which the data will be written.
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
921
140.15.5Set Calibration Data Dialog Box

Set Calibration Data Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Set Calibration Data dialog box to specify the creation of a calibrated sensor that is a copy of an
existing calibration, but with a different effective probe diameter. The new sensor must be defined with
an appropriate SNSDEF command, and the reference sensor must be calibrated and have the same
nominal geometry as the new sensor. The Set Calibration Data dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'CALIBSET' (Call external program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select CALIBSET from the Routine drop-down list, double-click in
the Arguments field

Sensor - select the sensor from the drop-down list. The sensor must be defined in your program.
Reference Sensor - select the reference sensor from the drop-down list. The sensor must be
calibrated.
Diameter - specify the effective probe diameter.
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
140.15.6Point Compensation Dialog Box

Point Compensation Dialog Box
922
Purpose
Use the Point Compensation dialog box to specify how probe compensation is applied for point features.
The Point Compensation dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'COMPTOUCHPT' (Call external
program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select COMPTOUCHPT from the Routine drop-down list, doubleclick in the Arguments field

Direction - specify how probe compensation is applied for point features: feature nominal direction
(default and compliant with DMIS standard, selected by None); the nearest datum axis; the direction of
the probe head orientation; or the touch direction. COMPTOUCHPT is particularly useful on manual
machines where the nominal direction is not known or cannot be achieved during measurement.
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
140.15.7Datum on Reset Sphere

Datum on Reset Sphere
Purpose
Use the Datum on Reset Sphere dialog box to set a datum on the master reset sphere. The Datum on
Reset Sphere dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'DATUMSPHERE' (Call external program)
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select DATUMSPHERE from the Routine drop-down list, doubleclick in the Arguments field

Datum Label - specify the label of the datum to set on the master reset sphere.
923
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
140.15.8Datum Transformation
Datum Transformation
Purpose
Use the Datum Transformation dialog box to obtain the angles of rotation and the translation distances
(in the current units as shown in the System Settings dialog box 101 ) for a datum relative to the machine
co-ordinate system (MCS). The Datum Transformation dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,
DME,'DATUMTRANSFORM' (Call external program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select DATUMTRANSFORM from the Routine drop-down list,
double-click in the Arguments field

Datum - specify the datum label.
Rotation X, Y, Z - use the drop-down lists to specify the variables to store the angles of rotation. The
variables must have been declared in your part program.
Translation X, Y, Z - use the drop-down lists to specify the variables to store the translation distances.
The variables must have been declared in your part program.
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
924
Advanced Commands
140.15.9Point Display Time

Point Display Time
Purpose
Use the Point Display Time dialog box to set the DRO 86 (digital read-out) display time for point
measurements. The Point Display Time dialog box adds a CALL/EXTERN,DME,'DISPLYPTTIME' (Call
external program) command to your program.
Navigation
Routine section, select Software, select DISPLYPTTIME from the Routine drop-down list, doubleclick in the Arguments field

Time - specify the DRO display time for point measurements.
See Also:
DME Commands
Main Toolbar
915
916
135
Advanced Commands
CAMIO Prompt Editor

140.15.10
CAMIO Prompt Editor
140.15.10.1
CAMIO Prompt Editor
925
Purpose
Use the CAMIO Prompt Editor application to create your own dialog boxes to display to users as your
inspection program is run. The dialog boxes created use the DMIS PROMPT command.
The PROMPT command allows DMIS programs to display dialog boxes containing a range of controls.
The syntax of the command is:
result=PROMPT/controls
where 'result' is a DMIS variable which stores the result of displaying the dialog box, and 'controls' is a
list of items (buttons, edit boxes, etc.) displayed on the dialog box.
The Prompt Editor design window shows the dialog box as it will appear when the program containing
the associated PROMPT command is run. You can add controls to the dialog box, align them and edit
them, using the options available on the toolbars and in the tab pages. You can then save your dialog
box as a .ptf file to open later, and as a template so that it can be used for creating other prompt dialog
boxes. You can also insert the associated PROMPT commands into your inspection program.
Using advanced programming 889 , ensure the appropriate variables are set up in your part program to
manipulate the result of selecting the controls in your prompt dialog box. The variables will represent
such items as the contents of controls, or the button clicked to close the dialog. For example, you
might want to list all the measured features in your prompt dialog box and let the user select one. You
could then use a variable to find which feature the user had selected. When you are creating your
prompt dialog box, you can declare the variable using the Declare Variable dialog box 894 , or you can
allow CAMIO Prompt Editor to declare it using the information in the properties of your prompt dialog
box.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Prompt in the Input / Output
section
926
You can also run Prompt Editor as a stand-alone application by starting it from the Start menu, Run
option

File menu
Help menu
926
929
Properties tab
page 931
Edit menu
File toolbar
927
929
Templates tab
page 936
View menu
928
Tools toolbar
929
Output window
936
See Also:
926

File Types
212
36
Main Toolbar
140.15.10.2

1.
Start the CAMIO Prompt Editor 924 application. The Prompt Editor design window shows a prompt
dialog box containing only OK and Cancel buttons. You can use this as the basis of your prompt
dialog box, or you can use a template from the Templates tab page 936 .
2.
To use a template, scroll through the templates and drag the one you wish to use into the design
window. Prompt Editor adds the controls from the template to your current prompt dialog box. If
duplicate controls are found, you have the option to replace them.
3.
Use the options on the Tools toolbar 929 to add controls to your prompt dialog box. When you add a
control, set up its properties on the Properties tab page 931 .
4.
Using advanced programming 889 , ensure the appropriate variables 955 are set up in your part
program to manipulate the result of selecting controls in your prompt dialog box. The variables will
represent such items as the contents of controls, or the button clicked to close the dialog. For
example, you might want to list all the measured features in your prompt dialog box and let the user
select one. You could then use a variable to find which feature the user had selected.
5.
If you want to save your prompt dialog box to use as a template for other prompt dialog boxes, give it
a name in the Template field on the Properties tab page, and select Save As Template from the File
menu 926 .
6.
To add your prompt dialog box to your part program, select Exit and update DMIS program from the
File menu.
7.
When you run your part program, your prompt dialog box will be displayed, and the result of
selecting a particular option in a particular control will be processed by the advanced programming
commands you have added for this purpose.
File Menu - Prompt Editor

140.15.10.3
File Menu - Prompt Editor

The following commands are available by selecting File from the menu bar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor
924
927
application:
New
Creates a new prompt dialog box containing default controls for you to edit.
Open
Displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing prompt dialog box (.ptf) file.
Save
Saves the current prompt dialog box as a CAMIO Prompt (.ptf) file.
Save As
Displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save your prompt dialog box as a .ptf file.
Save As Template
Adds your prompt dialog box to the Templates tab page 936 . You can then use it as a template for other
prompt dialog boxes. You must have given your dialog box a unique name in the Template field on the
Properties tab page 931 , to make sure it does not overwrite any existing template of the same name.
Export DMIS
Displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save the DMIS commands for the prompt dialog box to
a .dmi file. If you check the Include DMIS line breaks box, lines with more than 80 characters have a $
character inserted as the 80th character, and the remainder of the line is wrapped onto the next line.
Note that when CAMIO opens a DMIS program with line breaks it strips them out and adds them back in
when the file is saved. CAMIO Prompt Editor performs DMIS syntax checking before any DMIS is
exported. Any errors are reported in theoutput window 936 . Syntax checking does not check whether
any variables used by controls have been defined.
Recent File
Lists the most recently used .ptf files, with the most recent at the top of the list. (The text 'Recent File'
is not displayed when the files are listed.)
Exit
Displayed if you run CAMIO Prompt Editor stand-alone. Exits CAMIO Prompt Editor.
Exit and update DMIS program
Displayed if you run CAMIO Prompt Editor from CAMIO. Exits CAMIO Prompt Editor, and prompts you
to update your DMIS program with the commands associated with your prompt dialog box.
See Also:
File Types
Edit Menu - Prompt Editor
140.15.10.4
Edit Menu - Prompt Editor

The following commands are available by selecting Edit from the menu bar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor
924 application:
Cut
Deletes the selected control and places it on the Microsoft Windows clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected control to the clipboard.
Paste
Inserts the content of the clipboard into the prompt dialog box you are currently editing. You can then
move the copied control and edit its properties.
928
View Menu - Prompt Editor

140.15.10.5
140.15.10.5.1 View Menu - Prompt Editor
View Menu - Prompt Editor

The following commands are available by selecting View from the menu bar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor
924 application:
Toolbar
Toggles the main File toolbar
929
on and off.
Status Bar
Toggles the status bar at the bottom of the CAMIO Prompt Editor screen on and off.
Tools
Toggles the Tools toolbar
929
on and off.
Settings
Displays the Settings dialog box, where you can define the properties of the grid used to align controls in
the Prompt Editor design window.
140.15.10.5.2 Settings Dialog Box - Prompt Editor
Settings Dialog Box - Prompt Editor
Purpose
Use the Settings dialog box to define the properties of the grid used to align controls in the Prompt
Editor design window.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Prompt in the Tools section,
select the View menu, Settings option

Show grid - if checked, a grid is displayed in the Prompt Editor design window, for aligning controls.
Snap to grid - if checked, controls are 'snapped' to the nearest points on the grid when they are added
or moved.
Grid spacing - determines how close together the points are in the grid. The higher the number, the
further apart the grid points are.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
929
135
Help Menu - Prompt Editor

140.15.11
Help Menu - Prompt Editor
The following commands are available by selecting Help from the menu bar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor
application:
Help Topics
Help can be obtained from this menu item or by pressing F1.
About Prompt Editor
Displays CAMIO Prompt Editor version information.
File Toolbar - Prompt Editor

140.15.12
File Toolbar - Prompt Editor
The File toolbar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor

following options are available:
924
application provides file and edit commands. The
New
Creates a new prompt dialog box containing default controls for you to edit.
Open
Displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing prompt dialog box (.ptf) file.
Save
Saves the current prompt dialog box as a CAMIO Prompt (.ptf) file.
Cut
Deletes the selected control and places it on the Microsoft Windows clipboard.
Copy
Copies the selected control to the clipboard.
Paste
Inserts the content of the clipboard into the prompt dialog box you are currently editing. You can then
move the copied control and edit its properties.
About
Displays CAMIO Prompt Editor version information.
See Also:
File Types
Tools Toolbar - Prompt Editor

140.15.13
Tools Toolbar - Prompt Editor
930
The Tools toolbar in the CAMIO Prompt Editor 924 application provides commands for adding controls
and positioning them on your prompt dialog box, and for adding the prompt commands to your
inspection program.
When you add a control, drag using the mouse to create a control of the required size. You can change
its size and position afterwards if you need to.
Select
Selects controls on the prompt dialog box. You can then cut, copy and paste the selected control,
resize it by dragging its 'handles', and move it to reposition it on the prompt dialog box. Press SHIFT
and click on other controls to select more than one at once.
Edit tool
Allows you to create an edit box on your prompt dialog box. An edit box allows users to enter text into
the prompt dialog box.
Button tool
Allows you to create a button on your prompt dialog box.
Insert check
Allows you to create a check box on your prompt dialog box. A check box is used to indicate a true or
false state.
List tool
Allows you to create a drop-down list box, containing a list of items from which the user selects one.
Group tool
Allows you to create a group of 'radio buttons', which are used to select a single setting from the group.
Text tool
Allows you to create a text label, using printable ASCII characters.
Picture tool
Allows you to add a picture to the prompt dialog box.
Picture button tool
Allows you to create a button that displays an image from a file.
Sound control
Allows you to attach a sound file to the prompt dialog box. The sound is played when the prompt dialog
box is displayed when the program is run.
Align left, right, top, bottom
Use these buttons to align a number of controls. Select the controls using SHIFT+ the Select tool. The
controls are aligned with the one selected first.
Same width, height, size
Use these buttons to change the size of a number of controls so that they have the same width, height,
or width and height. Select the controls using SHIFT+ the Select tool. The controls are resized to
match the one selected first.
Toggle grid
Toggles the grid on and off.
931
Snap to grid
Toggles the 'snap to grid' function on and off. Snap to grid is used to align controls exactly.
DMIS
Generates the DMIS commands for the prompt dialog box and inserts them in the inspection program.
This is not available if CAMIO Prompt Editor is used stand-alone.
Export
Displays the Save As dialog box, where you can save the DMIS commands for the prompt dialog box to
a .dmi file. If you check the Include DMIS line breaks box, lines with more than 80 characters have a $
character inserted as the 80th character, and the remainder of the line is wrapped onto the next line.
Note that when CAMIO opens a DMIS program with line breaks it strips them out and adds them back in
when the file is saved. CAMIO Prompt Editor performs DMIS syntax checking before any DMIS is
exported. Any errors are reported in theoutput window 936 . Syntax checking does not check whether
any variables used by controls have been defined.
See Also:
File Types
Properties Tab Page - Prompt Editor

140.15.14
140.15.14.1
Purpose
Use the Properties tab page to select an item on the prompt dialog box (or the prompt dialog box itself),
and view or amend its properties. Select the item from the drop-down list. The properties available
change according to the item you have selected.
You can add a new item to your prompt dialog box using the tools on the Tools toolbar. Its properties
932
are displayed in this tab page as you add it, so you can change them at once.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Prompt in the Tools section
Items that are present on your prompt dialog box are also listed in the drop-down list at the top of the
Properties tab page.
Dialog
Edit box
932
Check box
933
Button
932
Drop-down list
933
933
Group of radio buttons

934
Text label
Sound
934
Picture
935
Picture button
935
935
See Also:
Main Toolbar
Prompt Editor - Dialog Properties
140.15.14.2
Prompt Editor - Dialog Properties

Caption - the text displayed in the title bar of the prompt dialog box you are creating. Use printable
ASCII characters.
Height - the height of your prompt dialog box.
Left - the position of the left edge of your dialog box. This and the Top property determine where it is
displayed on the screen.
Top - the position of the top edge of your dialog box. This and the Left property determine where it is
displayed on the screen.
Width - the width of your dialog box.
Variable - the DMIS variable which receives the result of displaying your dialog box.
Declare variable - if True, adds the DMIS 'declare variable' command when generating DMIS code. If
False, the 'declare variable' command is not generated.
Template - if you are saving your prompt dialog box as a template, type in a name for the template
here. Use printable ASCII characters.
Prompt Editor - Edit Box Properties
140.15.14.3
Prompt Editor - Edit Box Properties

Height - the height of the edit box.
Left - the position of the left edge of the edit box.
Max - the maximum value which can be entered into the edit box.
Min - the minimum value which can be entered into the edit box.
933
Name - the name used to identify the edit box. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on your
prompt dialog box.
Top - the position of the top edge of the edit box.
Variable - the name of the DMIS variable which the content of the edit box is copied to when the dialog
box is run then closed.
Width - the width of the edit box.
Prompt Editor - Button Properties
140.15.14.4
Prompt Editor - Button Properties

Command ID - the value returned by the PROMPT command if your prompt dialog box is closed by
clicking this button.
Height - the height of the button.
Left - the position of the left edge of the button.
Name - the name used to identify the button. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on your
prompt dialog box.
Text - the text displayed on the button. This is positioned centrally on the button. Use printable ASCII
characters.
Top - the position of the top edge of the button.
Width - the width of the button.
Prompt Editor - Check Box Properties
140.15.14.5
Prompt Editor - Check Box Properties

Height - the height of the check box control.
Left - the position of the left edge of the check box.
Name - the name used to identify the check box. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on your
prompt dialog box.
Text - the text displayed next to the check box. This is positioned to the right of the check box. Use
printable ASCII characters.
Top - the position of the top edge of the check box control.
Variable - the name of the DMIS variable which the check box state (checked or not checked) is copied
to when the dialog box is run then closed.
Width - the width of the check box control.
Prompt Editor - Drop-down List Box Properties
140.15.14.6
Prompt Editor - Drop-down List Box Properties

Height - the height of the drop-down list.
Items - a comma-separated list of the items to be displayed in the drop-down list. Use printable ASCII
characters.
Left - the position of the left edge of the drop-down list.
934
Name - the name used to identify the drop-down list. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on
your prompt dialog box.
Top - the position of the top edge of the drop-down list.
Type
Use this property to populate the drop-down list with items obtained from the DMIS program. The
following options are available:
Normal - the value of the Items property is used to populate the list.
Features - the list is populated with DMIS feature labels. The feature labels listed are
determined by the Items property. If this is empty, all DMIS features are listed. If not, the DMIS
features listed in the Items property (CIRCLE, SPHERE, etc.) are listed.
Tolerances - the list is populated with DMIS tolerance types. The tolerance types listed are
determined by the Items property. If this is empty, all tolerance types are listed. If not, the
tolerance types listed in the Items property are listed.
Variables - the list is populated with a list of DMIS variable names. The types of variable listed
are determined by the Items property. If this is empty, all variable types are listed. If not, the
variable types listed in the Items property are listed.
Variable - the name of the DMIS variable which the content of the drop-down list is copied to when the
dialog box is run then closed.
Width - the width of the drop-down list box.
Prompt Editor - Radio Buttons Properties
140.15.14.7
Prompt Editor - Radio Buttons Properties

Radio Buttons (Group) Properties
Button Text - a comma-separated list of labels for the radio buttons in the group box. You can change
the text for the two default buttons, and add more buttons by adding more labels. Use printable ASCII
characters.
Height - the height of the group box.
Left - the position of the left edge of the group box.
Name - the name used to identify the group box. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on your
prompt dialog box.
Text - the text displayed on the group box around the radio buttons. Use printable ASCII characters.
Top - the position of the top edge of the group box.
Variable - the name of the DMIS variable which the selection from the group of radio buttons is copied
to when the dialog box is run then closed. If the variable is a character (CHAR) variable, the text of the
selected radio button is used, otherwise the zero-based index of the radio button is used.
Width - the width of the group box control.
Prompt Editor - Text Label Properties
140.15.14.8
Prompt Editor - Text Label Properties

Height - the height of the text label (this has no effect on the size of the text in the label).
Left - the position of the left edge of the text label.
935
Name - the name used to identify the text label. This is not the text label itself, i.e. it is not displayed
on your prompt dialog box.
Text - the text displayed in the text label. Use printable ASCII characters. This is left-aligned
horizontally, and aligned vertically in the centre of the text label.
Top - the position of the top edge of the text label.
Width - the width of the text label.
Prompt Editor - Picture Properties
140.15.14.9
Prompt Editor - Picture Properties

Height - the height of the picture.
Image - the image file to be displayed in the picture control. When you click in this field, a browse
button is displayed so that you can search for the bitmap you want to show.
Left - the position of the left edge of the picture.
Name - the name used to identify the picture. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on your
prompt dialog box.
Top - the position of the top edge of the picture.
Width - the width of the picture.
Prompt Editor - Picture Button Properties
140.15.14.
10
Prompt Editor - Picture Button Properties

Command ID - the value returned by the PROMPT command if your prompt dialog box is closed by
clicking this button.
Height - the height of the picture button.
Image - the image file to be displayed in the picture button. When you click in this field, a browse
button is displayed so that you can search for the bitmap you want to show.
Left - the position of the left edge of the picture button.
Name - the name used to identify the picture button. This is not a text label, i.e. it is not displayed on
your prompt dialog box.
Pressed Image - the image file to be displayed in the picture button when it is in the pressed state.
When you click in this field, a browse button is displayed so that you can search for the bitmap you
want to show. If you do not select a bitmap, the Image bitmap is used.
Top - the position of the top edge of the picture button.
Width - the width of the picture button.
Prompt Editor - Sound Properties
140.15.14.
11
Prompt Editor - Sound Properties

Sound - the sound file to play when the prompt dialog box is run. When you click in this field, a browse
button is displayed so that you can search for the sound file you want to play.
936
Templates Tab Page - Prompt Editor

140.15.15
Templates Tab Page - Prompt Editor
Purpose
CAMIO Prompt Editor allows you to save templates for commonly used prompt dialog boxes. The
templates are listed on the Templates tab page. Drag-and-drop the template you want to use into the
Prompt Editor design window. The controls from the template are added to your current prompt dialog
box. If duplicate controls are found, you have the option to replace them.
You can add templates to the Templates tab page using the Save As Template option from the File
menu.
Note:
You must have typed in a name for your template on the Properties tab page 931 to be able to do this. If
you use the name of an existing template, it will be overwritten by the Save As Template option.
Navigation
select the Templates tab page
See Also:
File Menu
105
Main Toolbar
140.15.16 Output Window - Prompt Editor
937
Purpose
The prompt editor output window (at the foot of the Prompt Editor design window) shows the results of
the DMIS syntax checking performed by CAMIO Prompt Editor before exporting any DMIS commands.
This allows you to correct any errors before exporting DMIS commands. (You can export DMIS
commands using the Export option on the File menu 926 or Tools toolbar 929 .) The errors are displayed
in the window when you select Export DMIS from the File menu, then click Save in the Save As dialog
box.
Navigation
if the output window is not shown, drag the bar from the bottom of the Prompt Editor window
upwards
See Also:
Main Toolbar
140.16Create New Label Dialog Box
938
Purpose
Use the Create New Label dialog box to create a label and insert it in your program. The label can then
be used as a target by the JUMPTO, ERROR, RESUME and ITERAT commands. Type in a name for
the label (without character spaces), and type in a program line. The label is inserted immediately
before the program line you type in. The Code field shows you your program code around the line you
have selected (this changes if you type in a different line number, to show the code around the new line
number).
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Label from the Jump to
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Jump to Wizard, click New

Name - type in a name for the label.
Line - type in the program line where your label will be inserted. Your label is inserted in parentheses
immediately before the line you specify.
Code - the code around the program line. This allows you to see where your label will be inserted in the
program.
See Also:
Jump to Wizard
910
Jump to Label Dialog Box (JUMPTO Command) 911

Error Dialog Box
949
Resume Dialog Box

Iterate Dialog Box
950
649

Main Toolbar
653
135
Advanced Commands
939
140.17Value Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Value dialog box to assign a value from a measured feature or tolerance to a variable. This can
be useful if, for example, you wish to find the diameter of a circle, or the number of touch points taken.
The Value dialog box adds a VALUE (Set variable value) command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Value in the Variables
section

Variable - the variable you wish to assign the value to.
Label - the name of the measured feature or tolerance from which you want to obtain the value.
Type
The type of value you wish to obtain.
Size - the feature size (for features with size, i.e. circle, arc, cone, cylinder, sphere). For example,
selecting Size for a circle feature would obtain the diameter of the circle.
Sample points - the number of touch points (i.e. PTDATA) taken.
Deviation - the deviation from the feature nominal.
Error - the amount by which the deviation is greater than the tolerance. If the feature is within tolerance,
this is zero.
Out of tolerance - .TRUE. if the feature is out of tolerance, or .FALSE. if the feature is within tolerance.
Within tolerance - .TRUE. if the feature is within tolerance, or .FALSE. if the feature is out of tolerance.
Zone size - the size of the tolerance zone including any bonus for MMC (maximum material condition)
or LMC (least material condition).
Feature/Tolerance - select Feature to show only measured features in the Label drop-down list.
Select Tolerance to show only measured tolerances in the Label drop-down list.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
940
140.18Input/Output Device Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Input/Output Device dialog box to define storage devices for input and output of data. Select
File to define a file (such as a text file or a CAD file) as a device, giving it a device name so that it can be
opened and closed as a device. Select Serial port to define a serial device for user-formatted inputoutput (i.e. so that data transmitted by a serial port can be read).
You can then use the Open Device dialog box to open the device, so that CAMIO can send data to it or
receive data from it. A device can contain one of: DMIS output; vendor format (VFORM) output; sensor,
rotary table, etc. data; CAD data; user-formatted data.
The Input/Output Device dialog box adds a DID( )=DEVICE (Define user device) command to your
program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Define in the Input / Output
section

Device type - select File to define a file (e.g. text file, CAD file) as a storage device. Select Serial port
to define a serial device.
Label - type in a device name for the file or serial port.
File - displayed if you have selected a device type of File. Type in the name of the file and its path, or
double-click in this field to display the Device dialog box where you can browse for a file to specify as a
device.
Port - displayed if you have selected a device type of Serial port. Select a port to use as a serial device
from the drop-down list.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
712
640
135
Advanced Commands
941
140.19Open Device Dialog Box
Input
Output
Purpose
Use the Open Device dialog box to open a file or comm (communications) port that has been specified
as a storage device using the Input/Output Device dialog box. When you open a device, you can obtain
data from it or send data to it. You can then close the device, using the Close Device dialog box, so it is
available for use in other programs.
A device can contain one of: FDATA (i.e. DMIS output; vendor format (VFORM) output); sensor, rotary
table, etc. data; CAD data; user-formatted data.
The Open Device dialog box adds an OPEN/DID (Open external file) command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Open in the Input / Output
section

Device - lists the available storage devices. Select one to open from the drop-down list.
Input - if selected, the device is to be used to provide input to the program. The version of the dialog box
shown above left is displayed. If the device is a serial port or a file of user-formatted data, do not select
any other options in this dialog. Click OK. You can then read the user-formatted data into the part
942
program using the Read from Input Device dialog box 943 . If the device is a CAD file, check the CAD
box. When you click OK, the CAD file is loaded into the model window 49 .
Output - if selected, the device is to be used to receive output from the program. The version of the
dialog box shown above right is displayed. If the device is a serial port or a file of user-formatted data, do
not select any other options in this dialog. Click OK. You can then write the user-formatted data into
the device using the Write to Output Device dialog box 944 . If the device is to receive DMIS or vendor
format output, check the User defined box and select Standard (for DMIS output) or Vendor (for vendor
format output).
Append - displayed if you have selected Output. If selected, any data written to the selected file is
appended to the existing data in the file.
New - displayed if you have selected Output. If selected, any data written to the selected file overwrites
any existing data in the file.
User defined - available if you have selected Output. If checked, data in the file is formatted as either
DMIS output (the .out DMIS output file, if you select Standard) or as vendor output (the .res report file, if
you select Vendor). Using the Device commands allows .out and .res files to be selected and sent to
locations other than the default location specified in the Open Inspection dialog box, Program tab page
168 . This allows access to vendor or DMIS output as the program runs.
Standard - select this to specify that data in the output file is formatted as DMIS output (as in the .out
file).
Vendor - select this to specify that data in the output file is formatted as vendor output (as in the .res
file). Select the configuration of the vendor output (as defined using the Vendor Output Format dialog
box 480 ) in the associated drop-down list.
Input options - CAD - displayed if you have selected Input. If checked, the device is a CAD file. Select
the format of the CAD file in the adjacent drop-down list. When you click OK, the CAD file is opened in
the model window, replacing any that is already there. As well as the Open external file (OPEN/DID)
command, this option adds a GEOM/DID command to your part program. This allows you to reference
geometry from DMIS by comparing touch data to CAD surfaces 378 .
Sensor - if checked, the device is a file including sensor data.
Part co-ordinate system - if checked, the device is a file including part co-ordinate system (datum)
data.
Rotary table - if checked, the device is a file including rotary table data.
Feature - if checked, the device is a file including feature data.
See Also:
942

File Types
940
712
640
36
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.20Close Device Dialog Box
943
Purpose
Use the Close Device dialog box to close a file or serial port specified as a storage device using the
Input/Output Device dialog box. You can choose whether to keep or delete the file when you close it.
The Close Device dialog box adds a CLOSE/DID (Close file) command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Close in the Input / Output
section

Label - lists the available storage devices. Select one to close from the drop-down list.
Keep - if selected, the file is saved (to the location specified in the File field on the Input/Output Device
dialog box) when you close the device.
Delete - if selected, the file is deleted when you close the device.
See Also:
Outputting Data
Main Toolbar
940
449
135
Advanced Commands
140.21Read from Input Device Dialog Box
Purpose
944
Use the Read from Input Device dialog box to read data from a file specified as a storage device using
the Input/Output Device dialog box, and opened using the Open Device dialog box. Select the file from
which to read data in the Label field. Then set up a list of variables (you can create these using the
Declare Multiple Variables dialog box) to read the data into, and specify the length of the data items for
each variable.
For example, if you have variables VAR1 and VAR2 each with width 6 and precision 4, and the first two
items of data in the file you are reading are 1.2345 and 6.7891, then the value 1.2345 (a value that has
six characters and four decimal places) will be placed into VAR1 and 6.7891 will be placed into VAR2.
But if the format of your variables does not match the format of your data, the file will be read incorrectly.
For example, if VAR1 and VAR2 have width 5 and precision 3, then the value 1.234 (with five characters
and three decimal places) will be placed into VAR1 and the value 56.78 will be placed into VAR2 (the
precision of 3 is overridden by the width of 5).
The Read from Input Device dialog box adds a READ/DID (Read external file) command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Read in the Input / Output
section

Label - lists the available storage devices. Select one from the drop-down list to read from.
Variable - lists the available variables. Select variables from this list to read the data into.
Width - the number of characters (including any negative sign and decimal point) in the data item you
wish to read into the selected variable.
Precision - the number of decimal places in the data item you wish to read into the selected variable.
Variable/Width/Precision list - lists the variables into which the data will be read, and the length of the
data items for each variable.
Add - adds the details from the Variable, Width and Precision fields to the Variable/Width/Precision list.
Delete - deletes the selected variable from the Variable/Width/Precision list.
Edit - changes the details for the selected variable in the Variable/Width/Precision list. Highlight a
variable in the list, then change the width or precision, or select a different variable, and click Edit to
apply your changes.
See Also:
940

Main Toolbar
896
135
Advanced Commands
140.22Write to Output Device Dialog Box
945
Purpose
Use the Write to Output Device dialog box to write formatted text to a selected output storage device
created using the Input/Output Device dialog box, and opened using the Open Device dialog box. Select
the output device at the bottom of this dialog box. Then set up a list of variables (you can create these
using the Declare Multiple Variables dialog box) to write the data to, and specify the length of the data
items for each variable.
For example, if you have variables VAR1 and VAR2 each with width 6 and precision 4, and the first two
items of data you are writing to the device are 1.2345 and 6.7891, then the value 1.2345 (a value that has
six characters and four decimal places) will be placed into VAR1 and 6.7891 will be placed into VAR2.
But if the format of your variables does not match the format of your data, the data will be written
incorrectly to the device. For example, if VAR1 and VAR2 have width 5 and precision 3, then in this
example the value 1.235 (rounded, with three decimal places) will be placed into VAR1 and the value
6.789 will be placed into VAR2.
The Write to Output Device dialog box adds a WRITE/DID (Write external file) command to your
program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Write in the Input / Output
section

Label - if you select an output device of Device, lists the available storage devices. Select one from the
drop-down list to write to.
Variable - lists the available variables. Select variables from this list to write the data to.
Width - the minimum number of characters (including any negative sign and decimal point) in the data
item you wish to write to the selected variable. For example, a value of 2.48 with a width of 5 and a
precision of 2 would be written as *2.48 where * is a character space. A value of 1123.2554 with a width
of 5 and a precision of 2 would be written as 1123.26, because it is rounded up but characters before the
decimal point are not truncated.
Precision - the number of decimal places in the data item you wish to write to the selected variable.
946
Variable/Width/Precision list - lists the variables into which the data will be written, and the length of
the data items from each variable.
Add - adds the details from the Variable, Width and Precision fields to the Variable/Width/Precision list.
Delete - deletes the selected variable from the Variable/Width/Precision list.
Edit - changes the details for the selected variable in the Variable/Width/Precision list. Highlight a
variable in the list, then change the width or precision, or select a different variable, and click Edit to
apply your changes.
Output device - select an output device for the data from the variables. Select Terminal to write the
data to the Output window 82 ; select File to write the data to a file (the vendor format .res file); select
Printer to write the data to the current printer, select Serial port to write the data to the current serial
port; and select Device to write the data to the device selected in the Label field.
See Also:
940

Writing Formatted ASCII Text to a File
File Types
896
455
36
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.23Macro Dialog Box
Purpose
947
Use the Macro dialog box to define a macro routine (a block of DMIS commands) for repetitive tasks.
The Define macro (MACRO) command indicates the start of the block of commands, and the End macro
(ENDMAC) command indicates the end. The macro is executed using the Call external program (CALL)
statement. When the program encounters a MACRO command, it reads the subsequent commands up
to the ENDMAC and checks the syntax, but does not execute the commands. When a CALL command
is issued, the program jumps to the MACRO command and executes all the commands up to the
ENDMAC. After executing the ENDMAC, the program returns to the line after the CALL command.
Type in a label for your macro, then add parameters for it to the Parameter/Type list. Click OK. Add
any commands you want to include in the macro to your program, then use the End Macro command
from the advanced commands to close the macro. If the macro has been defined using a parameter list,
the values to be passed to the macro must be included in the CALL command. You can set the values
up using the Call Macro dialog box.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Define in the Macro section

Label - the name of the macro.
Parameter - a parameter to include in the macro.
Type - the parameter type.
Parameter list - the parameters that you have added to the macro.
Add - adds the parameter from the Parameter field to the list of parameters in the macro.
Delete - deletes the highlighted parameter from the parameter list.
Set - use this button to change the highlighted parameter in the parameter list. Highlight the parameter
you wish to change, overtype its name or change its type, then click Set to apply your changes.
See Also:
Call Macro Dialog Box
915
948

End Macro Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
212
947
135
Advanced Commands
140.24End Macro Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the End Macro dialog box to add an ENDMAC (End macro) command to your part program. This
indicates the end of a block of DMIS commands that form a macro routine and begin with a MACRO
948
(Define macro) command.

Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click End in the Macro section
See Also:
Macro Dialog Box
946

Main Toolbar
212
135
Advanced Commands
140.25Call Macro Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Call Macro dialog box to set up the values of the parameter list used when calling the
associated macro. Highlight a parameter in the parameter list, type in its value in the Value field, then
click Set. The values are then used in the Call external program (CALL) command for the macro, to
pass the correct values to the macro.
Navigation
Routing section, select Macro, select a macro with parameters in the Routine field, double-click in
the Arguments field
See Also:
Macro Dialog Box
949
946
915
212
Advanced Commands
140.26Error Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Error dialog box to determine what happens when a touch error occurs. Select the type of
action, and specify the type of touch error for which the action will be taken.
If you do not specify an action type for a particular error type, the normal CMM error message is
displayed.
The Error dialog box adds an ERROR command to your program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Error in the Error Recovery
section

Off - disables error recovery.
Automatic - uses internal error recovery. For example, if there is an illegal touch error, CAMIO will
make one more attempt to take the touch before determining that an illegal touch has occurred.
950
Jump to label - when a touch error occurs, the program jumps to the line identified by the label in the
Label field.
Label - the label in the program to which error recovery will automatically transfer if Jump to label is
selected. The label must be at the start of a command line. You can insert labels in your program
using the Create New Label dialog box 937 .
All - if selected, all supported errors (including illegal touch, no touch detected and probe not armed
errors) are handled by the method selected in the Type box.
Illegal touch - if selected, illegal touch errors are handled by the method selected in the Type box.
No touch detected - if selected, 'no touch' errors are handled by the method selected in the Type box.
Probe not armed - if selected, errors where the probe is not ready to take the next touch, i.e. it has
become 'stuck', are handled by the method selected in the Type box.
CAS - CAS errors in the probe path are not usually repeated when the program is re-run. If the CAS
option is selected, you should also select the Jump to label option and type in a label in the Label field
so that the program jumps back to the line identified by the label and re-runs.
Analogue calibration - errors in the calculation of the calibration are not usually repeated when the
program is re-run. If the Analogue calibration option is selected, you should also select the Jump to
label option and type in a label in the Label field so that the program jumps back to the line identified by
the label and re-runs.
Deflection limit - if selected, 'deflection limit' errors are handled by the method selected in the Type
box. These are errors where the upper and/or lower deflection limits of the probe have been exceeded.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.27Resume Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Resume dialog box to determine what happens after the program has jumped to a particular line
in response to an error (set up using the Jump to label option on the Error dialog box 949 ). You can use
this to make the program resume at a particular point.
The Resume dialog box adds a RESUME command to your program.
951
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Resume in the Error
Recovery section

Jump to label - the program jumps to the line identified by the label in the adjacent field. The label
must be at the start of a command line. You can insert labels in your program using the Create New
Label dialog box 937 .
Error line - the program resumes from the line with the error.
End of measurement - the program resumes from the end of the current MEAS block. If the program
is not in a MEAS block, it resumes from the line with the error.
Next line - the program resumes from the line after the line with the error.
Start of measurement - the program resumes from the start of the current MEAS block. If the program
is not in a MEAS block, it resumes from the line with the error.
Stop program - the program stops.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
140.28Start of External File Declaration Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Start of External File Declaration dialog box to add an XTERN (Check external file status)
command to your part program. This indicates the start of an external file block where any programs,
scripts or macros that are used within the current program but which are accessed from external files
are declared, using the External File Declaration dialog box. When the program is run, it checks that
any files listed in the external file block exist. Use the End of External File Declaration dialog box to
close the external file block.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Start in the External section
See Also:
External File Declaration Dialog Box
952
End of External File Declaration Dialog Box

Main Toolbar
135
Advanced Commands
952
952
140.29External File Declaration Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the External File Declaration dialog box to specify the name of an external file. This adds a Call
external file (EXTFIL) command to your program for each file specified. When executed, the program
checks that the files exist. If a file does not exist, the program fails and stops. This can be used at the
start of a program which contains a number of external files, to check that those files exist.
You must insert a Check external file status (XTERN) program line before the Call external file
commands (using the Start of External File Declaration dialog box). You must also insert an End of
external file (ENDXTN) program line after the Call external file commands (using the End of External File
Declaration dialog box).
If the external files exist, they can be called or written to by other advanced commands.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Define External in the
External section

File - type in the name of the file and its path. You can double-click in this field to display the External
File dialog box, where you can browse for the external file.
Program - select this if the file is a DMIS program.
System - select this if the file is an executable (.exe) file.
See Also:
Start of External File Declaration Dialog Box
End of External File Declaration Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
951
952
135
Advanced Commands
140.30End of External File Declaration Dialog Box

953
Purpose
Use the End of External File Declaration dialog box to add an ENDXTN (End external declaration)
command to your part program. This indicates the end of an external file block where any programs,
scripts or macros that are used within the current program but which are accessed from external files
are declared, using the External File Declaration dialog box. When the program is run, it checks that
any files listed in the external file block exist.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click End in the External section
See Also:
External File Declaration Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
952
135
Advanced Commands
140.31Program Header Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Program Header dialog box to specify external program identification (DMISMN) for a DMIS
input program. Type in a text string, using ASCII printable characters. DMISMN designates the
beginning of the main input program and it must be the first line of executable code in the DMIS input
program. The DMIS version of the program is added automatically to the end of the DMISMN command
in the program for version 04.0 and above (if none is added version 3.0 is assumed). If the Check
command box is checked on the Conformance tab page 128 of the Configuration dialog box, commands
in the program are checked against the DMIS version specified in the DMISMN command. Errors are
generated if a command is encountered that does not comply with the DMIS version.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Program Header in the
Program section
See Also:
Part Program Window
140.32Subroutine Header Dialog Box

954
Purpose
Use the Subroutine Header dialog box to specify external program identification (DMISMD) for a DMIS
input module, i.e. to identify an external program called from a DMIS program. Type in a text string,
using ASCII printable characters. DMISMD designates the beginning of the input module and must be
the first line of executable code in the DMIS input module. The DMIS version of the program is added
automatically to the end of the DMISMD command in the program for version 04.0 and above (if none is
added version 3.0 is assumed). If the Check command box is checked on the Conformance tab page
128 of the Configuration dialog box, commands in the program are checked against the DMIS version
specified in the DMISMD command. Errors are generated if a command is encountered that does not
comply with the DMIS version.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click Subroutine Header from the

Description - type in a description of the sub-routine, using ASCII printable characters.
Arguments - dummy parameters that are populated by the CALL/EXTERN, DMIS command in the
calling program. For example, this code in the calling program:
SNSLCT/SA(0)
S(sensor_90_0)=SNSDEF/PROBE,INDEX,POL,90,0,0,0,1,127,2
S(sensor_90_90)=SNSDEF/PROBE,INDEX,POL,90,90,0,0,1,127,2
CALL/EXTERN,DMIS,'calibsat',1,'sensor_90_0'
CALL/EXTERN,DMIS,'calibsat',2,'sensor_90_90'
can be used to supply the value of 1 or 2 to the sub-routine calibsat, where the arguments are satsphere
and slabel. If a value of 1 is passed, sensor 90,0 is calibrated and if a value of 2 is passed, sensor 90,90
is calibrated:
DMISMD/'External
Routine',satsphere,slabel
DECL/LOCAL,INTGR,locala
DECL/LOCAL,CHAR,512,localb
locala=ASSIGN/satsphere
localb=ASSIGN/slabel
IF/(locala.EQ.1)
F(SPH001)=FEAT/SPHERE,OUTER,CART,100,100,100,20,0,0,1
ELSE
955
F(SPH001)=FEAT/SPHERE,OUTER,CART,200,100,100,20,0,0,1
ENDIF
MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN
CALIB/SENS,S(localb),F(SPH001),4
ENDMES
SAVE/SA(localb)
ENDFIL
See Also:
Part Program Window
140.33End of File Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the End of File dialog box to add an ENDFIL (End of part program) command to your part program.
This indicates the end of the program and should always be the last statement in a program.
Navigation
With a part program open, select Advanced from the main toolbar, click End of File from the
See Also:
Part Program Window
45
141 Variables

Variables are used with CAMIO to store information. There are three stages to using a variable:
1.
Create a new variable by declaring it (using the Declare Variable dialog box, or one of the other
Declare Variable options from the Advanced commands).
2.
Store data in the variable by assigning a value or the result of a calculation to it (using the
Assignment wizard).
3.
Process the stored data in your part program.
A variable can be one of the following types:

Integer and long integer - whole numbers.
Real and double - variables which can have decimal values.
956
Boolean - variables with a value of true or false.

Character - variables that contain characters (the printable ASCII characters in the range 0-255).
Vector/coordinate - variables that contain a triplet of numbers representing a Cartesian or polar coordinate, or a direction vector.
The variable scope is also defined when the variable is declared:
Local (Module) Variable - a variable available only to the current macro or sub-program.
The values of local variables are not saved to a file. Therefore, if you close CAMIO, then restart it and
run your programs containing these variables again, the previous values of these local variables will have
been lost. (To save local variable values you could use advanced programming commands to write them
to a storage device then read them back from the device.)
Global (Program) Variable - a variable available to this sub-program, its main program, and all other
sub-programs of its main program.
The values of global variables are not saved to a file. Therefore, if you close CAMIO, then restart it and
run your programs containing these variables again, the previous values of these global variables will
have been lost. (To save global variable values you could use advanced programming commands to
write them to a storage device then read them back from the device.)
Common (System) Variable - a variable available to all programs. Common variables are saved to the
file common_variables.dat in C:\LK\Appdata\LKDmis.
See Also:
Variables and Arrays
956
142 Variables and Arrays

It is possible to declare several variables at once using the Declare Variable dialog box. Declaring
several variables at once allows you to specify variable arrays. These can be useful for creating arrays of
character strings, or to manage multi-dimensional arrays of feature data, but they can only be used with
a limited number of commands, e.g. DECL and ASSIGN.
Arrays of character strings can be used in program loops to increment feature names and to store the
feature names in the variables, as in this example:
$$ EXAMPLE1
DECL/LOCAL,CHAR,512,arraynames[50],names
DECL/LOCAL,INTGR,a1
DO/a1,1,50
arraynames[a1]=assign/concat('myname',STR(a1))
ENDDO
$$ program code
DO/a1,1,50
names=assign/arraynames[a1]
f(names)=feat/point,cart,a1,0,0,0,0,1
Variables and Arrays
957
meas/point,f(names),1
endmes
ENDDO
The above program measures 50 point features and stores the feature names in the names generated
from the character variable.
Multi-dimensional arrays
Multi-dimensional arrays can be used for separation of feature data, for example to separate point feature
data from circle feature data. Data can be further sub-divided, for example to separate inner circle
feature data from outer circle feature data. The following example code separates point feature data from
circle feature data:
$$ EXAMPLE 2
DECL/LOCAL,CHAR,512,arraynames2[50,2],names2
DECL/LOCAL,INTGR,a1
DO/a1,1,50
arraynames2[a1,1]=assign/concat('point',STR(a1))
arraynames2[a1,2]=assign/concat('circle',STR(a1))
ENDDO
$$ program code
DO/a1,1,50
names2=assign/arraynames2[a1,1]
f(names2)=feat/point,cart,a1,0,0,0,0,1
meas/point,f(names2),1
endmes
names2=assign/arraynames2[a1,2]
f(names2)=feat/circle,inner,cart,a1,0,0,0,0,1,10
meas/circle,f(names2),3
endmes
ENDDO
The above program measures 50 point features and 50 circle features stores the feature names in the
names generated from the character variables.
See Also:
Variables
955
958
143 Advanced Programming Operators

The following arithmetic operators can be used in constructing advanced programming commands:
+
positive value
negative value
**
exponential
multiplication
division
addition
subtraction
The following relational operators can be used in constructing advanced programming commands:
.EQ.
equal to
.NE.
not equal to
.LT.
less than
.LE.
less than or equal to
.GT.
greater than
.GE.
greater than or equal to
Example:
The program line:
IF/(PM.EQ.0)
would evaluate whether the variable PM was equal to 0. Note the '.' character that must be placed before
and after the relational operator EQ. If you have chosen to view descriptive text instead of program text,
this program line is displayed in the part program window as:
If (PM equals 0)
144 Ordinals in Advanced Programming

You can use the Obtain command to gather information from a data item and assign it to a variable. For
example, if you need to make a decision based on the result of a measurement, you might need to
obtain the error value calculated from the output of a particular feature.
Each data item has a set of parameters, such as the X, Y and Z axes, the i, j, k vectors and so on. The
number of parameters depends on the data item. (If you are viewing program text, you can see the
parameters when you look at your program in the part program window, but not if you are viewing the
descriptive text.) To specify which parameter to obtain from the list of parameters for a data item, you
have to specify its ordinal when you use the Obtain command. (If you use the Obtain Value wizard, this
is made easy for you because you can select the ordinal by its name. However, the Obtain Value
wizard only supports features and tolerances, whereas the Obtain command also supports storage
devices, sensors and rotary tables.) The ordinal gives the position of the parameter in the list of
959
parameters, from the first item after the / character. For example, in the bilateral position tolerance T(0)
=TOL/CORTOL,XAXIS,-0.1,0.1, to obtain the string 'XAXIS' you would specify ordinal 2.
Ordinals for feature nominals and actuals
If you wish to print this table and it does not print clearly, print it from the ordinals pdf file installed with
Metris CAMIO.
(where r = radius, a = angle, h = height, o=orientation, s=surface, n=normal, c=centre point, l=left,
r=right)
Ordinals for buffer points (PTMEAS)
1
CART
POL
Ordinals for tolerance actuals

(the table shows the most useful ordinals, not all the ordinals)
1
ANGL
Deviation INTOL
OUTOL
ANGLB
Angle
ANGLR
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
CIRLTY
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
INTOL
OUTOL
DAT(x)
960
COMPOS Pattern
16
(COMPO Feature
S cont.)
1
Pattern INTOL
tolerance OUTOL
zone
17
18
Feature Feature
tolerance condition
zone
3
CONCEN Tolerance INTOL

zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
CORTOL XAXIS
Deviation INTOL
YAXIS
OUTOL
ZAXIS
RADIUS
ANGLE
CRNOUT Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
CYLCTY
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
DIAM
Deviation INTOL
OUTOL
DISTB
INTOL
OUTOL
FLAT
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
PARLEL
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
PERP
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
POS
2D
3D
PROFL
Lower
Upper
INTOL
tolerance tolerance OUTOL
PROFP
Deviation INTOL
OUTOL
PROFS
Lower
Upper
INTOL
tolerance tolerance OUTOL
RAD
Deviation INTOL
OUTOL
NOMINL Distance Lower

Upper
LIMIT
Lower
tolerance tolerance
limit
Upper
limit
XAXIS
YAXIS
ZAXIS
PT2PT
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
STRGHT Tolerance INTOL

zone
OUTOL
SYM
Tolerance INTOL
zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
TRNOUT Tolerance INTOL

zone
OUTOL
DAT(x)
WIDTH
961
Deviation INTOL
OUTOL
Ordinals for nominal polar sensors

(these depend on the sensor, e.g. for a polar sensor with a spherical tip, ordinal 11 is sphere and there
is no ordinal 12)
PROBE FIXED
INDEX
POL
A angle B angle
10
11
12
Length Diamete Sphere Length

r
Cylinder
of
cylinder
Ordinals for actual sensors

1
OFFSET
Diameter
Ordinals for a file device

1
STOR
Filename
and path
145 Intrinsic Functions

Intrinsic functions are not commands in themselves but they can be used in DMIS commands to
implement numeric, character and system functions. They are mainly mathematical (like cos, sin, tan,
etc.) or manipulate strings (e.g. CONCAT for concatenating two or more strings).
The functions supported by CAMIO are listed for the supported DMIS commands in the characterisation
file chfile.dmi. This is located in C:\LK\Appdata\LKDmis. You can generate this file using the Generate
characterisation file option on the Conformance tab page 128 of the Configuration dialog box (you must
select DMIS version 3.0 on this tab page to ungrey the option).
For details of intrinsic functions refer to the DMIS standard (Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard
from the CAM-I DMIS National Standards Committee (DNSC)).
CAMIO supports the intrinsic functions SDATETIME and SELAPSETIME, for reporting on the current
time and elapsed time during program execution.
Sample code
962
$$ Declare a variable for the start time and elapsed time

DECL/LOCAL,CHAR,512,start_time,elapsed_time
$$ Capture the time at the start of inspection
start_time=ASSIGN/sdatetime( )
$$
$$ Inspection program
$$
$$ Get the elapsed time by comparing the start time to the current time
elapsed_time=ASSIGN/selapsetime(start_time,sdatetime( ),LONG)
146 Model Commands

146.1
Purpose
The Model commands allow you to manipulate the CAD model in the model window. You can position
the part in the machine volume before creating programs off-line, and you can save and retrieve this
location when running the inspection program on-line. This is useful when several different programs are
used when measuring a part. You save the location as a work cell at the end of the model location
procedure, and you can retrieve the location using the Load Work Cell option from the Model commands.
You align the model with the machine axes using entities picked from the model. To start this process,
click Locate.
You can also add entities to the CAD model using the other options on this menu.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar

Model
Work Cell
963
CAD Tools
964
Record
963
CAD Geometry
964
964
Model Commands
963
See Also:
Opening and Saving CAD Files 224
Model Window
49
Aligning the Part
620

Main Toolbar
73
135
Menus and Toolbars
104
File Types
146.2 Model

The Model section is accessed from the Model tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Open Model - displays the Open dialog box, where you can browse for an existing model file. If you
select a .sat or .sab file which has no units currently assigned, the File Units dialog box 965 is displayed.
Select the units. The data in the .sat or .sab file is scaled to the units and all measurement data is
displayed in those units. Saving changes to the file also saves the unit system selected.
You can also drag a model file into the model window from Microsoft Windows Explorer.
All layers which make up the opened model file are assigned to a single 0 layer. The new layer appears
in the Model Explorer dialog box and defaults to the name of the model file with the suffix _0
Note:
Data is stored internally in millimetres.
Opening another model when a model is already present in the model window
You can use the Model Open option again to load another model into the model window. The newlyinserted file takes the CAD origin of the original file. All layers which make up the inserted model file are
assigned to a single 0 layer. The new layer appears in the Model Explorer dialog box and defaults to the
name of the inserted model file with the suffix _0. This option is useful where files can be merged to
form an assembly and where it is necessary to perform a full inspection of the part, for example,
inspection of a wheel or similar part where the file provided contains only a segment of the part.
Close Model - closes the model currently open in the model window. If you have made changes to the
model, you are prompted to save them, or you can cancel the action and keep the model file open.
Save Model - saves changes made to the current CAD model file. The file is saved to the default
ACIS Binary File (.sab file). Constructed, measured and nominal features are saved with the model so
that they can no longer be identified as constructed, measured or nominal features.
Save Model As - displays the Model Save dialog box, where you can save the current model as a
specific file type (rather than the default .sab file), and specify its name and location.
Extract PMI - Extracts PMI data that has been saved with the CAD model.
146.3 Work Cell

The Work Cell section is accessed from the Model tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Load Work Cell - displays the Open Work Cell dialog box
966
, where you can browse for an existing
964
work cell.
Close Work Cell - closes the current work cell, returning the model to its position as it was before you
loaded the work cell. A warning is displayed that closing the work cell will change the current datum.
This is reset to the machine co-ordinate system.
Locate - displays the Model Locate - Orientate Part dialog box 967 which allows you to position the
model by aligning it with one of the machine axes, then rotating and positioning it.
Locate Rotary Table - displays the Rotary Table Locate dialog box 1007 , where you can locate the rotary
table within the simulated CMM environment.
Locate Cartesian - displays the Model Locate dialog box which enables the model to be 'dragged' into
position with the mouse.
146.4 Record

The Record section is accessed from the Model tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Camera - use the Camera option to store the current view of the CAD model in the part program. A
CALL/EXTERN line will be added with the coordinates of the model view. When the program reaches this
line on a subsequent run, the view of the model as recorded will be restored.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, use the Record section
146.5 CAD Tools

The CAD Tools section is accessed from the Model tab on the main toolbar and contains the following
options:
Rotate - displays the Rotate Model dialog box
generate a rotated copy.
975
allowing you to rotate the existing CAD model, and/or
Translate - displays the Translate Model dialog box

CAD model.
976
allowing you to manipulate the position of the
Mirror - displays the Mirror Model dialog box allowing you to specify the axis for mirroring the CAD
model, and/or to generate a mirrored copy of the CAD model.
146.6 CAD Geometry

The CAD Geometry section is accessed from the Model tab on the main toolbar and contains the
following options:
Add Slice - displays the Add Slice dialog box 983 , where you can create one or more free curves by
intersecting the model faces with a series of defined planes.
Add Plane - displays the Add Plane dialog box
978
, where you can add a plane to a CAD model.

Model Commands
Add Point - displays the Add Point dialog box
979
965
, where you can add points to a CAD model.
Add Cylinder - displays the Add Cylinder dialog box

model.
980
, where you can add a cylinder to the CAD
Add Curve - displays the Add Curve dialog box 985 , where you can add a curve entity to a CAD model.
Add Torus - displays the Add Torus dialog box
measured cylinders.
981
, where you can add a torus between two previously-
Add Circular Slice - displays the Add Circular Slice dialog box 986 , where you can create one or more
3D curves by intersecting the CAD surfaces with specified cones or cylinders.
Offset Surface - displays the Offset Surface dialog box 990 , where you can offset all the points on a
selected surface of the CAD model by a specified distance.
File - displays the Geometry Device dialog box
CAD file is a geometry device.
992
Query - displays the Query Geometry dialog box

on the model.
, where you can specify that a device defined from a
989
, where you can view details of geometry you select
Organise - displays the Organise Geometry dialog box 991 , where you can view the current layers in the
model, create new layers, and move the select geometry to a different layer.
Entities - displays the Geometry Entities dialog box
geometry present in a CAD model file.
992
, where you can define a subset of the base
Add Labels - displays the Add Labels dialog box, where you can add a label to a selected entity on the
CAD model.
146.7 File Units Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the File units dialog box to specify the units to be used when reading in a .sat or .sab file that does
not have a unit system specified. This usually only occurs with older files. Select the units. The data in
the .sat or .sab file is scaled to the units and all measurement data is displayed in those units. Saving
changes to the file also saves the unit system selected.
Navigation
Displayed when the .sat or .sab file currently being opened does not have a unit system specified
966
See Also:
File Types
36
146.8 Open Work Cell Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Open Work Cell dialog box to select a work cell (.wcl) file containing transformation information
to apply to your model. CAMIO reads the work cell data from the file and applies the transformation
information in it to the model.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Load Work Cell from the Work Cell section

Insert location datum - if checked, rotate (ROTATE) and translate (TRANS) commands are added to
the part program and executed to set the current datum.
Work cell description - a description of the .wcl file. The description is created when the .wcl file is
saved using the Model Locate - Save Work Cell dialog box 974 .
Model Commands
967
See Also:
Model Commands
962
Main Toolbar
146.9 Model Locate - Orientate Part Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Model Locate - Orientate Part dialog box to align the part with one of the machine axes. This
fixes the primary axis. Usually the base of the CMM is orientated in the X-Y plane and the part is
located on the machine bed or on a fixture between rails. Therefore the Axis options default to the
minus Z axis.
To supply the information required for orientating the model, you must pick features on the model. There
are two modes for this:
Point mode - CAMIO treats any 'pick' you make (where you click on the model to select a feature) as a
point feature. This is projected onto the model. Once you have picked three points, CAMIO fits a plane
through the points and the plane normal is aligned with the selected axis.
Feature mode - CAMIO uses the geometry of a single feature to orientate the model. The normal of the
feature is aligned with the selected axis.
The mode used is determined when you make the first pick. If the picked feature defines a position and
a direction, you are prompted to use it to orientate the model. If you do, 'feature mode' is used.
Otherwise, 'point mode' is used and the model is not orientated until you have made three picks.
When you pick the feature, the Pick Action dialog box 968 is displayed for you to specify how the feature
you have picked on the model is to be used in the location.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Locate in the Work Cell section
968
- displays the next dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. Model Locate - Rotate Part
dialog box 969 .
- stops the model location procedure and closes this dialog box. The model is returned to its
original position and orientation.
Axis - the axis to align the model with. The model is orientated to this axis if the picking process has
provided enough information.
Pickable feature types - the type of feature which can be picked from the model. Click the
button to display a palette of the available feature types. To select a feature type, click it, or use the
arrow keys or TAB key to highlight it and then press ENTER. To cancel the palette, press ESCAPE.
Number of picks field - the field next to the Undo last pick button displays the number of picks taken.
When you have taken enough picks for orientating the part, the number turns green.
Undo last pick - removes the data obtained from the last pick operation. If the model has been
transformed as a result of the pick, the transformation is undone. If CAMIO is in 'feature mode', the
transformation is undone and the dialog box is returned to its initial status where neither feature mode
nor point mode is set.
See Also:
Aligning the Part
620
Model Commands
962
Main Toolbar
146.10Pick Action Dialog Box

Pick Action Dialog Box
Purpose
Use the Pick Action dialog box when locating a model on the machine, to specify how the feature you
have picked on the model is to be used in the location.
Navigation
Displayed when you pick a feature on the CAD model from the Model Locate - Orientate Part dialog
box or the Model Locate - Rotate Part dialog box

Just this feature - if selected, the direction of the picked feature is aligned with the selected axis and
Model Commands
969
used to transform the model. This option is only available if the picked feature defines both a position
and a direction.
The centre of this feature - if selected, you must pick three positions on the model. CAMIO then fits a
plane through the picked positions, using the centre of any features for which this option was selected.
The normal of the plane is aligned with the selected axis and used to transform the model.
The picked position - if selected, you must pick three positions on the model. CAMIO then fits a plane
through the picked positions (using the centre of any features for which the above option was selected).
The normal of the plane is aligned with the selected axis and used to transform the model.
See Also:
Model Commands
962
Model Locate - Orientate Part Dialog Box
967
Model Locate - Rotate Part Dialog Box
146.11Model Locate - Rotate Part Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Model Locate - Rotate Part dialog box to rotate the model about the primary axis. This axis has
been fixed by the previous step in the model location procedure, using theModel Locate - Orientate Part
dialog box 967 .
To supply the information required for rotating the model, you must pick features on the model. There
are two modes for this:
Point mode - CAMIO treats any 'pick' you make (where you click on the model to select a feature) as a
point feature. This is projected onto the model. Once you have picked two points, CAMIO calculates
the direction between the two points and aligns this direction with the selected axis.
Feature mode - if the picked feature can define a direction, the feature direction is aligned to the selected
axis.
The mode used is determined when you make the first pick. If the picked feature defines a direction,
you are prompted to use it to rotate the model. If you do, 'feature mode' is used. Otherwise, 'point
mode' is used and the model is not rotated until you have made two picks.
970
When you pick the feature, the Pick Action dialog box 968 is displayed for you to specify how the feature
you have picked on the model is to be used in the location.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Locate in the Work Cell section, click
Rotate Part dialog box is displayed
until the

- displays the previous dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. Model Locate - Orientate
Part dialog box. All location information obtained from using this Rotate Part dialog box is lost.
- displays the next dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. Model Locate - Position Part
dialog box 970 .
- stops the model location procedure and closes this dialog box. The model is returned to its
original position and orientation.
Axis - the axis to align the model with. The model is aligned to this axis if the picking process has
provided enough information. The axis defined as the primary axis and its opposite axis are disabled.
Number of picks field - the field next to the Undo last pick button displays the number of picks taken.
When you have taken enough picks for rotating the part, the number turns green.
Undo last pick - removes the data obtained from the last pick operation. If the model has been
transformed as a result of the pick, the transformation is undone. If CAMIO is in 'feature mode', the
transformation is undone and the dialog box is returned to its initial status where neither feature mode
nor point mode is set.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Aligning the Part
620
Model Commands
146.12Model Locate - Position Part Dialog Box

Model Commands
971
Purpose
Use the Model Locate - Position Part dialog box to define the linear position of the model withing the
machine volume. This ensure the location of the model is completely defined.
There are two positions used to locate the part. The reference point is a point on the model which is
translated to the 'location point'. The location point is a point in the machine volume to which the
reference point is translated.
To provide a reference point, pick a point on the model. If you do not pick a point, CAMIO uses the
origin of the CAD model as the reference point. Enter the location point. The model is translated to the
location point.
You can click the buttons in the sliders, to allow you to use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move the
model. Use SHIFT+ the arrow keys to move the model by small increments.
Navigation
Position Part dialog box is displayed
until the

- displays the previous dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. Model Locate - Rotate Part
dialog box 969 .
972
- displays the next dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. Model Locate - Save Work Cell
dialog box 974 .
- stops the model location procedure and closes the dialog box.
Reference point - a point on the model which is translated to the location point. Pick a point on the
model to use as a reference point.
Location point - a point in the machine volume to which the reference point is translated. Type in the
co-ordinates of the location point and click the X, Y and Z buttons, or drag the sliders to set the coordinates. You can also click the buttons in the sliders, to allow you to use the arrow keys on the
keyboard to move the model. Use SHIFT+ the arrow keys to move the model by small increments.
X, Y, Z - if you type in the co-ordinates for the location point, click these buttons to show the location
point on the model and move the model to the specified position.
Undo - resets the reference point and location point co-ordinates.
Auto-locate - calculates a location point which positions the centre of the model at the centre of the
machine's measurable volume. This can be useful if your model is positioned at some distance from the
centre of the machine volume. This centre of the measurable volume is defined in your configuration. For
users of CAMIO with LK CMMs, it is defined in the configuration file Lkcmmdrv.cfg. For users with a
UCCServer, it is configured using the axes limits, accessed in the I++ Configuration dialog box (in
CAMIO available from the CAMIO Options menu, CMM Configure option). As there is currently no
means of automatically obtaining the values from the UCCServer, you must take care to type in the
correct values when entering the limits on the Machine tab page of the I++ Configuration dialog box.
See Also:
Model Commands
Main Toolbar
962
135
146.13Locate Cartesian
Model Commands
973
Purpose
Use the Model Locate dialog box to position the model within
the machine volume. This enables the model to be 'dragged'
into position with the mouse, or aligned manually or
automatically using reference points. Note that when the Model
Locate dialog is selected, the model initially locates to the
machine datum point.
The simplest way to locate the model is to drag it with a left
mouse click using the pointing finger mouse icon. If the mouse
icon is an open hand (pan) then click the hand symbol on the
model window toolbar to convert it to a pointing hand. Fine
positioning can be done by entering co-ordinates and using the
Translate function, or defining a reference point on the model
and a location point on the machine and using the Manual snap
function.
Interactive move - untick the box to rotate the part manually
using the mouse.
Automatic snap - translates the model to a pre-defined
location, set using the Auto snap reference point co-ordinates
on the Locate tab of the Configure dialog (from the Program >
Configure... menu).
Rotate - type in the desired angle of rotation and click the X, Y
and Z buttons to rotate the part in different axes.
Translate - enter distances in mm to move the model in X, Y or
Z.
Manual snap - pick a point on the model by clicking the arrow
button and selecting either a single point or two points to define
an intersection point. This becomes the reference point. Then
select a location point on the machine in a similar way. Click
Snap to align the reference and location points.
Click
to save the work cell (Model Locate - Save Work
Cell dialog box 974 .) before closing the dialog.
Click
- to finish the model location procedure and close
the dialog box.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Locate Cartesian in the Work Cell section.
See Also:
Model Commands
962
Main Toolbar
974
146.14Model Locate - Save Work Cell Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Model Locate - Save Work Cell dialog box to save the orientation of the model as a .wcl file.
You can then retrieve this .wcl file using the Load Work Cell option from the Model commands.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Locate Cartesian in the Work Cell section, click
until the Save Work Cell dialog box is displayed
Work Cell dialog box is displayed
until the Save

- displays the previous dialog box in the model location procedure, i.e. the Model Locate Position Part dialog box 972 or the Locate Cartesian dialog box 972 .
- saves the orientation of the model as a .wcl file. You can retrieve this to set the orientation of
the part when working on-line.
- stops the model location procedure and closes this dialog box.
Work cell name - type in a name for the .wcl (work cell) file. Click the adjacent button to browse for a
location where you would like to save the .wcl file.
Description - displays a description for the work cell file. This is displayed in the Open Work Cell dialog
box 966 when you select the file there. You can add to or change this description.
Insert location datum - if checked, rotate (ROTATE) and translate (TRANS) commands are added to
the part program, as appropriate, to align the inspection datum with the model datum. Subsequent
inspection operations will use the model co-ordinate system.
Model Commands
975
See Also:
Model Commands
File Types
962
36
Main Toolbar
146.15Rotate Model Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Rotate Model dialog box to rotate the existing CAD model, and/or generate a rotated copy. You
can use the Rotate and Copy options when only a portion of the part data is available, but it is
necessary to perform a full inspection of the part. For example, you could do this to inspect a wheel or
similar part where the file provided contains only a segment of the part supplied for inspection purposes.
The rotated model (or its copy) is displayed in the model window as soon as you enter values in the
fields on this dialog box, so that you can preview the result before you click
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Rotate in the CAD Tools section

Angle - the degree of rotation by which either the current CAD model or a copy will be rotated.
976
Rotation axis - the axis about which rotation occurs, in terms of the model origin, not the datum or
machine axes.
Centre of rotation - the point at which rotation will occur.
Create copies - if checked, a copy of the current CAD model is generated for displacement as specified
in the Angle and Centre fields. If this option is not checked, the actual CAD model is displaced. When
checked, the field below is ungreyed, and is used to specify the number of copies you wish to generate.
Each one is generated at the given angle from the previous one.
See Also:
Translate Model Dialog Box
Model Window
Main Toolbar
976
49
135
Model Commands
146.16Translate Model Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Translate Model dialog box to manipulate the position of the CAD model. You can translate the
current CAD model and generate a translated copy of the CAD model. You can use the Translate and
Copy options when only a portion of the part data is available, but it is necessary to perform a full
inspection of the part. For example, you could do this to inspect an engine block or similar part which
contains an element that is repeated at regular intervals, but where the file provided contains only a
segment of the part.
The translated model (or its copy) is displayed in the model window as soon as you enter values in the
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Translate in the CAD Tools section
Model Commands
977

X, Y, Z - the distance by which the current part model is translated.
Create copies - if checked, a copy of the current CAD model is generated for displacement as specified
in the X, Y and X fields. If this option is not checked, the actual CAD model is displaced. When
checked, the field below is ungreyed, and is used to specify the number of copies you wish to generate.
Each one is generated at the given translation from the previous one.
See Also:
Rotate Model Dialog Box
Model Window
Main Toolbar
975
49
135
Model Commands
146.17Mirror Model Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Mirror Model dialog box to specify the axis for mirroring the CAD model, and/or to generate a
mirrored copy of the CAD model. The axis is specified in terms of the model origin, not the datum or
machine axes. The mirror command is useful when the model represents only half of a symmetrical part
and you wish to generate the other half, or the model represents a part that is the mirror image of the
part you wish to inspect.
The mirrored model (or its copy) is displayed in the model window as soon as you enter values in the
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Mirror in the CAD Tools section
978

Mirror plane
XY plane - mirrors the current part model in the XY plane.
YZ plane - mirrors the current part model in the YZ plane.
ZX plane - mirrors the current part model in the ZX plane.
Create copy of model - if checked, a copy of the current CAD model is generated for displacement as
specified in the XY, YZ and ZX fields. If this option is not checked, the actual CAD model is displaced.
When checked, the Separation field is ungreyed.
Separation - the distance between the copies in the current units, along the normal of the reflection
plane. The units are set in the Units dialog box or the System Settings dialog box.
See Also:
Model Window
Main Toolbar
49
135
Units Dialog Box
748
101
Model Commands
146.18Add Plane Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Add Plane dialog box to add a plane to a CAD model. For example, you may wish to represent
a plane that exists on the component but not on the CAD file, represent the mounting surface of the
component, or add a plane to an irregular surface which can then be used to align the model. Pick the
plane on the model, or type in the values. Click Create to display the plane on the CAD model then
click
to add it to the model. The added plane becomes a CAD entity and you can pick it from the
Model Commands
979
model.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Plane in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the created plane. The label is added to the CAD entity.
Centre x, y, z - the nominal co-ordinates of the point, selected on the CAD model, that defines the
centre of the plane. You can only select a point on a surface not on an edge entity. You can also use
these fields to enter co-ordinate values.
Width - the plane width.
Direction i, j, k - the nominal direction of the plane. You can also use these fields to enter co-ordinate
values or you can enter the plane normal.
Height - the plane height.
Create - displays the plane on the CAD model.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.19Add Point Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Add Point dialog box to add points to a CAD model. You can add individual points or you can
add points from a .pts file. When adding individual points, pick on the model, or use the Centre x, y and
z co-ordinate fields to enter co-ordinate values. Click Create to display the points on the CAD model
then click
to add them to the model. The added points become CAD entities and you can pick
980
them from the model. They can be used, for example, when defining a circle using a picked point and a
plane or line. For details, see Picking a Circle Using a Centre Point and Direction 291
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Point in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the created point. The label is added to the CAD entity.
Centre x, y, z - the nominal co-ordinates for the point to be added to the CAD model.
Create - displays the points on the CAD model.
File - displays the Open dialog box where you can browse for a points (.pts) file. Clicking Open reads
the points into the current CAD model. The points file is an ASCII file listing the co-ordinates, or the coordinates and vector, of the points. This file can include the feature name. For details of the .pts file
format, see File Types 36 .
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.20Add Cylinder Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Add Cylinder dialog box to add a cylinder to the CAD model. This can be useful for inspecting
dowels inserted into holes. Specify the nominal position and direction of the cylinder by entering values
into the dialog box, or by picking a circle to define the cylinder from the model. Alternatively, the created
entity can be centred on the nominal position.
Model Commands
981
Click Create to display the cylinder on the CAD model then click
to add it to the model. The
added cylinder becomes a CAD entity and you can pick it from the model.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Cylinder in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the created cylinder. The label is added to the CAD entity.
Centre x, y, z - the centre of the defining circle for the cylinder.
Diameter - the diameter of the cylinder.
Direction i, j, k - the direction of the defining circle for the cylinder.
Length - the length of the cylinder.
Pick - if 4 point is checked, you can pick four points on the circle that defines the cylinder, and fit a
circle through them. The tolerance is used to specify the maximum standard deviation allowed from the
fit.
Position - the position of the cylinder in relation to its defining circle. Select Centred to position the
cylinder with the circle at the mid point of its length. Select End to position the cylinder with the circle
at its end (as defined by the Centre and Direction fields). When you have displayed the cylinder by
clicking Create, you can select Centred or End to see where the cylinder will be positioned.
Create - displays the cylinder on the CAD model.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.21Add Torus Dialog Box

982
Purpose
Use the Add Torus dialog box to add a torus between two previously-measured cylinders. This allows
the measurement of pipe bends, where you may have measured two segments of a pipe on either side of
a bend, but where you have no model to represent the bend.
CAMIO can add a torus between cylinders that have centre-lines that are not co-planar, by ignoring
mismatches that are less than a user-specified resolution tolerance.
Select the cylinders that you want to add the torus between from the drop-down lists, or by selecting
from the model. (Click the
(arrow) button to indicate which list the selected feature should be
added to.) Select whether the actual or nominal values from the selected features are to be used.
Type in a name for the torus and specify the radius that applies to the inner surface of the torus to be
added. The minor radius of the torus is taken from the primary cylinder. If the cylinders are not coplanar, check the Resolve non co-planar centre-lines box and specify a resolution tolerance value. The
resolution tolerance represents the maximum distance between the centre lines of the cylinders. If the
mismatch between the cylinder centre lines is greater than this value, the torus addition fails.
When you have selected appropriate features for addition of a torus, the
Click it to add the torus between the cylinders:
You can then inspect the bend by adding points to it.
Model Commands
983
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Torus in the CAD Geometry section

Primary cylinder - select the first cylinder that forms part of the pipe, either from the drop-down list or
by selecting from the model. Select Nominal or Actual to indicate whether the nominal or actual feature
is to be used.
Secondary cylinder - select the second cylinder that forms part of the pipe, either from the drop-down
list or by selecting from the model. Select Nominal or Actual to indicate whether the nominal or actual
feature is to be used.
Name - a default name is provided by CAMIO. Overtype this if you wish to change it.
Radius (inner) - the inner radius, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box
of the torus used to join the two cylinders.
101
),
Resolve non co-planar centre-lines - if checked, cylinders that are not co-planar can be joined by a
torus, provided that the distance between their centre lines is less than the value in the Resolution
tolerance field.
Resolution tolerance - the maximum distance, in the current units, between the two cylinders that are
to be joined. If the mismatch between the centre lines of the cylinders is greater than this value, torus
addition fails.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.22Add Slice Dialog Box

984
Purpose
Use the Add Slice dialog box to create one or more free curves by intersecting the model faces with a
series of defined planes. For example, you can create a series of pickable curves on a blade so that
you can scan the blade at different levels.
Pick a plane on the model, or type in the centre and normal for the plane. Type in the number of slices
you wish to create, and type in the distance between them in the Increment field. Click Slice to display
the planes that will create the slices on the model. The slices are listed in the box below the Slice
button, as shown in the picture on the right.
To add the slices to the model, click
. Edge entities are created wherever the cutting planes
intersect the surfaces, and you can pick them from the model, for example to create a curve feature. A
layer is created for each slice and is displayed in the User layers tab of the Model Explorer dialog box
73 .
Slices are only added to visible layers. If the model or any layers are not displayed in the model
window, slices are not added to them. When saving to .sat, .sab and .hsf formats, the slices are saved
on their own layers and are saved with the model.
Navigation
Model Commands
985
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Slice in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the created slices. Slices are given this name with _n appended to create a
unique name for each slice. The extension .MTS is added to each name and this is retained even if you
rename the slices.
Plane centre - the nominal co-ordinates of the plane selected on the CAD model. You can also type in
co-ordinate values.
Plane normal - the normal of the slices to be created. If you select Other you can type in the cosine
values.
Number - the number of slices.
Increment - the distance between slices, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog
box 101 ).
Slice - displays the defined slices on the model.
See Also:
Model Window
Main Toolbar
49
135
Model Commands
146.23Add Curve Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Add Curve dialog box to add a curve entity to a CAD model. This can be useful when
programming a scan which follows a path around a narrow surface. You can pick points along the
narrow surface to create the curve, and then use the Surface Measurement - Curve options to scan the
resulting curve.
The curve is created as a user layer, which allows you to turn the display of the curve off and on using
986
the Model Explorer dialog box.

Type in a name for the curve entity in the Layer name field and pick points on the model to define the
curve, or use the Position and Normal fields to define the points. The points you have picked are listed
in the box below the Add curve button.
To add the curve entity to the model, click Add curve.
A layer is created for the curve entity and is displayed in the User layers tab of the Model Explorer dialog
box.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Curve in the CAD Geometry section

Layer name - a unique name for the created curve. Curves are given this name with _n appended to
create a unique name.
Position x, y, z - the nominal co-ordinates of the point you have picked on the model. You can also
type in co-ordinate values.
Normal i ,j, k - the normal of the point you have picked on the model.
Add curve - adds the curve entity to a layer on the model.
Modify - highlight a point in the list, overtype its details and click Modify to change the details for the
point.
See Also:
Surface Measurement - Curve Options 390
Main Toolbar
73
135
Model Commands
146.24Add Circular Slice Dialog Box

Model Commands
987
Purpose
Use the Add Circular Slice dialog box to create one or more 3D curves by intersecting the CAD surfaces
with specified cones or cylinders. For example, you can create a series of pickable 3D curves on an
impeller so that you can scan the impeller blades at different levels.
Pick a surface on the model, or type in the Start centre and End centre values. Type in the number of
slices you wish to create, and type in the distance between them in the Increment field. Click Slice to
display the cones or cylinders that will create the slices on the model. The slices are listed in the box
below the Slice button, as shown in the picture on the right.
To add the slices to the model, click
. Edge entities are created wherever the cutting planes
intersect the surfaces, and you can pick them from the model, for example to create a 3D curve feature.
A layer is created for each slice and is displayed in the User layers tab of the Model Explorer dialog box
73 .
Slices are only added to visible layers. If the model or any layers are not displayed in the model
window, slices are not added to them. When saving to .sat, .sab and .hsf formats, the slices are saved
on their own layers and are saved with the model.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Circular Slice in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the created slices. Slices are given this name with _n appended to create a
988
unique name for each slice. The extension .MTS is added to each name and this is retained even if you
rename the slices.
Start centre - the co-ordinates of the centre point of the top of a cone or cylinder, added to the model to
create the slices.
End centre - the co-ordinates of the centre point of the bottom of a cone or cylinder, added to the model
to create the slices. The start centre and end centre points define the axis of the cone or cylinder.
Start diameter - the diameter of the top of a cone or cylinder added to the model to create the slices.
For a cone this can be zero, and must be different from the end diameter. For a cylinder the top and
bottom diameters must be the same value, i.e. the diameter of the cylinder.
End diameter - the diameter of the bottom of a cone or cylinder added to the model to create the
slices.
Number - the number of slices.
Increment - the distance between slices, in the current linear units (as shown in the System Settings
dialog box 101 ).
Slice - displays the defined slices on the model.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
285
135
Model Commands
146.25Add Labels Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Add Labels dialog box to add a label to a selected entity on the CAD model. Select the type of
geometry in the Selection level box, then click the entity on the model. Type a name for the entity in the
Geometry label box. Click Set to save the name, then
(Apply).
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Add Labels in the CAD Geometry section
Model Commands
989

Selection level - select the type of geometry you wish to select on the model.
Geometry label - the label for the entity selected on the model.
Set - click to save the label you have entered in the Geometry label field above.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.26Query Geometry Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Query Geometry dialog box to view details of geometry you select on the model. Click an
option in the Selection level box, then click on the model. Details of the geometry you picked on the
model are displayed.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Query in the CAD Geometry section
990
Selection level - select the type of geometry you wish to view.

Information box - shows details of the geometry you have picked on the model.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Model Commands
146.27Offset Surface Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Offset Surface dialog box to offset all points on a selected surface of the CAD model by a
specified distance. For example, you may have a sheet metal part where the CAD information defines
one side of the model, but you want to measure the other side. If the CAD model represents the
underside of a part, you can specify a global thickness to offset the nominal surface so that on
inspection, the points are taken on the upper surface of the part. In this example, the offset value would
be the thickness of the part.
The Offset Surface dialog box creates a new CAD surface offset from the selected surface. If instead
you wish to allow for material thickness without creating additional geometry, you should use the
Material thickness field on the Display Settings dialog box, Picking tab page 58 .
To offset a surface, pick a face on the model. In the Label field, type in a name for the surface to be
created. Type in a value for the offset and click Offset to display the new face on the model. To add the
face to the model, click
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Offset Surface in the CAD Geometry section

Label - a unique name for the offset surface.
Offset - click to create a new face offset from the selected face by the distance in the adjacent field.
The face is offset along the normal direction of the surface.
See Also:
Model Commands
Main Toolbar
991
135
Model Commands
146.28Organise Geometry Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Organise Geometry dialog box to view the current layers in the model, create new layers, and
move the selected geometry to a different layer.
You can switch layers on and off using the Model Explorer dialog box.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Organise in the CAD Geometry section

Layers - the layers in the current model. Double-click to expand or collapse.
Selected Geometry - the geometry picked on the model. You can drag-and-drop this onto the layers.
New layer - click to add a new layer.
See Also:
992

Main Toolbar
73
135
Model Commands
146.29Geometry Device Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Geometry Device dialog box to specify that a device defined from a CAD file is a geometry
device.
A geometry device is used when generating nominal points from a surface feature that has no touch
data. For details, see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 .
The Geometry Device dialog box adds a G( )=GEOM/DID( ) command to your program. This command
is also added automatically by CAMIO when opening a device as a CAD file using the Open Device
dialog box.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click File in the CAD Geometry section
In the part program window, double-click the Define CAD geometry command (if viewing your
program as descriptive text), or double-click the G( )=GEOM/DID( ) command (if viewing your

Label - type in a label for the geometry device.
Device - type in a device name or select one from the drop-down list. The device must have been
defined using the Input/Output Device dialog box, and opened using the Open Device dialog box.
See Also:
940

Model Commands
146.30Geometry Entities Dialog Box

Model Commands
993
Purpose
Use the Geometry Entities dialog box to define a subset of the base geometry present in a CAD model
file. The base geometry should first have been defined in your part program in the G( )=GEOM/DID( )
command, which you can add using the Geometry Device dialog box.
A geometry device is used when generating nominal points from a surface feature that has no touch
data. For details, see Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GSURF) 591 and
Construction Using Nearest Points on Geometry (for a GCURVE) 589 .
The Geometry Entities dialog box adds a G( )=GEOM/G( ) command to your part program.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Entities in the CAD Geometry section
In the part program window, double-click the G( )=GEOM/G( ) command

Label - type in a label for the geometry subset.
Base geometry - type in a device name or select one from the drop-down list. You must have opened
the storage device using the OPEN/DID command. For details of how to open the CAD model as a
device, see Opening a CAD Model File as a Device 225 .
All - if selected, all of the geometry in the geometry device is used.
Offset - type in a value, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box), for an offset
distance to be applied to the geometry in the geometry device.
994
Entity list - if selected, the geometry listed in the Entities list is used.
Label - type in the label for an existing geometry entity. You can view the geometry for a model using
the Query Geometry dialog box.
Offset - type in a value, in the current units (as shown in the System Settings dialog box), for an offset
distance to be applied to the geometry entity.
Add - click to add the geometry entity to the list of entities to be used in the construction.
Modify - highlight an entity in the Entities list, then type in a new label or offset value or both, and click
Modify to change the details of the entity accordingly.
Delete - click to delete the highlighted entity from the Entities list.
Entities - lists the geometry entities to be used in the construction.
See Also:
Geometry Device Dialog Box
992
101
Query Geometry Dialog Box
146.31PMI Data Extraction

Use the PMI Data Extraction option to extract PMI data that has been saved with a CAD model. The
data can include features to which GD&T tolerances have been applied, the GD&T tolerances applied,
datum features and ACIS hole features. The tolerances are listed in the Explorer window 75 and the
features are added to the Planning window 88 . From here you can set up the feature inspection in the
Teach Path view and when you click
(Apply), corresponding DMIS commands are inserted into the
part program. If the information attached to the model is insufficient to create the DMIS commands,
CAMIO displays the appropriate dialog box for you to complete so that the commands can be
generated.
For a step-by-step procedure, see Extracting PMI Data
995
Highlighting a feature in the Planning window displays its details in the Grid window and highlights it on
the model.
When you click a feature on the model, tolerances are applied by CAMIO from the CAD model.
Navigation
With a part program open, and with a model open that has been saved with PMI data attached,
select Model from the main toolbar, select Extract PMI in the Model section
Example of commands inserted into the part program using PMI Data Extraction:
F(MODIFIER_2)=FEAT/CYLNDR,INNER,CART,0,-2093.79688302,1002.23475508,1,0,0,253.04556517,-635
F(A)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,0,0,1,0,0
F(B)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,0,0,0,0,1
F(C)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,0,0,0,1,0
F(CYL001)=FEAT/CYLNDR,INNER,CART,0,-1270,-635,1,0,0,322.07442314,-635
F(LINE001)=FEAT/LINE,BND,CART,-635,0,-396.79367238,0,0,-396.79367238,0,0,-1
Model Commands
995
DATDEF/FA(A), DAT(AA)
DATDEF/FA(B), DAT(BB)
DATDEF/FA(C), DAT(C)
DATDEF/FA(A), DAT(A)
DATDEF/FA(B), DAT(B)
T(4)=TOL/POS,2D,0.254,RFS,DAT(AA),MMC,DAT(BB),DAT(C),RFS
T(5)=TOL/POS,2D,0.254,LMC,DAT(A),DAT(B),DAT(C)
T(6)=TOL/PERP,0.254,RFS,DAT(A)
See Also:
Model Menu
146.32Extracting PMI Data

PMI data is saved with the CAD model and includes features to which GD&T tolerances have been
applied, the tolerances applied, datum features and ACIS hole features.
To extract PMI data from a model file:
1.
Open a part program and position the cursor at the location where you wish to add the DMIS
commands for the PMI data. The commands are added before the current edit line (for details of
where commands are inserted into a program, see Program Lines, Edit Lines and Breakpoints in the
DMIS Program 198 ).
2.
From the Model menu on the main CAMIO toolbar, select Open Model and browse for a CAD model
file that has PMI data saved with it. If this is a Pro/E, CATIA v5 or UG file, ensure that the
Manufacturing information box is checked in the CAD Model Options dialog box before opening the
file.
3.
When the model file is open, from the Model menu select Extract PMI in the Model section:
The tolerances associated with the model are added to the part program. They are also listed in
the Explorer window and the features, tolerances and datum commands are listed in the Planning
window.
Warning:
If a filter is displayed in the drop-down list in the Planning window when you open the model, the
data in the model file may not display in the Planning window. To ensure that the data displays in
the Planning window, select the blank entry in the drop-down list.
As an example, CAMIO may now look like this:
996
When you select a feature in the Planning window, it is highlighted on the CAD model and the Grid
window displays its nominal values and applied tolerances:
4.
You can filter the commands in the Planning window so that you only see, for example, the datum
features. To do this, click
in the Planning window, then use the Plan Filter dialog box to filter
the data listed in the Planning window. The items you can filter are obtained by CAMIO from the
model information and listed in the Source name field. In this example, the datum filter is applied:
5.
To inspect the part, the datum features must be measured so that the datum can be created. As in
Step 4, use the Plan Filter dialog box to filter the commands so that only the datum features are
listed in the Planning window. Then select Plane from the Inspect commands. Double-click the first
datum feature in the Planning window. This is now highlighted on the model, its parameters are
Model Commands
997
displayed in the Grid window, and you can pick points in the model window to define the inspection
path:
To add the commands to the part program, click

code to your program:
. CAMIO adds DMIS code like this example
$$<MEAS_PLANE name = "A">

MODE/MAN
F(A)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,0,0,0,-1,0
MEAS/PLANE,F(A),3
PTMEAS/CART,-62.6235,0,-43.0533,0,-1,0
PTMEAS/CART,-33.0345,0,-50.2103,0,-1,0
PTMEAS/CART,-41.3026,0,-94.9566,0,-1,0
ENDMES
DATDEF/FA(A), DAT(A)
$$<\MEAS_PLANE = A>
For datum features, the DMIS commands include the measurement commands and the DATDEF
commands. If a datum feature is applied several times with different datum names, each datum
name has a separate DATDEF definition.
6.
Now create the datums. Again, use the Plan Filter dialog box to list only the datums in the Planning
window, then drag-and-drop the datums into the part program:
998
7.
You can now measure the features. Select the Features filter in the Plan Filter dialog box, and
check the Filter pending items and Filter out defined features boxes:
8.
Position the cursor on the first datum command in the part program window and step the line by
clicking the Step button on the Program toolbar. The Planning window displays the features that
should be measured using that datum.
9.
From the Inspect commands, select the feature type to be measured. Then drag the first feature
you wish to measure from the Planning window into the Grid window. Its nominal values and
tolerances are displayed in the Grid window and the feature is highlighted on the model. Pick points
on the feature and click
. CAMIO adds DMIS code like this example code to your program:
$$<MEAS_PLANE name = "PLN009">

MODE/AUTO,PROG,MAN
F(PLN009)=FEAT/PLANE,CART,0,64.4204,0,0,0.9848,0.1736
MEAS/PLANE,F(PLN009),3
PTMEAS/CART,-11.6024,72.6178,-46.4901,0,0.9848,0.1736
PTMEAS/CART,-47.5592,66.0294,-9.1252,0,0.9848,0.1736
PTMEAS/CART,-58.7943,73.2306,-49.9653,0,0.9848,0.1736
ENDMES
OUTPUT/FA(PLN009),TA(ModelTol_18),TA(ModelTol_19),TA(ModelTol_20)
$$<\MEAS_PLANE = PLN009>
You can continue to build up your program from the extracted PMI data.
See Also:
CATIA v5 - CAD Model Options Dialog Box 231
Plan Filter Dialog Box
Model Menu
244
254
89
963
Explorer Window
75
Planning Window
146.33Display Settings Dialog Box

The Display Settings dialog box is displayed when you select Display Settings from the pop-up menu in
the model window. The dialog box has a number of tab pages.
Model Commands
999
Select the options below for information on each tab page:

Picking
58
Measure Display
Simulation
60
63
Simulation Grid
65
Feature Display
66
View
68
Feature Deviations
69
Manual Inspection
147 Rotary Tables

147.1
Purpose
The Rotary Table commands allow you to control the calibration, positioning and operation of rotary
tables.
A continuous rotary table uses a clutch system to rotate the table. When it is rotated, the table is
raised, turned, and then re-seated. This means that the degree of rotation is only relatively accurate,
and it is not repeatable.
Indexing and positioning rotary tables have a mesh of teeth for seating the table. When the table is
rotated, it is re-seated and the teeth mesh together. This means that the rotation is repeatable, but not
necessarily accurate.
Although no rotary table moves accurately to a particular position, the angle moved to is read accurately
from the table scales.
For details of how to calibrate rotary tables, see:
Calibrating a Continuous Rotary Table 1000
Calibrating an Indexing Rotary Table1001
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, use the Rotary Table section

Acceleration 1001
Calibrate 1002
Delete
Define 1005
Recall 1005
Rotate 1008
1003
1000
Set 1009
Save 1010
Velocity
1011
See Also:
Main Toolbar
147.2 Calibrating a Continuous Rotary Table

When calibrating a continuous rotary table, an average plane of rotation and an average centre of rotation
are needed.
1.
With the table at zero degrees of rotation, position a sphere towards the outer edge of the table and
measure it. Leave the sphere where it is.
2.
Rotate the table by e.g. 45 degrees, using the ROTNUL command (on the Move Rotary Table dialog
box 1008 , select the None option in the Rotate axes box, so that the axes are not rotated).
3.
Measure the sphere again.
4.
Continue at intervals around the edge of the table.
5.
Construct a plane and a circle through the sphere centres, using a best fit construction (see
Constructing Features 556 ).
6.
Use the constructed plane and circle as parameters on the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box 1002 .
The continuous rotary table is now calibrated and you can use it at any angle (using ROTNUL or
ROTTOT from the Move Rotary Table dialog box).
A rotation transformation is calculated when the table is rotated using the ROTTOT command. The
rotation transformation is based on the actual position of the table, assuming it is rigid with a fixed
centre. The rotation transformation is applied to each automatic move or touch target, and to every
touch result, to establish the location of the part on the table, allowing you to keep the same datum even
though the table has been rotated.
Error messages
1. An offline calibration will fail if the angle of the table is non zero when the calibration command is
called:
2. Whether online or offline, the table should have a positive Z direction. If not, the following message
dialog will appear:
Rotary Tables
1001
See Also:
Rotary Tables
147.3 Calibrating an Indexing Rotary Table

1.
When calibrating an indexing or a positioning (Piesler) rotary table, follow the procedure for
calibrating a continuous rotary table 1000 first, to establish a base point for detailed calibration.
2.
With the table at zero degrees of rotation, position three spheres on the table and measure them.
Leave the spheres where they are.
3.
Construct a plane through the centres of the spheres, and a line between the first and second
spheres (see Constructing Features 556 ).
4.
Using the Create Datum dialog box 658 , generate a datum, using the plane as the primary feature,
the line as the secondary feature and the first sphere as the tertiary feature.
5.
Use the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box 1002 with no features selected (if there are features
displayed in the drop-down lists, highlight them and press the DELETE key on your keyboard), to
give the current datum as the map for the table position.
6.
Using the ROTNUL parameter (from the Move Rotary Table dialog box 1008 ), rotate the table to the
next required angle, measure the three spheres again and set up the datum again. You must use
the same features as before, i.e. use the same spheres to construct the line, the same sphere as
the tertiary feature, and the same origins. Again, use the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box with no
features selected.
7.
Repeat this process for each position you wish to calibrate. Each calibrated position is stored by
nominal angle in the machine database.
Once the indexing or positioning rotary table is calibrated, you can use it at any angle with the ROTNUL
command, or at any calibrated angle using the ROTTOT command (on the Move Rotary Table dialog
box, selecting the Full option in the Rotate axes box).
See Also:
Rotary Tables
999
147.4 Rotary Acceleration Dialog Box

Purpose
1002
Use the Rotary Acceleration dialog box to set the rotary table acceleration, i.e. the working acceleration
and deceleration rates for the rotary table.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low acceleration limits set in the CMM configuration file,
CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the acceleration at the appropriate limit.
The Rotary Acceleration dialog box adds a Set rotary acceleration (ACLRAT/ROTACL) command to your
program (Metris CMM driver variable WACCV).
Navigation
Select Machine from main toolbar, click Acceleration in the Rotary Table section

Acceleration - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in an acceleration rate in rotations/min/
min.
Percentage, High, Low, Value
Percentage - select this to define the acceleration as a percentage of the range set by the high and low
values in the CMM configuration file. Type a value between 0 and 1 in the Acceleration field.
displayed in the Acceleration field when High is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file and
is not normally changed by the user.
Low - select this to use the default low acceleration value for this machine type. The value is displayed
in the Acceleration field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file and is not
Value - select this to set the acceleration to a specific rate. Type the rate in the Acceleration field.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
147.5 Calibrate Rotary Table Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box to calibrate the rotary table.
For a continuous rotary table, the calibration is performed by mounting a sphere onto the table and
measuring it at different table angles, then constructing a circle and plane through the centres of the
Rotary Tables
1003
spheres at these positions, to provide the table height and centre of rotation. Select the constructed
circle and plane on this dialog box. The Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box adds a CALIB/RTAB
command to your program. For step-by-step instructions, see Calibrating a Continuous Rotary Table 1000 .
For an indexing or positioning rotary table, the same process is followed, to establish a base point for
detailed calibration. After adding the CALIB/RTAB command to your program, move the table to zero
degrees of rotation, position three spheres on the table and measure them. Construct a plane through
the centres of the spheres, and a line between the first and second spheres. Using the Create Datum
dialog box, generate a datum, using the plane as the primary feature, the line as the secondary feature
and the first sphere as the tertiary feature. Then use the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box with no
features selected (if there are features displayed in the drop-down lists, highlight them and press the
DELETE key on your keyboard) to give the current datum as the map for the table position. Using the
ROTNUL command(Move Rotary Table dialog box 1008 ), rotate the table to the next required angle,
measure three spheres again and set up the datum again. You must use the same features as before, i.
e. use the same spheres to construct the line, the same sphere as the tertiary feature, and the same
origins. Again, use the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box with no features selected. Repeat this
process for each position you wish to calibrate. Each calibrated position is stored by nominal angle in
the machine database. For step-by-step instructions, see Calibrating an Indexing Rotary Table 1001 .
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Calibrate in the Rotary Table section

Table - the unique label for the rotary table. Select one from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Circle - the constructed circle feature.
Plane - the constructed plane feature.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
999
147.6 Delete Rotary Table Dialog Box

1004
Purpose
Use the Delete Rotary Table dialog box to delete saved rotary table calibration data either from the
machine database or from a file. The rotary tables will no longer be available to other part programs.
The rotary table calibration data must have been created using the Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box 1002
and saved using the Save Rotary Table dialog box. You can delete the rotary table displayed in the
Label field by clicking OK, or you can delete multiple rotary tables by adding them to the list below the
Label field before clicking OK. For each rotary table deleted, a Delete rotary table line (DELETE/RT( )
command) is added to your part program.
To delete the rotary tables from a file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file
of rotary table calibration data) in the Device drop-down list. From the Label field, select the rotary
tables you wish to delete from the device.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Delete in the Rotary Table section

Label - the unique label for the rotary table. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
Add - adds the rotary table shown in the Label field to the adjacent list of rotary tables.
Delete - deletes the rotary tables selected in the adjacent list. This only removes them from the list, not
Device box - if checked, the selected rotary tables are deleted from the storage device (i.e. a file of
rotary table calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list. You must have opened the storage
device using the Open Device command.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of rotary table calibration data). There will
only be storage devices listed here if you have previously saved rotary table calibration data to a storage
device. This is a file created as a device using the Input/Output Device advanced command.
See Also:
42
Save Rotary Table Dialog Box 1010

Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
Rotary Tables
1005
147.7 Rotary Table Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Rotary Table dialog box to define the rotary table.
The Rotary Table dialog box adds a ROTDEF command to your program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Define in the Rotary Table section

Centre - the point about which the table rotates.
Direction - the table top surface normal.
The data for Centre and Direction are passed through to the ROTDEF command but are not currently
used as part of the inspection.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
147.8 Recall Rotary Table Dialog Box

1006
Purpose
Use the Recall Rotary Table dialog box to recall saved rotary table calibration data either from the
machine database or from a file. The rotary table calibration data must have been created using the
Calibrate Rotary Table dialog box 1002 . You can recall the rotary table displayed in the Label field by
clicking OK, or you can recall multiple rotary tables by adding them to the list below the Label field
before clicking OK. For each rotary table recalled, a Recall rotary table line (RECALL/RT( ) command)
is added to your part program. To recall the rotary tables from a file, check the Device box and select an
open storage device (i.e. a file of rotary table calibration data) in the Device drop-down list. From the
Label field, select the rotary tables you wish to recall from the device.
If a rotary table recalled from a file is already present in the machine database, the machine database
instance will always be overwritten by the rotary table from the file, no matter what the date or time of the
file.
Note: When the rotary table is recalled, the simulation in the CAD window should show the table
positioned on the granite surface. If the position is incorrect, it will be necessary to relocate the rotary
table using the Rotary Table Locate 1007 dialog.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Recall in the Rotary Table section

Label - the unique label for the rotary table. Select a label from the drop-down list.
Device box - if checked, the selected rotary tables are recalled from the storage device (i.e. a file of
rotary table calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of rotary table calibration data). You must
have opened it with the Open Device 941 command.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
42
135
Rotary Tables
1007
Rotary Tables
147.9 Rotary Table Locate

Purpose
Provides a method of locating the rotary table within the simulated CMM environment.
There are two methods of location:
1.
Enter numeric values from the CMM reference zero. This allows the offline simulation to match the
real life environment as accurately as possible.
2.
Drag to location - you can approximate the position on the CMM table by dragging the rotary table
around the simulated environment using the mouse.
Both methods use the centre and top of the rotary table as the zero reference.
Navigation
Select Model from the main toolbar, click Locate Rotary Table in the Work Cell section

- 'tries' the location before accepting it
- accepts the location
- stops the rotary table location procedure and closes this dialog box
See Also:
Machine Launch 1019
1008
147.Move Rotary Table Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Move Rotary Table dialog box to specify the absolute or incremental angle to which the rotary
table will move from the current position. You also specify whether you want to move the part datum
correspondingly.
The Move Rotary Table dialog box adds a ROTAB command to your program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Rotate in the Rotary Table section
Select Inspect, Scan or Laser from the main toolbar, click Rotary Move in the Move Tools section

Angle - the incremental or absolute angle for the rotary table movement. If you specify Increment in the
Move box, the table will move incrementally by this angle from its current position. If you specify
Absolute in the Move box, the table will move to this angle from its current position.
Move - select Increment to move the table incrementally by the specified angle. Select Absolute to
move the table to the specified angle.
Rotate axes - select None if you do not want to rotate the part datum with the table (this adds a
ROTNUL parameter to the ROTAB command). Select Full to rotate the part datum with the table (this
adds a ROTTOT parameter to the ROTAB command).
Direction - select Short to rotate the table to the specified angle by the shortest direction (this adds a
SHORT parameter to the ROTAB command). Select Clockwise to rotate in a clockwise direction (this
adds a CW parameter to the ROTAB command). Select Anti-clockwise to rotate in an anti-clockwise
(counterclockwise) direction (this adds a CCW parameter to the ROTAB command).
Note:
If the CMM is configured for an indexing or Piesler rotary table, the Move Rotary Table dialog box will
have a Calibrated button. Click this to display the Calibrated Tables Angles dialog box 1009 where you
can select a previously calibrated nominal angle for the rotary table. Angles are calibrated by setting up
a datum for each table position, calibrating, and rotating the table to the next position before setting up
the next datum.
Rotary Tables
1009
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
147.10.2Calibrated Tables Angles Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Calibrated Tables Angles dialog box to select a previously calibrated nominal angle for an
indexing or Piesler rotary table.
Navigation
With the CMM configured for an indexing or Piesler rotary table, select Machine from the main
toolbar, click Rotate in the Rotary table section, click Calibrated
With the CMM configured for an indexing or Piesler rotary table, select Inspect, Scan or Laser from
the main toolbar, click Rotary move in the Move tools section, click Calibrated

Calibrated angles - select a calibrated nominal angle from the drop-down list, to use when moving the
rotary table.
See Also:
148 Rotary Offset Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Rotary Offset dialog box to set the current table angle position to the reset angle value (the
1010
'offset value') and use this as zero.

The Rotary Offset dialog box adds a ROTSET command to your program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Set in the Rotary Table section

Reset angle - the angle which the rotary table will use as zero.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
149 Save Rotary Table Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Save Rotary Table dialog box to save the rotary table calibration data created in theCalibrate
Rotary Table dialog box 1002 . Once saved using the Save Rotary Table dialog box, the calibration can be
used in other inspection programs when the rotary table is moved such that the part datum is rotated
with the table (using a ROTTOT parameter with the ROTAB command).
You can save the rotary table displayed in the Label field by clicking OK, or you can save multiple rotary
tables by adding them to the list below the Label field before clicking OK. For each rotary table saved, a
Save rotary table line (SAVE/RT( ) command) is added to your part program. To save rotary tables to a
file, check the Device box and select an open storage device (i.e. a file of rotary table calibration data) in
the Device drop-down list. Otherwise, the rotary table data is saved to the machine database.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Save in the Rotary Table section
Save Rotary Table Dialog Box
1011

Device box - if checked, the selected rotary tables are saved to the storage device (i.e. a file of rotary
table calibration data) specified in the Device drop-down list.
Device drop-down list - the name of a storage device (file of rotary table calibration data). You must
have created the file as a device using the Input/Output Device 940 advanced command, then opened it
with the Open Device 941 command. If you specify a device here, the rotary table calibration data is
saved to the file instead of being saved to the machine database.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
42
135
Rotary Tables
150 Rotary Velocity Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Rotary Velocity dialog box to set the rotary table angular velocity, i.e. the working velocity of the
rotary table.
If you enter a value that is outside the high and low velocity limits set in the CMM configuration file,
CAMIO will issue a warning message and use the velocity at the appropriate limit.
The Rotary Velocity dialog box adds a Rotary feed rate (FEDRAT/ROTVEL) command to your program
(Metris CMM driver variable WVELV).
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Velocity in the Rotary Table section
1012
Velocity (RPM) - if you have selected Percentage or Value, type in a velocity in rotations/min.
Percentage, High, Low, Value
values in the CMM configuration file. Type a value between 0 and 1 in the Velocity field.
High - select this to use the default high velocity value (displayed in the Velocity field) for this machine
type. The value is displayed in the Velocity field when High is selected. It is defined in the CMM
configuration file and is not normally changed by the user.
Low - select this to use the default low velocity value for this machine type. The value is displayed in
the Velocity field when Low is selected. It is defined in the CMM configuration file and is not normally
changed by the user.
Value - select this to set the velocity to a specific value. Type the value in the Velocity field.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Rotary Tables
151 Twin Columns

151.1
Purpose
The Twin Column commands allow you to set up and operate twin column and multi-column machines.
Each column of a twin column (or a multi-column) machine has a computer, on the same network.
These are set up at installation, for communication between the columns. This allows the transfer of
data, such as point data, feature data and datums, between the columns.
By convention, the columns on a twin column machine are referred to as Column A and Column B, with
Column A as the right-hand column as you face the front of the machine, and Column B as the left-hand
column.
For each column, on the Conformance tab page 128 of the Configuration dialog box, make sure Enable
command extensions and Enable Metris-specific commands are checked, because the twin column
commands are non-standard DMIS-like commands.
Use the Calibrate Head dialog box 720 to calibrate the probe head on each column, updating the reset
sphere position for each column. You must use the same master reset sphere for each column. This
allows the relationship between the columns to be understood by CAMIO when using the twin column
commands, and the appropriate transformation matrix (to the master reset sphere) to be automatically
applied when data is transferred between columns.
Create a new program on each column. Use the Define Column dialog box 1016 to define each column
within your part programs. First, in the program for Column A, set Column A as the local column and
Column B as the remote column. Then, in the program for Column B, set Column B as the local column
Twin Columns
1013
and Column A as the remote column. Similarly, if you also had Columns C and D, you would define
these as remote columns in the programs for the other columns.
Once you have defined your columns in your part programs, you can use the GET and PUT commands
to transfer data between the columns. When transferring datums, the transformation matrix from the
source column is removed and the transformation matrix from the target column is applied. You can
also use the WAIT/CR( ) commands to ensure that one column does not move before the other column
is ready.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, use the Twin Column section

Local 1016
Remote 1016
Feature (Get) 1015
Feature (Put) 1015
Datum (Get) 1013
Datum (Put) 1014
Wait 1017
See Also:
Main Toolbar
151.2 Get Datum Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Get Datum dialog box to receive a datum from a remote program. The remote program must
have a corresponding Put to remote column program line (PUT/CR( ),D( ) command) specifying the
column of this program.
The Get Datum dialog box adds a GET/CR( ),D( ) command to your program.
GET commands wait for the corresponding PUT statement to be executed in the remote program. It
may sometimes appear that a GET command has not waited. This happens when the remote column
has already executed the PUT command, and the data is queued ready for the GET command.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Datum in the Twin Column section, select Get

Remote column - the unique label for a column in another program. Select a label from the drop-down
1014
list, or type one in.

Datum - the unique label for a datum actual in the remote program. Select a label from the drop-down
See Also:
Put Datum Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
1014
135
Twin Columns
151.3 Put Datum Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Put Datum dialog box to send a datum to a remote program. The remote program must have a
corresponding Get from remote column program line (GET/CR( ),D( ) command) specifying the column of
this program.
The Put Datum dialog box adds a PUT/CR( ),D( ) command to your program.
The first PUT command run in your part program waits for the remote program to execute the
corresponding GET command. Subsequent PUT statements do not wait, but the data is sent and is
queued on the remote computer.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Datum in the Twin Column section, select Put

Datum - the unique label for a datum to be sent to the remote program. Select a label from the dropdown list, or type one in.
See Also:
Get Datum Dialog Box
Main Toolbar
1013
135
Twin Columns
Twin Columns
1015
151.4 Get Feature Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Get Feature dialog box to receive a feature actual from a remote program. The feature nominal
must be defined in the current program to be able to receive the feature actual. You can define feature
nominals using the Declare options from the main toolbar. The remote program must have a
corresponding Put to remote column program line (PUT/CR( ),FA( ) command) specifying the column of
this program.
The Get Feature dialog box adds a GET/CR( ),FA( ) command to your program.
GET commands wait for the corresponding PUT statement to be executed in the remote program. It
may sometimes appear that a GET command has not waited. This happens when the remote column
has already executed the PUT command, and the data is queued ready for the GET command.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Feature in the Twin Column section, select Get

Feature - the unique label for the feature actual in the remote program. Select a label from the dropdown list, or type one in.
See Also:
523
Put Feature Dialog Box 1015

Main Toolbar
135
Twin Columns
151.5 Put Feature Dialog Box

1016
Purpose
Use the Put Feature dialog box to send a feature actual to a remote program. The remote program must
have a corresponding Get from remote column program line (GET/CR( ),FA( ) command) specifying the
column of this program.
The Put Feature dialog box adds a PUT/CR( ),FA( ) command to your program.
The first PUT command run in your part program waits for the remote program to execute the
corresponding GET command. Subsequent PUT statements do not wait, but the data is sent and is
queued on the remote computer.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Feature in the Twin Column section, select Put

Feature - the unique label for a feature actual to be sent to the remote program. Select a label from the
drop-down list, or type one in.
See Also:
Get Feature Dialog Box 1015
Main Toolbar
135
Twin Columns
151.6 Define Column Dialog Box

Twin Columns
1017
Purpose
Use the Define Column dialog box to define which column is which on a twin column or multi-column
machine. By convention, the columns on a twin column machine are referred to as Column A and
Column B, with Column A as the right-hand column as you face the front of the machine, and Column B
as the left-hand column.
In the program for Column A, set Column A as the local column and Column B as the remote column.
Then, in the program for Column B, set Column B as the local column and Column A as the remote
column. Similarly, if you also had Columns C and D, you would define these as remote columns in the
programs for the other columns.
The Define Column dialog box adds a CRGDEF command to your program.
There should only be one set of CRGDEF commands in a program. This is because execution of these
commands resets the data buffers and clears out any data that is queued. It also makes the next PUT
command wait for a corresponding GET command from a remote program.
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click the top of the Local button in the Twin Column section
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click the bottom of the Local button in the Twin Column
section, select Remote

Label - the unique label for the column. Select a label from the drop-down list, or type one in.
None - select this when control of the column is not significant.
Local - select this if the column is controlled by this program.
Remote - select this if the column is controlled by another program.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Twin Columns
151.7 Synchronise Columns Dialog Box

Purpose
Use the Synchronise Columns dialog box to suspend the current program until a Synchronise columns
program line (WAIT/CR( ) command), specifying the local column, is executed in another program.
When this happens both programs will continue.
The Synchronise Columns dialog box adds a WAIT/CR( ) command to your program.
1018
Navigation
Select Machine from the main toolbar, click Wait in the Twin Column section

Remote - the unique label for a column in another program. Select a label from the drop-down list, or
type one in.
See Also:
Main Toolbar
135
Twin Columns
152 Using Manual Machines

There are a number of features in CAMIO that are especially useful with manual machines.
DRO - when measuring a feature in Manual mode, the DRO window 86 shows the distance to the
touch point on the part. Note that if you have chosen to rotate the machine axes (by selecting a
rotation on the Axis Rotation tab page of the CMM Configuration dialog box), the mcs values
displayed in the DRO are actually the rotated mcs values (or mcsr values).
Target-driven inspection - when carrying out manual inspections, the model window displays an
arrow or a line indicating the target for inspection. The arrow or line is defined on the Display
Settings dialog box, Manual Inspection tab page 72 .
Highlighting of features - when running a program, the next feature to be inspected is highlighted
in the model window 49 using a thick line. The colour of the line can be changed using the Current
inspection feature option in the CAD Colours dialog box 73 .
Default probe tip - if no probe is selected, a default probe model can be used until a real probe is
selected. This option is available by checking the Use simplified probe box on the Display Settings
dialog box, Simulation tab page 63 . You can change the colour of the tip and the stylus using the
Simplified probe tip and Simplified probe stylus options on the CAD Colours dialog box, Simulation
colours category.
LK1000
When using an LK1000 manual machine, the following options are selected:
Man Int/LK1000 in the Controller Type field on the CMM Configuration dialog box, Hardware tab page
and
LK CMM driver in the Server type field on the Configuration dialog box, Miscellaneous tab page
PCI
A PCI card is a 'manual controller' card that you can install in your computer. It reads the CMM scales
and connects to a Renishaw probe. Data is obtained from the probe and scales. When using a PCI
card, the following options are selected:
Man Int/PCI in the Controller Type field on the CMM Configuration dialog box, Hardware tab page
and
Using Manual Machines
1019
LK CMM driver in the Server type field on the Configuration dialog box, Miscellaneous tab page
Error correction can be applied to improve the accuracy and repeatability of measurements. The error
correction data is physically related to the machine's home position. A manual machine with a PCI card
requires the home position to be set (by moving the machine to a 'reset' position) so that error correction
will work. You are prompted to do this when starting CAMIO for the first time after switching on the PC.
See Also:
153 Machine Launch

Machine Launch is a utility that allows you to change CMM configurations with a single click. It is
available from the Windows Start menu > CAMIO X.x > Machine Launch. With it, you can program
multiple CMM environments from a single seat of CAMIO. Whether offline or online - each configuration
has a unique directory structure allowing full management of individual CMM environments. It is essential
to use Machine Launch for collision detection 186 and axis violation 190 functionality when programming
offline.
Default Machine Launch configuration:
The "default.machine" file is located in C:\LK\Machines\Demo\CMMCFG and it is a plain text file that
can be edited in NotePad. It contains information about the configuration of the CMM and must include
the paths to your machine CAD files. The keywords are shown in red here for clarity:
[Machine Model]
View=C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\BASE DISPLAY.SAT
Collision =C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\BASE COLLISION.SAT
[Quill Model]
View=C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\Quill-Evolution.sat
1020
Collision =C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\Quill collision.sat

[Bridge Model]
View=C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\BRIDGE ASSEMBLY DISPLAY.
SAT
Collision =C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\INSIDE & OUTSIDE LEG
COLLISION.SAT
[Quill Cover Model]
View=C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\GLASS_FIBRE_COVERS.SAB
[Furniture Models]
Count=0
[Rotary Table Top Model]
Origin=900.328750,-3212.139150,-1787.350800
Diameter=800.000000
Height=50.000000
[Rotary Table Base Model]
Offset=0.000000,0.000000,-50.000000
View=C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineCAD\TABLE_BASE.sat
Note for each of the parts (except covers) there can be a separate collision model to the display model.
Also note that rotary table information can be included and that the table itself is generated
automatically from the height and diameter. The base can be loaded from a CAD model and the position
on the granite can be adjusted using Rotary Table Locate and written back to the machine file.
How to add a new machine to Machine Launch:
1. Create a new folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>
2. Create a 300 x 200 pixel bitmap that can be used as the picture that is shown in the picture window
and save it as C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MachineView.bmp.
3. Create a new folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\Camio - Insert your Inspect.cfg file.
4. Create the folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\CmmCfg - Insert the default.machine and
Lkcmmdrv.cfg files for your machine. The default.machine file can be copied from the Demo folder and
edited as required.
5. Create a new folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\Errc - Insert your error correction files.
6. Create a new folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\TCOMP - Insert your temperature
compensation files.
7. Create a new folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\MetrisData - Insert your laser probe calibration
files.
8. Create the folder C:\LK\Machines\<machine name>\CmmCfg\MachineCAD and into it insert the
CAD files that represent your machine.
Navigation
From the Windows Start > All Programs > CAMIO menu, select Machine Launch
See Also:
Machine Launch
Machine Simulation
56
141
63
65
1021
NIKON METROLOGY NV
NIKON CORPORATION
Geldenaaksebaan 329
b-3001 Leuven, belgium
phone: +32 16 74 01 00 fax: +32 16 74 01 03
info@nikonmetrology.com
Shin-Yurakucho Bldg., 12-1, Yurakucho 1-chome

Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-8331 Japan
phone: +81 3 3773 9026 fax: +81 3 3773 9062
www.nikon-instruments.jp/eng/
NIKON METROLOGY EUROPE NV

tel. +32 16 74 01 01
sales_europe@nikonmetrology.com
NIKON METROLOGY GMBH
tel. +49 6023 91733-0
sales_germany@nikonmetrology.com
NIKON METROLOGY SARL
NIKON METROLOGY, INC.

tel. +1 810 2204360
sales_us@nikonmetrology.com
us.nikonmetrology.com
www.nikoninstruments.com
NIKON METROLOGY UK LTD.
tel. +44 1332 811349
sales_uk@nikonmetrology.com
tel. +33 1 60 86 09 76
sales_france@nikonmetrology.com
More offices and resellers at www.nikonmetrology.com
NIKON INSTRUMENTS (SHANGHAI) CO. LTD.

tel. +86 21 5836 0050
tel. +86 10 5869 2255 (Beijing office)
tel. +86 20 3882 0550 (Guangzhou office)
NIKON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD.
tel. +65 6559 3618
NIKON MALAYSIA SDN. BHD.
tel. +60 3 7809 3609
NIKON INSTRUMENTS KOREA CO. LTD.
tel. +82 2 2186 8400

YDS0081J1 CAMIO 7 Reference Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

YDS0081J1 CAMIO 7 Reference Manual PDF

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

CAMIO 7 Reference Manual

3 Useful Background Information

5 Part Program Window

CAMIO7 Reference Manual

Grid Window .......................................................................................................................................................... 76

Teach Path View

Menus and Toolbars

Main Toolbar.......................................................................................................................................................... 135

7 CAMIO Event Viewer

8 Filtering Events by Date

9 Filtering Events by Source

10 Filtering Events by Message

11 Sorting Events by Date

12 Clearing Out (Deleting) the Events Log

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited

CAMIO7 Reference Manual

13 Exporting the Events Log

14 The CMM Handbox

15 Quick Reference - with CAMIO

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited

20 Editing a Part Program

The DMIS Program

21 Using Buffer Points

22 Adding a Prompt to a Part Program

23 Creating and Calling Macros

24 Mirroring a Part Program

Defining the ..........................................................................................................................................................

25 Override Log On Dialog Box

26 Override Log Off Dialog Box

28 Opening and Saving CAD Files

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited

CAMIO7 Reference Manual

29 Saving CAD Files - Common Options

30 Saving a HOOPS Stream File

31 Saving an ACIS File

32 Saving a CATIA v4 File

33 Saving a CATIA v5 File

34 Saving an IGES File

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited

35 Saving a Parasolid File

36 Saving a VDA File

37 Saving a STEP File

39 Inspecting Features - Probe Check

40 Hole Search (Search for Feature)

42 Points in Box Dialog Box

Scan Option ..........................................................................................................................................................

CAMIO7 Reference Manual

50 Measuring a Point Feature with Zero Points

51 Inspecting a Surface with a Laser Scanner

CAMIO7 2011 Nikon Metrology UK Limited

52 Inspecting a Gap and Flush Feature

53 Inspecting a Hexagonal Slot

54 Inspecting a Key Slot

56 Inspecting a Welded Nut

57 Select Geometry Dialog Box

58 Sensor Options - Inspecting a Feature

59 Scan Options - Inspecting a Feature

60 Add Scans Option - Inspecting Features

61 Touch Options - Inspecting a Feature

62 Circles Measurement Dialog Box

63 Lines Measurement Dialog Box

64 Touch Measurement Dialog Box